THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

(Lyceum or Naturat History, 1817-1876.)

OFFIcERS, 1908.

President — CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Station.

V ice-Presidents — A. W. GRABAU, FRANK M. CHAPMAN,

D. W. Herine, ApoLtF MEYER.

Recording Secretary — EpmMuND Otis Hovey, American Museum.

Corresponding Secretary — HENRY E. Crampton, Columbia University.

Treasurer — EMERSON McMItutn, 40 Wall Street.

Inbrarian — RatpxH W. Tower, American Museum.

Editor —Epmunp Otis Hovey, American Museum.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Chairman — A. W. Grapau, Columbia University.

Secretary —CHARLES P. BERKEY, Columbia University.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

Chairman — Frank M. Cuapman, American Museum.

Secretary — R. W. Miner, American Museum.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

Chairman — D. W. Herine, New York University.

Secretary — WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

Chairman — ApotF Meyer, Ward’s Island.

Secretary — R. S. WoopwortH, Columbia University.

Title-page

Officers

Contents .

LIBRARY

Dates of Babieneion e Prather! CHS

List of Illustrations aah Tet onan

Errata

Note regarding te anette Mastadon -

(Part I) Arr. 1.

(Part IT)

Art. 2.

ArT. 3.

Art. 4,

Art. 5.

ART. 6.

Art. 7.

Art. 8.

NEW YORK

BOTANICAL

GARDEN.

CONTENTS OF VOLUME XVIII.

PAGE

iii

The Bicentenary of he Birth of Carolus inane,

By Epmunp Otis Hovey. (Plates I-IV) 1

Linneus as a Zodlogist. By J. A. ALLEN 9

Linnzus as an Intermediary between Ancient and

Modern Zoélogy; His Views on the Class Mam-

malia. By W. K. Grecory . ‘ 21

Linnzus and American Botany. By Par Ves

RYDBERG : 32

Address by the eeeiden oF the Netiente N. L.

BRITTON . 40

Address by the erendent of the Aeneas Reanio

and Historie Preservation Society, GreorcE F.

Kunz bWite 42

Address by the Breadene ee ‘the Wnned: redial

Societies of New York, Emit F. Jounson 46

A Sketch of the Life of Carl von Linné. By Ep-

warp L. Morris . 47

Linneus and American accel store By

Freperic A. Lucas . oi MUR bal Nk ebee

Greetings from Societies and iavtese irate 57

New Species and Genera of the Lepidopterous F faale

Noctuide for 1907. Part II. By Joun B. SmitrH' 91

On Determination of Mineral Constitution through

Recasting of Analyses. By ALExis A. JULIEN 129

The Chester, New York, Mastodon. By E. O. Hovey.

(Plate V) 147

The Production of Chandi in the ipeumfches: the Se

Robin and the Toadfish. By R. W. Tower.

(Plates VI-VIII) . 149

The North American Species of the Goan Tpomea,

By Homer Do.iver House 181

Records of Meetings, 1906. By W. M. (iam 265

Records of Meetings, 1907. By Epmunp Oris Hovey 313

Membership Lists, 31 December, 1907 . . . 371

(Part III) Arr. 9. An Investigation of the Figure of the a aad of Bae

sible Variations in its Sizeand Shape. By CHARLES

GANG POOR) ~ ves ami he ree iw fal lel tet ye!) ehh oOO

ili

Art. 10. Outline of the Geology of Long Island, N. Y. By

WO. CROsB yea 00%, 425

Art. 11. Charles Darwin and he Mutation Theory ‘By

Cuarutes F.Cox . . 431

Art. 12. Records of Meetings, 1908. fey EpMonp arr

Hovey .. PPM ae 5.2"

The Drea nication a the Wendeena a ior ele RU emma

The’ Original Charter’) creel he he tee

Orderiof: Court’) \siiveueskare Gs Nonipanontie dion emo es

The Amended Charter Woh ey sous e selene) era mene

Constitution: 22). ah ence cb Ric Mae nce eal ane

By-Laws. . . BAUR ROS MUM te

Membership Lists, 31 December, 1908 . aNveiy sy 1 neat stad bata a RN eo

fh aXo =>: SN OA DE ON CM MN Yi ye eS UIALUAM a Ni) Haan a ES es 9 NRSC

DATES OF PUBLICATION OF AUTHORS’ SEPARATES.

The edition of authors’ separates for Part I was 50 copies, 47 of which were

given to the author; beginning with Part II of this volume, the regular edition has

been 75 copies, 50 of which have been given to the author.

(Part % I) Art. 1, pp. 9-19, 29 January, 1908.

pp. 21-31, 29 January, 1908.

pp. 42-45, 29 January, 1908.

(Part II) Art. 2,22 January, 1908.

Art. 3, 4 April, 1908.

Art. 4, 15 April, 1908.

Art. 5, 23 April, 1908.

Art. 6, 11 May, 1908.

(Part III) Art. 9,29 August, 1908.

Art. 10, 16 December,1908.

Art. 11, 10 February, 1909.

Art. 12, pp. 511-536, 16 June, 1909.

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.

Plates.

I.— The Linnzus Bridge, Bronx Park, New York City.

IIJ.— Linneus at the age of thirty, in Lapland dress.

Linneus at the age of forty.

I1I.— Hammarby, the country home of Linnzus near Upsala, Sweden.

Tablet placed on the Linnzeus Bridge by the New York Academy of Sciences.

IV.— The Linnzus Bridge and Tablet.

V.— Facsimile of Townsend Mss. describing the Chester Mastodon.

VI.— Swim-bladder of Micropogon undulatus.

Swim-bladder of Cynoscion nebulosum.

VII.— Swim-bladder of Bairdella chrysura.

Swim-bladder of Leiostomus xanthurus.

VIII.— Kymograph Records of Sound-producing Swim-bladders (8 figures).

Text Figures.

PAGE

BE Win-HOWer; Prine DOTCALES Is Vena | ile) Pat) va) a: Kshs cee isl dla ive aed lie (vs Be

Swim-bladder of Cynoscion regalis . . . SR VaR ASE PTOI RIP oan Perk, MEY bi 30

Swim-bladder of Micropogon undulatus after Bareneen gt ehh oY Ae tite a Vote Gy win es

emam-bladden Of Pienolirs CAnOlatis a ya) Meloni) sec waded decile oss asl ie a. Se nS

Ryn Ding der OM O paarinatagn wom ai stools hajcdlc Mhe, Vile Phe Ses May ie es) wok ee tel, SG

Bwiun-bladder:ofiOpsantus tain ae uve bal Wa, the Key, von vis) lyelntad Vella eines kay kate A

ERRATA.

Page 40, line 2.— Instead of “Sachalin,” read ‘‘Saghalin.”

Page 68, line 5.— Instead of “jeter”, read “‘lever.”’

Page 147, line 29.— Instead of ‘‘ Mitchell,” read “‘ Mitchill.”’

Page 281, line 31.— Instead of “‘eocystides,” read “‘ eocystites.”’

Page 316, line 15.— Instead of “ Northrup’, read ‘“ Northup.”

Page 324, line 29.— Instead of ‘“‘cen?’’, read ‘‘em?.”’

Pages 329 and 330.— Instead of “‘ Bufo aqua’’, read “ Bufo agua.”

Page 339, line 19.— Instead of “F. W. Pedersen’, read ‘‘F. M. Pedersen.”’

Page 341, line 18.— Instead of “‘Size’’, read “ Pfizer.”

NOTE REGARDING THE CHESTER MASTODON :

THE attention of the Editor has been called to the account of the finding,

exhumation and character of the remains of the Chester, N. Y., mastodon !

which was printed in The American Monthly Magazine and Critical Review,

Vol. I, pp. 195, 196, New York, July, 1817. This publication is so rare

that the account is reprinted here.

LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY.

Sitting of June 2.

Dr. Mitchill, the president of the Lyceum, and Dr. Townsend, the committee

appointed, by a resolve of the society, to visit and explore the tract between the

Highlands and the Catskill Mountains, made a report in part; from which report the

following is an extract:

“Tt was the good fortune of the commissioners to find another skeleton of that

huge creature the Elephas Mastodon, which though apparently extinct, was formerly

an inhabitant of New-York. This happened on the 27th and 29th of May, upon the

farm of Mr. Yelverton, near Chester, a village in the town of Goshen. The soil is a

black peat or turf, sufficiently inflammable to be employed for fuel. Its surface is

overgrown with grass, forming a luxuriant meadow for grazing.— The herbage and

the bottom in which it grows, have a near resemblance to the turf meadow of Newton,

in Queen’s County, Long Island. The sward and turf covering the skeleton are about

1Noted with facsimile reproduction of Dr. Townsend’s drawing in this Volume, p. 147,

PLOW:

four feet deep. Beneath these is a stratum of coarse vegetable stems and films,

resembling chopped straw or drift stuff, along the sea-shore, about a foot and a half

thick; and under this is a stratum of fine bluish and soft clay. Specimens of these

are brought away, and are herewith presented. The bones raised were parts of a

lower jaw with its teeth, of a scapula, of a humerus, of an ulna and radius, of the

bones of the feet, of ribs, and of vertebrae. The upper maxillary bone was found,

with its grinders and tusks, in their natural situation. Dr. Townsend and Dr.

Seely, who had from the beginning aided with their own hands the acquisition of these

curious remains, now laboured with the greatest assiduity in the pit to uncover com-

pletely, and elevate connectedly, these important parts of the animal. The unparal-

leled association of bones, teeth, and ivory prongs, were, after much exertion, de-

nuded of their mud and developed to view. They lay upside down, or, in other

words, their natural position was inverted, as if the creature had died in a supine

posture. The palate bones were perfectly in sight, with the huge molares on each

side. From the point forward where the palate joins the upper maxillary bone in

other animals, two ivory tusks proceeded. These were not inserted in sockets;

at least no such holes or sockets could be found; but they seemed to be formed by a

gradual change of bone to ivory, or of osseous to eburneous matter. In this respect

the conversion resembled the jaw and tooth of the Saurian reptile of Nevesink, al-

ready in the cabinet of the Professor of Natural History; in which organization the

jaw is converted gradually to tooth. Their direction was forward, with a bold curva-

ture outward and upward. Between the tusks could be seen and felt the nasal proc-

esses to which the proboscis had formerly been attached. They were short and

ungular. On attempting to loosen the left tusk from its clayey bed, it broke across,

though touched in the most delicate manner. Though approached with the gentlest

touch, it flaked off in considerable portions, and cracked through in several other

places. Finding it wholly impossible to preserve its entirety, recourse was had to

measuring the relics as they lay, and of making drawings from them as accurately as

possible. And as the fragments of the tusk were handed up, Dr. Mitchill measured

them by a rule, and found their amount, reckoning within bounds, to be eight feet

and nine inches; or taking into calculation the space of connexion with the jaw as

being three inches, or perhaps more, the length of the tusk was nine feet, or upwards,

of solid ivory.*

The circumference at the base was two feet and two inches, making a diameter

of eight inches and two-thirds! The taper was easy, gradual, and smooth, like the

tusks of other elephants. Dr. Townsend made a sketch of the parts in situ, before

they were removed; by which it will be seen how the grinders are situated in relation

to the tusks, and how tusks are to be considered as holding a middle place, in their

anatomical structure and use, between teeth and horns. The various parts of the

animal which were disinterred, and the drawings and illustrations, are herewith

submitted to the society.

“ Although the fragile and friable nature of these bones might render it impossible

ever to connect them into a complete skeleton, the commissioners state it as a matter

of the highest probability, that at the aforesaid place, the remainder of a mammoth,

as huge perhaps as ever walked the earth, reposes in the swamp, not more than

fifty-four miles from the site of this institution.— He has already heard the resusci-

tating voice of the Lyceum.”

* The tusks, though solid, are changed in their nature. Professor MacNeven, honorary

member of the Lyceum, mentioned, in the society, that he had found their substance to be

converted into carbonate of lime.

VOL. XVIII PART |

ANNALS

OF THE

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

EDITOR

Edmund Otis Hovey

NEW YORK

PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY

1908

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

OrFicers, 1908.

President — CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Station.

Recording Secretary — E. O. Hovey, American Museum.

Corresponding Secretary — H. E. Crampton, Barnard College.

Treasurer — EMERSON McMiu1n, 40 Wall St.

Inbrarian — RateH W. Tower, American Museum.

Editor — Epmunp Otis Hovey, American Museum.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Chairman — A. W. GraBau, Columbia University.

Secretary — C. P. Berxey, Columbia University.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

Chairman — Frank M. CHapman, American Museum.

Secretary — Roy W. Miner, American Museum.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

Chairman — D. W. Herine, New York University.

Secretary — WiLLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

Chairman — ApotF Meyer, Ward’s Island.

Secretary — R. S. WoopwortH, Columbia University.

Sessions of 1908.

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8:15 o’clock from Octo-

ber to May, inclusive, in the American Museum of Natural History, 77th

Street and Central Park, West.

Annals N. ¥. Acad. Sci., Vol. KVIEI, Part I, January, 1908.

"LOBL ‘€z ABI poxBotpoc]

‘

‘ALIO MUOA MUN ‘“MUVd XNOUA AOCIUA SA

eee ame

Sf] mov iy) TACK ALON IOG “aVOY ‘X'N SIVNNY

Awnats N.Y. Acap. Scr., Vol. XVIII, No. 1, Part I, pp. 1-90. January, 1908.]

THE BICENTENARY OF THE BIRTH OF

CAROLUS LINNAUS. LIBRARY

NEW YORK

BOTANICA!

By Epmunp Otis Hovey, une

Recording Secretary.

On May 23, 1907, the New York Academy of Sciences, in common with

many other scientific societies and institutions throughout the world cele-

brated the two hundredth anniversary of the great Swedish naturalist

Carl von Linné, who is better known perhaps by his Latin name Linneeus.

In preparation for the event, the following invitation was sent out to

sister societies throughout the world and to the Honorary Members of

the Academy.

The New York Academy of Sciences

will celebrate on May 23, 1907, the

Two Hundredth Anniversary of the Birth of Carl von Linné.

At this time, commemorative exercises will be held at

The American Museum of Natural History, The New York Zodlogical Park,

The New York Botanical Garden, The New York Aquarium,

The Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences.

A beautiful bridge crossing the Bronx River between the Botanical Garden and

the Zodlogical Park will be dedicated to the distinguished Swedish naturalist.

(The Royal Swedish Academy of Sciences)

is invited to take part in this celebration by contributing an official document,

appreciative of the works of Linné, to be read before the members of the New

York Academy of Sciences and assembled guests.

N. L. Britton,

President.

BE. O. Hovey,

Secretary.

The invitation was accompanied by an illustration of the Linnzus Bridge,

to which reference was made.

To all sister societies in the United States, Canada and Mexico, the fol-

Sewing additional invitation was sent.

FEB 15 19

2 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

(The National Academy of Sciences)

is cordially invited by the

New York Academy of Sciences

to participate in its exercises

commemorative of the two hundredth anniversary

of the birth of the Swedish naturalist

Carl von Linné

through an authorized representative

as well as by the official document asked for

in the accompanying invitation

An early reply is desired

On the day of the anniversary the committee charged by the Council

with making arrangements for the celebration carried out the following

program.

PROGRAM OF EXERCISES

MORNING

9: 00-12: 00.— At the American Museum of Natural History

Exhibition of American Animals known to Linnzeus

In charge of F. M. Coapman, W. M. Wuereter, W. BEUTENMUELLER

Exhibition of Shells, Minerals and Rocks known to Linnzeus

In charge of L. P. Graracap, E. O. Hovey

10: 30.— Reading of letters from other Societies by the Secretary of the Academy

11: 15.— Address by J. A. ALLEN on “ Linnzeus and American Zodlogy”’

AFTERNOON

2:00-4:00.— At the New York Botanical Garden, Museum Building, Bronx Park

Exhibition of American Plants known to Linnzus

In charge of L. M. UNpERWoop, J. K. Smauu, P. A. RypBere, M. A. Howe,

G. V. Nasu

Exhibition of the Botanical Writings of Linnzeus and of Portraits of Linnzeus

In charge of C. B. Roxsinson, J. H. BARNHART

3:10.— Address by P. A. RypBrEre on “ Linnzus and American Botany”

3:40.— Exhibition of selected lantern slides of Flowers of North American

Plants known to Linnzeus. In charge of H. H. Russy

4: 00-4: 30.— Walk South from Museum Building through the Grounds of the Garden

to the Linnzus Bridge

W. A. Murritu will point out characteristic American trees known to Linnzeus

4:30.— At the Bridge over the Bronx River on Pelham Parkway

UNVEILING oF A Bronze Taster COMMEMORATING LINNZUS

Address by the President of the Academy, and placing of documents in the tablet

Singing by the American Union or SwepisH Sincers: “Hear us, Svea”

— Wennerberg

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 3

Acceptance of the tablet on behalf of the City of New York by the Hon. Joseru

I. Berry, Commissioner of Parks of the Borough of the Bronx

Acceptance of the key of the tablet by the New York Historical Society for safe

keeping until May 23, 1957

Singing by the Amertcan Union oF Swepisu Sincers: “Battle Hymn” —

Lindblad

Address by G. F. Kunz, President of the American Scenic and Historic Preserva-

tion Society

Address by E. F. Jonnson, President of the United Swedish Societies of New

York

Singing by the American Union or SwepisH Singers: “Banner Song”—

Wennerberg

5: 15-6:30.— At the New York Zodlogical Park

Examination of the Collections with special reference to Animals known to

Linnzus

In charge of W. T. Hornapay, C. W. Brzse, R. L. Dirmars, W. Rem

Bair

EVENING

8:00.— At the Museum of the Brooklyn Institute, Eastern Parkway

Opening address by F. A. Lucas

Address by E. L. Morris on the “Life of Linnzus”

Musical number by the Glee Club of the Unrrep SwepisuH Socterizs

Address by F. A. Lucas on “ Linnzus and American Natural History”

Musical numbers by the Glee Club of the Unrrep SwepisH Socirtizs

Exhibition by means of lantern slides of ‘‘Plants and Animals known to Lin-

nus.” In charge of Dr. A. J. Grout, F. A. Lucas

8: 30-10: 30.— At the New York Aquarium, Battery Park

(Admittance by invitation only)

Reception given by the New York Zodlogical Society to the New York Academy

of Sciences and Guests

Demonstrations of features of Marine Life known to Linnzeus

Commemoration of the centennial of the Aquarium building

First view of the collections of the Aquarium by night. Music

NATHANIEL L. Brirron FrepeEriIc A. Lucas

Hermon C, Bumpus CuarLes H. TowNnsenD

Wiiiam T. Hornapay Wiii1am Morton WHEELER

Committee

Epmunp Otis Hovey, Secretary

American Museum Natural History

{ ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The carrying out of the plans of the Committee was made possible

through a special fund of about $1000, the subscribers to which were

Adams, Edward D.

Adler, I.

Amend, B. G.

Armstrong, 8. T.

Atkins, George F.

Avery, Samuel P.

Barron, George D.

Baskerville, Charles

Beck, F. C. T.

Beckhard, Martin

Berthoud, Edward 8.

Beuren, F. T. van

Bird, Henry

Bristol, John I. D.

Brown, Edwin H.

Bumpus, H. C.

Bunting, Martha

Burgess, E. 8.

Call, A. Ellsworth

Cassabeer, H. A., Jr.

Chamberlain, Leander T.

Chandler, C. F.

Chubb, 8. H.

Cline, Miss May

Cohn, J. M.

Corning, C. R.

Cox, C. F.

Davenport, Mrs. Elizabeth B.

Davidson, Miss Mary E. S.

Davies, J. Clarence

Dean, Bashford

Demorest, W. C.

Dodge, C. H.

Donald, James M.

Douglas, James

Draper, Mrs. Henry

Dunham, E. K.

Dwight, Jonathan, Jr.

Dwight, Melatiah E.

Foot, Miss Katharine

Ford, James B.

Frissell, A. S.

Gooch, F. C.

Greenwood, Isaac J.

Haupt, Louis

Herrman, Mrs. Esther

Hess, Selmar

Holden, E. R.

Hooker, Miss Henrietta EK.

Hornaday, William T.

Huntington, Archer M.

Hussakof, L.

Jesup, Morris K.

Kaufman, Miss Pauline

Kemp, James F.

Kuntz, C.

Kunz, George F.

Lagerberg, J. de

Langeloth, I.

Langmann, G.

Levy, Miss Daisy

Low, Seth

Lueas, F. A.

Matthew, G. F.

McKim, H.

McMillin, Emerson

McNeil, C. R.

New York Academy of Sciences

Nichols, John Treadwell

Oettinger, P. J.

Osborn, H. F.

Osborn, W. C.

Osburn, Raymond C.

Owens, William W.

Parsons, Mrs. Edwin

Parsons, John E.

Pederson, Frederick M.

Perkins, W. H.

Perry, C. J.

Phipps, Henry

Pinchot, Gifford

Post, Abram 8.

Ramsperger, G.

Riker, Samuel

Robb, J. Hampton

Robinson, Miss Winifred J.

Rydberg, P. A.

Seabury, George J.

Seitz, Charles E.

Sellew, T. G.

Shannon, William Purdy

Smith, Eugene

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS a

Stetson, Francis Lynde White, I. C.

Stolpe, Mauritz Wicke, William

Thorburn & Co., J. M. Williams, R. 8S.

Townsend, C. H. Wilson, Edward B.

Tuckerman, Alfred Wood, Miss Cynthia A.

Watson, J. H. Woodward, Robert S.

Yatsu, Naohidé

The Academy also acknowledges the co-operation of the American

Museum of Natural History, the New York Botanical Garden, the New

York ZoGélogical Society, the Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and

Sciences, the American Union of Swedish Singers and the Glee Club of the

United Swedish Societies, in making the celebration dignified and successful.

After the inspection of the special exhibits in the American Museum, the

literary exercises began with the reception by President Britton of the official

delegates of societies as follows, each presenting the greeting of his society.

Royal Swedish Horticultural Society.................... J. de Lagerberg

Society of Friends of Natural Sciences, Ekaterinburg,

{REISS Er alt Cie A Cee Teh a Eh ond OF ae See eee George F. Kunz

J. J. Stevenson

Sociedad Cientifica “Antonio Alzate,”’ Mexico......... 4 C. T. Stevens

(J. F. Kemp

Boston Society of Natural History...................... J. A. Allen

Museum of Comparative Zodlogy.................-..--. William Brewster

Natural History Society of West Newbury, Mass......... William Merrill

MeEriCan) OUINAl OF MCIENCE: 25) Hee 9i.).c es ole tek ast Pa. Herbert E. Gregory

Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences.............. Alexander W. Evans

finan Society of New-York )5..)05 0...26 oe ceese ies es Jonathan Dwight,Jr.

News ork Botanical Gardem (514)... oc: scot eos: ba he Addison Brown

Nema V ork Zoolopical SOCIEbY:.- 18s sce oe va habe welts ln ee H. F. Osborn

American Museum of Natural History...................G@. H. Sherwood

Moreyemouamcal Clips. 12.05. c2 Sas 2 a sae al 4 ete es Sahahars H. H. Rusby

New «vor Hntomolopical Society... 226.6.) + ses aa E. B. Southwick

New) York Microscopical Sotiety. 0.0 6.200:/0- 2 ee eee J. L. Zabriskie

Newer ome pelistotieal Society)... 6 lid yt cak oe be dees oe Samuel V. Hoffman

American Institute of the City of New York............. Robert Rutter

Butialo Society of Natural Sciences. ..............2-.54- T. G. Smith

Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences............... { As J. Grout

| F. A. Lucas

Staten Island Association of Arts and Sciences........... Arthur Hollick

Maryland ‘Academy: of Sciences) 2.4455) 2 oes sels cle eel a C. C. Plitt

American’ Philosophical Society) :< 50s... 6 eaPa es. dane J. W. Harshberger

American Entomological Society....................55- J. W. Harshberger

National Academy of Sciences... .......0...52.042..2 H. F.. Osborn

Biological Society of Washington....................... Edward L. Morris

6 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Obio Academy of Se1ences: i...) nis ose eysnes She ae Raymond C. Osborn

Indians Academy of Sciences: 5.)....2. 5.02.2 2%% Aes eee Guy West Wilson

Colorade Scientific Socketyot oi... /:6.. Skee sem de eal 4

Telegraphic greetings were read from

The Royal Swedish Academy of Sciences, Stockholm

The Royal University, Upsala

The Royal Botanic Gardens, Edinburgh

The Royal Dublin Society, Dublin

The Gothenburg Society of Science, Gothenburg

The Imperial Academy of Sciences, St. Petersburg

The Uralian Natural History Society, Ekaterinburg

The Royal Linnezan Academy, Rome

The Botanical Garden, Rio de Janeiro

After the reading of these greetings, the Secretary submitted the fol-

lowing complete list of the societies, other organizations and individuals

sending greetings.

Foreign Societies

The Linnzan Society, London

The British Association for the Advancement of Science, London

The Society of Arts, London

The Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society, Falmouth

The Cambridge Philosophical Society, Cambridge

The North of England Institute of Mining and Mechanical Engineers, Newcastle-

upon-Tyne

The Royal Scottish Geographical Society, Edinburgh

The Royal Botanic Garden, Edinburgh

The Royal Philosophical Society of Glasgow, Glasgow

The Royal Dublin Society, Dublin

Den Norske Gradmaalingskommission, Kristiania

The Royal Swedish Academy of Sciences, Stockholm

The Royal Swedish Horticultural Society, Stockholm (Delegate)

The Gothenburg Society of Sciences, Gothenburg

The Royal University of Upsala, Upsala

The University of Lund, Lund

The Geological Commission of Finland, Helsingfors

The Imperial Academy of Science, St. Petersburg

The Uralian Natural History Society, Ekaterinburg (Delegate)

Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam, Amsterdam

Senaat der Rijks Universiteit te Leiden, Leiden

K6niglich Preussische Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin

Berliner Entomologische Verein, Berlin

BICENTENARY OF LINNAZUS é

Kommission zur wissenschafllichen Untersuchung der deutschen Meere, Kiel

Kaiserliche Leopoldinisch-Carolinische deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher,

Halle, A.S.

Verein fiir vaterlindische Naturkunde in Wiirttemberg, Stuttgart

Thurgauische Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Frauenfeld

Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaften, Wien

Regia Societas Scientiarum Bohemica, Prague

The Royal Hungarian Society of Natural Sciences, Budapest

The Transylvanian Museum Society, Kolszvar

La Société de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle de Genéve, Suisse

L’Akademie de Médecine, Paris

Société Linneénne de Normandie, Caen

Société des Amis des Sciences de Rouen, Rouen

Société Géologique du Nord, Lille

Université de Lyon, Lyons

La Société des Sciences de Nancy, Nancy

Société d’Histoire Naturelle de Toulouse, Toulouse

Real Academia de Ciencias Exactas, Fisicas y Naturales, Madrid

Specula Vaticana, Rome

The Royal Linnzan Academy, Rome

The Australian Museum, Sydney

Koninklijke Natuur Kundige Vereeniging in “‘ Nederlandsch—Indie,” Weltevreden

(Batavia)

Royal Society of Canada, Ottawa

Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club, Ottawa

Entomological Society of Ontario, Toronto

Sociedad Cientifica “‘ Antonio Alzate,”” Mexico

The Botanical Garden, Rio de Janeiro

Museu Nacional do Rio de Janeiro

Honorary Members

Sir Archibald Geikie, London Professor Charles Barrois, Lille

Sir James Dewar, London Prof. Dr. F. Leydig, Rothenburg

Dr. Hans Reusch, Kristiania Professor Edward S. Dana, New Haven

Professor Hugo de Vries, Amsterdam Dr. H. R. Storer, Newport

Professor A. A. W. Hubrecht, Utrecht Professor A. E. Brown

Prof. Dr. Karl von den Steinen, Berlin Professor George Macloskie, Princeton

Prof. Dr. Wilhelm Pfeffer, Leipzig Professor Edward L. Berthoud, Boulder,

Prof. Dr. H. Rosenbusch, Heidelberg Colorado

Domestic Societies

Portland Society of Natural History, Portland, Me.

Natural History Club of West Newbury, West Newbury, Mass.

Boston Society of Natural History, Boston, Mass. (Delegate)

Boston Scientific Society, Boston, Mass. (Delegate)

Massachusetts Horticultural Society, Boston, Mass.

8 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Cambridge, Mass. (Delegate)

Newport Natural History Society, Newport, R.I.

American Journal of Science, New Haven, Conn. (Delegate)

Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences, New Haven, Conn. (Delegate)

New York State Museum, Albany, N.Y.

Linnean Society of New York, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

New York Botanical Garden, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

Torrey Botanical Club, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

New York Entomological Society, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

New York Microscopical Society, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

New York Historical Society, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

New York Zodlogical Society, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

American Museum of Natural History, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

New York Academy of Sciences, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

American Scenic and Historic Preservation Society, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

American Institute of the City of New York, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

Medico Legal Society of New York, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

United Swedish Societies of New York, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences, New York, N.Y. (Delegate)

Staten Island Association of Arts and Sciences, New Brighton, N.Y. (Delegate)

New York State Education Department, Science Division, Albany, N.Y. (Dele-

gate)

Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences, Buffalo, N.Y. (Delegate)

Stevens Institute of Technology, Hoboken, N.J.

Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pa. (Delegate)

American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, Pa. (Delegate)

American Entomological Society, Philadelphia, Pa. (Delegate)

Zodlogical Society of Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pa. (Delegate)

Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa. (Delegate)

Natural History Society of Delaware, Wilmington, Del.

Maryland Scientific Society, Baltimore, Md. (Delegate)

National Academy of Sciences, Washington, D.C. (Delegate)

Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. (Delegate)

Biological Society of Washington, Washington, D.C. (Delegate)

Library of Congress, Washington, D.C. (Delegate)

Philosophical Society of Washington, Washington, D.C. (Delegate)

Ohio Academy of Science, Gambier, O. (Delegate)

Indiana Academy of Sciences, Bloomington, Ind. (Delegate)

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters, Madison, Wis.

St. Paul Academy of Science, St. Paul, Minn.

Academy of Science of St. Louis, St. Louis, Mo.

Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Mo.

Colorado Scientific Society, Denver, Col. (Delegate)

The audience then listened to the following address,

‘SSaud GNVIdV'I

“ALYOW HO HOV AHL LY SOW NNIT NI ALYIHL dO HOV AHL LV SOWNNIT

‘ueplrry “URIOg “A'N ASoqinop ‘usplRy “uR1Og "A'N Asaqinoy

“T] WuvId TIAN LOK ‘IOG “dVOY “XA°N STIVNNY

BICENTENARY OF LINNHZUS 9

LINNAUS AS A ZOOLOGIST.

By J. A. Auten, Pu. D.

Carolus Linneus, later known as Carl von Linné, was born at Raé-

shult, in the province of Smaland, Sweden, May 13, O.S., 1707, and died

at Hammerby, near Upsala, on Jan. 10, 1778. His grandfather was a

farmer; his father, a clergyman. Young Linneus, the future naturalist,

was intended by his parents for the ministry, and his early education

was conducted with this end in view. At the age of ten he was sent to the

Latin School at Wexi6, but after seven years at this school he was found to

‘be so deficient in his scholastic studies that his parents thought of apprenti-

cing him to a shoemaker.

While at Wexi6, much of his time was devoted to the study of plants and

insects, an inclination apparently favored by his master, who was himself

greatly interested in botany. Fortunately young Linneus was rescued

from his threatened degradation by Dr. John Rothman, a physician of

Wexi6, who recognized his superior abilities, and appreciated his interest in

natural history. He took him into his own home, where for a year Linnzeus

continued his botanical studies, aided by the advice and library of his patron.

At the age of twenty he entered the University of Lund, where he soon found

himself without means of support, through the death of his patron and friend,

the kind-hearted physician of Wexié. Fortunately he soon won the friend-

ship of Dr. Kilian Stobeus, the professor of botany and medicine, who

made him a member of his family. Here he had access to books and to a

small museum of natural history, and found much leisure for exploring the

neighboring country and for collecting objects of natural history. At the

end of a year he went to Upsala, where, under Rudbeck and Roberg, he

advanced rapidly in medicine and botany. Here he won the friendship of

the renowned Olaf Celsius, whom he later characterized as the best botanist

in Sweden, and of Artedi, a fellow-student, who afterwards became the

founder of ichthyology. During his whole course at Upsala, it is said that

he did not hear a single public lecture on either anatomy, botany or chem-

istry, but he and Artedi, in good-tempered rivalry, were devoting their ener-

gies to natural history,— Linnzus to plants, birds and insects, and Artedi to

amphibia and fishes. Linnzeus here also began the preparation of his

epoch-making works on botany and of the first edition of his “Systema

Nature,”’ published a few years later in Holland.

In 1732, at the age of twenty-five years, he was commissioned by the

Upsala Academy of Sciences to make a tour of exploration in Lapland in the

10 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

interest of natural history. He left Upsala on the 12th of May, and after

an absence of five months returned to Upsala on the 10th of October.

This remarkable journey of 4600 miles was made partly on horseback,

partly by boat, and partly on foot; it extended northwestward across the

Norwegian Alps to the coast of Norway beyond the Arctic Circle; the

return journey was made by way of eastern Finland _ It was an undertaking

of great hardship and much danger, being performed alone, aided only by

local guides employed to conduct the way from one point to another. On

his return a report of his journey was presented to the Academy, but it

remained in manuscript until translated and published in English by Dr.

James Edward Smith, the first president of the Linnzean Society of London,

in 1811.1. The botanical results, however, were published separately by

Linneus himself, in 1737.

The following year was spent at Upsala, where he attempted to eke out

his scanty means of support by giving lectures on botany, mineralogy and

chemistry. This proved contrary to one of the statutes of the university,

to the effect that no one should give public lectures who had not obtained

his doctor’s degree, which statute was invoked against him by Rosen, the

successor to Rudbeck in the professorship of medicine and anatomy, who

was jealous of Linneus’s abilities and attainments. Deprived of this

financial resource, he took some of his pupils on excursions into the neighbor-

ing mountains, where he met the governor of the province of Dalecarlia,

who sent him to explore and report on certain copper mines in which he was

interested. While on this journey he gave lectures at Falun on mineralogy

and assaying. Here he made the acquaintance of Dr. Morzus (a learned

and wealthy physician of the district) and his two daughters, to one of whom

he became betrothed; the father, however, insisted on deferring the marriage

till Linnzeus had completed his professional studies and obtained his medical

degree. For this purpose, in the spring of 1735, he journeyed to Lubeck

and Hamburg, and later to Holland, where, in June, he received from

the University of Harderwijk the degree of doctor of medicine. At

Leyden he became acquainted with the leading men of science of that city,

which soon led to his engagement by Dr. George Cliffort, a wealthy burgo-

master of Amsterdam, to take charge, at a liberal salary, of his extensive

1 The herbaria, library (about 2500 volumes), manuscripts and ccrrespondence of Linnzus,

were offered by his widow and daughters, ‘‘by the advice of friends,’ to Sir Joseph Banks,

“‘for the sum of a thousand guineas.” Sir Joseph, not feeling inclined to the purchase, recom-

mended it to the consideration of his friend, Dr. (later Sir) J. E. Smith, by whom these treas-

ures were secured, and transferred to England (Turton, Life and Writings of Linneus, 1806,

p. [39]), and later passed into the possession of the Linngwan Society of London, founded in

1788 through the efforts of Dr. Smith, who was its first president. (See JarpiINE’s Natural-

ist’s Library, Vol. I, 1833, p. 58.)

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 11

museum and botanic garden. Later he was sent by him to England to

secure rare plants for his garden, with a letter of introduction from the great

Boerhaave to Sir Hans Sloane. He thus came in contact with the botanists

of London, where, however, his reception was not always cordial.

On his return to Holland he was offered the position of government

physician to the Dutch colony in Surinam, which he prudently declined,

and became an assistant to his friend Van Royen at the botanic garden in

Leyden. After a brief visit to Paris he returned to Stockholm in September,

1738, where he determined to settle as a physician. Notwithstanding his

fame abroad and his skill as a botanist, the pecuniary returns from his

profession were at first small, but they gradually increased; and, obtaining

some government patronage, his marriage to Miss Morzeus was celebrated

on June 26, 1739.

He remained only three years in Stockholm, during which period he

helped to found the Royal Academy of Sciences of that city, and served as

its first president. In 1741, under an order from the government, he made

a journey through Oland and Gothland. In the same year he was called

to the chair of botany at the University of Upsala, a position to which he

had long aspired, and which he filled for thirty years, when impaired health

compelled him to resign his official duties and to discontinue his literary

labors. The University of Upsala, through the fame of Linnzeus, became

widely renowned as a seat of learning, and attracted students from various

parts of Europe. During these years of almost uninterrupted activity, most

of Linnzus’s numerous botanical and other works were published, the

material for which reached him in ever-increasing abundance, not only from

distant parts of Europe, but from Siberia, China, India, Egypt, South Africa

and North and South America.

Academic honors were showered upon him by all the learned societies of

Europe; a gold medal was struck in his honor by the nobles of Sweden;

and in 1757 he was created by King Frederic a Knight of the Polar Star, and

admitted to hereditary nobility. Foreign courts made overtures for his

presence, and his own country neglected no opportunity to do him honor.

His death in 1778, after six years of invalidism resulting from an attack of

apoplexy, was recognized as a national calamity; the University of Upsala

went into mourning, and the King ordered a medal to be struck in his

memory.

Although cramped by poverty during the earlier part of his career, pros-

perity did not long withhold her smile. Not only were the nobles of his

country his patrons, but he was an especial favorite of both King Frederic

and his queen. Through various emoluments showered upon him, he was

able, later in life, to purchase a large estate and to construct for himself a

12 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

museum, wherein he gathered the largest collection of botanical treasures

that at that time had anywhere been brought together. He was happy in

his domestic relations, and lived to see his son succeed to his chair at the

University of Upsala.

Although Linneeus’s publications relate mainly to botany and medicine,

they cover the whole realm of natural history. His earliest contribution to

science is generally considered to be his “ Florula Lapponica,” the first part

of which appeared in the Transactions of the Swedish Academy in 1732.1

This was followed by the first edition of his “Systema Nature,” published

in Leyden in 1735. The “ Fundamenta Botanica” followed in 1736, and

was later enlarged and republished as the “ Philosophia Botanica,” in 1751.

During the next ten years various other botanical publications appeared in

rapid succession. His “ Fauna Suecica,” published in 1746, was his first

special work relating to zodlogy. It is also notable as being the first work

especially devoted to the entire fauna of any country. It was republished,

with many additions, in 1761. Other botanical and several medical works

followed during the next seven years, including his monumental ‘“ Species

Plantarum,” published in 1753. In the same year also appeared the “‘ Mu-

seum Tessianum,” consisting chiefly of descriptions of minerals and fossils,

the latter mainly shells and corals, and in 1754 the “Museum Adolphi

Friderici,” relating exclusively to exotic animals. This was a folio with

thirty-three plates, the most extensive and most elaborately illustrated of

all of Linneeus’s works. ‘Two important medical works appeared in 1760,

and his third zodlogical work, the ‘‘ Museum Ludoviciz Ulrice,” in 1764,

a thick octavo, to which was annexed the second part of the ‘‘ Museum

Adolphi Friderici.”

During these thirty years of marvelous scientific activity, Linnzeus also

contributed many papers to the Transactions of the Upsala and Stockholm

academies and to the ‘‘ Amoenitates Academici.” The latter, in ten octavo

volumes, consist of dissertations or academical theses, mostly by his students,

selected, edited and published by him, and thus may be regarded as of equal

authority with his own writings. Seven of these volumes were published

during his lifetime, and contain a number of his own minor papers.

This brief outline of Linneus’s life, his opportunities, and the published

results of his scientific labors, affords the basis for the consideration of

Linneeus as a zoélogist. As has been shown, he was primarily a botanist;

he was also a mineralogist, an entomologist and a conchologist, but only

incidentally a vertebrate zodlogist. In this field his interest was less strong,

his opportunities for research the most restricted. His zodlogical writings,

1 His Hortus Uplandicus is said to have appeared one year earlier. See List of the Works

of Linnezus, in Jardine’s Naturalist’s Library, Vol. I, 1833, p. xvii, footnote.

BICENTENARY OF LINNZAUS 13

exclusive of a few minor papers, are comprised in the “ Fauna Suecica,”’ the

“Museum Adolphi Friderici,” the ‘‘ Museum Ludovicie Ulric” and the

several editions of his ‘Systema Nature.” The first edition, appearing in

1735, was a folio of only 12 pages, consisting merely of a conspectus of his

Systema in tabular form. The second edition, published in 1740, was

an octavo of 40 pages, in which were added, for the animal kingdom, the

characters of the groups. The sixth, published in 1748, was greatly en-

larged, the zodlogical part alone consisting of 76 pages, illustrated with six

plates, or one for each of his six classes of animals. ‘The tenth, published

in 1758, was in two octavo volumes, of which the zodlogy formed the first

volume, consisting of 824 pages. The twelfth, and the last edition revised

by the author, was issued in three volumes, the first of which, containing

the zodlogy and comprising 1427 pages, appeared in 1766. Thus in

thirty-three years this work grew from a brochure of 12 pages to a work

of 2400 pages.

The first edition of the Systema was published when the author was

only twenty-eight years old, during his sojourn in Holland. He had never

previously been beyond the confines of southern Sweden, except on his

journey to Lapland and Finland in 1732, and he had had access to no large

collection of animals. ‘Thus his resources for such an important undertak-

ing were extremely limited, being restricted to his own considerable first-

hand knowledge of the fauna of Sweden, to the few specimens of exotic

animals he had been able to see in Lund, Upsala and Stockholm, and to the

scanty literature of the subject there available. When the second edition

appeared, in 1740, he had spent less than three years and a half in foreign

countries, mainly in Holland with single brief visits to London and Paris;

but his interests on these occasions were botanical and not zodlogical.

The sixth edition (the third revised by the author), published in 1748,

was in effect a synopsis of the fauna of Sweden, filled in, as regards the fauna

of the rest of the world, by compilations from his predecessors. Strange as

it may seem, outside of the tropical genera Sima, Bradypus, Dasypus,

Myrmecophaga and Manis, this edition enumerates only thirteen species of

mammals not found in Sweden. Only 140 are recorded for his whole class

Animalium quadrupedium, one-third of which are Scandinavian.

This analysis could be extended to other classes with practically similar

results. ‘The class Insecta, for example, includes only thirteen species that

are not also recorded in the “Fauna Suecica,” showing how limited was his

knowledge of the world’s fauna at 1748.

The tenth edition (the fourth revised by the author), published in 1758,

is the epoch-making work in the history of zodlogy, as in this the binomial

system of nomenclature for the whole animal kingdom is introduced for the

14 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

first time. The work is also greatly enlarged, and the classification greatly

improved, especially that of the mammals, which class is now for the first

time aptly designated Mammalia. The ordinal term Primates is substituted

for Anthropomorpha of the sixth and previous edition, the sloths (genus

Bradypus) are removed from it, the genus Lemur is added as a new genus,

and the bats are transferred to it from the Fere. A new order, Bruta, is

made up of his former third order Agrize (now suppressed) and of such other

extremely heterogeneous elements as the elephant, the manatee, sloths,

ant-eaters and the scaly ant-eaters. The order Fere consists of six properly

associated genera; the armadillos, insectivores and bats, formerly included

in it, being removed elsewhere. His fourth order, Bestiz, is a new group,

composed of the pigs, armadillos, opossums and insectivores. The fifth

order, Glires, is a natural group, except for the inclusion of the genus Rhino-

ceros, now most strangely placed with the squirrels and mice. His sixth

order, Pecora, is retained as in the previous editions, and is also a natural

group. The seventh, Bellue, is a new ordinal group, consisting of the

genera Equus and Hippopotamus, transferred from the here disrupted order

Jumenta of previous editions. The Cete, now removed by him from the

fishes, form his eighth and last order. This reconstruction of the ordinal

groups is a great improvement: five new genera are added, two old ones

eliminated, and the number of species is increased from 140 to 185. In

some of the other classes there are similar radical changes, but there is not

time to refer to them.

The twelfth, and the last edition revised by the author, published in 1766,

shows many improvements over the tenth. It is greatly increased in bulk

through the addition of many new genera and a large number of new species.

The classification is also judiciously modified at many points. Taking

again the class of mammals for illustration, the number of orders is reduced

from eight to seven, through the,suppression of the grossly unnatural order

Bestize and the transference of its genera to other associations, with, however,

the retrograde change of placing the insectivores and the genus Didelphis

among the Fere. The Glires is modified by the removal of the genus

Rhinoceros to the order Bellue and the addition to it of Nectilio, a genus

of bats. The order Bruta is the same incongruous association of elephants,

manatees, sloths and ant-eaters as in the tenth edition.

The orders of mammals as now left correspond in several instances

very nearly with those of our modern systems, notably the Primates, Glires,

Pecora and Cete. The Fere of the tenth edition corresponds to the modern

Carnivora, but in the twelfth he made the mistake of putting back into it

the marsupials and the insectivores. His order Belluz being essentially

the modern suborder Perissodactyla, his order Bruta is the only grossly

incongruous association of types.

‘

BICENTENARY OF LINNZUS 15

The only previous classification of mammals with which Linnzeus’s

need to be compared is Ray’s, published in 1693, whose system, taken as a

whole, is far more artificial than Linnzeus’s. Naturally there are some

+ striking coincidences of grouping, and in the characters employed by the

two authors. As to the latter, Ray so well covered the field that there was

little left for Linnzus to add, since during the interval between Ray and

Linnzeus not much was learned about the anatomy and relations of the

ordinal groups of mammals. Doubtless Linneus was influenced, in his

removal of the cetaceans from the fish to the mammal class, by the systems

of his contemporaries, Klein (1751) and Brisson (1756), in which respect

only are their systems better or less artificial than his. Inasmuch, however,

as Brisson divided mammals into eighteen orders instead of seven, he

escaped some of the grotesque combinations made by Linnzeus: on the

other hand, he gave undue emphasis to relatively unimportant differences.

Linnzus’s classification of birds 1s closely modeled upon that of Ray,

and his departures from it are seldom improvements. His lack of knowledge

of ornithology is strikingly apparent through his repeated association of

very unlike species in the same genus, as where a penguin is combined with

a tropic bird to form his genus Phaéthon, and another species of penguin

with an albatross to form his genus Diomedea. In the tenth edition he

recorded only about 550 species of birds; in the twelfth, this number was

raised to nearly a thousand, mainly on the basis of Brisson’s great work,

which appeared in 1760. The greater part were based on the writings of

previous authors; probably less than one-fourth of them being known to him

from specimens.

His class Amphibia contained four orders, of which the fourth consisted

of cartilaginous and other wholly unrelated fishes, and shows how slight

was his acquaintance with the lower classes of vertebrates. His first order,

Reptilia, includes such diverse animals as turtles, lizards, salamanders,

frogs and toads. The snakes formed his second order, Serpentes.

His arrangement of the fishes was originally based on that of Artedi,

whose ‘“ Ichthyologia” Linneus published while sojourning in Holland, in

1738, after Artedi’s untimely death by accidental drowning.

His class Insecta is nearly equivalent to the modern subphylum Arthro-

poda, as it includes the Arachnida and the Crustacea.

His class Vermes was the waste-basket of his system, including all the

forms of animal life that were neither vertebrates nor insects, which he dis-

tributed into five orders, some of them as heterogeneous in character as the

class itself. ‘The second order, Mollusca, comprised all sorts of soft-bodied

animals, mostly marine, as slugs, sea-anemones, ascidians, holothurians,

cuttle-fishes, star-fishes, sea-urchins and jelly-fishes. The animals now com-

monly known as Mollusca formed his third order, Testacea.

16 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

It is not, however, just to judge Linnzeus’s work by the standards of

to-day. The above comparison of the zodlogical part of the ‘‘ Systema

Nature” with our present knowledge of animals is not to be taken as a

disparagement: we merely note the progress of zodlogy during the last

century and a half of the world’s history. Linnzeus was a born systematist;

his energy and industry were enormous; his isolation promoted independence

and originality. He devised new classifications, and thoroughly systema-

tized not only the knowledge of his predecessors, but the vast increment

he himself added. He inspired his students with his own enthusiasm,

taught them his own advanced methods, and influenced a goodly number

of them to undertake natural history explorations in distant and zodlogically

unknown parts of the world.

In special lines of research he was far behind several of his contempo-

raries, notably Brisson, in respect to both mammals and birds. But he

nearly doubled the number of known forms of reptiles, amphibians and

fishes, and increased many fold the number of species of Ccelenterates, on

the basis of wholly new material gathered through his own efforts.

Disgusted with the needlessly detailed accounts and repetitions that

characterized the writings of most of his predecessors, he unfortunately

adopted the extreme of condensation, thereby adding greatly to the diffi-

culties of his successors in determining to just what forms the thousands of

new names he introduced really belonged. Many of his species, based on

the accounts given by previous authors, were also composite, often con-

taining very diverse elements. But this detracts little from his credit. As

one of his appreciative biographers has tersely put it, “He found biology a

chaos; he left it a cosmos.”

Linnzeus’s beneficent influence upon biology was hardly less as a nomen-

clator than as ataxonomist. He not only invented a descriptive terminology

for animals and plants, but devised a system of nomenclature at once simple

and efficient, and which for a hundred and fifty years has been accepted

without essential modification.

Linneus divided the three kingdoms of nature into classes, the classes

into orders, the orders into genera, the genera into species, under which

latter he sometimes recognized varieties. Of these groups, as he understood

them, he gave clear definitions, but they were in most cases much more

comprehensive than the limits now assigned to groups of corresponding

rank. His genera correspond in some cases to groups now termed orders,

and frequently to the modern idea of family; in some cases they contained

species now placed in separate orders. Prior to Linneeus, these groups had

less definite significance, and were often designated by a phrase instead

of a single word. Species were indicated only by a cumbersome diagnosis

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 17

intended to express their chief distinctive characters. For this, Linnzus

substituted a single word, an innovation the merits of which were at once

almost universally recognized. But Linnzeus reached this solution of a

grave inconvenience somewhat slowly, and not till 1753 did he fully adopt

the nomen triviale, when he introduced it into botany in his “ Species Plan-

tarum,” which is taken by botanists as the point of departure for the bino-

mial system. In the following year, 1754, he introduced it into zodlogy,

using it throughout his “‘ Museum Adolphi Friderici’”’ for all the animals

catalogued or described in this superb work; namely, 39 species of mammals,

23 of birds, 90 of reptiles and amphibians, 91 of fishes and 64 of invertebrates,

or for an aggregate of 307 species of animals. Four years later, in the

tenth or 1758 edition of his “Systema Nature,” he adopted it for the whole

animal kingdom, which date is now generally taken as the beginning of the

binomial system for zodlogy. The importance and utility of this simple

innovation in a matter of nomenclature are beyond estimate, and if Linnzus

had done nothing else for the advancement of biology, he would be entitled

to a conspicuous niche in the temple of fame and to the gratitude of all sub-

sequent workers in this field. He for the first time gave technical standing

to the systematic names, both generic and specific, of all the plants and ani-

mals known at the dates when he introduced the nomen triviale into the

nomenclature of botany and zodélogy.

It is of interest in this connection to note the number of species of animals

known to Linneus at the date of publication of the last edition of the “ Sys-

tema Nature,’”’—the number known to him personally, and the number

recorded respectively from North America and from South America.

Of mammals, the whole number of species recorded is 190, of which three-

fourths are based on the descriptions of previous authors. Only 48 were

American,— 12 from North America and 36 from South America. The

5 North American mammals known to Linneus from specimens were the

raccoon, star-nosed mole, common mole, flying squirrel and chipmunk.

The number of species at present known from North America is 600, ex-

cluding subspecies. ‘The number for the world, including the extinct as

well as the living, is about 10,000 as against less than 200 recorded by

Linneus.

Of birds, about 925 are recorded of the 15,000 known to-day. ‘The 200

known from America are divided about equally between North America and

South America, only 50 of which were described from specimens.

The amphibia and reptiles number collectively about 250, of which about

one-third are American, 40 per cent of the latter being North American

and 60 per cent South American. The North American include 3 sala-

manders, the box-turtle, the six-lined lizard, the blue-tailed lizard and 14

18 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

snakes. ‘The greater part of the 20 North American species of reptiles and

amphibians known to him personally were based on specimens transmitted

by his former student, Dr. C. D. Garden, from the Carolinas, and on a few

sent from Pennsylvania by Pehr Kalm, also one of his students. Thus the

greater part of the snakes of the eastern United States became known to

Linnzeus prior to 1766.

About 500 species of fishes are recorded, of which 100 are American,

divided about equally between North and South America. Forty of the

nearly 60 North American species described are based on specimens sent

from the Carolinas by Dr. Garden, the others mainly on specimens in the

museum of King Frederic.

There is not time to notice in detail the various classes of Coelenterates.

A few words about insects will serve as a general illustration for this phylum.

Linneeus recorded about 2400 species, the greater part of which he was the

first to describe; about 300,000 are now recognized. Of the insects

known to him, 65 per cent are recorded in the second (1761) edition of his

‘Fauna Sueccia,” and many of the remainder are European, so that his

knowledge of exotic species was exceedingly restricted. Of Coleoptera he

recorded about 800 species; the number now known is estimated at 12,000.

Of Lepidoptera he recorded about 800; 7000 are now known from North

America alone. Of Diptera he recorded 278 species, of which 200 were

from Sweden; 12,000 are now known from North America.

Linnzeus’s system of classification was based on a few external characters,

and was recognized by himself as artificial and provisional. It was intended

only as a stepping-stone to better things, when the structure and affinities

of animals should become better known. ‘The statistics already given in-

dicate how limited was his knowledge of the world’s fauna; his classifica-

tion of animals shows how little he knew of their structure, and how often he

was misled by superficial resemblances. Yet his “Systema Nature’’ was the

working basis of all naturalists for the next half-century. Twelve editions

were published during his lifetime, and it was later translated into several

of the continental languages. ‘To such an extent was it regarded as final by

many subsequent naturalists that, when his groups began to be changed and

new genera interpolated, it was deemed by some of them little less than sacri-

lege. When conyenience demanded subdivision of the larger genera, owing

to the great number of new species that had become known since 1766, it

1 Turton, in his Life and Writings of Linné, says, ‘‘To this system may be justly applied

the nervous observations of Dr. Johnson, in his delineation of the character of Shakespeare:

‘The stream of time, which is continually washing away the dissoluble fabrics of other

systems, passes without injury by the adamant of Linné.’”’ — Wiiu1am TurtToN: A General

System of Nature... by Sir Charles Linné, Vol. VII, 1806, p. [42].

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 19

was quite common to consider the new groups as sections, and to give them

merely vernacular names, or, if their authors were bold enough to designate

them by Latin names, they were commonly called subgenera.

It was not till near the close of the eighteenth century that there arose a

new class of naturalists, the anatomical school, led by the elder Geoffroy

and G. Cuvier, who studied the internal structure of animals as well as their

external parts. It was, however, many years before the new systems began

to displace or greatly to modify the long-accepted and strongly intrenched

Linnean methods of grouping animals.

The great advance in biologic knowledge since the time of Linneeus can-

not be easily measured; it can be suggested by noting the fact that compara-

tive anatomy, embryology, histology, paleontology, evolutionism and many

kindred lines of research, have nearly all had their origin or principal develop-

ment within the last century, all converging for the solution of the genetic

relationships of animals and the origin of life. Linneeus, in an oration deliv-

ered in 1743,' held that each species of animal originated from a single pair,

citing as incontrovertible proof the Mosaic account of the creation. It is

indeed a long look back to the middle of the eighteenth century, when his

labors marked a new era in the history of biology. In commemorating to-day

the two hundredth anniversary of his birth, we honor ourselves by showing

our esteem for the greatest naturalist of the eighteenth century.

1 In his oration De telluris habitabilis incremento, delivered and first published in 1743

and republished in 1744, and again in the second volume of the Amcenitates Academice, in

1751, he gives his reasons for believing ‘‘that at the beginning to the world there was created

one single sexual pair of every species of living thing.

“To the proofs of this proposition,’’ he continues, ‘‘I request those who are my auditors to

lend a favorable ear and willing attention. ;

‘Our holy Faith instructs us to believe that the Divinity created a single pair of the human

kind, one individual male, the other female. The sacred writing of Moses acquaint us that they

were placed in the Garden of Eden, and that Adam there gave names to every species of animal,

God causing them to appear before him.

“By a sexual pair I mean one male and one female in every species where the individuals

differ in sex.”” — J. F. Branp’s translation, in Select Dissertations from the Ameenitates Aca-

demice, 1781, pp. 75, 76.

20 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The following address was prepared for the celebration, but was read

only by title. It is inserted here on account of its close relations with the

address of Dr. Allen.

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 21

LINNASUS AS AN INTERMEDIARY BETWEEN ANCIENT AND

MODERN ZOOLOGY; HIS VIEWS ON THE CLASS

MAMMALIA.

By W. K. Grecory, M. A.

In connection with the two hundredth anniversary of the birth of Carl

von Linné, or Carolus Linneus, it may not be inappropriate to consider

him in his capacity of bridging over the gap between ancient and medieval

zoology on the one hand and modern zodlogy on the other, and further to

glance at the principles and facts upon which he based his two great con-

tributions to the broader knowledge of the class of which man is the domi-

nating member. For this purpose the history of zodlogy may be divided,

in a general way, into seven epochs: the Aristotelian, the Scholastic, the

Renaissance, the Raian, the Linnzean, the Cuvierian, and the Darwinian.

There are also two axioms which it will be well to bear in mind. The

first is, that Linneeus became a point of departure in the history of modern

biology, only because he was in turn the product of the intersection of many

important historical series which ramify and intertwine indefinitely, and

stretch back into the remote past of every aspect of life. ‘The second axiom

is, that every new idea, or, for that matter, every new event, is the fertile

hybrid resulting from the fortuitous crossing of several specifically distinct

old ideas or events.

THe ARISTOTELIAN Epocu.

The first epoch under consideration is that of Aristotle, of the fourth

century B.C., and it may be characterized as the initial analytical epoch.

Aristotle’s theory of the genetic relationship of the chain of beings from

polyp to man did not, of course, materially influence Linneus. The idea

of evolution was not destined to come to its fruition through Aristotle, the

schoolmen, or even in Linneeus or Cuvier. The true relation of Aristotle

as a systematic zodlogist to Ray and Linneeus is exhibited in the following

well-known citations from ‘“‘The Parts of Animals.”

“Some animals are viviparous, some oviparous, some vermiparous. The vivipa-

rous are such as man and the horse, and all those animals which have hair; and of

the aquatic animals, the whale kind, as the dolphin and cartilaginous fishes [in refer-

ence to the viviparity of certain sharks] (Book I, Chap. V). Of quadrupeds which

have blood and are viviparous, some are (as to their extremities) many-cloven, as the

hands and feet of man. For some are many-toed, as the lion, the dog, the panther;

some are bifid, and have hoofs instead of nails, as the sheep, the goat, the elephant,

22 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

the hippopotamus; and some have undivided feet, as the solid-hoofed animals, the

horse and ass. The swine kind share both characters [an allusion to the ‘mule

footed’ swine, monstrosities in which the median digits are fused, and terminate in a

solid composite hoof]”’ (Book II, Chap. V).

Ray and later writers probably had this passage in mind when they

used the descriptive terms ‘‘multifido,” “‘bifido,” “‘solidungula,” “ungulata,”

“‘unguiculata,” fissipedes.’’ Here, also, attention is directed to the feet as

exhibiting characteristic differences. In another passage Aristotle says,—

‘‘ Animals have also great differences in the teeth both when compared with each

other and with man. For all quadrupeds which have blood and are viviparous have

teeth. And in the first place some are ambidental' (having teeth in both jaws);

and some are not so, wanting the front teeth in the upper jaw. Some have neither

front teeth nor horns, as the camel; some have tusks,” as the boar; some have not.

Some have serrated teeth,’ as the lion, the panther, the dog; some have the teeth

unvaried,‘ as the horse and the ox; for the animals which vary their cutting teeth

have all serrated teeth. No animal has both tusks and horns; nor has any animal

with serrated teeth either of those weapons. The greater part have the front teeth

cutting, and those within broad ” (Book I, Chap. II).

This passage evidently directed the attention of later writers to the

importance of the teeth as a means of distinguishing and hence of classi-

fying mammals, and we shall see that Ray and, later, Linnzeus were quick

to avail themselves of the suggestion.

Aristotle was quite unconscious of the classification that has been ascribed

to him, as Whewell® shows; but “Aristotle does show, as far as could be

done at his time, a perception of the need of groups and of names of groups

in the study of the animal kingdom, and thus may justly be held up as the

great figure in the prelude to the formation of systems which took place in

more advanced scientific times.” Whewell also quotes passages that show

Aristotle’s recognition of the lack of generic names to denominate natural

groups. Aristotle says that “of the class of viviparous quadrupeds there

are many genera,° but these again are without names, except specific names,

such as man, lion, stag, horse, dog and the like. Yet there is a genus of

animals that have manes, as the horse, the ass, the oreus, the ginnus, the

imnus and the animal which in Syria is called heminus (mule) . . . Where-

fore,” he adds (that is, because we do not possess genera and generic names

of this kind), ““we must take the species separately and study the nature of

each.” ‘‘ These passages,” Whewell continues, “afford us sufficient ground

1 Audodovra. 2 XavArcSovra. 5 KapxapoSoyra.

4 Averwo\Xaxra. 5 Op. cit., III., p. 350. 6 Edn.

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 23

jor placing Aristotle at the head of those naturalists to whom the first views of

the necessity of a zodlogical system are due” (Op. cit., p. 352).

THE ScHouastic Epocu.

From the time of Aristotle and his classical successors until the rise of

scholasticism in the eleventh century, Europe, as every one knows, was too

much preoccupied with world-wide displacements and readjustments of

peoples and of institutions to pay particular attention to natural science;

and even the Scholastic Epoch in the history of philosophy and science

was chiefly occupied with the further development and systematization of

the great body of religious and metaphysical doctrines. So far as natural

history is concerned, it is perhaps rather a further interregnum than an

epoch, rather an era or lapse of uneventful time than a time of the slow

ascension of some great illuminative idea. ‘The anthropocentric idea domi-

nated in natural history as the geocentric idea dominated in astronomy;

hence a knowledge of the real or supposed properties of animals and

particularly of plants was chiefly cultivated in connection with alchemy,

magic and materia medica. ‘The medieval imagination, full of mysticism,

eager for the uncanny_and fantastic and teeming with images of ubiquitous

devils, flourished on the marvelous tales of a “Sir John Maundeville,” and

peopled the earth with the monsters which so long survived and ramped

in the Terre Incognitz of world maps. In the schools, citations from

authorities were accepted in lieu of proof, and the simple zodlogy of Aristotle

and the scriptures was deeply covered by the accretions of learned exegesis.

Scholasticism reached its prime as early as the thirteenth century, in the

system of the illustrious St. Thomas Aquinas, the “‘princeps scholasticorum.”

Afterward, while the renaissance movement was discovering new worlds in

all directions, scholasticism in general (but with some brilliant exceptions)

rapidly reached the “‘phylogerontic stage”’ of its evolution, and produced all

sorts of bizarre specializations in terminology and in dialectics.

It has been said of the scholastic philosophy that it “vigorously exercised

the understanding without bringing it to any conclusions.” However this

may be, it cannot be doubted that the very excesses of scholasticism stim-

ulated the reactive return to experience, which gave rise incidentally to

biological science. The schoolmen furthermore perpetuated and aroused

interest in Aristotle’s analyses, and gave currency to many methods of

analysis and description. Among these we may cite, first, the dichotomous

method of division, which is a forerunner of modern classifications; second,

the logical concepts of genus and species. Especially noteworthy was the

expansion of classical Latin into a highly specialized language of philosophy

and science.

24 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

THE RENAISSANCE Epocu.

Biological science, and especially zodlogy, did not respond fully to the

impulse of the Renaissance movement until literature, politics, astronomy

and geographical discovery had made the most signal advances. Hence in

Aldrovandi (1522-1605) and Gesner (1516-65) the superstitions and myths

of the middle ages still linger, while the systematic work of future genera-

tions is initiated in the extensive illustrated catalogues and descriptions of

plants and animals. On the philosophical side of zodlogy, the Englishman

Wotton, in his “De Differentiis Animalium” (Paris, 1552), “‘rejected the

legendary and fantastic accretions [of medieval zodlogy] and returned to

Aristotle and the observation of nature” (Lankester'). One of the con-

temporaries of Gesner and Wotton was the founder of anatomy, Andreas

Vesalius (1514-64), who boldly broke with tradition, and declared that the

source of knowledge of the human body should be, not Galen, but the

human body itself.

Near the end of this period, the botanist, Cesalpino (Czsalpinus) of

Arezzo (1519-1778), a celebrated scholastic philosopher, published his volu-

minous work “De Plantis” (1583). In this work, which was inspired by

the new idea of direct observation, the confused arrangements of plants of

the earlier herbalists were replaced by an orderly classification suggested

by the brigades of an army, and founded upon the number, the position

and the figure of the reproductive parts. He divided plants into ten great

classes, which were again subdivided; to these assemblages he gave mono-

mial names in substantive form. Linneus himself says of him, that,

“though the first in attempting to form natural orders, he observed as

many as the most successful later writers’? (Whewell, Op. cit., pp. 282,

283).

A reason for this precocious development of a natural classification of

plants may be sought in the very multiplicity of kinds and the large herbaria

and horticultural gardens in existence, which necessitated some sort of orderly

arrangement and which would assist the eager student to recognize related

series. We note in contrast the delayed progress of the classification of the

mammals due to the comparative fewness of known forms, the greater

complexity of organization and the difficulties of observation.

Tue Ratan Erocu, THE Dawn oF MopeEern ZooLocy.

Among those who contributed the data for Linnzeus’s generalizations,

no name is more important, at least in the history of vertebrate zodlogy, than

1 EB. Ray Lankester, The History and Scope of Zodlogy, in The Advancement of Science

London, 1890, p. 293.

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 25

that of Jolin Ray. Accordingly, the fourth epoch under consideration may

be termed the Raian Epoch, and culminates with the publication in 1693

of Ray’s ‘Synopsis Methodica Animalium Quadrupedum et Serpentini

Generis,” which is one of the great landmarks in the history of classification.

Ray’s debt to the past is shown in the facts that his lucid tabular analyses

of the common structural features of animals are arranged dichotomously;

that in each division and subdivision a single adjective or adjectival phrase

indicates the most important common feature of the animals in question,

and that these terms are, as we have seen, in many cases borrowed from

Aristotle.

Ray, like Linnzeus, gave more attention to plants than to animals, and

depended upon his colleague, Willughby, for much of the data, especially

in the fishes. Like Linneeus also, Ray had a superb gift of order and a

philosophical mind that made him a worthy countryman and contemporary

of Sir Isaac Newton.

In his tabular analysis, Ray distinctly foreshadows Linnzeus in the fol-

lowing points: — :

1. The higher vertebrates are contrasted with the fishes as breathing

by lungs instead of gills.

2. The whales are classed with the viviparous animals and expressly

removed from the fishes, from which they were further distinguished by the

horizontality of the tail-fin. This step, however, was felt to be so radical

that Ray afterwards constructed a definition which included both whales

and fishes.

3. As remarked by Gill, the terrestrial or quadruped mammals are

bracketed with the aquatic as “‘Vivipara,” and contrasted with the “Ovi-

para” or “Aves.” “The Vivipara are exactly co-extensive with Mammalia,

but the word ‘ vivipara’ was used as an adjective and not asa noun.” + This

distinction seems to have been an important one, when substance was so

earefully distinguished from attribute. Ray emphasized the common

attributes of all the terrestrial hairy quadrupeds, of the amphibious hairy

animals such as the seals and manati, and of the purely aquatic and fish-like

Cetaceans; but he does not seem to have insisted that all these animals

agreed in essence and substance as well as in attribute, so that they should

require a new substantive name such as Linneeus afterward applied to them.

4. The double ventricle is noted as characteristic of both Vivipara and

Ovipara.

5. In order to associate the “manati’”’ and other amphibious mammals

with their terrestrial congeners, the term “hairy animals” is employed as

more comprehensive than quadrupeds.

1 The Story of a Word Mammal, in Popular Science Monthly, Yol. LXI. September, 1902,

pp. 434-438.

26 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Ray further set the standard for Linnzus in his concise descriptions of

European and foreign mammals, especially those described by travelers in

America and in the East. Ray often used the term “‘species” merely as

the equivalent of the middle English “‘spece,” which survives in our word

spice,” and meant “‘kind:’’ it was also equivalent to the logical “species”

(cf. the Greek «dos) of the schoolmen, and is exemplified in Ray and Wil-

lughby’s ‘‘Historia Piscium” in such phrases as “‘clarias niloticus Beloni

mustele fluviatilis species,” “bagre piscis barbati ac aculeati species.” But

Ray also used the term “species” in quite a Linnean manner, as in the

names Ovis laticauda, Ovis strepsiceros and Ovis domestica. In form, at least,

this foreshadows the binomial system of nomenclature and the recognition of

the species in general as a supposedly objective reality and the unit of classifi-

cation. The form of Ray’s specific definitions seems, however, to imply that

the term “species” in Ray’s mind was often more a “differentia,” or specific

adjective modifying the generic concept than a fully developed substantive

name, and Ray did not apparently realize the convenience of applying the

binomial method of nomenclature universally. Even Linneeus at first intro-

duced the specific, “‘trivial,” or common name, merely as a marginal

index or symbol of the full specific phrase. Ray recognized the considerable

variability of species, but believed also in their separate creation and fixity.

He frequently adverts to the internal characters of animals; and his book

shows, that even by his time a considerable number of observations on

the soft parts of animals had already accumulated.

THe Linna/an Epvocu.

The work of Ray in botany and zodlogy fully prepared the way for

Linnzeus, whose epoch may be characterized as the Legislative Epoch, be-

cause his methods of description and classification, and especially his nomen-

clature exerted such profound formative and regulative influence upon the

work of his contemporaries and successors that he was called the “ lawgiver

of natural history.”

Linneus’s Broader Contributions to the Class Mammalia.

One of the most enduring claims of Linnzeus upon the grateful memory

of posterity arises from his felicitous coinage of the word ‘““mammalia”

(animals with mamme or breasts after analogy with Latin words like ani-

mal?) as a class name for the forms characterized by Ray as “ viviparous

hairy animals.” hus not only the terrestrial hairy oviparous quadrupeds,

1 Theodore Gill, 1. c.

BICENTENARY OF LINNZUS 27

but also the aquatic Vivipara now called Cetaceans and Sirenians, were for

the first time definitely included under a single class name.

In attempting to appraise Linneus’s contributions to the broader knowl-

edge of the class of mammals, we must bear in mind what Dr. J. A. Allen

has well shown,! namely: that Linneus was primarily a botanist, that his

interest in mammals was incidental, that his opportunities for studying

them were very limited, that his first-hand knowledge of extra-European

mammals was practically nil, and finally that several of his ordinal group-

ings of mammals (e. g., rhinoceros with the rodents) now appear highly

unnatural and even ludicrous.

On the other hand, there are certain considerations which may prevent

us from thinking any the less of his judgment and genius on that account.

Although Linneus may have known very little about extra-European

mammals, he had, nevertheless, a fairly good conception of the essential

features of mammals as a class, as shown by his definition in the tenth edition

of the “Systema Nature” (1758). Here in concise phrase he states that

mammals have a heart with two auricles and two ventricles, with hot red

blood; that the lungs breathe rhythmically; that the jaws are slung as in

other vertebrates, but “covered,” 7. e., with flesh, as opposed to the “‘naked”

jaws of birds; that the penis is intromittent; that the females are viviparous,

and secrete and give milk; that the means of perception are the tongue,

nose, eyes, ears and the sense of touch; that the integument is provided

with hairs, which are sparse in tropical and still fewer in aquatic mammals;

that the body is supported on four feet, save in the aquatic forms, in which

the hind limbs are said to be coalesced into a tail (the only erroneous idea

in the whole definition). e

Many of these characters had previously been noticed by Ray in his

description of the hairy quadrupeds. It is not impossible, too, that Lin-

nzeus may have been assisted to the comprehension of the essential features

of the mammals through his friendship with Bernard de Jussieu, who is

said by Isidore Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire to have induced him to include the

Cetaceans in the class Mammalia; and possibly he also owed something

to the researches of Klein and Brisson. In spite of all this, Linnzeus’s own

studies in medicine, in Holland, doubtless made him familiar with the

anatomy of at least one mammal, man; and on his journeys through the

north of Europe he must have observed many other mammals at close range.

Thus was Linnzus prepared for the clear recognition and emphasis of

another fact of far-reaching importance. It was evidently well known

that the anatomy of the hairy quadrupeds was similar in plan, if not in detail,

1 See pp. 9 ff.

28 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

to that of man, and we find Descartes (for example, in his ‘‘ Discourse on

Method” Part V., 1637) advising those who wished to understand his

theory of the action of the lungs and circulatory system, ‘‘to take the trouble

of getting dissected in their presence the heart of some large animal pos-

sessed of lungs, for this 2s throughout sufficiently like the human” (ital. mihi).

And it was further known that of all animals the monkeys are most nearly

like man, both externally and internally. This was asserted by Aristotle

and other classical authors, but was fully demonstrated in a carefully pre-

pared and illustrated work* on the anatomy and appearance of animals

from the Jardin du Roi, by a committee of savants of the French Academy,

appointed by the Grand Monarch.

This work and these important observations may or may not have come

under the notice of Linnzeus on the occasion of his visit to Paris in 1788.

At any rate, he did not hesitate to follow the logical consequences of these

facts, namely, that in a strictly zodlogical classification, man would be

grouped not only in the class Mammalia, but even in the same ordinal divi-

sion with the monkeys. Accordingly, in the tenth edition of the Systema

the earlier name Anthropomorphe is replaced by Primates, and the genera

Homo, Simia, Lemur and Vespertilio, are grouped under that order. The

Primates were thus regarded as the chiefs of the hierarchy of terrestrial

beings, and consequently, as in nearly all subsequent schemes down to the

Darwinian Epoch, head the classified legions of creatures. Linnzeus was too

often at fault in surmising the generic and ordinal affinities of the species of

the lower vertebrates; but this bold allocation of man to the order Primates

surely bears the marks of genius, and led the way to the modern generaliza-

tion that man is knit by ties of blood kinship to the Primates, and more

remotely to the whole organic world.

Iinneus’s Principles in his Classification of the Mammalia.

The diagnostic definition given by Linneus of the order Primates may

be cited because it rests upon the principles and theories which guided him

in classification and which led to his most successful groupings, as well as

to his serious blunders. This definition is as follows: —

Inferior front teeth iv, parallel, laniariform [canine] teeth solitary [that is, in a single

pair above and below].

Mammz: pectoral, one pair.

The anterior extremities are hands.

The arms are separated by clavicles, the gait usually on all fours (‘‘incessu tetrapodo

volgo’’).

They climb trees and pluck the fruits thereof.

1 Mémoires pour servir & histoire naturelle des animaux, &la Haye, 1715 (4to, 2 vols.),

redigées par Perrault et Dodart.

BICENTENARY OF LINNZUS 29

This definition was clearly insufficient to exclude all extraneous genera

from this really natural order; for (1) under Lemur Linnzus included, not

only all the then known forms now recognized as the suborder Lemuroidea,

but also the “Flying Lemur,” Galeopithecus, which properly either forms

an order by itself with no near affinities with the Primates, or is at most a

suborder of the Cheiroptera; (2) the definition also included “ Vespertilio,”’

i. e., the bats, excepting Noctilio, an order more nearly related to the Insecti-

vores than to the Primates.

Many of the characters selected by Linnzeus for his ordinal diagnoses

were of the “adaptive” or superficial kind, which are now known to have

been most easily modifiable by changes in the external or internal environ-

ment. The reason for this mistake was, that Linneus regarded the mode

of sustenance of a group as one of its most deep-seated attributes and most

surely indicative of more or less hidden affinities with other groups. Lin-

nus was constantly searching for natural groups, but he did not realize

that the natural affinity of the members of the larger groups was due to

descent from common ancestors, just as in the case of members of the same

species. An example of his reliance upon sustenance is seen in his defini-

tion, in the tenth edition of the Systema, of the order Fere, the Carnivora

of later authors. Here “sustenance by rapine, upon carcasses ravenously

snatched”’ is evidently felt to be connected with “front teeth in both jaws:

superior vi, all acute,” with “‘laniariform teeth [canines] solitary,” with

“claws on the feet acute.”

One of his dicta in botany was, that a character of great systematic

importance in one group may be very variable in another; consequently he

did not mention “sustenance”’ under Bruta, but contented himself with the

two characters ‘‘front teeth none either above or below” and “gait awkward

(incessus ineptior).” As this order included the elephant, the manatee,

the sloth, the great ant-eater and the scaly ant-eater, it has been justly cited

as a grossly unnatural assemblage, and the grouping accounted for by

Linnzeus’s ignorance of the animals composing it.

Now it is possible that Linnzeus himself did not regard this assemblage

as natural, but merely as a convenient artificial grouping. But I am more

disposed to attribute its existence to his habit of searching for hidden affini-

ties below the most obvious external differences, as when he placed the seals

in the order Ferze, joined the bats with the Primates, the horse and the

hippopotamus, the rhinoceros with the Rodents, and the pig with the Insecti-

vores (in the order Bestiz).

Linneus recognized that the ordinal classification of the mammals was

a difficult problem, as is shown by the conspicuous changes (not always

improvements in our eyes) and redistributions which he made between the

30 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

first and ‘‘tenth” editions of the Systema and further by the fact that Erx-

leben, who revised and extended the Systema (1777), abandoned the ordi-

nal divisions entirely and merely listed the genera serzatim. The difficulty

of the problem is indicated by the fact that Cuvier, with far better material

and more extensive knowledge, was constantly deceived by ‘‘adaptive”

(or homoplastic) resemblances. Even Cope, who wrote much on homo-

plastic and convergent evolution, was himself deceived by the similarities

of structure in the marsupial “mole,” Notoryctes, and the Cape golden

mole, Chrysochloris, an undoubted insectivore.

The most “inexcusable” blunder of Linneus, that of placing the rhino-

ceros with the Rodents under the order “Glires,” may have been due, not

to carelessness, but to the fact that the Indian rhinoceros has a single pair

of close-set cutting incisors in the upper jaw, which oppose the elongate

incisor-like appressed canines of the lower jaw and thus show a superficial

approach to the rodent dentition. If Linnzus had known that Hyraz,

which Pallas described as a Rodent (“Cavia’’), had cheek-teeth like those

of Rhinoceros, he doubtless might have felicitated himself upon his supposed

astuteness.

In brief, Linneeus, as fully shown by Whewell,* from his profound and

wide botanical knowledge, was acquainted with many natural orders, and

strove constantly to recognize others. He knew that a character of great

diagnostic and fundamental value in one order may be of slight value in

another; he knew that even in a natural order some of the diagnostic and

fundamental characters might be absent in certain members otherwise

clearly allied to a given series. He knew that a natural series is “natural”

because of the totality of its characters, that the “genus makes the character,”

and not vice versa, a hard doctrine to many of his contemporaries. When

Linneus had arrived at a conception of any given natural order, he selected

certain characters as diagnostic, but not necessarily universal, and constructed

professedly artificial or only partly natural keys to his “natural” orders.

When Linneus turned his attention to the classification of animals, we

may believe that he followed the same principles. In this application of the

principles gained in one subject to the data of another, we have a good

example of the felicitous union of specifically distinct ideas to produce a

line of ideas that are new and very fertile.

The Relation of Linnzus to his Successors.

Linnzeus inherited from Ray and from the scholastic system the dogma

of the separate creation and objective reality of species, which became

1 Op. cit., pp. 319-325.

ANNALS N.Y. Acap. Sct. VoL. XVIII Puate ITI.

Courtesy N.Y. Botan. Garden. W. A. Murrill, Photo.

Fic. I. HAMMARBY,; THE COUNTRY HOME OF LINNAUS NEAR

UPSALA, SWEDEN.

‘> LINNAB

“BOFANISEANEL ZOO OGISt

~BORNE= RASEIVEL

SWEDEN MAC SS ATOT »

= DIED: HAMMARBE

nis SWEL EN _JANVARYAIO 775.

rest = BX-THE:NEWEC OHA: :

| ¢ -E5 5 =23:19048 _

Courtesy N.Y. Botan. Garden.

Fic. 2. TABLET PLACED ON THE LINNASUS BRIDGE BY THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 31

developed and strengthened in his hands as a result of his observations.

His dictum was species tot sunt diverse quot diverse forme ab initio sunt

create. ‘The resemblances between members of a single species were hence

held to be due to descent from an original pair, and the mutual infertility

of different species to be the natural penalty of the effort to traverse the gaps

established from the beginning.

This view was somewhat modified in later editions of the Systema, in

which Linneus held that “all the species of one genus constituted at first

(that is at the Creation) one species, ab initio unam constituerint speciem;

they were subsequently multiplied by hybrid generation that is by inter-

crossing with other species.” ?

The general relation of Linnzus to his successors may be summarized

in a few words. ‘The sixth epoch in the history of zodlogy extends from the

latter part of the eighteenth to the middle of the nineteenth century, and

may be called the Anatomical Epoch, because, through the labors of Cuvier

and his great English pupil and successor, Richard Owen, the taxonomic

studies of the Linnean school were supplemented by the establishment and

great development of the sciences of comparative anatomy and paleontol-

ogy. In spite, however, of the improvement and expansion of classification,

its bearing upon evolution was not generally perceived. Cuvier’s researches

in these sciences further extended the dogma of the fixity of species; but

Owen, through his broader knowledge, gradually gave up the idea and

became an evolutionist, although not a sclectionist.

The seventh epoch, the Darwinian, in which happily we are living, has

seen the overthrow of the traditional doctrine of the fixity of species, and has

initiated the re-examination of all morphological phenomena in the light of

the doctrine of evolution. These morphological facts are reflected more

and more in our evolving classifications, which are the outgrowth of the

Linnean system, and which now aim to express, not only degrees of homo-

logical resemblances and differences, but also (secondarily) degrees of genctic

kinship.

The great “lawgiver of natural history” is thus seen in his proper per-

spective in a few at least of the series of historical antecedents and conse-

quents which intersected in him, inheriting, as he did on the one hand, the

language and general methods of the past and the doctrine of special

creation; inheriting on the other hand the new spirit and contributions of

Vesalius, Cesalpino, Ray and many others, and building upon we the

foundations of modern botany and zodlogy.

1 Osborn, H. F. From the Greeks to Darwin, p. 129.

32 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

At the close of the reading of Dr. Allen’s address, recess was taken till

two o'clock, p.m. During this time the Council entertained at luncheon

at the Hermitage Hotel, near Bronx Park, the delegates of sister societies

and invited guests. Afterward the special exhibits at the Botanical

Museum were examined, and then was delivered the following address.

LINNAUS AND AMERICAN BOTANY.

By Per Axet Rypsere, Pu. D.

Mr. Chairman, Ladies and Gentlemen:

* I have been asked to make a short address to you on Linnzus and his

relation to North American botany. That the selection fell on me was not

because I was the most able one to deliver such an address, for there are

THE TWIN-FLOWER, LINNAGA BOREALIS

A plant especially beloved by Linnzus, and dedicated to him by Gronovius.

many abler men present, but simply because I was born in the same country

as Linneus. In fact, my grandfather came from the same province of

Smiland and even from a parish adjoining that of Stembrohult, in which

my illustrious countryman was born.

In the early part of the seventeenth century there lived in Jonsboda,

BICENTENARY OF LINNZUS 33

Smaland, Sweden, a farmer named Ingemar Svenson. He had three

children, two sons and one daughter, the grandmother of Linnzus. On

the Jonsboda farm stood a very large linden-tree, so old and with so many

traditions that it was regarded by the people as a holy tree. Any damage

done to this tree, it was claimed, would surely bring misfortune upon the

head of the perpetrator. When the two sons began to study for the ministry,

it was natural that they should think of this tree in selecting a family name.

They called themselves Tiliander; Tvlia is the Latin for the linden or bass-

wood, and andros the Greek for man. It may not be amiss to state that at

that time the common people of Sweden did not have any family names,

and this is true to a certain extent even to-day. A man was known by his

given name, the given name of his father with the word son appended, and

the place where he lived. The farmer mentioned above was known as

Ingemar Svenson from Jonsboda. His father’s name was Sven Carlson,

and that of his grandfather, Carl Johnson. The names of his two sons

would have been Carl and Sven Ingemarson, had they remained in the

peasant class, instead of Carl and Sven Tiliander.

The daughter married a farmer, Ingemar Bengtson; and her son’s name

was Nils Ingemarson, until he entered the “gymnasium.” He also was

born in Jonsboda, and, when selecting a name, he also naturally turned to

the same old linden-tree as his maternal uncles had done. He called him-

self Linneus. It is remarkable that two of his father’s maternal grand-

uncles also bore another Latin form of the same name, viz., Lindelius.

Some claim that even this name was derived from the same old linden-tree,

but this is scarcely in accordance with the facts. More likely it traces its

origin from the Linden Farm in Dannis Parish, where their ancestors lived.

But what has this genealogy to do with Linneus’s relation to North

American botany? Perhaps nothing directly, but indirectly a great deal;

for the circumstances and surroundings under which a man is born and

reared to a certain extent make the man. In his younger days, Sven

Tiliander was the house-chaplain of Field-Marshal and Admiral-Viscount

Henrik Horn, who was for many years Governor of Bremen and Verden,

two cities with territory in Germany acquired by Sweder through the

Thirty-years War. During his stay in Germany, Tiliander learned to know

and love botany and horticulture, and established around Viscount Horn’s

residence in Bremen a garden which was remarkable for that period. When

both returned to Sweden, Tiliander brought with him the choicest plants

from this garden and planted them around the parsonage of Pjetteryd

Parish, of which he had been appointed rector. Here at Pjetieryd, Nils

Linn2us spent most of his youth, studying in company with his uncle’s

sons. Later, both as curate at Rashult and as rector at Stenbrohult, he

34 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

surrounded the parsonages with gardens in which he grew many rare and

interesting plants. Inthe midst of these, Carl Linnzeus, the famous botanist,

was born and reared. Later, while a student at the university, he spent a

summer vacation at home in 1732, and made a list of the plants in his

father’s garden. ‘This list is still to be seen in the Academy of Science at

Stockholm. Although defective, the first four classes being unrepresented,

it enumerates 224 species. Of these, many were at that time very rare in

cultivation. Professor Theodore Fries in his biography of Linnzeus enumer-

ates 36 of the rarest of these. Among them we notice six American plants,

viz., Rhus Toxicodendron, the poison oak, Mirabilis Jalapa, four-o-clock,

Asclepias syriaca, milkweed, Phytolacca decandra, pokeweed, Antennaria

‘now Anaphalis) margaritacea, pearly everlasting, and Solanum tuberosum,

the potato. It may be remarked that the cultivation of potatoes was

introduced into Sweden about twenty years later. We see from this that

Linnzus had learned to know some American plants even in his early

childhood.

Carl Linneus was born the 13th of May, O.S., 1707, at Rashult, an

annex to the parish of Stenbrohult. His father was the curate there; but

two years later, at the death of his father-in-law, Samuel Broderson, he

became rector and moved to Stenbrohult. In the fall of 1714, Carl Lin-

neeus entered the school of Wexid, and graduated from the “gymnasium”

in 1727. His parents, especially his mother, wanted him to study for the

ministry; but he had no love for theology, nor for metaphysics, nor the

classics. He learned Latin tolerably, however, because that language

helped him to study the natural sciences. He decided to study medicine,

and entered with that view the University of Lund, which was nearest his

home, but remained there only one year, learning that there were better

facilities at Upsala. At the latter place he soon became acquainted with

Professors Rudbeck and Celsius, two of the most prominent scientists of

that time, and was allowed to use their libraries. The former, who had

many duties to perform, soon asked Linnzus to give for him the public

lectures in botany. The income from these gave Linnzus means to sup-

port himself, and linked him closer to his favorite study. He became

acquainted with practically all the plants of the gardens and fields of the

whole region around Upsala, and learned all the scientific names given in the

books at his disposal.

The latter was not an easy matter when we take into consideration the

form of scientific names at that period. For example, the most approved

name of the common blue-grass that adorns our lawns was, “Gramen

pratense paniculatum majus, latiore folio, Poa Theophrasti.’”’ Other names

of the same grass were, “‘Gramen vulgo cognitum,” “Gramen pratense

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 35

majus vulgatus,”’ and “Gramen alterum et vulgare.” In the first publication

by Linneus, it appears as “Poa spiculis ovatis compressis muticis.” I

think that Linneus and his contemporaries had much more cause than

we to exclaim, ‘‘Those horrible Latin names!” ‘To us the same plant is

known as Poa pratensis L., the name adopted by Linneus in his “Species

Plantarum.”

The lectures given by Linnzus for Professor Rudbeck became very

popular. This was especially the case after his return from his Lapland

jeurney. Some persons, especially Dr. Nils Rosen, became jealous of his

success, and induced the university faculty to pass a resolution by which no

one who had not taken the corresponding degree was permitted to give

university lectures. Linneeus had not yet received his doctor's degree, and

hence was debarred. As Holland was offering at that time excellent facilities

both in medicine and in botany, and as living expenses were lower there than

elsewhere, Linnzeus decided to visit that country and take his examinations

there. He received his doctor’s diploma at Harderwijk, and afterwards

went to Leyden, where he became acquainted with three of the greatest

botanists of the time, Boerhaave, Burmann and Gronovius. George

Cliffort, the wealthy burgomaster of Amsterdam and president of the East

India Company, was a great lover of plants, and had a splendid botanical

garden at Hartecamp as well as a rich library and herbarium. On the

recommendation of Boerhaave, Linneus became Cliffort’s physician, and

curator of his collections and garden. Here he lived in luxury, beloved as

a SOD.

Cliffort furnished Linnzeus with means to publish five of his first books,

“Systema Nature,” “Fundamenta Botanica,” “Bibliotheca Botanica,”

“Genera Plantarum” and “Flora Lapponica,” the manuscript of which he

had brought with him from Sweden. In the first of these, Linnzus presents

his system of classification. He divides Nature into three kingdoms,— the

mineral, vegetable and animal. In the vegetable kingdom he brings out

an altogether new classification, based upon the sexual organs of plants.

He divides the kingdom into 24 classes, the first 23 containing the phan-

erogams, and the last the cryptogams. In the first 11 classes are included

plants which have from 1 to 12 free and practically equal stamens; in the

12th and the 18th, plants with many stamens; in the 14th and 15th, plants

with 4 and 6 stamens respectively, of which 2 are decidedly shorter. In the

16th, 17th and 18th classes the stamens are united by their filaments, in

the 19th they are united by their anthers, and in the 20th they are adnate to

the pistil. In the 21st and 22d the flowers are unisexual, i.e., the stamens

and pistils are in different flowers (on the same individual in the 21st and on

different individuals in the 22d); and the plants of the 23d class have both

36 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

unisexual and bisexual flowers. The classes were divided into orders.

In the first 13 classes the orders were determined by the number of the

pistils; in the 14th and 15th, by the fruit; and in the 16th to 18thand 20th

to 23d, by the number and distinctness or union of the stamens. The classi-

fication of the 19th class is too complex to enter into here. The 24th class

was divided into four orders: Filices, Musci, Algee and Fungi.

This system of classification is purely artificial. Linneeus himself re-

garded it only as temporary, and expected that it would soon be supplanted

by a more rational one, based on natural relationship. The Linnean

system served its purpose, however. It became a means by which it was

possible to tabulate every known genus of plants. Before this time there

had been no systems at all, or such crude ones as we find even to-day in

some popular flower-books, where the plants are classified by the color of

their flowers. If the natural systems of DeCandolle, Bentham and Hooker,

and Engler and Prantl, are too complicated for popular books, why not go

back to the simple system of Linnzeus? It would at least give a good insight

into the structure of the flower instead of the mere color.

In his “Genera Plantarum,” Linneus applied this system to all known

genera of plants, and gave each of them a concise and plain description.

Cliffort had many American plants in his garden, but he sent Linneus

to England to visit Sir Hans Sloane, Professor Dillenius and Philip Miller,

in order to secure American plants grown by them. Both Sloane and

Dillenius treated Linnzeus at first with coolness, because he “‘confounded

botany.” On his farewell visit to Dillenius, Linnzus politely asked him

what he meant by “confounding botany.”’ Dillenius took from the library

the first few pages of Linnzeus’s own “Genera Plantarum,” and showed him

where there was written at numerous places “NB.” Dillenius stated that

all the genera so marked were wrongly described. The first example he

pointed out, if I am not mistaken, was Canna, placed by Linnzeus in his first

class, which contains plants with but one stamen. Botanists before this

time had described it as having three stamens. ‘To settle the dispute they

went out into the garden, and the living plant showed that Linnzeus was

correct. Dillenius then retained Linnzeus for several days, and found that

the older botanists in most cases were at fault and the young Swede correct.

From being an opponent, he became a friend, of Linnzeus and let him have

all the plants he wanted.

After his return to Holland, Linnzeus continued his work in Cliffort’s

garden with renewed zeal, and completed his “Hortus Cliffortianus,” a

large folio, in which are enumerated and described all the plants found in

Cliffort’s collections, together with synonyms and citations of nearly all

botanical works then in existence. In preparing this work he became

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 37

thoroughly acquainted with almost all the literature referring to American

botany, such as Morison’s ‘‘ Plantarum Historia,” Plukenett’s ‘Almagestrum

Botanicum” and “Phytographia,” Petiver’s ‘‘Gazophylacium,’” Sloane’s

“Jamaica,” Plumier’s “Plantarum Americanarum Genera,” “Plantarum

Americanarum Fasciculus Primus” and ‘‘Filicetum Americanum,”’ Catesby’s

“Historia Naturalis,’ and, later, Cornuti’s ‘‘Canadensium Plantarum

Historia.”

After completing the ‘Hortus Cliffortianus,’ Linneeus returned to

Leyden, where he spent some time helping Gronovius with the editing of

his “‘Flora Virginica,”’ based on a large collection of plants collected by

Clayton. Here again he came in contact with American plants.

Linneeus then returned to Sweden and became a practicing physician.

He was soon appointed professor of medicine at Upsala, but by common

agreement he exchanged chairs with Rosen, who held the professorship of

botany. He now began work upon the most important book of his life,

his “Species Plantarum.” In this he tried to include a short description of

every known species of plant, together with the most important synonyms

and citations. In this book the Linnean binomial system of nomenclature

was used for the first ime. Linnzeus was not the first to give plants names,

nor was he the first to name genera. Many Latin plant-names had come

down from antiquity, while others had been proposed by his predecessors.

Men like Tournefort and Micheli had in some cases clearer ideas of genera

than Linneeus himself. Neither was Linneeus the first one to use binomials.

In Cornuti’s work on Canadian plants, for example, we find almost as many

binomials as polynomials; but it is doubtful if Linneeus had seen Cornuti’s

book when he first wrote his “Species Plantarum.’ He does not cite it in

the first edition, but does so in the second. Linnzeus was, however, the first

one to use binomials systematically and consistently. Before his time,

botanists had recognized genera, and applied to them Latin nouns as names.

In order to designate specics, they added to these nouns adjective descriptive

phrases. These consisted sometimes of a single adjective, as in Quercus

alba, the white oak, but more often of a long string of adjectives and adjective

modifiers, as in the case of the blue-grass mentioned above. The specific

name had hitherto been merely a description modifying the generic name;

from this time it became really a name, although a single adjective in form.

An illustration of the pre-Linneean form of plant-names might be had if,

instead of ‘Grace Darling,” one should say, “Mr. Darling’s beautiful,

slender, graceful, blue-eyed girl with long golden curls and rosy cheeks.”

“Grace” is just as descriptive of the girl as this whole string of adjectives.

It may be that “Grace” is not always applicable to the person to whom the

name is applied; but this is also often the case with many specific plant-

38 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

names. Asclepias syriaca and Rumex Brittanica are American plants, and

Rubus deliciosus is one of the least delicious of the raspberry tribe. This

invention and strict application of binomial names could not but cause

a revolution in botany. Since the appearance of “Species Plantarum” in

1753, it has been possible to pigeon-hole not only genera, but also species, of

plants.

Before this useful book was printed, Linneus had become better ac-

quainted with North American plants, and in another way. Baron Bjelke,

the vice-president of the Court of Appeals of Finland, had proposed to the

Royal Academy of Sciences at Stockholm to send an able man to Iceland

and Siberia, countries partly in the same latitude as Sweden, “to make

observations, and such collections of seeds and plants as would improve the

Swedish husbandry, gardening, manufactures, arts and sciences.” Dr.

Linnzeus suggested North America instead, and recommended one of his

pupils, Professor Pehr Kalm of Abo, for the proposed expedition. Kalm

spent two years in North America, traveling through Pennsylvania, New

Jersey, New York and Canada, and making large collections of seeds and

plants, which were preserved as living or dried specimens, or as alcoholic

material. During his stay at Raccoon, N.J., he discovered our mountain-

laurel. The Swedes of Raccoon called it spoon-tree, because the Indians

made spoons from its hard wood. Kalm adds in his journal, about this

tree, “The English call this tree a laurel, because its leaves resemble

those of the Laurocerasus. Linneus, conformably to the peculiar friend-

ship and goodness which he has honored me with, has pleased to call this

tree Kalmia foliis ovalis, corymbis terminalibus, or Kalmia latijolia.” Here

Linnzeus himself gave an illustration of both the pre-Linnzan and the post-

Linnean nomenclature. Kalm became acquainted with several of the

naturalists of this country, C. Colden and his daughter Jane, Bartram and

Clayton, and through Kalm a correspondence was established between

them and Linneus. Linnaeus also corresponded with John Ellis, who

resided in the West Indies, and Dr. Gardiner, who botanized in Carolina

and Florida. Later he bought a set of plants collected by Patrick Browne

in Jamaica, and received a part of the collections made by Jacquin in the

West Indies.

When the second edition of the “Species Plantarum” appeared, in 1762,

Linnzeus knew and had described nearly 1000 plants indigenous to the

Unitéd States and Canada. Besides these, he described about 1000 more,

natives of the West Indies, Mexico and Central America, and 400 or 500

South American plants. His knowledge of American plants was small

compared with what he knew of plants of the Old World. “Codex Lin-

ngeanus,’’ which enumerates all plants named by Linnzus, contains not

fewer than 8551 species.

BICENTENARY Of LINNAZUS 39

Linneus died Jan. 10, 1778, honored and esteemed by all. Some of

his work will doubtless live as long as botany is studied by man.

We see from the preceding account that we may consider Linnzeus one

of our American botanists. Even the little plant which Gronovius dedicated

to the Father of Botany, the twin-flower of our woods, with its exquisite

perfume and its dainty pink flowers, belongs to a genus essentially North

American. ‘The genus Linnea contains four forms, all closely related. One

of these, the original Linnea borealis, is confined to the mountain regions

of northern and central Europe. Linnzeus discovered it on his Lapland

journey, and it was then considered a very rare plant. Now it seems to be

more widely distributed than it was at the time of Linnzeus. Perhaps it is

of American origin, and has become modified since it transplanted itself on

the other side of the ocean. The other three forms are North Amcrican.

Linnea americana Forbes, which has usually been confounded with its

European cousin, is common in the woods from Labrador to Alaska, and

extends in the Rocky Mountains as far south as New Mexico. L. longiflora

(Torr.) Howell, is found in the mountains from northern California to

Alaska. ‘The fourth form is, as far as I know, undescribed and unnamed.

It is with great pleasure that I here propose the following name and descrip-

tion for this species.

Linnea serpyllifolia sp. nov.

A delicate plant with long creeping stems, 1—4 dm. long, sparingly hirsute;

petioles 2-3 mm. long, ciliate; blades broadly oval or round-ovate, 5-8 mm.

long, minutely crenulate, obtuse, sparingly hirsute, more or less coriaceous

and shining, slightly paler beneath; peduncles 3-5 cm. long, sparingly

pubescent and more or less glandular above, 2-flowered; bracts 2-3 mm.

long, linear or lance-linear, obtuse; pedicels 5-8 mm. long, glandular-

pubescent; hypanthium subglobose, in flower slightly over 1 mm. long,

glandular-puberulent, purplish; calyx-lobes 2—2.5 mm. long, linear-subulate;

corolla pink, open-funnelform with a very short tube, decidedly oblique,

about 6 mm. long and 5 mm. wide.

This species differs from L. borealis and L. americana in the very narrow

and almost glabrous calyx-lobes. In this respect, it agrees with L. longi-

flora; but it is distinguished from that species by the differently shaped

corolla and by the leaves, which are broadest at or below the middle, instead

of above it. It differs from all three in the smaller size of the flower and of

the leaves, and in the indistinct toothing of the latter.

Alaska: Cape Nome, 1900, F'. E. Blaisdell (Type in herb. N.Y. Bot.

Gard.); Kotzebue Sound, Arnott.

40 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Apparently the same plant has also been collected on the Island of

Sachalin by F. Schmidt, but his specimens lack flowers.

After Dr. Rydberg’s address, Professor H. H. Rusby gave an exhibition

of selected lantern slides of flowers of North American plants known to

Linneus, and then Dr. W. A. Murrill led the party southward from the

Museum building, through the Garden, to the Linnzus Bridge, pointing out

on the way the following characteristic American trees known to Linneeus.

Tulip-tree White ash White elm

Sweet-gum Sugarberry Red oak

Red maple Flowering dogwood White oak

Red cedar Sassafras Hemlock

Sweet birch Buttonwood Chestnut-oak

White pine Butternut American linden

At the Linneus Bridge over the Bronx River, on Pelham Parkway,

Professor N. L. Britton, President of the New York Academy of Sciences,

unveiled the bronze tablet commemorative of Linnzus which had been

placed there by the Academy with the consent of the Department of Parks

of the city of New York, and made the following address.

ADDRESS BY THE PRESIDENT OF THE ACADEMY.

N. L. Brirron, Pa. D.

Director-in-chiej, New York Botanical Garden.

The recognition of the work of famous men is one of the happiest duties

of mankind. It stimulates our endeavors and encourages us to make efforts

which we would probably not make without their examples before us.

To-day we do homage to a distinguished man of science, and the una-

nimity with which the scientific societies and institutions of the city of

New York join in this tribute is in itself evidence of the value which 1s

placed upon his contributions to natural history.

Science has made great progress during the two centuries which have

elapsed since the birth of Linnzus. Theories have in large part given

place to ascertained facts, or have been replaced by other theories based

on more accurate knowledge of natural objects and of natural phenomena.

The contributions of science to the welfare, comfort and happiness of

mankind, have made present human life widely different from that of two

Annas N.Y. Acap. Sct. Vou. “XVIII, Puars IV.

Courtesy N.Y. Botan. Garden. THE LINNAUS BRIDGE AND TABLET.

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 41

hundred years ago; and this amelioration of our condition, and the more

general diffusion of knowledge, have been accompanied by a vast improve-

ment in morality.

The ceremonies of to-day are worthy of the great naturalist whose birth

they commemorate. Societies and institutions all over the world join with

us in honoring him, and are represented here by delegates, or have trans-

mitted documents expressing their appreciation of his life and labors. ‘The

public natural science institutions of New York have come to take leading

parts in the subjects they teach and illustrate. Public and private philan-

thropy have developed them with a rapidity almost phenomenal, for they

are all yet in their infancy and on a scale commensurate with the dignity of

the metropolis of America. The cordial co-operation of a municipality with

public-spirited citizens to build and maintain such institutions for the

welfare of the people and of science, finds here in New York its maximum

evolution, which has as yet, however, by no means reached its complete

development or its maximum usefulness. What will be said of their posi-

tion and importance when after fifty years the New York Historical Society

opens the tablet which we now place upon this bridge? And what discov-

eries will science have made for the benefit of the human race during this

next fifty years?

The selection of this bridge, recently constructed by the Park Depart-

ment, as a permanent memorial of Linnzus, is most appropriate. It is

situated just outside the New York Zodlogical Park, with the New York

Botanical Garden a short distance to the north, being thus between the two

institutions which teach the subjects on which the fame of Linneeus chiefly

rests. The suggestion that it be known hereafter as the Linnean Bridge

came from the Director of the American Museum of Natural History.

On behalf of the New York Academy of Sciences I now unveil this

tablet, and present it to the city of New York, there having been placed

in it copies of to-day’s program and other documents befitting the occa-

sion.

After Wennerberg’s song, rendered by the American Union of Swedish

Singers, “Hear us, Svea,” Hon. Joseph I. Berry, Commissioner of Parks of

the Borough of the Bronx, in a few fitting words accepted the tablet on

behalf of the city of New York, and then delivered the key of the box

within the tablet to the New York Historical Society, for preservation till

May 23, 1957. These ceremonies were followed by the singing, by the

chorus, of Lindblad’s “Battle Hymn,” and then the audience listened to

the following two addresses.

42 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

ADDRESS BY THE PRESIDENT OF THE AMERICAN SCENIC

AND HISTORIC PRESERVATION SOCIETY.

GrorGE F. Kunz, Pu. D.

Linnzeus was a great scientist, and the conquests of science have done

more to advance the world than wars, which science may yet render im-

possible. It was thirty years of scientific research in Germany that gave

us artificial indigo. It was pure scientific research that led Moissan, Cowles

and Acheson to discover independently an abrasive substance of a hardness

between the diamond and the sapphire; and then Moissan by scientific

deduction worked out the genesis of the hardest and most fearless of gems,

which, though obtained only in the form of powder, was still the diamond.

Within the past quarter of a century we have seen air, oxygen and hydrogen

liquefied, giving us temperatures absolutely unknown in nature before, and

also the electric furnace, giving an extreme heat such as has perhaps never

existed, unless it be on the surface of the sun. .

Jade, the Chinese stone, has been known in China for more than a

thousand years. Some believe that it was known to a prehistoric race the

existence of which was almost unknown to the Chinese, and whose only

records extant are found as we find the evidences left of the mound-builders,

who passed away before the advent of the white man in North America. It

was not until 1866 that Damour, a scientist, separated jade into two distinct

minerals, nephrite and jadeite; and one of those into two varieties, jadeite

and chloromelanite — facts unknown to the Chinese, though they apparently

knew and understood every tiny fragment they had ever seen of this mineral.

It was the scientist who took three red stones belonging to the King of

Burmah or to the Emperor of China, and proved to him that one was a

ruby, one was a spinel, and the third a tourmaline, and not all rubies, as

they had been regarded for a century or more previously.

Moses was the first great systematizer, and his original assemblage of

the people in tens, hundreds and thousands, is carried out in the military

systems of to-day, and is again reflected in our own and in the monetary

systems of many of the European nations, and more especially in that indis-

pensable and scientific international system of weights and measures, the

metric system. It was Alexander who conquered the eastern world, bring-

ing back with him much refinement, and possibly also the valuable and

industrious silkworm; and it was he also who discovered that the carrying

powers of his camels were doubled if he employed a gold medium of exchange

instead of silver. Czesar, in his attempt to conquer the world, did much

BICENTENARY OF LINNAZUS 43

toward the dissemination of education and civilization, from which Rome

greatly benefited.

Napoleon upturned and readjusted the treasuries of a number of king-

doms, duchies, cloisters and churches in Europe; and, even though his

régime was attended by frightful loss of life, marked and permanent improve-

ment has followed it. But it was La Sage, a scientist, who compiled a

great work for Napoleon, from which he learned what noble families had

lived in all times, and what campaigns had been fought by the various

conquerors; and it was a thorough study of La Sage’s work that had much

to do with giving Napoleon an idea as to what worlds others had conquered,

and what parts of this world were left for him to subdue.

It may not be generally known that it was one of our New York scientists,

Dr. Melvil Dewey, who introduced the card catalogue system of catalo-

guing books, which led to the present system of keeping books by the loose-

leaf system.

It would be easy to mention many who have materially assisted in the

advancement and organization of the multifarious affairs of mankind; but

the other and lower creations of nature outnumbered mankind many thou-

sand times, and the co-ordination of scientific nomenclature covering this

vast domain is due to the great Carl von Linné. Until his time, an animal

was known as a deer in English, a Hirsh in German, a cerf in French, and by

fifty other names in as many different languages. By applying two or three

words as a name to every creature that flies in the heavens above, that dwells

in the earth beneath or in the waters under the earth, he made it possible

for the scientist, whether at the Cape of Good Hope, in Greenland, in New

York, or in the Sandwich Islands, to know not only just what living form

was referred to, but also to understand immediately to just what genus,

class, species or variety, this living organism belongs.

The Linnean system has also greatly aided scientific classification in

natural history, which, in connection with medicine, has given us the con-

necting link in the science of biology and bacteriology. The Linnean

system compares with the natural history of to-day as alchemy does with

chemistry, as astrology and fortune-telling with astronomy and medicine of

the present time.

It is strange that, as well-planned and admirable and successful as the

Linnean system is when applied to the nomenclature of animate objects,

it was absolutely rejected by the then mineralogists and chemists, as the

chemical equivalents and the structure are frequently better expressed by a

single term than they would be by a binominal system.

Had a Linnean system existed when Adam and Eve were in the Garden

of Eden, there would be no dispute to-day as to whether the ‘‘apple” which

44 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

caused their expulsion from the Garden was the identical kind of apple

that has caused so many boys to be driven from gardens and orchards

wherein they trespass to-day, or whether it was a pomegranate, an orange,

a lemon, or some other fruit of which we have no knowledge. If Noah had

known a Linnean system when he took his animals into the ark, and had

so named them, how helpful that would be to us to-day! There would not

be the doubt in the minds of the few who still maintain that evidences of

the flood are to be found in fossil remains, since these would belong to those

animals that were destroyed at the time of the great flood.

We have recorded a history of the past, to-day we have heard much of

Linneeus and his time: let us speak now of the present. For a quarter of a

century it has been our pleasure to know one of the most ardent disciples of

Linneeus that has lived in our land; and had it not been for his untiring zeal,

his keen judgment, his constant application, it is a question whether we

would be assembled to-day to dedicate this bridge to the memory of Linneus.

We remember twenty-five years ago when he first appeared before the

Academy of Sciences, and it is almost that long ago that he first suggested

a botanical garden. The Botanical Garden undoubtedly influenced the

Zoélogical Park, and each successive scientific institution has strengthened

the others, so that, as science stands united to-day, New York is perhaps

and will long remain one of the leading scientific cities in the country, if not

the foremost; and no one more than our esteemed President of the New

York Academy of Sciences, and Director of the Botanical Garden, Dr. N.

L. Britton, has assisted in the unification and the advancement of our greatest

Academy of Sciences. Dr. Britton was the pioneer with the Botanical

Garden. Professor Henry Fairfield Osborn, another disciple of Linneus,

was the pioneer in the Zodlogical Park, which has been so ably conducted

and carried on through that indefatigable worker, Dr. W. T. Hornaday,

who brought to his task a world-wide experience of animals, their habitats

and their characters. ‘Therefore it seems eminently fitting that this bridge

should form a connecting link between these two Siamese Twins, as it were,

of botany and zodélogy in the United States.

It is science that gives us this well-ordered Bronx Botanical Garden,

which, beautiful as it is, is a living botanical exposition, made possible

through the organization of Linnzeus, the energy, industry and intelligence

of a Britton, the generosity of the founders and its trustees and the encour-

agement of our great city of New York.

Although historic sites and buildings may be marked with tablets or with

monuments of stones, yet it was Nero who removed the Greek inscription,

and placed his own, over the architrave of the Parthenon. In 1881 we were

surprised to see some stone-cutters removing from within the laurel wreaths

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 45

on the arches of the bridge across the River Seine the raised letter N placed

there by Napoleon III, and a few days later to see them incise the letters

R. F. (République Francaise) where the N had formerly been.

The value of preserving historic sites or commemorating historic events

by indestructible means, such as medals or engraving in stone or metal,

has always served as a great benefit to those who were to follow. A simple

tablet on the summit of the Jura Mountains tells one when, where and how

the great Napoleon crossed those mountains. A tablet in Russia relates

that Napoleon entered Russia at this point with seven hundred and twenty

thousand men, and less than a year later returned with an army of only a

hundred and twenty thousand, having lost six hundred thousand.

The use of metal and baked tiles for the perpetuation of portraits and

historic events forms one of the most feasible and enduring means. It is

due to the coins and the medals that have been struck since about the

seventh century B.C. that we have an almost unbroken line, for the past

twenty-four centuries, of portraits and history; and to Assyrian baked

tablets, that we have some four thousand years of history recorded.

There should be a most stringent law, a national law, rigidly enforced,

for the punishment of any vandal who destroys, either wantonly or for the

purpose of loot, any monument, as, for instance, the André Monument on

the banks of the Hudson and the tablet marking the Slocum disaster.

It is the honor and pleasure of the American Scenic and Historic Preser-

vation Society to take part in this historic event, and it is its official function

to describe accurately the event in its Annual Report edited by our able

Secretary, Edward Hagaman Hall, and published by order of the Legislature

of this State. So the record of this event will appear in series with that of

the dedication of Stony Point as a park; the re-dedication of the André

Monument; the preservation of the Palisades; the McGowan’s Pass tablet;

more recently the acceptance of the gift of three miles of one of the most

beautiful ravines on the continent, containing three fine waterfalls, presented

to our State by the Honorable William Pryor Letchworth, for which the

Society is to act as a Trustee; and the State’s acquisition of Watkins Glen.

46 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

ADDRESS BY THE PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED SWEDISH

SOCIETIES OF NEW YORK.

Emit F. JoHNSON.

I do not intend to encroach upon your time by attempting to make a

long speech, but I consider it my duty as president of the United Swedish

Societies to express to you, Mr. President, and to the members of the New

York Academy of Sciences, our gratitude for the opportunity you have

given us to take part in honoring the memory of our distinguished country-

man Linneus, whom we are used to call the “Flower King of the North.”

To be sure, our participation in this celebration is limited to the assistance

given by our singing societies and to the presence of a goodly number of our

people in the park. ‘The Swedish minister to Washington, Mr. Lagercrantz,

is also with us, and I take this opportunity to convey to you, Your Excellency,

our appreciation of the interest you have shown by coming to New York

to-day. Our consul and vice-consul are also with us.

I saw a statement in a paper a few days ago to the effect that Swedes

in New York have presented this beautiful bridge to the city. I only wish

that such were the case; but unfortunately we are only about fifty thousand

strong in this neighborhood. Such a gift might well be possible out West,

where, as you know, most of the Swedish immigrants settle, but not here.

Indeed, there are parts of the West and Northwest, where for miles upon

miles you will find Swedish settlements almost exclusively, and all in pros-

perous condition. In Chicago the Swedes have even erected a statue to

the memory of Linnzus, a duplicate of one erected in Stockholm just twenty

years ago to-day. I remember the date well, because I took part in the

celebration, being a student in Stockholm at the time.

It is a great satisfaction to us Swedes, that Linneeus, whose memory is

to-day honored all over the globe, was a man of peace. Every one has heard

of our Gustavus Adolphus and Charles XII, not to mention the old vikings;

but our great scientific men —such as Linneus, Berzelius, Scheele, Celsius,

Edlund, Rudbeck and others — are known only toa select few. Even John

Ericsson the great engineer, whose statue has been erected in Battery Park

by the city of New York, is remembered and honored only on account of

his ship of war, the “Monitor.’’ The fact that he invented the fire-engine,

the propeller, the solar engine, the hot-air engine and other wonderful

machinery, is well-nigh forgotten, though we have in the city to-day about

fifteen thousand pumping engines run with heated air on Ericsson’s prin-

ciples, and the solar engine is being used more and more in California.

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 47

His work was work of peace of the very highest character, and to be com-

mended as such.

There is one part of Linneus’s life-work which may not have been

referred to to-day, and that is his work as an archeologist. While pursuing

his studies in botany and zodlogy, Linneus naturally traveled a great deal

around the country; in doing this, he made careful notes of the mounds,

runestones and other marks left by the ancient inhabitants, which marks are

very abundant all over Sweden. In fact, his writings on this subject have

formed a basis for the very interesting archeology of Sweden. Personally,

I have derived much more pleasure from this part of Linneeus’s writings

than I have from the others, although once upon a time I did know the Latin

names of a few hundred plants. Once more I thank you, Mr. President, in

behalf of the Swedes of New York, and I will close by proposing a cheer for

the memory of Linneeus, and will ask the singers to assist me with a gen-

uine Swedish hurrah.

At the close of the exercises at the Bridge, many people, in spite of the

lateness of the hour, walked through the New York Zodlogical Park to note

American animals known to Linneus. The party was under the guidance

of Director Hornaday and Messrs. Ditmars, Beebe and Blair.

In the evening the literary exercises of the day were continued at the

Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences, Eastern Parkway,

Brooklyn. After brief opening remarks by Mr. F. A. Lucas, Director of

the Museum, the following address was read.

A SKETCH OF THE LIFE OF CARL VON LINNE.

By Epwarp L. Morris.

There is something of human interest in the personal side of any one’s

life, if we but know an avenue of approach. Such avenues are closed to

most of us for most lives. ‘The public careers of great men are matters of

recorded or current history. The professional activities and writing of men

of science are open to those interested along similar lines; but often there

is little opportunity to know the personal and characteristic things which

are the real foundation and basis of success among men.

Our presiding officer has elsewhere said, “In some ways the career of

Linnus reminds one of a good old-fashioned fairy story in which the hero

continually is being provided for. ‘Time after time, Linnzus was taken up

48 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

by some man of wealth who practically supported him and gave him oppor-

tunities for study and research.

“ither genius was rarer in those days than now, or else it received more

substantial recognition.”

In 1706, Nils Linnzeus, a Swedish pastor, and his bride Christina, began

their home life in his parish in Rashult in Smaland in southern Sweden.

About their cottage he had planted a garden of flowers according to a taste

developed while living with an uncle. In this garden the young bride took

special delight, only to grieve sorely at the effects of the heavy winter frosts,

but reacting to the hope and anticipation of the awakening of spring. Here

were more than four hundred species of exotic plants. For such a latitude

and for such a period of the world’s history, this was a most unusual col-

lection.

In the midst of the spring advent of the fowers, in May, 1707, there was

born a son in the home of the parish leader. He was baptized “Carl.”

To-day we celebrate, in honor and praise, the birth of Carl Linneus.

The following year, the family moved to Stenbrohult, to which were also

removed most of the plants from the garden at Rashult.

As soon as the boy Carl could walk, he daily visited the new garden with

his father, where he was the more attracted to the flowers because in his

babyhood the parents had often attracted his attention by many bright

blossoms. A little later he had a bed for his own flowers, which he chose

from the main garden. Later still, he was given a plot for his own garden

beside his father’s. At four years of age, after a visit to a country fair, he

so persisted in asking questions that he practically knew all his father could

tell him,— the Swedish names and the uses of the native plants.

Typically, his mother delighted in the boy’s absorption in the flowers

(she was fond of them too), besides, this often kept the boy occupied for

hours,— an important item in the daily program of the young housekeeping

mother.

Boylike, oftener than not Carl forgot the answers to his questions. His

father noticed this and called the habit mischievous, and refused to answer

further questions till the boy promised to remember what was told him.

This parental training became of the highest value to the future Linnzeus.

Many of the relatives of Nils Linnzeus were ordained to the service of the

church. It was in the wife’s heart to have their son be the same. But

he was averse to all reading not related to natural history or more particu-

larly to botany. His chief activity was to wander over the fields and

through the woods, bring home every new species he found, plant some,

and dry and preserve others. With these he brought in several weeds,

which caused no end of trouble to his father, as they spread to the beds of

BICENTENARY OF LINNZUS 49

exotic plants. He became so proficient in his knowledge of the local plants

that the neighbors all called him ‘the little Botanicus.”

The story goes, that one day his mother found that he had even appro-

priated her much-treasured Bible in which to press some new-found flowers,

and she began gently rating him for this.

“Dear child,” she said, “you must not put herbs and flowers in my

beautiful book. It would be quite a sin to spoil the Holy Bible.”

“Pray forgive me, mother! But these are the most beautiful flowers I

have ever seen, so I thought I would preserve them best of all, for I have

heard both you and father say that the Bible is the Book of Life; and

surely, if I put the flowers between its leaves, they will retain their color,

the Bible keeping them alive forever.”

“Child, when we call the Bible the Book of Life, we mean by that, not

the life we see before us, but the spiritual growth of our souls, for every

thought we think is a flower culled in the garden of our soul. There, as

on earth, grow many various plants, some of wondrous beauty, and others

stained with sin. But every time we humbly read in the Sacred Writ, a seed

is sown in our heart, which some day will bloom, and bear holy fruit.”

“How beautifully you talk, mother! ”’

“Well, you must diligently read your Bible, and in your heart will grow

the seed of goodness and humility; but I fear’ —

“What do you fear, mother?”

“T fear you love the fair flowers of the earth too much to care for the seeds

that were watered with tears in the Garden of Gethsemane.”

“O mother! no, I won’t forget my Bible. But when I see a flower

I think this way, ‘Why does God make the cold, damp earth grow such

lovely creatures with such beautiful colors? Why, if not to make us happy

with the sight?’ And then I almost fancy the flowers saying with their

petal lips, “Look at us, and think how kind and good is God.’ O mother!

every flower must have been a thought by God.”’

“Why, how you speak, child! Well, yes, you are right: it must be so.”

When Carl was ten years old, after an unfortunate experience with a

private tutor, he was sent to Wexi6, the capital of the diocese, to the grammar

and higher grades. But here he failed because there was no teacher to lead

and inspire him, but only those to drive. The boy mentally refused to be

driven. Shortly he was put again under a tutor somewhat better than the

former one; but in every subject except Nature he was considered a dunce.

In eight years his father, with sorrow in his heart, became convinced that

Carl never would make a preacher. His mother, realizing this also, rued

the love she had felt for the flowers and the interest on his part which she

sadly had fostered, and with pique declared to her second son, Samuel, that

he never should devote himself to so useless and wasteful a study as flowers.

50 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

In the words of another, “In this great distress, Pastor Linnzeus called

upon a friend Dr. Rothman, a physician of Wexié who also taught physiol-

ogy and botany in the school. His verdict, however, was, ‘Well, a preacher

Carl certainly never will be, but he might become a famous physician; and’

that profession will feed a man as well as the church. Your son is far

advanced in natural history, and, without gainsaying, the foremost scholar

in botany. Jf you will permit, I will take him into my house: he shall eat

at my table gratis, and I will myself read with him during the year that

remains before he can proceed to a university.’ It need not be told how

gladly father and son accepted this generous and well-timed offer.”

Carl now removed to Dr. Rothman; and this learned gentleman with

great discernment made it clear to his protégé of what great advantage, and

how indispensable, were Latin and Greek for the study of medicine, botany

and natural history.

The dead languages now became endowed with a living new interest,

and instead of Justinius and Cicero, he studied with enthusiasm Pliny’s

‘“‘ Natural History,” performing thus a double study at the same time.

Dr. Rothman grew daily more and more attached to his pupil, who

made amazing progress, and whose transcendent genius became more and

more evident. He found great delight in guiding the young naturalist in

his studies, but soon found, with little surprise and no envy, that his pupil

far outstripped himself, for Linnzeus could acquire no more from him.

Linnzeus must enter the university, and nothing remained but to get the

certificate from the Wexi6 school. It was framed in very quaint and signifi-

cant words; and it is curious that the trope of a tree, carried all through,

should have been applied to the future of the professor of botany. It read

as follows: “The youths in schools may be likened unto young saplings in a

plantation, where it sometimes happens, although seldom, that young trees,

despite the great care bestowed on them, will not improve by being en-

grafted, but continue like wild untrained stems, and when they are finally

removed ard transplanted, they change their wild nature, and become

beautiful trees that bear excellent fruit. In which this respect, and no other,

this youth is now promoted to the University, where, perhaps, he may come

to a clime that will favor his further development.” With this reeommen-

dation Carl Linnzeus went to Lund, the southern university of Sweden, in

1727.

Here Linnzus boarded and lodged at the house of one Strobzeus, who

lectured in the university on natural history, geology, and botany. He was

a man of acknowledged great learning in these sciences, and possessed a

large private collection of stones, shell, birds and dried herbs. At this house

also lived a German student of medicine, Koulas, eight years the senior of

BICENTENARY OF LINNZUS 51

Linneus, who had the use of Strobzeus’s library, and who took upon himself

secretly to lend his young friend what books he required in botany. ‘The old

mother of the learned host had observed that a light burned in the small

hours of the night in Linnzus’s room, and, fearing fire, told her son, who

quietly one night went up to Linnzus’s room to surprise the negligent fellow,

but was himself surprised to find the student in the dead of night busily

comparing the varying opinions of the greatest botanists of his time. This

surprise won the admiration of the teacher and his affection, and he at once

gave Linnzus the use of his library freely, and the keys to his collections, and,

like Rothman, took the liveliest interest in the gigantic strides of progress.

In 1728, Linnzeus changed to the University of Upsala to study under the

renowned professors Roberg and Rudbeck. Here Linnzus suffered much

from poverty, often having barely enough food to sustain life. At length,

under dire necessity, he was about to start for home to his father, when he

made a last visit to the garden of the university. Just then there was a

rare exotic plant in bloom. Linnzeus picked the flower, and was sharply

reprimanded by a voice behind him. He explained that it was for a me-

mento of the place, which he was now obliged to leave permanently. This

aroused the interest and question of the dean, as it proved, — Celsius, senior.

A result of this incident was, that Celsius saved Linnzeus to science then and

there by taking him to his own house, giving him new and large opportunities

at the university, tiding over the time of distress, and procuring for him

opportunities as private tutor to some of the students below him.

Here Linneus brought out his little thesis developing his sexual system

of grouping plants. From now on, Linnzus had a constant chain of promo-

tions, spiced, disagreeably now and then, by jealousies wrought against him,

but consisting of the delights of extensive, dangerous and economic travels,

new positions of teaching and lecturing at home and abroad, and finally the

full chair of botany at the University of Upsala.

His greatest and ultimate joy was in the knowledge that his system of

plant relationships became, before his death, the commonly accepted system

of the civilized world.

To his credit be it recorded again, that his system is the foundation of all

modern concepts of the sexual evolution and differentiation, and consequent

relationships, of all known plants and animals, and especially of their nomen-

clature.

His personal and professional interest were so broad as to include special

studies in insects and birds and in general zodlogy, as time allowed diver-

gence from his life-work in botany. His writings covered the living things

of the Old and New Worlds, and comprised some seventy or more titles.

His personality was of the kind which inspired every pupil coming under

52 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

him to branch out for himself in some line of natural history. His students

became scattered throughout the world.

Up to the last, and as much as his failing health would allow, Linnzeus

kept up a lively and progressive interest in his science.

Finally, tired of life, and forgetful of all honors which had been so keen a

delight to him, he passed beyond peacefully on the 10th of January, 1778.

His works and his name live forever.

At the conclusion of Dr. Morris’s address a musical selection was

rendered by the Glee Club of the United Swedish Societies, after which the

following address was delivered.

LINNAUS AND AMERICAN NATURAL HISTORY.

By Freperic A. Lucas.

I presume that the question first in the minds of many present. is, Why

have we met this evening? why should we celebrate the two hundredth

birthday of Linnzeus?

In a general way, Linneeus may be said to have systematized the study

of natural history, and arranged its known facts in an orderly manner; but

his special claim to our gratitude is the invention or perfection of what is

called the ‘binomial system” of nomenclature, that is, the use of the double

name for each species of plant or animal. This may seem a small matter.

In fact, those who ask Why doesn’t every animal have a common name?

might think they had reason to feel anything but grateful; but it was really

one of the greatest advances made in natural history. For in science it is not

enough to accumulate facts, they must be set in order, or classified, so as

to be available. In fact, Huxley termed science “classified knowledge.”

Before the day of Linnzus, animals were mainly known by their descriptions

or their vernacular name. The lion, for instance, would be called the

“great tan-colored cat with a mane;” and, in order to indicate what species

were related, it would be necessary to specify them each and all.

As the rising tide of commerce of the eighteenth century brought to

Europe scores of animals previously unknown, the number of recognized

species increased so rapidly that it promised to be a difficult matter to keep

track of them. It was at thistime that Linneeus devised the plan of apply-

ing to each animal a general or generic name which should indicate the

immediate group to which the animal belonged, and a special or specific

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 53

name to apply to that particular kind of animal alone. And so binomial

nomenclature was born. It has been claimed that Linneus was not the

first to use the binomial system, but, if not, he was certainly the first to

employ it consistently and to frame rules relating to such use. Linneus

wrote in Latin not as a matter of affectation, but because Latin was the

common language of culture and science, and to this day many naturalists

still write descriptions of new species in Latin, or preface their accounts

with a brief diagnosis in that language. Had he written in Swedish, his

native tongue, his audience would have been a small one, probably limited

to his native land; as it was, his works were understood by all the natu-

ralists of the day. Hence his scientific names which were Latin names

are, like a gold coin, current the world over, while the so-called “popular

name”’ is restricted in its use, and circulates only in the country where it

is coined.

But Linnzeus did much more than devise a scheme of nomenclature: he

systematically defined each and every group of plants and animals with

which he dealt, giving their chief characters in a few brief words; and the

small groups, or genera, he combined in large divisions termed “orders.”

It matters not that the genera of Linnzeus have since been divided and sub-

divided many times, the underlying principle of assigning certain definite

characters to each animal remains the same.

Linneus was a born classifier. He was not happy until he had duly set

in order the facts and objects that came under his notice; and while he did

not, it is truce, carry this to the extent of the eccentric Rafinesque, who made

several genera and species of thunder and lightning, he did propose a system

of classification for diseases wherein they were duly assigned to their respec-

tive families and genera.

To many the term “‘classification” is repellant. It seems to signify some-

thing with which the ordinary man has nothing to do, when really it is some-

thing with which every one is, or should be, concerned; for classification is

simply arranging things in their proper places, and putting things of a kind

together. And the man who puts his cuffs in one place, his collars in another,

and arranges his shoes in a row on the top shelf of a closet, is a classifier.

The naturalist is confronted by the same problem as a general,— that of

grouping or arranging the various plants or animals so that he may know

where each one is to be found, or where to assign any new form that may

come to light. For an army is not merely a large number of armed men,

it is an orderly assemblage of men so classed and grouped that they can be

handled by one man. And the classification of the animal kingdom, for

example, is very similar to that of an army, and to the same end,— that any

one may put into its proper place each of the thousands of units with which

he has to do.

54 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

And Linneeus marshaled plants and animals as a general marshals his

troops. And just as an army is composed of thousands of individuals, dis-

tinguished as officers and privates, formed into companies, regiments,

brigades and divisions, so the thousands of species composing the animal

kingdom are grouped into genera, families, orders, classes and phyla. In

doing this, Linnzus instituted many minor reforms; for example, his char-

acters were given in a definite order, and following the diagnosis was the

synonymy, or list of names under which the animal had been described,

and works in which it had been published. He was the first to strip

natural history of its verbiage, and express himself in clear and concise

language, and, had he lived to-day, I doubt not he would have been an

advocate of spelling reform.

And yet, after all, this scheme of nomenclature is but a part of the ser-

vice Linneeus rendered to natural history. It is not merely that his genius

grasped the fact that nature was order, and that he devised methods for

expressing this order; his zeal in the pursuit of knowledge gave a stimulus

and purpose to the study of natural history that it had never felt before. In

a way, his influence may be said to have been much like that of Agassiz in

the United States, “He imbued [his pupils] with his own intense acquisitive-

ness, reared them in an atmosphere of enthusiasm, trained them to close

and accurate observation, and then despatched them to various parts of the

globe.”’ It was not so much what he knew himself as the enthusiasm he

inspired in others, that made him a power felt throughout the world.

It must ever be borne in mind that nomenclature, or the naming of

plants and animals, is not the end of natural history, but only a means to an

end,— a fact that many of our younger naturalists are prone to overlook.

Too many of them seem to think that the great aim of the naturalist is to

write ‘‘new species” after as many names as possible, when, to my mind at

least, the making of new species is the most trivial work of the naturalist.

It is important work, but only a step on the pathway of knowledge. The

real problems are, Why do these species exist? what forces have brought

them into existence? and what are their relations with one another?

The man who heard an overture for the first time, after listening a while

turned to his friend with the query, When are they going to stop tuning up,

and commence to play? So you may wonder why I chose for the title of this

address ‘‘Linneus and American Natural History.” The truth is that

Linnezus is so intimately connected with all natural history, that American

natural history forms but a small part of the whole. And yet Linnzeus was

intimately concerned with the development of American natural history by

his acquaintance with those men of science who were gathering and making

known the fauna and flora of this continent; and as plants and animals were

/ BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 5)

brought to Europe, most of them found their way to Linnzus, and many

were definitely named by him for the first time. ‘The twelfth edition of the

famous “Systema Nature” describes 210 mammals, 78 of which are Ameri-

can (including under that term North and South America); 790 birds are

noted, of which 260 are American; and 88 of the 124 reptiles are also

American.

We think of Audubon, Baird, Coues and Ridgway as the great American

ornithologists, and they are great; but a glance at the check-list of the

American Ornithologists’ Union shows how prominent a part was played by

Linneus. The list of 1889 gives 729 species and subspecies. No less than

202 of these were named by Linnzeus; while Audubon, the father of American

ornithology, named but 33. Twenty-five bear the sign-manual of Coues,

and 104 of Ridgway. We must, it is true, remember that a considerable

number of the birds named by Linnzeus are species common to Europe and

North America, but, on the other hand, it must also be borne in mind that

many named by Ridgway are what are called subspecies, which were not

recognized in the day of Linneus.

In the time of Linneeus there were few naturalists in the United States,

but those were active; and that they approved of his methods is shown by a

letter of Collin to Linnzeus, in which he says, ‘Your system I can tell you

obtains much in America. Mr. Clayton and Dr. Colden at Albany are

complete professors, as is Dr. Mitchell at Urbana, Va.” If this seems a

pitifully small number to us, it must be remembered that in those days

naturalists were few in number, and natural objects studied but little; and

twelve years later there were in all England but seven botanists who were fol-

lowers of the Linnzean methods. ‘Those were the good times when one man

knew the plants and animals of the whole globe. Now a naturalist may

devote his entire time to the study of one small group, and the names of other

plants and animals are often as unfamiliar to him as they are to the average

man.

It is interesting, almost amusing, to see how little an idea Linneeus and

his contemporaries had of the number of the animals in the world, for their

most liberal estimates were very far from the facts. And this lack of knowl-

edge Linneeus realized when he wrote at the end of his “Systema Nature,”

“Ea qua scimus sunt pars minima eorum que ignoramus.” 'Thus Ray in

1693, a short time before Linnzeus began his career, estimated that there

were about twenty thousand animals, including insects, in the whole world;

and this was a very liberal estimate, for he actually described less than four

thousand.

Now, Ray was what would be termed to-day a “lumper,” and divided

all living things into four great orders, — insects, fishes, birds and beasts,

56 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

the last including reptiles. ‘The number of beasts he stated to be a hundred

and fifty, adding his belief that ‘not many that are of any considerable big-

ness in the known regions of the world have escaped the cognizance of the

curious.” ‘The birds he considered might reach as many as five hundred.

Contrast this with the more than twelve thousand species so far described.

The number of insects he considered might possibly reach twenty thousand

species, a long way from Sharp and Walsingham’s estimate of two millions,

or Riley’s of ten millions. Nowadays this estimate of Ray provokes a

smile, and yet we can find an example of much greater complacency shown

by one of our noted scientific men of much more recent date; for Dr. Coues

about 1880 thought that few mammals remained to be discovered in North

America. How badly he was mistaken is shown by Dr. Allen’s review in

1894, showing that the number of recognized species had more than doubled

in ten years, rising from 181 in 1880 to 369 in 1890; and since then many

more have been described, not merely small creatures that to the ordinary

observers are alike, but large animals like bears and mountain-sheep.

It well illustrates the activity displayed by naturalists of that day to say

that by 1758 the number of known mammals and reptiles had increased to

334 and of birds to 790; the figures in the one case being an advance of

a hundred per cent over those of Ray, and in the other of fifty per cent.

How thoroughly the world is being ransacked for new animals, and how

actively naturalists are engaged in their description, may be gathered from

the following figures. Up to 1830, species to the number of 71,598 had

been described, by 1881 the number had risen to 211,553, and by 1896

to 366,000; more than 150,000 species having been described in fifteen

years. And the vast and ever-growing host of living things — the beasts

of the ficld, the birds of the air, the fishes that are in the water about the

earth, to say nothing of the myriad species of the plant world — are each

and all named in accordance with the method devised by Linneus two

centuries ago. Linneus builded better than he knew, and his work has

stood the test of time; and the methods he devised for classifying and

naming animals are those in use now. His details may have been faulty,

and the groups he considered as genera may have been divided and sub-

divided, but his plan stands.

Scores of animals known to Linnzeus have been swept out of existence,

and thousands that he never knew have been discovered; but the stimulus

given by him to the study of nature remains unchecked, and to-day in

many countries the members of learned societies have assembled, as we have

gathered here, to do honor to the great Swedish naturalist. Sweden, indeed,

chanced to be the birthplace of this great man, but genius is not fettered

by time and space, belonging rather to all time and to the whole world.

BICENTENARY OF LINNZUS 57

At the conclusion of Mr. Lucas’s address the Glee Club sang a second

selection, and then the evening exercises ended with an exhibition, by means

of stereopticon views, of plants and animals known to Linneus, in charge

of Dr. A. J. Grout and Mr. Lucas.

In the Borough of Manhattan the day was rounded out at the New

York Aquarium, Battery Park, where the New York Zodlogical Society

gave a reception to the Academy and the guests of the occasion. ‘This

function likewise commemorated the centennial anniversary of the erection

of the building and gave the first view of the collections by night. A fea-

ture of the reception was the exhibition of forms of marine life known to

Linneeus.

k * * * * * OK

An important and highly interesting feature of the Linneus celebration

lay in the following documents contributed by sister societies in many parts

of the world, and letters written by several of the Honorary Members of

the New York Academy. Each is reproduced here in the language in

which it was sent in.

Kungl. Svenska Vetenskapsakademien, Stockholm.

It is with great pleasure that the Royal Swedish Academy of Sciences has

received in these days, from all parts of the world, the most gratifying testi-

monies of the great admiration and esteem in which our first president,

Carl von Linné, is held by all those who love and study nature. Your invi-

tation has also been accepted with great gratitude: it was, however, received

so late that it was impossible to take any measures for participating in your

celebration in such a way as would have been desirable to us. You have

expressed your wishes that we should contribute an official document appre-

ciative of the work of Linné. There is, however, no opportunity now to

prepare such a document, and we must thus confine ourselves to a short

statement elucidating our opinion.

There were many great naturalists before Linné, if we count from Aris-

toteles to Ray and Willughby. There was certainly a great amount of

knowledge, also, concerning animals and plants; but there was no system,

no scientific names or terms. The facts that were known in natural history

before Linné were thus heaped without order, or with very little order, like

a pile of bricks and stones at a building-place. Linné was the great architect

who made the plan for the erecting of the building, —the system; and he

furnished at the same time the mortar — the nomenclature — for cementing

58 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

together the stones and bricks. It may be admitted that more practical and

more beautiful buildings have been constructed since that time in the scien-

tific world; but he was and he remains the great master, who, with bril-

liant genius and admirable skill, first taught us how to put in order and

systematically arrange the material, and thus make a true science of natu-

ral history. This has also been universally admitted; and the renowned

British naturalist Pennant writes about this part of Linné’s work, ‘“‘He

hath in all his classes given philosophy a new language; hath invented

apt names, and taught the world a brevity, yet a fullness, of description

unknown to past ages.”

Many persons not familiar with Linné’s work have believed that Linné

contented himself with describing the exterior of the objects in nature, and

then named them. Nothing can be more erroneous; that is proved by

the program or the “Methodus” which Linné published even in the first

edition of “Systema Nature.’ This ‘‘Methodus” is in its thirty-eight

short paragraphs the fullest and richest program which any student of

natural history has ever published. Referring to this we may affirm that no

branch whatever of biological study was neglected or underrated by Linné.

He grasped fully the importance of the study of anatomy, and he advised

his scholars to dissect animals and also to make a frequent use of the magnify-

ing glass. His ardent love of living nature made him an excellent biologist

in the restricted sense of that word.

Eyen if his greatest works were of a systematic and descriptive nature,

it becomes evident to any one who has only a superficial knowledge of what

Linné has written, that his genius extended with unbounded flight to cover

much wider areas of philosophical speculation. Although he did not see it

in the light of the theory of evolution,— it was indeed far too early for that,—

the general struggle for existence, as well as the idea of sexual selection, was

well known to him. And many other problems of modern times did he

touch. Let us only recall the fact that to the pious and pure mind of this

great naturalist there was no objection to place homo sapiens as the first

link in the continuous chain of organisms.

His works may shine with everlasting brightness through all ages, as

long as mankind devotes itself to the study of nature. His name is @re

perennius, but this Academy of Sciences and the whole people of Sweden

feel deeply and are gratefully touched by the honor which now is bestowed

upon our great compatriot, when his name is given to a monumental bridge

connecting the Botanical Garden and the Zodlogical Park in New York.

K. A. H. MOrner.

Cur. Aurrvitiius, Secretary.

BICENTENARY OF LINNZUS 59

Kungl. Svenska Vetenskapsakademien, Upsala.

The Royal Society of Sciences at Upsala has had the honor and the

pleasure of receiving your letter, informing them of the impressive manner

in which the memory of their great countryman, Carl von Linné, will be

celebrated in the metropolis of the United States.

To every Swede, and especially to our Society, whose honor it is to count

Linné as the greatest ornament of its ranks, it is highly gratifying to see that

the memory of the man whom all the world recognizes as princeps botant-

corum, is also beyond the Atlantic held so sacred that the two hundredth

anniversary of his birth will be celebrated there with the same love and

reverence as in his own country. And we fully appreciate the delicate

courtesy which has led you to immortalize his name among you by dedicat-

ing to him the beautiful bridge which unites your Botanical Garden with

the Zoélogical Park.

The necessity of answering your honored letter without delay renders it

impossible for the Royal Society of Sciences to enter more fully on the epoch-

making significance of the great Linné’s life and work. Nor do we consider

it necessary for us to do so, least of all in relation to your renowned Academy,

which takes the lead in the grand scientific evolution of America. Do we

not both realize that Linné’s great genius has laid the foundations on which

botanical science goes on building this very day? We both realize the

unceasing debt of gratitude which both hemispheres owe to his immortal

name. And so on both sides of the Atlantic we celebrate with deep-felt

enthusiasm the two hundredth anniversary of his birth.

We offer you our best wishes on the memorable day, and congratulate

you on your successful work in the immense field of learning.

J. A. Exaan, Archbishop of Sweden,

President.

N. C. Dunér, Honorary Secretary.

Professor Hans Reusch, Kristiania, Norway.

(Honorary Member of the Academy.)

In my working-room at the Geological Survey of Norway for many

years I have had only one portrait hanging, — that of Linneus. 1 regard

him as the household spirit of every good naturalist.

60 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The Geological Commission of Finland.

On behalf of the Geological Commission of Finland, we desire first of

all to express our high appreciation of the honor rendered us in inviting the

Commission to take part in the celebration, by the New York Academy,

of the two hundredth anniversary of Carl von Linné.

We are proud to think that we have some right to reckon this great

memory among our own, because Finland in Linné’s time was united to

Sweden; and a large number of us Finlanders are still, by language and

descent, connected with that land. Among his disciples were also several

of our countrymen; and the interest which ever since that period has existed

here for the study of botany, and also of zodlogy, we regard as a direct

inheritance from Linné’s time. Not only naturalists ex professo have taken

part in the investigation of the flora and fauna of our country, but also

physicians, clergymen, government officials and the general public, who

have, ever since Linné’s days, constantly and with zealous eagerness lent

their aid to the augmentation of our store of knowledge in things pertaining

to natural science.

By his travels, among the first which were undertaken for a purely

scientific purpose, Linné has also given an example to the numerous explorers

who since his time have gone out from northern lands — among those born

in Finland we may mention Laxman the explorer of Siberia, Castrén the

linguist, and Baron A. E. Nordenskiéld, the geologist, and discoverer of the

Northeast passage — and to all those who, after Linné’s time, have united

the courage and energy of the pioneer with scientific thoroughness.

We geologists remember in especial that Linné — who had very correct

ideas of the geological sequence among the silurian rocks of Sweden and

the importance of fossils, and whose conception of the geological importance

of the deluge was for his time unusually free from bias — can be reckoned

among the early pioneers of geology and as a predecessor of the great natu-

ralists who somewhat later, in Scotland and Saxony, laid the foundation-

stones of scientific geology. He had a notion of the immense length of

geological time, and expressed opinions which contained the germ of the

actualistic doctrine that afterwards proved so fruitful for our science.

It has been the mission of the Anglo-Saxon nations to work out this

doctrine and to build up on this basis the science of geology. When in our

days we Northerners see without jealousy the hegemony in natural science

pass overto the great nations which have continents for their field of re-

search, we still remember with pride that it was at one time held by the

little nation to which Linné belonged, and see in the festival with which

BICENTENARY OF LINNZUS 61

your honored society celebrates the two hundredth anniversary of his birth a

recognition that all scientific exploration which is carried on in an unpreju-

diced spirit of order and truth is a work in the spirit of Linné.

Remembering the bond which thus connects your great nation with the

small countries of northern Europe, we wish especially to recall to you one

of Linné’s disciples, the explorer Pehr Kalm, professor of botany at the

University of Abo in Finland. He was very highly esteemed by his great

teacher. In Linné’s list of the naturalists of his time, in which each one

was distinguished with a certain rank, Linné himself was general, and Kalm

had the rank of major. Commissioned by the Royal Swedish Academy

of Sciences, Kalm, as is well known, traveled far into North America, and

afterwards published an uncommonly accurate and minute account of his

observations, which was translated into several languages. He penetrated

into what was then considered the Far West, to the Lake of Ontario; and

it was through his letters to Benjamin Franklin, in which Kalm with his

usual minuteness described the Falls of Niagara, that this great wonder of

nature first became more generally known.

What a lapse of time has passed since that visit of the disciple of Linné

to North America!—a time measured more properly by the wonderful

development of civilization than by the number of years that have gone by.

Over this vast continent, where then were forests and prairies, the abodes of

the wild Indian, has the white man now built his homes, and it is strewn

with schools in which the children learn to designate the plants and animals

with the names given them by Linné. Everywhere there are universities

in which the study of natural science is carried on with the aid of means

and appliances which Linné never could have dreamed of. Where Kalm,

at the mouth of the Hudson River, found a town which he says was then _

“about half as big again as Gothenburg in Sweden,” lies now one of the

greatest cities of the world; and in this city the two hundredth anniversary

of Linné is now celebrated in a way that shows that his memory is as much

honored there as in his fatherland.

What a proof of his greatness, what a guaranty that he will forever be

regarded as one of the master-minds of mankind!

J. J. SEDERHOLM.

BenJ. FROSTERUS.

Senaat der Rijks-Universiteit te Leiden.

The Leiden University Senate has the honor to present its congratula-

tions to the New York Academy of Sciences on the occasion of the commem-

62 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

oration festivities celebrating the two hundredth anniversary of the birth

of Carl von Linné. The whole scientific world unites in grateful veneration

of an admirable scholar, whose reputation is least of all lost in the land

where he spent three of the most fruitful years of his life. Our Senate ex-

presses its feelings of cordial sympathy with the way in which the New York

Academy of Sciences intends to celebrate the anniversary of his birth by

the erection of an architectural monument symbolizing the work of a man -

whose genius embraced the two realms of living nature.

For the Senate

W. Noxen, Rector Magnificus.

H. P. Wrisman, Secretary.

Professor A. A. W. Hubrecht, University of Utrecht.

(Honorary Member of the Academy.)

The great Swede whose birth — now two hundred years ago — will be

commemorated all over the world on May 23, passed many years of his life

in Holland. It is thus natural that-many local reminiscences are connected

with his name in different parts of this country. If we allow our thoughts

to go back for more than a century and a half, we can imagine Linnzus

roaming about on his botanical excursions over those same fields between

*s Graveland and Hilversum where Hugo de Vrics lately encountered an

emigrant from the United States (Ginothera lamarckiana) that was to be-

come a starting-point for new and important speculations about the species

problem.

The foundations for an answer to that problem were laid in a quite mas-

terly manner by Linneus. In the latter half of the nineteenth century we

have, however, been accustomed, after reading Darwin’s works, to consider

the problem as non-existing; species, apparently, being in slow and imper-

ceptible continuity. |

Hugo de Vries has again limited species between the occurrence of two

mutations, each species thus being a real entity in time and in space. This

does not prevent de Vries from being at the same time one of the stanchest

disciples of Darwin, in whose steps he is treading.

Linneus’s species differ from de Vries’s in that they are the primary

network between the meshes of which de Vries has spun out the lacework

of the mutation theory.

The new generations thus attempt to continue Linneeus’s and Darwin’s

work, and unite in paying homage to the memory of the founder of the

“Systema Nature.”

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 63

L’Académie de Médecine de Paris.

L’ Académie de Médecine de Paris est heureuse de répondre & l’ invitation

qu'elle a recue de l’Académie des Sciences de New-York, 4 l’occasion du

deuxiéme centenaire de la naissance de Linné. Elle s’associe cordialement

aux hommages rendus 4 la mémoire de l’illustre naturaliste par les corps

savants de la grande cité américaine.

Tout a été dit sur l’ceuvre de Linné et sur la révolution qu’il a opérée

dans les sciences naturelles. Au milieu de la confusion et de lobscurité

qui régnaient avant lui, il a su, le premier, dégager et rendre fécondes les

idées générales éparses dans les écrits de ses devanciers; partout il a porté

Vordre, la clarté et des réformes heureuses.

Observateur incomparable, 4 l’amour de la vérité, il joignait une imagi-

nation vive, un esprit fertile et sagace, l’expression verbale pittoresque et

le sentiment profond des choses de la nature. Ses écrits occupent depuis

longtemps la premiére place dans l’estime des savants, et ]’on se demande,

en voyant leur prodigieuse étendue, ce qui doit le plus étonner, du nombre

de ces ouvrages ou de l’importance de chacun d’eux.

Mais, de tous les titres de Linné A la reconnaissance de la postérité, le

plus beau est sans contredit celui de fondateur de cette langue scientifique

nouvelle, la nomenclature binaire, qui constitue le plus grand progrés

accompli dans les sciences naturelles au dix-huitiéme siécle. A la prolixité

confuse des descriptions antérieures, il substituait un langage net et précis,

en introduisant l’usage de désigner les étres par un nom de genre, qui les

unit, et par un nom d’espéce, qui les distingue. La nomenclature linnéenne

s'est étendue & toutes les branches de l’histoire naturelle; elle en a prodi-

gieusement facilité l'étude en fournissant une langue commune aux savants

de tous les pays.

Le systéme de classification établi par Linné n’a pas moins contribué

aux progrés de la botanique pendant prés d’un siécle. Dans ce cadre

artificiel, les plantes nouvelles se rangeaient aisément d’aprés un petit nombre

de caractéres empruntés 4 la fleur et judicieusement choisis. Dés lors

Pétude des végétaux devint accessible 4 la multitude, les recherches scienti-

fiques se multipliérent dans toutes les parties du globe avec une activité

considérable.

Toutefois, esprit philosophique du grand naturaliste ne pouvait manquer

de saisir toute importance d’une méthode plus parfaite, et, s’il ne lui a pas

été donné de la réaliser lui-méme, on peut dire du moins qu’il en a été le

plus ardent promoteur et que nul, plus que lui, n’a contribué 4 l’avénement

de la grande réforme opérée plus tard par Laurent de Jussieu.

64 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Professeur de médecine, Linné s’est efforcé de diriger l'étude de la

botanique vers les applications 4l’art de guérir. I] aeu le mérite de formuler

nettement le principe qui devait servir de guide 4 la recherche des propriétés

médicamenteuses des plantes, principe fondé sur les analogies des caractéres

botaniques et des caractéres chimiques des végétaux. $i les sueccesseurs

de Linné ont parfois exagéré la portée de la théorie, elle n’en a pas moins

ouvert une voie féconde aux recherches ultérieures.

L’ancienne Société Royale de Médecine de Paris, dont notre Compagnie

a recueilli ’héritage, a compté jadis l’illustre professeur d’Upsal au nombre

de ses Associés étrangers. L’Académie de Médecine de Paris est done

particuliérement qualifiée pour célébrer avec vous |’anniversaire du grand

naturaliste suédois. Elle remercie Académie des Sciences de New-York

de l’avoir conviée 4 cette commémoration, qui lui permet d’exprimer ses

sentiments d’admiration et de reconnaissance pour le savant dont l’ceuvre

géniale a projeté sur le monde une si vive et si puissante lumiére que |’éclat

n’en est pas encore affaibli.

ARMAND GavrtIER, Le Président.

Jaccoup, Le Secrétaire perpétuell.

Université de Lyon.

Le Conseil de |’Université de Lyon est heureux de s’associer moralement

au deuxiéme centenaire de la naissance de |’illustre naturaliste Suédois

Charles Linné. II addresse 4 cette occasion |’>hommage de son admiration

profonde pour le créateur de la premiére classification scientifique des régnes

animal et végétal; pour |’inventeur de la nomenclature binominale qui a

introduit une si lumineuse clarté dans le chaos jusque 14 obscur de la nomen-

clature biologique; pour |’immortel auteur du “ Systema Nature” qui est le

premier inventaire universel des richesses du monde animé.

Il envoie en méme temps 4 l’Académie des Sciences de New-York

l’expression de sa gratitude la plus cordiale pour l’aimable pensée qu’elle

a eue d’associer 1’Université de Lyon & cette féte de la Science internationale.

T. Jounin, Le Recteur,

Président du Conseil de V Unwersité.

Société des Amis des Sciences Naturelles de Rouen.

La Société des Amis des Sciences naturelles de Rouen (France) a |’hon-

neur d’exprimer 4 | ’illustre Académie des Sciences de New York sa vive

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 65

satisfaction de savoir qu’un pont de cette admirable ville sera dédié a

Vimmortel Linné, dont les travaux géniaux constituent la base de la taxi-

noiie, et dont le nom sera perpétué 4 jamais par les innombrables espéces

animales et végétales qu’il a décrites.

La Société des Amis des Sciences naturelles de Rouen prie |’illustre

Académie des Sciences de New York d’agréer |’hommage de sa respectueuse

admiration, joint 4 |’assurance de ses meilleurs sentiments de confraternité.

HeEnrRI GADEAU DE KERVILLE, President.

Societé d’Histoire Naturelle de Toulouse.

ELOGE DE LINNE, APPRECIATIVE DE SON CGUVRE.

“Tibi suaveo dedala tellus

Summittit flores.”” — Lucrrcr, De Natura Rerum.

C’est 4 vous, divin naturaliste, que l’univers entier présente en ce jour ses

plus belles fleurs.

Nous saluerons tout d’abord le savant qui d’un trait de son puissant

génie, saisit la structure intime des végétal. Lui aussi a eu la gloire d’ouvrir

un des sanctuaires de la nature et de s’initier le premier A quelques-uns de

ses secrets.

“Effringere ut arcta

Nature primus poetarum claustra cupiret.’”? — Lucricer.

Avant Linné le végétal d’était qu’un vulgaire objet d’admiration, |’ élément

& la fois réjouissant et décoratif du paysage. Mais le génie du botaniste

que nous fétons eut y lire tout un monde nouveau, et de la comparaison de ce

monde avec celui des animaux sut brillamment degager la nation de hie-

rarchie entre les deux régnes, entre le végétal et l’animal. Alors se dessina

en quelque sorte le premier anneau, la trame primordiale qui devait bient6t

amener |’esprit de homme 4 se représenter une chaine compléte des étres.

Reconnaissons donc en Linné un ancétre de Darwin.

Mais le régne végétal s’est en quelque sorte animé sous le regard de ce

scrutateur amoureux de la nature. Qu’est ce en effet pour Linné que cette

riante parure que nous nous plaisons & appeler corolle de la fleur? Tout

simplement le lit nuptial des organes sexuels, ceux qui reproduiront l’espéce.

Et que seront, examinés attentivement, chacun de ces derniers organes,

tant male que femelle, sinon un renduirent, une ébauche un ‘“‘caneoas”’ de

celui de animal, comme a fait si bien ressortir le physiologiste Bichat ?

C’est cette découverte qui constitue le trait original et saillant entre tous,

le trait de génie, répétons le, de l’ceuvre de Linné. Derriére ’homme de

génie nous devons admirer le philosophe.

66 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Aussit6t que Linné eut eue bien présente dans son esprit la continuité de

la chaine, disons mieux de l’échelle des étres vivants avec leur lois genérales

communes aux deux régnes & la fois, il eut aussi toutes desporées d’une

facon trés reguliére les bases d’une classification des végétaux. -Il les

répartit en vingt quatre categories, basées toutes sur les rapports des organes

miles et des organes femelles dans une méme fleur ou dans des fleurs séparées,

les organes sont respectivement appelés les “maris et les femmes” par

Linné. Signalons 4 titre de curiosité:

La classe xiw, Didynamie.— Deux puissances quatre maris dont deux

plus grands et deux plus petits.

La classe xa1, Monacie.— Une seule maison: les maris habitent avec

les femmes dans des lits différents (dans la méme maison).

La classe xavi, Diacie.— Les maris habitent des domiciles et des lits

divers. |

La classe xxi, Polygamie.— Plusieurs noces: les maris habitent dans

des lits distincts avec des épouses légitimes et des concubines.

La classe xxiv, Cryptogamie.— Noces cachées, les noces sont celebrées

clandestinement.

Cette théorie, toute géniale qu’elle était, n’était pas cependant destinée

a subsister. Elle n’en demeurere pas moins comme le plus beau monument

de Page dor de la botanique. Aussi le chemin était frayé dans le domaine

végétal: la notion de la classification allait devenir un chapitre important

des études philosophiques, et, grace 4 une plus compléte connaissance de la

nature, la philosophie elle méme allait prendre un nouvel essor, agrandir,

transforme son domaine, descendre des hauteurs métaphysiques 4 des données

plus positives. Et cela jusques au jour ot le progrés incessant des sciences

naturelles viendrait introduire une nouvelle idée géniale, grace 4 laquelle

les deux régnes auraient des tendances & la confondu en un seul: par voie

de progrés nous avons nommé cette évolution dont Linné avait jeté les

premiers fondaments. Comme il était loin, quand il écrivait la Philosophia

Botanica de pouvoir entrevoir seulement la grandeur future de I’édifice

dont il jetait las assises! Quelle est enfin l’epithéte qui convient 4 Linné au

milieu de ce que l’on pourrait appeler le “‘choeur des botanistes ?”

Un savant Suisse, Rueper, s’est pli & caracteriser chacun des grands

historiens du régne végétal. I! nous représente le trés subtil Adanson.

Le trés ingénieux Bernard de Jussieu, les éminents Robert Brown et De

Candolle, quant 4 Linné, il a sa place suréminente, c’est le divin Linné,

divers Linnzeus! Le divin Linné! nous lui maintiendrons ce sublime titre,

puisque ce fut un des priviléges surhumains pour ainsi dire, doué des

lumiéres tout 4 fait superieurs, qui sert ouvrir une des portes d’un sanc-

tuaire de la nature, introduisent aussi 4 sa suite dans ce domaine reputé

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 67

inaccessible jusques 4 lui toute une legion d’éminents travailleurs destinés

a eu explorer les recours et & continuer son ceuvre!

Le divin Linné! n’avait-il pas en effet comme profondément gravée dans

tout son étre lempreinte de cette Divinité qu’il ne perdit jamais de vue?

ne considerait il pas Pceuvre qu’il avait accompli dans la science comme le

plus bel hommage qu’il fut capable de lui rendre quelques unes de ses pages

redisent plusieurs fois le nom du Créateur de tous les étres. Comme nous

regrettons de n’avoir pu retrouver cette priére, si sublime dans sa brevité,

dans laquelle il exprime 4 l’auteur de la nature sa reconnaissance eternelle

pour la joie qu’il ressent de l’ceuvre qu’il lui a permis d’accompli! Bornons

nous 4 mentionner les invocations qui terminent un de ses chapitres: —

“O Jehovah, quam ampla sunt opera tua!

Quam ea omnia in sapientia fecisti!

Quam plena est terra possessione tua!”

Ce sont les propres accents de David, au psaume 103, mais sur un ton plus

renforcé.

Saluons en terminant l’heureuse patrie de Linné, la Suede. La race des

génies, si brillamment inaugurée par le botaniste dont nous fetons aujourd’ hui

Vanniversaire deux fois séculaire de la naissance, cette race disons nous, ne

parait pas volontaire s’épuiseren Scandinavie. Qu’il nous suffire de nommer

un contemporain, le celébre chimiste Arrhénius, qui semble lui aussi, par sa

belle théorie des ions, avoir révolutionné a la fois le monde chimique et le

monde électrique, preparant ainsi une nouvelle voie aux découvertes indus-

irielles de Vavenir. L’ceuvre de Linné était dans le régne végétal. Arrhé-

nius a roula la tente dans un troisiéme régne, celui dont toute vie est exclué;

les secrets qu’il croit en ot arrachés 4 la nature sont d’un ordre encore plus

intime et plus mystérieux que ceux que lui avaient derobés le grand botaniste.__

Comme consequence des travaux de ces deux grands hommes, la science

peut dire aujourd’hui avec plus de raison que le hero de Lucréce: Il y a plus

bien de mystérieuse dans la nature: nous avons triomphe de toutes les

barriéres, et nous avons conquis la notion du degré de puissance qu’a été

delimité & chaque étre et de la borne qu’il ne peut dépasser.

“Unde refert nobis victor quid ponit oreri,

Quid nequeat, finita potestas denique eusque

Quanam ut ratione atque alte terminus hcerens.”’

Lucrice, De Natura Rerum.

H. pe Lasrte, Bibliothécaire.

68 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Professor Charles Barrois, University of Lille.

(Honorary Member of the Academy.)

C’est un trés doux sentiment pour les savants de la vieille Europe de

vivre un jour en pleine communion d’idées avec les savants de la jeune

Amérique, pour jeter le souvenir d’un maitre commun, d’un bienfaiteur de

la science. L/histoire, les nations, l’homme ont bien évolué depuis le jour

de Linné; le respect dQ a son nom demeure, et s’en va grandissant. Puisse

son exemple faire des émules nombreux dans votre grand pays, qui de nos

jours rend de si éminents services 4 la cause de la science.

Kaiserliche Leopoldinisch-Carolinische Deutsche Akademie der

Naturforscher, Halle A.S.

Der New York Academy of Sciences entbietet die Kaiserliche Leopol-

dinisch-Carolinische Deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher zu der Feier des

200-Geburtstages von Kari von Linné& einen Gruss, da sie sich eines

weiss mit derselben in dem Bestreben den grossen schwedischen Natur-

forscher zu ehren. War doch unsere Akademie die erste wissenschaftliche

Korperschaft, welche bereits 1736 den jungen Linneus in ihre Mitte

aufnahm und ihm den glanzyollen Beinamen eines Dioskorides Se-

cundus beilegte. Wohl auf keine anderen Geistesheroen kann das stolze

Wort: Deus creavit, Linneus disposuit auch nur annihernd angewendeét

werden. So unscheinbar die Linneus borealis ist, umso grésser steht

Linné als Naturforscher da. Aber nicht nur als Botaniker und Zoologe

erwarb der Jubilar unsterblichen Ruhm, auch in der Medizin leistete er fiir

die damalige Zeit in der Materia Medica wie der Didtetik Hervorragendes

und war wohl derjenige, welcher in Schweden fiir die pathologische Ana-

tomie als bahnbrechend anzusehen ist, da er die Leichensektionen daselbst

einbiirgerte.

Der New York Academy of Sciences gestatten wir uns anbei den Abdruck

eines Aufsatzes zu iiberreichen, welcher zu Ehren von Karl von Linné in

der Leopoldina soeben erschien.

A. WANGERIN, Président.

Rotu, Bibhiothekar.

BICENTENARY OF LINNAZUS 69

Geh. Rat Professor Dr. H. Rosenbusch, University, Heidelberg.

(Honorary Member of the Academy.)

. . . Leider ist es mir bei der Fiille von Arbeit, die vor mir liegt, nicht

méglich, Ihrem Wiinsche [for a document to be read at the Bicentenary] zu

entsprechen, aber Sie diirfen iiberzeugt sein, dass meine Gedanken und

Wiinsche am 23 Mai bei Ihnen in New York sein werden. Mége Ihr Fest

den schénsten Verlauf nehmen und ein freundlicher Stern iiber der schénen

Briicke walten, die den Namen eines der bedeutsamsten Begriinder der

Naturwissenschaften tragen soll.

Thre Nation gibt der ganzen Welt ein nachahmungswiirdiges Beispiel,

indem sie ein stolzes Werk der modernen Technik nach einem Forscher

benennt, dessen ganzes Leben dem hichsten menschlichen Gute, der

Wissenschaft, geweiht war.

Regia Societas Scientiarum Bohemica, Prague.

The Royal Bohemian Society of Sciences in Prague, fully appreciating

the importance of celebrating the two hundredth anniversary of Carl von

Linné’s birth by the New York Academy of Sciences, is glad to join the

sister institutions in honoring this great naturalist, whose efforts in the first

splendid achievements and developments of biology are of perpetual value.

When, in the beginning of modern times, in the multitude of known and

newly discovered organic forms, there was a complete chaos to be feared

instead of an exact distinction of them, it was the genius of Linné which

arranged the masses of raw material into the scientific edifice of a strictly

logical system. Linné’s epochal “Systema Nature’”’ laid the foundation for

all future systematics of animals and plants.

Introducing the descriptive method and terminology, establishing a clear

definition of each species in its genus, order and class, Linné gained a firm

basis for an exact deduction of organic forms. It was Linné who at the

same time united the analytical and synthetical tendencies of his predecessors

into an efficient discipline.

Linné’s method has facilitated the knowledge of the flora and fauna of

whole territories, and we have to thank this method that also in Bohemia

very early efforts for a systematical analysis of the organic world have been

brought to full efficiency.

The Royal Bohemian Society of Sciences, the oldest center of scientifie

70 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

efforts in Austria, has from the very beginning of her existence founded her

work on Linné’s teaching, and has in progress of time, with the increasing

numbers of successful scientists amongst her members, continually contrib-

uted to the systematical knowledge of organic life in Bohemia. We need

only point out the old classical systematicians of zodlogy and botany, —

M. E. Bloch, Von Stein, K. P. Presl, Lad. Celakovsky, and others who

enriched the publications of the Royal Bohemian Society of Sciences in the

spirit of Linné.

And the researches of modern times, so important for the study of organic

life in the enormous mass of its zodlogical and botanical forms, though they

are far advanced in their ideas and methods, still must always gratefully

remember the invaluable deserts of the great Linné for the foundation and

development of biology.

For the Royal Bohemian Society of Sciences:

K. Vrpa, President.

Dr. V. E. Mourex, General Secretary.

¥. Vespovsxy, Secretary of the Class jor

Mathematical and Natural Sciences.

La Société de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle de Geneve, Suisse.

La Société de Physique et d’ Histoire naturelle de Genéve s’associe de

grand cceur 4 la manifestation que font les Sociétés Américaines pour

célébrer le bi-centenaire de Linné.

Genéve, plus que toute autre, s’y associe avec joie: ses naturalistes tels

que les Vaucher, les de Candolle, les de Saussure ont toujours hautement

apprécié l’ceuvre du grand Suédois, et leurs descendants ne peuvent que

suivre leurs traces et applaudir & tout ce qui pourra perpétuer la mémoire

de ce savant.

Notre Société adresse donc des voeux chaleureux pour le succés de la

manifestation américaine, qui sera digne de celui qui a laissé une trace si

profonde dans les sciences naturelles.

A. Bron, Président.

Specula Vaticana, Rome.

The Specula Vaticana heartily joins in your celebration of the two hun-

dredth anniversary of the birth of Carl von Linné.

The astronomers of the Specula recognize a close relation between their

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS Fs

own realm and that of the distinguished Swedish naturalist, in that stars

and flowers are called the “ eyes of the heavens” and the “‘eyes of the field,”

which, with the eyes of the child, are numbered among the most precious

gifts of the Creator.

We rejoice with you that Linné has unfolded to us the beauties and

riches of the eyes of the field, which, no less than those of the heavens, show

forth the glory of God.

JouNn G. Hacen, S.J., Director.

Reale Osservatorio di Palermo, Italia.

Poiché in occeasione del secondo centanario della nascita di Carlo Linneo,

che cotesta Accademia celebrera il 23 corrente, la 5. V. Illma mi ha gentil-

mente invitato a contribuire un documento ufficiale apprerzante l’opera del

Naturalista Svedese, io, non avendo una competenza sufficiente per dire

cosa degna di un cosi eminente Scienrato in una ricorrenza cosi solenne, mi

sono rivolto per aiuto al mio illustre collega Prof. A. Borzi, direttore del R.

Giardino Botanico e Coloniale di Palermo, il quale mi ha risposto con la

lettera che qui Le hascrivo.

“E’tanto difficile dire qualche cosa di nuovo su Carlo Linneo che io mi

trovo imbarazzato a rispondere alla sua domanda. Da quasi due secoli

tutte la vita di questo sommo Naturalista é stata indagata in ogni pid minuta

particolarita, tutte le sue opere studiate con tanta profondita di dottrina,

che io non saprei che cosa dire. Certamente di Linneo si pué affermare

che nessun botanico o naturalista raggiunse a cosi alta fama come Lui:

non y’é persona mediocremente colta che non rammenti il nome di Carlo

Linneo, mentre di tanti e tanti altri insigni naturalisti il ricordo non ha

vareato cosi vasti confini. Il pid grande merito di Linneo, secondo me,

non consiste rolamente nello avere riformato e piantato su basi incrollabili

la sistematica vegetale, ma sopra tutto quello di aver tracciato le linee

fondamentali della Botanica Scientifica moderna divinandone meraviglio-

samente i concetti. Basta leggere il piccolo libro intitolato “ Philesophia

botanica”’ per convincersene.

“Forse potra far piarere all’ Accademia de New York il comunicarle un

documento inedito curiosissimo che interessa la storia del nostro Istituto

Botanico a proposito di Carlo Linneo. Quando nel 1792 si fondd lOrto

Botanico di Palermo fu eretta una statua in onore del sommo botanico

svedese. Lo scultore fu Vitale Zuccio, che la modelld in istucco il doppio

del naturale. Questa statua fu copiata da un ritratto di Linneo, dal Linneo

stesso giudicato il pid somigliante e dovuto al pittore Roslins. Il Zuccio,

72 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

scultore palermitano, non ebbe la occasione di vedere questa pittura, ma

semplicemente una incisione eseguita dall’ artista Bervic nel 1779. Im-

portante pero é il fatto che la prima statua eretta in onore di Linneo fu la

nostra, mentre il primo ricordo marmoreo (un merzo busto) dell’ insigne

botanico, che si conosca, e quello che eresse il giardino delle piante di Parigi

il 1790. La patria di Linnco ebbe al 1820 la prima statua dell’ immortale

suo figlio.”

Io mi un pregio di mandare a Lei una fotografta della statua di Linneo

di cui ha partato il Prof. Borzi.

F. Anceuitti, D7zretiore.

Real Academia de Ciencias Exactas, Fisicas y Naturales de Madrid.

La Real Academia de Ciencias exactas, fisicas y naturales de Madrid

estima como honrosa distincién el convite, que esa ilustre Academia le

dirige, para contribuir 4 la celebracion del segundo centenario del nacimiento

de Carlos Linneo.

Gustosfsima se asocia 4 las solemnidades con que se festeje la veneranda

memoria del naturalista, que, antes y mejor que otro alguno, supo imprimir

érden, método y sistema al estudio y conocimiento de los seres naturales,

dotdndo 4 la ciencia de una nomenclatura y de una nocién de las especies,

base de todas las descripciones y agrupaciones de los seres vivos, posterior-

mente aceptadas.

Espafia se complace tanto més vivamente en la exaltacién de la obra del

sapientisimo maestro sueco, cuanto que por intermedio de un discipulo

suyo estuvo con él en constante comunicacién mientras vivid.

Fenga pues, la Academia de Ciencias de Nueva York por presente en

espfritu 4 la Real Academia de Ciencias exactas, fisicas y naturales de

Madrid, en todos los actos, con que el 23 de Mayo glorifique 4 Linneo.

Jost EcHrecaray, El Presidente.

FrANcIScO DE P. ARRILLAGA, El Secretar.

Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society, Falmouth, England.

To the members of the New York Academy of Sciences and assembled

guests, on the occasion of the celebration of the bi-centenary of the birth

of Carl Von Linné, the members of the Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society

(England) send greetings.

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 73

As the parent of all societies calling themselves by the name Polytechnic,

and having from its birth, in 1832, consistently adhered to the purpose of

its founders, viz., — the encouragement of science, as well as the fine and

industrial arts,— the Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society offers its congratu-

lations to its fellow-workers in the domain of science in the great city of New

York, on the practical and comprehensive character of the commemorative

exercises which their enterprise and wisdom have projected for the interesting

occasion falling on May 23 next. It trusts nothing will occur to prevent

each function from realization in a manner befitting the memory of so great

a benefactor to natural science, and fully sustaining the prestige of one of the

foremost of the learned societies in America.

While leaving it to societies of wider renown to express the world’s

indebtedness and gratitude to Carl von Linné, who has been truly styled

“the father of modern systematic natural history,’ and who was the founder

of the now universally adopted binominal system of scientific nomenclature,

the Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society cannot, on this historic occasion,

refrain from recording its own appreciation of the work accomplished by

one who, though a distinguished son of Sweden, belongs, by virtue of his

brilliant achievements, to every land and people.

The careful and far-reaching character of the investigations of Carl

von Linné probably stand without parallel in the annals of science. Sur-

rounded in early life by conditions which would have deterred most men,

genius and a whole-hearted enthusiasm for the pursuit of knowledge in a

direction where he was destined subsequently to hold a position which,

after the lapse of two hundred years, 1s still unique, his clear insight, added

to his almost incomparable faculty for dealing with vast accumulations of

material, enabled him, after years of constant devotion to his self-imposed

task, to evolve cosmos out of chaos. The foundation which he laid for the

determination of genera and species was the soundest that science had been

invited to adopt, and on it succeeding generations have reared a noble

structure.

What the New York Academy of Sciences has been able to accomplish,

what the Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society has done for the encourage-

ment of the many branches of natural science, what is being done by kin-

dred societies all the world over, has been made possible through the new

era which was ushered in by the publication of the numerous erudite works

from the pen of him to whom all nations are now paying homage.

To-day we think of the student whose indomitable courage enabled him

to triumph over difficulties of the most trying kind, and to fill his appointed

niche in human affairs; of the man whose life was so devout that his first

sight of an English furze-bush, arrayed in all its golden splendor, was to

74 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES i

him fitting occasion for expressing gratitude to God; of the distinguished

scientist on whom the world’s greatest prizes had been freely showered,

selecting one of the most unobtrusive of plants to perpetuate his own name.

After two hundred years, Carl von Linné enters into full possession of his

own well-earned estate, an estate fixed deep and indelibly in the heart and

affections of every student of nature.

Joun D. Enys, President.

KE. W. Newton, Secretary.

The Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society, Manchester, England.

The Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society willingly joins with

the New York Academy of Sciences in its commemoration of the two hun-

dredth anniversary of the birth of the illustrious Linneeus.

His profound insight into the affinities and disresemblances of organized

beings; his vivid differentiation of natural groups; his pithy, crisp charac-

terization of orders, genera and species; and his binomial principle of nomen-

clature, — all exercised a profoundly stimulating influence upon the progress

of biological science.

Nor must the personal merits of the man pass unrecognized. His acknowl-

edgment of the work of his predecessors, his self-sacrificmg labors, the en-

thusiasm with which he inspired his students, and his remarkable humility

— so fittingly commemorated in the Linnea borealis — are qualities which

provoke the admiration of naturalists, alike in the hemisphere in which he

worked and in the hemisphere in which this commemoration is being held. _

Haroxp B. Drxon, President. (

Francis JONES, | Honorary

FREDERICK WILLIAM GAMBLE, | Secretaries.

Professor James Geikie, University of Edinburgh.

(Honorary Member of the Academy.)

I deem it a high honor to be invited to place a little stone on the ever-

increasing cairn raised by lovers of science all the world over in memory |

of Carl von Linné. ‘The distinguished Swedish naturalist has made a name

for himself that can never die. Admirable as an exact observer and care-

ful collator of evidence, and no Jess admirable as a generalizer, he is an

ensample to every sincere student of nature. Before this bright genius

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 75

appeared, the study of natural science was in a more or less chaotic state.

Doubtless much knowledge of living things had been acquired before his

time, but hitherto that knowledge had not been systematized. It was

reserved for Linné not only greatly to increase the stores of learning, but to

indicate how it was possible to group and classify the multitudinous forms

of life so as to show that all formed part of one grand harmonious whole.

One can hardly exaggerate his influence upon the study of the natural

sciences. His was one of those creative, fertile minds from which all who

made his acquaintance, either personally or through his writings, were bound

to catch inspiration. He must have had a most engaging personality, and

was undoubtedly filled with enthusiasm. How otherwise could he have

drawn annually to Upsala some fifteen hundred pupils from all parts of

Europe? His “Systema Nature,’ ‘Genera Plantarum,” “Critica Bo-

tanica,”’ and other famous works, are unquestionably notable landmarks in

the history of natural science. Science and their influence we can to some

extent estimate; but who can estimate the profound influence he must have

exerted on the many thousand pupils who listened to his prelections, and

who carried his enthusiasm with them into every civilized country! Hon-

ored and admired in his own day, Carl von Linné will ever continue to be

recognized as one of the foremost men of all time.

The Royal Society of Canada.

The President and Fellows of the Royal Society of Canada beg to offer

their cordial thanks to the New York Academy of Sciences for its kind

invitation to participate in the exercises commemorative of the two hundredth

anniversary of the birth of Carl von Linné, and express their regret that they

are unable to send a delegate to personally represent their Society on this

most interesting occasion.

The Royal Society of Canada, which has just closed its Twenty-fifth

Annual Meeting, shares with the New York Academy of Sciences and with

kindred associations all over the world, in its high appreciation of the eminent

services rendered to the natural sciences by the transcendent ability, judg-

ment and foresight so remarkably displayed by the distinguished Swedish

naturalist of the eighteenth century. To him is due in no small measure

the modern system of scientific nomenclature, and by him were laid the

foundations of the classification of animals and plants upon which biologists

in all departments have since built their structures of scientific knowledge.

It is therefore in the highest degree fitting that the name of so great a man

as Linné, the precursor of a long line of eminent philosophers, should be

76 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

honored in America in the manner that is now proposed, and that the beauti-

ful bridge connecting the Botanical Gardens and the Zodélogical Park in

New York should by its name perpetually remind the passer-by of the great-

ness that may be achieved by intellectual and scientific attainments. In

an age that may be considered sordid in many of its occupations and aspira-

tions, such a reminder is of great value, and may lead many to think of the

man, and endeavor, in however humble a manner, to tread in his footsteps.

All honor to the name of Carl von Linné! May the torch which he

kindled with the flame of natural science, which has illuminated the path

of numberless followers during two hundred years, never be extinguished!

May we all strive by our diligent work, by our enthusiasm, by our lofty

aims and high hopes, to keep it alive and pass it on, ever growing more and

more brilliant, to those who shall come after us!

Wn. Saunpers, President.

The Entomological Society of Ontario.

The President and Officers of the Entomological Society of Ontario are

pleased to have an opportunity of adding a few words, to the many which

will be read at the commemorative exercises which are to be held on the 23d

instant, in appreciation of the magnificent work which was done for the

whole world of science by Carl von Linné, the founder of systematic natural

history. It is, however, with deep regret that we find it impossible to send

a delegate to take part personally in this celebration.

By entomologists and botanists especially, the name of Linné must

always be held in reverence and respect, for to him is in large measure due

the placing of these branches of natural history on a stable and permanent

foundation. He was indeed the father of systematic biology; and the mem-

bers of our Society feel that too much honor can never be bestowed upon the

memory of so great a man. It is therefore a cause of much gratification

that a lasting monument in the shape of a beautiful bridge crossing the Bronx

River has been erected, which will be a constant reminder to all visiting

the Botanical Garden and Zodlogical Park of the work which was done by

this master mind.

JAMES FLETCHER, President.

CHarLes J. S. Betoune, Secretary.

BICENTENARY OF LINNZUS We

Sociedad Cientifica ‘‘Antonio Alzate,’’ Mexico, D.F.

By request of the Sociedad Cientifica “Antonio Alzate” of the City of

Mexico, I have the honor to represent that distinguished Society as its

delegate to the New York Academy of Sciences on the occasion of the

exercises commemorative of the two hundredth anniversary of the birth

of Linnzus.

The Society Antonio Alzate, which represents the scientific thought of

the Republic of Mexico, is composed of men of high attainments, many of

whom, through the important official publications of the Society and through

other media, have made rich contributions to the sciences of botany, zodlogy,

chemistry, astronomy and other branches of learning. These enlightened

men are in full sympathy with the most advanced men of science in the

United States.

The members of this important Society are fully imbued with the Lin-

nean spirit, and are animated by the same desire to emulate the great

example of the master that inspires their New York brethren.

By the instructions of the Society Antonio Alzate I bring the friendly

greetings and hearty sympathy of its members to the New York Academy

of Sciences as it celebrates this interesting and notable anniversary.

GrorcEe T. STEVENS, Delegate.

The Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Harvard University.

The Museum of Comparative Zoélogy in Harvard University accepts -

with pleasure the invitation of the Academy to participate in the exercises

commemorative of Linnzeus, and it has requested Mr. William Brewster, a

member of its staff, to represent it upon that occasion.

Linneeus embraced the whole department of natural history in its widest

sense. His conspicuous contributions to botany have much obscured the

fact that every field of nature was investigated by him with productive results.

Throughout the entire range of inorganic and organic nature he passed with

steady step, introducing methods of study and systems of terminology which

brought order out of confusion.

Recognizing the indebtedness which all natural science owes to Linneeus,

our Museum joius in the tributes which at this time the whole world is pay-

ing to his name.

CuHarLes W. Entot, President.

ALEXANDER Agassiz, Secretary.

78 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The Boston Society of Natural History.

The Boston Society of Natural History, through its official representa-

tive, Mr. Jozn AsapH ALLEN, sends its greetings and congratulations to

the New York Academy of Sciences, and desires to share in the celebration

of the two hundredth anniversary of the birth of CARL von LINNE.

Upon the basis of the scientific achievements of the great Swedish

naturalist, all subsequent work in botany and zoélogy has been built up.

To his labors and to the system introduced by him, we owe the possibility

of recording, and thereby mastering, the immense and bewildering flora and

fauna of the world. Our debt to him can hardly be overestimated: there-

fore the Boston Society of Natural History is glad to add its tribute of admi-

ration and gratitude, and begs to thank the Academy for the opportunity

of participating in the present noteworthy celebration.

CHARLES SEDGWICK Minot, President.

The Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences.

The Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences gratefully accepts the

invitation of the New York Academy of Sciences to participate in the

commemorative exercises to be held on the two hundredth anniversary of

the birth of Linnzeus.

The Academy appreciates the lasting influence which his work in botany

and zoélogy has exercised on the development of these sciences throughout

the whole world. Through his profound studies he was enabled to bring

order out of the chaotic writings of his predecessors, to establish the science

of taxonomy on a firm and satisfactory basis, and to prepare the way for a

natural and logical classification of plants and animals.

The Academy has the honor to appoint Professor ALEXANDER W. Evans

as its authorized representative.

A. E. VERRILL, President.

GrorcE F. Earon, Secretary.

The American Journal of Science.

The editorial staff of the ‘American Journal of Science’’ — whose birth

in 1818 was contemporaneous with the beginnings of natural science in this

country, and which for nearly a century has kept pace with the growth of

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 79

science, and ever striven to support and stimulate it — desires to express to

you its profound appreciation of the debt we all owe to the great Swedish

naturalist whose birth in 1707 you commemorate.

If science is classified knowledge, the highest credit belongs to him who

brings scientific facts and observations into a rational system: in this work

Linneus stands pre-eminent. To his keen mind it was given not only to

bring order among the genera and species of plants and animals, not only

to build up a lasting system of nomenclature, but also to develop in these

directions, as in the broader relations, a profound basis of classification

which has had a lasting influence upon science in all its branches.

Epwarp S. Dana, Editor-in-chiej.

The Torrey Botanical Club, New York City.

A clearly-stated conspectus of contents and an index so arranged that one

may consult the contents with a minimum of labor are two crowning features

of any volume. ‘They reveal a systematic as well as a constructive intelli-

gence on the part of the author, and mark the boundaries between chaos

and clearness. It is with this feeling that botanists look back to Linnzus,

not so much for the originality of his research as for his gift of order, by

means of which the unclassified botanical observations of two centuries were

reduced to a system. It matters not that this system perished almost in a

generation; it served a purpose in its own day, and made progress possible

to those who had previously been wandering over a boundless sea with

neither stars nor sun to guide them. Linneus is remembered, not because

of his research, but because of his arrangement of existing knowledge in a

usable form.

In spite of his blunders (for he was not free from them), in spite of his

arbitrary substitutions of his own work for the clearer work of others, in spite

of the fact that he emphasized system at the expense of the broader principles

of comparison, and withal contributed to the fixing, for five generations,

the dogma of constancy of specific characters,— botanists will always regard

Linnzus as one of the truly great. He was the ‘father of botany,’’ not

even its elder brother. He was not the author of binomial nomenclature,

for that originated before Linnzus was born; he was the first who was able

to look at the existing knowledge of plant life with some degree of perspective,

and he reduced that knowledge to a system, that botany might later become

a science.

Lucien M. UnNpERWoopD, Committee.

80 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

New York Entomological Society.

IN MEMORY OF CAROLUS LINNZUS, 1707-1778.

The name of Linneus, the illustrious naturalist who first pointed out

the real utility of some system by which the great kingdoms of nature could

be systematically arranged, is known to the whole civilized world.

Linnzus was not only a naturalist of most accurate observation, but of a

philosophical mind, and upon this depended in a great degree the unpar-

alleled influence which he exercised upon the progress of every branch of

natural history.

If we consider the difficulties which beset his early scientific career, the

limited number of collections of animals and plants at his command, we must

admit that the merit which his contemporaries awarded him was very

justly earned.

Among the important services which he rendered to science was the

creation of a natural system of classification and the introduction of a more

precise nomenclature, which in the main is followed to-day.

While quite young he received his first inspiration for natural history

in his father’s garden, which was planted with many rare shrubs and flowers.

Those sparks which were kindled in the early part of his life at last burst

into such a flame of intensity, that the marks are indelibly left upon the

sciences.

Entomology owes much to the work of this great man.

In his “Systema Nature” (tenth edition), he divided the insects into

seven orders, as follows: Coleoptera, Hemiptera, Lepidoptera, Neuroptera,

Hymenoptera, Diptera and Aptera.

The modern orders Forficulidae and Orthoptera were placed with the

Coleoptera; the order Thysanoptera, with the Hemiptera. The order

Neuroptera included the modern orders Ephemerida, Plecoptera, Isoptera,

Corrodentia, Platyptera, Neuroptera, Mecoptera, Trichoptera and Odonata.

The order Aptera contained all the insects without wings or elytra, except

the females of Mutillide, including also those arthropods which form to-day

the classes of Arachnida and Myriapoda. Each order contained a small

number of genera which were not arranged into families.

Of the many insects described by him, about three hundred species

occur in the United States, most of which were originally described from

Europe, and some from South America. Of the different orders repre-

sented, Linnzeus described seven species of Neuroptera, four species of

Odonata, twelve species of Orthoptera, twenty-seven species of Hemiptera,

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 81

a hundred species of Coleoptera, fifty species of Diptera, twenty-eight

species of Hymenoptera and sixty-six species of Lepidoptera.

The New York Entomological Society appreciates this opportunity of

paying tribute to the memory of the man through whose wonderful far-sight

and scientific attainment we are better able to understand the great system

of nature.

C. W. Lene, President.

H. G. Barner, Secretary.

INSECTS DESCRIBED BY LINNAXUS WHICH ARE KNOWN TO OCCUR

IN NORTH AMERICA?

Hymenoptera.

Rhodites rose

Rhyssa persuasoria

Chalcis minuta

Pteromalus puparum

Formica fusca

me, TurS

Lasius niger

Odontomachus hzematodes

Tetramorium cespitum

Monomorium pharaonis

Sphzrophthalma occidentalis

Pompilus tropicus

Chalybion ceruleum

Sphex ichneumonea

Danais plexippus

Heliconius charitonius

Agraulis vanille

Vanessa antiopa

Pyrameis atalanta

Victorina steneles

Anartia jatrophe

Ageronia feronia

Diadema misippus

Calephelis csenius

Leptalis melite

Catapsilia eubule

x philea

Sphex pennsylvanica

Oxybelus uniglumis

Monobia quadridens

Polistes canadensis

5 carolinus

annularis

Vespa crabro

“maculata

rufa

vulgaris

Coeelinxyz quadridentata

Bombus carolinus

i hortorum

Apis mellifera

“e

iz9

“

Lepidoptere.

Cosmosoma auge

Utetheisa ornatrix

Phragmatobia fuliginosa

Euplexia lucipara

Dyptergia scabriuscula

Pyriphila pyramidoides

s tragopoginis

Perodroma oculta

Scoliopterix libatrix

Plusia culta

Ophiderus materna

Erebus odora

Euproctis chrysorrhea

1Contributed by the New York Entomological Society.

82 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Papilio ajax

i philenor

polydamus

mackaon

troilus

turnus

elaucus

Pamphila comma

Aillopus tantalus

ie ixion

Triptogon lugubris

Choerocampa tersa

Argeus labruscee

Pachylia ficus

Pholus vitis

Pseudosphinx tetrio

Dilophonota ello

Phlegothontius carolina

Sphinx pinastri

Samia cecropia

Cicindela carolina

i virginia

Elaphrus riparius

Blethisa multipunctata

Loricera czerulescens

Bembidium ustulatum

i 4-maculatum

Casnonia pennsylvanica

Eretes sticticus

Dytiscus marginalis

Hydrobius fuscipes

Spheridium scarabeeoides

Cercyon melanocephalum

a unipunctatum

Silpha americana

“ opaca

Staphylinus erythropterus

Tachyporus chrysomelinus

Conosoma littoreum

Hippodamia, 13-punctata

Coccinella trifasciata

if sanguinea

Adalia bipunctata

Harmonia 14—guttata

Chilocorus cacti

Bombyx mori

Hydria undulata

Eustroma papulata

Rheumaptera hastata

3 tristata

Philobia notata

Eramis defoliaria

Anagoga pulveraria

Zeuzera pyrina

Sesia culiciformis

“ tipuliformis

Diaphamia hyalinata

Pyrausta octomaculata

Pyralis farinalis

Crambus puscuellus

Calleria mellonella

Ophomia sociella

Orneodes hexadactyla

Olethreutes hartmanniana

Carpopapsa pomonella

Coleoptera.

Ptinus fur

Ernobius mollis

Sitodrepa panicea

Phanzeus carnifex

Aphodius fossor

me erraticus

fimetarius

granarius

Trox scaber

Polyphylla occidentalis

Pelidnota punctata

Dynastes tityus

Cotinis nitida

Euphoria inda

Mallodon melanopus

Prionus imbricornis

Hylotrupes bajulus

Achryson surinamum

Tragidion coquus

Leptura sexmaculata

Lagochirus araneiformis

Crioceris asparagi

ef 12-punctatus

Adoxus obscurus

“< vitis

tas

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS

Hyperaspidius trimaculatus

Silvanus surinamensis

Typhcea fumata

Dermestes lardarius

Attagenus pellio

Anthrenus scrophulariz

2 muszorum

Hister bimaculatus

Carpophilus hemipterus

Epurea estiva

Nitidula bipustulata

pi ©‘rufipes

Omosita colon

Latridius minutus

Tenebriodes mauritanica

Peltis ferruginea

Cyphon padi

Alaus oculatus

Corymbites tesselatus

se cruciatus

Ellychnia corrusca

Photinus pyralis

Buprestis aurulenta

Lamphrohiza splendida

Necrobiaviolacea

Pachycoris fabricii

Euthyrhynchus floridanus

Mormidea ypsilon

Euschistus ictericus

Nezara vividula

Edessa arabs

Leptoglossus phyllopus

5 balteatus

Ligyrocoris sylvestris

Emblethis arenarius

Largus succinctus

Dysdercus andre

Leptopterna dolobrata

Lygus pratensis

Trichocera regelationis

Xiphura atrata

Chironomus pedellus

" plumosus

Prasocuris Phellandrii

Chrysomela philadelphica

Gastroidea polygoni

Lina lapponica

Gonioctena pallida

Phyllodecta vulgatissima

Trirhabda tomentossa

Crepidodera rufipes

= Helxines

os Modeeri

Bruchus pisorum

«chinensis

Blaps mortisaga

Unis ceramboides

Tenebrio molitor

Nacerdes melanura

Brachyderus incanus

Otiorhynchus ovatus

Elleschus bipunctatus

Cionus scrophulariz

Cryptorhynchus lapathi

Rhinoncus pericarpius

Brenthus anchorago

Rhynchophorus palmarum

Calandra oryze

Hemiptera.

Capsus ater

Monalocoris filicis

Halticus apterus

Acanthia lectularia

Coriscus ferus

Arilus cristatus

Heza acantharis

Zelus longipes

Reduvius personatus

Salda littoralis

“¢ saltatoria

Corixa striata

Lygus pabulinus

Diptera.

Eristalis tenax

Syritta pipiens

Gastrophilus hemorrhoidalis

oe nasalis

84 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Orthocladius barbicornis

Cricotopus tremulus

Tanypus monilis

Culex pipiens

Scatapse notata

Simulius reptans

Hermetia iJlucens

Sargus cuprarius

Microchrysa polita

Tabanus mexicanus

Anthrax moris

Bombylius major

Scenoppinus fenestralis

Laphira gilva

Erax eestuans

Leucozona lucorum

Lasiophthicus pyrastri

Syrphus ribesii

Spherophoria seripta

Sericomyia lappona

Doliosyrphus nemorum

Forficula auricularia

Labia minor

Blatta germanica

Stylopyga orientalis

Periplaneta americana

Pycnoscelus surinamensis

Trithemis umbrata

Tramea carolina

Clothilla pulsatoria

Cecilius pedicularis

Chauliodes pectinicornis

Limnophilus rhombicus

os griseus

(éstrus oris

(Edemagena tarandri

Melanophora roralis

Cynomyia mortuorum

Calliphora vomitaria

Lucilia xeesor

Pyrellia cadaverina

Musca domestica

Stomoxys calcitrans

Hamalomyia canicularis

Anthomyia pluvialis

cr radicum

Scatophaga stercoraria

Tetanocera umbrarum

Scaptera nibrans

Themira patris

Piophila casei

Scyphella flava

Hippobosca equina

Ornithomyia avicularia

Melaphagus ovinus

Orthoptera.

Stagmomatis carolina

Achurum brevicornis

Dissosteira carolina

Cyrtophyllus perspicillatus

Conocephalus triops

Gryllus domesticus

Odonata.

Libellula quadrimaculata

7@schna juncea

Corredontia.

Psocus sexpunctatus

Platyptera.

Corydalus cornutus

Trichoptera.

Leptocerus niger

BICENTENARY OF LINNAZUS 85

The Staten Island Association of Arts and Sciences.

It has been said by Taine that “every book and every man may be

reviewed in five pages, and those five pages in five lines.”” On this occasion,

however, we are not asked to review the life or the books of the man in whose

honor we are assembled, but to testify as briefly as may be to our appreciation

of his work and what this work has meant to his posterity. Such a task is

different from that which the reviewer is ordinarily called upon to perform;

and to do it justice in words, within a reviewer’s recognized limitations,

would be impossible in connection with the name of Linneus. Fortunately,

however, words are not necessary, and indeed are superfluous, where this

appreciation is so clearly demonstrated in the fact that we accept the prin-

ciples which he formulated, and pursue the methods which were his, in all

of our scientific activities. By merely recognizing and calling attention to

this fact, we show our respect for the man and what he has wrought far

better than by even the most earnest and sincere attempt to express our

sentiments in words.

Consciously or unconsciously the influence of Linnzus is felt by all

modern scientific workers. System, or rather the ability to systematize,

is the key to progress in all lines of human endeavor; and science in particular

owes its present commanding position to those who have recognized and

applied the principles of Linnzus in their work, and who have accepted

and applied his rules for the nomenclature of natural objects.

Linnzeus was pre-eminently a systematist, and it was this habit of mind,

more than anything else, which raised him above his contemporaries in

science. Without his masterly ability to co-ordinate and arrange his work

in logical sequence and coherent groupings, his great powers of observation

would have lacked completeness. This ability was the special characteristic

which enabled him to revolutionize the scientific work of his age and to

influence so profoundly all that has followed.

To Linnzus may well be applied the words of Bourget: ‘‘In life every-

thing is unique, and nothing happens more than once.”

ArtHur Ho.tick, Delegaie.

New York State Museum.

Linné’s contributions to systematic biology are brilliantly exemplified

by one of his species of fossil brachiopods, the Anomites reticularis. No

organism which ever appeared in the long history of the earth has had a

8&6 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

career so noteworthy for the stability of its specific characters. It made its

début in the Midsilurian era, and thence onward it survived through the

long ages of the Devonian and into the Carboniferous, without at any time

departing from the specific type.

Anomites reticularis stands as the ideal of conservatism, the very shib-

-boleth of heredity, Nature’s ultimate expression of stability in the organic

world. Its life was the longest that ever fell to the lot of organic species;

its period beheld the rise and fall of many another race; an endless processiun

of creations saluted it and passed on, as we to-day, after two hundred

years, salute the great Swede, and pass on to join the multitude.

JoHN M. Cuiarkeg, Director.

The Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences.

The Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences, in expressing its thanks to your

honorable Society, and its appreciation of its privilege in being permitted

by your courteous invitation to share in your celebration of the two hundredth

anniversary of the birth of Carl von Linné, desires to add its tribute of

praise to the memory of that great reformer in the work of natural science.

The world must ever be grateful to Linnzeus for the wonderful knowledge,

born of close and accurate observation, and for the clear vision and admirable

judgment which enabled him to index the book of Nature, to substitute order

for confusion, and, by the judicious simplicity of the laws laid down by him

in his methods of classification, to convert, what before his time had been

chaotic, into the orderly ways that characterize the modern systematic

study of botany and biology.

To him and to his work we turn as the starting-point for these scientific

studies which since his day have been so nobly developed by those who have

been his successors.

Though his system may have been superseded by the philosophical

conclusion of other famous workers in botanical science during the past two

centuries, the revolution which he wrought in that great department of

nature study, the lucidity and simplicity of the reforms in method which he

first proposed, have crowned him as one of the greatest leaders known to

the annals of science, and as such we honor and revere his memory.

We ask you to accept our felicitations on this interesting occasion.

T. Guitrorp Smita, President.

Cartos E. Cummines, Secretary.

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 87

The American Philosophical Society.

The American Philosophical Society held at Philadelphia for Promoting

Useful Knowledge sends cordial greetings to the New York Academy of

Sciences on the occasion of the celebration of the two hundredth anniversary

of the birth of Carolus Linneeus.

Out of the mechanical and inorganic systems of ancient and medieval

times this great Swedish naturalist constructed an organized system, which,

assisted by the binomial nomenclature, established order and system in the

natural sciences. This system has guided clearly the mind of man in the

classification of natural objects, and has made the name of its author

immortal.

In the year 1770 The American Philosophical Society, in recognition

of the valuable services Carolus Linnzeus rendered to science, elected him

to its membership, and now, a hundred and thirty-seven years later, this

Society takes pleasure in uniting with the New York Academy of Sciences

in doing honor to his memory.

Signed and sealed on behalf of The American Philosophical Society

held at Philadelphia for Promoting Useful Knowledge.

Epae@ar F. Smita, President.

J. Minis Hays, Secretary.

The National Academy of Sciences, Washington, D.C.

I am directed by President Ina REeMSEN of the National Academy of

Sciences to convey the greetings and congratulations of the National Acad-

emy on this occasion of the celebration of the two hundredth anniversary

of the birth of Linnzus. I desire to present a brief appreciation of Linneeus

from the standpoint of comparative anatomy and classification of the

mammalia.

The period of Linnzus was that of his active scientific life, between 1730

and 1795. Linneus did not introduce the term “Mammalia” until the

tenth edition of the “Systema” (1758). In following the suggestions of

Ray, Bernard de Jussieu, and, it is also claimed, of Blumenbach, he sepa-

rated the hairy quadrupeds, the manatees and whales, as a single class,

noting among the distinctive characters the position of the mamme and the

hairy covering. His education as a physician qualified him to define the

class through the internal anatomical characters,— the heart, the lungs,

the sense organs,— as well as through external characters. In arranging

88 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

the mammals he sought for natural groupings, and endeavored to find the

hidden bonds of structural affinity as indicated by comparative anatomy,

although he did not recognize that the real basis of affinity is to be found in

kinship of evolution from similar ancestral forms.

His scientific independence and genius were indicated especially by his

inclusion of man with the apes and monkeys in the order Primates. It was

a mark of genius that Linneeus felt the force of the anatomical likeness of

man to his lower relatives and that he had the courage to definitely ally him

with them from a strictly zodlogical view-point. This is the very starting-

point of all modern philosophy, that man is linked by ties of blood kinship

to the whole organic world.

That Linnzeus’s system is based in part on adaptive resemblances or

analogies, rather than on structural affinities or homologies, is not surprising,

because it is only recently that naturalists have been able to distinguish

analogies from homologies.

Henry Farrrretp Osporn, Delegate.

The Smithsonian Institution of Washington, D.C.

The Smithsonian Institution, uniting with the New York Academy of

Sciences in its appreciation of Carl von Linné, cordially accepts its invitation

to participate in exercises commemorative of the two hundredth anniversary

of the birth of the great Swedish naturalist.

The Smithsonian Institution, in response to the invitation to take part in

the Academy’s celebration of the bicentenary by an appreciative record of

the work of von Linné, needs only to recall the great impulse which he gave

to natural science by his industry and methods, and the facility for expression

of facts by his binomial system of nomenclature. But the philosophic

generalization which was recorded in the name of Mammalia may be espe-

cially recalled as the greatest morphological triumph of the Linnean era.

Cuas. D. Watcort, Secretary.

The Biological Society of Washington, Washington, D.C.

The Biological Society of Washington acknowledges with pleasure the

invitation of the New York Academy of Sciences to take part in its cele-

bration of the two hundredth anniversary of the birth of Carl von Linné,

and is glad to unite in paying fitting tribute to the memory of the man who

is justly regarded as the father of the biological sciences.

BICENTENARY OF LINNAUS 89

It is, in fact, scarcely possible to overestimate the influence his work and

personality had in shaping the future of botany and zodlogy; and coming

generations of biologists will continue to rejoice, as we now do, that he laid

the foundations of their science so deep and so broad.

The vocabulary of superlatives to praise his genius has long since been

exhausted; but we who daily and hourly profit by the laws he enunciated

may well pause in our work to exult because, two hundred years ago, Sweden

gave to the world a light that will continue to shed luster upon her name so

long as the biological sciences exist.

LEONHARD STEJNEGER, President.

Witrrep H. Oscoop, Secretary.

The Indiana Academy of Sciences, Indianapolis, Ind.

The criterion by which a man’s greatness is judged is his work. If this

gains recognition from his contemporaries, he is successful; if his name

lives to be honored by succeeding generations, his career has been more than

successful, he has achieved fame; but, if he leaves behind him some piece of

work or the record of some discovery from which his successors reckon time,

his is a distinction which comes to few men, and to which none dare aspire.

Such is the record of Linneus. He was a recognized leader among his

contemporaries; his co-ordination of the chaos which then existed in the

natural sciences gave him fame; and the successful application of the bino-

mial system of nomenclature to animals and plants made his works the point

from which the taxonomist measures time. Nor is the homage the expression

of the whim of a group of hero-worshipers. To-day the system of Linnzeus

is discarded by taxonomists, and much of his work is forgotten; but as long

as systematic botany and zodlogy have their devotees among men of science,

so long will his name be remembered and his fame endure as the one who

first brought the binomial system of nomenclature into gencral use.

Guy West Wi1son, for the Academy.

The Colorado Scientific Society, Denver, Colo.

The Colorado Scientific Society, the oldest and largest scientific associa-

tion of the Rocky Mountain region, sends greeting to its elder sister in the

metropolis of America, and extends congratulations on the successful com-

pletion of the memorial in honor of the world’s greatest botanist. How

great must be the power of the savant whose influence can extend over

90 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCE

such great gulfs of space and time as those which separate the sage of

Upsala from the naturalists of the Rocky Mountains, the lands of the

midnight sun from the dome of the North American Continent, the dawn

of the eighteenth from that of the twentieth century!

In common with the rest of the scientific world, we are greatly indebted

to him who initiated the modern system of a concise and descriptive nomen-

clature, to him who found “biology a chaos, and left it a cosmos,” and to

him who made it possible for finite minds to grasp the thoughts of the Infinite

in the world of life.

Colorado is especially indebted to Linnzeus from the fact that, owing to

the general similarity of our Alpine flora to the plants of the Scandinavian

Alps, a large portion of our mountain plants was originally described by the

father of botany, and so well classified and described, that the notoriety-

seeking, hair-splitting species-makers do not venture to meddle with the

work of the master hand.

We are proud of the fact that on the snowy summits of our higher peaks

grows in abundance the tiny pink-tipped flower which the innate modesty

of the true savant led him to select from all the wealth of the floral world to

perpetuate his name in coming generations.

G. L. Cannon, President.

——_

a ae a

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

[Lycreum or Natura History, 1818-1876]

The publications of the Academy consists of two series, viz. :

_ (1) ‘The Annals (Octavo series), established in 1823, contain the scien-

tific contributions and reports of researches, together with the records of

meetings and similar matter.

A volume of the Annals will in general coincide with the calendar year

and will be distributed in parts. The price of the current issues is one

dollar per part or three dollars per volume. Authors’ reprints are issued

as soon as the separate papers are printed, the dates appearing above the

title of each paper.

(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are ened at

irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to

monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume 1

is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II, to Zodlogical Memoirs,

etc. ‘The price is one dollar per part, as issued.

All publications will be sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The

Annals will be sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them.

Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discontinued with

the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the Annals.

Subscriptions and inquiries concernizig current and back numbers of

_any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to

_ Tue Liprarian,

New York Academy of Sciences,

care of

American Museum of Natural History,

New York City.

“w

PART I.

CONTENTS OF VOL. XVIII,

tenary of the Birth of Carolus

The Bi

;

Linneus

ANNALS

OF } THE

NEW YORK

EDITOR

Edmund Otis Hovey

NEW YORK

PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY

1908

PART II

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

OrFIcers, 1908.

President — CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Station.

Recording Secretary — E. O. Hovey, American Museum.

Corresponding Secretary — H. E. Crampton, Barnard College.

Treasurer — EMERSON McMi tin, 40 Wall Street.

Librarian — Ratpx W. Tower, American Museum.

Editor — Epmunp Ot1s Hovey, American Museum.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Chairman — A. W. Grapav, Columbia University.

Secretary — C. P. Berxey, Columbia University.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY. .

Chairman — Frank M. Cuapman, American Museum.

Secretary — Roy W. Miner, American Museum.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

Chairman — ApotF Meyer, Ward’s Island.

Secretary —R.S. Woopworts, Columbia University.

Sessions of 1908.

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8:15 o’clock from Octo +:

ber to May, inclusive, in the American Museum of Natural History, 77th

Street and Central Park, West. ‘ a

| fAnnats N.Y. Acap. Scr., Vol. XVIII, No. 2, Part I, pp. 91-127. January, 1908.]

NEW SPECIES AND GENERA OF THE LEPIDOPTEROUS

FAMILY NOCTUID FOR 1907. PART II.!

By Joun B. Smita, Sc.D.

No branch of zoélogy has profited more by the explorations and collec-

tions made during the past decade than entomology. Not only have new

species been found in localities collected over for the first time, but, as the

result of more thorough investigation of the fauna of older regions, we have

learned that mere resemblance to species of other faunal regions does

not mean necessarily specific identity. With more abundant material, our

conception of the limits of species became more accurate, and definition

became possible.

In the Canadian northwest a quite distinct noctuid fauna is becoming

gradually known, and in the southwestern portion of our own territory the

canyons are yielding not only specific but also generic types heretofore

unknown.

For some time past, material has accumulated gradually in my collection

which could not be referred satisfactorily to known or described species, —

sometimes in single examples only, sometimes in small series, — and this

has increased gradually to such an extent as to demand a general clearing-up,

although descriptive work of this kind is perhaps the least attractive to the

true student.

Viridemas nov. gen.

Head retracted, small; front with an upright, blade-like corneous process,

which reaches to the end of the short, rough vestiture, and does not modify the

general impression of a flat head. Palpi very short and weak, not extending beyond

the edge of the front. Tongue weak, not functional. Eyes large, round, naked,

not fringed with lashes. Antenne of normal length; those of the male with the

segments marked and the projecting angles set with short bristle-tufts, those of

the female simple. Thorax short, quadrate; collar round, flat; patagia well marked,

1 Part I of the descriptive papers for 1907 is in the Transactions of the American Entomo-

logical Society, Vol. XX XIII, pp. 125-143, where twenty-nine species are described. In the

present paper forty-seven species are characterized and four new generic terms are proposed.

Aw The types are in most instances in the author’s collection at Rutgers College, New Bruns-

“pick: a few of them are at the Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences.

-o-]

LiIBRATI

NEW VOR

POT A

{;4°2

92 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

a little uplifted; vestiture scaly with an admixture of flattened hair, forming, pos-

teriorly, a large mass, which is scarcely a definite tuft. Legs short, middle and

hind pairs sub-equal in length; tibiz# unarmed, not spinulate, in the male clothed

with a mass of rough scales and hair. Abdomen stout, well exceeding the second-

aries; in the female, stout, sub-equal and sub-cylindrical, obtusely terminated,

with a prominent little tuft on the third dorsal segment. Primaries trigonate,

rather broad; apex well marked; outer margin arquate, oblique; hind angle rounded;

venation normal; accessory cell present, giving rise to 7, 8 + 9 and 10 from its end.

Secondaries proportionate, with vein 5 obsclescent.

Viridemas galena nov. sp.

Ground-color ashen gray, powdery. Front with an admixture of brown scales.

Collar with an obscure median line and an admixture of bluish-green scales. Patagia

with disk clothed with green scales, and with a blackish sub-marginal line. Pos-

terior scale-mass bronze-brown. Abdomen dark gray, the posterior margins nar-

rowly light gray. Primaries with all the usual maculation traceable, but obscured __

by the powdering of dark scales. Basal space green-powdered, and on this the

short, single, black basal line is fairly defined. T.a. line black, single, upright, a

little irregular. T.p. line single, black, slender, discontinuous, a little lunulate,

well exserted over the cell and almost as much incurved below, followed in the

sub-median interspace by a conspicuous greenish-white blotch, which is the most

obvious feature in the maculation. There is a broken, black median line, which

extends along the inner margin of the reniform, and below it to the margin. S.t.

line whitish, diffuse, powdery, discontinuous, partly defined inwardly by black

scales, which give the line a Jagged appearance. A series of black terminal lunules

is followed by a pale line at base of fringes. Claviform a broad, black-ringed loop,

extending about one-third across the cell and as broad as long. Orbicular large,

round, gray, ringed by black scales, a little darker centered. Reniform large, gray,

not defined above or below. Secondaries gray, with a dark, lunate terminal line.

Beneath, gray, powdery, with a broad, diffuse exterior line and a lunate discal spot,

which tends to become obscure on the primaries.

Expands 1.16-1.32 in. = 29-33 mm.

Habitat: Huachuca Mountains, Arizona, VII, 30; Palmerly, Cochise

County, Arizona, VII.

Two males and one female, in fair condition. ‘The males are purchased

specimens from my own collection, the female is from the collection of the

Brooklyn Institute. A perfect, fresh specimen will show undoubtedly a

considerably greater admixture of green, and, on the other hand, in old

specimens the green tends to become dull and to mingle with the gray base

so as to become inconspicuous except under a lens.

Meleneta nov. gen.

Eyes hairy, without overhanging lashes. Head moderate or rather small,

applied very closely to the thorax; front very flat, quadrate, clothed with short,

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDE 93

divergent, hairy vestiture. Palpi very short, straight, extending scarcely beyond

the frontal margin; second joint with long hair below; third joint as long as second;

cylindrical, truncate. Tongue functional, well developed. Antenne of male thick-

ened, the joints marked by impressed rings, without vestiture of any kind. Thorax

quadrate, rather small; collar round, not produced; patagia well defined; vestiture

coarse hair, not forming obvious tufts. Legs rather short; tibie clothed with dense,

long, coarse hair, not armed or spinulated Abdomen with long tufts of fine hair

laterally at base, and with small, indefinite dorsal tuftings. Primaries trigonate;

costa arched; apex marked; outer margin arquate, decidedly oblique; hind angle

obtusely rounded: veins 7 to 10 out of the end of the elongate accessory cell; 7 and

10 from the lower and upper angle respectively; 8 and 9 on a stalk from the middle,

between the two. Secondaries with vein 5 as strong as the others, out of the cross-

vein not far removed from 4.

This is a genus related to Raphia, with similar wing and body structure;

differing in the antenne, character of vestiture, and absence of the charac-

teristic tuftings. Only males are at hand, unfortunately, and the above

characterization is drawn from that sex alone.

Meleneta antennata nov. sp.

Deep bluish gray, the markings black or blackish. Head with vertex black;

collar black-tipped; edges of patagia and dorsum black-edged. Antenne deep

chrome-yellow. Primaries with the normal marking well defined. Basal line black,

geminate, included space gray, and with a gray patch just outside. T-.a. line gemi-

nate, outer portion most obvious, almost upright, accompanied by a paler gray

shade. ‘T.p. line less definitely marked, geminate, the inner portion reduced to.

scattered black scales, the outer portion more continuous, but diffuse and irregularly

defined, with an even outcurve over the cell and almost straight below. Median

shade blackish, diffuse, darkening the space between the ordinary spots. S.t. line

very irregular, pale, preceded by a black shading, which is best marked on the costa

and below vein 2. There is a narrow, black terminal line, and the fringes are con-

colorous. There is no obvious claviform, but there is a little jog in the t.a. line

where it should be, and beyond is a rusty brown patch that extends to the median

shade. Orbicular small, round, with a distinct black ring and an equally distinct

black central dot. Reniform rather large, oblique, narrow, centrally a little con-

stricted, narrowly black-ringed, gray with a white central line. Secondaries white,

with a blackish terminal line which extends from the apex halfway to the inner

angle. Beneath, primaries blackish, costal and outer margin with white powder-

ings; secondaries white, costal margin with black powderings, a blackish terminal

line from apex halfway to the inner angle.

Expands 1.25-1.40 in. = 31-35 mm.

Habitat: Huachuca Mountains, Arizona, VI, 30; Palmerly, Cochise

County, Arizona, VIII.

Two males, in good condition; one of them a purchased specimen, the

collector unknown; the other from the collection of the Brooklyn Institute,

94 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

taken by Mr. Carl Scheffer. The species is quite characteristic, and I am

sure that I have seen it in another collection.

Acronycta othello noy. sp.

Ground-color whitish ash-gray with sooty black shades and markings. Head,

vertex black except at sides. Collar mostly black or sooty. Disk of thorax and

margins of patagia black or sooty. Abdomen smoky gray above, whitish below;

basal tuftings black or sooty; edges of segments narrowly white. Primaries with a

broad basal space rather evenly washed with thin blackish over a bluish-gray base.

T.a. line geminate, black, moderately outcurved and oblique, and with outcurves

in the interspaces. T.p. line geminate, black; outer line most distinct, denticulate,

with well-marked outward teeth on the veins: as a whole, well curved over cell and

deeply drawnin below. There is no obviouss.t. line. The outer part of the median

space above median vein is filled with blackish, and below this vein the entire space

is sooty black, but not contrasting orintense. The outer part of the wing is gray, the

veins blackish-lined, and a sooty black streak from t.p. line to hind angle just below

vein 2. The fringes are cut with sooty brown on the interspaces. Orbicular a

small black circle which may be obscured by a shading from the t.a. line. Reni-

form moderate or small, lunate, incomplete, obscured by the median shade. Second-

aries in the male white, in the female washed with smoky gray. Beneath, whitish,

powdery, the primaries darker (darker in the female than in the male); secondaries

with a small, blackish discal spot. Legs smoky, annulate, with white at the joints.

Expands 1.75 in. = 44 mm.

Habitat: San Diego, Cal., Sept. 15.

One male and one female, in good condition; from Mr. Frank A.

Merrick. The species is allied to perdzta, but is obviously distinct by the

absence of basal streaks and by the soft gray and black shadings.

Acronycta lepetita noy. sp.

Ground-color pale bluish gray with an olivaceous shading. Palpi black at sides,

a black dot at base of antennz. Primaries with black basal streak extending to the

t.a. line; a slight spur inferiorly at about the middle, a longer narrow branch on the

upper edge, which reaches the t.a. line. A slender black streak crosses the t.p.

line in the sub-median interspace, and extends to the outer margin. The basal line

is indicated by an olivaceous costal spot. T.a. line geminate, olivaceous gray, very

oblique, so as to reach the inner margin almost at middle. T.p. line geminate, —

outer line black, included space whiter than ground, somewhat squarely exserted

over the cell and only moderately incurved below. S.t. space beyond the t.p. line

is more olivaceous shaded, and this is best marked on the costa and over the black

streak above anal angle. A series of terminal black points on the veins. Median

shade obvious on costa, oblique over the reniform, which it darkens, and then lost.

Orbicular oval, oblique, concolorous, narrowly outlined by black scales. It may or

may not touch the reniform; but, when it does, the junction forms an obvious,

curved black mark. Reniform large, broadly lunate, somewhat irregular, a little

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDA 95

dusky, incompletely outlined by blackish scales. Secondaries smoky, paler at base,

the fringes whitish. Beneath, whitish, the primaries smoky on disk; both wings

with discal marks and more or less obvious extra-median lines.

Expands 1.05-1.10 in. = 26-28 mm.

Hathitat: Esper Ranch, Brownsville, Tex.

One male and one female, in good condition; from the collection of the

Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. The species is allied to vinnula

and paupercula, but is smaller than either and much more delicately marked.

Comparatively, also, the primaries of the new species are shorter and broader.

Noctua larga nov. sp.

Head and collar bright rusty brown, the head darker in shade. Thorax brown

with a more or less marked rusty tinge. Primaries gray-brown with a reddish tinge,

varying in the specimens. All the lines single, punctiform. Basal line marked

only on costa and in the cell. T-.a. line with black venular spots and a scattering

of black scales that marks the line across the costal region. T.p. line even, marked

by distinct black dots on the veins, in course parallel to the outer margin. S.t.

line wanting. A series of black, inter-spatial terminal dots. Claviform vaguely

indicated by scattered black scales. Orbicular indicated by a few black scales, or

altogether wanting. Reniform marked by a black dot and a variable number of

black scales; not complete, or even so outlined as to make out a definite form, in

any case. Secondaries pale at base, outwardly dusky, darker throughout in the

female. Beneath, primaries smoky, secondaries whitish, both darker in the female.

Expands 1.80-2.10 in. = 45-52 mm.

Habitat: Palmerly, Cochise County, Arizona, August; Huachuca

Mountains, Arizona, June 16.

Three males and one female, in good condition; from the Museum of the.

Brooklyn Institute. The specimens were taken by Mr. Carl Scheffer,

who says they were commonly found under shelter, much as our clandestina

are sometimes found in large numbers. There are other rubbed examples

in the Museum collection; but all seem to be very much alike. The large

size and simple markings, allied to those of clandestina, distinguish the

species.

Rhizagrotis acclivis Morr., Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist., N.Y., XI, 93, Agrotis,

1875; reclivis Dyar, Jour. N.Y. Ent. Soc., XV, 106, Rhizagrotis, 1907.

Mr. Morrison’s specimen came from New York and the type is in the

Tepper Collection. About the same time, Dr. Harvey described Agrotis

opaca, from ‘Texas, and in 1890 I recorded my belief that the two gentlemen

had named the same species. I had, then and later, examples from Texas,

96 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Arizona and Colorado, and, as the type of maculation and structure was

unusual for the eastern fauna, I questioned whether the locality of the

specimen in the Tepper Collection might not be erroneous. An examination

of Dr. Harvey’s type in the British Museum confirmed my belief; and in my

Catalogue of 1903 (Bull. 44, U.S. Nat. Mus., 79) I cited the two names as

referring to the same species, and gave the New York locality with an “(?).”

Until 1907 I did not see another eastern example, though I had a number

from southwestern localities. In a miscellaneous lot received from Dr.

Dyar for determination, there was an example which I named acchvis,

and to which I appended the note quoted by Dr. Dyar: “The first authentic

specimen I have seen from this region. It indicates that the New York

locality which I questioned in my Catalogue may have been correct, or it

may indicate two very similar species which I have not had material enough

to discriminate.”

Dr. Dyar did have material to discriminate, and he gives the differences

between the eastern and the southwestern forms; but in giving a name he

re-describes the eastern form that served Morrison as a type, and therefore

creates a synonym merely. JI assume that Dr. Dyar is correct in determining

that there are two species, though I have not been able to verify that point;

but, if this is so, it simply means that Dr. Harvey’s name must be restored

to the list and that the southwestern specimens now labeled acclivis Morr.

in collections must be re-labeled opaca Harvey.

Euxoa cocklei nov. sp.

Head, thorax and primaries dull brown, varying from chocolate to smoky, and

more or less irrorated with black. Collar with a more or less marked black median

line. Disk of thorax and patagia with a sparse admixture of yellow scales. Prima-

ries with all the maculation traceable, and usually well written. Basal line geminate,

black, included space yellowish. T.a. line geminate, included space yellow, the

edgings black; upright to median vein outcurved in the space below and outwardly

bent below vein 1. T.p. line geminate, inner portion lunulate, not well marked,

outer portion hardly distinct; the included space yellowish, variably marked and

not always continuous; in course moderately outcurved over the cell and then par-

allel with outer margin. S.t. line a little irregular, broken, yellowish, sometimes

reduced to scattered yellow scales. A series of dusky terminal lunules, which are

rarely distinct. There is a tendency to a darkening below the median vein, between

the basal and t.a. line, and in one example there is a distinct black line. Claviform

moderate, black-bordered. Orbicular round or oval, moderate in size, with a nar-

row black edging within which is a ring of whitish scales. Reniform moderate in

size, kidney-shaped, edged with black scales, then with an inner (more or less

incomplete) border of yellowish; the spot sometimes darker inferiorly. Secondaries

smoky yellowish, almost uniform, with an obscure dusky lunule. Beneath, dull

SMITH, NEW NOCTUID 97

smoky; secondaries more yellowish and powdery; all wings with an outer shade

band and discal mark, less evident on primaries.

Expands 1.15-1.35 in. = 29-34 mm.

Habitat: Kaslo, B.C., July 27.

Two males and five females; from Dr. James Fletcher, collected by

Mr. J. W. Cockle, after whom the species is named. All the examples are

in good condition and no two are alike. The two males are smaller than

all the females, although the larger of the two is almost as large as the smallest

female. So the males are also darker and less distinctly marked, the orna-

mentation in one case, indeed, being scarcely traceable. In all the females

all the markings are at least traceable, and in one case every feature is

complete, and, in addition, the s.t. space is a little paler than the rest of the

wing. ‘The type of maculation is similar to znsulsa, but there is no darkening

of the cell and the wings are also too powdery. ‘There are no strong positive

characters, and in Hampson’s Tables it falls between submolesta and pro-

cellaris, neither of them American species.

Euxoa criddlei nov. sp.

Head, thorax and primaries mahogany-brown; the head and thorax darker,

without markings; primaries with all the transverse maculation lost, except the s.t.

line, which is traceable by a line of pale scales edging the darker, more blackish ter-

minal space. No trace of claviform. Orbicular faintly indicated by a blackish

powdering. Reniform faintly outlined by scattered pale scales inferiorly filled with

blackish. Secondaries dull yellowish becoming smoky at outer margin, with a dark

discal lunule. Beneath, smoky, powdery; primaries darker; all wings with a dis-

callunule. Abdomen dull smoky.

Expands 1.40-1.50 in. = 35-37 mm.

Habitat: Aweme, Manitoba, Aug. 24, 25, Sept. 4.

One male and two females, in good condition; from Dr. James Fletcher,

collected by Mr. Criddle, after whom the species is named. This is a very

simply marked form, and in fact, at first sight there appear to be no markings

at all, so feebly are they indicated. In wing form the species is like pastora-

lis, with which it will be most naturally associated in the list. In Hampson’s

Tables the species would fall in next to stigmatilis Sm., to which the new

species has but a slight resemblance.

Euxoa quinta nov. sp.

Head, thorax and primaries dull ashen gray, the entire surface with uniformly

placed brown irrorations, which are quite conspicuous under the glass, and give a

soft shading to the insect. Transverse maculation, except s.t. line, brown or black-

98 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

ish, broken, more or less lost. S.t. line pale, rather conspicuously relieved by a

smoky preceding shade. Basal line marked by a geminate spot on costa and some-

times by a dot on median vein. T.a. line geminate, outer line best marked, evenly

oblique, with small outcurves in the interspaces; always broken. T.p. line gemi-

nate, only a little bent over the reniform, parallel to outer margin; outer line a

series of venular points; inner tending to become diffuse. A broad, diffuse, obscure

median smoky shade. S.t. line irregular, complete or nearly so, emphasized by

white scales. A series of small black terminal dots and a narrow line at base of

fringes. Orbicular moderate, round or oval, incompletely marked by whitish scales.

Reniform moderate, kidney-shaped, outlined by a vague yellowish ring, inferiorly

black-filled. Secondaries smoky fuscous, more yellowish at base, with a dark discal

lunule and pale fringes. Abdomen pale ashen gray. Beneath, primaries smoky

with a powdery pale-gray border, an extra-median line marked on costa, and an

obscure discal spot; secondaries pale gray, powdery, with a conspicuous black dis-

cal line and an incomplete extra-median band, beyond which the marginal area is

blackish.

Expands 1.35-1.42 in. = 34-36 mm.

Habitat: High River, Alberta (Mr. Thomas Baird); Kaslo, B.C.,

June 1, 30, July 7, 10 (Mr. J. W. Cockle).

Three males and two females, all in good condition; received from Dr.

James Fletcher. The examples are all very much alike, a slight difference

in the amount of dark filling in the reniform and in the completeness of the

transyerse lines being all the variation noted. ‘The species belongs with the

bostoniensis series, but differs from all those previously known to me, in

the dark secondaries of both sexes. It recalls scandens at first sight, but is

much darker than that species throughout.

Euxoa capota nov. sp.

Head dark brown in front, vertex reddish gray, a black line dividing the two.

Collar reddish at base, tip velvety black; a white line between the two. Disk of

thorax reddish gray. Primaries brown; median space very dark purplish brown,

almost black; costal region to t.p. line whitish; the ordinary spots of the brown

ground-color. A black basal shade margins the costal pale area inferiorly. T.a.

line geminate, black, obsolete on costa, very distinct below it and with an inward

curve at the middle of its course. T.p. line geminate, black, the outer line less

distinct, almost straight from the costa to end of cell and then with a very small

incurve. S.t. line pale, only a little irregular, chiefly defined by the slightly darker

terminal area against the s.t. space, which is the lightest part of the wing. Clavi-

form narrowly outlined in black, incomplete, concolorous. Space between the

ordinary spots black-filled. Orbicular, U-shaped, open to the costal pale area.

Reniform large, incompletely outlined by dark and pale scales, lunate rather than

kidney-shaped. Secondaries smoky brown, with a small, darker discal lunule.

Beneath, reddish gray, powdery, with a common outer line and a discal lunule on

all wings.

Expands 1.15-1.30 in. = 29-32 mm.

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDA 99

Habitat: Palmerly, Cochise County, Arizona, July and August.

Eight examples, mostly in good condition, all very much alike and all

females. The reference to Huzoa is in the sense in which that genus is used

by Hampson. The frontal structure in this species is as in Chorizaqrotvs,

but the body is not depressed. As there are no males, the antennal struc-

ture of that sex cannot be used as a guide, and the generic reference must be

provisional. ‘The species is altogether unlike any other form known to me

from our fauna, and the peculiar course of the median lines should serve as

a means of recognition.

Ufeus electra nov. sp.

Ground-color dull chocolate-brown. Head and thorax with dark hair inter-

mingled. Primaries so densely set with long black hair as to give the whole a

blackish appearance. A black basal streak in the sub-median interspace extends

almost to the middle of the wing. Another streak extends, with little interruption,

through the cell and beyond it to the outer margin. T.a. line lost. T.p. line

outwardly bent from costa, obscure, blackish, with small outward extensions on

the veins. A series of black inter-spatial marks at base of fringes, becoming longer

toward the apex. Secondaries dull yellowish, smoky, with an overlay of black hair;

a distinct discal lunule and a well-marked extra-median shade line. Beneath,

reddish gray, powdery, darker at the margins on primaries; secondaries with an

obvious extra-median line and a distinct discal lunule.

Expands 1.55-1.65 in. = 39-41 mm,

Habitat: Oregon.

Two female examples, without date or name of sender. Evidently

they are electric-light captures, and more or less defective; but their differ-

ence from the allied forms is obvious. The species is nearest to plicatus

in type of maculation, and it is quite probable that in some specimens, traces

of the discal spots will occur.

Ufeus hulstii nov. sp.

Ground-color rather light red-brown. Head and thorax without markings.

Primaries with fine black hair, the veins a little darker. T.a. line distinct, single,

blackish, outwardly oblique, with three distinct outward angulations,— one on the

sub-costa, one below the median and the other on vein 1. T.p. line single, black,

followed by a slightly paler shade, evenly and moderately outcurved, with short

outward spurs on the veins. A series of small black terminal dots. Fringes cut

with yellowish. Secondaries silky gray with a reddish tinge. Beneath, very pale

pinkish gray, immaculate.

Expands 1.38-1.42 in. = 34-35 mm.

Habitat: Black Hills, Wyo.; Stockton, Utah, July 22.

Two male examples. One of them is from the Hulst Collection, with-

100 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

out abdomen, but else in good condition; the other is from Mr. Thomas

Spalding and in good shape. ‘This differs from the other described species,

all of which are represented in my collection by the distinct and rather even

red-brown, and the well-marked median lines. It is perhaps nearest to

satyricus in type of maculation, but differs obviously in color, in the absence

of all trace of ordinary spots, and in the immaculate under side.

Mamestra leomegra nov. sp.

Ground-color blue-gray shaded with smoky, powdered and ornamented with

black. Head with a black line across front. Collar with a black line across middle,

dividing the smoky lower from the ashen upper portion. Thorax mottled with

blue-gray, smoky, white and black, forming no distinct markings. Primaries with

all the maculation obvious, but so obscured and motiled that scarcely any of it is

clear-cut and distinct; the narrow yellowish s.t. line with the prominent black

preceding shades forming the most conspicuous feature of the wing. Basal line

geminate, black, broken, the whitish included space broad and most obvious; a

pair of curved black marks just below the median vein. T.a. line geminate, black-

ish, oblique, outcurved in the interspaces; included space broad, pale. T.p. line

geminate, lunulate, a little irregular, broadly exserted over the cell and a little

incurved below; included space narrower and not so pale as in t.a. line. There is

an obscure, diffuse, smoky median shade, which darkens the outer part of the median

space. S.t. line forms a small W on veins 3 and 4, where the preceding black shad-

ing is less conspicuous than it is above and below. A series of conspicuous black

terminal lunules. Claviform small, concolorous, black-margined. Orbicular, of

good size, broadly and irregularly ovate, oblique, black-margined, a little lighter

than the ground, with a smoky center. Reniform large, lunate, black-edged, out-

wardly with a margin of white scales within the black, center smoky, inclosing a

curved gray streak, Secondaries blackish, the outer margin narrowly gray. Be-

neath, gray, powdery; both wings with a conspicuous black discal mark and a more

or less evident extra-median line. The primaries have a narrow whitish outer

border, and in the female this is obvious on the secondaries as well.

Expands 1.90-2.00 in. = 47-50 mm.

Habitat: Grand Lake, N.F., Aug. 28.

Three males and one female, of which only one female is in really good

condition. ‘The specimens were caught at light by Mr. Owen Bryant,

packed dry in cotton, and sent me through Mr. C. W. Johnson of the Boston

Society of Natural History. The species is obviously related to imbrijera,

but is larger and darker throughout, and distinctly more blue-gray in color.

The W of the s.t. line, while small, is distinct. The antenne of the male

have the joints only a little marked, with little tufts of fine bristles and longer

single cilie. ‘The tuftings appear to be as in imbrifera, but less developed.

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDE 101

Mamestra pallicauda nov. sp.

Head and thorax dark brown; abdomen gray, the dorsal tuft at base brown.

Primaries red-brown tending to gray, with black powderings and transverse lines.

Basal line geminate, black, distinct; included space with pale scales; outcurved

in the interspaces, reaching to the sub-median vein. T.a. line geminate, black,

inner portion tending to become lost; outcurved in the interspaces, a little out-

curved as a whole; below vein 1 the included space is white. T.p. line single, black,

irregular, incurved in the interspaces, scarcely clears the reniform; a white lunule

follows that part below the sub-median vein. The median space is very narrow;

and the median shade, which is blackish, runs close to the inner border of the reni-

form across cell, and then close to the t.p. line below it. S.t. line irregular, marked

partly by blackish shadings and spots, and partly by the darker terminal space. A

black terminal line broken by whitish points on the veins, the veins themselves

more or less black-marked. Three white points in costa between t.p. and s.t. lines.

Orbicular obscure, traceable as an indefinite paler brown blotch. Reniform small,

oblique, incompletely outlined, a series of three white dots along the outer edge and

a fourth at the lower inner angle. Secondaries smoky, the veins darker, fringes

tipped with white. Beneath, smoky gray, powdery, with a smoky extra-median

shade and a small dark discal lunule. Tip of abdomen of female obtuse, with a

mass of white fluffy hair arranged so as to form a compact mass.

Expands 1.24 in. = 31 mm.

Habitat: Palmerly, Cochise County, Arizona, July; Huachuca Moun-

tains, Arizona, July 12.

Two female examples, one of them, belonging to the Brooklyn Institute,

in perfect condition; the other, from my own collection, somewhat rubbed.

This is altogether unlike any other species known to me, and eventually

must be removed from Mamestra, to which I have referred it tentatively in

the absence of a male. It belongs to Hadena as limited by Hampson, and

has only a basal tuft on the dorsum of the abdomen; but it agrees with none

of the species that he places in that genus. The cylindrical, squarely trun-

cate abdomen, with its dense tuft of white fluffy hair, is characteristic, and

may indicate some unusual character in the male as well.

Miodera nov. gen.

Eyes moderate in size, round, hairy. Front protuberant, roughened, obtuse,

without processes or plates. Tongue fully developed. Palpi small, oblique, not

reaching to the middle of the front. Antenne of male lengthily bipectinated, the

branches decreasing in length toward the tip, the last few joints merely serrate.

Thorax quadrate, heavily clothed with scaly vestiture, forming an obscure anterior

and somewhat more obvious posterior tuft; patagia well marked. Vestiture of

under side dense, somewhat hairy, loose. Legs short and not especially stout,

though the heavy vestiture makes them appear so; anterior tibize and tarsi without

102 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

special armature; the terminal claws, however, unusually long. Abdomen with a

loose tuft at base, otherwise dorsum untufted. Primaries short, broad, trigonate,

the apices well marked.

Differs from Mamestra chiefly in the very stout body, lengthily pectinated

antenne and protuberant roughened front. I cannot identify it with any

of the genera of Hampson’s monographic work.

Miodera stigmata nov. sp.

Head, thorax and primaries deep dark brown. Head with a scant admixture

of gray and black scales. Collar with a blackish transverse line. Thoracic disk

with an admixture of gray scales, varying in the examples; patagia with a black

sub-margin. Primaries with smoky and blackish shadings variably mixed with

gray, and with a sprinkling of yellow scales that gives a richness of color to the wings.

Basal line black, geminate, interrupted on the sub-costa. A short black basal dash

that just reaches the t.a. line. T.a, line geminate, black, the included space some-

times lightened by yellow scales, in course outwardly oblique, with three moderate

outcurves. T.p. line geminate, black, abruptly bent out below costa, then almost

parallel with ovter margin; the inner line lunulate and usually, at least, traceable

across the wing, the outer more even and usually lost below the cell. S.t. line more

or less yellow, variably defined by darker preceding or following shadings, with a

well-defined W on veins 3 and 4. A lunate black terminal line followed by yellow

venular points at the base of the long interlined fringes. Claviform a small but con-

spicuous black loop. Orbicular round or nearly so, moderate in size, concolorous,

ringed with yellow scales. Reniform large, upright, a little constricted at middle

and expanded below, inferiorly black-filled, the upper half paler, and edged with

yellow scales. Between the spots the cell is darker or even blackish. Secondaries

smoky yellowish, with a discal lunule, a somewhat waved extra-median line and a,

distinct blackish terminal line. Beneath, gray, powdery, with a narrow, distinct

extra-median black shade line crossing both wings. All wings with a discal spot and

a lunate marginal line. Abdomen like secondaries in color.

Expands 1.04-1.14 in. = 26-28 mm.

Habitat: Witch Creek, Cal., Jan. 12—Feb. 3.

Ten males, in good or fair condition. This is a well-marked and rather

pretty species somewhat resembling Mamestra ectypa, and it does not appear

to vary to any considerable extent.

Teniocampa macona nov. sp.

Ground-color of head, thorax and primaries, creamy to luteous gray. Head

and thorax without maculation. Primaries more or less powdered with black atoms,

and veins tend to become pale. Basal line geminate, broken, usually marked by

black spots on costa and median vein. T.a. line outwardly oblique, even, of the

ground-color or paler, marked on both sides by black scales so as to define the entire

line in the best case, but so irregularly in others that it may become entirely lost

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDZ 103

beyond the costal area. T.p. line concolorous or a little paler, almost parallel with

outer margin, preceded by black scales or lunules, so variable that the line may be

either completely defined, or almost lost. A black median shade extends obliquely

from costa across the reniform, forms an angle at its lower margin, and extends

obliquely inward to the middle of the inner margin. This shade is usually distinct,

and when it is obscure the median lines are best defined. S.t. line concolorous or a

little paler, a little inregular, defined by a preceding black powdering, which may

extend across the wing or may be confined to the costal region. A series of black

terminal dots in the interspaces. Orbicular concolorous, usually lost, sometimes

defined by a slightly paler ring, then large, ovate, joining the reniform inferiorly.

Reniform large, oblique, broadly oval, pale-ringed, always darker and usually con-

trasting, filled with black powdering. Secondaries whitish with a reddish tinge, a

small dark discal spot, a punctiform, obscure extra-median line, and a series of dark

terminal lunules. Beneath, with a reddish tinge, coarsely black powdered; primaries

with blackish orbicular and reniform and a broken exterior line; secondaries with

dark discal spot and punctiform extra-median line.

Expands 1.36-1.50 in. = 34-37 mm.

Fiabitat: Witch Creek, Cal., Jan. 30, Feb. 1-14.

Two males and two females, varying greatly, as indicated in the descrip-

tion. At first sight the species suggests flaviannula; but the male antenne

are not pectinated. They are bristle-tufted, and therefore the species

belongs with alia. Sir George Hampson refers these species to Monima

Hbn.

Teniocampa bostura noy. sp.

Head, thorax and primaries dull luteous brown with smoky powderings, which

give the insect a sordid appearance. Primaries with all the markings present, but

not relieved or distinct. Basal line geminate, blackish, complete, included space

of the ground-color. T.a. line geminate, outwardly oblique, with small outcurves

in the interspaces, outer portion well marked, included space of the ground-color.

T.p. line with a moderate outcurve over cell and an almost even incurve below it,

the inner portion obscurely lunulate, the outer punctiform. A very obscure median

shade through the outer portion of the median space. S.t. line yellowish, narrow,

only a little irregular, preceded by a continuous blackish shade, which darkens the

outer half of the s.t. space. A continuous, slightly waved yellow line at the base of

the fringes. Orbicular not traceable in the specimen. Reniform large, oblique, a

little constricted, blackish-filled, obscurely outlined by yellowish scales. Secondaries

dull whitish at base darkening to a smoky outer margin, the fringes more yellowish.

Beneath, reddish gray, powdery. All wings with a distinct extra-median line and a

small discal spot.

Expands 1.30 in. = 32 mm.

Habitat: Kaslo, B.C.

One male, in good condition; from Dr. James Fletcher. The species

is allied to rufula and indra, but is more sordid and powdery in appearance

than either, while the course of the lines is quite different. The thoracic

104 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

vestiture is thicker and the patagia are much better defined than in the

allied forms. It is Dr. Fletcher’s No. 168.

Teniocampa fringata nov. sp.

Rusty red-brown darkening to brown-gray. Lower part of front and palpi

crimson. Antenne bright red with a white dot at base. Collar and thorax tending

to become hoary through gray-tipped hair. Primaries tending to an overlay or

powdering of bluish-gray scales, and with a vague irrorate appearance, the macula-

tion never conspicuous and sometimes scarcely traceable. Basal line geminate,

gray-filled, rarely evident. T. a. line geminate, a little darker than the ground, some-

times with gray filling, a very little oblique, and slightly outcurved in the interspaces.

S.t. line brown, geminate, evenly outcurved over the cell and a little incurved below;

included space concolorous; followed on each vein by a short blackish line which is

interrupted by a pale dot, so that there is the appearance of a double dotted line,

which is easily mistaken for the t.p. line. S.t. line pale, obscure, a little irregular,

defined by a slightly darker preceding narrow shade line. A vague median shade

line is traceable below the reniform, parallel to the t.p. line. Claviform barely trace-

able in one example. Orbicular dusky, oblique, elliptical, with narrow yellowish

outline, obvious in most specimens. Reniform large, upright, a little constricted,

dusky, narrowly ringed with yellow, obvious in all specimens. Secondaries smoky

fuscous with carmine fringes. Beneath, gray with a crimson tinge, powcery. Both

wings with a discal spot and outer line, which are best marked on secondaries, but

always at least traceable on primaries. The tarsi tend to become narrowly white-

ringed.

Expands 1.24-1.34 in. = 31-33 mm.

Habitat: Monterey County, California, March; Santa Cruz Mountains,

California.

Five males and two females, all save one in good condition. ‘This is an

ally of preses and saleppa, and yet more closely of transparens. It is refer-

able to the Perigrapha of Hampson, and has the ridged crest of the species

that stand as Stretchia in our Catalogue. Except in the ground-color,

there is very little variation among the specimens at hand.

Stretchia erythrolita Grt.

Until recently this species has been represented in my collection by a

single male example labeled by Mr. Grote, and agreeing well with his

description and type. In 1906 I received two examples from Pasadena,

taken in March and April, which indicated quite a range of variation, but

which nevertheless were very similar to the typical form. Recently I re-

ceived from San Diego County a series of upwards of thirty examples, taken

in early February, no two of which were alike, the extremes being so far

apart that probably I should have considered them distinct, had I received

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDE 105

single specimens only of each. In color they vary all the way from uniform

mouse-gray to uniform smoky black, with scarcely a trace of maculation.

The s.t. line is most frequently present and the tendency is to a pale terminal

space, the extreme of this type being a glossy black primary with a contrast-

ing gray terminal space. Then the black breaks up at base and the wing

becomes mottled in every possible intermediate form. In the pale examples,

the reniform tends to become relieved, especially in the males, and in the

extremes this is ringed with yellow, and filled with dark brown. ‘The orbic-

ular is rarely present, but may be as conspicuous as the reniform, though in

only one case is it as well defined.

I have no information as to the habits of the insect; but it is quite obvious

that it may at times be much more common than the number of specimens

in collections indicates.

Himella rectiflava nov. sp.

Of the usual powdery luteous ground-color, the markings obscure, except for

the conspicuous yellow s.t. line and the scarcely less defined dusky median shade

line. Head and thorax with scattered black powderings only. Primaries, basal

line trace:.ble by the pale included shade and the slightly more dense powderings

at its borders. T.a. line geminate, smoky, included space not paler, with a very

regular and even outcurve from costa to inner margin. T.p. line geminate, tending

to become punctiform, the veins blackish beyond the line and so interrupted as to

give the appearance of geminate dark points; outwardly bent over cell, with the

angle on vein 7, below which the line runs evenly oblique to the inner margin. Me-

dian shade distinct, blackish, a little diffuse, outwardly bent from costa to bottom of

reniform, then evenly oblique to the inner margin. S.t. line conspicuous, yellowish,

preceded by a distinct, even, continuous, narrow brown shade, the following terminal

space darker than the rest of wing. A yellowish crenulated terminal line, from

the points of which pale lines extend across the fringes. No obvious claviform.

Orbicular round, with narrow smoky ring, of ground-color, but not powdery. Reni-

form upright, oblong with rounded corners, concolorous, defined by a narrow dusky

line within which there is a paler ring. Secondaries fuscous, paler at base, fringes

more luteous. Beneath, reddish gray, powdery. Both wings with an extra-median

line; secondaries also with a discal spot.

Expands 1.10 in. = 27 mm.

Habitat: Huachuca Mountains, Arizona, July 30.

One male specimen, in good condition as to wings, somewhat defective

as to antennze, etc. The specimen was received in paper in a purchased

lot, and the collector is unknown. It belongs to Eriopyga of the Hampson

Catalogue, in the series in which the males have ciliated antenne and no

other conspicuous secondary sexual characters.

106 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Orthodes keela nov. sp.

Head, thorax and primaries red-brown; head with a paler, more yellowish shad-

ing. Secondaries and abdomen smoky. Primaries with all the normal markings

traceable, but none of them distinct or well written. Basal line geminate, smoky,

obscure, included space with a few yellowish scales. T.a. line geminate, smoky,

obliquely outcurved, with small outcurves in the interspaces, some pale scales in the

included space over the costal region, the line tending to become obscure below the

middle. T.p. line geminate, blackish, only a little bent over cell, then almost evenly

parallel with outer margin; inner portion more or less lunulate; outer, punctiform

below costal region. An outwardly curved smoky median shade. S.t. line marked

by scattered yellow scales and by a continuous, narrow, blackish preceding shade,

only a little irregular in course. A broken, yellowish terminal line. Orbicular

small, obscurely outlined by yellowish scattered scales. Reniform small, narrow,

oblique, a little constricted, outlined and partly filled by yellow scales, with a black-

ish superior dot and a dark inferior filling. Secondaries uniformly smoky with a

bronze luster, the fringes more yellowish. Beneath, primaries with disk smoky,

lustrous, the margins yellowish with reddish powderings; secondaries yellowish

with reddish powderings, with a smoky broken outer band and a smoky discal lunule.

Expands 1.07-1.15 in. = 27-29 mm.

Habitat: Palmerly, Cochise County, Arizona, August.

One male and one female, in good condition; from the collection of the

Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. The male is the smaller of the

two, more deeply colored and less distinctly marked. ‘The species is an

ally of vecors, and ranges next to it in Hampson’s Catalogue, under Eriopyga.

It is narrower winged, however, much more uniformly tinted, with more

even median lines and a different s.t. line. In wing-form it is nearer to

mora Strek., which is darker lustrous, and has the maculation reduced to

a small gray reniform.

Faronta nov. gen.

Kyes hairy, large, round, globose, not overhung by long cilia. Tongue fully

developed. Front roughened, slightly protuberant, without processes or excisions.

Palpi straight; terminal joint very short, poorly developed, not projecting much

beyond front; the second joint with short vestiture. Antenne in maie, ciliated;

in female, simple. Thorax convex, rounded; vestiture hairy, forming no tufts,

rather smoothly laid. Legs moderate in length, strong, without spines or other

unusual armature on tibie or tarsi; tibiz in the male more thickly clothed with

hair, but forming no obvious tufts. Abdomen smoothly clothed, without tufts or

fringes of any kind, stout, extending well beyond the hind angle of secondaries.

Primaries elongate, narrow, sub-lanceolate, the apex not acutely drawn out, margin

gently rounded, venation normal. Secondaries proportionate.

Differs from Leucania in the stout convex thorax and long stout abdomen,

as well as the narrow elongate wings. From Neleucania it differs in the

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDZ 107

more robust build throughout, in the more closely appressed vestiture and

the rounded margin and apex of primaries. From Meliana it differs in the

stouter form, less pointed wings, and comparatively simple antennz of the

male. The roughened front may not be peculiar, in the absence of plates

or processes.

Faronta aleada nov. sp.

Head, thorax and abdomen uniform creamy white or grayish tending to yellow-

ish, the head usually most intense in color. Primaries with the disk a faint leaden

gray, costa and internal margin creamy white, median vein pale, and dividing into

pale rays on veins 3 and 4. In the apical region the veins are a little dark marked.

No lines or dark spots on the wing. Secondaries white in both sexes. Beneath,

white; primaries with a tinge of yellow, which is better marked at the margins.

Expands 1.30-1.42 in. = 32-35 mm.

Halitat: Brazos, Tex.

One male and three females, all in good condition; from the collection

of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. The species is entirely

unlike any other of our leucaniids, and agrees with nothing described by

Hampson from the adjoining faunal region. The tendency is for the leaden

gray disk to become rubbed so as to give a uniform creamy appearance.

Anaria Ochs.

The species of this genus are not well represented usually in American

collections, and my own material has been for two years or more eked out

by a collection loaned me by Mr. Philip Laurent of Philadelphia. This

was mostly purchased from Staudinger, and contained a fair series of the

circum-polar species, including those listed as common to the American

and European faunas.

Sir George Hampson’s revision of the species drops out several of our

listed names, and adds others, so that I found it desirable to rearrange my

material, and did so with very interesting results.

Three series are recognized: —

I. Antenne of male strongly serrate and fasciculate; fore wings very

narrow.

II. Antenne of male minutely serrate and fasciculate.

II. Antenne of male ciliated.

The first of these series contains only a single species, and is not repre-

sented in our fauna.

The series in which the male antenne are minutely serrate and fascicu-

late, or bristle-tufied, is divided as follows: —

108 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Hind wings white.

Primaries with s.t. line angled inward in discal fold . . staudingert

Primaries with s.t. line not so angled.

Primaries with prominent series of dentate black marks

before s:t.line =. . ... -. 2 \. “nicharigoms

Primaries without such inaeke ibetore Sod. hing . . gquadrilunata

Hind wings yellowish . . . . 2 ae 3 oe) erierrenetE

Hind wings uniformly suffused 7a fereoics

Primaries with the stigmata not filled with blue-gray . etacta

Primaries with the stigmata filled with blue-gray . . membrosa

Staudingeri has not appeared heretofore in our Catalogue; but I found,

on comparing the figure and descriptions carefully, that I had two males, one

from Labrador and one from “British Columbia,” which were apparently

the same, and which agreed with the characters given for the species.

Of quadrilunata I have a pair from Colorado, which are properly de-

termined. An example from Laggan may indicate a new form.

Of richardsoni I supposed I had a long series; but I found, to my sur-

prise, that only one nice pair from Labrador answered all the requirements

of Hampson’s definition. My Greenland examples received through

Staudinger did not answer at all. The White Mountain examples, which

stand under richardsoni in our collections, had the s.t. line of staudingeri;

and the long suite of specimens from Newfoundland represented yet another

form. They are distinctly yellow-winged, but will not do for leucocycla

at all. The species marked schenherri in my collection, and to which name

leucocycla has been cited heretofore as a synonym, was neither one nor the

other.

Using the same characters used by Hampson, in a somewhat different

form, I differentiate the species now before me as follows: —

S.t. line of primaries angulate and dentate.

Secondaries white or nearly so.

Ordinary spots of primaries white-marked, median

line white-shaded. . . . . . staudingert

No white on primaries, all the pale Se ee

Oray aia Sr AP eek (athe: 2 hampa

Secondaries decidedly vlloer

Ground-color blue-gray, terminal space contrastingly

blue- Stay 1) eS ence nae St eel flanda

S.t. line of primaries even, or ee cients

Secondaries white, primaries contrastingly black and

white marked.

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDZ 109

T.a. line oblique, outcurved in the interspaces. . . richardsoni

T.a. line angulated on the median vein, then rigidly

oblique to immer margin. 4 4). 1.) = | lanaiginose

Secondaries pale yellowish, primaries smoky brown,

not contrasting.

S.t. lie distinct, with preceding dusky shades or spots squara

S.t. line partly obliterate, preceding shades on costa

CII hase SS SNARE ati arta eam CAM AN amma de( 771i aes Peaa

Etacta and membrosa are left out of consideration here.

Hampa and flanda are allies of staudingeri, but are larger and darker.

Flanda has decidedly yellow secondaries, and that is its chief superficial

difference from hampa. I might have deemed it racial or varietal, were it

not accompanied by a decided difference in the eyes; those of flanda being

distinctly larger, and decidedly more rounded.

Squara is based on Greenland examples of schanherri, from which it

differs by the distinctly yellowish secondaries and the totally different type

of transverse lines. I am, of course, assuming that all the names cited by

Hampson to richardsoni are really identical with the form to which he has

applied that name.

The third series, in which the male antenne are ciliated only, is separated

by Hampson as follows: —

Hind wings bright yellow.

Fore wings with the ground-color deep red . . . . myrtilli

Fore wings with the ground-color blackish. .

Fore wings with the reniform white-filled . . . . — cordigera

Fore wings with reniform not white-filled. . . . mimule

Hind wings yellowish, tinged with brown . . . . . impingens

Hind wings uniform brown . . . Ag he phea

Hind wings white, more or less pitied eae swith fuscous.

Fore wings broad, triangular.

Reniform without whitish annuli. . . . . . .' melanopa

Reniiorm: with whitish annuli’:)) 2. 6. s mimula

Fore wings narrow, elongate.

Hore wines paleolive-gray. -)\0.0 5) 3/3) GS mausr

GEM WIM ES GUSCOUS! Yat ride) sla) 5. pueda Vek eles zemblica

Myrtilli Linn. is in our collections as acadiensis Beth., and is listed from

Canada northward. It occurs also in the mountains of Colorado, and I

have never been sure that there was only a single species represented. I

have compared the Colorado examples recently with German specimens,

110 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

and am by no means certain that the two are identical. ‘The resemblance

is very close, however, and my material is not sufficient to induce me to

dispute the union.

Cordigera Thumb. is a very sharply-marked species, and I have in my

collection examples from Colorado, Labrador and Germany, which are

practically alike.

Mimuli Behr. is a Californian species unknown to Hampson, and not

represented in my collection. ‘The type has been destroyed in the San

Francisco fire.

Impingens Wlk. — with curita Morr., nivaria Grt. and perpura Morr.

as synonyms — is a purely American species, which differs quite markedly

from the preceding species in general habitus, and comes nearer to Scoto-

gramma in wing-form. I have it from Colorado only; but it is also recorded

from British Columbia.

Phea Hampson is a new species to our fauna, and quite a close ally, in

appearance, to the preceding. It comes from Victoria Land, Cambridge

Bay, and is not represented in my collection.

Melanopa Thunb., re-described by Packard as nigrolunaia, is another

sharply-defined form which is very widely distributed. It occurs in the

United States from -Mount Washington northward, and extends along the

Rocky Mountain chains into New Mexico. My examples are from Col-

orado and Labrador, without very much difference between them.

Mimula Grt. is from New Mexico, and the type is in the Snow Collection.

Professor Snow was good enough to send it to me for examination nearly

fifteen years ago, and since that time I have not seen another example, so

far as I know.

Laerta Smith was not known to Hampson when he wrote, and differs

from melanopa in the more sordid fuscous color throughout and by the much

reduced whitish area of secondaries. From mzmula it differs in the ordinary

spots, the reniform not being ringed with pale scales. This really resembles

A. kelloggi Hy. Edw. very much; but Hampson places that species in

Sympistes with naked, reniform eyes, while in laerta they are distinctly hairy.

Mausi Hampson is from E. Turkestan, and the only species in the series

that is not American or circum-polar.

Zemblica Hampson is from Nova Zembla, and is a narrow-winged ally

of maust. While not really American, it is not unlikely that the species

will be found in Alaska, and so should be looked for.

The other species referred to this genus I have commented upon in the

N.Y. Ent. Soc. Jour., 1907, Vol. XV, p. 151, and have there stated the

disposition made of them.

I still have in my collection a few examples that do not fit into any of the

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDAE 111

described species; but they are not sufficiently well marked, nor in sufficient

number, to warrant me in describing them at present.

Anarta hampa nov. sp.

Ground-color dull smoky fuscous with black and gray maculation. Patagia

with sub-marginal black line and gray disk, dorsum posteriorly mottled with gray.

Basal line black, outwardly shaded with gray, with two moderate angulations. T.a.

line black preceded by a gray shading, a little oblique outwardly, irregularly out-

curved. T-.p. line denticulate, black followed by a narrow gray shading, moderately

outcurved and only a little incurved in its course. S.t. line gray or yellowish,

marked by the evenly dark s.t. space, drawn in on veins 2 and 5, outcurved between

and on each side. A series of black terminal lunules. The fringes dusky, cut with

yellowish. A vague median shade in the paler examples. Claviform small, but

distinctly outlined. Orbicular small, round or oval, more or less gray-marked.

Reniform small, narrow, upright, with narrow pale ring, a little constricted centrally.

Secondaries very pale straw-color, almost white, smoky at base and along inner

margin, with a distinct discal mark, a narrow, almost crenulated outer line, and a

broad blackish outer margin; fringes white. Beneath, whitish, more or less shaded

with blackish, with a black discal spot, an extra-median blackish line, and a blackish

outer margin on all wings. Primaries with fringes checkered, black and white;

secondaries with fringes white.

Expands 1.10-1.20 in. = 28-30 mm.

Habitat: White Mountains, New Hampshire.

Two males and one female, all in good condition. One of the males

came originally from Mrs. Slosson; the others have no indication of their

source, and none have a date label. Mossy yellow scales are in the median

space in cell and sub-median interspace, and along the line of the s.t. line,

beyond it.

Anarta flanda nov. sp.

Head and thorax gray to blackish, mixed with black scales; collar gray-tipped;

patagia with black sub-marginal line, disk posteriorly black-spotted. Abdomen

smoky, with a yellowish tinge in the male. Primaries gray marked with black, and

sometimes so much black-powdered that only the lines and terminal space are of the

gray base. Basal line geminate, black, included space gray, with two distinct out-

ward angulations in its short course. T.a. line geminate, black, included space

gray, outwardly oblique and very irregular. T.p. line lunulate, black, denticulate

on the veins, the accompanying gray shade narrow, moderately outcurved over the

cell, and then almost parallel with outer margin. S.t. line irregularly and variably

dentate, sharply defined by the contrast between the black or blackish s.t. space

and the gray terminal area. A series of small black terminal lunules between which.

the long dark fringes are cut with yellowish. In lighter examples a distinct median

shade line extends from costa outwardly between the ordinary spots, and then, from

an obtuse angle, inwardly oblique to the inner margin. Orbicular round or oval,

112 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

small or moderate in size, usually gray. Reniform, moderate, upright, centrally

constricted, usually obscure, rarely paler in part. In the median space there is

usually a more or less obvious powdering of mossy yellow scales at the outer portion

of the cell and in the sub-median interspace. Secondaries dull yellow, smoky at

base and along inner margin, in the female with a dark discal lunule, a narrow

blackish extra-median line and a broad blackish outer border; fringes yellow; be-

neath, yellow. Primaries paler, outer border blackish with a black discal spot.

Secondaries with a black discal spot, an incomplete extra-median line and a

narrow blackish border.

Expands 1.00-1.16 in. = 25-29 mm.

Habitat: Newfoundland (Mr. Owen Bryant).

Over fifty exampks, taken at light, and sent unpinned in layers of cotton.

There are few antenne, and legs are at a premium; but many of the speci-

mens are otherwise in good condition, and the series is excellent to determine

the constancy of the type. ‘They range from almost ash-gray with black

transverse lines to almost black with gray lines, the terminal space being

always contrasting, and relieving the irregular s.t. line. The secondaries

tend to become suffused, and examples of both sexes are almost uniformly

washed with black. The mossy yellowish shading is a decidedly variable

quantity.

Anarta squara nov. sp.

Head, thorax and abdomen blackish, the vestiture of head and thorax more

yellowish, somewhat intermixed with white. Primaries dull smoky brown, more or

less gray, and black-powdered. Basal line distinct, single, black, rather diffuse.

T.a. line black, single, diffuse, almost upright to vein 1, and then outwardly bent to

inner margin. The space between basal and t.a. line may be gray-powdered. T-p.

line more or less lunulate, evenly outcurved over cell and scarcely drawn in below

it, accompanied outwardly by paler lunules and a more or less traceable defining-line.

S.t. line even, pale, preceded by blackish or dark spots or shadings. A series of

black or dark terminal lunules. The dark fringes narrowly pale cut. Orbicular

large, irregular, oblique, incomplete, concolorous, or paler. Reniform large, upright,

centrally constricted, incomplete, more or less marked with pale. Secondaries dull

yellowish, smoky along inner margin, with a broad blackish outer marginal band and

a blackish discal lunule. Beneath, all wings whitish to a broad black marginal band,

and all with a distinct black discal spot.

Expands 1.30-1.38 in. = 32-34 mm.

Habitat: Greenland.

Two males and one female. The female is more uniform in color, and

has no white shadings. One male is much like this, but the median space

is darker, the lines are better marked, and the paler shadings are more obvi-

ous. ‘The other male has the basal and terminal spaces and the ordinary

spots mottled with gray in which mossy yellow scales are intermixed. A

somewhat defective female from Colorado may be referable here.

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDE 113

Luperina innota nov. sp.

Ground-color a reddish rusty luteous. Head and thorax concolorous, somewhat

deeper in reddish than primaries. Primaries with median space more reddish and

darker than basal and extra-median areas. Basal line barely indicated on costa.

T.a. line single, brown, barely relieved, outcurved in the sub-median interspace. T.p.

line single, brown, barely relieved, with little outward points on the veins, evenly

outcurved over the cell and almost evenly oblique below it. S.t. line marked near

costa by a brown shade in the s.t. space, thence lost, or barely marked by a slightly

darker preceding shade. Claviform long, narrow, extending nearly to t.p. line, but

so slightly relieved in outline as to be readily overlooked. Orbicular round, moderate

in size, a little paler, else not defined. Reniform moderate, broadly lunate, a little

paler than its surroundings. Secondaries pale, transparent yellowish with a smoky

tinge. Beneath, yellowish; secondaries paler, primaries tinged with smoky in the

male.

Expands 1.36-1.45 in. = 34-36 mm.

Habitat: Yellowstone Park, Wyoming, July 8; Arangie, Idaho.

One male and one female in good condition, and two poor males, which

are probably the same; from Colorado localities. ‘The type of maculation

is not unlike that of passer; but the faded, rusty, washed-out appearance

is more like the orthosiids of the cztxma type. A male example is in the

British Museum, and I owe acknowledgments to Sir George F. Hampson

for comparing it with the Museum material.

Hadena (Luperina) birnata nov. sp.

Head and thorax dark purplish brown, vertex of head and tip of collar with

yellowish hair admixed. Primaries light brown; the upper half to t.p. line, a

quadrate patch in s.t. space on costa, and terminal space (save apex), dark brown

with a blackish shade or powdering. Basal line obscurely marked as a pale spot on

costa. T.a. line vaguely traceable by a paler shade across the dark portion of wing,

altogether lost below that. T.p. line obvious throughout its course, but hardly

well defined: on the costa it is obviously geminate, and makes a rather abrupt

even bend over the cell, well defined by the difference between the dark median and

pale s.t. space; below vein 2 the difference between the spaces is slight, and the

line is defined by a narrow line of darker brown scales. S.t. line marked chiefly by

the contrast between s.t. and terminal spaces, the darker shades extending inward

opposite the cell and in the sub-median interspaces. A series of small black terminal

lunules. Fringes cut with yellowish. Claviform absent, or barely marked by a few

black seales. Orbicular obscure, vaguely black-edged, irregular, of moderate size.

Reniform moderate in size, broadly lunate, discolored, lighter than the rest of the

wing, not completely outlined nor well defined, inferiorly, and at the branching at

the end of the median, marked with black scales. Secondaries even dull yellowish

or smoky. Beneath, yellowish gray, powdery; disk of primaries darker; secondaries,

costal area and a discal spot darker.

Expands 1.12-1.32 in. = 28-33 mm.

114 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Habitat: Newfoundland.

Three male examples, one of them almost perfect, a second fair, and a

third more or less oily, yet with maculation in good condition. This is a

close ally of L. passer Gn., and I thought, at first, a small, local race; but

in the long series of passer in my collection, covering from the Atlantic to

the Pacific, and the Rocky Mountain region into the mountains of Canada

and Manitoba, there are certain features that occur always, in spite of differ-

ences in size, and variations in color and markings. In the almost total

absence of claviform, in the form, marking and outline of reniform, and in

the course of the s.t. line, the new species differs most markedly from passer,

as well as in the smaller size. A defective example from St. John, N.B.,

will probably prove referable here.

It might be added that I have an example of true passer from Grand

Lake, N.F., as small as birnata, but quite characteristic in other respects.

Xylophasia illustra nov. sp.

Ground-color sooty black, dull. Head and thorax concolorous. Primaries

with all except the s.t. line lost. The latter is marked by white scales, but is broken

and fragmentary: so far as it shows, it is irregular, indicating a small W-mark, and

partly preceded by velvety black scales forming an irregular, vague preceding shade.

A yellowish line at the base of the fringes, emphasized by larger dots at the ends

of the veins. The reniform is vaguely indicated by paler scales. Abdomen dusty

gray, the dorsal tuftings well marked. Secondaries yellowish gray with a darker

line at the base of the paler fringes. Beneath, smoky gray; primaries darker with

terminal space paler; secondaries paler, more powdery, with a moderate discal spot.

Expands 1.52 in. = 28 mm.

Habitat: High River, Alberta.

A single good male, taken by Mr. Thomas Baird and sent me by Dr.

Fletcher. ‘The species resembles sputatria and plutonia in the dark color;

but this color is dull, not glossy, and the secondaries have no trace of yellow

or brown.

Xylophasia miniota nov. sp.

Ground-color dull, smoky fuscous without strong contrasts of any kind. Front

of head and collar, inferiorly, more yellowish; front with a black transverse line;

collar with a black line dividing the lower pale from the upper darker portion; disk

of thorax mottled with black scales. Primaries dull with black powdering, all the

maculation present, but not contrasting. A short black streak at base, reaching

to the basal line, which is geminate, blackish, included space a little paler. T.a.

line geminate, blackish, included space concolorous, outwardly oblique, with a little

irregular outcurve. T.p. line geminate, the inner portion black, more or less Iunu-

late and irregular, the outer obscure, brown, even, partly lost: as a whole, some-

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDH 115

what irregularly outcurved over cell and decidedly incurved below it. S.t. line

narrow whitish, irregular, with a distinct W, preceded by sagittate black marks

and shades which tend to become lost, and sometimes outwardly emphasized by

black scales. A series of black terminal lunules, beyond which the fringes are cut

with. yellow. Claviform short, broad, outlined by blackish scales, concolorous.

Orbicular of good size, irregularly oval, oblique, incompletely outlined, not so

powdery, and sometimes a little paler. Reniform large, broad kidney-shaped, out-

lined in black, outwardly relieved by a pale blotch which has somewhat the °

appearance of a small reniform stuck in the upper outer corner of a very large one.

Secondaries pale dirty yellowish, outwardly smoky, with a more or less obvious

outer line and discal spot, darker in the female. Beneath, smoky, powdery; sec-

ondaries paler; all wings with a more or less well-marked extra-median line and a

small dusky discal spot.

Expands 1.36-1.62 in. = 34-41 mm.

Habitat: Manitoba; Miniota, May 5, 11, 22; Cartwright, May 24.

Three males and six females, mostly in fair condition, are under exami-

nation, two of them belonging to Mr. Heath, the others received through

H. H. Brehme. The species is in some respects intermediate between

versuta and runata, and is characterized principally by having no very strong

characters. ‘There is quite a variation in the distinctness of the sagittate

marks preceding the s.t. line, one example from Cartwright having the

entire series fully defined, while in other examples they are almost entirely

absent.

Hadena ferida nov. sp.

Ground-color dull rusty brown with black powderings. Head with a dusky

frontal line. Collar with two narrow blackish lines. Thoracic disk and patagia

more or less marked with dark brown or black scales. Primaries with all the normal

maculation present, but not constrasting, and more or less obscured by black powder-

ings. Basal line geminate, black, broken, angulated. T.a. line geminate, black,

the inner part less marked, outwardly oblique, somewhat curved, with an obtuse

angle just below the middle. T.p. line geminate, inner portion somewhat lunulate,

outer more even and less distinct, followed by a series of pale venular points; out-

wardly bent over cell, then oblique, nearly parallel to the outer margin, except for

an incurve in the sub-median interspace. S.t. line yellowish, broken, almost punc-

tiform in some examples, a distinct though broken W on veins 3 and 4. A series

of black terminal lunules, between which the fringes are cut with yellow. There is

a somewhat obscure, diffuse median shade, which is more obvious on the costa and

again below the claviform, where the entire median space is somewhat darkened.

Claviform pointed, large, extending across the median space, the lower margin form-

ing an obvious black bar, the upper margin less conspicuous and sometimes incom-

plete. Orbicular very large, oblique, irregularly ovate, incompletely outlined by

black scales, a little paler than ground, with a dusky central dot, spot or line.

Reniform large, irregular, the upper and lower margins extending beyond the cell,

and not defined, more or less marked with yellowish scales, and tending to central

lines. Secondaries smoky, paler at base, with a dark terminal line at the base of

116 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

the yellowish fringes. Beneath, gray to smoky, powdery, with a more or less

marked extra-median line and discal spot on all wings.

Expands 1.32-1.52 in. = 33-38 mm.

Habitat: Newfoundland.

Four female examples, in good to fair condition except for legs and

antenne. ‘The thoracic crests are well marked, the anterior divided cen-

trally; abdominal tufts distinct, those on 3d and 4th segments even con-

spicuous. The species has no very close allies in our lists, but is perhaps

nearest to miniota, with which, nevertheless, it can hardly be closely com-

pared.

Hadena susquesa nov. sp.

Head a dull rusty luteous. Collar luteous gray inferiorly, leaden or ash-gray

at tip. Thorax with gray and black mottlings and lines over a rusty luteous base;

the disk of patagia luteous. Primaries rather bright reddish luteous, with rusty

brown markings and ash-gray shadings. Median lines obscure. T.a. line traceable

chiefly by the difference in shade between the luteous basal space and more gray-

shaded median space, also by dusky venular marks which are not connected. T-p.

line indicated on costa, lost over the cell, but traceable again below vein 4, and there

parallel with outer margin. There is no obvious s.t. line. A series of inter-spatial

blackish terminal lunules tend to unite into a shaded line below vein 4. A narrow

yellow line at base of fringes, which are narrowly cut with yellow beyond the veins.

There is a rusty brown streak at base below the median vein. Claviform large, con-

colorous, outlined in rusty brown, extending almost across the median space: beyond

it the interspace is yellowish to the outer margin. Orbicular round or nearly so,

brown-ringed, then with a yellow annulus, gray-centered. Reniform large, upright,

a little constricted, gray-filled, rather obscurely outlined in brown and yellow, a

conspicuous yellowish shade beyond it toward apex. The veins tend to become

blackish marked; and, beyond the t.p. line, veins 3 and 4 are whitish-bordered to

the outer margin, giving them a white-rayed appearance. Secondaries dull smoky

brown with a darker discal spot and a blackish line at base of the white-tipped fringes.

Beneath, yellow-gray, more or less mottled and powdery, with variably distinct

outer line and discal spot.

Expands 1.20 in. = 30 mm.

Habitat: Claremont, Cal. (Carl Baker); San Diego, Cal. (Frank

Merrick).

Two male examples, in good condition, neither with date of capture.

The example from Mr. Baker has been in my collection a long time awaiting

a mate; the example from Mr. Merrick is just received, and, while it is not

exactly a mate, it is at least a duplicate that shows the species to be a good

one, and not discolored, as I had suspected. ‘The peculiar reddish luteous

ground, the gray shading, and the tendency to a strigate type of maculation,

give the species a superficial resemblance to Morrisonia, and more especially

to mucens; but it is really allied to Hadena fumosa, and has the excision

below the apex of the secondaries well marked.

_———— =

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDZ pW

Orthosia dusca nov. sp.

Has the general appearance of euroa, but is smaller, darker, with more diffuse

maculation and with shorter, broader primaries. I have a series of ten eastern

euroa ranging in locality from New York to Kittery Point, Me., and a series of over

forty specimens from various points in Manitoba and British Columbia, and the

latter are uniformly different in the points just mentioned. In the females the

difference is much more marked, as a rule, than in the males; for in the female euroa

the primaries are usually distinctly rectangular or even a little pointed at tip, the

median shade is distinct and well defined, and all the maculation is neatly written:

in dusca, on the other hand, the primaries are quite as stumpy in the female as in

the male, the median shade is diffuse, often indistinct, and usually all the markings

are obscure and mottled.

Expands 1.-1.12 in. = 25-28 mm.

Habitat: Cartwright, Miniota and Winnipeg, Manitoba, August and

September; Kaslo, B.C.

Cucullia phila nov. sp.

Head, thorax and primaries bluish gray. Head with two obscure blackish

transverse lines. Thorax with disk brownish, the patagia obscurely sub-margined

with brown or blackish. Primaries tending to brownish along the costal region,

a distinct rusty shade in the cell where the ordinary spots are vaguely indicated.

A distinct white, diffuse blotch in the sub-median interspace before the curved

black mark representing the t.p. line. T.a. line traceable, single, slender, black,

with long outward teeth, that in the sub-median interspace reaching almost to the

middle of the wing. T.p. line vaguely indicated, except in the sub-median inter-

space, where it forms a black incurve, and over vein 1, where it is bent outwardly

and is accompanied by a white band. An obscure black basal streak into the s.m.

tooth of t.a. line. An oblique black streak extends from the curve of the t.p. line

to the margin just below vein 2. The veins are black-marked, and beyond them

the brown fringes are cut with gray. There is a narrow, black, broken terminal

line. Secondaries white to the middle, then darkening gradually to a deep smoky

brown outer border, the fringes white. Beneath, primaries glossy smoky brown;

secondaries as above, but the dusky outer border is narrower. Abdomen grayish

white, the dorsal tuftings brown.

Expands 1.50-1.60 in. = 37-40 mm.

Habitat: Philadelphia, Pa.; Maryland.

Two males and two females. The two males and one female are from

Mr. Frederick Weigand of Philadelphia, and are bred specimens. The

Maryland example is old, and has been left unnamed for years, because I

had no record of its source, and I doubted a new eastern species so rare that

only one example should occur in collections. It is more sordid in appear-

ance than the bred examples, and has a brownish shading throughout the

primaries, which obscures the white blotch in the median space.

118 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The species is allied to speyerz, but is smaller and darker throughout,

with comparatively broader primaries.

The larva, an inflated specimen of which is sent by Mr. Weigand, has

the head black, clypeal sutures and an inferior lateral spot yellow; a broad

orange dorsal line bordered by a broad black band which cuts into and

vertically divides a yellow lateral line; a broad orange sub-lateral line

inferiorly edged by a broken black line. Feet yellow, black-ringed at base.

Ventral surface yellow, marked with a broken black line toward the sides.

The margins of the first thoracic segment are yellow above, and the posterior

margin of the dorsal hump on segment 12 is also yellow.

The larvee were taken in fall, “feeding on the perennial or New England

Aster,” in Fairmount Park. Adults emerged the spring following, date

not quoted.

Copicucullia mala nov. sp.

Head, thorax and primaries whitish gray. Head with front mixed with brown-

ish; collar with obscure brownish transverse lines. Thorax with brown scales inter-

mingled, but no definite maculation. Primaries with transverse maculation lost,

and ordinary spots not traceable. T.a. line marked by an oblique costal brown

streak. On the inner margin is a black streak, which extends from near base to

about the middle of the wing. A narrow black line extends from base, through sub-

median interspace, to middle, where it dilates, and forms a streak which is dislocated

at half its course, and reaches the outer margin below vein 2. Veins blackish-marked;

costal region a little darker; an obscure dusky shade extends inwardly from outer

margin below apex toward the middle of inner margin; but it is interrupted before

the sub-medial black streak, and practically lost in the ground-color. Secondaries

smoky, a little paler at base, the fringes white. Beneath, very pale whitish gray;

the primaries a little darker.

Expands 1.30 in. = 32 mm.

Habitat: Witch Creek, Cal., Aug. 12.

A single male, in fair condition. This resembles eulepis Grt., but is

smaller. ‘The t.p. line is completely lost, and there is no black marking

below vein 4 on the outer margin. ‘There are other, minor differences; but

those named above are most obvious.

Plagiomimicus dollii nov. sp.

Ground-color a luteous yellow overlaid and shaded by pale chocolate-brown,

the lines luteous golden brown, and a golden brown tinge also reflected from the

primaries. Head and thorax uniform brown; abdomen paler, more yellowish.

Primaries with t.a., median and t.p. lines single, sub-parallel, each with a strong

outward acute angle. In the t.a. line this angle is near the middle; in the median

line it is on vein 5, opposite the lower angle of the cell; in the t.p. line it is above

vein 6; and at the point of angulation an oblique dusky shade continues to the apex

aga

— aoe eee ES EO a:

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDA 119

seeming at first a continuation of the line. The s.t. line is marked by this oblique

shade near costa, but below only by the difference between the luteous terminal

area (which is the palest portion of the wing) and the slightly darker, very narrow

s.t. space. A golden brown, continuous, even, terminal line at the base of the yellow-

ish brown fringes. The ordinary spots are large, concolorous. Orbicular round

or nearly so, inconspicuously ringed with darker brown. Reniform broad, a little

constricted, incompletely defined in brown. Secondaries yellow with a golden

luster, smoky toward base within a dusky extra-median line. A faint dusky lunule

and a distinct brown line at base of fringes. Beneath, golden yellowish, with a dusky

median shade line on both wings.

Expands 1.12-1.35 in. = 28-34 mm.

Habitat: Palmerly, Cochise County, Arizona, August.

Two male and two female examples, all in good condition; from the

collection of the Brooklyn Institute. I cannot identify this with any of

the described species from Central America, and it is quite different from

those of our own species thus far described. The frontal protuberance is

umbilicate, the depression roughened.

Schinia espea nov. sp.

Head and thorax creamy with a reddish tinge; abdomen whitish. Primaries

very pale creamy with a greenish tint, the shading olivaceous. Basal area whitish

to the t.a. line, which is very oblique inwardly and a little arquate, extending from

beyond basal third of costa to within basal third of inner margin. The line is out-

wardly shaded with olivaceous, which is darkest and broadest inferiorly, so as to

slightly obscure the entire median space, the costal area being lightest, and fading

out to the t.p. line. T.p. line from costa just within apex inwardly oblique, evenly

bi-sinuate, to the outer third of inner margin. S.t. space very narrow, especially

on costal margin, olivaceous, marking, by its contrast with the pale terminal space,

an even but not at all defined s.t. line just about parallel to the outer margin.

Fringes olivaceous. Secondaries white, sub-transparent, with a moderate blackish

outer border. Beneath, white; primaries with smoky clouds over the costal area

and s.t. space.

Expands .96 in. = 24 mm.

Habitat: Miaco, Florida, September.

One rather poor female out of a purchased lot, collector unknown.

The species is an ally of biwndulata on the characters used by Hampson;

but the course of the median lines is utterly unlike that of any other species

known to me.

Pseudacontia cansa nov. sp.

Head and thorax a mottling of white and glossy gray scales, more white on the

head than on thorax, and more white in the male than in the female. Abdomen

gray, segments narrowly white-ringed. Primaries smooth glossy gray, the median

120 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

lines forming broad, rather even white bands in the female, becoming more diffuse

inwardly in the male. S.t. line whitish, very irregular, tending to become lost medi-

ally, a little emphasized by brown preceding scales in some specimens; a patch of

golden brown scales at the apex. A series of black terminal dots, fringes obscurely

cut with pale. Orbicular a small black dot. Reniform a small black crescent at

the inner edge of the white band forming the t.p. line. Secondaries smoky gray

with a diffuse whitish median band, more distinct in the male, in which a dusky lu-

nate discal mark is more or less obvious. Beneath, primaries smoky at base, becom-

ing paler outwardly until they are white before a distinct broad, defined blackish s.t.

band, beyond which the wing is again pale. There is a small black discal lunule.

Secondaries whitish, with a narrow extra-basal dark band, a broader, blackish sub-

terminal band, and a black discal lunate mark.

Expands .94-.98 in. = 23.5-24.5 mm.

Habitat: Hamilton County, Kansas, 3500 feet (Professor F. H. Snow).

One male and two females, in fair condition. I have been inclined to

regard these as forms of crustarta Morr.; but the receipt of quite a series

of the Jatter shows them to be distinct. The vestiture is smoother through-

out, and, while the maculation is almost the same, there is none of the

bright coloring or sharp contrast of the older species. The armature of

the fore tibia is also somewhat different, forming distinct outer and inner

claws, instead of a long inner claw with a marked outer angle of the flat

corneous tip.

Pseudacontia louisa nov. sp.

Head and thorax rich yellow-brown mottled with creamy white and black scales;

abdomen yellowish. Primaries creamy yellowish white marked and mottled with

brown and black. Basal space brown-powdered, so that the pale ground is only

just discernible; the basal line geminate, blackish, included space of the ground-

color. T.a. line a broad band of the basal creamy tint, the anterior margin formed

by the limits of the dusky base, the posterior a black scale line edging the brown

median space; the line irregular, with a larger outcurve between veins 1 and 2, and

a sharp inward tooth on vein1l. The median space is narrow, brown-powdered, with

the round black reniform (which is annulate with yellow) forming a conspicuous

feature, the outer margin formed by an edging of black scales, of which the small

lunate orbicular forms part and the irregular inner part of the t.p. line forms the

remainder. Beyond this the wing is creamy to the brown terminal space, the s.t.

space appearing bluish from the dark band of under side, the edges of which are a

little marked by brown scales on the upper surface. S.t. line not defined, the termi-

nal space narrow, and irregularly brown-powdered. A series of distinct black ter-

minal lunules at the base of the long, brown, pale interlined fringes. Secondaries

blackish, with a broad yellowish white median band in which is a large blackish

discal lunate mark. Beneath, primaries mottled, blackish and yellow; a distinct,

extra-median, broad outer band forming the most conspicuous feature. Second-

aries pale yellowish, with a large blackish discal mark and a narrow, broken,

irregular sub-terminal blackish band. A broken dark terminal line on all wings.

Expands 1.10 in. = 27 mm.

SMITH, NEW NOCTUID 121

Habitat: Sabine Parish, La. (G. Coverdale).

A single male has been in my collection a long time awaiting a mate,

and is now described because there seems no present hope of more material

from the same region. It was a papered example, and the body is trans-

versely flattened out of all shape; but the primaries are perfect and the

maculation is clean and well defined. It is larger than crustaria with a

similar type of maculation; but in this the pale ground predominates, and

the dusky s.t. space and more or less well-defined s.t. line are eliminated

altogether. The anterior legs are wanting in the type, and the generic

reference is therefore made upon the basis of the general resemblance to

erustaria.

Annaphila miona nov. sp.

Head and thorax bronze-brown with black and metallic-blue scales intermingled,

forming no obvious ornamentation. Abdomen deep orange with narrow black

dorsum, the edges of the segments narrowly orange. Primaries brown, mottled

with black and metallic blue scales, the latter most obvious beyond the reniform

and along the upper course of the s.t. line. Basal line traceable by black scales. T.a.

line geminate, black, more or less broken, included space a little paler than ground,

outwardly oblique and with a distinct outward tooth in the sub-median interspace.

Median line black, quite obvious, outwardly oblique and a little outcurved. T.p.

line, consisting of a very even brown band, very regularly bent over the cell, and an

inner, broken, very irregular blackish line forming the outer border of the median

space, and this is inwardly toothed on vein 2. The outer part of the wing is black

at apex, shading to brown at anal angle; and through the black portion the s.t.

line is very irregularly marked out by brilliant blue scales: below the middle the line

becomes more evensand pale. Fringes brown with a black interline, beyond which

they are checkered with black. Orbicular not obvious in the specimens. Reniform

large, irregularly lunate, pale brown, ringed with white, with a whitish patch above

it to costa, and outwardly three lobe-like extensions of the t.p. line filled with blue

scales. Secondaries deep orange with a broad, even, black margin and a very faint

basal line of blackish scales. No discal spot. Beneath, orange; primaries with a

broad outer border, narrowing toward the angle, interrupted by a series of orange

spots, and a broad median band from inner margin to center, where it breaks, and

sends spurs toward costa and outer margin; secondaries with a broad black outer

band in which a series of orange spots is traceable.

Expands .80 in. = 20 mm.

Habitat: Plumas County, California, June.

Two females, in good condition save for lack of antenne. At first sight

the orange of secondaries seems unbroken, except for the broad, solid,

black outer band, and this forms a characteristic of the species. The faint

blackish basal line becomes obvious enough when attention is drawn to it;

but there is no black shading at the extreme base of the wing.

122 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Annaphila variegata nov. sp.

Head and thorax bronzed brown mottled with blue and white scales, the latter

tending to form a white tip to the collar. Abdomen orange, dorsum blackish, the

segments narrowly orange-ringed. Primaries with basal area grayish brown to t.a.

line; the median space, except reniform, darker, more or less blue-powdered; reni-

form, and obliquely below to the inner angle, white or very pale orange-yellowish

merging outwardly into a dusky terminal and apical shade in which a black-edged

s.t. line is prominent to the middle: the line itself consists of scattered white scales

forming a white mark on costa, and beyond it are blue scales. Basal line dark

chocolate-brown. ‘T.a. line geminate, black or blackish, forming a sharp outward

tooth in the sub-median interspace, and almost or quite meeting an inward tooth of

the median shade; black scales connecting the two when they do not actually meet.

Median shade line black, very irregular, keeping close to the t.p. line so far as that

is defined below the reniform. T-.p. line discontinuous, brown, and partly defined

by the s.t. space from costa over cell, broken opposite the lower angle of the reni-

form, where a loop-like extension of the dark median space forms the lower angle of

that spot, then black, with an inward angle on vein 2. Orbicular very obscure,

round, concolorous, traceable by an outline of black scales. Reniform a large white

or faintly orange blotch, inwardly and inferiorly defined, upwardly extending to

costa, and outwardly merging into the s.t. space. There is a series of black termi-

nal spots which tends to become sagittate above the pale area. There is a pale

line at the base of the long fringes, which are brown with a black interline, and out-

wardly checkered gray and brown. Secondaries orange-yellow, varying in depth;

the males paler, with a broad black outer band having an irregular inner margin,

a more or less continuous narrow sub-basal band, and a black spot on the inner

margin above the anal angle. Beneath, orange; primaries with a broad outwardly

oblique black band, a black sub-marginal band which is broad from costa to the

middle, where it touches the inner margin and is then very narrow and linear, and a

black outer border, which is separated from the black fringes by a very narrow

orange line; secondaries with a broken black inner line, a fragmentary median line

indicated by two spots near inner and one on costal margin, a very irregular outer

band more or less connected with the narrow black outer margin.

Expands .88-.95 in. = 22-24 mm.

Habitat: Placer County, California, 2500 feet.

Five males and five females, in good condition and all very much alike.

The males are uniformly a little smaller and less intensely colored, with the

inner black band on secondaries more generally broken. ‘There is no black

discal spot on secondaries, and the maculation of the primaries is more like

the yellow-winged forms than any other of the orange-winged species,

except miona.

Erastria puncticosta nov. sp.

Ground-color very pale ashen with a smoky gray powdering and overlay. Head

and collar dark chocolate-brown, but varying toward the ground. Primaries with

large brown costal spots at the inception of the basal, t.a. and t.p. lines, and beyond

SMITH, NEW NOCTUID 123

the latter a series of alternate brown and pale marks to the apex. The basal line

does not extend much below the costal spot. T.a. line single, narrow, broken,

irregular, inwardly oblique. T.p. line single, broken, very irregular, outwardly

bent over cell, and partly obsolete at that point. S.t. line pale, very irregular,

preceded by a dusky shading, which may be emphasized by still darker, more sagit-

tate spots. A series of black terminal lunules, beyond which the fringes are cut with

pale. There is no obvious orbicular. Reniform a narrow black line or lunule, which

may or may not be margined outwardly with whitish. Secondaries uniformly

smoky brown. Beneath, smoky, varying in tint; the primaries always darker,

with the white costal dots of upper side reproduced; the secondaries more whitish,

tending to a dusky outer margin.

Expands .60-.66 in. = 15-16.5 mm,

Habitat: New Brighton, Pa., July 22—Aug. 11.

Nine examples, all males and mostly in good condition. The species

at first sight resembles the deltoid species of Megachyta by the prominent

brown costal spots. There is little variation in the examples before me,

except in the amount of the dusky overlay. In the best examples this

extends from just beyond the base to the outer margin, becoming gradually

more intense, so that the pale s.t. line stands out clearly in contrast; in the

poorest examples the dusky tint remains over the terminal area only, and

the s.t. line loses in relative distinctness. 'The abdomen is smoothly scaled,

with a small dorsal scale-tuft at base in the better specimens. Beneath,

the legs are dusky and the tarsi narrowly pale-ringed.

The species seems to be not uncommon at New Brighton, but I have

none at present from other sources.

Erastria humerata nov. sp.

Head and collar chocolate-brown; thorax and ground-color of primaries gray

with an overlay of yellowish pale brown scales. Primaries with median space filled

by a blackish-brown shading and a sub-quadrate patch of the same color on costa

in s.t. space. Basal line brown, extending to median vein, and from it, to base of

wing, is a dark chocolate-brown spot, which looks like the extension of the collar.

T.a. line dark brown, irregular, a little inwardly oblique, outwardly diffuse, preceded

by a whitish line or shade. T.p. line blackish, broken, irregular, abruptly and

squarely exserted over the cell. This outward exsertion of the paler ground occurs

beyond the linear black reniform, so that at first sight the t.p. line seems to cross

the wing with only a slight outward curve. Outwardly the t.p. line is bordered by

pale scales. S.t. line pale, very irregular, forming a broad inward angle opposite

the cell, and an almost equal outward angle between veins 3 and 4. As a whole, the

8.t. space is a little smoky, darkening to the large brown costal patch. Terminal

space usually paler and a little more brown than the rest of the wing. A series of

distinct black terminal lunules, beyond which the dusky fringes are cut with yellow-

ish. Orbicular wanting. Reniform black, linear, upright. A series of three white

dots on costa between t.p. and s.t. lines. Secondaries uniform smoky. Beneath,

124 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

smoky; primaries darker, with the costal dots of upper side intensified and a larger

one at inception of t.p. line; secondaries paler, with a large discal spot.

Expands .58 -.64 in. = 14.5-16 mm.

Habitat: New Brighton, Pa., July 11-31.

Eight examples, in good to fair condition, all males; from Mr. H. D.

Merrick. As in puncticosta, the antenne have the joints distinctly marked

and feebly serrate, with obvious cilize but no distinct tufts. There is also a

small scale-tuft at the base of the abdomen, which is rubbed in most speci-

mens. ‘There is little or no variation except such as is due to the condition

of the specimens, producing more or less contrast between the median and

the outwardly adjoining areas.

Erastria immuna nov. sp.

Deep purplish brown or blackish over a pale base, the maculation black. Where-

ever the purplish overlay has been marred, the whitish base becomes more or less

evident. Primaries with basal line black, obvious on costa, and emphasized by

whitish scales outwardly. ‘T.a. line black, single, velvety, a little outcurved in the

interspaces, and on the whole a little inwardly oblique. Median shade black,

nearly upright, a little diffuse, and beyond it the wing tends to a little mottling.

T.p. line black, single, more or less lunulate, irregularly outcurved over the cell and

inwardly bent below it, emphasized by a few pale scales. S.t. line irregular, broken,

pale, chiefly marked by a black preceding shade which is sharply defined on the line,

but becomes diffuse inwardly. A series of black terminal lunules which may be

emphasized by pale scales. A series of four white costal dots before apex. Fringes

cut with pale opposite the cell. Orbicular wanting in the specimens. Reniform a

creamy white lunule. Secondaries even, smoky gray. Abdomen smoky gray with

a conspicuous black basal tuft on dorsum. Beneath, gray, powdery; primaries

darker, with a paler terminal space; secondaries more whitish, with a small discal

spot and a tendency to an exterior line.

Expands .80 in. = 20 mm.

Habitat: New Brighton, Pa., July 21, 28.

Two males, in fair condition; from Mr. H. D. Merrick. The species

is similar to muscosula in size and wing-form, but is much darker throughout,

and darker than any of the other species known to me. Of the two examples

before me, the one taken July 21 is almost uniformly purplish black with

the pale reniform and the small whitish costal dots conspicuous; the speci-

men taken on the 28th has the outer half of the wing distinctly pale-flecked,

and this seems to be due to the removal of some of the surface scales. The

species is therefore apt to be apparently variable, the more so as the black

markings are composed of somewhat elevated scales.

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDA 125

Thalpochares fractilinea nov. sp.

Head, thorax and primaries pale, creamy yellowish, the latter washed and

shaded with luteous. Basal line wanting, or marked only by black dots on costa and

sub-costa. T.a. line a series of black dots which are sometimes connected by a

brownish line, in course a little inwardly oblique. T.p. line black, broken, squarely

exserted over the cell, followed by a more or less obvious pale shading. S.t. line

pale, very even, outwardly diffuse, preceded by a darker shading in which there

may be some black scales. A series of distinct black terminal lunules and a pale

line at base of fringes. A somewhat obscure median shade darkens the outer portion

of median space. Orbicular wanting. Reniform a small black, somewhat lunate

mark. A series of four pale costal spots from t.p. to s.t. line. Secondaries uni-

formly smoky. Beneath, primaries dusky, with the costal spots of upper surface

obscurely reproduced; secondaries paler, without obvious maculation.

Expands .48-.52 in. = 12-13 mm.

Habitat: New Brighton, Pa., June 12, July 29, Aug. 3, 9, 12, 14, 26.

Five males, one female, and two specimens in which the sex is indeter-

minable, owing to their defective condition; from Mr. H. D. Merrick. The

species is narrower-winged and has longer palpi than the other American

forms referred to this genus, and this may not be the best place forit. The

primaries lack the accessory cell in the two specimens examined, and this de-

termined the generic reference.

- Homopyralis bigallis nov. sp.

Of the usual red-brown overlying a dull luteous, which becomes apparent when

the specimen is flown? Maculation black. More or less black powdering, which

usually darkens the basal space and may obscure the outer half of median space of

primaries. Head and thorax marked with black and purplish intermingled scales.

Primaries with t.a. line black, geminate, outcurved below median vein, inner part

of line not distinct from dusky basal space. T.p. line geminate, inner portion lunu-

late, more or less broken, rather squarely exserted over cell; outer portion incom-

plete, in part reduced to a series of pale venular dots. A pair of waved black shade

lines through the outer portion of median space. S.t. line pale, irregular, variably

defined, preceded by a quadrate blackish patch on costal area. A series of black

marginal followed by smaller, yellow terminal dots. Orbicular a small, round, solid

black spot. Reniform a large, solid black quadrate or oblong spot. Secondaries

with the maculation of primaries continued across the disk, but as a whole nearer

to the base than on primaries. There is a tendency to a purplish shading through

the outer part of the wings. Beneath, smoky luteous; both wings with a curved

extra-median line, a crenulated terminal line, a more diffuse sub-basal line, and an

obscure discal lunule.

Expands 1.15-1.40 in. = 29-35 mm.

Habitat: Hot Springs, New Mexico, 7000 ft., September; Yavapai

County, Arizona, Aug. 8; Huachuca Mountains, Arizona, July 30;

Palmerly, Arizona, without date.

126 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Four males and two females, in fair condition. ‘The markings are more

clearly defined and the lines are better separated than in the allied species.

Superficially the larger size will at once make it recognizable.

Epizeuxis intensalis nov. sp.

Head, thorax and primaries deep, rich, lustrous smoky brown; on the head and

thorax uniform, on the primaries overlying a pale, glossy luteous which appears

through in places, and gives the wing a mottled appearance. T-.a. line upright,

with three equal outward teeth or angles only a little darker than the ground, and

usually best marked by the preceding pale shade, which is variably complete and

always diffuse. T.p. line sharply denticulate, with long outward teeth on all veins,

only a little outcurved over cell and incurved below, best marked by the well-defined

pale line which follows the obscure darker line. S.t. line very irregular, forming

three main outward lobes and three long inward angles, the first outward lobe begin-

ning at costa and extending to the inward tooth opposite middle of cell; the second

lobe begins at the latter point, and extends to the inward angulations on veins 1 and

2; the third outward lobe is only partial, and extends to the inner margin. The

terminal space is always paler than the rest of the wing, often mottled, and some-

times contrastingly so. There is no obvious median shade. A distinct black termi-

nal line, narrowly interrupted on the veins. Fringes smoky, narrowly cut with

yellow. Orbicular a small round dot of the yellow ground-color. Reniform moder-

ate in size, somewhat lunate, consisting of a dark crescent set in a larger spot of the

pale ground-color. Secondaries whitish, with a yellowish or smoky suffusion,

darker outwardly. There is a dusky median line followed by a pale shading, a pale

sub-marginal line, and a distinct brown terminal line. Beneath, yellow, very

sharply marked with a common black median line, a much fainter and variably

evident s.t. line, and obscure discal spots.

Expands 1.10-1.40 in. = 28-37 mm.

Habitat: Yavapai County, Arizona, July and August (Hutson); South-

ern Arizona, June 15-80 (Poling); Southern California (Poling).

Six males and one female, in fair or good condition. This species

resembles cobeta Barnes at first sight, but differs from all others in the genus

by the distinctly annulate reniform, the contrasting terminal space, and the

sharply-marked under side. The secondaries also are paler than in any

other of the allied forms, so that we have a fairly well-defined species in an

aggregation of decidedly variable forms.

Epizeuxis partitalis nov. sp.

Head and thorax glossy brown with a smoky tinge, abdomen somewhat paler.

Primaries glossy brown; basal area a broad diffuse median shade, and all beyond

the t.p. line smoky blackish. T.a. line nearly upright, with three moderate out-

curves in the interspaces. Tp. line blackish, well-defined, denticulate, followed by

a less distinct paler line, moderately outcurved and drawn in only a little in the

SMITH, NEW NOCTUIDE 127,

submedian interspace. S.t. line pale, irregular, incomplete. A black, somewhat

lunate terminal line. Fringes pale brown, obscurely cut with darker brown. Orbi-

cular not marked in the specimens before me. Reniform a small, upright dark bar

preceded by a paler shading. Secondaries smoky, darker outwardly, alinost whitish

at base. There is a blackish median, a whitish sub-terminal, and a blackish terminal

line; the fringes pale dull yellowish. Beneath, powdery yellowish basally, smoky

or blackish beyond the middle; all wings with a small discal spot; primaries with

diffuse median shade, with obvious t.p. and pale s.t. line; secondaries reproducing

more clearly the maculation of upper surface.

Expands 1.24-1.32 in. = 31-33 mm.

Habitat: Yavapai County, Arizona, July 24 (Hutson).

One male and one female. Differs from the allied species in the paler

median space crossed by an obvious median shade. The secondaries are

as dark as in lubricalis; and as a whole it is very markedly distinct from

mtensalis, which was collected in the same locality.

[Annats N.Y. Acap. Sct., Vol. XVIII, No. 3, Part II, pp. 129-146. 4 April, 1908.]

ON DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CONSTITUTION

THROUGH RECASTING OF ANALYSES.!

By Auexis A. JuLien, Pu. D.

INTRODUCTION.

The recognition of the aggregate character of rock constitution, even in

varieties of aphanitic texture, has led the analyst in recent years to rearrange

the determined chemical components of a rock in the form and propor-

tion of its existing mineral constituents. ‘The now well-known advantages

of this practice, in the bearing of its results on the true character and probable

origin of a rock, are bringing about a complete revolution in petrographical

science. ‘The day of the representation of the material of a rock by a mere

report of its chemical analysis has now passed.

The early mineralogists were accustomed frequently to transpose analyses

of a mineral substance into the proximate mineral constituents known at

that time, such as calcareous minerals and ores into various carbonates

and oxides. With the silicate minerals however the increasing list of known

minerals soon became burdened with an indefinite series of hypothetical

compounds, proposed by Rammelsberg, ‘I'schermak, Knop and their suc-

cessors. ‘The difficulty and uncertainty attending the use of these, in

interpretation of chemical analyses, have perhaps served to discourage the

continuance of the ancient method; so that at present the discussion of the

chemical composition of a mineral generally ceases with presentation of its

analysis, accompanied by oxygen ratios and a formula.

A chemical analysis alone, particularly of a complex compound, such as

a silicate, rarely conveys — even to the eye of an expert mineralogist—

much more than a vague guess or estimate of the distinctive character of the

combination. A glance, for example, over an analysis of a chlorite, sepa-

rately presented, would hardly enable him to assign it with any certainty

to the page-full of selected but widely varying analyses of penninite or to

those of clinochlore or to those of prochlorite comprised in every treatise

1 Presented to the Academy at the meeting on 6 January, 1908.

129

130 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

on mineralogy, now seriously offered to us in illustration of the fixed theo-

retical composition of each of those minerals.

Nor is the certainty increased in very many cases by deduction of the

actual ratios existing between the components included in the chemical

analysis of a supposedly pure mineral. A chemical formula merely marks a

possible relationship and may be but a blind and even misleading guide.

The extraction of a formula is not confined to an independent mineral and

is not a certificate of homogeneity. Whatever the figures of an analysis

obtained from a pinch of soil or clay or from a fragment of brick, it would

go hard with any analyst if he could not devise therefrom some skeleton of

a formula. Yet these spectral shapes hover over all the early history of

mineral analysis, and their existence is often brought forward as the chief,

generally as the sufficient evidence to justify promulgation of new mineral

names or supposed new reactions in mineral genesis.

It is obvious that the initial process in the calculation of a formula, 7. e.,

division of the percentage of each component by its molecular weight, is

one that tends to reduction of the comparative proportion of the minor

components, and thus to minimize and conceal the lack of homogeneity in

a substance subjected to analysis. An investigation of mineral material

therefore which ends with the presentation of the bulk analysis, even with

an annexed calculation of oxygen or molecular ratios and formula of the

crude aggregate, is surely incomplete.

CONSTITUTION OF CRYSTALLIZED MINERALS.

The prevailing method of the analytical chemist, just discussed, seems

to have been founded upon two exaggerated views concerning the constitu-

tion of crystallized minerals:

1. The assumption of their practical homogeneity and purity, an error

which has crowded the literature of the science with hordes of discordant

analyses and a series of poorly described and uncertain species.

The revelations of the microscope, particularly by means of polarized

light, have long since established that a mineral, however well crystallized,

often even when limpid and free from visible enclosures, may be but an

aggregate, with one constituent in predominance in selected specimens,

enveloping a number of others. In the same association or vein, particu-

larly in vicinity of the matrix or vein-wall, phases of intermixture with

increasing amounts of the minor constituents commonly pass into less

perfectly crystallized forms of the first predominant unit, and often into

earthy or massive aggregates in which one or another of the associates rises

JULIEN, DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CONSTITUTION 131

into greater or prevailing proportion. Familiar examples of these transi-

tions are found in the endless variations of intermixture of quartz, even

within its crystals, with hyalite, iron-oxides, rutile, chlorite, ete.; the inter-

inclosure, intergrowth and inter-twinning of the feldspars in aggregates of

the most complex constitution, and the similar mutual envelopments of the

metallic sulphides.

The possibility of even “ideal purity” of a mineral has been based

largely on results of examination of material selected for chemical analysis.

The precautions usually taken to insure freedom from impurities are proba-

bly shown fairly in those long ago described by Doelter.1. The fragments

were first examined by the naked eye and then undera hand lens. A thin

section was prepared and inspected. Splinters and cleavage-plates in

different directions were then spread on a glass slide and examined by

transmitted light under a low magnifying power of the microscope. By

these means, it was believed, the visible purity of the material was insured,

or, if impurities could still be detected but not removed, they were identified

and allowance made for their amount in the reduction of the analytical

figures.

In the light of present knowledge all these precautions appear insufficient

to insure purity. From the subtle revelations of existing intergrowths now

obtained through polarized light — the absolute concealment of all foreign

inclosures within subtranslucent and opaque specimens — and, in every

case, the escape of microscopic inclosures from observation, whatever their

abundance, whose minute dimensions fall below the resolving power of the

microscopic lens — thé natural conclusion follows that the most effective

detection of inclosures must be sought through study of the relationships

of the chemical components of the mineral.

2. The usual mode of application of purely hypothetical compounds in

rearrangement of components.

Without questioning the propriety of their consideration in reconstruction

of an analysis, little seems to be gained toward real explanation of lacking

relationships, by excessive resort to imagined compounds, like Mg Fe,’””

S10, Fe, Fe,” Si, O,,, and others, in pyroxene, which have never been dis-

covered in nature, in isomorphous interlocking with others, like CaMg Si,O,,

whose co-existence as actual minerals is proved by optical behavior. In

such cases, a conviction of the extent of dissemination of existing minerals

as inclosures will lead rather to more persistent search for the latter, and,

I think, more satisfactory solution of difficult problems constantly presented

in recasting analyses.

An analysis then is not the end, but it is only a step toward the discovery

of the existing mineral constitution. As the chemical composition of an

1 Min. u. petr. Mitth., I, 49, 67, 373. 1878.

132 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

established mineral species is fixed, the possible object of analysis of a

specimen identified by other means may be two-fold: determination of any

replacements of components in the chief mineral; and demonstration of the

constitution of other minerals which may be intermixed in the aggregate.

The latter may be of great importance in elucidation of genetic history and

relationships of the chief mineral.

Several methods have already been devised and applied toward quanti-

tative determination of the elements of such intergrowths or aggregates:

such as the graphic methods for measurement of their respective areas in a

microscopic field, by means of drawing or photography; that of separation

of the elements in a crushed aggregate by suspension in a dense liquid;

that of separation of ferruginous minerals from a pulverized aggregate by

means of an electromagnet; that of separate chemical analysis of the por-

tions of an aggregate soluble and insoluble in an acid; and that of com-

parison of the simplified bulk analysis with a series of hypothetical chemical

compounds. ‘The first two methods are inapplicable to aggregates whose

granulation is microscopic; the next two are limited and imperfect, through

dependence upon a single character, and the last is subject to the errors

usual to excessive reliance upon hypothesis rather than upon data of obser-

vation.

A more simple and effective method, in many cases, is that shown in the

practice of the early mineralogists. Within every chemical analysis of a

mineral substance lies the Key to its constitution. For its completion a

re-arrangement or recasting is needed to determine the existing minerals as

combinations of stated components. ‘This can be carried out where the

data are fairly complete, sometimes with great ease, and the results tend

toward solution of long mooted problems and elucidation of the character

of admittedly doubtful mineral species. Modern examples of a return to

this earlier practice have been offered in late studies of certain varieties

of pyrites, feldspars, spodumene and, more recently, jade.

Recast Analyses of Minerals.

A few simple illustrations, taken from a series of calculations now at

hand, will suffice to show the ease of the long-neglected method and the

value of its results. In connection with each analysis, as published, my

estimate of the approximate mineral constitution is appended. In con-

formity to the description of the mineral, the alumina has been assumed,

in these particular examples, as the basis for calculation of the amount

either of a chlorite or of an aluminum hydrosilicate, using the theoretical

composition which may correspond to the accepted formula of each mineral.

JULIEN, DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CONSTITUTION 133

The following is presented as a good example, on the one hand, of the

deceptive appearance which may be assumed by a chemical analysis, and,

on the other, of the corrective evidence supplied by optical examination of

the same specimen.

‘‘Marmolitic antigorite.”’

From New Idria, California. Pale apple-green. Analysis by G. F.

Becker, who states: ‘‘In pure serpentine 40.42 per cent. of magnesia cor-

responds to 41.52 per cent. of silica. It appears therefore that this mineral

is in fact a serpentine comparatively free from impurities. When reduced

to the proper thinness it was found that the material was far from homo-

geneous. A portion as seen under the microscope appeared absolutely

colorless by transmitted light, while the remainder was of yellowish and

brownish tints, in spots almost opaque, although by reflected light this posi-

tion retained the pale apple-green color of the hand specimen. ...clouded

by the presence of extremely microcrystalline particles”’ (Mon. U. 8. Geol.

Surv., XIII, 1888, 110).

Ferrous | Nickel

Hypothetical Silica | Alumina] oxide oxide | Magnesia | Water Totals

constituents SSS ESS SSS SS SS

41.54% | 2.48% 1.37% 0.04% 40.42% | 14.18% | 100.03%

Antigorite 31.49 31.20 9.31 71.70

Deweylite 5.86 5.20 3.51 14.57

Prochlorite 3.04 | 2.48 1.37 4.02 1.35 12.59

Connarite 0.03 0.04 0.01 0.08

Hyalite 1.09 | 1.09

‘* Antigorite.”’

From Antigorio, Piedmont. Analysis by Kenngott.

is : Ferrous (

Hypothetical Silica Alumina oxide Magnesia Water Totals

constituents SS SS

41.20% 2.90% 6.53% 36.71% 12.52% 99.86

Antigorite 31.73 31.74 9.46 72.93

Deweylite 2.48 2.20 1.49 6.17

Prochlorite 3.95 2.90 6.53 2.17 1.57 17.72

Hyalite 3.04 3.04

134 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

This is but one of a long series of determined mixtures of crystalline

antigorite with the minerals above stated and with others in the widest

variation. ‘They appear to me to afford no ground for the hypothesis of

definite isomorphous mixtures of two minerals, antigorite and amesite,

from one extreme of a regular series to the other, as claimed by Tschermak,

but to indicate the irregular mixtures of several minerals in commonly

associated development.

‘‘ Deweylite.”

An unusual variety of the mineral from the United States, whose high

content of silica has never been explained. G.= 2,096. Analysis by

Thomson.

fe, P Ferrous .

Hypothetical Silica Alumina oxide Magnesia Water Totals

constituents Se | SS SS a

50.70% 3.55% 1.70% 23.65% 20.60% 100.20

Deweylite 28 .55 1.70 23 .65 lyfsilal 71.01

Halloysite 4.18 3.55 1.88 9.61

Hyalite 17.97 1.61 | 19.58

‘‘ Bowenite.”’

From Cumberland, Rhode Island. The reported formula: 2(MgO.

CaO),. SiO, + 3H,O (Dana). Analysis by Bowen.

: ; Ferric A :

eeeathetied Silica |Alumina| oxide Lime Magnesia | Water Totals

constituents

44.69% | 0.56% 1.75% 4.25% 34.63% 13.42% 99.30

Diopside (residual) 9.18 4.25 3.05 16.48

Antigorite 20.51 20 .52 6.12 47.15

Deweylite 10.84 9.63 6.51 26.98

Limonite 1.60 0.26 1.86

Chalcedony 2.78

2.78 2

Penninite 1.388 | 0.56 | 0.15 1.43 0.53 4.05

JULIEN, DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CONSTITUTION 135

‘¢ Thermophyllite.”’

From Hopansuo, Finland. Average of three analyses by Arppe, Hermann

and Northcote, with the formulas: (RO. 3R,0,) 2SiO, + 2HO and (MgO.

HO) + MgO. SiO,.

Alu- } Ferric | Ferrous Po-

constituents

41.93%| 4.04% | 0.66%] 1.40% | 37.29% |1.06%|1.54% | 11.62% | 99.54%

Phlogopite 11.79| 4.04 | 0.66 SeSa 06) | 15451) 2.772) | S066

(residual)

Antigorite 29 .82 1.40 | 28.44 8.90 | 68.56

Hyalite 0.32 0.32

‘‘ Celadonite.”’

An apple-green mineral, insoluble in acids, from Scotland. Average of

four analyses by Heddle.

It is stated: “Comp. — A silicate of iron, magnesium and potassium,

formula doubtful” (Dana).

Ferric | Ferrous

Po-

Pypothetical Silica |Alumina | oxide | oxide Lime |Magnesia} tassa | Water} Totals

constituents

54.84%| 3.52% |12.64%| 4.90% |0.89%]| 6.65% |7.00%|9.62%| 100.06

Biotite 26.91} 3.52 | 12.12} 4.90 | 0.89] 6.65 | 7.00| 2.77 | 64.76

Limonite 0.52 0.09} 0.62

Hyalite 27 .93 6.76 | 34.69

‘“‘ Houghite.”’

From Rossie, New York. Analysis by S. W. Johnson. “A hydrotal-

cite derived from the alteration of spinel” (Dana).

This was originally considered to consist essentially of variable mixtures

of 3H,O. Al,O, and MgO. H,O (Kenngott).

136 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Carbonic |Water (by

Silica |Alumina] Magnesia |Insoluble acid difference)| Totals

Hypothetical

constituents ——_— a

3.02% | 19.74% | 36.29% 8.277% 8.46% 24.22% | 100.00%

Spinel (residual) 8.27 8.27

Spinel (dissolved) 10.84 4.22 15.06

Hydrotalcite 8.90 | 20.77 23 .32 52.99

Magnesite ee 8.46 16.15

Antigorite 3.02 3.02 0.90 6.94

Periclase 0.59 0.59

CONSTITUTION OF MICRO-AGGREGATES.

Those substances in particular which are apparently amorphous seem

to have led to the greatest misapprehension and error, which may now be

removed by similar treatment of their analyses. In the absence of outward

crystalline form they present two alternatives: they may be considered as

possibly either truly colloidal and optically isotropic, like obsidian; or as

microcrystalline but mostly homogeneous aggregates. In either case the

so-called “impurities” must be present. In the micro-aggregates, even

though one mineral may predominate, it is always safe to presume that

admixture with other minerals does occur in varying but notable proportions.

In this respect it matters nothing whether an aggregate be macroscopic,

with constituents visible to the naked eye, or microscopic or even ultra-

microscopic; the limitations of our vision or optical instruments have no

bearing in any way on the settlement of homogeneity and of the question of

intermixture.

It is true that in descriptions of minerals many micro-agegregates have

been cautiously assigned to subsidiary lists or groups, under such headings

as “Chloritic minerals more or less imperfectly defined,” “ Magnesian

silicates allied to serpentine but of somewhat doubtful character,’ and

“Appendix to hydrous silicates.” Yet the same pages are crowded with

the names of impure aggregates, figuring as minerals, mainly because amor-

phous and somewhat uniform in color and other characters, particularly if

this conclusion has been buttressed by construction of chemical ratios or

formulas from the analyses.

Micro-aggregates are likely to comprise a larger number and proportion

of chemical components and of their combinations than those found in

crystals. ‘The proposed solution of their constitution does not consist merely

of a calculation of the possible mineral combinations of a certain number

JULIEN, DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CONSTITUTION 137

of chemical components; that process might be almost endless. It is

restricted to a careful discrimination of the probable proximate compounds,

z. e., simpler existing minerals, consistent with the physical and optical

characteristics possessed by the micro-aggregate. Furthermore, when the

associations of this aggregate and the probable conditions attending its

formation are known, the identification of the constituent minerals may be

facilitated by restriction to the class of minerals developed in certain vein

or gangue formations or in a particular metamorphic zone: for example,

the constituents of the “diabantite” mixture to the series of minerals de-

veloped in the belt of weathering and there only.

In a study of the hydrous silicates, almost completed, to which this

paper is a partial introduction, I have prepared a tabulated list to indicate

the possible mineral combinations which may logically be sought for in

micro-aggregates of this particular class. ‘Taking for present examples in

illustration of these views the micro-aggregates of magnesian hydrosilicates

of the belt of weathering or decay — one of the groups of amorphous mix-

tures of the most difficult resolution — the following are some of the chief

indices for detection of the combinations in which the more common com-

ponents may occur.

Silica in three forms: a) colloidal and soluble, in combination with a

large proportion of water, e. g., disilicic monohydrate, H,Si,O;, containing

13.05 per cent. of water, or trisilicic dihydrate, H,Si,O,, containing 16.67

per cent. of water; 6) hyalite or opal, containing 2 to 13 per cent. of water

and insoluble, and (c) this, passing through various intermixtures, as semi-

opal, chalcedony, ete., into anhydrous and insoluble crystalline quartz.

Alumina: a) where silica is scanty, as one of the two aluminum hydrates

(bauxite, gibbsite); b) with silica abundant, as a residual remnant of an

aluminous mineral (pyroxene, mica, feldspar, etc.) or as one of eight alu-

minum hydrosilicates (allophane, halloysite, talcosite, etc., but perhaps not

kaolinite); ¢) in presence of alkaline and earthy bases, as a newly formed

chlorite or zeolite (a restricted list, prochlorite, stilbite, natrolite, etc.).

Ferrie oxide: a) with silica scanty, as anhydrous oxide (hematite, but

never magnetite), or as one of the four ferric hydrates (limonite, limnite,

turgite, géthite); 5) with silica abundant, as one of the three ferric hydro-

silicates (hisingerite, chloropal, anthosiderite), or as an aluminum-ferric

hydrosilicate (?).

Ferrous oxide: a) commonly in replacement of magnesia, sometimes as

siderite or other carbonate; 5) with silica abundant, as one of the two

ferrous hydrosilicates (ekmanite, chloropheite of Forchhammer); or (ec) as

the aluminum-ferrous hydrosilicate (aphrosiderite).

Manganese oxide: a) as manganous oxide (manganosite), sesquioxide

138 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

(manganite) or dioxide (pyrolusite); 5) as hydrate (pyrochroite) and car-

bonate (in wad, rhodochrosite, etc.); ¢) with silica abundant, as manganese

hydrosilicate (bementite).

Lime: a) as a residual remnant of one of the calcareous silicates (augite,

diopside, tremolite, anorthite, etc.); b) as carbonate (calcite) or calcium-

magnesium carbonate (dolomite, ankerite); c) with silica abundant, as one

of the newly formed calcium hydrosilicates (gyrolite, okenite, xonotlite),

or as aluminum-calcium hydrosilicate, (sloanite ?).

Magnesia: a) with silica scanty, as oxide (periclase), hydrate (brucite),

ferro-magnesium hydrate (pyroaurite), aluminum-magnesium hydrate

(hydrotalcite), magnesium carbonate (magnesite, breunerite, mesitite) or

hydrocarbonate (hydromagnesite, hydrogiobertite, etc.); 0) with silica

abundant, as one of two of the magnesium hydrosilicates (deweylite,

sepiolite) or as aluminum-magnesium hydrosilicate (pyrosclerite).

Alkalies: with alumina and ferrous oxide (as a chlorite); with lime,

as a hydrosilicate (certain zeolites).

It should here be noted that in a study of micro-aggregates of a different

origin, e. g., from development within a lower zone of metamorphism, a

quite different series of constituent minerals would need to be considered.

The preparation of any such series, in the present incomplete knowledge of

the conditions of origin of mineral species, would require careful investiga-

tion of associations, relationships and all other evidence at hand. One

conclusion from such study will be remarked in the series above given:

that many minerals, the occurrence of which in distinct and crystallized

specimens has been set down by the mineralogist as uncommon or even

very rare (e. g., brucite, periclase, deweylite, gyrolite, anthosiderite, etc.),

may yet be shown to occur abundantly, in dissemination through rock

formations and mineral aggregates in obscure or entirely invisible forms.

In calculation of mineral constitution from the analyses of such micro-

aggregates, the chemical formulas of the constituent minerals, so far as they

have been determined with certainty, may be accepted and used as absolute,

and as far preferable in most cases to any actual analysis of a mineral, on

account of the universal intermixture of impurities in the latter, even in the

best crystallized and apparently purest specimen.

The facts show, in my opinion,that all mineral substances have a definite

composition and character, that none are intermediate or transitional, that

even from decay or other mode of dissociation of a complex mineral com-

pound only independent minerals of simpler but exact composition are

derived. If this be true, we shall have little need of resort here to hypo-

thetical chemical compounds but may perhaps rely entirely on determined

formulas for all calculations of mineral constitution.

JULIEN, DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CONSTITUTION 139

It has been already intimated that one result of loose and vague mis-

apprehension of the essential and non-essential chemical components of a

crystallized mineral, or of the predominant mineral in a micro-aggregate,

appears to have been that the limitations in the laws of replacement in the

composition of a mineral have not always been clearly recognized; inclo-

sures have been mistaken for replacements. For example, in the two basic

magnesium hydrosilicates, deweylite and antigorite, magnesia may be

replaced by ferrous oxide, by manganous oxide, and probably by lime, but

never by metallic oxides.

Recast Analyses of Micro-aggregates.

A few examples of micro-aggregates, taken from my notes on minerals

of the magnesian hydrosilicate group, are presented below. They have

been selected to illustrate a variety of mineral constituents, identified in

these mixtures by this simple method, in contrast with the chemical formulas

on which the present acceptance of these mixtures as possible or certainly

independent minerals has been largely founded.

Fibrous ‘‘diabantachronnyn.”’

From Grifenwart, Voigtland. Analysis by Liebe, with the formula —

RO. SiO, + Mg(OH),.

mak , Ferrous t

Hypothetical Silica Alumina oxide Magnesia Water Totals

constituents ESTAS PANO tu)

31.56 % 12.08 % 21.61% 22.44% 11.78% 99.47

Prochlorite 16.43 12.08 16.86 9.38 6.56 61.31

Chrysotile 15.13 4.75 10.39 4.51 34.78

Nemalite 2.38 0.71 3.29

Periclase 0.29 0.29

Tn this calculation the alumina content is taken as the basis for estimating

the chlorite (or very likely a mixture of chlorites); the remainder of silica

for that of chrysotile, distinguished by Liebe under the microscope; the

remainder of the water for that of the fibrous magnesium hydrate, which,

as has been pointed out in a previous paper,’ has not been hitherto dis-

criminated from chrysotile in optical mineralogy.

1Annals N, Y. Acad. Sci., XVI, 410-411. 1906.

140 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The following is an example of a mere mixture of apparent complexity

of composition, but of comparative ease in determination of mineral con-

stitution.

JULIEN, DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CONSTITUTION 141

Lo +

68°

9c oO

08" ceo

e3'P

G80 | OF T

OF FI | LVE

09°29 | o°2

TZ'OOT |%Ea'st| %SE0

s[eqoy

I9JOM

ploe duoqieg

92°0

%9'0 | %80'0

poe o1mnydjng

800

eplupAque

ooydsoyg

F< '0

Wts'O

Bpos

820

eBSsvjog

63°0

8T0

ors 666

61°

oe SI cl 8I

YFL OT! %8T'0 |% 628s

UOl4VIe A

a a0)

810

cro

€8'P

OTT | 0

FLG

cs OT NG O€ 8ST

%8Z'0 |969'9T!| %86'0 | %18'0 |%08'81| %Es'F

pee eleceeese

3 ® | ke | o Z

B ae =

5B ®5 5 g

= 4. a

a ®

RuIuIN[y

ple otueqEL

BOIS

owes

ayy

oyyedy

uunsd Ax

aqyOTBO

JOYIO-941}BUId FT

O}TUOSUIOY}-O.10T

aqyt[Aomoq

aIOTYIOIT

hoc) cub else cen)

jeoryoy od AF

‘be 2 + KO “1g %(*q) “yy epnuts0y poonpop oy} YM ‘TYeyng Aq siskyvuy ‘pyeA\ JosduMYT, Woy

, OUSSOTOp,, WOOId YSTpOV[_

142 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

“Diabantite.”

From Farmington Hills, Connecticut. Mean of two analyses by

G. W. Hawes; “A unisilicate of the pyrosclerite group, with the formula,

(2k, + 4 Al) Si, + 3 H.” Dana states that the figures “correspond to the

formula R,, (R.)2 Sig Og + 9 aq., which is near to that of pyrosclerite,”’ and

also:

“Comp.— H,, (Fe, Mg),. Al, Si, O,; or

12 (Fe, Mg)O.2A1,0,. 9 Si O,. 9 H,O.”

In my calculation of the mineral constitution I have applied to pyroxene,

perhaps unwisely, the actual analysis of that mineral by Hawes from an

outcrop of diabase in the same region. It is apparent that “ diabantite”’ is

not identical with “diabantachronnyn,” nor is it at all likely that any two

specimens of either mixture are ever identical.

a e

® He} uN

os = 6 8 o S

} £ 5 3 ac 8 i te

leet roar OS SHAN Bee. te Ba) bone 1 ea

ts} ce! = in Pa = & = mes

at OU Ue DOG TEA NN SA I lisse ah hea a pS

33.46%|10.96%| 2.56% |24.72%| 0.39% | 0.92% |16.52%| 0.29% | 9.96% | 99.78

Pyroxene 3.49 | 0.24 0.72 | 0.389; 0.92! 0.65| 0.29} 0.08} 6.78

(residual)

Enstatite 6.27 4.18 10.45

(residual)

Prochlorite | 14.63 | 10.72 14.96 8.32 5.82 | 54.45

Ekmanite 5.69 9.04 1.60 | 16.33

Deweylite 3.38 3.01 2.03 | 8.42

Limonite 2.56 0.43 | 2.99

Periclase 0.36 0.36

“Jollyte.”

From Bodenmais, Bavaria. Analysis by von Kobell.

Formula: (4 R? + 3 Aly Si + 4H; it “resembles a hisingerite in

which the iron is replaced by alumina” (Dana).

JULIEN, DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CONSTITUTION 143

4 r Ferrous p

Hypothetical Silica Alumina oxide Magnesia Water Totals

constituents Ses) | —

35.55% 27.77% 16.67% 6.66 % 13.18% 99.83

Chloritoid 14.09 23.77 16 .67 4.17 58.70

Deweylite 7.50 6.66 4.49 18.65

Allophane 2.34 4.00 3.51 9.85

Colloid silica 11.62 1.01 | 12.63

‘‘Saponite.”’

From Kinneli, <!c., Scotland. Average of thirteen analyses by Heddle.

“A hydrous silicate of magnesium and aluminum, but the material is

amorphous and probably always impure” (Dana).

‘ i Ferric | Ferrous d !

constituents §|—— LMT

40.63% | 7.18% 7.96% 2.38% 2.14% | 21.43% | 21.76% | 99.48

Pyrosclerite ISIS hi ES 2.388 | 2.14 | 12.26 | 5.68 | 48.51

Deweylite 10.33 9.17 6.19 | 25.69

Limonite 3.96 .67 4.63

Colloid silica | 11.43 | 9.22 | 20.65

‘‘Pilolite.”’

Mountain cork or leather, from Scotland. Average of seven analyses

by Heddle, with the formula: 4MgO. Al,O,. 10 SiO,. 15H,0O.

$13 |e

CsI o — au:

f & 5 3 hs 3 # Oo is

Hypothetical 8 | ” © wis 2 Ss 2 aes |

constituents | = 3 5 5 a & 5 S eS =

D < es es = 4 a = = a

51.92%] 8.48% | 0.89% | 2.45% | 1.41% | 0.98% | 9.92% |14.75%| 8.74% | 99.54

Deweylite Hal? 9.92 | 6.70 27.79

Halloysite 10.00 | 8.48 4.50 22.98

Ekmanite 3.04 2.45 | 1.41] 0.98 0.86 8.74

Chloropal 1.00 0.89 0.50 2.39

Colloid silica | 26.71 2.19 8.74 | 37.64

144 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

“Aphrodite.”

From Jangban, Sweden. Analysis by Delesse, with the formula:

MgO. SiO,.H,O. “A soft earthy mineral near sepiolite.... Perhaps

H,Mg, Si, O,; but of doubtful homogeneity” (Dana).

Silica Alumina | Magnesia Water Totals

Hypothetical constituents ————————

53.50% 0.90% 28.60% 16.40% 99.40

Deweylite 21.14 18.79 12.69 52.62

Antigorite 9.79 9.81 2.92 | 22.52

Allophane 53 .90 .79 2.22

Hyalite 22.04 ’ 22.04

“‘Picrofluite.’’

From Lupikko, Finland. Analysis by Galindo, with the formula:

4RO. 3SiO, + 2CaF, + 3H,O. It has also been described as “a ser-

pentine intimately impregnated with fluorite” (Arppe), and as “probably

a mixture of fluorite with a magnesian silicate” (Dana). Neither the

formula nor these explanations account for the high percentage of magnesia

nor for the excess of lime (6.4 per cent) beyond that required in the possible

amount of fluorite. The deficiency in the total may be due only to in-

complete determination of fluorine.

a Ferrous |Mangan- | ; Cal- :

constituents SSS

29.00% | 1.54% 0.78% | 22.72% (11.66%)|} 28.79% | 8.97% | 11.16%] 98.30

Fluorite (16.32-=<-)| 11.66 11.16 || 22.83

Wollastonite 6.85 6.40 13.25

Antigorite PADS) 1.54 0.78 19.84 6.61 50.92

Brucite 5.26 2.36 7.62

Periclase | 3.69 3.69

“Webskyite.”

From Amelose, Hesse. Mean of two analyses by Websky, with formulas:

H,R,9i,0,, + 6 aq. and H,(Mg, Fe) SiO, + 2 aq.

JULIEN, DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CONSTITUTION 145

; Silica |Alumina Heme Betsous Magnesia} Water | Totals

Hypothetical

constituents Pac pede

35.85% | 0.24% 10.32% | 3.04% | 19.68% | 31.53% | 100.66

Ferro-deweylite 24.98 2.70 | 19.49 | 14.97 | 62.14

Limonite 10.32 eon elles

Prochlorite 0.33 | 0.24 0.34 0.19 0.14 1.24

Colloid silica 10.54 14.69 | 25.23

In this however the descriptive data are not sufficient to determine the

exact condition of the alumina (as bauxite? or as a hydrosilicate ?).

“Genthite.”’

From Texas, Pennsylvania, ete. Analysis by Genth, from which it has

been pronounced “a gymnite, with part of the magnesium replaced by

nickel: 2NiO. 2MgO. 3SiO,. 6H,O,” or H,. Mg, Ni,Si, O,,.

oe Ferrous | Nickel i N

Hypothetical Silica oxide oxide Lime |Magnesia| Water Totals

constituents :

35.36% | 0.24% | 30.64% | 0.26% | 14.60%] 19.09%} 100.19

Connarite 24.51 30.64 7.38 | 62.53

Deweylite 10.85 0.24 0.26 9.13 6.50 | 26.98

Brucite 5.47 2.46 7.93

Water 2).00 Dh

“Xylotile’’ (Mountain-wood).

From Schneeberg, Tyrol. Average of three analyses by Hauer, after

exclusion of water lost at 100° C. Probably an altered chrysotile (Kenngott).

“A very ferruginous chrysotile, of which part of the iron has been

oxydized by secondary processes” (Lacroix).

According to Liebe, it has been probably derived from alteration of

“diabantachronnyn.”

146 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Ferric | Ferrous I

Silica oxide oxide Lime |Magnesia} Water | Totals

Hypothetical

constituents Se | | | Sr

50.43% | 18.97% | 3.28% | 0.85% | 11.82% | 14.63% | 99.98

ve |

Chrysotile 15.95 3.28 | 0.85 | 11.82 | 4.76 | 36.66

Anthosiderite 32.04 | 18.97 2.13 | 53.14

Colloid silica 2.44 7.74 | 10.18

An intense pleochroism possessed by this substance (very deep golden

yellow, bright yellow, to brownish yellow) differing entirely from that of

chrysotile or antigorite, agrees exactly with that characteristic of antho-

siderite — a satisfactory confirmation.

It can be claimed for hardly any one of the examples given above that

more than an approximation to the truth has been presented. With the im-

perfection of both analyses and descriptions as published, each interpretation

yet calls for special tests of the very specimens of these micro-aggregates

used in the analyses, for confirmation: e. g., strong alkaline reaction or

other evidence of free magnesia in “picrofluite” and “diabantachronnyn,”

and optical identification of prochlorite, chloritoid, etc., in the others. It

is certain that, in each of the specimens represented by these analyses, there

existed a certain intermixture of minerals the identity and exact proportion

of which should have been identified by the analyst. For such determina-

tion in any analysis certain accurate data are indispensable. In place of

the usual meagerness in description of physical properties, omission of

optical examination and common imperfection of the chemical analysis

itself, it is obvious that, in a proper investigation of any mineral, its complete

examination, physical and optical, should precede on the very specimen

used for the chemical analysis. Only under such conditions can exact

results be obtained from the universally heterogeneous materials which are

found in nature. It seems likely, however, from the results above shown,

through this old simple method, toward disclosure of latent mineral con-

stitution, that it may prove of advantage even if now applied to the series

of mineral substances whose chemical analyses have been published.

fAnnats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vou. XVIII, No. 4, Part II, p. 147. 15 April, 1908.]

THE CHESTER, NEW YORK, MASTODON.

The accompanying plate gives a facsimile reproduction of a sketch

and description of the skull and tusks of a mastodon found at Chester near

Goshen, N. Y., which seem to have some value on account of the representa-

tion of the tusks in place. ‘The sheet of legal cap paper, yellowed with age,

bearing the sketch in pencil and the legend in ink were found in December

1907, in an old book in the library of the Lyceum of Natural History, now

the New York Academy of Sciences. A transcript of the legend follows.

Delineated by P. S. Townsend, M. D.,

(from Nature) May 29, 1817.

Appearance of the Tusks of the Elephas Mastodonta, disinterred at Chester,

township of Goshen, Orange County, State of New York, May 29th, 1817; by Drs.

Mitchill, P.S. Townsend and Townsend Seely. The tusks are continuous with the

upper jaw the four teeth of which are observable at their base. These tusks are

nine feet in length, of pure ivory: becoming more and more of a bony nature before

they expand into the jaw where they are entirely of the same nature with that bone.

The tooth immediately situated upon the base of the tusk is 3 inches square, the one

adjacent 6 by 3. The circumference of the tusk at the base 26 inches. The position

of the jaw is horizontal and inverted. It lay about 6 feet below the surface of the

soil, which soil to that depth consisted of a loose black mould mingled apparently

with the comminuted fibres of sea-weeds and having the smell of Limus — it then

changed to a pure pale-bluish clay.

Psy

N. B. The nasal bones (?) are observable at the divergence of the tusks & are

continuous with them.

Drs. Townsend (also spelled Townshend) and Mitchill were two of the

founders of the Lyceum of Natural History and were prominent scientists of

New York of the early part of the nineteenth century. Dr. Mitchell was

the first president of the Lyceum, serving from 1817 to 1823 inclusive. The

village of Chester is now in the township of the same name. No record has

been found showing the later history of this specimen.

E. O. Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

147

[Annats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vou, XVIII, No. 5, Part II, pp. 149-180. Puy. VI-VIII.

Author’s separates published 23 April, 1908.]

THE PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN THE DRUMFISHES,

THE SEA-ROBIN AND THE TOADFISH.

By R. W. Tower.

CONTENTS.

Introduction.

Anatomy of the swim-bladder.

The drumfishes:

Bearded drum (Pogonias cromis),

Squeteague (Cynoscion regalis),

Croaker (Micropogon undulatus),

Other drumfishes examined.

The sea-robin and the toadfish:

Sea-robin (Prionotus carolinus),

Toadfish (Opsanus tau).

Sound production in the drumfishes:

Recorded observations and theories,

Experiments to determine cause of sound,

Experiments to determine character of muscular contraction,

Experiments to determine pressure of gas in swim-bladder.

Sound production in the sea-robin and the toadfish:

Experiments to determine cause of sound and character of mechanism.

Conclusions.

Literature cited.

Introduction.

The production of sounds by certain fishes has long been an interesting

subject of investigation. Some species, as Scomber brachyurus, by rubbing

together the pharyngeal teeth make a noise resembling a harsh grunt; some,

as the puffer, or swellfish, make a similar sound by rubbing together the

incisor teeth of the upper and lower jaw. In other cases stridulation has

been recorded, and sounds are also said to be produced by the forcing of

air through the pneumatic duct in those fishes in which the air-bladder

1 Read by title at the meeting of the Academy on 13 April, 1908.

149

150 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

communicates with the exterior. Besides these kinds of sound production,

which are of no special interest in this discussion, there are two others.

One is the drumming of the squeteague, croaker and other drumfishes

(Scisenidee); the other is the so-called grunt of the sea-robin (Prionotus)

and the common toadfish (Opsanus). With the difference in the kind of

sound made by the drumming and the grunting fishes there will be found

to be a distinct difference in the structure of the swim-bladder, which is

the organ chiefly involved in the production of sound by these species.

Anatomy of the Swim-Bladder.

THe DRUMFISHES.

Bearded drum (Pogonias cromis)— The swim-bladder of the drum is

characterized by its large size and the enormous number of its diverticula.

The bladder occupies, as is the case in nearly all of the scicnoid fishes,

the entire length of the abdominal cavity. The diverticula are finger-like

processes which arise laterally from the bladder and open into its large

cavity. These tube-like appendages in the adult ramify through the con-

nective tissue, and in many cases adhere firmly to the aponeuroses of the

neighboring muscles. ‘The air-bladder itself lies free in the abdominal

cavity, attached on the dorsal side to the body of the fourth vertebra and

covered on the ventral side by the peritoneum, which is continued from

the parietal walls. When examined carefully, the air-bladder is seen to be

made up of three layers: the outside is of a hyaline character and is com-

posed of extremely tough fibrous tissue; the middle layer, which is sepa-

rated from the outer layer only with great difficulty, is connective tissue

containing elastic fibres; the inner layer is a very delicate connecting tissue,

lined with pavement epithelium. Jager (1903) has recently discovered

that this inner layer does not cover the entire bladder-lumen, but on the

dorsal surface there is an oval space in which the inner layer disappears,

with the exception of the pavement epithelium. This space he calls the

“oval,” and maintains that it can be increased or diminished by the action

of small muscles. In the middle layer ramify all the blood-vessels, which

break into small branches and then enter the inner layer, where, in the

region of the “oval,” they form an anastomosing capillary net-work almost

as complete as is found in the “red-body.” ‘This net-work is thus sepa-

rated from the lumen of the air-bladder only by the single layer of pavement

epithelium. The function of the “oval,” according to Jager, is the ab-

sorption of oxygen and the diminution of the amount of gas in the bladders

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES 151}

of fishes having no pneumatic duct. Thus the “oval” and the pneumatic

ducts serve the same physiological function. Adhering to a portion of the

dorsal surface of the air-bladder, just posterior to the point of attachment

to the vertebree in the male, is the central tendon of the two red drumming

muscles.1_ Upon opening the bladder of the drum, there is found on the

inside, running almost the entire length, the red vascular body which has

been described as the blood gland, or “red body.”

Squeteaque (Cynoscion regalis)— In the squeteague the swim bladder

(fig. 1) is a long carrot-shaped organ, tapering to a pot at the posterior

end, and sending out from the broad anterior end three diverticula —

two lateral horns and a central rounded “head.” ‘The dorsal surface of

the “head” is attached by its outer or fibrous tunic to the sides of the body

of the fourth vertebra, which broadens out to receive it. ‘The lateral appen-

dages of the swim-bladder of the drum are wanting in the air-bladder of

the squeteague, which has nothing to mar its smooth even contour except

the two lateral horns already described, which arise from the most ante-

rior part of the organ. On the inside of the air-bladder is found the char-

acteristic ‘‘red-body,” or “‘blood-gland,” which is present in the drum.

The drumming muscles are present in the male squeteague only. Their

insertion is lateral in the common fascia of the rectus abdominis muscle,

about a half-inch from the mid-ventral line. The muscles, one on either

side, are bilaterally symmetrical and originate from a central tendon, which

lies free in the mid-dorsal line just above the swim-bladder and between it

and the kidney. The anterior extremity of this central tendon is inserted

by its middle third into the dorsal surface of the neck of the swim-bladder,

while the right and left thirds merge into the fascia that support the peri-

toneum. Posteriorly, in the region of the anus, the tendon narrows down

to a cup-shaped extremity that receives the tip of the swim-bladder, and

then gradually tapers to a point, which is inserted into the base of the first

anal fin-ray. A closed cavity is thus formed, bounded laterally by the two

drumming muscles, ventrally by the confluent abdominal muscles, and dor-

sally by the central tendon. This closed bag or cavity contains the viscera

1 Dufossé (Annales des Sciences Naturelles, ser. V, vol. XIX. 1874, p. 39) has described in

Trigla lyra two red muscles which he called intra-costal muscles. From his description I am

unable to identify them with the ‘‘drumming muscle” just mentioned. In no case has it been

possible to find these ‘‘drumming muscles” in any of the Triglide.

Dufossé attributed to these intra-costal muscles the function of motor agents of the skeleton.

“Considérés uniquement comme agents moteurs du squelette, ces muscles intra-costaux ont

evidemment pour functions: d’une part, de fléchir latéralement ou de maintenir l’épine dorsale

dans sa rectitude ordinaire, suivant qu’un seul muscle se contracte, ou bien que la contraction

de ces deux muscles est simultanée, quand les os scapulaires leur servent de point fixe; d’autre

part, d’attirer en dedans ces derniers os, et par suite les scapulaires et les humeraux, (Cuvier),

lorsque la colonne vertébrale est préalablement fixée.’’ It is evidently from this supposed

function that Dufossé gave the name of intra-costals to these muscles.

152 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

and swim-bladder, the latter having the ‘

to its dorsal surface.

The blood-vessels and nerves supplying the drumming muscles are only

‘central tendon” directly applied

Fig. 1. Swim-BLADDER OF CYNOSCION REGALIS.

The two m. sonifici (m s) are shown laterally displaced. h, head; 1, lateral

horn; ¢ t, central tendon of m. sonifici.

accessory branches from the arteries and nerves of the abdominal muscles.

An embryological study of the origin of these accessory blood-vessels and

nerves and their relation to the muscle at the time when it is first laid down

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES 153

would be instructive. For the drumming muscles the name musculus

sonificus has been suggested and is used in the following discussion.

In young squeteague two inches long, it is impossible to distinguish

macroscopically a differentiation of this muscle. But if a piece of the peri-

toneum with the underlying fascia is removed and examined under the

microscope there are seen striations typical of voluntary muscles. The

muscle fibres run in the direction of the short diameter of the fish, 7. e.,

circularly around the air-bladder. These young squeteague have been

heard to “drum,” and the contractions of the m. sonificus can be easily

felt when the fish is held firmly in the hand. In the young this muscle

has not acquired the deep red color that so characterizes it in the adult.

a.a.a. Lateral horns of air-

bladder.

b. Hinder point of air-

bladder.

msv. The muscles which must

make the air-bladder

act as a sound pro-

ducing organ.

Fig. 2. SwimM-BLADDER OF MICROPOGON UNDULATUS AFTER SORENSEN.

Croaker (Micropogon undulatus).— Another scizenoid, known in Amer-

ican waters as the croaker, is of interest from an anatomical standpoint.

The difference between the bladder of this fish and that of the squeteague,

except for its being considerably smaller, is that the central head is not

present, and the two lateral horns are reduced to two very small tubes.

It is therefore an even more simple organ than that of the squeteague.

The two bilateral sonifict have the same arrangement in both animals,

and the description of the muscles of one applies equally well to those of

the other. Sérensen states that “the form of the air-bladder needs no

other description than that given in figure 9” (a copy of which is here

appended as fig. 2).

1 Dr. Hugh M. Smith and Dr. Theodore Gill suggested several anatomical names, from which

musculus sonificus was selected as being the most appropriate. The author is greatly indebted

to these two well-known ichthyologists for their assistance.

154 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Sérensen made his dissection on one specimen preserved in alcohol, con-

sequently the diagram is somewhat misleading, as can be seen by com-

paring it with the bladder and muscle taken from a fresh specimen (PI. VI.

fig. 1). Bridge uses this figure from Sdrensen to verify the following state-

ment: ‘In other fishes, the air-bladder, without possessing special muscles

of its own, may, nevertheless, be partially invested by tendinous or partly

muscular and partly tendinous, extensions from the muscles of the body

wall.” This muscle (m. sonificus) cannot be considered an extension of

the muscles of the body wall but a unique, specific muscle which has been

developed for the purpose of sound production. The muscles with the

aponeuroses are united with the swim-bladder by means only of a tendon

on the dorsal side immediately anterior to the base of the horns, and in

no way attach themselves directly to the bladder, which is completely sur-

rounded by the muscles and tendons. Sorensen states: “According to

its structure, the air-bladder of this fish must be a sound-producing organ.

Most probably the contractions of the muscles will, for a moment, compress

the air-bladder and strain its dorsal wall, each of which operations must

separately be able to bring the air-bladder to produce sound.” Sdérensen

did not make any physiological experiments and based his conclusions

entirely upon anatomical data. In the light of experiments soon to be

described it is evident that he did not understand the “drumming” mech-

anism.

Other drumfishes examined.—'Through the courtesy of Dr. Hugh M.

Smith (1905) of the Bureau of Fisheries, it has been possible for me to

examine specimens of the southern squeteague (Cynoscion nebulosum, PI.

VI, fig. 2), the yellow-tail (Batrdiella chrysura, Pl. VII, fig. 1), and the spot

(Levostomus xanthurus, Pl. VU, fig. 2).1 The anatomical relations of the air-

bladder and the m. sonificus are so similar to those noted above that no

further description is necessary. In the spot the peritoneum is so pigmented

with black that the m. sonificus is somewhat hidden.

THE SEA-ROBIN AND THE TOADFISH.

In these fishes there is found a swim-bladder which is so radically dif-

ferent in its outward appearances from that of the scizenoid fishes, and at

the same time is so characteristic, that attention is immediately attracted

to this organ. ‘The sound produced, described as a grunt, differs markedly

in character from the drumming of the Scizenide.

1 These drawings were made from dissections completed by T. E. B. Pope of the Bureau

of Fisheries.

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES 155

Dufossé (1874) in his memoir on “Sons Expressifs Produits par les

Poissons d’Europe” has given an accurate and complete anatomical de-

scription of the air-bladders of the European Zeus jaber, Dactylopterus

volttans and various Triglide. Inasmuch as the air-bladders of the Trig-

lidee of the North American waters differ in some respects from those de-

scribed by Dufossé, I will here state briefly the structure in the species

under examination, Prionotus carolinus, or the red-winged sea-robin, as

well as of Opsanus tau, or the common toad-fish.

Sea-robin (Prionotus carolinus).— The air bladder of Prionotus (Fig. 3)

Fig. 3. SwiIM-BLADDER OF PRIONOTUS CAROLINUS.

A. Viewed externally. im, intrinsic muscle; ¢1, connecting lumen.

B. Longitudinally bisected. rr, right lobe; g, internal septum; c 0, central open-

ing of septum.

is a deeply bi-lobed organ, occupying about two-thirds the space of the

abdominal cavity. The two lobes are connected near the anterior end by

a rather small tube. Along the outside portions of the respective lobes is

found a muscle, red in color, and running from the anterior end of the lobe

to the posterior end. The muscles adhere strongly to the underlying coat

of the air-bladder, and can be separated from it only with difficulty. The

muscle-fibres run in the plane of the short axis of the bladder. These

muscles correspond to the ‘intrinsic muscles” of Dufossé. The bladder

156 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

is not connected with the exterior by a pneumatic duct, Giinther (1880)

to the contrary notwithstanding, for the entire bladder has been removed

from the abdominal cavity without losing any of the contained gas, an

operation which would be impossible if there were any means of commu-

nication between it and the exterior.

The air-bladder itself consists of three layers — an external, a middle

and an internal — together with the pair of muscles just described. The

outer and middle layers are composed of thick, compact tissue, containing

both elastic and non-elastic fibres. The inner membrane is a mucous

A B

Fig. 4. Swim-BLADDER OF OPSANUS TAU.

‘A. Viewed in situ. im, intrinsic muscle.

B. Viewed externally.

tissue provided with numerous blood vessels. Lying in this tissue are

found also the blood glands or red-bodies which were described in the

bladders of the scivenoids.

The left lobe (fig. 3B) in all specimens of Prionotus is divided into two

parts by a partition formed of the internal tunic or membrane. In the

centre of this partition is a small opening, a little larger than the head of

a pin. The right lobe is never divided. This perforated partition was

present in all specimens examined of both sexes. The embryological

oo aE aaa noe

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES 157

history of this partition has never been investigated. There is no difference

in the structure of the swim-bladder in the male and female, the intrinsic

muscles being present in both. It is evident that we have here anatomic-

ally a very different structure from that in the swim-bladder of the Sciz-

nide, a fact which will play a very important part in the interpretation of

the physiological experiments soon to be described.

4 Toadfish (Opsanus taw).— The swim-bladder of Opsanus (fig. 4) is

relatively a much smaller organ than in Prionotus. When examined ex-

ternally (fig. 4B), it seems to be deeply bi-lobed on the anterior half; but

when viewed in longitudinal section (fig. 5), it is seen that less than one

half of the organ is actually divided. ‘The swim-bladder is supplied with

Fig. 5. SwIM-BLADDER OF OPSANUS TAU.

A. A specimen longitudinally bisected showing the position of the internal

septum (s). co, central opening of septum; im, intrinsic muscle.

B. Another specimen longitudinally bisected showing the variation of the

internal septum (s).

the same intrinsic muscles as that of the sea-robin. The muscles arise

at the most anterior part of the right and left lobes respectively, and are

separated posteriorly by only a small tendon. The muscular tissue is

thick and strong, the fibres running transversely to the long diameter of

the swim-bladder. An internal septum divides the bladder into two parts,

an anterior and a posterior. The septum is perforated by a small opening,

which forms the only means of communication between the two cavities.

In the posterior cavity alone is found the blood gland.

Most interesting is the great variation found in the position of the trans-

verse septum in different specimens. In some cases, the partition is fully

158 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

one-third of the distance from the posterior end (fig. 5 A) while in others it

is less than one-sixth of the distance (fig. 5B). Indeed, in the large number

of specimens examined, no two were found to be alike. Whether the vari-

ation is accompanied by any change in function, I was unable to determine.

Sound Production in the Drumfishes.

RECORDED OBSERVATIONS AND THEORIES.

It has been noticed by many fishermen that the common squeteague

at times makes a very plain and unmistakable drumming noise. As to

how this noise is produced they can give no explanation nor is there any

account of it in scientific literature, with the possible exception of Dufossé’s

memoirs, which seem to be too little known at the present time. Their

observations do not tell us whether it is the male’, female, or both that

produce this characteristic noise. In the anatomical discussion, it was

found that only the male was supplied with the red drumming muscle

which, from its relation to the air-bladder, was considered to be connected

functionally with the latter organ. Further observations demonstrated

that the drumming occurred only in those animals in which this red muscle

was present — that is, in the male squeteague. In some other species,

as Micropogon undulatus, drumming occurs in both male and female, and

likewise the m. sonifict are present in both sexes.

In the rather limited amount of study that has been given to the noises

produced by these fishes, some of the conclusions are mere deductions

from anatomical data, without any experimental or physiological proof.

In other instances, the authors confuse the sounds produced by fishes of

entirely different orders, and which have swim-bladders both anatomic-

ally and physiologically different. For this reason it is very difficult to de-

duce correct conclusions from their writings.

As noted in a previous paper, Aristotle spoke of fishes that produce

sound by some mechanism involving their air-bladder. The fact was thus

known to fishermen and scientists very early; but no scientific explanations

were offered nor were any experiments made which would account for

these noises. Cuvier (1834) writes that ‘‘these fishes [scizenoids] swim in

a troop and send forth a bellowing louder than that of the gurnards, and

1 Since the above was written Dr. H. M. Smith has published the results of some observa-

tions, which show that both male and female of Micropogon make the drumming sound and

that the male only in Pogonias, Scienops, Cynoscion, Leiostomus and Bairdiella produce the

drumming sound. (Science, vol. 22, 1905, p. 376.)

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES — 159

it has occurred that the fishermen, guided by their noises alone, have taken

twenty scvene at a single throw of the net.” The fishermen assure us

that the noise of the scene is sufficiently loud to be heard through twenty

fathoms (120 feet) of water, and that they are careful from time to time to

place their ears over the edges of the boat, that they may be directed by the

noise. Some say that it is a dull humming sound; others that it is a rather

sharp hissing. Some fishermen contend that the males alone make this

noise in spawning time, and that it is possible to take them by imitating it

and without employing any bait. That these fishes do produce noises

that can be heard long distances is an undisputed fact.

The fish of this family best known to us is the ‘‘weak-fish,”’ described

by Dr. Mitchill under the name of Labrus squeteague. It was known by

the Narragansett Indians as the squeteague; and by the French of New

Orleans as the trout. The fishermen of Cuvier’s time “attributed to it

certain dull sounds similar to that of a drum, which are heard sometimes

under the water and only in the season when it is abundant.”

Another sound-producing fish of American waters which is described

by Cuvier is the drum (Pogonias cromis). Cuvier states that “various

accounts are given concerning the nature of the noise of these drums.”

According to Dr. Mitchill, it is when they are taken out of the water that

they send forth this noise, but Schoepf says that ‘‘it is under the water

that this noise is dull and hollow; that several individuals assemble around

the keel of ships at anchor, and that then their noise is most sensible and

continuous.” ‘This agrees with the report made by Lieut. John White,

U.S. N., in 1824, in which he describes how his crew and himself, while

at the mouth of the river Cambodia, were astonished by some extraordi-

nary sounds which were heard around the bottom of the boat. It was

like a mixture of the bass of the organ, the sound of bells, the guttural

cries of a large frog and the tones which imagination might attribute to an

enormous harp; one might have said that the vessel trembled with it.

These noises increased, and finally formed a universal chorus over the en-

tire length of the vessel and the two sides. The natives told Lieutenant

White that the noises were produced by a troop of fishes. M. Humboldt

describes a similar phenomenon in the South Sea on February 20th, 1803.

Towards seven in the morning, he says, the whole crew were awakened by

this extraordinary noise, which resembled drums beating the air. It was

afterwards learned that the noise was produced by one of these scizenoids.

Cuvier, in speaking of the same species, states that, “it would be an object

of curious research to find out the organs in these fishes which seem to pro-

duce such strong and such continuous sounds, and that at the bottom of

the water and without any communication with the external air. Most

160 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

of the scizenoids have a large natatory bladder, very thick, provided with

very strong muscles, but the bladder has no communication either with

the intestinal canal, or with the exterior generally.’ This represents all

that was actually known up to the time of Cuvier concerning the mechan-

ism of the sound-producing organs. It was evidently thought by Cuvier

that the air-bladder and attending muscles were of some importance in

producing this phenomenon.

Somewhat later (1860), Holbrook stated that “frequent examinations

of the structure and the arrangement of the air-bladders, as well as obser-

vations on the living animal just taken from the water, when the sound is

at intervals still continued, have satisfied me that it is made in the air-bladder

itself; that the vibrations are produced by the air being forced by strong

muscular contraction through a large opening, from one large cavity, that

of the air-bladder, to another, that of the cavity of the lateral horn; and

if the hands are placed on the sides of the animal, vibrations will be felt

in the lateral horn, corresponding with each sound.”

It was not until Dufossé published his memoir on the sounds and noises

produced by the fishes of Europe, in 1874, that we had any physiological

explanation of the phenomenon in the sciznoid fishes which is based on

actual experiments. In 1864, Moreau published the results of his experi-

ments on the “grunting” mechanism in the Triglidz, a process, however,

which is entirely different from the “drumming” of the Sciznide, and

should not be confounded with it. With regard to the sounds produced

by certain muscles Dufossé says,

Le phénoméne physiologique connu généralement sous le nom de trépidation

ou trémulation musculaire, et que Wollaston a assimilé, avec raison, 4 un mouvement

de vibration, n’a pour ainsi dire été observé que chez l’Homme, et n’a jamais été

le sujet d’une étude approfondie, soit au point de vue biologique, soit au point de

vue la physique proprement dite, quelques physiologistes pensent méme encore

que ce mouvement assez rapide pour produire un léger bruit, désigné sous le nom

de bruit de rotation par Laénnec et sous celui de bruit de contraction des muscles par

d’autres auteurs, est trop faible par lui-méme et trop peu important par ses effets

pour devenir jamais d’un certain intérét en physiologie générale.

This is a concise statement of what was known concerning the physiology of

this noise at the time when Dufossé wrote his memoir. Dufossé divided

his work into two propositions, viz:

1. Quelques muscles de certains poissons bruyants deviennent en se contractant

susceptibles d’un mouvement de vibration:

2. Ce mouvement est le principe des sons que font entendre ces animaux,

To prove these propositions, Dufossé made two physiological experi-

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES 161

ments. In the first, he inserted his finger into the stomach of a lyre capa-

ble of producing an intense noise. During the production of the noise,

he noticed an intense vibration which coincided exactly in duration with

the sounds heard by his ear. He then punctured the wall of the air-blad-

der and drew out all the gas. The sound ceased, but the vibrations could

still be felt. He then removed the entire swim-bladder, and applied his

finger successively to the muscles and aponeuroses which lie alongside the

vertebral column, and he found that all the organs were in repose except

the intra-costal muscle, which vibrated and gave to his finger the same sensa-

tion as when the air-bladder was in its natural position.

In the second experiment, Dufossé opened the abdomen of a lyre just

in front of the anus, and extirpated the swim-bladder entirely (“‘j’extirpe

la vessie pneumatique tout entiére”). He then inserted an artificial blad-

der (‘poche membraneuse’’) and inflated it. The fish commenced again

to produce a noise similar to that made before the operation. In another

he cut the nerve supplying the intra-costal muscles, first the right and then

the left. After both were cut, the noise ceased and could not be again

renewed.

From these data, Dufossé argues that there are two factors in the pro-

ducing of the noise, viz: the contraction of the intra-costal muscle, which

is the primary cause of the sound, and secondarily, the reénforcement of

these vibrations of the swim-bladder. The producing of the noise is volun-

tary. Dufossé recognizes many difficulties in this explanation, however,

because the facts do not agree with those of theoretical physics, as can be

seen from the following quotation :—

“Le mécanisme de la production des sons chez ces poissons a pour complément

la transmission des vibrations sonores des muscles 4 la vessie qui est en contract avec

eux. Les parois de cet organe communiquent ces vibrations au gaz qu’elle renferme,

et ceux-ci vibrent de telle fagon comme le prouvent surabondamment mes deux

premiéres expériences, que l’intensité de ces vibrations est incomparablement aug-

mentée. D’ aprés ce résultat et en considérant que la vessie est une cavité close &

parois membraneuses et souples se moulant si exactement sur la surface des organes

qui les environment qu’elles ne peuvent vibrer que comme elles le feraient si elles

étaient réellement adhérentes par tous les points de leur superficie 4 la masse de ces

organes on ne peut expliquer, conformément aux principes de la physique, le ren-

forcement des vibrations sonores qu’en admettant que le volume des gaz contenus

dans vessie, ou, ce qui est le méme chose, que la capacité de cet organe a naturelle-

ment des rapports exacts de grandeur avec celle des nombres de vibrations sonores

que lui sont transmises. L’exactitude des rapports que suppose cette explication

ne s’accordant pas avec plusieurs faits ichthyologiques, entre autres avec les inces-

sants changements de volume que submit nécessairement la vessie pneumatique

quand le poisson vient du fond de l’eau a la surface ou s’enfonce dans la profandeur

des mers, cette explication n’est acceptable qu’en admettant que si ces rapports

162 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

existent réellement ils doivent pouvoir varier d’une certaine quantite sans que le

degré de renforcement des sons soit grandement modifié.”

In speaking of the Sciznide, Dufossé says that the sound is produced

for the most part by muscles; but a little later, in speaking of Pseudo-

scvena aquila, he says

“Te mécanisme de la production des sons chez les individus de Vespéce Sciena

aquila est plus compliqué que celui des poissons dont j’ai parlé jusqu’ 4 présent

(lyre). Je n’ai nullement la pretention de donner la théorie de ce mecanisme.”’

Just why Dufossé makes this statement is not intelligible, for all the drum-

ming fishes of America that have been examined have the same mechanism,

and it is very evident that the sound is produced in exactly the same way.

As Dufossé examined only European forms, however, he may have ob-

served a difference in structure that is not present in the American species.

The fact that Dufossé stated that he could not explain the mechanism

in Sciena, while for the Gurnard lyre his explanation was not in accordance

with physical phenomenon, has possibly led more recent ichthyologists to

ignore his work. Thus we find that Giinther (1880) in speaking of the

American drum (Pogonias cromis) says,

“Tt is still a matter of uncertainty by what means the “ Drum” produces sounds.

Some naturalists believe that it is caused by the clapping together of the pharyngeal

teeth, which are very large molar teeth. However, if it be true that the sounds are

accompanied by a tremulous motion of the vessel, it seems more probable that they

are produced by the fishes beating their tails against the bottom of the vessel in

order to get rid of the parasites with which that part of their body is infested.”

That these explanations of Giinther are unwarranted will be seen from

experiments soon to be described.

Sérensen (1895) disagrees with Dufossé’s statement that it is the vibra-

tion of the muscles while contracted which produce the sound and that

the air-bladder only intensifies the sound. Sérensen considers the sound

as being produced by vibrations of the air in the air-bladder and of the

walls of the latter when set in motion by the muscles with the fascia of

which it is connected.

Jordan and Evermann (1902) say that “most of the species make a

peculiar noise, variously called croaking, grunting, drumming, or snoring,

supposed to be produced by forcing air from the air-bladder into one of

the lateral horns.”

We have presented to us then, four distinct mechanisms in the Sciz-

noids:

1. Muscular tone; the vibrating muscle producing a sound which is

intensified by the air-bladder (Dufossé).

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES 163

2. Clapping together of pharyngeal teeth (Giinther).

3. Vibrations of air in air-bladder and of the walls of the latter when

set in motion by certain muscles (Sérensen).

4. Forcing of air from air-bladder into one of lateral horns (Holbrook,

Jordan and Evermann).

EXPERIMENTS TO DETERMINE CAUSE OF SOUND.

That the explanation given by Giinther is wrong can be very easily

seen from the following experiments, in all of which the animals were kept

alive by artificial respiration, i. e. by irrigating the gills with a stream of

fresh water.

Experiment I. The air was drawn from the swim-bladder of a squeteague by

means of a trochar and the drumming immediately ceased.

a. The stomach was then filled with water. The drumming returned but not

as loud as normal.

Experiment. IJ.— An incision one inch long was made in the mid-ventral line.

Through this a portion of the air-bladder was pulled out but the drumming con-

tinued.

a. The bladder was now amputated and the drumming ceased.

b. A collapsed rubber balloon was then inserted into the abdominal cavity,

and, as soon as it was inflated, the drumming returned with apparently normal

intensity and pitch.

c. The rubber balloon was filled with salt water instead of air. The drum-

ming continued until the water was allowed to escape; then it ceased. The tone

is low and apparently changed but little under the different conditions.

Experiment III.— The air-bladder of a male squeteague was removed. The

drumming ceased. The air-bladder from a female squeteague, which can produce

no noise, was inserted into the abdominal cavity of the male, and the drumming

immediately returned.

These three experiments show conclusively that the “clapping together

of the pharyngeal teeth” has nothing to do with the production of the

drumming noise in the squeteague. It is also shown in experiment III

that there is no difference between the function of the bladder in the male,

which drums, and that of the female, which does not drum, as far as the

noise-production is concerned.

Experiment IV.— The entire viscera (intestines, spleen, liver, reproductive or-

gans and air-bladder) were removed from a male squeteague. The drumming

stopped, and the sonificus contracted as usual, but there was no noise. A rubber

balloon filled with air was then inserted into the abdominal cavity. The drumming

again returned, but was not of normal character.

a, The balloon was filled with water and the drumming continued, but was

weaker and of apparently different pitch.

164 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

This experiment shows that an inflated rubber balloon can take the

place of all the abdominal organs in respect to noise-production; although

it does not prove that these organs may not play some part in the normal

mechanism.

To determine whether there is any experimental basis for the view held

by Jordan and Evermann, viz: that the drumming is produced by forcing

air from the air-bladder into one of the lateral horns, the following experi-

ments were undertaken.

Experiment V.— An incision about one inch long was made in the mid-ventral

line of a male squeteague. The air-bladder was ligatured in the middle, thus sepa-

rating the organ into two chambers,— the anterior containing the lateral horns,

and the posterior remaining a simple closed cavity. Drumming, however, went on

as in normal animals.

a. The part of the bladder posterior to the ligature was punctured. The

drumming continued only in the region of the anterior part of the bladder, which

remained inflated.

b. Another animal was prepared in the same way, and the part anterior to the

ligation was punctured. The drumming continued only in the region of the posterior

portion of the bladder, which remained inflated. In this part of the bladder there

are no lateral horns.

c. The posterior end of the bladder was then folded into the anterior part of the

abdomen. The drumming noise then came from the anterior part of the abdomen

in the region of the inflated half-bladder.

d. The anterior half of the bladder was amputated, leaving the posterior part

still inflated. This was inserted at different places and the drumming noise occurred

wherever this part of the bladder was placed.

Experiment VI.— An incision was made in the mid-ventral line of a large

“drummer,” about half way between pectoral and anal fins. At the right angles

to this incision, longitudinal incisions were made on both sides, extending nearly to

the region of the kidney. These incisions were made through the drumming muscles.

The air-bladder and viscera were lifted up with forceps, and the remaining part of

the drumming muscle and central tendon was cut. This separated the entire muscle,

tendon and insertion into halves — an anterior and a posterior part. The drum-

ming still continued on both sides of the bisection. In order to show this still more

completely, the anterior half of the abdomen was raised by inserting two fingers,

which prevented the drumming in this (anterior) part, while the posterior gave the

same characteristic noise. Next, the posterior half of the abdomen was raised in

the same manner, and the drumming stopped in the posterior part but continued

in the anterior. Upon removing the fingers, the noise continued as in normal ani-

mals.

a. The air-bladder was ligatured in the same place as the bisection of the muscle.

The drumming occurred as before. Again the anterior and the posterior parts were

in turn raised, and the drumming was made to occur in either part at will.

The two experiments V and VI, as well as the previous ones, prove

conclusively that the lateral horns have nothing to do with producing the

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES 165

drumming noise; and the forcing of air into the lateral horns, if such takes

place, is not the true explanation.

It remains now to consider the views of Dufossé and of Sérensen. Is

this drumming a muscular tone, i. e., a sound produced by the vibrating

muscle and intensified by the air-bladder (Dufossé), or do certain muscles

set into vibration the air in the air-bladder and the walls of the latter

(Sérensen) ?

Experiment VII.— The entire abdominal viscera except the air-bladder were

removed. Contractions of the muscles occurred, but no noise. The rubber balloon

was inserted into the abdominal cavity and inflated (the air-bladder being intact

and inflated). The drumming returned. When the balloon was allowed to collapse,

the noise ceased.

a. The abdominal cavity was packed tight with cloth (the air-bladder being

intact and full of air). The drumming was loud, and when the cut edges were drawn

together, it increased to a normal drum. When the cloth packing was removed,

the muscle still contracted, but no noise was heard. When the cavity was packed a

second time with cloth, the drumming became again audible.

Experiment VIII.— The entire viscera, including the air-bladder, were next re-

moved. Notwithstanding the large hemorrhage that occurred, the sonifici still

contracted. The rubber balloon was inserted and inflated with air. The drumming

noise returned of apparently the same pitch but not so loud as normal.

a. The central tendon was then cut longitudinally into two parts. The muscles

on either side contracted rhythmically, as could be seen from the vibrations of the

cut ends of the tendon. There were, however, no vibrations of the abdominal

muscles, such as are seen in normal animals. This was as might be expected, because

after cutting the central tendon the two drumming muscles have nothing to work

against. The inflated rubber balloon now produced no sound. ‘This seems to show

that the air-bladder does not act as an intensifier of muscular tone. The experiment

suggests that the air-bladder functions either in maintaining the tension inside of the

abdominal cavity, or as a vibrating organ or both.

Experiment IX .— Incisions were made on both sides of the median line of the

abdomen. After this operation the drumming remained perfectly normal. The

mM. sonifici were then cut from their origin on the abdominal muscles. One side was

amputated first, and the drumming still continued. While the one on the opposite

side was being cut, the drumming died away gradually until the drumming muscle

was severed its entire length, when the noise ceased. Yet at this time the muscle

contracted, as could be easily felt by touching it with the finger.

If now the air-bladder served as an intensifier of the muscular vibrations,

we might ask why it suddenly ceases to fulfill that function in the above

experiment. Also, in experiment II c, drumming occurs when the air-

bladder is replaced by a rubber balloon filled with water. This water-

bladder cannot be looked upon as an intensifier of sound or a resonator.

The foregoing experiments show that any part of the muscle can produce

the drumming when conditions are suitable. We have also seen that by

166 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

lifting a part of the abdominal muscles, the drumming over that part im-

mediately ceases. That the most ventral parts of the abdomen are active

in drumming is evident from the vibrations of this part of the body of a

squeteague. The whole mid-ventral area, from pectoral fins to anus,

pulsates in a strong rhythmical manner, which corresponds to the con-

traction of the m. sonificus as can be readily seen from the appended kymo-

graph tracings.

Experiment X.— An incision one inch long was made about half way between

the pectoral fins and the anus and at right angles to the long axis of the body. Great

care was taken in order not to injure the drumming muscles. Between the ventral

muscles and air-bladder was inserted a piece of sheet cork about two and one-half

inches long and two inches wide. This stretched severely the mid-ventral part of

the abdominal muscle and held it rigid, so that it could not be pulled in when the

sontficus contracted. No noise was produced, yet the muscle apparently contracted

in a perfectly normal manner. This would again show that the drumming is not a

muscular tone intensified by the air-bladder.

The drumming is undoubtedly a sexual character, for in the squeteague

the male only makes this noise. The female not having developed any

drumming muscles is not able to produce this sound. In some other

scienoids, as the croaker, both male and female produce the drumming,

but the former is said to produce a much more intense noise than the female.

I have often observed that the drumming muscles in the male croaker are

much thicker and heavier than in the female.

The conclusion is that by each contraction of the m. sonificus a sudden

blow is dealt which throws into vibration the abdominal walls and organs.

The physics of this phenomenon is very complex, as undoubtedly all of the

abdominal parts play a réle. But the organ that chiefly participates in

the vibration is the swim-bladder with its walls made tense by the pressure

of the contained gas. It is well known that in man the chest walls and

abdominal walls can be set into irregular vibration by being percussed and

that there is here a resonance effect produced by a resonance cavity or

semifluid material which is selectively set in resonance vibration. The

gas pressure in the air-bladder as well as the character of the muscular

contractions which will be immediately described indicate the same con-

clusion.

In all of the above experiments the pitch of the drumming sound was

not determined with scientific accuracy. Undoubtedly if the tone could

have been determined by physical apparatus the pitch, which to the ear

was apparently the same, would have been found to be different in the

various experiments.

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES 167

EXPERIMENTS TO DETERMINE CHARACTER OF THE MUSCULAR CONTRACTION.

The character of the contraction of the red drumming muscles has never

been studied, nor has the relation of the contractions to the pitch of the

drumming been accurately recorded. Dufossé has given the pitch of the

drumming of the meagre as well as he could determine it by the ear alone.

The following experiments were performed in carrying on the present study:

Experiment XI.— The first experiment was made so as to record the number

of vibrations produced by the abdominal tissue in the mid-ventral line during the

process of drumming. To accomplish this, a light wooden lever was made, with a

piece of sheet cork two inches long and one half inch wide attached at the bottom,

and a fine wire inserted in the top at right angles to the lever. The cork was held in

place on the abdomen of the squeteague by two rubber bands going around the fish

and over each end of the cork strip. The revolving drum of the kymograph was

then placed so that the wire point would trace on the smoked paper of the drum.

Thus when the animal commenced to drum, the vibration of the part of the abdomen

under the lever would be traced by the writing point on the smoked paper. The

drum of the kymograph revolved once in 4.848 seconds, and its circumference was

48.5 cm. The tracings are given on PI. VIII, fig. 1. The number of vibrations

per second, as determined by comparison with the tracings of a tuning fork vibrated

100 times per second, is 24.

Experiment XII.— A control experiment was made the next day on another

squeteague, but with the drum of the kymograph revolving only once in 20.202

seconds. The number of vibrations should agree or at least be within the limits of

experimental error. The tracings are given on Pl. VIII, fig. 2. The number of

vibrations is again 24 per second.

In both of the above experiments the lever was placed on the mid-ventral

line just posterior to the pectoral fins.

Experiment XIII.— The next experiment was to determine whether the anterior

and posterior ends of the abdomen vibrated synchronously, or whether the vibration

passed over the abdomen like a wave, from anterior to posterior, or vice-versa.

Mere observation as well as the resting of the fingers on the anterior and posterior

parts at the same time detected that all the muscle-fibres contracted synchronously.

To determine this more accurately, two levers were arranged — one being placed

just posterior to the pectoral fins, and the other just anterior to the anus — so that

they should write under each other on the smoked paper. The traces indicated

that the entire abdominal mechanism vibrated synchronously; hence all the fibres

of the two drumming muscles contract at the same time under stimuli controlled by

the central nervous system of the animal.

Experiment XIV.—In a fresh male squeteague an incision one inch long was

made on one side through the thick, white abdominal muscles until the red m.

sonificus was exposed. The cork base of the lever was inserted through this opening

until it rested on the red muscle within. With the lever in this position and the

168 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

animal on its side, the writing point should not move up and down in a perpendicular

plane, but should move horizontally, back and forward. This, then, should give in

the kymograph reading a series of dots, representing the apex of each curve. Such

a tracing was recorded on the drum of a kymograph. The vibrations were 24 per

second. From this experiment it is seen that the muscle itself and the abdominal

tissue vibrate at exactly the same rate.

Experiment XV.— Another experiment was made to show the effect of sub-

stituting an inflated rubber balloon for the air-bladder. The number of vibrations

was 24 per second. It is thus evident that the vibrations produced in the presence

of the rubber balloon are the same as in the normal condition of the animal.

The five preceding experiments agree in the rate of vibrations of the

abdominal part which is in immediate relation to the drumming muscles,

and which is directly connected with sound production according to our

present views. It was next necessary to record the contractions of the

muscle itself, and for this purpose the following two experiments were

performed.

Experiment XVI.— An incision two inches long was made in the mid-ventral

line just posterior to the pectoral fins. Through this opening was inserted a slender

wire with a sharp hook on one end and an eye on the other. The hook was fastened

directly into the fibers of the m. sonijicus. The eye was attached to an ordinary

muscle-lever which was supplied with a writing point. The kymograph was then

placed so that it would receive the tracings made by the writing point.

In this experiment none of the viscera were disturbed and the noise produced

differed in no way from that of the normal animal. To measure the time, a tuning

fork was used, whose double vibrations of 100 per second were registered on the

revolving drum. The rate of the contractions is 24 per second, which is identical

with the experiments made on the abdominal walls. As is shown in Pl. VIII, fig.

3, the amplitude of the contractions is much more than in the experiments made

on the abdominal walls. This is undoubtedly due to the release in tension caused by

the separation of the right and left abdominal portions to which these muscles are

attached, together with some resistance caused by the rubber bands. To determine

this point another experiment was made in which the vibrations of the abdominal

wall were registerd by a wire hook attached at one end to the rectus abdominis and

the other to the muscle-lever. With this method the amplitude of vibration is

nearly the same as that of the muscles. It was noticed, too, that when the ampli-

tude was the greatest the loudest sound was produced in both the experiments on

the abdominal walls and on the drumming muscle.

Experiment XV II.— Experiment XVI was repeated, except that the air-bladder

was punctured. The drumming noise stopped. The contractions of the drumming

muscles, registered as in the preceding experiment, are given on Pl. VIII, fig. 4.

The number of contractions computed from those of a tuning fork is 24 per second.

It is very evident that there is no difference between the contractions

when the swim-bladder is full of air and when it is collapsed, and that this

organ has no effect upon the contractions of the drumming muscle. This

<a. xia

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES 169

is especially well demonstrated in the tracings where the register of the

muscular contractions in an animal with the bladder intact is placed directly

over these from an animal in which the bladder is collapsed (Pl. VIII, fig. 4).

Experiment XVIII.— The viscera, including the swim-bladder, were removed

from a squeteague after an incision had been made in the mid-ventral line from the

pectoral fins to the anus. The wire hook of the registering apparatus was inserted

into the middle of the central tendon. No noise was produced. The number of

contractions was 24 per second. The amplitude of vibration was less than some

registered by the muscle and more than others. The experiment revealed no new

factor.

In the experiments just described each contraction of the muscle, repre-

sented in the tracing by the apex of the curves, is simultaneous with the

sound produced, and thus the rapid series of contractions institute the roll

or “drumming.”

EXPERIMENTS TO DETERMINE THE PRESSURE OF THE GAS IN THE SWIM-

BLADDER.

Experiments were made to discover, if possible, the pressure exerted on

the air-bladder by the contraction of the drumming muscles.

Experiment XIX .— The pressure of gas in the air-bladder of a female squeteague

(which has no drumming muscles and can not drum) was determined by making an

incision one inch long in the mid-ventral line two inches anterior to the anal fin.

The posterior end of the swim-bladder was ligatured and then amputated just back

of the ligature. The open end of a small mercurial manometer was inserted and tied

by another ligature. The first ligature was then removed and the mercury rose to a

height of 4 mm., which was produced by the normal pressure of the gas in the air-

bladder. The animal was kept alive by artificial respiration.

a. The same experiment was then tried on the swim bladder of a male sque-

teague, both while it was quiet and while it was drumming. In the quiet animal, the

pressure rose to 4 mm. and remained there until drumming occurred, when it rose to

6mm. In other words, the increased pressure brought about by the contraction of

the drumming muscles equalled 2 mm. of mercury. During the drumming the

meniscus of the mercury could be seen to oscillate between 4 mm. and 6 mm., as the

muscles successively contracted and then relaxed.

One interesting feature is that in all the animals examined the normal

pressure in the bladder was 4 mm. in the male and female — the large and

small animals alike. The gas pressure within the swim-bladder maintains

a tension on the elastic walls, while the increased density of the gas due to

the pressure tends to produce a louder sound than would otherwise occur.

These experiments show that

170 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

1. The chief cause of the drumming is the contraction of the drumming

muscles.

2. As the myogram distinctly shows, the contraction of the drumming

muscles is of the nature of a series of simple contractions.

3. These muscles contract at a definite rate, viz.: 24 vibrations per

second.

4. By the force of each contraction the abdominal organs are set into

vibration, especially the walls of the air-bladder.

5. The elastic walls of the air-bladder are always tense, because of the

pressure of the contained gas. This pressure is increased each time the

drumming muscles contract.

6. ‘The vibration of the tense walls of the air-bladder and the contained

gas are sufficient to produce the drumming noise.

7. ‘The sound produced is low. The actual number of sound vibrations

was not determined.

Sound production in the Sea-Robin and the Toadfish.

EXPERIMENTS TO DETERMINE CAUSE OF SOUND AND CHARACTER OF

MEcHANISM.

If a sea-robin is examined under artificial respiration, the single twitch

of the abdomen when a grunt is made can be very easily observed. If

the animal is opened along the mid-ventral line, both the contraction of

the intrinsic muscles and the single twitch of the swim-bladder can be

observed. ‘The noise is of the same pitch and loudness after the abdomen

has been opened as before. The removal of all the viscera except the air-

bladder has no effect on the noise produced. It is noticed that the two

muscles contract simultaneously.

Experiment XX.— An animal under artificial respiration was opened, and

various parts of the bladder were stimulated by a current from an induction coil, viz.:

a. One of the two nerves supplying the bladder was stimulated. A perfectly

normal grunt was produced.

b. The fibrous part of the bladder was then stimulated. A normal grunt was

not produced.

c. The muscle itself was stimulated directly. Again a perfectly normal sound

was produced.

These experiments show only that artificial stimulation of either nerve

or muscle will cause a normal sound to be produced.

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES 171

Experiment X XI.— The swim-bladder was removed from a fresh specimen and

laid upon the operating table. The nerves and the muscles of the bladder were

then stimulated successively as in experiment XX. In each case there was a grunt

of the same pitch and intensity as is produced by the normal animal.

This shows very clearly that the sound-producing mechanism of the

sea-robin is entirely within the bladder and its intrinsic muscles. This

mechanism, then, stands in direct contrast to that of the drumfishes, just

discussed.

Experiment XXII.— The swim-bladder was removed from a sea-robin. The

muscle was stimulated and an audible grunt was produced. The bladder was then

placed on an improvised registering apparatus, so arranged that the bladder was

connected with a muscle lever and writing point. The muscle was then stimulated.

An audible grunt resulted. The vibration of the bladder was registered on the drum

of the kymograph. The grunt is produced by one single sharp contraction of the

intrinsic muscle (Pl. VIII, fig. 6). This was repeated each time that the muscle was

stimulated.

a. One of the lobes of the bladder was now punctured. Both lobes collapsed.

Through the opening was inserted the rubber balloon (collapsed). This was in-

flated; the muscle was thus superimposed over the inflated rubber balloon. The

muscle was then stimulated as before. It contracted and produced a grunt the same

as in the isolated bladder full of air. Moreau (1876) concluded that it was the

vibration of the perforated internal septum which was the direct cause of phonation.

That this septum vibrates is true, but from the foregoing experiment it would seem

that the walls of the air-bladder are the chief vibrating organ. In the sea-robin

the left lobe only possessed the internal septum, but it made no difference with the

sound produced whether the right lobe or the left lobe was used for the experiment.

b. The uninjured lobe was filled with salt water and closed by a ligature. The

muscle was then stimulated by a current from an induction coil. A grunt occurred

as when the swim-bladder was filled with air, although not so loud. These con-

tractions were recorded by means of a kymograph and are given on PI. VIII, fig. 7.

On comparing the record with those given on PI. VIII, fig. 6, it is evident that the

curves have about the same amplitude, but are not so well sustained.

Experiment XXIV.— The swim-bladder was removed from a sea-robin as

quickly as possible. The muscle was stimulated by a current from an induction

coil. An audible grunt resulted. This sound was more intense when the bladder

rested on the table. It is interesting to note that this particular animal did not

produce any noise while alive. The isolated bladder was then placed on the regis-

tering apparatus, and records were obtained under single stimulations and also by

stimulations continued for several seconds. The records are given on PI. VIII, fig. 8.

The character of the curve is changed by the continued stimulation, the muscles

going into incomplete and then complete tetanus. Tetanic contraction does not

appear to be the normal procedure, but is produced by artificial stimulation. And

as far as could be determined, the sound was produced at the beginning of the tetanus,

i. e. at the first up-stroke of the lever, and died out during the remainder of the

contraction. The loudest grunts were produced at single full contractions of the

intrinsic muscles. The sound produced starts with a grunt, which gradually dies

out. It does not resemble drumming.

i2 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

a. The bladder was then punctured and all of the air expelled from both lobes.

The muscle was again stimulated, but there was no sound, although the muscle

contracted as usual. The collapsed rubber balloon was inserted into one lobe of the

bladder, and then inflated. Upon stimulation a grunt was produced. The bladder

was now inflated still more, and upon stimulation a grunt of higher pitch was pro-

duced. When the bladder was inflated still more, the pitch became yet higher.

b. The rubber balloon was now filled with sea-water and the muscles stimulated.

A grunt was produced, although the pitch was apparently changed.

It is very evident then, that in the sea-robin and the toadfish the swim-

bladder with its intrinsic muscle is an organ for the production of sound.

By the contraction of the intrinsic muscle the tense walls of the air-bladder

are made to vibrate, thus producing the sound.

These grunts can be imitated very closely by drawing the forefinger and

thumb towards each other over the surface of an inflated rubber balloon,

especially if the rubber is dry or has been resined.

Conclusions.

I. The scizenoid fishes that make a drumming noise have specific sound-

producing muscles which are only superficially attached to the swim-bladder.

For this drumming muscle the name musculus sonificus has been proposed

and adopted.

II. The chief cause of the drumming noise is the contraction of the m.

sonificus, which produces a vibration of the abdominal walls and organs,

especially the swim-bladder.

III. The sea-robin and the toadfish, which make a grunting noise, have

muscles which are intrinsically connected with the swim-bladder and are

known as intrinsic muscles.

IV. The cause of the grunting noise is the contraction of the intrinsic

muscles which produce a vibration in the walls of the air-bladder.

V. The mechanism in the Scienoide is adapted to the production of

rapidly repeated sounds or rolls.

VI. The mechanism in the sea-robin and the toadfish is adapted to the

production of sounds repeated at more or less long intervals.

TOWER, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN CERTAIN FISHES 173

Literature Cited.

Cuvier, GeorcEs. The animal kingdom arranged in conformity with its organiza-

tion, by the Baron Cuvier, with supplementary additions to each order, by

Edward Griffith and others. Vol. X, Class Pisces, with supplementary addi-

tions, by Edward Griffith and Charles Hamilton Smith. London, 1834.

Bripex, T. W. Cambridge Natural History, vol. vm, 1904, Fishes, p. 359.

Durossh. Recherches sur les bruits et les sons expressifs que font entendre les

poissons d’Europe et sur les organes producteurs de ces phénoménes acoustiques

ainsi que sur les appareils de l’audition de plusieurs de ces animaux. Annales

des Sciences Naturelles, 5me ser., t. xIx, 1874, art. 5, 53 p., pl. 16, 17, 18, 19,

and t. xx, art. 3, 134 p.

GintTuHer, A. An introduction to the study of fishes. 1880.

HoxsrooKk, J. E. Ichthyology of South Carolina. 1860. [2nd ed.]

JAGcER, A. Die Physiologie und Morphologie der Schwimmblase der Fische. Archiv

fiir die gesammte Physiologie, bd. xciv, 1903, p. 65-138.

JORDAN, D.S., and EverMANN, B. W. American food and game fishes. 1902.

LicHTENFELT, H. Literatur zur Fischkunde, p. 68, 1906.

Moreau, A. Surla voix des poissons. Comptes Rendus de l’Académie des Sciences,

Paris, 1864, Aug. 29, p. 436.

—— Recherches experimentales sur les fonctions de la vessie natatoire. Annales

des Sciences Naturelles, 6me ser., t. Iv, 1876, art. 8, 85 p.

Smita, H. M. The drumming of the drumfishes ‘Scizenide). Science, n. s. vol.

22, 1905, p. 376.

Sd6rensEN, W. Are the extrinsic muscles of the air-bladder in some Siluroide and

the ‘elastic spring”’ apparatus of others subordinate to the voluntary produc-

tion of sounds? What is, according to our present knowledge, the function of

the Weberian ossicles? Journal of Anatomy and Physiology, vol. xxix, n. s.

vol. rx, 1895, p. 109-139, 205-229, 399-423, 518-552.

—— Om Lydorganerhos Fiske. Kjébenhaven, 1884.

Wuitr, J. Voyage to the seas of China. 1824.

Fig. 1.

Fig. 2.

PLATE VI.

SwWIM-BLADDER OF MICROPOGON UNDULATUS.

In normal position resting on the central tendon which joins the m. soni-

ficus of either side.

The two lateral horns extend back over the bladder three-fourths of its

entire length.

SWIM-BLADDER OF CYNOSCION NEBULOSUM.

In normal position resting on the central tendon which joins the m. soni-

ficus of either side.

(176)

Annas N.Y. Acap. Scr. Vou. XVIII, Puate VI.

PLATE VII.

Fig. 1. SwIM-BLADDER OF BAIRDIELLA CHRYSURA.

In normal position resting on the central tendon which joins the m. soni-

ficus of either side.

Fig. 2. SwiIM-BLADDER OF LEIOSTOMUS XANTHURUS.

In normal position resting on the central tendon which joins the m. sonificus

of either side.

The undissected portion at the anterior of the bladder shows how the two

m. sonifici completely inclose the swim-bladder.

(178)

ANNALS N.Y. Acap. Sct. Vou. XVIII, Prater VII.

Fig.

PLATE VIII.

KYMOGRAPH RECORDS OF SOUND-PRODUCING SWIM-BLADDERS.

Squetague. Normal swim-bladder. Twenty-four vibrations per second

(rapidly revolving drum).

Squeteague. Normal swim-bladder. Twenty-four vibrations per second

(slowly revolving drum).

Squeteague. Myogram of m. sonificus. Twenty-four vibrations per

second.

Squeteague. Myogram of m. sonificus.

a. Swim-bladder normal. b. Swim-bladder collapsed.

Tuning fork having one-hundred double vibrations per second. Kymo-

graph drum revolving at same rate as for Figs. 1, 3, and 4.

Prionotus. Swim-bladder removed.

Prionotus. Swim-bladder removed and filled with sea-water.

Prionotus. Swim-bladder removed. Prolonged stimulation.

(180)

Annats N.Y. Acap. Sct.

Fig.

9/4)

Vou. XVIII, Prats VIII.

fAnnats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vol. XVIII, No. 6, Part II, pp. 181-263. 11 May, 1908.]

THE NORTH AMERICAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS IPOMG@A.!

By Homer Do.uiver Hovuss, B. S., M. A.

INTRODUCTION.

A comparative study of specimens of the Convolvulacee, representing

the species placed by Linneus? in Ipom@a and Convolvulus, shows that

the two groups as there constituted, are far from homogeneous. The type

of Convolvulus is Convolvulus major albus, Tournefort, pl. 17 =(Convolvulus

septum L.). The species included in Ipomaa by Linneus do not accord,

except in part, with the diagnosis given by him in the Genera Plantarum

(1737), where it is stated that the stamens are exserted, and pl. 39 of Tourne-

fort? is cited. This is Quamoclit foliis tenwiter incists & pinnatis (=I po-

maa quamoclit L.). Under most circumstances this would establish it as

the type of the genus, but it must be remembered that the genus Quamoclit

was an accepted and valid genus before Linneus called it Ipomea and the

genus has since been restored to generic rank by Moench.® In the 5th.

edition of the Genera Plantarum (1752), the Tournefort reference to pl. 39

is still retained, with the addition of “‘Volubilis Dill. Elth. 318.’ The

first species figured by Dillenius under Volubilis is V. zeylanica pes-triginus,

pl. 318. f. 411. (=Ipomaa pes-triginus L.)

In deference to historical usage and long continued uniformity, the

writer does not believe it necessary to restrict Ipomaa to the group of species

typified by Ipomaa quamoclit L., but is inclined to accept the species first

figured by Dillinius under Volubilis, if it is necessary to designate a type

for the genus Ipoma@a. Without doubt the plant of greatest economic im-

portance is Ipomaa batatas (L.) Lam. but as that was placed in Convol-

vulus by Linneus and was known as Batatas* in pre-Linnean literature,

it has nothing to recommend it as an acceptable type of the genus. If I.

1 Presented in abstract to the Academy at the regular meeting on 9 March 1908. Manu-

script delivered to Secretary 10 March, 1908.

2 Species Plantarum, 1753; ed. 2, 1762-63.

3 Institutiones rei Herbarie, 1700.

4 Rumph. Amb. 5: 367. pl. 130. 1750

5 Moench, Meth. 453. 1794

181

182 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

quamoclit were to be recognized as the type of Ipomaa, the present genus

Quamoclit’ would have to take the name Ipome@a. This would cause a most

sweeping change of names, which would be neither logical nor conductive to

the future stability of its nomenclature.

No historical review of the genus will be attempted here, but the cita-

tions of species and synonyms is made as complete as possible, with the

object of supplying the absence of a bibliography and historical sketch of

the genus, and its divisions. The treatment of the genus Ipomaa in the

following pages is in many respects similar to that of Choisy,? Meissner,’

Grisebach,* and Asa Gray.® The writer includes Batatas Choisy, Pharbitis

Choisy, Leptocallis G. Don and Bombycospermum Presl, in Ipomea; while

the following genera are excluded as worthy of generic rank, Operculina

S. Manso, Quamoclit (Tourn.) Moench, (incl. Mina Llay. & Lex.), Exo-

gonium Choisy, Calonyction Choisy, Turbina Raf. and Rivea Choisy.

The writer is under deep obligations, for valuable suggestions and aid,

to Dr. N. L. Britton of the N. Y. Botanical Garden; Dr. J. N. Rose and

Mr. J. H. Painter of the U. S. National Museum; Dr. B. L. Robinson

and staff of the Gray Herbarium of Harvard University.

The revision of the genus here presented is based upon the collections

in the following institutions, the letter preceding each being used to indi-

cate the locations of the specimen in the citation of specimens in the following

pages.

(N). National Herbarium, U.S. National Museum, Washington, D. C.

(Y). New York Botanical Garden, New York, N. Y.

(C). Columbia University Herbarium in the N. Y. Botanical Garden.

(G). Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.

(M). Museo Nacional Mexicana, Mexico City, Mex. (Herb. Manual

Urbina).

(J). Dept. of Agriculture, Jamaica; Hope Gardens, Jamaica, B. W. I.

SYNOPSIS OF THE GENUS IpoMa@a.

IPOMGA L. Sp. Pl. 159. 1753.

Annual or perennial climbing or trailing vines or sometimes upright

shrubby or tree-like plants. Leaves alternate; blades entire, angled, lobed

1 Moench, Meth. 453. 1794.

2In DeCandolle Prodromus 9: 335-396. 1845.

3 Meissner, in Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 200-370. 1869.

4Fl. Br. West Indies, 466-476. 1861.

5 Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2!: 207-224. 1878.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 183

or divided, usually petioled. Flowers solitary on axillary peduncles or in

cymes, rarely in raceme-like clusters. Sepals 5, membranaceous or rather

fleshy, sometimes becoming leathery, often herbaceous, closely imbricated,

sometimes elongated. Corolla funnelform or funnelform-campanulate,

rarely salverform, the tube often constricted within the calyx, the limb

usually spreading, the plicee ending at the middle of the margin of each

lobe, rarely between the lobes. Stamens 5, included, rarely exserted.

Ovary 2-, 3-, 4- or rarely 5-celled. Styles united. Capsule mostly septi-

fragally 2-, 3-, 4- or 5-valved, sometimes thick-walled and elongated. Seeds

glabrous, pubescent or hirsute on the angles, often with a long wool-like

coma on the dorsal angles.

Key to the Sections of Ipomea.

Plants erect, stout, perennial, shrubby or tree-like;

leaf-blades rarely cordate. Section I. ORTHIPOM(CA.

Plants twining, creeping or prostrate, stout or

slender; leaf-blades often cordate.

Sepals herbaceous, often elongated and hairy;

ovary usually 3-celled. Section II. PHARBITIS.

Sepals coriaceous, membranaceous or sub-

herbaceous; rarely elongated; ovary usu-

ally 2- or 4-celled. Section III. BATATAS,

Key to the Subsections.

I, ORTHIPOMGA.

Shrubby below or with stout, erect or ascending herbaceous

stems.

Sepals lanceolate, acuminate; plant silvery. 1. Argyrophylle.

Sepals ovate or ovate-oblong, usually obtuse or acute;

foliage not silvery but often pubescent. 2. Leptophylle.

Arborescent, erect and woody. 3. Arborescentes.

i PHARBITIS:

Inflorescence densely capitate or leafy-bracted. 4. Cephalanthe.

Inflorescence not conspicuously bracted or capitate.

Ovary typically 3- or 5-celled.

Outer sepals becoming different from the inner ones, cor-

date or truncate and often conspicuously broadened

at the base. 5. Heterophylle.

Sepals not becoming cordate or truncate nor conspicu-

ously enlarged in fruit.

184 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Leaf-blades entire or variously 3-lobed. 6.

Leaf-blades palmately 5-divided. te

Ovary typically 2-celled; blades often 3-lobed. 8

III. BATATAS.

Stems prostrate or creeping, not twining. 9.

Stems trailing or twining, at least the tips twining.

Seeds with dorsal or marginal coma longer than the seed or

completely covered with long hairs (Eriosperme) .!

Leaf-blades divided to the petiole into 3 to 9 stalked

or sessile leaflets. 10.

Leaf-blades entire or, if lobed, not divided to the peti-

ole.

Pedicels thickened and fleshy, beset with tentacular

outgrowths or sete. 11.

Pedicels not conspicuously thickened, neither tentac-

ular nor setaceous.

Inflorescence racemose, suberect or pendant; seeds

covered on all surfaces with long wool-like

hair. 12.

Inflorescence cymose, paniculate or the flowers soli-

tary; seeds with dorsal or marginal hairs only.

Leaf-blades deeply 5-lobed. 13.

Leaf-blades entire or 3-lobed, rarely 5-lobed. 14.

Seeds glabrous or pubescent, at least without a conspicuous

coma (Leiospermz).

Leaf-blades palmately or pedately lobed nearly or quite

to the petiole; stems slender. 15.

Leaf-blades entire, toothed or 3- to 5-lobed.

Sepals small, less than 5 mm. long. 16.

Sepals larger, 6-20 mm. long, or longer.

Sepals thin and membranaceous, mostly obtuse, un-

equal; roots enlarged and tuber-like, 17.

Sepals coriaceous; roots rarely tuber-like.

Sepals very unequal. 18.

Sepals equal or nearly so. 19.

Section I. ORTHIPOMCA.

Hederacee.

Cissoides.

Tyrianthine.

Erpipomea.

Dactylophylle.

Setose.

Bombycosperme.

Palmate.

Jalape.

Pedatisecte.

Microsepale.

Emetice.

Anisomere.

Aequisepale.

Erect, bushy, shrubby or tree-like perennials; leaf-blades rarely cordate

or lobed; often short-petioled; corollas mostly large and showy; sepals

coriaceous or leathery; capsules thick-walled, often elongated; seeds with

long wool-like hair on the dorsal angles, or the angles long-hirsute.

1In cases where it has not been possible to determine with any certainty whether the

seeds are hairy or not, the species has been grouped with the Leiosperme.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMGA 185

1. Argyrophylle. Plants silvery-pubescent and more or less tomentose ;

sepals acuminate, lanceolate; corolla white. (Ipoma@a § Argyrophylle

Baker & Rendle, in T. Dyer, Fl. Trop. Afr. 4’: 135. 1905.)

One species in North America. 1, I. ciervensis.

1. Ipomea ciervensis Painter; House, Bot. Gaz. 43:408. 1907.

Shrubby below, 30-60 cm. high, densely silvery-pubescent throughout except

the corolla; leaf-blades sessile or nearly so, oblong-lanceolate, acute or obtuse and

somewhat 3-lobed, 4-6 cm. long; peduncles 1 cm. long; bracts linear-spatulate or

subfoliaceous; sepals ovate-lanceolate, attenuate, about 15 mm. long; corolla

white, about 6 cm. long, pubescent without in bud and strigulose on the plice when

expanded.

TypE Locatity: Hacienda Ciervo, Queretaro, Mexico.

DistRIBUTION: Known only from the type locality.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Rose, Painter & Rose 9660, 1905 (type — N, Y).

Altamirano 1557, 1905 (N).

2. Leptophylle. Foliage pubescent or glabrous, not silvery; leaf-

blades entire (divided in I. Pringlez & I. ancisa); sepals coriaceous, ovate

to ovate-laceolate, obtuse; corolla large, purple or white. ([pomea §

suffruticose Choisy, in DC. Prodr. 9: 353. 1845.)

Corolla white or cream-colored.

Sericeous-pubescent; outer sepals much shorter than the

inner. 2. I. petrophila.

Glabrous or nearly so.

Leaf-blades linear-lanceolate to oblong-lanceolate; sepals

subequal. 3. I. longifolia.

Leaf-blades pinnately divided, 5-10 cm. long, sepals very

unequal. 8. I. ancisa.

Corolla purple, lilac or pink.

Plant pubescent or hirsute.

Leaf-blades subsessile, hastately toothed at the base.

Sparingly pubescent; sepals 10-15 mm. long. 4. I. stans.

Densely pubescent; sepals suborbicular, 8-10 mm.

long. 5. I. jaliscana.

Leaf-blades not toothed at the base.

Leaves 2 cm. long or more; sepals acute, 8-13 mm.

long. 6. I. durangensis.

Leaves less than 1 em. long, woolly-white; sepals obtuse,

5-6 mm. long. 9.) Ts tents:

Plant glabrous or nearly so.

Leaf-blades pinnately divided, 2-4 em. long. 7. I. pringlet,

Leaf-blades entire, linear-lanceolate. 10. I. leptophylila.

186 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

2. Ipomea petrophila House, Bot. Gaz. 43: 401. 1907.

Stems erect from a large root, pale and finely tomentulose above, 30-60 cm.

high; leaf-blades lanceolate, 4-10 cm. long, 3-nerved and obtuse at the ends, finely

sericeous pubescent beneath; sepals unequal, oblong, obtuse, the inner ones 8-11 mm,

long; corolla white with a pale purple throat, 6-8 cm. long, glabrous; the peduncles

1-3-flowered, 1-5 cm. long; capsules ovoid-conical, 14-16 mm. high, thick-walled.

Type LocaLity: Near Chihuahua, Mexico.

DIsTRIBUTION: Rocky hills, northern Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Pringle 340, 1885 (type—N). Santa Eulalia

plains, Wilkinson, 1885 (N).

3. Ipomea longifolia Benth. Pl. Hartw. 16. 1839.— Small, Fl. South-

eastern U. S. 962. 1903.

Convolvulus Schumardianus Torr. Bot. Marcy’s Rep. 291. 1853.

Ipomea Carletoni Holzinger, Contr. Nat. Herb. 1: 211. 1892.

Convolvulus Queretanensis Sesse & Moc., Fl. Nov. Hisp. in La Naturaleza II. 1: 27.

1887.— Fl. Mex. 1. c. II. 2: append. 36. 1893.

TYPE LOCALITY: Mexico.

DistRIBUTION: Prairies and plains, Oklahoma and Texas to Arizona

and south in Mexico to Queretaro and Durango.

IttustRaTIoNs: Bot. Reg. pl. 21. Contr. Nat. Herb. 1: pl. 17.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Oklahoma: Carleton (N); Blankinship (G).

New Mexico: Wright 1617, 1851. Arizona: Towmey 2580 (Y); Lemmon

28384; Wulcox 375. Mexico: Durango, Palmer 229 (Y, N). Sonora:

Thurber 710. Queretaro: Rose, Painter & Rose 9544 (N, Y); Hartweg 97

(G). Chihuahua: Palmer 297. Aguas Calientes: E. W. Nelson 3887.

4. Ipomea stans Cav. Ic. 3:26. 1794— Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9:

355. 1845.

Convolvulus stans H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 96. 1819.

Convolvulus firmus Spreng. Syst. 1: 613. 1825.

Convolvulus sinuatus Sesse & Moc., Fl. Nov. Hisp. in La Naturaleza II.1: 24. 1887.

— Fl. Mex. 1. c. II. 2: append. 38. 1893.

Type Locatity: Matritense.

DistripuTion: Northern and western Mexico.

ItLustraTions: Cav. 1. c. pl. 250. Altamirano, Mat. Mex. pl. 282.

Specimens examined from Coahuila, San Luis Potosi, Guanajuato,

Hidalgo, Valley of Mexico, Orizaba and Oaxaca.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 187

_ 5. Ipomea jaliscana House, Muhlenbergia 3: 39. 1907.

Ipomea stans var. hirsuta Robinson, Proc. Am. Acad. 29: 319. 1894.

Differs from J. stans by its more conspicuously hirsute stems and leaves, the

sessile leaf-blades which are relatively broader and more deeply lobed at the base;

sepals suborbicular, 6-8 mm. long.

TypE LocALity: Rio Blanco, Jalisco.

DISTRIBUTION: Jalisco.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Palmer 324, 1886 (type—G, N, C). Pringle

4488, 1893 (G, N).

6. Ipomea durangensis sp. nov.

Stems erect, 50 cm. tall, finely sericeous-pubescent, densely so above, silvery on

young parts; leaf-blades elliptical-oblong, 2-3 cm. long, 5-15 mm. wide, obtuse;

peduncles 1 cm. long or less, 1-flowered; sepals subequal, lanceolate, acute, 8-13

mm. long, densely silky-pubescent; corolla slender funnelform, 6-7 cm. long, violet-

purple with a white tube, plicee pubescent without, the limb 5-6 cm. broad; sepals

enlarged in fruit with subspatulate tips (not accrescent); capsules globose-ovoid,

subacute, 15 mm. high, thick-walled, 2-celled; seeds minutely pubescent with a

short coma of hairs on the dorsal angles.

Mexico; Durango, E. W. Nelson 4639, 1898 (type, sheet No. 332692

—N, dupl. G), 4664, 1898 (N — 332718, G). Palmer 366, 1896 (N, Y, G).

» 7. Ipomea pringlei A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 22: 307. 1887.

? Ipomea sescossiana Baillon, in Bull. Soc. Linn. Par, 1: 385, 1883.

Tall, erect and rigid; leaf-blades pinnately divided into 5-8 linear or filiform

segments, 15-30 mm. long; peduncles stout, 1-flowered, as long as the leaves; sepals

oblong, rounded, 7-8 mm. long; corolla blue or purple, 6-7 cm. long; capsules ovoid,

12-14 mm. high on reflexed pedicels, 2-celled; seeds tomentulose with an incon-

spicuous coma on the dorsal angles.

Tyre tocauity: Chihuahua.

DistripuTion: Hilly regions of northern Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Chihuahua, Pringle 782, 1886 (type—G, N,

Y). 579, 1885 (G). E. W. Nelson 6276, 1899 (N). Durango, E. W.

Nelson 4729, 1898 (N).

_-8. Ipomea ancisa sp. nov.

Resembling I. Pringlei; leaf-blades 5-10 cm. long, the segments filiform, 2-5

em. long, .5-1.5 mm. wide; peduncles very stout, 6-11 cm. long, 1-flowered; sepals

very unequal, orbicular-ovate, obtuse, with scarious margins; corolla slender-

funnelform, white, 7-8 cm. long, the limb 6-7 cm. broad.

188 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Mexico: Chihuahua, between Colonia Garcia and Pratt’s ranch, below

Pacheco, E. W. Nelson 6276, 1899 (type, sheet No. 359993 —N).

9. Ipomeea lenis sp. nov.

A dwarf, perennial, shrubby plant with thickened, woody base; stems erect,

10-30 em. tall, densely woolly or silky pubescent with white hairs; leaf-blades sessile,

oblong, obtuse at both ends, 6-10 mm. long, 2-4 mm. broad; flowers solitary in the

upper axils and often crowded; peduncles 5-8 mm. long; sepals equal, ovate-lanceo-

late, obtuse, 5-6 mm. long, the outer ones silvery-pubescent; corolla funnelform, 5-6

em. long, blue, glabrous, the limb 4—5 em. broad, 5-lobed.

Mexico: Zacatecas; Near Berriozobal, E. W. Nelson 3889, July 8,

1896 (type, sheet No. 266883 — N, dupl. G).

10. Ipomea leptophylla Torr. in Frem. Rep. 95. 1845.— Emory,

Rep. pl. 11.— Morris in Plant World 7: pls.5 & 6— Small, FI.

Southeastern U.S. 964. 1903.— Roth. Bot. Wheeler 205. 1878.

Convolvulus Caddoensis Buckley in Proc. Phila. Acad. 1862: 6. 1862.

Tyrer LocaLity: Upper Platte.

DistripuTion: Dry soil, plains of South Dakota and southeastern

Montana to Texas and New Mexico.

3. Arborescentes. Erect, woody, arborescent or shrubby perennials,

often several m. tall; leaf-blades oblong-ovate to narrowly or triangular-

ovate, rounded, truncate or subcordate, rarely subsagittate at the base;

sepals coriaceous, obtuse; corolla white, rarely pink or purple; capsules

narrowly ovoid, or oblong; the coma of hairs on the seeds very long. (Ipo-

maa Sect. Orthipomaa, § Arborescentes, Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 358. 1845.

Seeds with black coma on all surfaces.

Twigs and leaves puberulent or glabrous; leaf-blades

cordate-sagittate or truncate.

Leaf-blades oblong, acuminate. 11. J. fistulosa.

Leaf-blades ovate, short-acuminate. 12. IJ. glabriuscula.

Twigs and leaves densely canescent; leaf-blades ovate-

cordate. 13. JI. nicaraguensis.

Seeds with white coma only on the dorsal angles.

Corolla and sepal densely woolly without. 14. J. murucoides.

Corolla and sepals pubescent or glabrous, not woolly.

Foliage more or less densely pubescent; veins promi-

nent beneath on the blades.

Leaf-blades ovate, cordate. 15. I. arborescens.

Leaf-blades, oblong, rounded at the base. 16. J. cuernavacensis.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 189

Foliage glabrous or nearly so.

Sepals hairy within, 12-16 mm. long. 17. I. «ntrapilosa.

Sepals glabrous within and without.

Leaf-blades 2-3 cm. long; sepals 8-10 mm. long. 18. I. calva.

Leaf-blades 7-13 cm. long; sepals 10-12 mm.

long. 19. J. wolcottiana.

11. Ipomea fistulosa Mart.; Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 349. 1845.—

Meissn. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 239. pl. 81. 1869.— Rose, in

Gard. & For. 7: 366. 1894.— Small, Fl. Southeastern U. S.

963. 1903.

Batatas crassicaulis Benth. Bot. Voy. Sulphur 134. 1844.

Ipomea texana Coulter, Contr. Nat. Herb. 1: 45. 1890.

Typr Locauity: Brazil.

DISTRIBUTION: Southern Mexico to Central America, Brazil and Peru,

chiefly along rivers near the coast. Adventive northward to Texas and

South Carolina.

Specimens examined from South Carolina, Texas, Vera Cruz, Chiapas,

Acapulco, Tepic, Guatemala and Nicaragua.

12. Ipomea glabriuscula House, Bot. Gaz. 43: 409. 1907.

Resembling the preceding, but glabrous; leaf-blades ovate, shallowly-cordate,

minutely pubescent beneath; peduncles 4-12 em. long; sepals unequal, the inner

6-7 mm. long; corolla white, glabrous or nearly so without.

TYPE LOCALITY: Guatemala.

DISTRIBUTION: Guatemala.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: [Heyde, 1892 (type — N, 256072).

“13. Ipomeea nicaraguensis House, Bot. Gaz. 43: 409. 1907.

Ipomea fistulosa var. nicaraguensis Donnell Smith, Bot. Gaz. 19: 256. 1894.

Twigs velvety-canescent; leaf-blades broadly ovate or reniform-ovate, velvety-

canescent beneath, acute, shallowly cordate, 7-12 cm. long; sepals broadly ovate,

rounded, minutely tomentose, 7 mm. long; corolla pink or whitish, tomentose with-

out on the plice and tube.

Type Locauity: Rio de las Lajas, Nicaragua.

DistRIBUTION: Central America.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: W.C. Shannon 5026, 1893 (type —N).

190 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

' 14. Ipomca murucoides Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 248. 1819.

Convolvulus macranthus H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3:95. 1818.

Ipomea macrantha G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 267. 1838. Not I. macrantha Roem.

& Schult. 1819.

Convolvulus strictus Willd.; Steud. Nom. ed. 2,1: 412. 1841.

A large tree, the inflorescence and young parts densely tomentose or woolly;

leaf-blades oblong-lanceolate, 7-12 cm. long, rounded or obtuse at the base, long-

acuminate, tomentose beneath; calyx woolly without and pubescent within; the

unequal sepals 18-28 mm. long; corolla 7-8 cm. long, woolly-pubescent without;

capsules 25 mm. long; seeds with a long coma of white hairs on the dorsal angles and

apex.

Type LocaLity: Near Guanajuato and Santa Rosa, Queretaro, Mexico.

Distrisution: Hillsides, southern Mexico and Central America.

Specimens examined from Oaxaca, Morelos, Michoacan, Pueblo, Quere-

taro, Valley of Mexico, Guanajuato and Guatemala.

15. Ipomeea arborescens (Humb. & Bonpl.) G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4:

267. 1838.

Convolvulus arborescens Humb. & Bonpl.; Willd. Enum. 1: 204. 1809.— H. B. K.

Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 94. 1818.

C. arboreus Balb.; Steud. Nom. ed. 2.1: 407. 1841.

Argyreia oblonga Benth. Bot. Sulph. 133. 1844.

Ipomea murucoides var. glabrata Rose, Contr. Nat. Herb. 1: 107. 1891.

Convolvulus Quanhtzahuath Sesse & Moc., Fl. Nov. Hisp. in La Naturaleza IT. 1: 23.

1887. Fl. Mex.1.c. II. 2: append. 36, 37. 1893.

Leaf-blades finely velvety-pubescent above, paler, densely pubescent and prom-

inently reticulate-veined beneath, ovate, cordate; sepals oval obtuse, 6-10 mm.

long, tomentulose-pubescent within and without; corolla white, about 5 cm. long;

capsules 2 cm. high; seeds black with a long reflexed white coma of hairs on the

dorsal angles.

Type LtocaLiry: America meridionali.

DistripuTion: Dry hilly regions of western and southern Mexico.

ILLUSTRATIONS: Gard. & For. 7: p. 364. 1894.

Specimens examined from Sonora, Sinaloa and Morelos.

16. Ipomeea cuernavacensis House, Bot. Gaz. 43: 410. 1907.

Convolvulus arboreus Moc. & Sesse, Fl. Nov. Hisp. in La Naturaleza II.1:-23. 1887.

— Fl. Mex, l. c. 2: append. 38. 1893. Not C. arboreus Balb. 1841,

Closely related to the preceding, but the leaf-blades oblong, rounded at the base,

long-acuminate, 10-15 cm. long and 5-6.5 em. wide.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 191

TYPE LOCALITY: Cuernavaca, Morelos, Mexico.

DistrrBuTion: Morelos.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Rose & Painter 6863, 1903 (type —N).

17. Ipomea intrapilosa Rose, in Gard. & For. 7: 367. 1894.

I, murucoides var. glabrata A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad, 22: 440. 1887. Not I. gla-

brata Meissn. 1869.

Nearly glabrous throughout; leaf-blades triangular-ovate, short-acuminate,

truncate or rounded at the base, 5-15 cm. long; calyx tomentose without in bud,

becoming glabrate, pubescent within; sepals oval, subacute, 12-16 mm. long;

corolla 4—5 cm. long, the limb 7-8 cm. broad; capsules ovoid, 2 cm. long; seeds with

a long dorsal coma of white hairs.

TypE LocaLity: Chapala, Jalisco, Mexico.

DistrisuTion: Rocky hillsides, western and southern Mexico.

Specimens examined from Sonora, Acapulco, Jalisco, Oaxaca and

Morelos. Type collected by Palmer (No. 703, 1886, N).

. 18. Ipomea calva House, Bot. Gaz. 43: 410. fig. 1. 1907.

Leaves clustered near the ends of the branches, blades small, 2-3 cm. long,

nearly glabrous; sepals 8-10 mm. long; corolla about 5 em. long, white, glabrous.

Type Locauity: La Junta, Guerrero, Mexico.

DIsTRIBUTION: Known only from the type locality.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED. KE. W. Nelson 6992, 1903 (type—N).

. 19. Ipomea wolcottiana Rose, in Gard. & For. 7: 367. 1894.

Nearly or quite glabrous; leaf-blades ovate, or ovate-lanceolate, 7-13 cm. long,

rounded or truncate at the base, acuminate; sepals 10-12 mm. long; corolla white,

6-7 cm. long; capsules oblong, 18 mm. long.

TyprE Ltocatity: Manzanillo, Colima, Mexico.

DistripuTion: Rocky hillsides western and southern Mexico.

IntustraTions: Gard. & For. 7: p. 365. 1894.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Colima; Manzanillo, Palmer 1342, 1891,

(type—N, G, Y). Puebla; Rose & Hay 5830, 1901 (N). Morelos,

Cuernavaca, Rose & Painter 6965, 1903 (N). Chiapas; E. W. Nelson

3509, 1895 (N). Oaxaca; E. W. Nelson 2361, 1895 (N).

192 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Section II. PHARBITIS.

Annual or perennial twining or trailing vines with herbaceous sepals,

these often with elongated tips and more or less pubescent or hispid bases;

capsules globose, thin-walled, 2-, 3- or 5-celled.

Nil Medicus in Staatw. Vorles. Churpf. Phys-Oak. Ges. 1: 210. 1791.

Convolvuloides Moench, Meth. 451. 1794.

Ornithosperma Raf. Fl. Ludov. 149. 1817.

Cleiemera Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 77. 1838.

Pharbitis Choisy, in Mem. Soc. Phys. Genev. 6: 438. 1833.—— In DC. Prodr. 9: 341.

1845.

4. Cephalanthe. Stout, annual or perennial twiners; the inflor-

escence congested or capitate and subtended by herbaceous, usually pubes-

cent or hairy bracts, or the pedicels very short and each subtended by a

bract. (Ipomaa, Sect. Strophipomaa § Cephalanthe Choisy, in DC. Prodr.

9: 363. 1845.)

Sepals and bracts similar, hairy, not veined.

Stems minutely or softly pubescent or tomentose.

Leaf-blades silvery beneath; stems tomentose. 20. I. maztrett.

Leaf-blades not silvery beneath, glabrous above and stems

minutely pubescent. 21. I. invicta.

Stems retrorsely strigose-pubescent.

Corolla 7-9 cm. long; western Mexico. 22. I. lambii.

Corolla 3-4 cm. long; southern Mexico. 23. I. hirtiflora.

Sepals and bracts dissimilar; sepals veined.

Stems hirsute; peduncles longer than the pedicels. 24. I. ruber.

Stems glabrous; peduncles very short and usually shorter

than the pedicels. 25. I. fimbriosepala.

20. Ipomea maireti Choisy, in DC. Prodr. 9: 374. 1845.

A stout, perennial vine, with densely tomentose stems; leaf-blades ovate, cor-

date, 7-12 cm. long, acute, finely pubescent above, densely silvery pubescent beneath;

peduncles 1-3-flowered; bracts ovate, obtuse; sepals 18-22 mm. long, oblong-lance-

olate, acute; corolla campanulate-funnelform, 7-8 em. long, the limb blue, the tube

white below, pubescent without.

TYPE LocaLity: Mexico.

DisrriBuTion: Forests from Orizaba region to Oaxaca and Guatemala.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Zuzuapan, Purpus 2391, 1907 (Y). Valley

of Cordova, Borgeau 1738, 1866 (G). Oaxaca, E. W. Nelson 2400 & 2471,

1895; Conzattti & Gonzalez 620, 1897 (G). Orizaba, A. Gray, 1885 (G).

Guatemala, Sutton Hayes, 1860 (G).

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 193

, 21. Ipomea invicta sp. nov.

A stout, woody twining vine; stems, petioles and peduncles minutely pubescent:

leaf-blades ovate, cordate, acute or abruptly acuminate, 8-14 cm. long, glabrous

above, pubescent beneath, principal veins about 6 pairs; petioles shorter than the

blades; peduncles 6-10 cm. long, 2-3-flowered; bracts oblong-spatulate, 1-2.5 em.

long; pedicels 5-8 mm. long; sepals unequal, elliptical-oblong, acute or acuminate,

2.5-3 em. long, often tinged with red above; corolla broadly funnelform, about 6 cm.

long, blue, glabrous, white below on the plicae and tube, the tube 1.5-2 em. thick.

Mexico: Jalisco; Vicinity of San Sebasian, 3850-5000 ft. alt. E. W.

Nelson 4087, 1897 (type, sheet No. 327167 —N).

. 22. Ipomea lambii Fernald, Bot. Gaz. 20: 535. 1895.

Stems slender, covered with reflexed, tuberculate hairs; leaf-blades ovate,

acuminate, 7-15 cm. long, often 3-lobed or subhastate, strongly pubescent beneath;

peduncles 5-10 cm. long, 2—4-flowered; bracts elliptical-ovate, 2-2.5 cm. long;

sepals ovate-lanceolate, 1.5-2 em. long; corolla 7-9 cm. long, rose-purple.

Tyrer Locatity: Near Zopelote, Tepic, Mexico.

DistripuTion: Western Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Lamb 556, 1895 (type——G, Y, N).

. 23. TIpomea hirtiflora Mart. & Gal. Bull. Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 264.

1845.— House, Muhlenbergia 3: 38. 1907.

Stout, twining, perennial; stems densely pilose with reflexed brownish hairs;

leaf-blades orbicular-ovate, entire or 3-lobed, acute, densely appressed pubescent

above, silky beneath, 6-12 cm. long, deeply cordate; peduncles 12-20 ecm. long,

several-flowered; bracts ovate-lanceolate, 2-2.5 cm. long; sepals narrowly lanceolate,

acuminate, pilose, 16-22 mm. long; corolla purple, slender, about 5 cm. long and 3

em. broad, pilose without on the plice and tube.

TYPE LocaLity: Woods, Chinantla, Mexico.

DistriBuTION: Southern Mexico and Guatemala.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Near Jacaltenango, Guatemala, KE. W. Nelson

3579, 1895, 3500-5400 ft. alt. (N).

, 24. Ipomeea ruber (Vahl) Millsp. Field Col. Mus. Bot. 2:86. 1900.

Convolvulus ruber Vahl, Eclog. Am. 2: 12. 1798.

Ipomea setifera Poir. Encye. 6: 16. 1804.— Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 359. 1845.—

Hallier f. in Bot. Jahrb. 18: 143. 1893.

I. brevifolia G. F. W. Mey. Fl. Esseq. 100. 1818.

C. setifera Spreng. Syst. 1: 606. 1825.

Calystegia setifera Meissn.; Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 316. 1869.

I. lestert Baker, in Kew Bull. 83. 1892.

Ipomea assumptionis Britt. Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 7: 170. 1893.

194 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

TypPE Locatity: America meridionali.

DisTRIBUTION: West Indies, tropical South America and Africa.

Iuuustrations: Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: pl. 101. f. 2.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Jamaica, Muillspaugh 946, 1899. Porto Rico,

Sintents 963, 1885; Heller 376, 1899; 6364, 1903; Mullspaugh 146, 1899;

Brition & Cowell 1392, 1906. Guadeloupe: Duss 2474, 1892. Martinique;

Duss 480. Allin herb. N. Y. Bot. Garden.

Urban describes the form with pale yellow flowers as Ipomaa ruber var.

albo-flavida (Sym. Ant. 3: 345. 1902).

Ipomea ruber var. palustris Urban, |. c. is described as having 1-flowered

peduncles; bracts 6 mm. long, ovate; sepals prominently wing-keeled,

crenulate; corolla 2.5-3 cm. long and leaf-blades elongated. Both are

natives of Porto Rico, but the last variety is perhaps nearer the next.

25. Ipomea fimbriosepala Choisy, in DC. Prodr. 9: 359. 1845.—

Hallier f. Bull. Soc. Bot. Belg. 37:97. 1898.

Aniseia hastata Meissn.; Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 319. 1869.

Ipomea smithit Baker, Kew Bull. 73. 1894.

TypE Locatity: Madagascar.

DistrisuTion: Tropical Africa, Pacific Islands and America. Reported

from Guatemala, Brazil and Paraguay by Hallier; but no specimens from

North America have been seen by the writer.

5. Heterophylle. Trailing or twining from thickened, tuberous,

woody roots; more or less pubescent; leaf-blades deeply 3- to 5-lobed or

subentire; flowers usually solitary on short peduncles; bracts small; sepals

very unequal, the outer ones usually with broad, ovate bases, the inner

narrower, the outer ones frequently truncate or subcordate, sometimes

enlarged in fruit; corolla purple, funnelform: ovary 3-celled. (Phar-

bitvs Choisy, in part.)

Sepals merely acute, not attenuate.

Leaf-blades deeply 3- to 5-lobed; sepals ovate, 20 mm.

< 12 mm.; corolla 8-9 cm. long. 26. I. laeta.

Leaf-blades hastate and subentire; sepals 10 mm. long;

corolla less than 5 cm. long. 27. I. oreophila.

Sepals with attenuate tips.

Outer sepals linear-lanceolate without conspicuously

broadened bases; corolla 6-8 cm. long. 28. I. lindheimert.

Outer sepals with conspicuously broadened bases.

Appressed sericeous-pubescent; corolla 6-9 cm. long. 29. I. heterophylla.

Loosely pubescent with hispid, whitish pili, only the

leaves loosely sericeous-pubescent; corolla 3-4 cm.

long. 30. I. pubescens.

SSS et Se ee

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMGA 195

/ 26. Ipomoea leta A. Gray, Proc. Amer. Acad. 22: 439. 1887.

Stems densely and softly pubescent; leaf-blades suborbicular, 3-5 cm. long,

deeply 3-lobed, deeply cordate, lobes contracted below and the blade sometimes

sub-5-lobed; peduncles about as long as the petioles; sepals oblong-ovate, acute,

hirsute, rounded at the broad base, 2 cm. long; corolla 9-10 cm. long, pubescent

without, pink-purple.

TYPE LocaALity: Rio Blanco, Jalisco, Mexico.

DistrisuTION: Trailing among grasses and low plants. Jalisco.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Palmer 341, 1886 (type —G, N, C). Hills near

Guadalajara. Pringle 4456, 1893 (G, N, C).

27. Ipomea oreophila sp. nov.

Low and feebly twining, about 1 m. long from a woody root; stems and foliage

glabrous or minutely pubescent; leaf-blades ovate-hastate or triangular-ovate,

entire except for the spreading basal auricles which are 1-2-lobed or toothed; blades

3-5 em. long, 2-4 cm. wide; peduncles slightly longer than the petioles; pedicels

less than 1 cm. long; outer sepals similar to the leaf-blades in shape, pubescent,

subherbaceous, triangular-ovate, hastate or subcordate, acute, 10-12 mm. long;

corolla funnelform, 6 cm. long, the limb blue, the tube white below.

Mexico: Hidalgo; Rocky hills, Lena Station, 8300 ft. alt. Pringle

10034, 24 Aug., 1905 (type —G, Y). Chiapas; Near San Cristobal, E. W.

Nelson 3149, 1895 (233090 -—N, G). Valley of Mexico; Mt. Zocoalco,

Guadeloupe, Borgeau 728 & 797, 1866 (G).

28. Ipomeea lindheimeri A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 21: 210. 1878.

Ipomea heterophylla Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 149. 1859. Not I. heterophylla Ortega.

1800.

Pharbitis lindheimeri Small, Fl. Southeastern U. S. 964. 1903.

Foliage finely but densely appressed pubescent; leaf-blades deeply 3- to 5-lobed,

the middle lobe with a contracted basal portion longer than the expanded part,

lateral lobes similar; sepals linear-lanceolate, 2-2.5 em. long; corolla 6-9 cm. long.

Typr tocatity: Valley of the Rio Grande, below Donana.

Distrisution: Hills and prairies, Texas to New Mexico, and northern

Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Western Texas; Wright 508, 990; Schott, 1851;

Jermy 185; Harvard, 1881; F. Tweedy 170; Reverchon 654; Comache

Spring, Lindheimer 1031, 1851; Heller 1776; Bray 18; Earle & Tracy 150;

Stanfield, 1896. New Mexico: Wright 1618. Coahuila; Palmer 906, 1880.

Chihuahua; Pringle 1339, 1887; Townsend & Barber 220, 1899.

196 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Ipomea lindheimeri subintegra var. nov.

Leaf-blades entire or angled, shallowly cordate, acuminate, 1-4 cm. long; sepals

ovate-lanceolate, 16-18 mm. long, 4-8 mm. broad; corolla 6-7 cm. long.

Arizona: Near Ft. Huachuca, Lemmon 2835, 1882 (type—G).

29. Ipomea heterophylla Orteg. Hort. Matr. iLige. 1:9. 1800.— Willd.

Enum. Hort. Berol. 1: 207. 1809.1

Ipomea ortege Poir. Encye. Suppl. 4: 633. 1816.

Ipomea willdenowit Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 211. 1819.

Convolvulus heterophyllus Spreng. Syst. 1: 592. 1825.

Batatas heterophylla G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 261. 1838.

Batatas willdenowit G. Don, 1. e¢.

Convolvulus willdenowit Steud. Nom. ed. 2.1: 412. 1841.

Pharbitis heterophylla Choisy, in DC. Prodr. 9: 344. 1845.

Foliage appressed sericeous-pubescent; leaf-blades deeply 3- to 5-lobed; sepals

with ovate or suborbicular densely hirsute bases and long attenuate tips, 20-24 mm.

long, 10-15 mm. wide, enlarged in fruit; corolla 5-6 cm. long, the tube fully 10 mm.

thick at the top of the calyx.

TYPE LocaLity: Mexico.

Distripution: Dry places, northern Mexico to western Texas.

ILLustraTIoNs: Jacq. Fragm. 37. pl. 42. 7. 4.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: San Luis Potosi, Schaffner 426 & 619(Y). Chi-

huahua; E. W. Nelson 6159 & 6284, 1899 (N).

Ipomea heterophylla emula var. nov.

Sepals ovate-lanceolate, 20-25 mm. long, 6-8 mm. broad; corolla large, the tube

4 mm. thick at the base, 6-7 mm. thick above the calyx, subsalverform, the limb

6-7 cm. broad.

Curmuanua: Hills near Guerrero, Pringle 1339, 1887 (type —G, Y, N).

Ipomea heterophylla subcomosa var. nov.

Stems and foliage very densely appressed sericeous-pubescent; peduncles 1-2

cm. long; outer sepals 15-18 mm. long at flowering time, 8-10 mm. broad at the

truncate base, becoming twice as long and a half broader in fruit, the tips attenuate,

tinged with red; corolla 6-7 cm. long, the tube only 2-3 mm. thick above the calyx,

the limb 5 cm. broad.

Duraneo, Palmer 590, 1896 (type—N, G, Y).

1 Ipomea heterophylla R. Br. 1810. = Ipomcea polymorpha Roem. & Schult. 1819.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 197

+ 30. Ipomca pubescens Lam. Tabl. Encyc. 1: 265. 1891.— Encye.

6:15. 1804.— Meissn. in Mart. FI. Bras. 7: 224. 1869.

Convolvuloides pilosa Moench, Meth. 452. 1794.

Ipomea Papiriu & subtriloba Ruiz. & Pav. Fl. Peruv. 2: 11. 1799.

Ipomea varia Roth, Catal. 2: 17. 1800.

Convolvulus pubescens Willd. Enum. Hort. Berol. 1: 203. 1809.

Convolvulus Papiria Spreng. Syst. 1: 592. 1825.

Batatas Papirin & subtriloba G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 261. 1838.

Pharbitis varia, G. Don, 1. ec. 263.

Pharbitis pubescens Choisy, in DC. Prodr. 9: 344. 1845.

Stems retrorsely hispid and pubescent with long whitish pili; leaf-blades similar

to the preceding but more hispid-pubescent; sepals narrowly ovate, acuminate,

15-18 mm. long, 7-8 mm. broad at the rounded or subcordate base, becoming 20 by

18 mm. in fruit; corolla 3-4.5 em. long, the tube white, 7-8 mm. thick above the

calyx, the purple 5-angled limb 2.5-5 cm. broad.

Type LocaLity: America (Lam.); Prov. Tarma, Peru (Ruiz. & Pav.).

DistRIBUTION: Stony hills, western Texas and Mexico to Peru and

Bolivia.

IuLusTRaTIons: Ruiz. & Pav.l.c. pl. 120. f. a.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Western Texas; C. Wright 509 (G). Mexico:

Dr. J. Gregg 389, 1848-49 (G). Queretaro; Pringle 7194, 1896 (G).

Rose, Painter & Rose 9541, 1905 (N). Durango; E. W. Nelson 4638,

4747 & 4962, 1898 (N). ‘Hidalgo; Purpus 1393, 1905 (N, Y). Rose,

Painter & Rose 8354, 1905 (N). Valley of Mexico; Rose, Painter & Rose

9541, 1905 (N, Y).

The above cited specimens are identical with Rusby’s 1988, 1885, from

near La Paz, Bolivia, which agrees in all particulars with the descriptions of

Lamark and of Ruiz & Pavon.

“ 6. Hederacee. Annuals or perennials, rarely with tuberous roots;

stems and foliage usually pubescent or hirsute; peduncles usually several

or many flowered; sepals equal or nearly so, broadest at or near the base,

usually densely hispid and acute to acuminate or attenuate-caudate; corolla

blue or white; ovary 3-celled or sometimes 5-celled.

Sepals acute, 8-15 mm. long.

Stems prostrate; ovary 5-celled; leaf-blades hastate-

cordate or lobed; root tuberous. 31. I. decasperma.

Stems twining; ovary 3-celled, leaf-blades ovate.

Stems and leaves hirsute to glabrate.

Leaf-blades usually entire; corolla 4—6 cm. long. 32. I. purpurea.

Leaf-blades usually 3-lobed; corolla 2.5-3 cm. long. 33. I. hirsutula.

Stems and leaves densely and softly tomentose. 34. I. jamaicensis.

Sepals attenuate or caudate-attenuate.

rts

198 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Leaf-blades canescent, silvery or silky-white beneath at

least when young.

Sepals pilose; leaf-blades silvery-canescent beneath. 35. I. mutabilis.

Sepals glabrous or nearly so; leaf-blades silky-pubes-

cent, glabrate above with age. 36. TI. villosa.

Leaf-blades hispid-pubescent to glabrate.

Tips of sepals caudate-spatulate, obtuse; corolla white. 37. I. ampullacea.

Tips of sepals caudate-acuminate; corolla blue.

Foliage pubescent or hirsute.

Sepals glabrous; 25-30 mm. long; leaf-blades

hastately 5-7 lobed and cordate-hastate. 38. I. thurbert.

Sepals pubescent or hispid.

Leaf-blades entire, silky-pubescent. 39. I. barbigera.

Leaf-blades 3-5-lobed or angled; hispid-pubes-

cent.

Tips of sepals linear-attenuate, hirsute or

hispid at the base.

Bases of the sepals conspicuously broad-

ened; lobes of the leaf-blades con-

tracted below; corolla 2.5-3 cm. long.

Sepals densely hirsute; tips strongly

spreading. 40. I. hederacea.

Sepals sparingly barbate with whit-

ish hairs, tips not strongly spread-

ing. 41. I. desertorum.

Bases of the sepals not conspicuously

broadened, linear-lanceolate; lobes of

the leaf-blades rarely contracted be-

low; corolla 3-6 cm. long. 42. I. Nil.

Tips of sepals merely long-acuminate, erect,

slightly pubescent.

Bracts 4-8 mm. long; sepals puberulent

or sparingly pubescent. 43. I. vahliana.

Bracts 12-20 mm.long; sepals appressed

pubescent with silvery hairs. 44, I, Learit.

Foliage and stems nearly glabrous or finely ap-

pressed-pubescent; sepals glabrous or nearly so,

veined and merely acuminate, 16-20 mm. long. 45. I. cathartica.

31. Ipomea decasperma Hallier f. Bull. Herb. Boiss. 5: pl. 14. 386.

1897.

Trailing from a large woody root; finely pubescent; leaf-blades orbicular-reni-

form, cordate-hastate, 2-4 em. broad or sometimes 3- to 5-lobed; peduncles 1- to

3-flowered; sepals ovate, acuminate, 10-12 mm. long, hirsute; corolla purple, 5-6

em. long; capsules globose, 10 mm. in diameter, 5-celled, 5- to 10-seeded, 5-valved.

TyPE Locatity: Valley of Mexico.

Distripution: Rocky hillsides, central Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Near Durnago, Palmer 591 & 592, 1896 (N,Y,G).

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 199

32. Tpomea purpurea (L.) Lam. Illus. 1: 466. 1791.— Roth, Catal.

27. 1797.— Britton, Manual 752. 1901.

Convolvulus calycibus tuberculatus pilosis, Vind. Cliff. 18— Hort. Ups. 38.—

Gronov. Virg. 141.— Roy. Lugdb. 428.

C. purpureus, folio subrotundo, Bauh. Pin, 295.— Ehret. Pict. 7. 7. 2.

C. folio cordato glabro, Dill. Elth. 100.

C. caeruleus minor, folio subrotundo, Dill. Elth. 97.

Convolvulus purpureus L. Sp. Pl. ed. 2, 219. 1762.

Convolvulus mutabilis Salisb. Prodr. 123. 1796.

Ipomea discolor Jacq. Hort. Schoenb. 3: 6. 1798.

Ipomea glandulifera Ruiz. & Pav. Fl. Peruv. 2: 12. 1799.

Ipomea hispida Zuccagni, in Roem. Coll. 127. 1806.

Ipomea intermedia Schult. Obs. Bot. 37. 1809.

Convolvulus eriocaulos Willd.; Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 301. 1819.

Convolvulus intermedius Roem. & Schult. 1. c. 264.

Ipomea Zuccagnit Roem. & Schult. 1. c. 230.

Pharbitis hispida Choisy, in Mém. Soc. Phys. Genév. 6: 440. 1833.—In DC. Prodr.

9:341. 1845.

Convolvulus Schultesii Roem. & Schult.; Steud. Nom. ed. 2,1: 411. 1841.

Pharbitis purpurea Voigt. Hort. Suburb. Cale. 354. 1845.— Small, 1. c. 964.

Type LocaLity: America.

DistrisuTion: Thickets and waste places throughout tropical America.

Cultivated and a frequent escape northward to Ontario and Nova Scotia.

Intustrations: Dill. Elth. pl. 84. 7. 97. Jacq. Hort. Schoenb. pl. 261.

Ruiz. & Pav. Fl. Peruv. pl. 121. 7. a. Bot. Mag. pls. 118, 1005 & 1682.

Weinmann, Phytanth. 2: pls. 414 & 415. Britt. & Brown, Illus. Fl. 3:

j. 2949. Bailey, Cyclop. Am. Hort. 7. 1167. Knorr. Thes. Hort. pls.

187 & 189.

33. Ipomeea hirsutula Jacq. f. Eclog. 1: 63. 1811-16.

Convolvulus flore purpureo, calyce punctato, Dill. Elth. 99.

Convolvulus hederaceus var. y. L. Sp. Pl. 154. 1753. Ed. 2, 219. 1762. in

part, as to the Dillenian citation above.

?Ipomea punctata Pers. Syn. 1: 184. 1805. (excl. habitat).

Pharbitis diversijolia Lindl. Bot. Reg. 33: pl. 1988. 1837.

Pharbitis punctata G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 263. 1838.

P. Nil var. diversifolia Choisy, in DC. Prodr. 9: 343. 1845.

Ipomea affinis Mart. & Gal. in Bull. Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 263. 1845.

Pharbitis cathartica Hook. Bot. Mag. pl. 4289. 1847. Not P. cathartica Choisy,

1845.

Ipomea mexicana A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2': 210. 1878.

Convolvulus hederaceus Sesse & Moc. Fl. Nov. Hisp. in La Naturaleza II. 1: 22, 1887.—

Fl. Mex. 1. c. I. in. 2: append. 21. 18938.

Ipomea hirta Th. Dur. in Bull. Acad. Bot. Belg. II. 27: 175. 1888.

200 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

TYPE LocaLity: Mexico.

DistrisuTion: Western Texas to Arizona, Central America and prob-

ably in South America.

Intustrations: Dill. Elth. pl. 83. 7. 96. Jacq. f. Eclog. 1: pl. 44.

Hook. Bot. Mag. pl. 4289. Bot. Reg. pl. 1988.

Specimens examined from ‘Texas, New Mexico, Arizona; Sonora,

Jalisco, Chihuahua, Durango, Valley of Mexico, Aguas Calientes, Quere-

taro, Oaxaca, Mechoacan and Guatemala.

34. Ipomea jamaicensis (Spreng.) G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 278. 1838.

— Meissn. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 225. 1869.

Convolvulus folio lanato, etc. Sloan. Jam. 55.— Hist. 1: 154.

Convolvulus tomentosus L. Sp. Pl. 156. 1753.

2C. roseus Mill. Dict. No. 18. 1768.

C. jamaicensis Spreng. Syst. 1: 595. 1825. Not C. jamazcensis Jacq. 1768.

Pharbitis tomentosa Choisy, in DC. Prodr. 9: 342. 1845.

Pharbitis jamaicensis Gib. Enum. Pl. Montev. 28. 1873.

Ipomea tomentosa Urb. Sym. Ant. 3: 344. 1902. Not J. tomentosa Choisy, 1845.

TYPE Locality: Jamaica.

DIsTRIBUTION: Jamaica to tropical South America.

Intustrations: Sloan. Hist. pl. 98. 7. 2. Pluk. Alm. pl. 167. 7. 4.

Meissn. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: pl. 77.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Jamaica: Great Goat Isl., Harris 9212, 1906

(¥):

35. Ipomea mutabilis Lindl. Bot. Reg. 1:39. 1815.

Convolvulus mutabilis Spreng. Syst. 1: 593. 1825. Not C. mutabilis Salisb. 1797.

Pharbitis mutabilis Bo}. Hort. Maurit. 227. 1837.

Pharbitis dealbata Mart. & Gal. in Bull. Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 272. 1845.

Ipomea dealbata Hemsley, Biol. Cent.-Am. Bot. 2: 386. 1882.

Ipomea Learti Meissn. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 224. 1869. Not J. Learit Paxton,

1839.

Stems densely and softly pubescent; leaf-blades orbicular-ovate, entire or 3-

lobed, 6-15 cm. long, appressed-pubescent above, silvery-canescent beneath; sepals

linear-lanceolate, 10-15 mm. long, appressed silky-pilose; corolla 7-8 cm. long,

blue with a white tube.

Type Locatity: Near Vera Cruz, Mexico.

DisrrisuTion: Wooded slopes and mountain forests, Tamaulipas to

Vera Cruz, Orizaba and Oaxaca to Brazil.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 201

IntusTRaTIONS: Bot. Reg. pl. 39.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Tamaulipas; Victoria, Palmer 201, 1907 (N, Y);

Orizaba; Karwinsky 590, & 591, 1841-42 (Y). Miiller 581 & 905, 1855

(C). Bottert 469 & 586 (Y, G); Borgeau 2212 & 2814, 1866 (G); Seaton

36 & 449, 1891. Vera Cruz; Jalapa, Chas. L. Smith 1791, 1894 (G).

Oaxaca; Tentila, Rev. Lucius C. Smith 657, 1895 (G).

36. Ipomea villosa Ruiz. & Pav. Fl. Peruv.2: 12. 1799'.— Griseb.

Fl. Br. W. Ind. 473. 1864— Lefroy in Jones & Goode, Nat.

Hist. Bermuda 90. 1884.

Ipomea congesta R. Br. Prodr. 1: 485. 1810.

Convolvulus congestus Spreng. Syst. 1: 601. 1825.

Convolvulus Ruizit Spreng. 1. c. 594.

Pharbitis wnsularis Choisy in Mém. Soc. Phys. Genév. 6: 439. 1833.—In DC.

Prodr. 9: 341. 1845.

Ipomea insularis Choisy; Steud. Nom. ed. 2,1: 817. 1841.

Pharbitis rosea Choisy, in DC. Prodr. 9: 342. 1845.

TYPE LOCALITY: Peru.

DistripuTion: Thickets near the sea shore, circumtropical and chiefly

insular.

Intustrations: Ruiz. & Pav. 1. c. pl.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Bermuda; Kemp, 1885; Harshberger, 1905,

Brown & Britton 156, 1905. Socorro Id. (Pacific), Barkelew 245 (in part),

1903. Clarion Id. A. W. Anthony 403, 1897. Reported from Trinidad

by Grisebach.

37. Ipomea ampullacea Fernald, Proc. Am. Acad. 33:89. 1897.

Stems woody below from a tuberous root, retrorsely hispid; leaf-blades entire

or 3-lobed; sepals pubescent, 2.5-4 cm. long, ovate below, acuminate and becoming

spatulate-attenuate with age; corolla white, 6 cm. long, pubescent without.

Type LocaLity: Near Acapulco, Mexico.

DistriputTion: Known only from the type locality.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Acapulco, Palmer 483, 1894-95 (type — G, Y, N).

38. Ipomeea thurberi A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2': 212. 1878—In

Proc. Am. Acad. 19:90. 1883.

Stems hispid or glabrate from an elongated, tuberous root; leaf-blades cordate-

hastate, 2-4 cm. long, the spreading basal lobes acute and often bifid or the blades

Y 1Ipome@a comosa nom. nov.

Batatas villosa Choisy, in DC. Prod. 9: 337. 1845.

Ipomea villosa Meissn. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 244,1869. NotI. villosaR.&P. 1799. Brazil.

202 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

3-5-lobed, pubescent above; sepals glabrous 2.5-3 cm. long, acuminate; corolla

white with a pink or purplish limb.

TypE LocaLity: Southeastern border of Arizona, near Santa Cruz.

DISTRIBUTION: Southern Arizona and Sonora.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Thurber 966, 1857 (type—G); C. Wright,

1851 (G). Tanner’s Canon, near Ft. Huachuca, Lemmon 2838, 1882

(G,N). Wialeox 356 & 425, 1894 (N).

39. Ipomea barbigera Sweet, Brit. Fl. Gard. 1: pl. 86. 1823.

Pharbitis barbigera G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 262. 1838.

Ipomea hederacea var. integrifolia Hallier f. in Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss. Anstalt. 16: 42.

1898.

Convolvulus caeruleus minor, folio subrotundo, Dill. Hort. Elth. 97. and therefore

C. hederaceus B, L. Sp. Pl. 154. 1753. and Ipomea purpurea B, Roem. & Schult.

Syst. 4: 232. 1819.

Leaf-blades orbicular-ovate, entire or deeply 3-lobed, thick-textured, ciliate,

densely appressed hirsute with silky hairs above; sepals densely hirsute, 15-25 mm.

long with spreading, ciliolate tips; corolla 3-3.5 em. long, deep-blue with purple

rays and a white tube.

Type Locality: Mississippi (Dill.).

DistRipuTion: Sandy fields and thickets, Georgia and Florida to

Alabama and Mississippi and Louisiana.

Inuustrations: Dill. Hort. Elth. pl. 82. 7.94. Sweet, 1. ¢.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Georgia; Cuthbert, 1900. Pollard & Mazon

438, 1900 (N). Florida; Eustis, Nash 2482, 1895 (Y). Jacksonville,

Curtiss 6529, 1899 (N, Y). ‘Tallahassee, Berg (Y). Mississippi; Schue-

bert, 1896 (Y). Louisiana; Vicinity of Alexandria, C. R. Ball 597, 1899

(N, Y, G).

40. Ipomeea hederacea (L.) Jacq. Collect. 1: 124. 1786.— Britton,

e(a2:

Convolvulus calycibus tuberculatis pilosis, L. Virid. Cliff. 18— Hort. Ups. 38.—

Gronov. Virg. 141.— Roy. Lugdb. 428.

Convolvulus Virginianus elegans, incanis foliis tripartito divisis, flore amena

purpureo, Pluk. Phytogr. 3: pl. 451. f. 7. 1692.

Convolvulus caeruleus, hederaceo folio, magis anguloso, Dill. Hort. Elth. 1: 96.

1732.

Convolvulus hederaceus y L. Sp. Pl. 154. 1753. Spreng. Syst. 1: 593. 1825.

Convolvulus Nil L. Sp. Pl. ed. 2, 219. 1762 (in part as to the above Dillenian cita-

tion),— Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 189. 1803.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 203

Convolvulus hederefolius Salisb. Prodr. 123. 1796.

Ipomea scabra Forsk. Fl. Aegypt.--Arab. 44. 1775.

Ipomea barbata Roth. Catal. 1: 37. 1797.

Ipomea nil Pers. Syn. 1: 184. 1805.—— Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 1: 146. 1814. Not

I. nil Roth, 1797.

Ipomea avicularis Raf. Fl. Ludov. 47, 1817.

Ipomea scabrida Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 223. 1819.

Ipomea phymatodes Spreng. Nov. Prov. 24. 1819.

Ipomea cerulea Koen. in Roxb. Fl. Ind. 2: 91. 1824,

Cleiemera hederacea Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 77. 1838.

Pharbitis hederacea Choisy in Mém. Soc. Phys. Genéy. 6: 440. 1833—In DC.

Prodr. 9: 344. 1845.— Small, 1. ce. 964.

Pharbitis varitfolia Decne. Nouv. Ann. Mus. Par. 3: 390. 1834.

Pharbitis forskalit, barbata, purshii & scabrida G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 263. 1838.

Pharbitis cerulescens Sweet, Hort. Brit. ed. 3, 482. 1839.

Tyrer Locaity: Virginia, Carolina (Dill.).

DisrripuTion: Dry or sandy soil, fields and thickets, Virginia to Kansas,

Texas, Florida and tropical America. Adventive northward to Connecticut,

central New York, Ontario and Illinois.

Intustrations: Dill. Hort. Elth. pl. 80. 7. 92. Bot. Mag. pl. 188.

Plukn. Phytogr. 1. c. Bot. Reg. pls. 85 & 276. Britton & Brown, Illus.

Fl. 3: 7. 2950. Jacq. Ic. Rar. 1: pl. 36. Knorr. Thes. Hort. pl. 190.

, Al. Ipomeea desertorum sp. nov.

Closely related to the preceding; pale-green; stems scabrous and sparsely

pilose with loosely reflexed hairs; leaf-blades 3-lobed, lobes rarely contracted below,

usually triangular-lanceolate and acuminate, appressed-hirsute above, stiffly hirsute

beneath and on the petioles; peduncles 1-few flowered; bracts filiform, 4-6 mm.

long; sepals linear-lanceolate, 18-26 mm. long, tips scarcely spreading, margin ciliate

and base not conspicuously broadened, sparingly barbate with stiff, whitish hairs

arising from conspicuously white prominent papillie; corolla 3 cm. long, blue with

a white tube; seeds finely rough-pubescent.

Arizona: Tuscon, Thornber 29, 1903 (type—Y). New Mexico:

Florida Mts., Muljord 1088, 1895 (Y). Sonora: Guaymas, Palmer 296,

1887 (N, Y,G). St. Magdalena, Schott, 1851 (C). Canon de los Guerryos,

C. E. Lloyd (Lumholtz Exped.) 432, 1894 (G). CHrauanuA: South-

western part, Palmer 105, 1885 (N, G).

42. Ipomea nil (L. in part) Roth, Catal. Bot. 1: 36. 1797.— Hallier

f. in Jahrb. Hamb. Wissensch. Anst. 15: 44. 1898; 16: 42.

1898.— Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belg. 37:94. 1898.

Convolvulus ceruleus major, jolio hederaceo, Dill. Hort. Elth. 97.

C. annuus, folio cordatis rarius trilobis, calycibus tuberculato pilosis, L. Hort. Cliff.

67.

204 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Convolvulus hederaceus L. Sp. Pl. ed. 2, 219. 1762, in part as to f. 93 of Dillenius,

Convolvulus nil L. Sp. Pl. ed. 2, 219. 1762 (in part).

C. dillenit Desr. in Lam. Encye. 3: 544. 1789.

Convolvuloides triloba Moench, Meth. 451. 1794.

Ipomea cuspidata Ruiz. & Pav. Fl. Pereuv. 2: II. 1799.

Ipomea dillenii Roem. & Schult. 1. ¢. 227.

Convolvulus peruvianus Spreng. Syst. 1: 593. 1825.

Pharbitis nil Choisy in Mém. Soc. Phys. Genév. 6: 440. 1833.— In DC. Prodr. 9:

342. 1845.

P. cuspidata G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 270. 1838. Choisy, 1. c.

P. speciosa Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 343. 1845.

P. nil var. limbata Hook. f. Bot. Mag. pl. 5720.

I. trichocalyx Steud. Nom. Ed. 2, 1: 819. 1841.

I. longicuspis Meissn. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 227. 1869.

I. hederacea Baker & Rendle, in T. Dyer, Fl. Trop. Afr. 47: 159. 1905.

Usually larger than J. hederacea; lobes of the leaf-blades rarely contracted below,

middle lobe usually dilated at the base; sepals linear-lanceolate, not dilated at base,

20-30 mm. long, 3-4 mm. broad, densely hispid; corolla 4.5-6 cm. long.

Type Locauity: Africa.

DisTRIBUTION: Circumtropical. In America; Florida, Bermudas,

West Indies, Mexico and Central America to Paraguay and Peru.

IntustrATions: Dill. Elth. pl. 81 7. 93. Bot. Mag. pl. 5720. Bentley

& Trin. Med. pl. 185. Ruiz. & Pav. Fl. Peruv. 2: pl. 119 7. a.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Florida; Marco, Hitchcock 227, 1900. Jack-

sonville, Curtiss 5281, 1894; 5800, 1896. Jamaica; Harris 9155, 1906 (Y).

St. Thomas; Eggers, 1887 (Y). St. Croix; Ricksecker 187, 1896 (Y).

Martinique; Duss 431 & 1231, 1884 (Y). Guadeloupe; Duss 2475, 1893

(Y). Guatemala; J. Donnell Smith (legit Heyde & Luz.) 4732, 1889 (G).

Nicaragua; Chas. L. Smith, 1893 (G). Costa Rica; J. Donnell Smith

(legit Tonduz 9864) 7090, 1896 (G). Nicoya, Tonduz 13678, 1900 (Y).

43. Ipomea vahliana nom. nov.

Convolvulus acuminatus Vahl, Symb. Bot. 3: 26. 1794.

Ipomea acuminata Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 228. 1819. Meissn. 1. c¢. 226.—

Griseb. 1. c. 473. Not I. acuminata Ruiz. & Pav. 1799.

Ipomea punctata Macf. in Hook. Bot. Mise. 2: 116. 1831. Not I. punctata Pers.

1805.

Ipomea nil Gardn. in Hook. Journ. Bot. 1: 180. 1842. Not I. nil Roth, 1797.

Pharbitis acuminata Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 348. 1845.

Leaf-blades ovate, entire or 3-lobed, lobes rarely contracted below; sepals

elongated, linear-lanceolate, 15-30 mm. long, sparingly pilose, tips appressed to the

corolla-tube; corolla 5.5-7 cm. long.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMGA 205

TYPE Locality: St. Croix.

DistrizuTion: Thickets near the coast, West Indies and the gulf region

of Mexico, Central America to Brazil.

Ittustrations: Bot. Reg. pl. 39. Meissn.; Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: pl. 78.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Cuba; C. Wright 1647, 1859 (G).

44. Ipomeea learii Paxton, Bot. Mag. 6: 267. 1839.

Pharbitis learti Hook. Bot. Mag. pl. 3928, 1841.— Lindl. Bot. Reg. pl. 56. 1841.—

Choisy in DC, Prodr. 9: 343. 1845.— Fletcher in Bailey’s Cyclop. Am. Hort.

819. 1900.

Closely resembling I. vahliana, and perhaps identical; stems finely pubescent

and tomentulose; leaf-blades glabrous above, finely pubescent beneath with pale

hairs; peduncles capitately 3- to 9-flowered; bracts linear, 12-20 mm. long; sepals

linear-lanceolate, 18-22 mm. long, minutely pubescent with appressed silvery hairs;

corolla 5-6 cm. long, blue, turning rosy in age, the tube white below.

TYPE LocALITY: Said to come from Ceylon by Paxton, but Lindley (1.c.)

says that to be a mistake. The species is common in cultivation, and only

the following herbarium specimens can be referred here.

Guatemala; C. C. Deam 316, 1905 (G). Costa Rica: Pittier 16277,

1902 (G).

45. Ipomea cathartica Poir. Encyc. Suppl. 4: 633. 1816.— Griseb.

Fl. Br. W. Ind. 473. 1861.

Convolvulus africanus Nicolson, Hist. Nat. St. Dom. 260. 1776.

Convolvulus pudibundus Lindl. Bot. Reg. pl. 999. 1826.

Ipomea pudibunda G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 276. 1838.

Pharbitis cathartica Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 342. 1845.

Ipomea fastigiata Chapm, Fl. Southern States 344. 1860. Not J. fastigiata Sweet.

Glabrous or nearly so; leaf-blades entire to deeply 3-lobed; sepals glabrous or

nearly so, lanceolate, attenuate, 15-20 mm. long, appressed to the corolla-tube, 5- to

7-nerved at the base; corolla sometimes white.

Tyre LocaLity: St. Domingo.

DistrisuTion: Thickets in sandy or calcarious soil, peninsular Florida,

Bermudas, Bahamas and West Indies, gulf region of Mexico, Central and

tropical South America.

7. Cissoides.

One species: Corolla small, white. 46. I. cissoides.

206 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

46. Ipomea cissoides (Lam.) Griseb. Fl. Br. W. Ind. 473. 1861.4

Convolvulus cissoides Lam. Tabl. Encye. 1: 462. 1791.— Vahl, Eclog. Am. 2: 15.

1798.

Convolvulus calycinus H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 109. 1819.

Convolvulus orinocensis Willd.; Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 303. 1819.

Batatas cissovdes Choisy in Mém. Soc. Phys. Genév. 6: 437. 1833.— in DC. Prodr,

9: 339. 1845.

Merremia cissoides Hallier f. Bot. Jahrb. 16: 552. 1893.

Rough-pubescent and hirsute; leaflets 5, sessile or stalked, lanceolate, or ovate-

lanceolate, acute at the base, obtuse or acute at the apex, repand-dentate, 2-5 cm.

long; outer sepals ovate at the base, 8-15 mm. long; corolla white, 3 em. long or

less.

TYPE LocaLity: Cayenne.

DISTRIBUTION: Cuba and southern Mexico to Colombia and Brazil.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Cuba; Wright 3084 (G); Curtiss 378, 1904

(G, Y); Wilson 1224 & 3639, 1904 (Y); Mexico: Acapulco, Palmer 143,

1895 (Y, N). Guatemala; Heyde & Lua. 4355, 1892 (Y).

Ipomeea cissoides guadaloupensis (Steud.).

Convolvulus pilosus Wikstr. in Vet. Acad. Handl. Stock. 1827: 60. 1828.

Convolvulus guadaloupensis Steud. Nom. Ed. 2, 409, 1841.

Batatas cissoides ver. integrifolia Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 339. 1845.

Leaflets usually larger, entire, acuminate, less pubescent but the stem strongly

pilose; corolla larger.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Cuba; Combs 680, 1896 (Y-G, in part).

8. Tyrianthine. Twinning, perennial or annual vines, usually with

pubescent foliage and sepals. Ovary 2-celled, 4-seeded; seeds glabrous.

Leaf-blades cordate-hastate, the basal lobes rounded,

laterally acute.

Sepals 12-18 mm. long or less.

Sepals 2mm. wide X 10-12 mm. long, with lax

tips; corolla 2-3 cm. long. 47, I. tostemma.

Sepals 3-5 mm. wide X 14-18 mm. long; corolla

5-6 cm. long. 48. I. variabilis.

Sepals 20-30 mm. long; corolla 2-3 cm. long. 49. I. portoricensis.

Leaf-blades not hastate at the base.

Corolla 2-3 em. long; sepals hispid; lobes of the leaf-

blades lanceolate. 50. J. barbatisepala.

Corolla 5-8 cm. long; sepals pubescent or tentacular.

Sepals densely tentacular, 18-20 mm. long. 51. I. silvicola.

1B. D. Jackson, Journ. Bot. 30: 547. 1892, on the dates of Grisebach’s Flora,

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 207

Sepals not tentacular.

Corolla glabrous, tube 1-1.5 cm. thick,

Sepals acute or subobtuse; plant more or less

densely pubescent. 52. I. longipedunculata.

Sepals long-acuminate, plant sparingly pubes-

cent. 53. I. orizabensis.

Corolla pubescent without, the tube 1.5-2.5 cm.

thick.

Sepals about 12 mm. long; leaf-blades stri-

gose-pubescent beneath. 54. I. tyrianthina.

Sepals 22-30 mm. long; leaf-blades silvery-

pubescent beneath. 55. I. venusta.

47. Ipomea iostemma sp. nov.

Slender, annual, twining, herbaceous, 1-2 m. long or less; stems very slender,

sparingly hirsute; leaf-blades ovate and entire to hastate-ovate or 3-lobed, cordate,

acuminate, 2-5 em. long, 1.5-4 em. wide, pubescent with scattered, inconspicuous

hispidulous hairs, lateral lobes acute and short, middle lobe elongated; petioles

shorter than the blades; peduncles shorter than the petioles and stouter, usually

1-flowered; bracts linear, 8-10 mm. long; sepals linear, 10-12 mm. long and 1-2 mm.

broad at the base, the lax tips caudate-acuminate, glabrous; corolla 2-3 cm. long,

the violet-purple limb shading into white below.

Costa Rica: Nicoya, Tonduz 13680, Jan. 1900 (type— Y). Mexico:

Ixtapa, Jalisco, E. W. Nelson 4141, 1897 (N).

48. Ipomea variabilis (Schlecht. & Cham.) Choisy in DC. Prodr.

9: 383. 1845.

Convolvulus variabilis Schlecht. & Cham. in Linnaea 5: 116. 1830.— Hallier f.

Bull. Herb. Boiss. 7: 411. 1899.

A twining annual, glabrous except for the calyx; leaf-blades ovate-lanceolate,

acute or acuminate, 5-8 em. long, entire or usually cordate-hastate, the basal lobes

laterally acute; peduncles shorter than the petioles, hirsute at the base, 1-2 em.

long, 3- to 5-flowered; bracts linear-lanceolate; sepals broadly lanceolate or ovate-

lanceolate, 12-15 cm. long, hirsute with spreading hairs at the base, glabrous above;

corolla blue (or purple), 5-6 cm. long, the limb as broad with 5, rounded lobes;

tube white, plice purple or rose; capsules 8-10 mm. thick; seeds smooth.

TYPE LocALITY: Vera Cruz.

DISTRIBUTION: Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Vera Cruz, Miiller 119, 1853 (C, Y). (Hallier,

l. c. cites Seler 2532, 3410, from Guatemala.)

208 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

, 49. Ipomea portoricensis (Spreng.) G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 278. 1838.

Convolvulus portoricensis Spreng. Syst. 1: 595. 1825.

?Convolvulus meyeri Spreng. |. c. 597.

Ipomea meyert G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 275. 1838.— Hallier f. Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss.

Anstalt. 16: 43. 1898.

Ipomea brachypoda Benth. Bot. Voy. Sulphur 135. 1844.

Ipomea decurtata Hallier f. Bot. Jahrb. 16: 495. 1893.

Similar in habit and leaf-blades to the two preceding; peduncles 1-3 cm. long,

2- to 10-flowered; sepals linear-lanceolate, 2-3 cm. long, 4-6 mm. broad, hirsute,

attenuate; corolla 2.5-3 em. long, blue; capsules 1 em. thick.

TypE LOCALITY: Porto Rico.

DISTRIBUTION: West Indies, southern Mexico to Panama and Guiana.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Cuba; Wright 451, 1856-7 (G). Jamaica;

Marsh (G); Harris 6931, 1897 (Y). Porto Rico; Sintenis 828, 1885 (Y);

Heller 6225, 1902 (Y). Panama; Cowell 49 & 291,1905 (Y). Santa Marta,

Colombia, Herbert H. Smith 1573 & 1574, 1899 (Y).

50. Ipomea barbatisepala A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2': 212. 1878.

Tyrer LocaLity: Declivity of mountain near El Paso, Texas.

DistriputTion: Dry or rocky hillsides, western Texas to Arizona and

Oaxaca.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Texas; C. Wright 507, 1849 (type—G);

Pringle 68, 1884 (G). Arizona; Lemmon 444, 1881 (G); Griffiths 2032,

1900 (N); Thornber 76, 1903 (Y). Oaxaca; Conzattz & Gonzalez 6973,

1897; 1094, 1900 (G— cf. Greenm. Proc. Am. Acad. 39: 84. 1903).

51. Ipomea silvicola House, Bot. Gaz. 43: 411. 7. 4. 1907.

More or less densely pubescent; leaf-blades ovate, entire or 3-lobed, appressed

sericeous-pubescent above, more densely so beneath; peduncles 1- to 3-flowered;

sepals unequal, lanceolate, acuminate, 18-28 mm. long, appressed-pubescent and

densely tentacular below; corolla 6-7 cm. long, glabrous.

TYPE LocALITY: Rio de Las Canas, Guatemala.

DisTRIBUTION: Forests of southern Mexico to Panama.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Mexico: Chiapas, E. W. Nelson 3253 & 3419,

1895 (N). Guatemala; John Donnell Smith (legit Heyde & Lux.) 4022,

1892 (type—N, C). Panama; Sutton Hayes, July 1860 (G).

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMGA 209

52. Ipomea longipedunculata (Mart. & Gal.) Hemsley, Biol. Cent.- |

Am. Bot. 2: 389. 1882.

Pharbitis longipedunculata Mart. & Gal. in Bull. Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 271. 1845.

Stems reflexed hispid to nearly glabrate; leaf-blades orbicular-ovate, 6-10 cm.

long, acute or acuminate, entire or rarely 3-lobed, deeply cordate, densely pubescent

above and ciliate; peduncles usually elongated, 8-20 cm. long, hirsute, 1- to 5-flow-

ered; pedicels 1-4 cm. long; sepals subequal, oblong-lanceolate, the outer ones

usually obtuse, the inner acute, 12-15 mm. long, hirsute, the inner ones with scarious

margins; corolla rose-purple, 6-8 cm. long, glabrous.

Type Locality: “Crescit in Mexico, in Sylvis El Sabino prope Ixmi-

quilpan.”’

DistriBuTion: Thickets and forests, San Luis Potosi to Guatemala.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: San Luis Potosi, Palmer 45, 1902 (N, Y, G).

Vera Cruz: Orizaba, Miiller 242 & 1567, 1855 (C); Seaton 256, 1891 (C,

G); Pringle 7053, 1895 (G). Morelos; Purpus 1755, 1905 (Y, G). Rose

& Hay 5665, 1901 (N, G). Mexico; Borgeau 498, 1856 (G), 1738, 1866

(Y). Pringle 6452, 1896 (G, N, C), Urbina, 1881 (M); Altamirano, 1888

(M). Oaxaca; E. W. Nelson 1184, 1894 (N); Conzatts & Gonzalez 143

& 473, 1895 (G); Pringle 5665, 1894 (G), 8432, 1900 (G, Y, N). Jalisco;

Palmer 335, 1886 (N, C, G), Pringle 4448, 1893 (G, N, C).

Guatemala; San Miguel Uspantam, Quiche, John Donnell Smith

(legit Heyde & Lux.) 3189, 1892 (G).

y 53. Tpomea orizabensis (Pelletan) Ledenois; Steud. Nom. ed. 2, 818.

1841.

Ipomea batatoides Benth. Pl. Hartw. 46. 1840. Not I. batatoides Choisy, 1837.

Convolvulus orizabensis Pelletan, in Jour. de Chemie Médicale, de Pharmacie et de

Toxicologie 10: 1. 1834.

Ipomea mestitlanica Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 389. 1845.

Root tuberous; stems glabrous or finely pubescent; leaf-blades ovate, shallowly

cordate, 3-lobed or entire, 7-10 cm. long, acuminate, lateral lobes not spreading;

peduncles 1- to 5-flowered; sepals lanceolate, thin, smooth, subequal, acuminate,

10-15 mm. long; corolla 7-8 cm. long, the purplish-blue limb shading into white

below.

Tyre Ltocauity: Near Orizaba, Mexico.

DistriBuTION: Dry or stony places, northern Mexico to Oaxaca.

IniustraTions: Bot. Reg. pl. 36.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Nuevo Leon; near Monterey, Pringle 8737,

1903 (G, N, Y). Oaxaca; Cerro de San Felipe, Conzatti & Gonzalez 447,

1897 (G). Valley of Oaxaca, E. W. Nelson 1159, 1894 (N, G).

210 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

54. Ipomea tyrianthina Lindl. Bot. Reg. Misc. 87. 1832.— Choisy

in DC. Prodr. 9: 375. 1845.

?Convolvulus serotinus DC. Cat. Hort. Monsp. 97. 1813.

?Ipomea serotina Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 215. 1819.

Convolvulus sanguineus Willd.; Roem. & Schult. 1. ¢. 302.

Convolvulus superbus H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 103. 1819.

Ipomea superba G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 275. 1838. Not I. superba Ledeb. 1822,

or Schrank, 1828.

Pharbitis tyrianthina Hook. Bot. Mag. 69: pl. 4024. 1843.

Pharbitis serotina Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 341. 1845. —

Resembling I. longipedunculata, but usually more hipid-pubescent; sepals oblong,

hispid, acutish, subequal, 12-15 mm. long; corolla campanulate-funnelform, 6-7

em. long, the tube 2-3 em. thick, pubescent without.

Typrr Locality: Between Aguasarco and Volcan Jorullo, Michoacan,

Mexico (H. B. K.).

DistTRiBuTION: Mountain Forests, southern Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Guerrero; Near Chilpancingo, 9000-10200 ft.

alt. E. W. Nelson 2161, 1894 (G, N).

55. Ipomea venusta (Mart. & Gal.) Hemsley, Biol. Cent.-Am. Bot.

2: 385. 1882.

Calonyction venustum Mart. & Gal. in Bull. Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 269. 1845.— Walp.

Rep. 6: 531. 1846-47.

Stout, perennial, woody below; stems velvety pubescent and tomentose; leaf-

blades orbicular-ovate, 10-20 cm. long, shallowly cordate, acute, entire or slightly

3-lobed, appressed-pubescent above, silvery-canescent beneath; sepals oblong-lanceo-

late, acute or obtuse, 22-30 mm. long, silky-tomentose without; corolla campanu-

late-funnelform, 8-9 em. long, the tube about 2 cm. thick, hirsute without on the

plice and tube.

Type Locality: Province of Tobasco, Mexico.

DiIsTRIBUTION: Southern Mexico and Central America.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Puebla; Huatusco, Conzatti 850, 1898 (G).

Guatemala: Chiapas, Santa Rosa, J. Donnell Smith (legit Heyde & Luz)

4850, 1892 (G, C).

Section III. BATATAS.

9. Erpipomea. Creeping or prostrate, annual or perennial vines;

roots sometimes tuberous, or stems rooting at the nodes; leaf-blades entire

or lobed.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 211

Stems rooting at the nodes.

Leaf-blades entire or toothed.

Leaf-blades broadly sagittate, the basal auricles blunt

or toothed. 56. I. reptans.

Leaf-blades not sagittate or hastate.

Leaf-blades broadly ovate, cordate, acute. 57. I. asarijolia.

Leaf-blades suborbicular, obcordate or emarginate

at the apex, not cordate. 58. I. pes-capre.

Leaf-blades variously lobed or oblong-lanceolate, not cor-

date; corolla cream-colored. 59. I. stolenijera.

Stems prostrate, but not rooting at the nodes.

Corolla white or purple only at the base.

Leaf-blades 3- to 9-toothed. 60. I. schaffneri.

Leaf-blades not toothed, entire and strongly reticu-

late-veined beneath. 61. I. hartwegii.

Corolla blue or purple or only the tube white.

Peduncles usually exceeding the leaves; blades triangu-

lar-ovate and hastate, sinuately toothed at the base,

pubescent. 62. I. ignava.

Peduncles very short; leaf-blades deltoid-reniform to

triangular-ovate, angled or toothed, nearly or quite

glabrous. 63. I. eximia.

56. Ipomcea reptans (L.) Poir. Encye. Suppl. 3: 460. 1813.— Choisy

in DC. Prodr. 9: 349. 1845.

Olus-vagum, Rumph. Amb. 5: 419. pl. 155. 7. I.

Ballel, Rheed. Mal. 11: 107. pl. 52.

Convolvulus reptans L. Sp. Pl. 158. 1753.

Convulvolus repens Desr. in Lam. Encyc. 3: 547. 1789.— Vahl, Symb. Bot. 1: 17.

1790.— Willd. Sp. Pl. 1: 874. 1798 (excl. syn. L, and Gronov.) — Roxb.

Fl. Ind. 2: 68. 1824. Not C. repens L. 1753.

Convolvulus adansonii Desr. 1. ce. 560.

Ipomea aquatica Forsk. Fl. Aegypt.-Arab. 44. 1775 Lam. Illus. 1: 467. 1791.

—Encye. 6: 18. 1804.

Ipomea repens Roth; Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 244. 1819.— Roth, Nov. Pl. Sp.

4110; 1821.

Ipomea clappertont R. Br. in Denh. & Clapp. Trav. Append. 240. 1826.

Ipomea subdentata Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. 2: 614. 1856.

Fleshy and glabrous; leaf-blades ovate-lanceolate or triangular, sagittate or

subhastate, 3-8 em. long, basal auricles obtuse, acute or toothed; corolla white

tinged with magenta below, about 4 cm. long.

TYPE LOCALITY: India.

DIsTRIBUTION: Wet shores, circumtropical.

IntustraTions: Naves; Blanco, Fl. Fillip. pl. 149.

212 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Cuba; Combs 656, 1895 (Y); Curtiss 685, 1905

(Y); Britton, Britton & Shafer 505, 1903 (Y). Guadeloupe; Duss 3502,

1894-95 (Y).

57. Ipomea asarifolia (Desr.) Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 251. 1819.

Convolvulus asarifolius Desr. in Lam. Encye. 3: 562. 1789.

Ipomea beladambe Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 233. 1819.

Convolvulus flagellijormis Roxb. Fl. Ind. 2: 68. 1824.

Amphione asarifolia Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 79. 1838.

Ipomea flagellijormis Steud. Nom. Ed. 2, 816. 1841.

Ipomea urbica Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 349. 1845.

Ipomea latifolia Mart. & Gal. in Bull. Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 266. 1845.

Ipomea nympheefolia Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 203. 1866. Not I. nymphiejolia Blume,

1826.

Ipomea grisebachw Prain, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 63: 107. 1894.

Ipomea vogelii Baker in Kew Bull. 71. 1894.

Ipomea repens Baker & Rendle in Dyer, Fl. Trop. Afr. 4’: 172. 1905. (excl. syn.)

Not I. repens Roth, 1819.

Leaf-blades orbicular-ovate, 10 em. broad or broader, cordate, acute, entire;

peduncles 1- to 5-flowered; sepals unequal, 8-10 mm. long, obtuse, corolla 6-8 cm.

long, purple.

TypEe LocaLity: Senegal, Africa.

DISTRIBUTION: Sandy fields and shores, tropical Africa, Asia, West

Indies and gulf coast of Mexico.

Intustrations: Wight, Il. pl. 887.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Cuba; Wright 3089 (C), Shajer 527, 1903 (Y);

Britton & Wilson 359, 1903 (Y); Wulson 1167, 1904 (Y). Isle of Pines,

Curtiss 219, 1903-04 (Y). Jamaica; Harris 9826, 1907 (Y). Mexico:

Chiapas, Caec. & Ed. Seler 1802, 1896 (G).

58. Ipomeea pes-capre (L.) Roth, Noy. Sp. Pl. 109. 1821.

Convolvulus marinus seu Soldanella, Piso & Marcgraf. Hist. Nat. Braz. 1: 51.

1648.

C. foliis subrotundis apice emarginatis basi integris, Roy. Lugdb. 428.

C. maritimus zeylandicus, folio crasso cordiformi, Herm. Lugdb. 174.

Schoranna Adamboe, Rheed. Mal. 11: 117.

C. marinus catharticus, folio retundo, flore purpureo, Plum. Am. 89.

Convolvulus pes-capre L. Sp. Pl. 159. 1753.

Convolvulus brasiliensis L. 1. ce.

Ipomea biloba Forsk. Fl. Aegypt.-Arab. 44. 1775.

Convolvulus maritimus Desr. in Lam. Encye. 3: 550. 1789.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 213

Convolvulus bauhiniejolius Salisb. Prodr. 125. 1796.

Ipomea crassifolia Pers. Syn. 1: 184. 1805.

Ipomea maritima R. Br. Prodr. 486. 1810.

Convolvulus capripes Stokes, Bot. Mat. Med. 1: 327. 1812.

Ipomea orbicularis Ell. Bot. S.C. & Ga. 1: 257. 1817.

Ipomea brasiliensis G. F. W. Mey. Prim. Fl. Esseq. 97. 1818.

Convolvulus bilobatus Roxb. Fl. Ind. 2: 73. 1824.

Convolvulus retusus Colla, App. Hort. Ripul. 3: 31. 1825.

Convolvulus rotundifolius Schum. & Thonn. Beskr. Guin. Pl. 102. 1827.

Ipomea rotundifolia G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 265. 1838.

Plesiagopus savona Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 265. 1838.

Bonanox orbiculata Raf. 1. ¢. 77.

Latrienda brasiliensis Raf. 1. ce. 81.

Ipomea bilobata G. Don; Sweet. Hort. Brit. ed. 3, 483. 1839.

Ipomea halophila Poepp.; Steud. Nom. ed. 2,1: 817. 1841.

Ipomea egopoda St. Lag, in Ann. Soc. Bot. Lyon 7: 70. 1880.

Quemoclit pes-capre Maza, Fl. Habana 346. 1897.

Type LocaLity: India.

DisTRIBUTION: Sandy beaches and shores, circumtropical. In America,

from Georgia and Florida to Paraguay and throughout the West Indies.

IntustraTions: Herm. Lugdb. pl. 175. Plum. Am. pl. 104. Rheed.

Mal. 11: pl. 57. Rumph. Amb. 5: pl. 159. 7.1. Bot. Reg. pl. 319. Vell.

Fl. Flum. 2: pl. 62. Naves in Blanco, FI. Fillip. ed. 3, pl. 29.

59. Ipomeea stolonifera (Cyrill.) Poir. in Lam. Encyc. 6: 20. 1804.

Baker & Rendle in Dyer, Fl. Trop. Afr. 47: 171. 1905.

Convolvulus albus, folio lacinato, maritimus, Plum. Cat. 1. 1703.

Convolvulus foliis obtusis, palmato-lobatis, ete. Plum. Am. 79.

Convolvulus littoralis L. Syst. ed. 10, 924. 1759.

Convolvulus stolonijerous Cyrill, Pl. Rar. fase. 1: 14. 1788.

Convolvulus dianthus J. F. Gmel. Syst. 343. 1791.

Convolvulus acetosefolius Vahl, Eclog. Am. 1: 18. 1796.

Ipomea carnosa R. Br. Prodr. 485. 1810.

Ipomea acetosejolia Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 247. 1819.

Convolvulus auritus Roem. & Schult. 1. ¢. 301.

Convolvulus incurvus Schumach. & Thonn. Beskr. Guin. Pl. 99, 1827.

Ipomea incurva G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 266. 1838.

Ipomea humilis G. Don, 1. e— Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 390. 1845.

Convolvulus obtusilobus Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 139. 1803.

Batatas acetosefolia Choisy in Conv. Rar. 124. 1837.— In DC. Prodr. 9: 338. 1845.

Latrienda imperati Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 81. 1838.

Ipomea Deppeana G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 276. 1838.

Convolvulus sinuatus Petagne; Steud. Nom. ed. 2,1: 411. 1841.

Ipomeea littoralis Boiss. Fl. Orient. 4: 112. 1879.— Hallier f. Bot. Jahrb. 18: 144.

1894. Not I. littoralis Blume, 1826.

214 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Ipomea imparati.Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 203. 1866.

Batatas littoralis Choisy, in DC. Prodr. 9: 338. 1845.

Ipomea sinuata Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 442. 1891.

Batatas incurva Benth. in Hook. Niger Fl. 467. 1849.

TypE Locatity: Antilles.

DisTRIBUTION: Sandy soil and shores, circumtropical. In America,

from South Carolina and Florida to South America and West Indies.

InLustratTions: Plum. Am. pl. 90. f. 2. Cyrill, Pl. Rar. fase. 1: pl. 5.

Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: pl. 94.

60. Ipomeea schafineri S. Wats. in Proc. Am. Acad. 18: 123. 1882-83.

Stems puberulent; leaf-blades orbicular, deeply cordate, acute, 3-4 em. broad,

unequally and sinuately dentate near the base; sepals equal, ovate, acute, 8 mm.

long, 4-5 mm. broad, pubescent.

Type LtocaLity: Near San Luis Potosi, Mexico.

DistrisuTion: Arid plains and thickets, northern Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Schaffner 621, 1876 (type—G, N).

61. Ipomea hartwegii Benth. Pl. Hartw. 15. 1839.— Choisy in DC.

Prodr. 9: 376. 1845.

Stems finely pubescent, herbaceous, 50-100 cm. long; leaf-blades ovate, deeply

cordate, entire, acute, 2-3 cm. long; petioles about as long and 2-glanded at the

_apex; peduncles 4-6 cm. long, 1—2-flowered; sepals somewhat unequal, narrowly

ovate, obtuse or rounded at the apex, puberulent, dark-colored with pale scarious

margins, 7-9 mm. long; corolla 6-7 cm. long, white.

TYPE Locality: Mexico.

DisTRIBUTION: Stony or dry thickets, central Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hartweg 96 (dupl. type—G). Michoacan,

Dr. Nicolas Leon, 1885 (M). Queretaro; San Juan del Rio, Pringle

10028, 1905 (G, Y, N). Between Hacienda Ciervo and Cadereyta, Rose,

Painter & Rose 9704, 1905 (Y, N).

62. Ipomea ignava sp. nov.

Stems trailing from a perennial, tuberous root; pubescent, slender; leaf-blades

triangular-ovate or triangular-hastate, 1-6 cm. long and as broad, obtuse, sinuately

toothed toward the base, basal auricles 5-15 mm. long, appressed-hirsute or glabrate

above, pubescent beneath, on the petioles and at the base of the peduncles; peduncles

slender, often exceeding the leaves, 1-flowered; pedicel 5-10 mm. long; sepals very

unequal, oblong-lanceolate, outer ones 4-5 mm. long, obtuse and muricate, inner

5-7 mm. long and rounded; corolla slender-funnelform, 5-7 cm. long, blue, the

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 215

white tube constricted just above the calyx, limb 5-lobed, 4-6 em. broad; capsules

globose, 1 cm. or less thick, 2-celled, 4-seeded; seeds glabrous.

Mexico: Oaxaca; Las Sedas to La Carbonera, Conzatti & Gonzalez

261, 1897 (type—-G); La Carbonera, 7200 ft. alt, 804, 1895 (G).

63. Ipomea eximia House, Muhlenbergia 3: 44. pl. 2 7. d. 1907.

Similar to the preceding species, nearly or quite glabrous; leaf-blades deltoid-

reniform or triangular-ovate, 2-2.5 cm. broad, cordate, obtuse, the margin angled

or toothed, sparingly hirsute above, finely so on the veins beneath and on the margin;

peduncles 2 cm. long or less, 1- to 3-flowered; sepals very unequal, outer‘ones and

the pedicels muricate, oblong-lanceolate, blunt, 5-8 mm. long; corolla very slenderly

funnelform, deep rose-purple, 4-5 cm. long, the abruptly expanded limb subentire,

3.5-4 em. broad.

TYPE LocALITy: Orizaba, Mexico.

DistRIBUTION: Vicinity of Orizaba.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Orizaba Miiller, 1855 (type—C, N).

10. Dactylophylle. Stout, twining, perennial vines, the stems woody

below; leaf-blades divided into 3 to 9, sessile or stalked leaflets; flowers

solitary or usually in irregular corymbose clusters; sepals coriaceous or

leathery, obtuse, rarely acute; corolla tube constricted within or just above

the calyx; capsules thick-walled, ovoid, acute, usually apiculate, 2-celled,

4-seeded; the ovary supported by a prominent culpiform disk.

Cotladena Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 12. 1838.

Modesta Raf.1. c. 75. (in part).

Leaflets three; sepals unequal. 64. I. ternaia.

Corolla white; sepals 10-15 mm. long.

Corolla red; sepals 8-10 mm. long. 65. I. lineolata.

Leaflets five to seven.

Sepals 6-7 mm. long.

Leaflets linear to linear-lanceolate, acute at both

ends.

Leaflets linear or oblinear and revolute. 66. I. fawcetti.

Leaflets linear-lanceolate, acuminate at both

ends, not revolute. 67. I. dactylophylla.

Leaflets lanceolate to ovate-lanceolate.

Leaflets oblanceolate, obtuse. 68. I. carolina.

Leaflets acuminate. 69. I. furcyensis.

Sepals 9-10 mm. long or longer.

Capsules scarcely exceeding the calyx.

Stamens exserted; sepals equal. 70. I. horsfallie.

Stamens included; sepals unequal. 71. I. rubella.

Capsules twice as long as the calyx; corolla scarlet

or purple, 72. I. plumieriana.

216 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

64. Ipomea ternata Jacq. Hort. Schoenb. 1: 16. pl. 37. 1797.—

Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 361. 1845.

Convolvulus ternatus Spreng. Syst. 1: 590. 1825.

Batatas ternata G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 262. 1838.

Ipomea thomsoniana Mast. in Gard. Chron. 2: 818. 1883.

Leaflets oblong-ovate or elliptical-ovate, stalked, acute or obtuse at the ends,

broadest near the middle, thick and firm, becoming subchartaceous; peduncles

usually 1-flowered; sepals 10-15 mm. long, ovate, rounded; corolla dull-white with

cream-colored rays, 5-6 cm. long.

TYPE LOCALITY: Jamaica.

DistTRIBUTION: Forests of Jamaica, and cultivated in other West Indian

islands.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Jamaica; Harris 7410, 1898; 9005, 1905 (Y).

65. Ipomea lineolata Urb. Symb. Ant. 3: 355. 1903.

Lateral nerves of the leaflets at an angle of about 60° and about 10-12 pairs,

lineolate-anastomosing close to the margin; leaflets subpellucid, pale beneath, 5-6

em. long, cuspidate-acuminate; peduncles 2-3-flowered; corolla red, the disk pink.

TYPE LOCALITY: Jamaica.

DIstTrRIBUTION: Forests of Jamaica.

v¥ 66. Ipomea fawcettii Urban, sp. nov.

Slender, several m. long, from a perennial root, glabrous; leaf-blades divided

into 5-7, spatulate filiform or narrowly linear leaflets 1-3 cm. long, revolute with

age, obtuse; petioles short; flowers solitary or clustered on short leafy branches;

pedicels 5-12 mm. long; sepals unequal, broadly oblong, rounded or obtuse, 4-6

mm. long, the inner ones longer and thinner than the outer; corolla subsalverform

3-4.5 em. long, tube pale green, limb pale lilac, about 1.5-2 cm. broad with rounded,

obtuse lobes; capsules ovoid, longer than the calyx, 2-celled; 4-seeded; seeds with

a very long coma of light-brown hairs.

JAMAICA: Road to Wareka, Harris 8605, 1904 (Y); 10010, Nov. 19,

1907 (type—Y).

67. Ipomea dactylophylla Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 203. 1866.

Slender, glabrous or minutely puberulent; leaf-blades with 5, sessile, linear-

lanceolate, entire leaflets, 3-5 em. long, acuminate, abruptly acute at the base; ped-

uncles shorter than the petioles, 1-flowered, 8-12 mm. long, the pedicel about as

long; sepals equal, oblong-lanceolate, acute, 5-7 mm. long; corolla about 4 cm.

long, the crimson limb 2.5-3 em. broad.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 217

Type Locauity: Eastern Cuba.

DIsTRIBUTION: Thickets, eastern Cuba.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: C. Wright 3093 (co-type—G). Pinar del Rio,

Palmer & Riley 332, 1900 (N).

68. Ipomea carolina L. Sp. Pl. 160. 1753. Not J. carolina Pursh,

1814.

Convolvulus minor pentaphyllus, flore purpureo minore, Catesb. Car. 2: 9. pl. 91.

Ipomea caroliniana Poir. Encyc. Suppl. 6: 11. 1816.

Ipomea heptaphylla Griseb. Mem. Am. Acad. 8: 527. 1863. Not I. heptaphylla

Rottb. & Willd. 1803.

Quamoclit heptaphylla Maza, Fl. Habanera 346. 1897.

Leaflets 5 to 7, subspatulate, substalked, 3-8 em. long, tapering to the base,

apex rounded or obtuse; peduncles shorter than the petioles, 2- to 10-flowered;

sepals subequal, elliptical to ovate, rounded or obtuse, thin, 6-8 mm. long; corolla

3-4.5 cm. long, tubular-funnelform, the limb 5-lobed, 2-3 em. broad, tube greenish

below; capsules oblong.

TyPprE LocaLity: Carolina, Bahamas (L.); Cuba (Griseb.).

DistriBuTION: Bahamas and Cuba.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Cuba; ‘“‘prope villam Monte Verde & Nouvelle

Sophie,” C. Wright 1371, 1859 (G, Y). Calicita, Combs 509, 1895 (G);

Matanzas, Britton & Wilson 41, 1903 (Y); Cayamos, Earle & Baker 2459,

1904 (Y); Santiago, Underwood & Earle 1674, 1903 (Y); Sagua, Britton

& Wilson 381, 1903 (Y). Bahamas: New Providence, Britton & Brace

180, 1904 (Y). Andros, Northrop 569, 1890 (Y); Brace 4950, 1906 (Y).

* 69. Ipomeea furcyensis Urb. Symb. Ant. 3:351. 1902.

Leaflets 2-5 em. long, 5-10 mm. wide, tapering to the base, the apex acuminate,

membranaceous or chartaceous with age; peduncles 3-6 em. long, 3- to 7-flowered;

sepals about 10 mm. long, tinged with red, 3.5-4.5 mm. wide, the inner a little

broader and longer, obtuse; corolla 5-6 em. long, slightly constricted below the limb.

Type Locality: Furcy mountains, Hayti.

DistriputTion: Mountains of Hayti.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: La Brande to Mt. Balance, Nash & Taylor

1739, 1905 (Y).

* 70. Ipomeea horsfallie W. Hook. in Bot. Mag. 61: pl. 3315. 1824.

— Urb. Sym. Ant. 3: 352. 1902.

Ipomea pendula Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 387. 1845. NotI. pendulaR. Br. 1810.

Convolvulus horsfallie D. Dietr. Syn. Pl. 1: 664. 1839.

Coiladena hyemalis Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 12. 1838.

218 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

A woody twiner, several m. high; leaflets 5 or 7, obovate or oblanceolate, acumi-

nate at the base, the apex abruptly acuminate, subchartaceous; peduncles 4-12 em.

long; pedicels 15-25 mm. long; sepals rubescent, 10-12 mm. long; corolla light

purple or rose, 5-6 em. long, narrowly funnelform, the 5-lobed limb about 4 cm.

broad; stamens exserted, 30-40 mm. long.

Type Locality: Porto Rico.

DistTRIBUTION: Porto Rico, Virgin Islands, Guadeloupe and Martinique.

Common in cultivation.

InLusTRATIONS: Bot. Mag. pl. 3315. Paxt. Bot. Mag. 3: pl. 50.

Knowl. & Weste. Fl. Cab. 1: pl. 29. Maund. Bot. 1: pl. 31.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Martinique; Duss 1882 & 3086, 1895 (Y).

71. Ipomea rubella House, Bot. Gaz. 43: 414. 1907.

Ipomea pulchella W. Hook. in Bot. Mag. 73: pl. 4305. 1847. Not I. pulchella

Roth, 1821. .

Ipomea macrorrhiza Griseb. Fl. Br. W. Ind. 471. 1861.— Mast. in Gard. Chron.

New Ser. 23: 566. 1885. Not I. macrorrhiza R. & S. 1819.

Ipomea grisebachit Urb. Sym. Ant. 3: 353. 1903. Not I. grisebaehii Prain, 1894.

Leaflets 5, or rarely 3, stalked, obovate or obovate-lanceolate, 6-12 cm. long,

tapering to the base, the apex short-acuminate, subcoriaceous; peduncles many-

flowered; sepals green, tinged with red on the margins and apex, oval or ovate, the

inner obovate, 9-11 mm. long, obtuse; corolla pale rose-colored, 6-6.5 em. long;

capsules 10-12 mm. long.

Type Locality: Manchester, Jamaica.

DIsTRIBUTION: Forests of Jamaica.

SPECIMEN EXAMINED: Jamaica, Marsh (G). Harris 8651, 8727, 1904

(Y); Britton 536, 1906 (Y); Underwood 3410, 1906 (Y).

72. Ipomea plumieriana House, Bot. Gaz. 43: 413. 1907.

Convolvulus coccineus heptaphyllus, radice crassissima, Plum. Cat. 1. 1703 — Plum.

Am. 79. (excl. syn. Sloan. Browne and Pluk.)

Convolvulus macrorrhizos 1.. Syst. ed. 10, 923. 1759.—Sp. Pl. ed. 2, 223. 1762.

Ipomea macrorhizos Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 311. 1819— Choisy in DC, Prodr.

9: 388. 1845.— Urb. Sym. Ant. 3: 352. 1902. Not I. macrorrhiza Michx.

1803.

Batatas macrorrhiza G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 261. 1838.

Leaflets 7- (rarely 5-, 6- or 8-) stalked, elliptical-oblong or lanceolate, 5-10 cm.

long, acuminate at the base, apex abruptly acuminate, membranaceous or charta-

ceous; peduncles 1-6 cm. long, several flowered, sepals suborbicular, the inner

longest, 9-10 mm. long; corolla scarlet or purplish, 5-6 cm. long, the tube dilated-

campanulate and slightly contracted above; capsules twice as long as the calyx.

—— PE ae 8 gr Toa

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 219

TYPE LocaLity: America (L.); Jamaica (Plum.).

DisTRIBUTION: Forests of Jamaica, Hayti and St. Domingo.

ILLUSTRATIONS: Plum. Am. pl. 90. 7. 1.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Jamaica; Gordontown road, Harris, Jan. 7,

1902 (J). Barrack Hill, W. Cradwick, July 1890 (J). Port Antonio, Britton

890, 1906. (Y).

11. Setose. ‘Twining or climbing perennial vines; leaf-blades ovate,

cordate, acute, entire or 3-lobed; flowers solitary or cymose; peduncles

thickened and fleshy; sepals ovate-lanceolate or ovate, setaceous or ten-

tacular; pedicels more or less tentacular or setaceous.

Gomphius Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 75. 1838.

Petioles and often the leaves, calyces and pedicels bristly

with long, spreading setze; leaf-blades 3-lobed. 73. I. setosa.

Petioles not setaceous.

Peduncles longer than the subtending petioles; sepals

8-9 mm. long, densely tentacular. 74. I. tentaculijera.

Peduncles shorter than the petioles; sepals 11-12 mm.

long, acute, sparingly tentacular. 75. I. lozani.

73. Ipomea setosa Ker. Bot. Reg. pl. 335. 1818.

Convolvulus setosus Spreng. Syst. 1: 594. 1825.

Gomphius setosa Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 75. 1838.

Batatas setosa Lindl. Bot. Reg. Index xv. 1839.

Calonyction setosum Hallier f. Bull. Herb. Boiss. 5: 1048. 1897.

The orbicular-ovate, deeply 3-lobed leaf-blades 10-20 em. long; peduncles as

long as the petioles, 3- to 9-flowered; pedicels 25-30 mm. long, thickened and fleshy,

lactescent in fruit; sepals oblong, obtuse, 10-14 mm. long, accrescent in fruit,

densely setaceous; corolla purplish-red; 5-6 cm. long, tube cylindrical; capsules

15-20 mm. thick, 4-celled, 4-seeded.

TypE Locauity: Brazil.

DistripuTion: ‘Tropical America. Introduced with coffee seed into

’ the West Indies, Mexico and Gulf States.

Iutustrations: Bot. Reg.1].c. Bull. Herb. Boiss. 5: pl. 17, 18.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Florida; Manatee, Simpson 111, 1890 (Y).

Louisiana; Franklin, O’ Niell, 1900 (Y).

’

Ipomeea setosa campanulata (Hallier f.). comb. nov.

' Ipomea macrantha Peter, in Engl. & Prantl. Nat. Pflanzenfam. IV. 3a: 31.

1891. Not J. macrantha Roem. & Schult. 1819.

Calonyction campanulatum Hallier f. in Bull. Herb. Boiss. 5: 1050. 1897.

Sepals becoming 20-22 mm. long, the sete weak; corolla lilac, about 8 cm. long,

campanulate-funnelform, the tube constricted at the base.

220 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

TYPE LOCALITY: Vera Cruz, Mexico.

DISTRIBUTION: Mexico and Central America.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Guatemala; San Jose, Sutton Hayes, 1860 (G).

Ipomea setosa pavoni (Hallier f.). comb. noy.

Ipomea setosa Griseb. Fl. Br. W. Ind. 469. 1861.

Calonyction pavoni Hallier f. in Bull. Herb. Boiss. 5: 1048. 1897.

Similar to I. setosa, the stem clothed with weaker, hair-like sete; flowers cincin-

nial in short, axillary dichasia, long-peduncled; pedicels clavate; the outer sepals

with a few weak sete; corolla campanulate, white or pale violet-purple, the tube

conspicuouly dilated above the calyx, 5-7 cm. long.

Type LocaLity: Jamaica.

DistriBuTion: West Indies and tropical South America.

74. Ipomea tentaculifera Greenm. Proc. Am. Acad. 33: 482. 1898.

Root, tuberous and perennial; leaf-blades ovate, 8-10 cm. long, entire, acumi-

nate; peduncles 7-12 cm. long, 1-flowered; the pedicel 4-6 cm. long; sepals oblong,

obtuse or rounded, the tentacular outgrowths 7-10 mm. long; corolla violet-purple,

7-8 em. long.

TyprE LocaLity: Tomellin Canon, Oaxaca, Mexico.

DISTRIBUTION: Oaxaca, Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Pringle 6702, 1897 (type--G, Y, N).

75. Ipomea lozani Painter; House, Bot. Gaz. 43: 411. 7. 3. 1907.

Perennial from a tuberous root; leaf-blades narrowly ovate, deeply cordate-

sagittate, abruptly narrowed toward the apex, attenuate, 5-8 cm. long, the basal

lobes rounded, converging and overlapping; peduncles shorter than the petioles;

pedicel 3-4 cm. long; sepals puberulent, only slightly tentacular, oblong-lanceolate

acute; corolla purple, 6-7 cm. long, white below.

TYPE LOCALITY: San Juan del Rio, Queretaro, Mexico.

DistRIBUTION: Stony Hills, Queretaro and Tamaulipas.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Rose, Painter & Rose 9542, 1905 (type —N, Y);

Pringle 10029, 1905. ‘Tamaulipas; Between Victoria and Janmave Valley,

E. W. Nelson 4440, 1898 (N).

12. Bombycosperme. Stout, woody, perennial vines, with flowers in

dense, axillary, suberect or pendant racemes; seeds covered on all three

surfaces with long white, crinkled, wool-like hair.

Bombycospermum Presl. Reliq. Haenk. 2: 137. 1837.

One species. 76. I. bombycina.

——

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 221

76. Ipomea bombycina (Choisy) Benth. & Hook. Gen. Pl. 2: 873.

1876.

Bombycospermum mexicanum Presl. Reliq. Haenk. 2: 137. pl. 71. 1837.

Batatas bombycina Choisy, in DC. Prodr. 9: 340, 1845.

Leaf-blades ovate, acuminate, rounded or obtuse at the base, 8-10 cm. long,

glabrous above, pubescent beneath; flowering racemes 5-15 em. long, many-flowered;

pedicels about 1 cm. long; sepals ovate, 4-6 mm. long, obtuse, silky-pubescent;

corolla about 4.5 cm. long, the tube 1.5 cm. long by 3 mm. thick, the limb campanu-

late, 3 cm. long and about 1 em. thick, silky-pubescent without, purplish; capsules

1.5-2 em. high and 7-8 mm. thick.

TYPE LocaLity: Western Mexico.

DISTRIBUTION: Southwestern Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Guerrero; Tecpan, Langlasse 939, 1899 (N).

Acapulco; Palmer 370, 1894-95 (N, G).

13. Palmate. ‘Twining, annual or perennial vines, with palmately or

digitately divided leaf-blades; seeds hirsute or lanata on the dorsal angles.

Modesta Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 75. 1838 (in part).

Segments of the leaf-blade parted nearly or quite to the

petiole.

Margin of the corolla-limb crenulate. 77. I. Cavanillesii.

Margin of the corolla-limb not crenulate.

Peduncles stout, 1-9-flowered; sepals obtuse. 78. I. cairica,

Peduncles filiform, 1—2-flowered. Sepals acute,

equal; corolla violet. 79. I. pulchella.

Sepals unequal, obtuse; corolla white. 80. I. quinquefolia.

Segments of the leaf-blades parted to or but slightly be-

yond the middle.

Corolla rose-purple; plant stout, perennial from a

tuberous root. 81. I. digitata.

Corolla yellow, with a purple throat; plant slender,

annual. 82. I. flavo-purpurea,

» 77. Tpomea cavanillesii Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 214. 1819.—

Griseb. Fl. Br. W. Ind. 470. 1861.

Ipomea pentaphylla Cav. Ic. 3: 29. pl. 256. 1794. NotI. pentaphylla Jacq. 1788,

Convolvulus cavanillesti Spreng. Syst. 4: 590. 1825.

Batatas cavanillesii G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 262. 1838.

Ipomea bouvetit Duchass. & Walp. in Linnaea 23: 752. 1850,

Closely resembling I. cairica; sepals ovate or ovate-lanceolate, 6-7 mm. long,

coriaceous, glabrous or the outer ones punctate-scabrous; corolla pale rose-colored,

white below, about 5 em. long, the ovate, rounded lobes of the limb crenulate; seeds

lanate.

222 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Type tocauity: “ Colitur in R. horto Matritense, ex seminbus missis

ab Hispanio.”

DIstRIBUTION: West Indies and northern South America.

78. Ipomoea cairica (L.) Sweet, Hort. Brit. 287. 1827.

Convolvulus foliis laciniatis vel quinquefolius, Bauh. Pin. 295.

C. quinquefolius, seu foliis laciniatis, flore purpureo cerulea, Bauh. Prodr. 134.

Convolvulus egyptius Vesl. Aegypt. 73. pl. 74.

Convolvulus cairicus L. Syst. ed. 10, 922. 1759.— Sp. Pl. ed. 2, 222. 1762.

Ipomea palmata Forsk. Fl. Aegypt.-Arab. 43. 1775.— Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 386.

1845.

Ipomea senegalensis Lam. Illus. 1: 464. 1791.

Ipomea stipulacea Jacq. Hort. Schoenb. 2: 39. 1797.

Convolvulus quinquelobus Vahl, Symb. Bot. 3: 32. 1794.— Willd. Sp. Pl. 1: 863.

1798.

Convolvulus tuberculatus Desr. in Lam. Encyc. 3: 545. 1789.

Ipomea vesciculosa Beauv. Fl. d’Owar. 2: 73. 1807.

Ipomea tuberculata Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 208. 1819.

Ipomea quinqueloba Roem. & Schult. 1. c— G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 279. 1838.

Convolvulus digitatus Roxb. Fl. Ind. (ed. Carey) 1: 479. 1832.

Ipomea digitifolia Sweet, Hort. Brit. ed. 2, 372. 1830.

Ipomea heptaphylla Voigt. Hort. Suburb. Cale. 360. 1845.

Batatas senegalensis G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 261. 1838.

Stems more or less warty; leaf-segments 2-5 cm. long; sepals equal, 6-7 mm.

long, ovate-lanceolate, obtuse; corolla 5-6 cm. long, the limb slightly 5-lobed;

capsules 10-12 mm. high; seeds hairy.

Type Locality: Egypt.

DistrRIBUTION: Circumtropical. Introduced into Mexico and Florida.

InLustTRATIONS: Sloan. Jam. 1: pl. 96. 7. 2. Jacq. Hort. Schoenb.

pl. 129. Bot. Reg. pl. 96, 768. Bot. Mag. pl. 699. ‘Trans. Hort. Soc.

1: pl. 11. Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: pl. 105. Beauv. 1.c. pl. 106. Sertum Bot.

2: v-cL. 1829.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Grenada; W. E. Broadway, Dec. 16, 1904 (Y).

Florida; Waste ground, Pensacola, Curtiss 6496, 1899 (Y).

79. Ipomea pulchella Roth, Nov. Pl. Sp. 115. 1821.— Choisy, Mém.

Soc. Phys. Genév. 6: 473. 1833.— In DC. Prodr. 9: 386. 1845.

Griseb. Fl. Br. W. Ind. 470. 1861. Not I. pulchella G. Don,

1838.

Convolvulus Aegyptiacus, etc. Moris. Hist.2: 18. 1680.

Convolvulus heplaphyllus Rottl. & Willd. in Ges. Naturf. Fr. Neue Schr. 4: 196. 1803.

— Roxb. Hort. Beng. 14. 1814.— Fl. Ind. 2: 66. 1824.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 223

Convolvulus bellus Spreng. Syst. 1: 590. 1825.

Ipomea radicans Bertol.; Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 389. 1845.

Ipomea gracillima Prain, Journ, As. Soc. Beng. 63: 111. 1894.

Ipomea spirale House, Mublenbergia 3: 40. 1907.

Slender, glabrous or nearly so; leaf-segments linear-lanceolate, acute or acumi-

nate at each end, 1-3 em. long, entire or the outer ones bifid; petioles longer than

the blades or shorter; peduncles filiform, as long as the petioles or longer, frequently

twisted and tendril-like, used in climbing; pedicel 8-16 mm. long, stouter than the

peduncle; bracts minute, about 1 mm. long; sepals equal, narrowly ovate or lanceo-

late, 4-5 mm. long, becoming 6-7 mm. long in fruit; capsules 10 mm. high or less;

corolla pale violet, campanulate-funnelform, 18-30 mm. long.

Typr Ltocaity: East Indies.

DisrrisutTion: Tropics of the Old World. West Indies, Mexico to

Central America, Peru and Brazil. Introduced into Louisiana.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Porto Rico: Guanica, Sintenis 3679, 1886 (G).

Mexico; Yaqui River, Palmer 24, 1864 (N.). Louisiana: near New Orleans,

R. S. Cocks, June 1905 (Y).

80. Ipomea quinquefolia L. Sp. Pl. 162. 1753.1

Convolvulus foliis digitatis glabris, caule laevi, Roy. Lugdb. 429.

Convolvulus quinquefolius glaber americanus, Plukn. Alm. 116, pl. 167. /. 6.

Convolvulus quinquefolius L. Syst. ed. 10, 923. 1759.— Desr. in Lam. Encye. 3:

566. 1789.

Convolvulus palmatus Mill. Dict. No. 8, 1768.

Convolvulus hispaniole Spreng. Syst. 1: 590. 1825.

Convolvulus ampelopsifolius Cham. & Schlecht., in Linnaea 5: 118. 1830.

Pharbitis quinquefolia Raf. Fl. Tellur.4: 81. 1838.

Fraxima quinquefolia Raf. 1. ¢. 83.

Latrienda palmatus Raf. 1. ¢. 81.

Ipomea hispaniole G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 1838.

Batatas quinquejolia Choisy, Conv. Rar. 127. 1837.—In DC. Prodr. 9: 339. 1845.

Merremia quinquejolia Hallier f. Bot. Jahrb. 16: 552. 1893.

TYPE LocaLity: America.

DistRIBuTION: Thickets, West Indies and Mexico to Central America,

Brazil and Peru.

1 Not closely related to the African species, Ipomea quinqucfolia Hotchster, which may

well take the following name.

Ipomea hochsteri nom. nov.

Ipomea quinquefolia Hochst., Hallier f. Bot. Jahrb. 18: 147, 1894.— Native of tropical

and southern Africa, cf. Baker & Rendle in Dyer, Fl. Trop. Afr. 42: 177. 1905.

224 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

81. Ipomea digitata L. Syst. ed. 10, 924. 1759.

Quamoclit foliis digitatis, flore coccineo, Plum. Am. 81.

Pal-modecca Rheed. Mal. 11: 101.

Convolvulus paniculatus L. Sp. Pl. ed. 2, 223. 1762.— Willd. Sp. Pl. 1: 865. 1798.

Ipomea mauritiana Jacq. Hort. Schoenb. 2:39. 1797.

Ipomea paniculata R. Br. Prodr. 486. 1810.— Hallier f. Bot. Jahrb. 18: 150. 1894.

Ipomea enneloba Beauv. Fl. d’Owar. 2: 69. 1807.

Ipomea tuberosa G. F. W. Mey. Prim. Fl. Esseq. 113. 1818. Not I. tuberosa L.

1753.

Convolvulus roseus H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 108. 1819.

Ipomea quinqueloba Willd.; Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 789. 1819.

Ipomea pentaloba Roem. & Schult. 1. c. Index. 828.

Batatas paniculata Choisy in Mem. Soc. Phys. Genev. 6: 436. 1833.— In DC. Prodr.

9: 339. 1845. (excl. syn. Willd., Spreng., Andr., Bot. Reg. 75, and Bot. Mag.

1790.) :

Quamoclit digitata G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 75. 1838.

Modesta paniculata Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 260. 1838.

Modesta congesta Raf. 1. ec.

Ipomea baalan Montr. in Mem. Acad. Lyon 10: 238. 1860.

TYPE LocaLity: America.

DisrrRiBuTION: Forests and thickets at low altitudes, circumtropical.

Intustrations: Plum. Am. pl. 92. 7.1. Jacq. Hort. Schoenb. pl. 200.

Rheed. Mal. 11: pl. 49. Bot. Reg. pl. 62. Beauv. l.c. pl. 101. Naves in

Blanco FI. Fillip. ed. 3, Ic. pl. 32. Revue Hort. 1853. p. 20. Kerner,

Hort. pl. 65.

82. Ipomea flavo-purpurea Urb. Sym. Ant.3: 245. 1902.

Ipomea punctata C. Wright in Sauv. Fl. Cub. 105. 1870. Not I. punctata Mactf.

1831.

The linear-lanceolate leaf-segments minutely hispidulous and pellucid-punctate;

petioles pilose; peduncles 1-flowered; sepals sparingly pilose, ovate-oblong, subu-

late, 6-7 mm. long, corolla about 2 em. long; capsules 4-celled; seeds lanate and

pilose on the dorsal angles.

TYPE LocaLity: Cuba: “En las sabanas del potrero Manati y en Casilda

Trinidad.”

DisTRIBUTION: Cuba.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Cuba, C. Wright (without No. in Hb. Gray).

14. Jalape. Twining or trailing, mostly perennial vines with stout or

woody stems below, frequently with tuberous, woody roots; sepals leathery,

usually obtuse; corolla white, pink or purple, mostly slender-funnelform.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A

Corolla white or cream-colored or tinged with magenta

below.

Leaf-blades subtruncate, plicate, glabrous; ped-

uncles shorter than the petioles.

Leaf-blades cordate, not plicate.

Sepals about 7 mm. long.

Stems and sepals setaceous-hispid.

Stems and sepals glabrous.

Sepals 10-20 mm. long, or longer.

Foliage white-tomentulose or silvery-pubes-

cent beneath.

Corolla densely pubescent, the white-

canescent sepals 18-20 mm. long.

Corolla glabrous; sepals 12-16 mm. long.

Foliage glabrous or pubescent, not silvery.

Sepals aristate; capsules ovoid, apiculate.

Sepals blunt or obtuse.

Calyx 10 mm. thick or more at flowering

time; sepals oblong.

Calyx 5-6 mm. thick; sepals lanceolate;

leaves minutely pubescent to velvety-

pubescent in var.

Corolla blue, pinkish or purple.

Sepals more than 10 mm. long (except no. 94).

Leaf-blades silvery-pubescent beneath or velvety-

pubescent.

Corolla 7-10 cm. long; leaf-blades tomentose

beneath.

Leaf-blades entire or 3-lobed.

Leaf-blades palmately 5-lobed.

Corolla 6 em. long or less.

Leaf-blades silvery-pubescent beneath, ob-

long, rounded or subcordate at the base.

Sepals oval, 10-13 mm. long.

Sepals 6-8 mm. long.

Leaf-blades densely velvety-pubescent

above and below, broadly ovate and

equally 3-lobed.

Leaf-blades glabrous or finely pubescent.

Sepals tomentulose, 12-14 mm. long; leaf-blades

triangular-ovate and lobed.

Sepals glabrous or minutely pubescent.

Leaf-blades finely pubescent, oblong-ovate to

oblong-lanceolate, shallowly cordate.

Leaf-blades glabrous above.

Sepals equal; corolla rose-purple to white,

8-10 cm. long.

Sepals unequal; corolla blue, 5-6 cm. long.

83.

84.

85.

86.

87.

88.

89.

90.

91.

92.

93.

94.

95.

96.

97.

98.

99.

225

. plicata,

. crinita.

populina.

. precana,

. macrorhiza.

. scopulorum.

. pandurata.

. sabulosa.

. jalapa.

. leonensis.

. lacteola.

. hypargyrea.

. passiflorordes.

. rupicola.

. nicoyana.

calantha.

cyanantha.

226 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Sepals less than 10 mm. long.

Sepals 6-8 mm. long; leaf-blades lobed or entire;

corolla purple; Cuban. 100. I. obtusata.

Sepals 4-6 mm. long; leaf-blades entire.

Corolla pink, 6-8 cm. long. 101. J. carnea.

Corolla purple, about 4.5 em. long; leaf-blades

submembranaceous. 102. I. microsticta.

83. Ipomeea plicata Urb. sp. nov.

Slender, perennial, climbing over trees and bushes, 6-10 m. long, branching,

woody below with a rough, whitish bark; finely pubescent above; leaf-blades ovate

or ovate-lanceolate, more or less plicate, acuminate, 4-10 cm. long, glabrous above,

finely pubescent beneath; petioles 1-4 cm. long; peduncles shorter than the petioles,

1- to 3-flowered; pedicels 1 em. long; sepals yellowish-green, 10-13 mm. long, acute,

puberulent; corolla 4-5 cm. long, campanulate-funnelform, fragrant; limb about

4 cm. broad, with 5, rounded lobes; capsules ovoid, apiculate, longer than the calyx,

2-celled; seeds densely lanate.

Jamaica: Mount Diablo, 2800 ft. alt., Harris 8997, Aug. 29, 1905

(ype).

84. Ipomea crinita Brandegee, Zoe 5: 216. 1905.

The woody stems as well as the petioles and peduncles pilose with white, spread-

ing hairs, 4-5 mm. long; leaf-blades 3-lobed, about 14 em. broad; peduncles elong-

ated, 20-22 cm. long, subumbellately flowered; outer sepals pilose, 7 mm. long,

apiculate.

Type LocaLity: Culiacan, Mexico.

DIstTRIBUTION: Ravines and thickets, western Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Brandegee, Sept. 12, 1904 (dupl. type — G).

85. Ipomea populina sp. nov.

A stout, woody, perennial twining vine, climbing over trees; stems 1-2 em. thick,

with a smooth bark; leaf-blades ovate, entire, acute, shallowly cordate, 5-8 cm. long,

reticulate-veined beneath; petioles slender, longer than the blades; peduncles stout,

on the stems of the preceding year, 8-12 cm. long, cymosely many-flowered, the

angled pedicels 2.5-3 em. long; sepals subequal, orbicular-ovate, 5-8 mm. long,

spreading in fruit; corolla tinged with magenta at the base, 6 cm. long; limb 6-8 cm.

broad with 5, rounded lobes, tube 12-15 mm. thick; capsules thick-walled, oblong,

2 cm. long and 1 cm. thick, 4-valved, 2-celled; seeds twice as long as thick, with a

long, white dorsal coma.

Mexico: Acapulco, Palmer 482, 1894-95 (type —N, G).

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 226

*86. Ipomeea precana sp. nov.

Stout, woody, perennial; stems densely canescent or silvery, furrowed; leaf-

blades orbicular, 8-12 em. long, shallowly cordate, veins 5-7 pairs, densely pubescent

or nearly glabrate above, silvery-pubescent beneath; petioles 3-5 cm. long; pedun-

cles shorter than the petioles, 3- to 5-flowered; pedicels 5-10 mm. long and with

the calyx strongly furrowed or wrinkled when dried; sepals 18-20 mm. long, imbri-

cated, canescent, obtuse, glabrous within; corolla subsalverform, 6-7.5 cm. long,

pubescent without, the tube constricted and glabrous at the base; limb 6-10 cm.

broad.

Mexico: Oaxaca; Reyes, 2500-4000 ft. alt. E. W. Nelson 1823, Oct.

20, 1894 (type —N, G). Morelos; Near Cuernavaca, on lava beds, Pringle

7229, 1896 (G).

¥ 87. Ipomea macrorhiza Michx. Fl. Bor. Am.1: 141. 1803.—G. Don,

Gen. Syst. 4: 277. 1838.

Ipomea jalapa Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 1: 146. 1814. (as to descr. excl. syn. L.).

Convolvulus macrorhizus Ell. Bot. 8S. C. & Ga. 1: 252. 1817.

Ipomea mechoacan Nutt. in Am. Jour. Sci. 5: 289. 1822.

Ipomea michauxii Sweet, Hort. Brit. 288. 1826.— Chapm. Fl. Southern U. S. 343.

1860.

Ipomea Purshii G. Don, in Sweet; Hort. Brit. ed. 3, 484. 1839.

Perennial from a napiform or thickened fusiform root, tomentulose-pubescent;

leaf-blades entire or lobed; peduncles 1-5-flowered; sepals. unequal, outer ones

10-12 mm. long, inner 15-20 mm. long; corolla 7-10 em. long, magenta at the base;

capsules 4-celled.

Type Locatity: “In maritimis Georgie et Floride.” (Michx.)

DistripuTion: Light sandy soil, near the coast, South Carolina to

Florida and northern Mexico.

ItLustrraTions: Bot. Reg. pl. 342.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Florida; Curtiss 2165, 4381; Boring, 1899 (Y);

Cheshire, 1881 (Y); Chapman (Y); Berg (Y); Levenworth (G). South

Carolina; Mellichamp (G). Tamaulipas, Mexico, E. W. Nelson 4441

1898 (N).

| 88. Ipomeea scopulorum Brandegee, Zoe 5: 169. 1903.

Pubescent throughout; leaf-blades entire, cordate, 6-7 cm. long; peduncles

about as long as the leaves, 1-4-flowered; sepals ovate aristate, coriaceous, unequal,

1-2 cm. long; corolla 6-8 cm. long.

Typr LocaLity; Mazatlan, Lower California.

DistriputTion: Rocky or dry thickets, Cape region, Lower California,

and northwestern Mexico.

228 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Mazatlan, Brandegee, (N);Culiacan, Sinaloa,

Brandegee, Oct. 11, 1904 (G).

89. Ipomea pandurata (L.) G. F. W. Mey. Prim. Fl. Esseq. 100.

1818.— Small, Fl. Southeastern U. S. 962. 1903.

Convolvulus foliis injerioribus cordatis, superioribus trilobis, etc. Gronov. Virg. 141.

Convolvulus panduratus L. Sp. Pl. 153. 1753. Ell. Bot. S.C. & Ga. 1: 254. 1817.

Convolvulus ciliolatus Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 139. 1803.

Convolvulus candicans Soland; Sims, Bot. Mag. pl. 1603. 1813.

Ipomea ciliosa Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 1: 146. 1814.

Ipomea ciliolata Pers. Syn. 1: 183. 1805.— G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 270. 1838.

Ipomea candicans G. Don, Gen. Syst. 1. ¢. 273.

Convolvulus rubescens Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 338. 1845.

TYPE Locaity: Virginia.

Disrrisution: Dry fields, southern Ontario, New York and Connecticut

to Michigan, Kansas, Florida and Texas.

InLustrations: Dill. Elth. pl. 85, 7. 99. Plukn. Amalth. pl. 385. 7. 3.

Bot. Mag. pl. 1603, 1939. Bot. Reg. pl. 588. Britt. & Br., Illus. Fl. 3:

j. 2945.

90. Ipomea sabulosa sp. nov.

Ipomea pandurata Conzatti & Smith, Syn. Fl. Mex. 3: 48. 1895.

Resembling the preceding species; perennial from a tuberous root; foliage

minutely pubescent; leaf-blades ovate, acuminate, shallowly-cordate or subtruncate,

5-8 cm. long; peduncles 1- to 3-flowered, the subulate bracts 5-8 mm. long and |

often not opposite when the peduncle is 1-flowered; outer sepals about 10 mm. long, .

acute, pubescent, inner ones 12-14 mm. long by 3-4 mm. wide, obtuse and sub-

membranaceous; corolla 5-6 cm. long, constricted within the calyx, creamy-white

with magenta base; limb 6-7 em. broad with 5, rounded lobes.

Mexico: Oaxaca; Jayacatlan, Rev. L. C. Smith 142, 1894 (type G).

San Luis Potosi; Villar, Pringle 5473, 1893 (G).

Ipomeea sabulosa mollicella var. nov.

Leaf-blades entire or hastately lobed; softly and densely velvety-canescent;

sepals 10-12 mm. long.

Mexico: Oaxaca, Cuesta de Dominguillo, 4000 ft. alt. Albert L. Smith

640, 1895 (type —G).

Ipomea sabulosa hirtella var. nov.

Leaf-blades ovate to oblong-ovate, hirsute above with harsh, conspicuously

whitish hairs, more densely so beneath; rarely glabrate above.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 229

Mexico: Chiapas, Near San Cristobal, 7000-8000 ft. alt. H. W. Nelson

38281, 1895 (type — 233075 — N, G).

91. Ipomea jalapa (L.) Pursh; Bot. Mag. pl. 1572. (as synonym)

1 Au. 1813. JI. jalapa Pursh, Fl. Bor. Am.1: 146. 1814 (excl.

descr.).

Convolvulus radice tuberosa cathartica, Houst. in Mill. Dict. No. 19. 1741.

C. foliis vartis, pedunculis unifloris, radice tuberosa, Mill. Dict. No. 32. 1759.

C. americanus jalapium dictus, Ray. Hist. 724.

Bryonia mechoacana nigricans, Bauh. Pin. 298.— Hist. 151.

Jalapium, mechoacanna nigra, Dal. Pharm. 201.

Convolvulus jalapa L. Mant. 43. 1759.— Mill. Dict. ed. 8, 1768.

Convolvulus mechoacan Vitm. Summa Pl. 1: 434. 1789.

Convolvulus lividus Moc.; Steud. Nom. ed. 2,1: 409. 1841.

Convolvulus jatiauca J. F. Gmel. Syst. 339. 1796.

Batatas jalapa Choisy, Conv. Rar. 125. 1837.— In DC. Prodr. 9: 338. 1845.

Leaf-blades triangular-ovate, entire or 3-lobed, plicate-veined; peduncles usu-

ally very short, 1-flowered; sepals subequal, broadly ovate, obtuse or rounded, 9-12

mm. long; the slender corolla pink or purple.

Type Locauity: Near Vera Cruz, Mexico.

DisrripuTion: Gulf region of Mexico to Venezuela.

Ittustrations: Bot. Mag. pl. 1572. Bot. Cab. pl. 518. Wagner,

Pharm. pls. 151, 152. Nees & Esenbeck, Off. Pfl.1: pl.197,198. Cassone,

Fl. Med. Farm. pl. 349. Woody. Med. Bot. pl. 21. Plench, Ic. Pl. Med.

pl. 94.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: San Luis Potosi, Pringle 3511, 1890 (G). Vene-

zuela; Fendler 2083 (G).

* 92. Ipomeea leonensis Robinson, Proc. Am. Acad. 26: 170. 1891.

Leaf-blades palmately 5-lobed, 6-12 cm. broad, punctate above, with a soft,

deciduous, white tomentum beneath, lobes obtuse; sepals ovate, rounded, about 8

mm. long, canescent; corolla 5-7 cm. long.

Tyre LocaLity: Near Monterey, Mexico.

Distripution: Calcareous ledges Nuevo Leon to Oaxaca.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Monterey, Pringle 2840, 1889 (type—G). San

Luis Potosi, Pringle 5040, 1891 (G). Oaxaca; Cerro de Huanculla Con-

zattta & Gonzalez 1215, 1901 (G).

93. Ipomea lacteola nom. nov.

Ipomea calophylla Wright; Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 204. 1866. Not I. calophylla

Fenzl, 1844.

230 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Leaf-blades oblong, 4-8 em. long, softly pubescent above, silvery-pubescent

beneath; petioles 1-3 em. long; sepals unequal, rounded or obtuse; corolla 5-6 em.

long.

TYPE LOCALITY: Cuba.

DISTRIBUTION: Cuba and Isle of Pines.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Cuba; C. Wright 3098 (co-type — C).

94. Ipomea hypargyrea Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 204. 1866.

A twining woody vine, appressed silvery-pubescent; leaf-blades oblong-lanceo-

late, subcordate, 4-8 cm. long, glabrate above, silvery beneath; short petioled;

peduncles 1-3-flowered; sepals chartaceous, glabrous, subequal, obtuse; corolla

6-7 cm. long, campanulate above the ventricose base, rose-purple; capsules exceed-

ing the calyx.

TYPE LOCALITY: Cuba.

DIsTRIBUTION: Cuba.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: C. Wright 449, (Herb. Gray, in part) No. 449

is cited under I. argentijolia A. Rich., and part of the Gray herbarium sheet

is that species.

95. Ipomeea passifloroides sp. nov.

Perennial, densely villous-pubescent; leaf-blades broadly ovate, cordate, 4-7

em. long, subequally 3-lobed, lobes shallow, often rounded, velvety appressed-

pubescent above and beneath; petioles short; the short peduncles 2- to 5-flowered;

bracts ovate, obtuse, 6-8 mm. long; pedicels densely hirsute; calyx glabrous; sepals

chartaceous, suborbicular, scarious-margined, 7-9 mm. long; corolla glabrous, pur-

ple, campanulate-funnelform above the strongly ventricose base, 4-5 cm. long,

tube 12-14 mm. thick above, the limb 22-25 mm. broad, slightly 5-lobed; capsules

black, glabrous, 2-celled, 4-seeded; seeds minutely pubescent, hirsute on the angles.

Cupa: Jiquarito Mountain, Sierra Maestra, 3400 ft. alt. Norman

Taylor 504, Sept. 18, 1906 (type—Y). A specimen collected by Wright

without number in Herb. Gray, ‘‘Pinal San Juan de B., Nov. 24.”

96. Ipomea rupicola sp. nov.

Related to I. jalapa. ‘Trailing or twining from a woody, enlarged root;

tomentulose, becoming glabrate; leaf-blades triangular-ovate, cordate-hastate, 2-5

em. long and as broad, acuminate, basal auricles acute or obtuse often bifid;

petioles longer than the blades; peduncles 1-1.5 cm. long, 1-flowered; bracts minute;

pedicel 1 cm. long, or less; sepals equal, oblong to oblong-ovate, obtuse or the outer

ones subacute, tomentose or sericeous, 12-14 mm. long; corolla pubescent in bud

and on the plice without when expanded, funnelform, 6-7 em. long, the blue or

purple limb 6 em. broad.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 231

Mexico: Tamaulipas; Jonmave Valley, 2000 ft. alt. E. W. Nelson

4448, 1898 (type — 332519 —N, G).

97. Ipomea nicoyana sp. nov.

A high-twining, woody, perennial vine with terete stems; finely pubescent; leaf-

blades oblong-ovate, shallowly-cordate or cordate-sagittate, acuminate, 10-20 cm.

long, finely pubescent, roughly so above, reticulate-veined beneath; petioles shorter

than the blades; peduncles shorter than the petioles, 3-several flowered; sepals

“equal, lanceolate, abruptly acute, 12 mm. long, pubescent or glabrate, chartaceous

in fruit; pedicels 10-15 mm. long; corolla campanulate above the strongly ventri-

cose base, 5-6 cm. long, purple, the white tube 15-18 mm. in diameter; capsules

ovoid, apiculate, thick-walled, 15 mm. high, 2-celled; seeds densely lanate.

Costa Rica: Forests near Nicoya, Tonduz 13671, 1900 (type — Y).

) 98. Ipomea calantha Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 202. 1866.

Stems woody, muricate in lines, glabrescent below; leaf-blades orbicular-ovate

to oblong-ovate, cordate, acute, entire, glabrous above, pubescent beneath, 5-8 em.

long; petioles as long; peduncles 1- to 5-flowered; sepals equal, ovate, obtuse, 10-13

mm. long; corolla rose-colored or nearly white, 8-10 cm. long, ventricose at the base;

capsules 12 mm. in diameter.

TYPE LOCALITY: Cuba.

DistrIBuTION: Cuba and Porto Rico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Cuba; Bahia Honda, C. Wright 3091 (co-type —

G,N). Porto Rico: Coano, Sintenis 3128, 1886 (G).

99. Ipomeea cyanantha Griseb. Fl. Br. W. Ind. 469. 1861.

TyprE LocALity: Mountains of St. Andrews, Manchester, Jamaica.

DIstTRIBUTION: Forests, mountains of Jamaica.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Road to Flamstead, 1200 ft alt. Harris 9034,

1905 (Y). Sheldon, Blue mountains, 2500 ft. alt. Fawcett (ex herb. Bot.

Dept. Jam.) 10078, 1907 (Y).

100. Ipomea obtusata Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 202. 1866.

A slender, herbaceous glabrous vine; leaf-blades ovate-oblong or deltoid-

ovate, cordate, obtuse or acute, margins repand or irregularly lobed, often 3-lobed

with 2-4 lateral acuminations, 2-6 cm. long; short petioled; peduncles longer than

the petioles, 2—5-flowered; pedicels about 1 cm. long; sepals ovate, rounded, sub-

equal, 6-8 mm. long; corolla purple, campanulate above the ventricose base, limb

3 cm. broad with 5, short, rounded lobes; capsules globose.

232 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

TYPE LOCALITY: Cuba.

DiIsTRIBUTION: Cuba.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: C.. Wright 3092 (co-type—_C, G). A specimen

in the Nat. Herb. without number, and labelled J. alternzflora is identical.

101. Ipomea carnea Jacq. Enum. 13. 1760.—Select. Stirp. Am. Hort.

26. 1763.— Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 374. 1845.

Convolvulus carneus Spreng. Syst. 1: 602. 1825.

Convolvulus pareirefolius Bert.; Spreng. |. ce. 613.

Ipomea pareirefolia G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 273. 1838.

Batatas pareirefolia Choisy, Conv. Rar. 123. 1837.— In DC. Prodr. 9: 337. 1845.

Tyrer LocaLity: Near Cartagena (Colombia).

DISTRIBUTION: Thickets near the coast, West Indies and Central Amer-

ica to Brazil.

ILLUSTRATIONS: Jacq. Stirp. Am. Hort. pl. 18.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Jamaica: Harris, Jan. 1894 (J). Nicaragua;

C. Wright (U. S. North Pacific Exp]. Exped.) (C). Panama, Cowell 171,

1905 (Y).

102. Ipomea microsticta Hallier f. in Bull. Herb. Boiss. 7: 411. 1899.

Stems slender, woody, glabrous, terete; leaf-blades ovate, entire, cordate, 4-9

em. long, submembranaceous, acuminate, densely and minutely black-puncticulate

beneath with microscopic glands; lateral veins about 8 pairs; petioles with a pair of

punctiform nectaries at the summit; peduncles stout, 4-14 em. long, many-flowered;

pedicels slender, angled, subclavate, 10-13 mm. long; sepals elliptical, convex,

coriaceous, unequal, inner ones 6 mm. long; corolla purple, strongly ventricose at

the base, 4-5 em. long.

Type Locatity: Near Santa Lucia Cozumalhuapa, Guatemala.

DistRiBuTION; Forests of Central America.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Seler 2427, 1896 (dupl. type—G).

15. Pedatisecte. Slender, herbaceous-stemmed, twining or erect, an-

nual or perennials with or without tuber-like roots: leaf-blades pedately or

rarely palmately parted, rarely cuneate and subentire in I. madrensis and I.

egregia: corolla usually small, rarely elongated (J. leptostphon and I. tenu-

iloba), funnel-form, never, ventricose at the base.

Leptocallis G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 260. 1838.

Annuals or perennials without tuber-like roots.

Stems erect, slender and weak; corolla 15 mm. long or

less.

Leaf-blades ternate. 103. I. ternifolia.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A

Leaf-blades pedately 5—9-divided.

Sepals equal; corolla rose-purple.

Sepals unequal; corolla cream-colored with a

purple throat.

Stems trailing or twining.

Corolla 15 mm. long or less; leaf-blades palmately

divided.

Corolla 3-8 cm. long.

Sepals attenuate-acuminate; corolla 4 cm. long.

Foliage pubescent; segments of the leaf-blades

entire; sepals keeled.

Leaf-blades pilose and ciliate.

Leaf-blades finely pubescent.

Foliage glabrous; segments of the leaf-blades

toothed.

Sepals lanceolate, acute.

Segments of the leaf-blades oblong-lanceolate

and obtuse.

Corolla 3 em. long, funnelform.

Corolla 5 em. long, subsalverform.

Segments of the leaf-blades acute or acuminate.

Sepals glabrous; corolla 7-8 cm. long.

Sepals setosely-hirsute; leaf-blades densely

sericeous-pubescent.

Perennials, from tuberous-like roots.

Leaf-blades with 5-7, linear or filiform segments.

Corolla white, 8-10 em. long; stems twining.

Corolla purple, 2-5 em. long.

Leaf-blades sessile or petioles shorter than the

blades; peduncles shorter than the petioles.

Sepals 5-6 mm. long, or less.

Plant strict, the filiform leaf-segments rare-

ly over 1 em. long.

Plant lax and branching, the linear-spatu-

late leaf-segments 1-3 cm. long.

Sepals 7-9 mm. long; peduncles 1-3 cm. long.

Leaf-blades long-petioled; sepals unequal.

Leaf-blades entire or cuneate at the base.

Blades with 1-2 obliquely ascending lobes at the

base.

Blades incised-dentate at the broad apex.

103.

DC. Prodr. 9: 353. 1845.

Convolvulus ternifolius Spreng. Syst. 1: 613. 1825.

Leptocallis ternata G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 260. 1838.

Tyrer LocaLity: Acapulco, Mexico.

Not known by any recent collection.

104.

105.

106.

107.

108.

109.

110.

112.

113.

114.

115.

116.

Wie

118.

119!

120.

Ipomeea ternifolia Cav. Ic. 5: 52. pl. 478. 7.1.

233

. costellata.

. painter.

. wrightir.

. delphinijolia.

. leptotoma.

. divergens.

. pedatisecta.

. valida.

. tenuiloba.

. pilosissima.

. leptosiphon.

. muricata.

. patens.

. plummere.

. lemmoni.

. madrensis.

. egregia.

1794.— Choisy in

234 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

104. Ipomeea costellata Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 149. 1859.— A. Gray,

Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2': 214. 1878.

TyprE Locatity: Mouth of the Pecos River, western Texas.

DistripuTion: Arid regions of western Texas, New Mexico, Arizona

south to the Valley of Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Texas; Wright 505 (type-—G,C,N); Havard

47, 1883; Hayes, 1858; Neally 624, 1889; Coues & Palmer 29, 1865 (G).

New Mexico; Fendler 665, 1847 (G); Wright 1615 (G, C); Earle 331, 1900

(Y); Rusby 299, 1881 (C); Metcalfe 766, 1903 (Y); Parry 997 (C); Mul-

jord 1111, 1895 (Y). Arizona; Lemmon 442, 1881 (N, Y); Wilcox 361,

1894 (N); Groffiths 5976, 1903 (N); Towmey, 1894 (Y); Pringle, 1884 (C);

Rothrock 628a, 631, 520, 679, 1874; Thurber 1057, 1851 (G).

Lower California, Brandegee, 1893; Durango, Palmer 649, 1896 (N, Y,

G); Coahuila; Palmer 2095, 1880 (N, G); Sonora; C. E. Lloyd 430, 1894

(G); Chihuahua; Townsend & Barber 383, 1899 (N, Y, G); Palmer 104,

1885 (N, C). Valley of Mexico, Borgeau 726, 1865-66 (G).

105. Ipomea painteri House, Muhlenbergia 3: 41. pl. 3. 7. 1. 1907.

Resembling I. costellata; stems finely hirsute; sepals broadly lanceolate, the

outer ones 5 mm. long, the inner 6-8 mm. long; each plice of the limb ending in 2,

minute, black cusps at the margin.

TypE LocaLity: Guadeloupe, Federal Dist., Mexico.

DistripuTion: Stony hillsides, central Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Rose & Pavnter 6826, 1903 (type—N); Quere-

taro; Hacienda Ciervo, San Juan del Rio, Rose, Painter & Rose 9632, 1905

CNS 55):

106. Ipomea wrightii A. Gray, Syn, Fl. N. Am. 2: 213. 1878.

Type LOCALITY: Western Texas.

DistrRIBUTION: Western Texas.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Wright (type—G). Apparently closely related

to, if not identical with I. pulchella.

107. Ipomea delphinifolia Mart. & Gal. Bull. Acad. Brux. XII. 2:

265. 1845.— Walp. Rep. 6: 535. 1847.

Closely related to I. leptotoma, but described as having pubescent and pilose-

ciliate leaf-blades; sepals about 6 mm. long, and corolla 4—5 em. long, purple.

Tyre LocaLity: Tehuacan, Puebla, Mexico. Not known by any recent

collections.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 235

108. Ipomza leptotoma Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 150. 1859.— A.

Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2': 214. 1878.

Ipomea radiatifolia Kellogg, Proc. Cal. Acad. I. 7: 163. 1877.

Pharbitis leptotoma Peter, in Engl. & Prantl. Nat. Pllanzenfam. IV. 3a: 32. 1891.

Type Locauity: Near Santa Cruz Valley, Sonora, Mexico.

DistrisuTIon: Arid mountain regions of southern New Mexico, Ari-

zona and south to Oaxaca.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: New Mexico; Wright 1614, 1851 (G, C); Ari-

zona; Dr. Smart 405, 1867 (C); Lemmon 3039, 1883 (G, N, Y); Pringle,

1884 (Y); Wilcox 417, 1894 (N); Toumey 179, 1892. Lemmon 90, 1880

(G). Sonora; Thurber 977, 1851 (type—G); Palmer 25, 1869 (G, N);

Schott, 1855 (C); Lumholtz 195, 1880 (Y); Palmer 1705, 1891 (N, Y);

C. V. Hartman 195, 1890 (G); C. E. Lloyd 431, 1890 (G); Sinaloa; Gold-

man 250, 1898 (N); Oaxaca; L. C. Smith 242, 1894 (G); Conzattt & Gon-

zalez 792, 1897 (G); Puebla, E. W. Nelson 1995, 1894 (N).

109. Ipomea divergens House, Muhlenbergia 3: 40. 1907.

Closely related to I. leptotoma; leaf-segments broader, sinuately toothed or lobed,

obtuse; sepals acuminate, glabrous.

TYPE LOCALITY: Guaymas, Sonora, Mexico.

DistTRIBUTION: Western Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Palmer 231, 1887 (type—N, G).

110. Ipomea pedatisecta Mart. & Gal. Bull. Acad. Brux. XII. 2:

265. 1845.— Walp. Rep. 6: 535. 1847. i

TypE LocaLity: Near Oaxaca, Mexico.

DISTRIBUTION; Canons and barrancas, western and southern Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Colima; Acapulco, Palmer 234, 1894-5 (G, C);

Jalisco; barranca of Tequila, Pringle 4439, 1893. Morelos; Rose & Painter

6586, 1903; Rose, Painter & Rose 8550, 8569, 1905. Guerrero; La Lagun-

illa, E. W. Nelson, 1903 (N); Iguala, Rose, Painter & Rose 9293, 9341,

1905. Puebla; Tehuacan, Rose, Painter & Rose 9904, 1905. Oaxaca;

Tecomavara, Seler 1339b, 1895 (G);_ Domingiullo, E. W. Nelson 1597,

1894 (N); Oaxaca, Conzatti & Gonzalez 1064, 1900 (G).

111. Ipomea valida House, Muhlenbergia 3: 40. pl. 1. 7. d. 1907.

TYPE LocALITY: Manzanillo, Mexico.

DistriputTion: Thickets, Colima, Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Palmer 1031, 1890 (type —N).

236 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

112. Ipomea tenuiloba Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 148. 1859.— A. Gray,

Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Suppl. 434. 1886.

Type Locatity: Near Puerto de Paysano, western Texas.

DistrisuTion: Hills and rocky places, western Texas to southern

Arizona and adjacent Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Near Puerto de Paysano, Bigelow (type—

C); C. Wright 1617, (G). Valley of the Rio Grande, below Donana,

Parry 989 (G).

113. Ipomea pilosissima Mart. & Gal. Bull. in Acad. Brux. XII. 2:

264. 1845.— Walp. Rep. 6: 535. 1847.

Slender, twining, pilose or hirsute; leaf-blades 5- to 7-pedately parted, the seg-

ments ovate-oblong, 3-5 em. long, acuminate or attenuate, densely sericeous-pilose;

peduncles 5-7 cm. long, 1-flowered; sepals densely setaceous-hirsute, lanceolate,

acute, equal; corolla campanulate-funnelform, purple, 4-5 cm. long.

TYPE LOCALITY: Sierra de Yavezia, and near Oaxaca, Mexico. Not

known by any recent collections.

114. Ipomea leptosiphon S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 23: 280. 1880.

Leaf-segments 5, filiform, 4-6 cm. long; peduncles 1-flowered; sepals unequal,

oblong-lanceolate, acute, 8-10 mm. long, the outer ones muricate-keeled; corolla

slender, 8-10 cm. long, white with a pink or rose-colored limb.

Type Locauity: Near Chihuahua, Mexico.

DistripuTion: Thin gravelly soil, northern Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Chihuahua; Pringle 1337, 1887 (type—G, C,

N); Townsend & Barber 271, 1889 (N, Y); E.W. Nelson 4822, 1898 (N);

E. W. Nelson 6159a, 1899 (N).

115. Ipomea muricata Cav. Ic.5: 52. pl. 478.7. 2. 1794. Not I.

muriata Jacq. 1798.

Convolvulus capillaceous H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 97. 1819.

Ipomea armata Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 214. 1819.

Cantua tuberosa Roem. & Schult. 1. c. 893.

Ipomea capillacea G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 267. 1838.— Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 353.

1845.— A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Suppl. 434. 1886.

Leptoeallis quinta G. Don, 1. e. 260.

Leptocallis armata G. Don; Sweet, Hort. Brit. ed. 3, 482. 1839.

Quamoclit pedata Mart. & Gal. Bull. in Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 270. 1845.

Tyrer Locauity: “ Habitat in Huanajuato.”’

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A ; 237

DistrIBUTION: New Mexico and Arizona to northern South America.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: New Mexico; Rusby 301, 1881; Arizona;

Leiberg 5898, 1901; Rothrock 623, 1874; Wilcox 348, 1894; Lemmon 448,

1881 and 2836, 1882; Neally 187, 1891; Griffiths 5432, 1903. Lower Cali-

fornia, Brandegee, 1899.

Sonora; Thurber 964, 1851 (G). Lower California; Brandegee, 1899

(N). Durango; Palmer 302, 1896 (N, G, Y); E. W. Nelson, 4640, 1898

(N). Chihuahua; Pringle 580, 1885 (G). 'Tepic; Rose, 1897 (N); Quere-

taro; Rose, Painter & Rose 9540, 1905 (N); Jalisco; Barcena 562, 1887 (M);

Pringle 11048, 1902 (N, Y). Federal Dist. Coulter 1036 (G); Rose Painter

& Rose 8515, 1905 (N). Oaxaca; Rev. Lucius C. Smith 472, 1895 (G).

Chiapas; E. W. Nelson 2879, 2946, 1895 (N).

116. Ipomeea patens (A. Gray) comb. nov.

Ipomea muricata Roth. Bot. Wheeler 204. 1878. Not I. muricata Cav. 1794.

Ipomea capillacea var. patens A. Gray, Syn. Fl. 2: Suppl. 434. 1886.

TYPE LocALITY: Southern Arizona.

DisTRIBUTION: Southern New Mexico, Arizona and adjacent Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: New Mexico; C. Wright 1616, 1851 (type— G.

C). O. B. Metcalfe 271, 1903 (G). Arizona; Wilcox, 1893 (N); Sonora;

Thurber 967, 1851 (C); Chihuahua; Pringle 841, 1886 (C, N); 1340, 1887

San Luis Potosi; Parry & Palmer 626, 1878 (G, N). Coahuila, Palmer

910, 1880 (N, G).

117. Ipomea plummere A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Suppl. 434. 1886.

TYPE LocaLity: Southern Arizona.

DistriBuTIon: Gravelly slopes of the higher mountains of southern

Arizona and New Mexico to Chihuahua, Mexico and in the Bolivian Andes.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Arizona; Lemmon 2839, 1882 (type — G); Towmey

1894; MacDougal 382, 1898 (Y); Dr. Lour 324, 1873 (G); Wright 1616

in part (G). New Mexico; Earle 492, 1900 (Y). Chihuahua; Townsend

& Barber 228, 1899 (N); E. W. Nelson 6085, 1899 (N).

118. Ipomea lemmoni A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 19: 90. 1883.—

Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Suppl. 434. 1886.

TyprE Locatiry: Mountains near Ft. Huachuca, Arizona.

DistrisuTion: Mountains and canons of southern Arizona.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Lemmon 2840, 1882 (type —G, N).

238 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

119. Ipome@a madrensis S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 23: 281. 1888.

Peduncles 1-flowered, 1-2 em. long, scabrous; sepals ovate, acute or obtuse 8-

10 mm. long, muricate; corolla 3-4 cm. long.

TyprE LOCALITY: Base of the Sierra Madre, Chihuahua, Mexico.

DIsTRIBUTION: Pine plains, northern Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Pringle 1338, 1887 (type—G, C, N).

120. Ipomea egregia House, ‘Torreya 6: 124. 1906.

Ipomea cunetfolia A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 19: 90. 1883.— Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2:

Suppl. 434. 1886. Not I. cunetfolia Meissn. 1869.

Type LocaLity: Tanner’s Canon, Ft. Huachuca, southern Arizona.

DisTRIBUTION: Mountains of southern Arizona.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Lemmon 2887, 1882 (type —G, N).

16. Microsepale. Slender, annual or perennial, twining vines, with

herbaceous stems: sepals small, less than 5 mm. long, equal or nearly so,

often acute: corollas small, narrowly funnelform, not ventricose at the base.

Corolla yellow.

Leaf-blades sessile or very short petioled. 121. JI. amplexicaulis.

Leaf-blades relatively long-petioled. 122. I. microsepala.

Corolla white or purple.

Corolla white, 10-15mm.long; leaves pubescent above. 123. I. filipes.

Corolla-limb blue, about 20 mm. long; leaves glabrous

above. 124. I. turckhevmi.

120. Ipomea amplexicaulis Fernald, Bot. Gaz. 20: 535. 1895.

Glabrous or sparingly hispid; leaf-blades ovate, deeply cordate, entire, clasping,

1.5-4 em. long; peduncles 3-6 cm. long, 2- to 9-flowered; sepals 2-3 mm. long,

lanceolate, acute; corolla 15-20 mm. long.

Tyrer Locatity: Mountains near Zopelote, Tepic, Mexico.

DistRIBUTION: Mountains of western Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Tepic; Lamb 576, 1895 (type — G, N, Y); Tuxtla,

Caec. et Ed. Seler 1900, 1896 (G). Durango; Chacala, Goldman 339, 1899

(N). Between Valle Banderas and Colomo, Tepic, E. W. Nelson 4154,

1897 (N).

122. Ipomoea microsepala Benth. Bot. Voy. Sulph. 136. 1844.— Walp.

Rep. 6: 533. 1847.

Ipomea nelsoni Rose, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 1: 343. 1895.

HOUSE, FHE GENUS IPOMG@A aes)

Stems densely hirsute with spreading hairs; petioles as long as the leaf-blades;

leaf-blades ovate, cordate, acuminate or obtuse, 3-8 cm. long; peduncles 2- to 4-

flowered; sepals 2 mm. long, obtuse; corolla 2-2.5 em. long; capsules about 4 mm.

high.

Type LocaLity: Near Acapulco, Mexico.

DISTRIBUTION: western Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Oaxaca, E. W. Nelson 318, 1894 (N, Y, G);

Manzanillo, Palmer 1363, 1891 (G).

123. Ipomea filipes Benth.; Meissn. in Mart. Fl]. Bras. 7: 274. 1869.

Stems pubescent or glabrate; leaf-blades orbicular-ovate, 1-3 em. long, acute,

entire or angled, pubescent above, glabrous beneath; peduncles filiform, 5-8 em.

long, 1-3-flowered; pedicels recurved in fruit; sepals 2mm. long; corolla 10-15 mm.

- long, white.

Typr Locatity: About Santarem, on the Amazon River, Brazil.

DISTRIBUTION: Thickets, near the coast, western Mexico to Brazil.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Sinaloa; Palmer 1647, 1891 (N, Y). Guerrero;

Palmer 109, 1894-5 (N, G, C). Guatemala: W.C. Shannon (John Donnell

Smith 4026), 1892 (G). Among the South American specimens of this are

Herbert H. Smith 1589, 1898; Fendler 2089 and Spruce 886.

Doubtless identical with Convolvulus minutiflorus Mart. & Gal.

124. Ipomea turckheimii Vatke; J. Donnell Smith, Bot. Gaz. 40:

8. 1905.

Ipomea concinna House, Muhlenbergia 3: 42. pl. 2. f.c. 1907.

Leaf-blades ovate, acuminate, cordate-hastate, 1.5-5 cm. long; petioles 2-5 mm.

leng, rarely longer; peduncles 3-5 em. long, 3- to 7-flowered; sepals equal, outer

ones acute, inner obtuse, corolla about 2 cm. long.

Typr LocaLity: Coban, Guatemala.

DISTRIBUTION: Southern Mexico and Central America.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Jalisco, Barcena 553, 1887 (M). Morelos, near

Cuernavaca, Pringle 7232, 1896 (G). Guatemala: H. von Tuerckheim

(ex J. D. Smith, Pl. Guat. 386), 1886 (co-type — G).

17. Emetice. Slender-stemmed vines, twining, stems herbaceous from

perennial, tuber-like, thickened roots: leaf-blades entire, cordate or cordate-

sagittate, usually glabrous: sepals very unequal, obtuse, membranaceous;

corollas salverform or funnelform, usually purple.

Stamens and style exserted; corolla salverform.

Corolla limb 5 cm. broad or more, tube 5-8 cm. long. 125. I. purga.

240 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Corolla limb 2-3 em. broad, tube 3-4 cm. long; leaf-

blades strongly sagittate, long-caudate. 126. I. emetica.

Stamens and style included; corolla not salverform.

Leaf-blades ovate or orbicular-ovate, more than 3 em.

long.

Corolla funnelform.

Leaf-blades ovate; corolla 5-6 em. long; sepals

about 10 mm. long. 127. I. seducta.

Leaf-blades cordate-sagittate.

Corolla 4-5 cm. long; sepals 4-6 mm. long. 128. I. simulans.

Corolla 8-10 cm. long, sepals 8-10 mm. long. 129. I. elongata.

Corolla tubular, 5-6 cm. long and slightly bent;

limb 15 mm. broad; leaf-blades 3-4 em. long,

cordate. 130. I. urbinei.

Leaf-blades small, reniform-ovate, 1-2 em. long or less;

corolla 6-8 cm. long, very slender. 131. TI. sujffulta.

125. Ipomcea purga (Wender.) Hayne, Arzn. Gew. 12: pls. 33, 34.

1833. — Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 374. 1845.— Willis, Prac.

Fl. 184. 1894.

Convolvulus jalapa Schiede, in Linnaea 5: 473. 1830. Not C. jalapa L. 1767.

Ipomea jalapa Nutt. & Coxe, in Am. Journ. Med. Sci. 5: 300-307. 1830.— Schiede

& Deppe, in G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 271. 1838. Not I. jalapa Pursh, 1814.

Convolvulus purga Wenderoth, in Pharm. Centralb. 1: 457. 1830.— D. Dietr. Syn.

BL ye 667.) 1839:

Ipomea scheideana Zuccar. in Flora 14: 801. 1831.— Pl. Nov. vel Min. Cogn. 293.

1832.

Exogonium purga & dumosum Benth. Pl. Hartw. 46. 1840.

Convolvulus officinalis Pelletan; Steud. Nom. ed. 2,1: 410. 1841.

Calonyction galeotii Mart. & Gal. in Bull. Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 268. 1845.

TYPE LocaLity: Mexico.

DistRIBUTION: Mountain forests, central Mexico to Central America.

IttustrRaTIons: Hayne, l. c.; Nees Offic. Pf. Suppl. 3: pl. 13. Berg.

& Schmidt, Offiz. Gew. 1: pl. 5. Curt. Bot. Mag. pl. 4280. Am. Journ.

Med. Sci. 1830. pl. 7. Bentl. & Trin. Med. Bot. pl. 186. Zuccar. 1. ¢.

pl. 12. Royle, Ill. Himal. 308. Bot. Reg. pl. 49.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Vera Cruz; Muller 889, 1853 (C). Jalapa,

Schiede 149, 1839 (C); A. Duges 3, 1906 (G); C. L. Smith 1930, 1894 (G);

Trinidad, Pringle 8889, 1904 (G). Valle de Cordova, Borgeau 1730, 1865

(G). Zucuapan, Purpus 2212, 2392, 1907 (G, Y). Jalisco; Palmer 378,

1886 (G, C); E.W. Nelson 4022, 4085, 1897 (N). Durango, near Chacola,

Goldman 331, 1899 (N). Oaxaca; Rev. L.C. Smith 666, 1895 (G). Guate-

mala; Deam 317, 1905 (G, Y). J. Donnell Smith 2014, 1890 (G, Y, N).

Costa Rica; Tonduz 1771, 1894 (K). Jamaica (introduced); Britton 155,

1906 (Y).

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 241

~ 126. Ipomea emetica Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 376. 1845.

Ipomea caudata Fernald in Proc. Am. Acad. 36: 498. 1901.

Slender; leaf-blades thin, 3-5 cm. long, apex caudate-acuminate, base sagittate,

basal lobes 1-2 em. long, acuminate; corolla 5-6 cm. long, the limb 2-3 em. broad.

Tyre LocaLity: Tepelpe circuitum Mexico.

DistRIBUTION: Exposed places at high altitudes, central Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED; Sierra de Tepoxtlan, Morelos, Pringle 8448,

1900 (G,N, Y). Pringle 13590 (G).

v 127. Ipomea seducta sp. nov.

Closely resembling J. purga; glabrous, perennial from a tuberous root; leaf-

blades orbicular-ovate, cordate, 6-10 cm. long, acuminate, basal sinus often closed,

pale beneath; petioles short; peduncles as long as the petioles, usually 1-flowered;

sepals unequal, outer ones lanceolate, 4-5 mm. long, acute, inner fully 10 mm. long,

subacute or obtuse; corolla 5-6 cm. long, funnelform, the whitish tube expanding

from the base, constricted within the calyx, limb purple, 5 cm. broad; stamens and

style included.

GuaATEMALA; Cubilquitz, Alta Verapaz, Tuerckheim (J. Donnell Smith

distr. 7926), 1901 (type —C). Coban, Tuerckheim (J. Donnell Smith distr.

101), 1887 (C). Mexico; Chiapas, Near Yajalon E. W. Nelson 3403,

1895 (252535 — N).

, 128. Ipomea simulans Hanbury, Journ. Linn. Soc. 11: 281. 1871.

Leaf-blades ovate-lanceolate, 5-8 cm. long, caudate-acuminate, base cordate-

sagittate, basal lobes acute or rounded, 1 cm. long, glaucous beneath; sepals un-

equal, inner ones 4-6 mm. long; corolla 4-6 cm. long, purple with a white tube.

Type LocaLity: Mexican Andes, Piedra Gorda district, Guanajuato;

also the cold regions of Oaxaca.

DistrisuTion: High altitudes of central and southern Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Mechoacan, Schiede (G). Morelos, Pringle

6565, 1896 (G, N, C). Oaxaca; E.W. Nelson 1184 (in part), 1894 (N, G).

129. Ipomea elongata Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 355. 1845.— Hallier

f. in Bull. Herb. Boiss. 5: 1052. 1895.

Calonyction dubiwm Mart. & Gal. Bull. in Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 268. 1845.

Ipomea dubia Hemsley, Biol. Cent.-Am. Bot. 2: 386. 1882. Not I. dubia Roem.

& Schult. 1819.

Ipomea mestecensis House, Bot. Gaz. 43: 411. 1907.

Glabrous or pubescent; leaf-blades ovate-lanceolate, sagittate or cordate-sagit-

242 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

tate, acuminate, 3-5 cm. long, basal lobes produced, half as long as the blade, acute,

divergent; peduncles 1-flowered; sepals lanceolate, acute; corolla rose-purple, limb

deeply 5-lobed.

Typr Locatity: Near Oaxaca, Mexico (Andrieux 212).

DistripuTion: Mountains of Oaxaca.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Pringle 4693, 1894 (G, N, C). C. L. Smith

910, 1894 (Y, G); Rev. Lucius C. Smith 334, 1895 (G).

130. Ipomca urbinei House, Muhlenbergia 3: 41. pl. 2, 7. b. 1907.

Resembling J. simulans; leaf-blades glaucous and densely pubescent beneath;

peduncles 1-2-flowered, slightly longer than the petioles and somewhat confluent

with them at the base; sepals unequal, the inner 8-10 mm. long and 2-3 times as

long as the outer; corolla scarlet, tubular.

TyprE LocALITY: Faldas del Volean de Colima, Mexico.

DISTRIBUTION: Known only from the type locality (Barcena 214, 1881,

type — M).

131. Ipomea suffulta (H. B.-K.) G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 276. 1838.

— Robinson & Greenm. Am. Journ. Sci. 60: 160. 1895.

—Hiallier f. Bull. Herb. Boiss. 7: 411. 1899.

Convolvulus suffultus H. B. K. Noy. Gen. & Sp. 3: 102. 1819.

Type LocALITy: On the volcanic mountain of Jorullo, Mexico.

DistrRiBuTION: Mountains of Oaxaca, Mexico.

Intustrations: H. B. K. 1. c. pl. 211.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Pringle 4755, 1894 (G, N, C). E. W. Nelson

1541, 1894 (N, G); 3061, 1895 (N); 2920, 1895 (N G). Rev. L.C. Smith

141, 1894 (G).

18. Anisomere. ‘Twining, annual or perennial] vines of various habit;

stems sometimes woody below, usually not densely pubescent; leaf-blades

entire or 3-lobed or toothed, rarely somewhat 5-lobed; sepals coriaceous,

very unequal.

Leaf-blades linear to broadly lanceolate; corolla small.

Leaf-blades denticulate-hastate at base; corolla white. 132. JI. angustifolia.

Leaf-blades sagittate or cordate-sagittate.

Corolla crimson or purplish. 133. I. tenuissima.

Corolla white; leaf-blades subsessile. 134. I. sagittula.

Leaf-blades ovate in outline.

Sepals obtuse or merely subacute, not cuspidate.

Leaf-blades broadly hastate at the base; thick-tex-

tured, basal lobes acute. 135. I. callida.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 243

Leaf-blades cordate or truncate at the base.

Leaf-blades deeply 3-lobed or sub 5-lobed.

Corolla white.

Inner sepals 6 mm. long. Haytian. 136. I. buchit.

Inner sepals 10-12 mm. long. Mexican. 137. I. rhomboidea.

Corolla blue or purple; inner sepals 8-10 mm.

long. 138. JI. vulsa.

Leaf-blades entire or merely toothed.

Peduncles elongated, exceeding the leaves.

Blades toothed near the base; sepals 8-10 mm.

long. 139. JI. splendor-sylve.

Blades not toothed; sepals 8-12 mm. long. 140. I. phillomega.

Peduncles not exceeding the leaves.

Corolla yellow. 141. J. lindenii.

Corolla purple or white.

Peduncles many-flowered; corolla purple,

slender-funnelform. 142. I. wilsont.

Peduncles 3—5-flowered.

Corolla white, 4-5 em. long. 143. I. anisomeres.

Corolla blue, 2 cm. long; leaf-blades

hastately lobed at base. 144, I. oligantha.

Sepals cuspidate-acute.

Stems and leaves densely pilose-pubescent; blades 3-

lobed; sepals ciliate; corolla rose-purple. 145, I. purpust.

Stems and leaves glabrous or nearly so.

Leaf-blades deeply 3-5-lobed; sepals 8-14 mm.

long; corolla purple. 146. I. collina.

Leaf-blades entire, toothed or slightly 3-lobed.

Corolla purple or yellowish-purple.

Inner sepals broadly obovate; corolla 3-3.5

em. long. 147. I. gracilis.

Inner sepals oblong-lanceolate.

Sepals 10-14 mm. long; stems usually

prostrate and blades usually lobed, gla-

brous. 158. I. babatas.

Sepals 8-10 mm. long; the pilose or pubes-

cent stems usually twining. 159. I. tiliacea.

Corolla white, fading purple in drying; 6-8 cm.

long; sepals about 15 mm. long. 148. I. jtcama.

» 132. Ipomea angustifolia ' Jacq. Coll. 2: 367. 1788.

Convolvulus angustifolius Desr. in Lam. Encyc. 3: 547. 1789.

Convolvulus filrcaulis Vahl, Symb. Bot. 3: 24. 1794.

Convolvulus simplex Pers. Syn. 1: 178. 1805.

re 1Tpomea aprica nom. nov.

Ipomea angustifolia Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 367, 1845.— Meissn. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 249.

pl. 897.2. 1869. NotI. angustifolia Jacq. 1788.

BRAZIL,

244 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Convolvulus filiformis Thunb. Fl. Cap. 2: 168. 1823. Not C. filiformis Desr. 1789.

Ipomea denticulata R. Br. Prodr. 485. 1810.

Convolvulus sonneratit Rees, Cyclop. No. 29. 1819.

Convolvulus denticulatus Spreng. Syst. 1: 603. 1825. Not C. denticulatus Desr.

1789.

Ipomeea filicaulis Willd. Sp. Pl. 1: 848. 1798.— Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 353. 1845.

Ipomea filiformis Voigt. Hort. Suburb. Calc. 356. 1845. Not I. filiformis Jacq.

1763.

Ipomea bidentata G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 266. 1838.

Fraxima tridentata Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 83. 1838.

Merremia angustijolia Hallier f. Bot. Jahrb. 16: 552. 1893: 18: 117. 1894.

TypPE LOcALITY: Guyana.

DistripuTion: Thickets and shores, circumtropical. Introduced on

ballast about the seaports of the southern United States.

IntustraTIoNS: Rheed. Mal. 11: pl. 55. Bot. Reg. pl. 317. Jacq.

Ic. Rar. pl. 317. Bot. Mag. pl. 5426.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: On ballast, Brunswick, Georgia, Harper 1523,

1902 (G). Porto Rico: Sintenis 6763, 1887 (Y); Heller 1276, 1899; 6440,

1903 (Y); Underwood & Griggs 982, 1901 (Y).

133. Ipomea tenuissima Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 376. 1845.— Small,

Bull. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 3: 434. 1905.

Slender and herbaceous above, from a perennial root; leaf-blades 2-5 cm. long;

peduncles 4-6 cm. long, 1-flowered; sepals ovate-lanceolate, obtuse, mucronulate,

6-8 mm. long; corolla crimson, 3-4 em. long.

Type LocaLity: Desportes, Cuba.

DistriBuTion: Cuba, Isle of Pines and subtropical Florida.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Florida; Pinelands near Cutler, Small &

Carter 712, 750, 1903; 1705, 1834, 1953, 1904 (Y). Biscayne Bay, Curtiss,

1880 (Y). Dade Co. Britton 163, 1904 (Y). Cuba: “Open grassy places

at Salvador and Savanas, Cayo del Rey,” C. Wright 1651, Sept. 11, 1859

(G, C). Cieneguita, Combs 238, 1895 (Y). Madruga, Britton & Shajer

S0, 1903 (Y). Pinar del Rio, Shafer 558, 1903 (Y). Matanzas, Britton

& Wilson 422, 1903. Santa Clara, Baker 2495, 1904 (Y). Habana,

Van Hermann 980, 1905 (Y). Isle of Pines, Curtiss 495, 1904 (G, Y).

134. Ipomea sagittula sp. nov.

A slender, twining, perennial vine, with weak, woody stems, bark thin, whitish

exfoliating; leaf-blades broadly lanceolate, acute and cuspidate, base sagittate,

4-7 cm. long, 1.5-3 em. broad, the basal auricles 1 em. long or less, obtuse and clasp-

ing the stem, glabrous above, minutely white-dotted beneath; petioles 2-6 mm.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 245

long; peduncles 1.5-2 cm. long, 1- to 5-flowered, bracts minute; pedicels 1 cm. long;

sepals unequal, obtuse, ovate-oblong, outer ones 3-5 mm. long, inner 5-7 mm. long;

corolla white, funnelform, about 3 cm. long and as broad; capsules ovoid, 8-9 mm.

long, 2-celled.

Mexico: Jalisco; Between San Sebastian and Las Palmas, 3000-2500 ft.

alt. E. W. Nelson 4129, Mar. 30, 1897 (type —N, G).

/ 135. Ipomeea callida House, Muhlenbergia 3:42. pl. 3, Fig. b. 1907.

Perennial, woody below; leaf-blades 6-12 cm. long, 4-6 cm. broad at the base,

glabrous and glossy above, paler beneath; peduncles 5-10 cm. long, 5- to 10-flowered

in a rather dense cyme; sepals 5 mm. long in the outer to 10 mm. long in the inner,

rounded; corolla purple, 4.5-5 cm. long.

Typr LocaLity: Near Puerto Sierra, Honduras.

DistRiBuTION: Known only from the type locality.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Percy Wilson 534, 1903 (type— Y).

/~ 136. Ipomea buchii Urban, Symb. Ant. 3: 356. 1903.

Young stems minutely but sparingly pilose; leaf-blades 3-lobed or parted, 3.5-5

em. long, 4-6 cm. broad, middle lobe ovate-elliptical, obtuse; peduncles 1-flowered,

6-12 cm. long; sepals pale-green, outer ones oval, 4.5 mm. long, rounded, inner

6 mm. long, subtruncate at apex; corolla white, 4-4.5 em. long.

Type LocaLity: Near Petite Coupe, mountains of Hayti, alt. 250 m.

DistrisuTion: Mountains of Hayti.

137. Ipomcea rhomboidea sp. nov.

A slender, twining vine from a perennial root; stems angled, minutely canescent;

leaf-blades ovate, 3-lobed, shallowly cordate, 8-12 cm. long and as broad, lobes

contracted below, suborbicular, obtuse, thin and submembranaceous, reticulate-

veined, minutely pubescent; petioles 6-10 cm. long, very slender; peduncles 4-6

em. long, 1- to 3-flowered; pedicels 1-3 cm. long, becoming 5 cm. long in fruit; sepals

very unequal, outer oblong, obtuse, subeanescent, 7-9 mm. long, inner ones broader,

rounded, 10-13 mm. long; corolla white, tinged with purple-mauve below, funnel-

form, constricted within the calyx, 6-7 cm. long, limb 5-lobed, 5-6 em. broad, the

plice ending in minute cusps at the margin; capsules ovoid.

Mexico: Sinaloa; Topolobampo, Palmer 227, Sept. 1897 (type — 315548

aN).

246 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

138. Ipome@a vulsa House, Muhlenbergia 3: 45. pl. 1. fig. a, b.

1907.

Glabrous, 1-2 m. long; leaf-blades 3- to 5-lobed, lobes oblong or obovate-lanceo-

late, blunt, 1.5-4 em. long; peduncles 3-5 cm. long, 1-2-flowered; outer sepals

obovate, 6 mm. long, inner ones broadly oblong, rounded and finely toothed, ciliate,

8-10 mm. long; corolla purplish, 3-4 em. long.

Type LOCALITY: Orizaba, Mexico.

DistripuTion: Vicinity of Orizaba, Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Miiller, 1855 (type — 291646, 291644—N, C).

139. Ipomoea splendor-sylve House, Muhlenbergia 3: 43. pl. 2.

Fae SOF:

Leaf-blades ovate, cordate, acuminate, sinuate-toothed near the base, 5-9 cm.

long; peduncles 10-18 cm. long, 1- to 3-flowered; sepals 8-10 mm. long; corolla 5-6

em. long, scarlet (when dried), strongly constricted at the base, limb subentire,

4 em. broad.

TYPE LOCALITY: Puerto Sierra, Honduras.

DistTRIBuTION: Known only from the type locality.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Percy Wilson 286, 1903 (type — Y).

140. Ipomea phillomega (Vell.) comb. nov.

Convolvulus phillomega Vell. Fl. Flum. (text) 74. 1825. Icones 2: pl. 63. 1827.

Ipomea capparoides Choisy in Mém. Soc. Phys. Genév. 8: 59. 1839——In DC.

Prodr. 9: 376. 1845.— Hallier f. in Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss. Anst.16: 52. 1898.

Ipomea parensis Peter in Engl. & Prantl. Nat. Pfl. IV. 3a: 30. 1891.

Aniseia syringijolia Dammer; Bot. Jahrb. 23: Bezbl. 57.38. 1897.

TyprE LocALIty: [Brazil.]

DISTRIBUTION: Costa Rica to Colombia, Venezuela, Martinique and

Guadeloupe.

Reported from Martinique (Belanger 1116, Hb. Del.) and Guadeloupe

(L’Herminier, Hb. Boiss.) by Hallier, 1. ec.

141. Ipomea lindenii Mart. & Gal. Bull. in Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 264.

1845. Walp. Rep. 6: 535. 1847.

Twining, woody, glabrous; leaf-blades ovate, shallowly cordate, acuminate,

mucronate, 5-10 cm. long; peduncles shorter than the petioles, 1- to 3-flowered,

5-10 mm. long; pedicels longer, 25-30 mm. long; sepals oblong, obtuse; corolla

campanulate-funnelform, yellow, 3-5 cm. long.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMGA 247

‘Type Locatity: Near Zucuapan, Vera Cruz, Mexico. Not known by

any recent collections.

142. Ipomea wilsoni House, Muhlenbergia 3: 44. pl. 1. f.c. 1907.

Leaf-blades ovate, deeply cordate, acute, thick, basal lobes slightly angled;

peduncles stout, as long as the petioles, cymosely many-flowered; inner sepals

oblong, 8-10 mm. long, obtuse, outer ones suborbicular, smaller; corolla slender-

funnelform, purple, 5.5-6 cm. long, limb about 4 cm. broad.

Type Locatity: Near Puerto Sierra, Honduras.

DisTRIBUTION: Known only from the type locality.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Percy Wilson 530, 1903 (type— Y).

, 148. Ipomoea anisomeres Robinson & Bartlett, Proc. Am. Acad. 43:

BE LOOT:

Perennial, glabrous; leaf-blades ovate, cordate, acute, 6-11 cm. long, paler

beneath; petioles 3-5 cm. long; peduncles 3.5-6 cm. long, cymosely many-flowered;

sepals glabrous, white-margined, outer ones 1-3 mm. long and suborbicular, inner

about 10 mm. long; corolla 6.5-7 cm. long, white with a purple throat, limb 4-5 cm.

broad; capsules ovoid, 10-12 mm. long.

TYPE LOCALITY: Gualan, Guatemala.

DisTRIBUTION: Southern Mexico to Central America.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Puebla; Near Metlaltoyuca, Goldman 67, 1898

(N). Guatemala: Gualan, Deam 318, 319, 1905 (type — G).

144. Ipomea oligantha Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 380. 1845.

Convolvulus pulchellus H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp.3: 101. 1819.

Convolvulus pauciflorus Willd.; Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 302. 1819.

Ipomea pulchella G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 276. 1838. Not. I. pulchella Roth, 1821.

Slender, twining, glabrous, perennial below; stems angled, puberulent; leaf-

blades triangular-ovate, caudate-acuminate, cuspidate, deeply cordate, 5-10 cm.

long, basal auricles laterally acute; petioles as long as blades, glandular-muricate

at base; peduncles pubescent at base, 3- to 5-flowered; pedicels 1-2 em. long; sepals

subequal, ovate, acute or subobtuse, 5-6 mm. long; corolla about 2 cm. long, limb

purple.

TypE Locality: Crescit in Regno Pereuviano.

DistRiBuTION: Southern Mexico to Bolivia and Brazil.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Mexico: Oaxaca, E. W. Nelson 1148, 1894

(N, G).

248 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

145. Ipomea purpusi sp. nov.

Stems stout, perennial below, 1-several m. long, densely pilose; leaf-blades

broadly ovate, 5-8 cm. long, cordate, deeply 3-lobed, acuminate, densely appressed-

hirsute and green above, paler and densely pubescent beneath with less appressed

hairs; petioles shorter than the blades; peduncles longer than the petioles, 4-10 em.

long, lanate above, 1- to 5-flowered; sepals oblong-lanceolate, acute and apiculate,

inner ones 8-10 mm. long, glabrous but ciliate near the apex, outer ones shorter,

pubescent and ciliate; corolla broadly campanulate-funnelform, about 3 cm. long

and the limb as broad.

Mexico: Zucuapan, Purpus 2213, 1906 (type — Y, N).

146. Ipomea collina House, Bot. Gaz. 43: 412. fig. 2. 1907.

Petioles as long as the blades or shorter; peduncles stout, 1- to 5-flowered, 13-25

em. long; sepals 8-14 mm. long, lanceolate, outer ones sparingly pubescent, inner

cuspidate-acute, glabrous; corolla purple, 5-7 cm. long.

Type Locatity: Near Saltillo, Coahuila, Mexico.

DistRisuTION: Known only from the type locality.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Palmer 396, 1904 (type—N, Y).

147. Ipomea gracilis R. Br. Prodr. 484. 1810. House, Torreya 7:

37, 38. 1907.

Convolvulus denticulatus Desr. in Lam. Encye. 3: 540. 1789.

Convolvulus gracilis Spreng. Syst. 1: 604. 1825.

ipomea denticulata Choisy in Mém. Soc. Phys. Genév. 6: 467. 1833—G. Don,

Gen. Syst. 4: 276. 1838.— Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 379. 1845.

Not I. denticulata R. Br. 1810.

Ipomea littoralis Blume, Bijdr. 713. 1826.—G.Don,l.ec. 265.

Ipomea cymosa Baker, Fl. Maurit. 208. 1877.

Ipomea nicobarica Kurz, Jour. As. Soc. Beng. 45: 141. 1876.

Ipomea choisiana W. F. Wight, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 9: 298. 1905.

Ipomea roseana House, Muhlembergia 3: 43. 1907.

Perennial, glabrous, stems dark; leaf-blades ovate, cordate or cordate-hastate,

obtuse or acute, mucronulate, 3-8 cm. long; peduncles 1- to 5-flowered, rarely many-

flowered; sepals ovate, inner slightly longer, broad and rounded but minutely cuspi-

date at apex, outer ones narrower, lanceolate-oblong, acuminate-cuspidate, 6-8 mm.

long; corolla purplish-pink, 4-5 em. long.

TYPE LocaLity: Cette espéce a été trouvée par Commerson dans les

Isles Mahé, Sechelles & des trois Fréres. (Desr.)

DisrripuTion: Circumtropical.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Mexico: Colima, Palmer 978, 1890 (N); Costa

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 249

Rica, Tonduz 13675, 1900 (Y). Cuba; Pringle 57, 1903 (G, Y). Britton

& Wilson 8, 271, 1903 (Y). Britton & Shafer 578, 269, 1903 (Y). Peol-

lard, Palmer & Palmer 272, 1902 (N, Y). Underwood & Earle 112, 1638,

1903 (Y). Isle of Pines, Curtiss 249, 1903 (G, Y, N). Bahamas: Great

Bahama, Brace 3646, 1905 (Y). Jamaica; Britton 973, 1907 (Y). Hayti;

Nash 349, 1903 (Y); Nash & Taylor 1043, 1905 (Y). Montserrat;

Shafer 167, 654, 1907 (Y). Dominica; Lloyd 354, 1903 (Y). Porto Rico;

Heller 6341, 1902 (Y); Mullspaugh 754, 1899 (Y). Culebra, Britton &

Wheeler 127, 1906.

Most of the so-called J. fastigiata, of the American tropics doubtless

belongs here.

» 148. Ipomea jicama Brandegee, Bull. Cal. Acad. II. 2: 188. 1889.

Type Locauity: Magdalena Islands, Santa Margarita Island, San

Jorge.

DisrrisuTion: Lower California and Islands off the coast.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Magdalena Bay, Lower Calif. Brandegee, 1889

(N). Also fragment of type in Herb. Gray.

19. Aequisepale. ‘Twining, perennial or annuals with entire or lobed

leaf-blades and herbaceous or woody stems, glabrous or pubescent; sepals

coriaceous, equal or nearly so, obtuse, acute or cuspidate; corolla purple,

yellow or white.

Leaf-blades strongly sagittate; corolla purple. 149. I. sagittata.

Leaf-blades ovate or cordate-sagittate (in I. polyanthes).

Corolla yellow.

Corolla 2-3 em. long; inflorescence umbellately

many-flowered; foliage glabrate or finely pubes-

cent. 150. I. polyanthes.

Corolla 4-5 em. long; stems strongly hirsute. 151. TI. longipes.

Corolla purple, blue or white. A.

A. Sepals cuspidately pointed or acuminate.

Sepals ciliate or pubescent; annuals.

Corolla 3 em. long, or longer. 152. I. trichocarpa.

Corolla less than 3 cm. long.

Peduncles longer than the petioles.

Corolla narrowly funnelform, 15 mm.

long or less, 153. I. triloba.

Corolla broadly funnelform, about 20

mm. long. 154. I. ramont.

Peduncles shorter than the petioles; co-

rolla-tube white, limb often pink. 155. I. lacunosa.

250 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF

Sepals glabrous; perennials.

Corolla 3 cm. long or less.

Corolla 2-3 cm. long; leaf-blades petioled,

3-5-lobed, rarely subentire.

Corolla 15 mm. long; leaf-blades subsessile,

entire.

Corolla 4 cm. long or more.

Inner sepals broadly obovate, rounded,

minutely cuspidate; outer ones lanceo-

late, cuspidate-acuminate.

Inner sepals oblong-lanceolate, cuspidate-

acuminate.

Sepals 10-14 mm. long; stems usually

glabrous and prostrate.

Sepals 8-10 mm. long; stems usually

pubescent and twining.

Sepals obtuse, subacute or rarely awned.

B. Sepals aristately awned; foliage silvery-pubescent

and sericeous.

Sepals not awned.

Foliage densely pubescent.

Pubescence shaggy; stems retrorsely hispid,

blades hirsute, entire; sepals glabrous.

Pubescence velvety or sericeous; blades en-

tire or unequally 3-lobed; sepals serice-

ous.

Foliage glabrous or at least not densely hir-

sute sericeous.

C. Stems stout and woody, often 2 cm. thick. West

Indian.

Stems slender, less than 1 em. thick.

Corolla salverform; blades subtriangular or ovate-

lanceolate, more or less pilose.

Corolla funnelform or campanulate-funnelform.

Corolla white or yellowish-white.

Leaf-blades oblong, rounded at the base.

Leaf-blades ovate, cordate or subcordate.

Corolla 3.5 em. long, yellowish-white with

a magenta base, blades entire.

Corolla 6-8 cm. long, white; blades en-

tire or 3-lobed.

Corolla or corolla-limb blue or purple.

D. Corolla 2-3 cm. long; sepals 4-5 mm. long.

Foliage glabrous; sepals acute.

Foliage more or less pubescent at least when

young.

Peduncles longer than the leaves.

Inflorescence 5 cm. long or less; corolla

minutely pubescent without, white

below.

SCIENCES

156. I. trifida.

157. I. peninsularis.

147. I. gracilis.

158. I. batatas.

159. I. tiliacea.

160. I. leucotricha.

161. I. signata.

162. I. tuztlensis. |

163. I. demerariana.

164. I. chenopodifolia.

166. I. robinsonit.

165. TI. curtissi.

167. I. dimorphophylla.

1D,

168. I. cardiophylla.

169. JI. perlonga.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 251

Inflorescence 10 cm. long; corolla gla-

brous, entirely purple; blades often

3-lobed. 171. J. umbraticola.

Peduncles shorter than the leaves; sepals

mucronulate; stems, petioles and ped-

uncles finely pubescent, with weak ten-

tacular-like outgrowths. 170. I. parasitica.

Corolla 4-6 cm. long or longer.

Foliage thin and glabrous; pedicels hollow and

wand-like.

Pedicels 2-3 cm. long; corolla 5-6 cm. long. 172. I. violacea.

Pedicels 4-6 cm. long; corolla 8-10 cm.

long. 173. I. pedicellaris.

Foliage firm-textured; pedicels not hollow or

wand-like.

Corolla white with a purple throat; ped-

uncles 1—2-flowered. 174. I. wallir.

Corolla blue or purple; blades cordate-sagit-

tate or cordate-hastate. 175. I. morelit.

/ 149. Ipomea sagittata Lam. Illus. 1: 466. 1791— Cav. Ic. 2: 4.

pl. 107. 1793— Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 372. 1845.— A.

Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2*: 212. 1878.

Convolvulus speciosus Walt. Fl. Car. 93. 1788. Not C. specwosus L. f. 1781.

Convolvulus wheeleri Vahl, Symb. Bot. 2: 36. 1791.

Convolvulus formosus Gmel. Syst. 1: 343. 1796.

Convolvulus sagittijolius Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 138. 1803.

Ipomea sagittaefolia Ker. Bot. Reg. pl. 436. 1820.

Fraxima sagittifolia Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 83. 1838.

Ipomea heterophylla G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 274. 1838.

Ipomea diversijolia F. Dietr. in Kjoeb. Vidensk. Meddel. 221. 1854.

Ipomea speciosa Hallier f. Bot. Jahrb. 18: 143. 1894.— Small, Fl. 962. 1903.

Not I. speciosa Pers. 1805.

Typre Locauity: Carolina. (Walt.)

DistrIBUTION: Marshes and fields near the coast, North Carolina to

northern Mexico, Bermuda, Bahamas, Cuba and the Mediterranean region.

. 150. Ipomea polyanthes Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 234. 1819.

Convolvulus amerwcanus, vulgaris folio, capsulis triquetris numerosis, Pluk. Alm

114. pl. 167. f. 1.

C. luteus polyanthos, Plum. Am. 88. pl. 102.

C. polyanthos, folio subrotundo, flore luteo, Sloan. Jam. 55.

Convolvulus umbellatus L. Sp. Pl. 155. 1753.— Desr. in Lam. Encye. 3: 555. 1789.

Convolvulus multiflorus Mill. Dict. No. 15. 1768.

252 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Ipomea umbellata G. F. W. Mey. Prim. Fl. Esseq. 99. 1819. Not I. umbellata L.

1759.

Convolvulus sagittifer H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 100. 1819.

Ipomea multiflora Roem. & Schult.1.¢. Not I. multiflora Roxb. 1814.

Convolvulus caracasanus Roem. & Schult. 1. c. 301.

Convolvulus millerianus Roem. & Schult. 1. ec. Index 821.

Ipomea primulejolia G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 270. 1838.

Ipomea sagittifer G. Don, 1. e. 273.

Fraxima umbellata Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 83. 1838.

Convolvulus densiflorus Hook. & Arn.-Bot. Voy. Beech. 303. 1841.

Convolvulus luteus Mart. & Gal. Bull. in Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 260. 1845.

Ipomea mollicoma Miq. Stirp. Surinam Select. 132. pl. 37. 1850.

Merremia umbellata Hallier f. Bot. Jahrb. 16: 552. 1893;— 18: 114. 1894.

Type LocaLity: Martinique Domingo, Jamaica (Linn.).

DisrrisuTion: Florida Keys, West Indies, western and southern Mex-

ico and Central America to Brazil, Bolivia and Paraguay.

151. Ipomea longipes Garcke, in Linnaea 22: 66. 1849.— Meissn.

in Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 268. 1869.

Similar to I. polyanthes, but the stems densely hirsute; sepals unequal, ciliate,

7-10 mm. long; corolla 4-5 cm. long.

Type tocauity: Near Poelebantje, Brazil.

DISTRIBUTION: Central America to Brazil.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Guatemala; Coban, H. von Tuerckheim (J.

Donnell Smith 1437), 1888 (Y, N).

152. Ipomea trichocarpa, Ell. Bot.S. C. & Ga.1: 258, 1817.1

Convolvulus folio hederaceo, arvensis, flore dilute purpureo, Dill. Hort. Elth. 100.

pl. 84. f. 98.

Convolvulus carolinus L. Sp. Pl. 154. 1753.

Ipomea carolina Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 1: 145. 1814. Not J. carolina L. 1753.

Ipomea commutata Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 228. 1819.— A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N.

Am: (230 213) 1878:

Ipomea caroliniana Pursh; Small, Fl. Southeastern U. 8. 963. 1903.

TYPE LOCALITY: Carolina.

DistTRIBUTION: South Carolina to Florida, Kansas, Texas and Mexico.

Reported throughout tropical America.

1J. H. Barnhart, Bull. Torrey Club 28: 680. 1901, on the dates of Elliot’s Flora.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 253

153. Ipomeea triloba L. Sp. Pl. 161. 1753— A. Gray, Syn. FI. N.

Am. 2!: 213. 1878.— Small, |. c. 963.

Ipomea eustachiana Jacq. Obs. 2: 12. 1767.

Convolvulus trilobus Desr. in Lam. Encyce. 3: 564. 1789.

Ipomea clausa Rudol.; Ledeb. in Schrad. Neues Jour. 2: 292. 1807.

Ipomea parviflora Vahl, Symb. 3: 34. 1794.— Lunan, Hort. Jam. 1: 402. 1814.

Convolvulus dentatus Blanco, FI. Filip. 89. 1837.

Amphione lobata Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 79. 1838.

Quamoclit triloba G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 259. 1838.

Quamoclit eustachiana G. Don, 1. c.

Convolvulus subquinquelobus Rees, Cyclop. No. 38. 1819.

Ipomea galapagensis Anderss. in Vet. Akad. Handl. Stock. 1853: 213. 1855.

Ipomea blancoi Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 389. 1845.

Ipomea commutata Naves, in FI. Filip. ed. 3. pl. 31. 1877.

Tpomea leucantha Baker, Fl. Maurit. 208. 1877. Not I. leucantha Jacq. 1788.

Ipomea batatas Usteri, Viertel. Naturf. Ges. Zurich 50: 122. 1905.

Convolvulus heterophyllus Moc. & Sesse, Fl. Mex. in La. Naturaleza II. 2: Append.

36. 1893.

TYPE LOCALITY: Jamaica (Sloane). America (Linn.).

DistripuTion: Dry or sandy thickets, peninsular Florida, Bahamas

and West Indies, Arizona to Central America and Brazil and the Philippine

Islands.

IntustraTIons: Sloane Jam. pl. 97. f. 1. Jacq. Obs. pl. 36.

154. Ipmowa ramoni Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 380. 1845.

Closely resembling I. triloba; calyx broadly campanulate; sepals unequal,

abruptly acuminate and setaceous, 4-7 mm. long, outer ones densely ciliate and

pubescent; corolla broadly funnelform, 1.75-2 cm. long or longer, the limb as broad,

pinkish-purple.

Typr Locatity: Near Havana, Cuba.

DISTRIBUTION: Cuba.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Guanajay, Curtiss 632, 1905 (Y); Havana,

Hermann 3117, 3883, 1905, (Y); Baker 3680 3847, 3986, 1904 (Y); Wilson

3640, 1904 (Y); Baker & Wilson 3875, 1904 (Y). Holquin, Bacajagua,

C. Wright 3085, 1860-64 (G).

155. Ipomea lacunosa L. Sp. Pl. 161. 1753— A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N.

Am. 21: 213. 1878.—Britton, Manual 752. 1901.—Small,

Fl. Southeastern U.S. 963. 1903.

-- Convolvulus stellatus, periplocae rotundioris folis, Dill. Hort. Elth. 103. pl. 87. f.

108.

254 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Convolvulus lacunosus Spreng. Syst. 1: 597. 1825.

Convolvulus micranthus Riddell, Syn. Fl. W. St. 70. 1835.

Type Locality: Carolina.

DistrisuTIon: Moist thickets, Pennsylvania to South Carolina, west

to Illinois, Mississippi and ‘Texas.

156. Ipomeea trifida (H. B. K.) G. Don, Gen. Syst.4: 280. 1838.—A.

Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 27: 212. 1878.— Small, 1. c. 963.

Convolvulus trifidus H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 107. 1819.

Convolvulus hepaticifolius Willd.; Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 303. 1819.

Type Locatity: In woods along the Orinoco river, between Carichana

and San Borja, Venezuela.

DistriBution: Southern Louisiana and Texas to Central and South

America. Also in the West Indies.

Ipomeea trifida (var.) torreyana A. Gray, |. c.

Ipomea commutata Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 149. 1859.

Western and southern Texas to western Mexico.

Ipomeea trifida (var.) berlandieri A. Gray, 1. c.

Central and southern Texas.

Ipomea trifida ymalensis var. nov.

Glabrous, twining; leaf-blades ovate, entire or shallowly 3-lobed or angled, cor-

date or cordate-hastate, acuminate, thin, pale-green beneath; peduncles elongated,

stout, 3-many flowered; sepals oblong-lanceolate, 9-11 mm. long; corolla less than

2 cm. long.

Mexico: Ymala, Palmer 1746, 1891 (type— Y, N); Palmer 1708, 1891

(Y, N).

157. Ipomcea peninsularis Brandegee, Zoe, 5: 168. 1903.

Slender, twining from a perennial, tuberous root, pubescent; leaf-blades ovate,

acuminate, deeply cordate, basal sinus often closed and clasping the stem in young

leaves, 5-6 cm. long; peduncles 3-6 cm. long, 1- to 3-flowered; sepals ovate, 4-5 mm.

long, glandular-muricate; corolla about 15 mm. long, pale-violet.

Typr Locatity: Western slopes of the Cape region, Lower California.

DistrisuTion: Lower California and western Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Lower California, Brandegee, 1902 (N). Jalisco;

Barcena 5538, 1887 (M).

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMG@A 255

158. Ipomea batatas (L.) Lam. Encyc. 6: 14. 1804— Willis, Prac.

Fl. 183. 1894.

Convolvulus batatas L. Sp. Pl. 154. 1753.

Convolvulus edulis Thunb. Fl. Jap. 84. 1784.

Ipomea catesbatei G. F. W. Mey, Prim. Fl. Esseq. 113. 1818.

Convolvulus esculentus, batata and varius Vell. Fl. Flum. 2: 73. 1827.

Batatas edulis Choisy in Mém. Soc. Phys. Genév. 6: 435. 1845.—In DC. Prodr. 9:

1845.

Convolvulus chrysorhizus Forst.; Wien. Illustr. Gartenz. 288. 1888.

TyprE Locality: Asia, Africa, America (Linn.).

DisTRIBUTION: Circumtropical, chiefly as a cultivated plant. Arkansas

to Texas, Florida and Mexico to South America. Sweet Potato.

IntustraTions: Catesb. Car. pl. 60. Moris. Hist.2: pl. 3.7.4. Rumph.

Amb. pl. 130. Rheed. Mal. 11: pl. 50. Dill. Elth.-pl. 80. 7. 91, 92; pl.

81, }. 93; pl. 82, f. 94; pl. 83, f. 95,96. Vell. Fl. Flum. 2: pl. 55, 58, 59, 61.

Apparently derived by cultivation from the next species and doubtfully

distinct from it.

159. Ipomeea tiliacea (Willd.) Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 375. 1845.—

Hallier f. Bull. Soc. Bot. Belg. 37: 95. 1898.

? Convolvutus platanijolius Vahl, Symb. 3: 26. 1794.

Convolvulus tiliaceus Willd. Enum. 1: 203. 1809.— Schlecht. in Linnaea 6: 739.

1831.

Convolvulus fastigiatus Roxb. Hort. Beng. 13. 1814.

Ipomea cymosa G. F. W. Mey. Prim. Fl. Esseq. 99. 1818.

? Ipomea platanifolia Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 220. 1819.

Convolvulus essequebensis Spreng. Syst. 1: 600. 1825.

Ipomea fastigiata Sweet, Hort. Brit. 288. 1826. Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 380.

1845.

Ipomea hirsuticaulis C. H. Wright, Kew Bull. 162. 1896.

TYPE LOCALITY: Brazil.

DistrisuTIon: Florida Keys and West Indies, southern Mexico to

Bolivia, Peru and Brazil.

160. Ipomea leucotricha J. Donnell Smith, Bot. Gaz. 23: 10. 1897.

Perennial; densely silvery-pubescent or sericeous; leaf-blades orbicular, 6-10

em. broad, cordate, entire, acute, sparingly pilose above, silvery beneath; peduncles

many-flowered, cymes 3-4 times dichotomous, corymbiform; sepals oblong-ovate,

6 mm. long, the awned apex recurved; corolla 5-6 cm. long, canescent in bud.

Typr LocaLity: Newton, Guatemala.

DISTRIBUTION: Guatemala.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Newton, Nelson 3512, 1895 (type —N).

256 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

161. Ipomea signata House, Muhlenbergia 3: 46. 1907.

Stout, perennial; stems and foliage densely pubescent or hirsute; stems re-

trorsely hirsute and terete; leaf-blades ovate, cordate, acute, 4-6 cm. long; ped-

uncles 8-12 cm. long, 1- to 3-flowered; calyx glabrous; sepals ovate, 9-10 mm.

long; corolla crimson, 6-7 cm. long, glabrous.

TypE LocALity: Between Jacaltenango and San Martin, Guatemala.

DistriBuT10N: Known only from the type locality.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED; E. W. Nelson 3595, 1895 (type — 252762— N).

162. Ipomea tuxtlensis sp. nov.

A slender, perennial, twining vine, 2-3 m. long, softly pubescent; leaf-blades

ovate, cordate, acuminate, entire or more or less 3-lobed, 5-8 em. long, nearly as

broad, softly appressed-pubescent above, sericeous or silvery beneath; petioles

shorter than the blades; inflorescence subsessile on peduncles 4-8 mm. long, 3- to 7-

flowered; bracts linear-spatulate, 8-18 mm. long; pedicels 4-5 mm. long or less;

sepals subequal, oblong-ovate, outer ones densely sericeous-pubescent, rounded at

apex, inner ones glabrous or nearly so, submembranaceous, retuse at apex, 10-12

mm. long; corolla deep purple, 3.5-5 em. long, the limb 3-4 em. broad and 5-lobed.

Mexico: Chiapas, Tuxtla, 2400-2800 ft. alt. H.W. Nelson 3094, 1895

(type — 234042 —N); 3102, 1895 (233069—N, G).

163. Ipomca demerariana Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 361. 1845—

Griseb. Fl. Br. W. Ind. 471. 1861.

Leaf-blades orbicular, deeply cordate, acute, 8-16 cm. broad; peduncles 10-20

cm. long, 3-several flowered; sepals 15-18 mm. long; corolla purple (yellow fide

Choisy), 5-8 em. long, funnelform; anthers contorted.

TyprE Locality: Demerara.

DISTRIBUTION: Lesser Antilles, Guiana and Brazil.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Dominica; Lloyd 241, 633, 982, 1903 (Y).

Guadeloupe; Duss 4026, 1899 (Y). Martinique; Duss 4102, 4402, 1899

(Y).

164. Ipomca chenopodiifolia (Mart. & Gal.) Hensley, Biol. Cent.-

Am. Bot. 2: 385. 1882.

Calonyction chenopodiijoluum Mart. & Gal. Bull. in Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 269. 1845.

— Walp. Rep. 6: 531. 1847.

The perennial stems woody, muricate or tuberculate, hirsute with reflexed hairs;

leaf-blades 8-12 cm. long, about 5 cm. broad, pilose beneath and on the veins above,

the base hastate with a broad open sinus: petioles short; peduncles shorter than the

petioles, pilose, 3-4 em. long, 1-flowered; sepals ovate, obtuse, apiculate, glabrous;

corolla purple, 5-8 cm. long.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 207

Tyre LocaLity: Oak woods, Juquila, Mexico (Galeotte 1375). Not

known by any recent collections.

165. Ipomea curtissii sp. nov.

Slender, twining, 1-2 m. long, finely and densely pubescent or canescent; leaf-

blades ovate, entire, cordate, acute, 2-5 cm. long and as broad, or broader, glabrous

or nearly so; petioles usually shorter; peduncles rarely longer than the petioles,

1- to 5-flowered; pedicels 15-20 mm. long and slightly thickened, recurved in fruit;

sepals subequal, greenish, puberulent, scarious-margined, ovate, acute, 5-6 mm.

long; corolla yellowish with a magenta base, funnelform, about 4 cm. long, the sub-

entire limb as broad; capsules ovoid, acute, about 12 mm. long, 2-celled; seeds

glabrous.

Cusa: Havana, Curtiss 562, 1904 (type— Y,G). Panama; Santa Rita

Trail, Cowell 166, 1905 (Y).

Apparently differing from J. obscura Ker. only by its larger sepals and

larger corolla of a more decided yellow.

166. Ipomeea robinsonii sp. nov.

A slender, glabrous, twining vine with zig-zag leafy branches; leaf-blades ellipti-

cal-oblong, rounded at base, apex obtuse or subacute, 6-8 cm. long, 2—4.5 em. broad,

punctate; petioles 1-2 cm. long; peduncles 1-flowered, less than 2 cm. long, the

two large yellowish-green bracts elliptical-lanceolate and acute, tapering to the

base; sepals orbicular-ovate, rounded at apex, 7-9 mm. long; corolla slender funnel-

form, 6-8 cm. long, white, the limb 3.5-4 cm. broad, with 5 rounded lobes; stamens

nearly as long as the corolla; capsules ovoid, 1 cm. long, apiculate.

Mexico: Morelos; Lava beds near Cuernavaca, Pringle 7338, 1896

(type — G).

Named in honor of Dr. B. L. Robinson, curator of the Gray Herbarium

of Harvard University.

“167. Ipomea dimorphophylla Greenm. in Proc. Am. Acad. 33: 482.

1898. Ci

Slender, perennial below, more or less pubescent with fine hairs; leaf-blades

ovate-oblong, 4-10 cm. long, 3-8 cm. broad, shallowly cordate, acuminate, entire or

variously 3-lobed, more or less pubescent beneath; peduncles shorter than the peti-

oles, 1-several flowered; sepals thick and coriaceous, obtuse, 6-7 mm. long; corolla

white, 6-8 cm. long.

Type Locatity: Near Cuernavaca, Morelos, Mexico.

DistrisuTion: Morelos and Oaxaca, Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Cuernavaca, Pringle 6658, 1897 (type—G, N,

258 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Y); 7241, 1896 (G); 13779, 1906 (G). Deam 59, 1900 (G). Oaxaca:

Conzatti & Gonzalez 505, 1897; 968, 1895 (G); Pringle 5677, 1894 (G).

168. Ipomeea cardiophylla A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2': 213. 1878.

Glabrous; leaf-blades ovate, hastate-cordate, 5-8 cm. long, thin; sepals ovate,

acute, green with white scarious margins, 4-5 mm. long; corolla blue with a white

tube 2-3 cm. long; capsules ovoid.

Typr LocaLity: Near El Paso, Texas.

DisTRIBUTION: Rocky places, western Texas to Arizona and northern

Mexico, south to Oaxaca.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Texas; C. Wright 511 (type —G). Chihuahua;

Pringle 617, 1885 (G). Coahuila; Palmer 904, 1880, (G, N). Oaxaca;

Rev. L. C. Smith 847, 1895 (G); Gonzalez & Conzatti 898, 1898 (G).

169. Ipomea perlonga Robinson, Proc. Am. Acad. 29: 319. 1894.

Young foliage minutely silvery-pubescent, stems with or without prickles;

leaf-blades orbicular-ovate, cordate, acute, 3-10 cm. broad, more or less strigillose-

pubescent, paler beneath; peduncles 15-30 cm. long, 5- to 15-flowered; pedicels

slightly thickened and deflexed in fruit, 6-15 mm. long; sepals 4 mm. long, obtuse;

corolla 4 cm. long, minutely pubescent without on the plice.

Type Locauity: Tequila, Mexico.

DISTRIBUTION: Lower California and western Mexico to Central

America.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Tequila, Palmer 4519, 1893 (type —G, N, C).

170. Ipomeea parasitica (H. B. K.) G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 275. 1838.

Convolvulus parasiticus H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 103. 1819.

Convolvulus circinnatus Willd.; Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 302. 1819.

Stems glabrous or finely pubescent in lines, with a few weak recurved prickles;

leaf-blades orbicular-ovate, 6-8 cm. long, the apex often acuminate, minutely pubes-

cent above, less so beneath; peduncles shorter than the petioles 5- to 9-flowered;

sepals 4-5 mm. long, outer ones subacute and minutely cuspidate, pubescent, inner

ones rounded; corolla silvery-canescent in bud, about 3 em. long, pubescent without

on the tube.

Tyrr Locality: Near Caracas, Venezuela.

DISTRIBUTION: Southern Mexico to Venezuela.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Costa Rica; Nicoya, Tonduz 13679, 1900 (Y).

San Jose, Tonduz 1561, 1893 (G). Guatemala; Santa Rosa, Heyde &

Tux. (J. Donnell Smith 4024), 1892 (G).

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@A 259

171. Ipomcea umbraticola sp. nov.

~ Perennial; stems furrowed, twisted below, glabrous; leaf-blades ovate, entire

or usually 3-lobed, cordate, 6-10 cm. long, nearly as broad, with some minute his-

pidulous pubescence above, glabrous or nearly so beneath, middle lobe oblong, acu-

minate, lateral lobes spreading, acute, subtriangular; petioles filiform, shorter than

the blades; peduncles stout, longer than the leaves, angled, 10-15 cm. long, cymosely

many-flowered; pedicels 1-2 cm. long; sepals glabrous, flavescent, subequal, 4.5-5

mm. long, suborbicular, imbricated, retuse and mucronulate; corolla funnelform,

4 cm. long; capsules ovate, obtuse, 7-8 mm. long, 2-celled; seeds glabrous.

Costa Rica: Nicoya, Tonduz 13677 (ex Herb. H. Puttier), 1900 (type —

wy).

172. Ipomea violacea L. Sp. Pl. 161. 1753.

Ipomea foliis cordatis integerrimis, floribus confertis, corallis indivisis, Sauv.

Monsp. 114.

Quamoclit joliis amplissimis cordiformibus, Plum. Sp. 3; Am. pl. 93.7.1. Sloan.

Jam.55. Hist.1: 155. pl. 98.7. 1.

Convolvulus indicus Mill. Dict. No.5. 1768.

Ipomea tricolor Cav. Ic. Pl. Rar. 3: 5. pl. 208. 1794.

Convolvulus violaceus Spreng. Syst. 1: 399. 1825.

Convolvulus venustus Spreng. 1. c.

Ipomea rubrocerulea Hook. Bot. Mag. pl. 3297. 1834.

Pharbitis violacea Bojer, Hort. Maurit. 227. 1837.— Choisy in DC. Prodr. 9: 344.

1845.

Teretetra violacea Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 124. 1838.

Ipomea hookeri G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 274. 1838.

Pharbitis rubroceruleus Planch. Fl. des Serres 9: 281. pl. 966. 1854.

Convolvulus rubroceruleus D. Dietr. Syn. Pl. 1: 670. 1839.

Ipomea puncticulata Benth. Bot. Voy. Sulph. 136. 1845.—S. Wats. in Proc. Am.

Acad. 22: 440. 1887.

Peduncles hollow and wand-like, longer than the petioles; leaf-blades ovate,

cordate, often early deciduous; pedicels 2-3 em. long; sepals 5-6 mm. long, green-

ish with white, scarious margins; corolla 5-6 em. long, violet-blue or purple with a

white tube.

Type tocauity: Habitat in America meridionali.

DisTRIBUTION: Western Mexico to Central America, Antilles and

tropical South America.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Guanajuato, A. Duges 4, 23, 1904 (G). Oax-

aca; E. W. Nelson 1311, 1894 (N, G); L. C. Smith 300, 1894 (G); Mrs.

D. H. Sheldon, 1893 (G); Morelos; Cuernavaca, Borgeau 1405, 1865 (G).

Costa Rica; San Jose, Tonduz 7181, 1892 (G). Jalisco; Chapala, Palmer

702, 1886 (N, C); Puebla; Near Tehuacan, Rose & Rose 11441, 1906

(N, Y); Yucatan; Gawmer 329 (Y).

260 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Guadeloupe; Duss 3591, 1894 (Y); Antigua; Duss 3, 1902.

Guatemala; Santa Rosa, Heyde & Lux. (ex J. Donnell Smith, 4352),

1892 (G).

173. Ipomeea pedicellaris Benth. Bot. Voy. Sulph. 135. 1844.— Walp.

Rep. 6: 533. 1847.

Ipomea rubrocerulea A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 21: 434. 1886. Not I. rubroce-

rulea Hook. 1834.

Ipomea grayt Rose, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 1: 107. 1891.

Leaf-blades broadly ovate, 6-10 cm. long, shallowly cordate or subtruncate,

entire, acuminate; peduncles 4-6 cm. long, 1-several flowered; pedicels as long as

the peduncle, thickened, curved; sepals oblong-ovate, unequal, obtuse, 6-8 mm.

long; corolla purple.

Type LocaLity: Acapulco, Mexico, and Tiger Island, Gulf of Fonseca.

DISTRIBUTION: Western Mexico.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Sonora; Schott, 1855 (C). Ymala, Palmer

1704, 1891; 1997a, 1902; 710, 1890. ‘Tepic, Palmer 1997, 1892. Chihua-

hua, Palmer 102, 1885 (N, ©, G). Sinaloa; Lamb 359, 1894 (G); Brande-

gee, 1904 (G). Guerrero; Acapulco, Palmer 154, 1894-96 (N, G, C).

174. Ipomea wallii (Morren) Hemsley, Biol. Cent.-Am. Bot. 2: 396.

1882.

Batatas wallit Morren, in Ann. Soc. d’Argic. Bot. Gand. 2: 285. 1846. Walp. Rep.

6: 530. 1847.

Perennial from a tuberous root; glabrous, swollen at the nodes and bearing

tentacular outgrowths on both sides of the node; petioles stout, leaf-blades ovate,

cordate, acute, 7-15 cm. long; sepals ovate, acute; peduncles shorter than the

petioles.

TypPE Locality: Guatemala. Not known by any recent collections in

American herbaria. Exact relationship doubtful.

175. Ipomea morelii Duchass. & Walp. Linnaea 23: 752. 1850.—

Walp. Ann. Bot. Syst. 3: 109. 1852-53.

Perennial, glabrous, twining 1-4 m. long; leaf-blades narrowly ovate, deeply

cordate, long acuminate, 6-9 cm. long, 3-6 cm. broad, hastately lobed at the base or

entire, lobes laterally acute, basally rounded, pale beneath; petioles shorter than

the blades; peduncles as long as the petioles or longer, 3-7 em. long, 1- to 5-flowered;

pedicels slightly thickened, 1-2 cm. long; sepals subequal, glabrous, oblong-ovate,

5-8 mm. long, the outer slightly the shortest, obtuse; corolla 5-6 cm. long, white

below, the tube constricted within the calyx, the limb deep-blue, 4-5 em. broad, 5-

lobed.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOMGA 261

TYPE LOCALITY: Panama.

DISTRIBUTION: Southern Mexico to Colombia.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Chiapas: Between Hacienda Juncana and San

Vicente, 4200-6000 ft. alt. E. W. Nelson 3499, 1895 (252747 — N); Between

San Cristobal and Teopisca, 6700-8500 ft. alt. E. W. Nelson 3479, 1895

(N). Referred to J. morelu by description only. The above description

applies to the specimens here cited which may not be J. morelit.

Species Inquirende.

Ipomeea apiculata Mart. & Gal. in Bull. in Acad. Brux. XII. 2: 262 1845.—

Walp. Rep. 6: 534. 1847.

aristulata Mart. & Gal. 1. c. 263. Walp. 1. ¢. 535.

costaricensis Kuntze, Rev. Gen. 443. 1891.

nematoloba Urban, Sym. Ant. 3: 349. 1902.

karwinskiana Regal, Ind. Sem. Hort. Petrop. 1857: 46. 1858.

lactescens Beuth. Pl. Hartw. 120. 1843.

pauciflora Mart. & Gal. 1. c. 266.

proximum (Mart. & Gal.) Hemsley, Biol. Cent.-Am. Bot. 2: 392. 1882,

(Calonyction proximum Mart. & Gal. 1. c. 268.)

schiedeana Ham. in Lindl. Bot. Reg. Misc. 19. 1838.

sericophylla Peter, in Engl. & Prantl. Nat. Pflanzenfam. IV. 3a: 31. 1891.

triflora Maria & Velasco, in La Naturaleza 2: 338. 1870.

truncata Lem. Hort. Univ. 2: 33. Pl. 49.

walpersiana Duchass.; Urb. 1. c. 345.

Species excludende.

Ipomea egyptia L. Sp. Pl. 162. 1753. Operculina egyptia House.

alata Rose, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 1: 108. 1891.= Operculina rubicunda

House.

alatipes Hook. Bot. Mag. pl. 5330. 1862. Operculina alatipes House.

alba L. Sp. Pl. 161. 1753.= Calonyction album (L.) House.

altissima (Spreng.) Bert.; G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 273. 1838.— Exogonium

racemosum Choisy.

alulata Miq. Linnaea 18: 599. 1844,= Operculina alata (Ham.) Urban.

ampliata Choisy, DC. Prodr. 9: 361. 1845.— Operculina ampliata House.

antilliana Millsp. Field. Col. Mus. Bot. 2: 84. 1900.= Turbina corymbosa

(L.) Raf.

arenaria Steud. Nom. ed. 2. 1: 815. 1841.= Exogonium arenarium Choisy.

argentijolium A. Rich. in Sagra Fl. Cub. 2: 131. 1850. Exogonium.

aurea Kellogg; Curran, Bull. Cal. Acad.1: 143. 1885.— Operculina.

bona-nox L. Sp. Pl. ed. 2. 228. 1762.= Calonyction aculeatum (L) House.

bracteata Cav.Ic.5: 51. 1799. Exogonium bracteatum Choisy; G. Don.

bracteata Rud.; Ledeb. in Schrad. Neues Jour. Bot. 2: 292. 1807.= Exo-

gonium.

262

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Ipomea cincta Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 254. 1819.= Exogonium bracteatum

Choisy.

coccinea L. Sp. Pl. 160. 1753.= Quamoclit coccinea Moench.

conzattt Greenm. Field. Col. Mus. Bot. 2: 258. 1907.= Exogonium.

corraliensis Choisy, DC. Prodr. 9: 361. 1845.= Operculina.

corymbosa G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 274. 1838.= Turbina corymbosa Raf.

desrousseauzii Steud. Nom. Ed. 2, 1: 816. 1841. Exogonium eriosper-

mum Choisy.

dissecta Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 1: 145. 1814. Operculina dissecta House.

domingensis (Desr.) House, Muhlenbergia 3: 38. 1907.= Turbina corym-

bosa (L.) Raf.

eriosperma Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 74. 1838.— Urb. Symb. Ant. 3: 350.

1902.= Exogonium eriospermum Choisy.

filiformis Jacq. Enum. Pl. Carib. 13. 1760. Exogonium filiforme Choisy.

juchsioides Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 205. 1866. Exogonium.

junis Cham. & Schlecht. Linnaea 5: 118. 1830. Quamoclit.

glaberrima Boj. Hook. Jour. Bot. 1: 357. 1834. Calonyction album (L.)

House.

globosa Meissn. Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 220. 1869. Quamoclit.

grandiflora Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 240. 1819. Calonyction aculeatum

(L.) House.

grandiflora Hallier f. Bot. Jahrb. 18: 153. 1894.— Calonyction album

(L.) House.

hamiltont G. Don, Gen. Syst. 4: 268. 1838.= Operculina alata (Ham.)

Urb.

hastigera H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 111. 1819. Quamoclit coccinea

hederifolia (L.) House.

havanensts Choisy, DC. Prodr. 9: 368. 1845.= Jacquemontia havanensis

Urb.

hederijolia L. Syst. ed. 10. 925. 1759.= Quamoclit coccinea hederifolia

(L.) House.

jalapoides Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 202. 1866.= Exogonium.

latiflora Lindl. Bot. Reg. pl. 889. 1825.= Calonyction aculeatum (L.)

House.

leuconeura Urb. Symb. Ant. 3: 350. 1902.— Exogonium.

llaveana Meissn. 1. ec. 219.= Quamoclit.

longiflora Humb. & Bonpl.; Willd. Enum. 207. 1809.= Calonyction

aculeatum (L.) House.

luteola Jacq. Ic. Rar. 1: pl. 35. 1781-86.= Quamoclit coccinea var.

luteola Meissn. (Quamoclit. lutea Hemsley).

megacarpa Brandegee, Zoe 5: 218. 1905.= Operculina ornithopoda

(Robinson) House.

melanosticta (Schlecht.) G. Don, 1. c. 271.= Rivia tilizfolia Choisy.

microdactyla Griseb. 1. ¢. 204.= Bxogonium.

muricata (L.) Jacq. Hort. Schoenb. 3: 40. 1798.= Calonyction murica-

tum G. Don.

nuda Peter; Engl. & Prantl. Nat. Pfl. VI. 3a: 31. 1891.= Operculina

tuberosa (L.) Meissn.

operculata Mart.; in Spix. & Mart. Reise Bras. 2: 547. 1828.= Operculina

macrocarpa (L.) Urban.

HOUSE, THE GENUS IPOM@GA 263

Ipomea ornithopoda Robinson, Proc. Am. Acad. 27: 183. 1892.= Operculina

ornithopoda House.

palmert S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 24: 63. 1889.= Operculina palmeri

House.

peduncularis Bert. Fl. Guatem. 8, 1840. Quamoclit vitifolia (Cav.) G.

Don.

pentaphylla (L.) Jacq. Coll. 2: 297. 1788.= Operculina sgyptia (L.)

House.

perryana Duch. & Walp. in Linnaea 23: 751. 1850.= Thyella lactescens

(Seem.) House.

precox Wright; in Sauv. Fl. Cub. 107. 1868.= Exogonium.

pterodes Choisy, DC. Prodr. 9: 361. 1845.— Griseb. Fl. Br. W. Ind. 313.

1861.= Operculina alata (Ham.) Urban.

pterodes Seem. Bot. Voy. Herald 171. 1857.= Operculina alatipes House.

Quamoclit L. Sp. Pl. 159. 1753.= Quamoclit quamoclit (L.) Britton. «4

racemosa Poir. Encyc. Suppl. 4: 633. 1816.= Exogonium racemosum

Choisy.

repanda Jacq. Enum. Pl. Carib. 13. 1760. Exogonium repandum Choisy.

rhodocalyc A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 22: 439. 1887.= Operculina rho-

docalyx House.

rudolph Roem. & Schult, Syst. 4: 222. 1819.= Exogonium.

serpyllifolia (H. B. K.) G. Don, 1. ¢. 267.= Jacquemontia serpyllifolia

Urban.

sidefolia Choisy, Mém. Soc. Phys. Genév. 6: 459. 1833.= Turbina corym-

bosa (L.) Raf.

sinuata Ort. Hort. Matr. Dec. 84. 1798.= Operculina dissecta (Jacq.)

House.

spicata H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 112. 1819. Exogonium bractea-

tum (Cav.) Choisy.

spinulosa Brandegee, |. c. 169.= Calonyction muricatum (L.) G. Don.

steudeli Millsp. 1. c. 86. Exogonium arenarium Choisy.

tamnifolia L. Sp. Pl. 161. 1753.= Thyella tamnifolia Raf.

tastensis Brandegee, 1. c. 168.= Calonyction tastense House.

tiliejolia (Lam.) Roem. & Schult. Syst. 4: 229. 1819.= Rivia tilizfolia

Choisy.

triquetra Roem. & Schult. 1. ec. 231.= Operculina triquetra (Vahl) Hallier.

tuba (Schlecht.) G. Don, 1. c. 271.= Calonyction album (L.) House.

tuberosa L. Sp. Pl. 160. 1753.= Operculina tuberosa Meissn.

ventricosa (Bert.) G. Don, 1]. ec. 274.= Operculina ventricosa Peter.

versicolor Meissn. Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 220. 1869.= Quamoclit, (Mina lobata

Llav. & Lax.; Quamoclit mina G. Don.).

[Annas N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vol. XVIII, No. 7, Part II, pp. 265-311. May, 1908.]

RECORD OF MEETINGS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

January, 1906, to December, 1906.

By W. M. WHEELER, Recording Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

JANUARY 8, 1906.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M., at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following names were then presented for election to Active Mem-

bership, having been approved by the Council:

Cleveland Abbe, 2017 I St., Washington, D. C.,

H. F. De Puy, Care of H. F. Raymond, 466 Dunham Ave.,

Cleveland, O.,

George E. Dimock, 907 No. Broad St., Elizabeth, N. J.,

Milton Franklin, M. D., 112 West 47th Street,

W. K. Gregory, American Museum of Natural History,

Charles S. Hirsch, 259 West 72nd Street,

Mrs. E. A. Hoffman, 135 East 21st Street,

T. D. Hurlbut, 104 Hicks St., Brooklyn,

Titus B. Meigs, 16 East 65th Street,

Dr. Alexander Petrunkewitch, Short Hills, N. J.,

Jesse W. Reno, 684 St. Nicholas Ave.,

265

266 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Frederick A. Richardson, 15 West 67th Street,

C. Sidney Shepard, New Haven, N. Y.,

Richard L. Walsh, 188 Eighth Ave., Brooklyn.

The Candidates were unanimously elected by vote of the Academy.

The meeting then adjourned.

W. M. WHEELER,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

JANUARY 8, 1906.

Section met at 8:30 P. M., Vice-President Hovey presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

E. 0. Hovey, NoTES ON THE GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY OF THE WEST-

ERN SIERRA Mapre. (With lantern illustrations.)

A. W. Grabau, Discovery OF THE SCHOHARIE Fauna IN MICHIGAN.

Geo. F. Kunz, PRELIMINARY NoTE ON SpoRADIC OCCURRENCE OF D1IA-

MONDS IN NorTH AMERICA.

Dr. Kunz then exhibited and described the volumes illustrating the

Bishop collection of Jades.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Hovey gave a concise résumé with the aid of lantern slides of his

observations during an expedition made for the American Museum of

Natural History in February, March and April, 1905. The route trav-

ersed lay southwestward and southward from Ciudad Juarez to Ocampo,

thence to the railroad again at Mifaca. The development of bolson deserts

in arid regions and the similar bolson basins in the less arid regions was

described. These bolsons have normally no external drainage, but in many

cases they have been invaded by streams from without. The Aros River

has cut through several such inclosed basins, as is shown by the remains

of local conglomerates and sandstones. The section exposed in the deep

canyon of the Aros shows that a foundation of Cretaceous (?) limestone

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 267

has been covered by old andesitic eruptives; that continental movements

have raised, tilted, faulted and metamorphosed the limestone, producing

schists from clayey beds; that granite has been intruded under and into

the limestone; that later and more acid lavas (rhyolites) and tuffs have

been poured out or deposited over the regivn; that the latest outflows were

of basaltic lavas; that the local conglomerates and sandstones have been

formed in constructional basins by the disintegration of the mountain

slopes. Many other points of geologic interest were brought out in the

photographs.

Professor Grabau said that recent examination of the limestones of the

Mackinaw region for the Michigan Geologic Survey, showed the existence

of the Schoharie fauna in the basal portion of the Dundee formation, in

a number of localities in the northern part of lower Michigan; notably at

Mill Creek, near Mackinaw City, and on Mackinaw Island. Such typical

species as Trochoceras clio, Atrypa impressa, Rhipidomella alea, Cono-

cardeum cuneus, Phacops cristatus, etc., characterize this fauna. The

strata containing it rest directly upon beds with Leperditia opscalaris, and,

therefore, of lower Manlius (Greenfield limestone, Cobleskill) age, from

which they are separated by a pronounced disconformity. The finding

of this fauna fixes the date of the great mid-Devonic transgression.

Dr. Kunz pointed out the general features of the occurrence of diamonds

in North America, reserving more complete discussion for the next meeting.

The meeting then adjourned.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secetary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

JANUARY 15, 1906.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., at the American Museum of Natural History,

Vice-President Crampton presiding.

The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and approved.

The following program was then offered.

William Beutenmiiller, THe SoutH AMERICAN SpEcIES oF Motus BELonc-

ING TO THE GENUS Alttacus.

R. C. Osburn, SoME EXPERIMENTS ON DRAGON FLIES IN BRACKISH

WATER.

268 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Henry F. Osborn,

G. N. Calkins, NoTES ON THE LEADING Papers READ AT THE

F. E. Lloyd and MEETINGS AT NEW ORLEANS AND ANN ARBOR.

other members. |

The meeting then adjourned.

M. A. BIGELow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

JANUARY 22, 1906.

Section met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural His-

tory, Vice-President Trowbridge presiding.

The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and approved.

Dr. Milton Franklin was unanimously elected Secretary of the Section

for 1906.

The following program was then offered:

C. C. Trowbridge, (1) RESEMBLANCES BETWEEN THE METEOR TRAIN AND

THE AFTER-GLOW PRODUCED BY THE ELECTRODE-

LESS DISCHARGE.

(2) PLAN FOR A GENERAL OBSERVATION OF METEOR

TRAINS.

The meeting then adjourned.

MILTON FRANKLIN,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

JANUARY 29, 1906.

Section met in conjunction with the American Ethnological Society,

at 8:15 P. M., at the American Museum of Natural History.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906

269

George F. Kunz, THE GREAT ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE OF THE HEBER R.

BisHop CoLuEcTI

ON OF JADE, NOW ON EXHIBITION AT

THE MeEtTRopoLitaN Museum oF ART.

C. V. Hartman, UsE anp ORNAMENTATION OF THE TREE CALABASH IN

TROPICAL AMERICA.

The meeting then adjourned.

BUSINESS

R. S. Woopwokts,

Secretary.

MEETING.

FEBRUARY 5, 1906.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M.,

History, President Britton presiding.

at the American Museum of Natural

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following candidates for Act

ive Membership were then presented

for election having been recommended by the Council:

Francis S. Bangs,

Miss Cora F. Barnes,

Miss M. L. Baugh,

Frederick Billings,

Mrs. W. R. Birdsall,

Emil L. Boas,

William H. Brisley,

William H. Burr,

Charles L. Case,

George W. Collord,

David S. Cowles,

Henry Willard Bean,

Carl Eickemeyer,

Francisco Escobar,

Anton C. Hodenpyl,

Charles E. Hughes,

James N. Jarvie,

Clark Wissler,

161 West 73 Street,

6 East 65 Street,

15 West 67 Street,

279 Madison Aveuue,

Wellsville, N. Y.,

128 West 74 Street,

104 West 70 Street,

151 West 74 Street,

343 West 87 Street,

884 Fifth Avenue,

Rye, Westchester, Co., N. Y.,

15 William Street,

Yonkers, N. Y.,

1269 Bergen Street, Brooklyn,

7 Wall Street,

570 West End Avenue,

Montclair, N. J.,

Amer. Museum of Nat. Hist.

The Candidates were unanimously elected.

The Academy then adjourned.

W. M. WHEELER,

Recording Secretary.

270 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

FEeBrRuARY 5, 1906.

The Section met at 8:30 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and approved.

The following program was then presented:

F.§. Lee, Acid AnD Faticue. (Illustrated by stereopticon.)

B. T. Terry, THE SPIROCHETE OF RELAPSING FEVER. (With demonstra-

tions.)

C. W. Hahn, Proposep BIoLOGICAL SURVEY OF NEw YorkK STATE.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Lee presented the results of his recent studies on “Acid and

Fatigue.” In previous communications to the academy, the author dis-

cussed the physical phenomena of fatigue and the relation to them of lack

of carbohydrate. The present paper presents the results of further re-

searches on the causation of fatigue. The physiological action on muscle

of sarcolactic acid, potassium sarco-lactate, mono-potassium phosphate

and carbon dioxide has been studied in detail. All of these substances

are markedly fatiguing, their action consisting in general of a diminution

of lifting power and a slowing of contraction. These substances, which

are produced during muscular activity, are rightly named fatigue sub-

stances. The author believes, moreover, that fatigue in many pathologi-

cal states, such as diabetes mellitus, fevers, carcinoma, anzemia, various

disorders of digestion and inanition, is largely due to the pathological

acids that are present and produce the so-called acid intoxication of these

diseases. He finds, for example, B-oxy-butyric acid, and its salts, which

are characteristic of diabetes mellitus, to be fatiguing, like the physiolog-

ical acid fatigue substances. Not unfrequently in pathological, as in nor-

mal states both lack of carbohydrate and accumulation of acid are present

as factors in the causation of fatigue. This is notably so in diabetes, fevers

and inanition.

Dr. Terry gave a résumé of recent work on the spirochete of relapsing

fever.

Dr. Hahn called attention to the proposed biological survey for the

state of New York.

The Section then adjourned.

M. A. BicELow,

Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 oT

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

FEBRUARY 12, 1906.

The Section met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Hovey presiding.

The minutes of the preceding meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

J. H. Wilson, Discovery or Fosstn SHELLS IN MANHATTAN ISLAND.

Geo. F. Kunz, DimaMonps IN AMERICA.

G. M. Richards, GEOLOGY oF THE COUNTRY TRAVERSED BY THE WALLACE

EXPEDITION TO LABRADOR IN 1905.

J. F. Kemp, THE TRAP DYKE IN FAYETTE County, PENN.

All the papers were followed by discussions.

The Section then adjourned.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY. —

Frpruary 19, 1906.

The Section met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Trowbridge presiding.

The program of the evening consisted of a public lecture:

5S. A. Mitchell, “Tue Tota Eciipse or THE Sun or Avaust, 1905.”

The lecture was illustrated by a fine series of steropticon views made

from photographs taken during the eclipse, and was well attended by

members and their friends.

Mitton FRANKLIN,

Secretary.

272 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

FEBRUARY 26, 1906.

The Section met in conjunction with the New York Section of the

American Psychological Association in Dodge Hall, Princeton University,

Princeton, N. J. ‘Two sessions were held, one in the afternoon at 4 o’clock,

the other in the evening at 7: 30 o'clock.

The following program was offered:

Ajternoon Session.

A. L. Jones, METHOD IN ASTHETICS.

W. M. Urban, Some New Points or VIEW IN THE PsycHOLOGY

OF VALUATION.

Irving King, A PsycHoLtocicaAL THEORY OF THE ORIGIN OF

RELIGION.

Vivian A. C. Henmon, THE DetTecTION oF CoLor BLINDNESS.

R. 8S. Woodworth, CoLor SENSATIONS AND CoLor NAMES.

J. McK. Cattell, THE Practice CurVE AS AN EDUCATIONAL METHOD.

Evening Session.

H. C. Warren, A New VIeEw oF “Menta FUNCTIONS.”

D. 8. Miller, “THE Four Powers oF Lire.”

W. H. Sheldon, THE NATURE OF JUDGMENT.

M. Philips Mason, ReEaALity as PossIBLE EXPERIENCE.

W. P. Montague, MISCONCEPTIONS OF REALISM.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

Marcu 5, 1906.

The Academy met at 8:15 o’clock, at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Hovey presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The Assistant Secretary reported from the Council that the following

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 273

resolution regarding the use of the metric system had been adopted by the

Council and referred to the Academy with recommendation for adoption:

To the HonoraBLE SENATE AND HovusE OF REPRESENTATIVES OF THE UNITED

SraTes in Coneress Assembled,

The New York Academy of Sciences of New York City in the State of New York,

respectfully submits the following resolution advocating the substitution in the

United States of the metric system of weights and measures for the diverse and

cumbersome standards now in use.

Whereas the metric system has already been adopted by all civilized countries

with the exception of the United States and the British Empire.

Whereas it is a simple, uniform, exact and widely known system of weights and

measures based on a decimal ratio harmonizing with our decimal system of currency.

Whereas our foreign commercial relations will be greatly benefited by the adoption

of the system which is in use in many other nations, and

Whereas the metric system of weights and measures has been universally adopted

for scientific work in other nations as well as our own. Be it

RESOLVED that the New York Academy of Sciences respectfully urges that a

law be enacted making the metric system of weights and measures compulsory in

all departments of the Government of the United States in which the transaction of

business requires the use of weight and measurement.

It was voted to approve the report of the Council, and to adopt the

resolution.

A memorial notice of the late John H. Hinton, prepared by the com-

mittee appointed by the Academy for the purpose, was then read as fol-

lows:

Doctor John Henry Hinton, born New York city, January 1, 1827, died New

York city, 1905. After completing a course of study inelementary schools, he be-

came clerk in his father’s drug store, beginning, at the same time, preparation for

practice of dentistry. He was successful in this practice for several years, but, in

fulfilment of a promise to his mother, he entered the College of Physicians and

Surgeons and was graduated in medicine in 1852. He served as assistant in the

New York Hospital for two years, after which he continued his studies in Paris. On

returning to this country he became resident surgeon to the New York Hospital and

associated himself with Doctor Cornelius R. Agnew in the New York Eye and Ear

Infirmary. Throughout life, he was connected actively with hospitals and infirm-

aries, devoting a great part of his time to practice which brought no pecuniary reward.

Doctor Hinton was treasurer of this Academy for twenty years. For a long

period he attended the meetings with great regularity, though he rarely took part in

the discussions; latterly, however, he seldom appeared at evening gatherings, so

that he ceased to be a familiar figure to the majority of our members; but those of

the older group will always remember him as a man of extraordinary good common

sense, a wise adviser and a delightful companion.

D. S. Martin,

J. J. STEVENSON,

Committee.

274 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The following applications for Active Membership, having been approved

by the Council, were then presented.

Miss Anna E. Collins, St. Agatha’s School, 559 West End Av.,

William Forster, 59 Wall Street, ~

Emil V. Helferrich, Cincinnati, O.

It was voted that the applicants be elected.

Announcement of the death of W. W. Jefferis, mineralogist, late of this

city, on the 23d of February, was then made.

The Chairman suggested that Mr. L. P. Gratacap be requested to pre-

pare a memorial notice of Dr. Jefferis. Voted.

The Academy then adjourned,

W. M. WHEELER,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

Marca 5, 1906.

The Section met at 8:40 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History.

The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and approved.

The following program was then presented:

C. W. Hahn, EMBRYOLOGY OF THE HoRNED Toap.

A. M. Fernandez de Ybarra, THE First WRITTEN DOCUMENT ABOUT THE

FLORA, THE FAUNA, THE ETHNOLOGY AND

THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF AMERICA.

R. C. Osburn, NoTES ON THE FUNCTIONS OF FINS OF

FISHES.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Hahn stated that in the horned toad, the blastoderm is in the form

of a cap-like elevation at a very early stage. Even before the mesoblast sac

has advanced far in its development, the whole space under the cap-like

elevation is filled with a network of mesoblast cells. A distinct lateral

pouch from the lateral region of the mesoblast sac on each side is conspicu-

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 275

ous. In subsequent stages, the elevated cap disappears, the mesoblast

sac with its lateral pouches is compressed and the three cavities thus obliter-

ated, persist as clefts between the layers of mesoblast. These are com-

parable in part to the somatic and splauchnic mesoblast observed in other

reptiles. In the horned toad four cell masses are thus to be distinguished,

first, one from the roof of the mesoblast sac, second, one from the roof of

the two lateral pouches, third, one from the floor of the lateral pouches,

fourth, one from the floor of the median mesoblast sac. The last extends

but a short distance in front of the ventral opening of the blastopore, in a

position lateral to it.

These facts may be regarded as added evidence that the yolk-cleavage

theory of Wenckebach and Weldon is applicable to the reptilian egg. In

the egg of the horned toad there is far less interference of yolk and more

cellular differentiation, the blastoderm is less compressed because of this

and because of the pinching off of the germ from the yolk. The processes

attending the formation of the chorda and mesoblast are not obscured by

compression as in most other forms. The behavior is much like that in

the upper half of a frog’s egg.

Dr. de Ybarra said that the author of this invaluable scientific and histori-

cal document was Dr. Diego Alvarez Chanca, of Seville, Spain, who wrote

it with his own hands in the form of a letter addressed to the Municipal

Council of his native city, and dated at the port of Isabella, in the island of

Hispaniola or Santo Domingo, West Indies, at the end of January, 1494.

The author was a distinguished practitioner of much learning and profes-

sional skill, who held the position of Physician-in-Ordinary to the King and

Queen of Castile and Aragon, and had attended their first-born child,

Princess Isabella (who afterward became Queen of Portugal) during a seri-

ous illness the year before. He was especially appointed by the Spanish

monarch to accompany Columbus on his second voyage of discovery to

America, came over in the same ship with him, and saved his life, as well

as the lives of many high dignitaries and young gentlemen belonging to the

Spanish nobility, who were very sick during their stay at the island of His-

paniola.

On his return to Spain, Dr. Chanca published in Spanish, in the year

1506, a treatise on the treatment of pleurisy (Para curar el mal de costado),

and a few years after, in 1514, a commentatorial work in Latin, criticising

the book, entitled “ De conservanda juventute et retardanda senectute,” whose

author was another distinguished Spanish physician named Dr. Arnaldo

de Villanova. The title of the second work of Dr. Chanca is “ Commentum

novum in parabolis divt Arnaldo de Villanova.”

This historical first document about the flora, the fauna, the ethnology

276 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

and the anthropology of America has been only once before translated into

the English language, from its Spanish original, by Mr. R. H. Major, of

the British Museum, and published in London for the Hakluyt Society in

1847; but as it was penned by its author in the old Spanish language of the

fifteenth century, that translation into English, having been done by a

foreigner who lived in the nineteenth century, naturally contains several

almost unavoidable inaccuracies, and lacks the necessary appreciation of

the many fine and subtle meanings in phraseology, deviating from the rules

of grammar, which the original document possesses.

It begins by giving a detailed account of the second voyage of Christopher

Columbus to America, from the very moment of starting from the port of

Cadiz, Spain, on the 25th day of September, 1493, their temporary stop at

three of the Canary Islands, and when arriving at the Cannibal islands of

Dominica, Marie Galante, Guadeloupe, Martinique, ete., he describes in

a most instructive and interesting way the customs and habits of the abo-

rigines. | Continuing his vivid and graceful narrative, he speaks of the vari-

ous trees, flowers and fruits found there, in Porto Rico and Santo Domingo,

also of the animals and minerals and several important points connected

with the ethnology and the anthropology of that group of the West Indian ,

islands which Columbus visited.

Dr. de Ybarra, who is the author of the only existing Medical History of

Christopher Columbus, has made this quaint historical document more

interesting and instructive by adding a large number of explanatory notes

and geographical and historical remarks.

The Section then adjourned.

M. A. BIGELow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Marca 12, 1906.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Kemp presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

A. E. Stevenson, THe Water Suppty oF Bermupa. (Illustrated by

lantern.)

J. Howard Wilson, Was THERE A NEWFOUNDLAND ICE SHEET?

Robert T. Hill, THE BROADER GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURE OF THE

Mexican PuaTeau. (Illustrated by lantern.)

A discussion followed each paper.

RBCORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 277

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Wilson claimed as a probability that Newfoundland had been the

region of another great center of ice dispersion able to send its lobes and

glaciers to the edge of the continental shelf and what is more important,

southwesterly even so far as Cape Cod and Nantucket, forming the glacial

deposits in those regions.

The evidence in favor of this hypothesis was grouped under four heads:

1) The availability of the region for an ice-sheet of such magnitude with

indications of great glaciation, 2) The direction of motion of the ice along

the Atlantic coast from Newfoundland to Nantucket, 3) The interlobate

region, 4) The nature of the transported material.

It was shown that all the facts obtainable were best in accord with this

hypothesis, while even some heretofore unexplainable phenomena were

apparently made clear.

Two maps were shown representing the relation of this ice-sheet to the

other glaciated regions, with its extent and the probable direction of motion

of its glaciers.

The Section then adjourned.

A. W. GRaABAU,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

Marca 19, 1906.

No meeting.

MILTON FRANKLIN,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

Marcu 2, 1906.

Section met in conjunction with the American Ethnological Society at

8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural History.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

278 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

A. B. Lewis, Nores oN THE ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE COLUMBIAN VALLEY.

Clark Wissler, Notes oN THE ETHNOGRAPHY OF MONTANA AND ALBERTA.

The meeting then adjourned.

R.S. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

APRIL 2, 1906.

The Academy met at 8:15 o'clock, at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

It was reported from the Council that Professors Kemp, Osborn and

Hovey had been appointed delegates to the International Congress of

Geologists at Mexico to be held in September and that it was suggested by

the Council that the Academy inscribe itself as a member of the Congress.

A memorial notice of the late Dr. Augustus Choate Hamlin, prepared

by the Committee appointed for the purpose, was then read as follows:

In the death of Dr. Augustus Choate Hamlin, of Bangor, Maine, American

mineralogy has suffered the loss of a very interesting and able student and promoter,

especially in relation to our native gem-stones. Dr. Hamlin has long been known

as the chief authority upon the tourmalines and associated minerals of Oxford County,

Maine; and it is largely due to his enthusiastic studies and active practical interest,

that the localities in that region have been opened and worked for the past thirty

years, their treasures made known to the public, and their finest specimens gathered

and preserved in important public collections.

The famous old locality of colored lithia tourmalines, at Paris Hill, was first

discovered in 1820 by Dr. Hamlin’s father, Hon. Elijah L. Hamlin, and his uncle,

Hon. Hannibal Hamlin, who forty years later was elected Vice-President of the

United States, on the ticket with Abraham Lincoln. It was natural that Dr. Ham-

lin, who was a man of cultivated tastes, should feel a deep interest in the further

development of this locality and its remarkable minerals, and this he accomplished

in important ways in the later years of his life. Dr. Hamlin’s tall, commanding

figure, with great heavy eyebrows, moustache and hair, combined with a deep,

impressive voice, and clear sharp eyes, made him a strong personality one rarely

meets.

Augustus Choate Hamlin was born in 1829, at Columbia, Maine. He graduated

at Bowdoin College in 1851, and at the Medical School of Harvard University in

1855. After further study in Europe, he began medical practice at Bangor, Maine;

but in four years the Civil War broke out and he at once entered the army as assist-

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 279

ant surgeon of the Second Maine Regiment. He served with distinction through

the entire war, rising successively to higher grades and more important responsi-

bilities, until he was mustered out in 1865, with the rank of lieutenant-colonel.

On returning to Bangor, which was ever afterward his home, he soon gave up the

regular practice of medicine, to devote himself to literary pursuits and public activi-

ties. He was twice elected mayor of the city of Bangor, by large popular majorities,

and made an able and honorable record. He wrote and published quite extensively,

on medical subjects, on certain portions of the history of the war, and on the gem-

minerals of Oxford County. Among the latter was his well-known work “The

Tourmaline,’ published in 1873. This book created the greatest interest and was

the inspiration of Saxe Holmes’s ‘‘My Tourmaline,” a dainty love story of Ameri-

can art. Others were ‘Leisure Hours with the Gems,” 1884, and “The History of

Mount Mica,” 1895. All of these attracted much attention from gem-lovers and

mineralogists, and made him widely known.

Dr. Hamlin made extensive collections of the tourmalines and associated minerals

of the country, and especially those of the mines at Paris Hill. The majority of

his colored tourmalines were purchased some years ago for the museum of Harvard

University, by the late James H. Garland, Esq., and are one of the choicest features

of the mineralogical cabinet there, under the name of the Hamlin-Garland Collection.

The entire proceeds of this sale were expended in the “History of Mount Mica,”

a memorial to his only son. In 1900 he presented another collection illustrating

the minerals of the county, to the Oxford Cabinet and Hamlin Memorial Library, at

Paris Hill. The history of this very valuable local museum is worthy of notice.

There was at Paris Hill an old, very plain, and very substantial granite building

which had long been used as the county jail. It was decided finally to give up this

building and place the jail elsewhere, upon which action, by the terms of the deed,

the property reverted to the original owners, the Cummings family. Dr. Hamlin

then proposed that if the ladies of Oxford County would purchase the building from

the heirs, he would remodel it at his own expense into a fire-proof library and mu-

seum. The heirs were many and widely dispersed; but all were well disposed, and

in time the transaction was accomplished. Dr. Hamlin then, in 1900, had the build-

ing entirely refitted and made suitable for a library and a repository of both histori-

cal and scientific material relating to Oxford County. He himself presented a large

number of books for the public library, and the fine collection of minerals above

noted, which is installed there together with two other choice local collections given

by the late Samuel R. Carter and Jarvis L. Carter, of Paris, the whole making an

exceedingly fine representation.

Dr. Hamlin took much interest also in the introduction of the Paris tourmaline

into jewelry. To his granddaughter, Miss Elinor C. Hamlin, of Boston, he gave the

famous Hamlin tourmaline necklace, which is probably unique. It consists of 17

large tourmalines, from 3 to 30 carats each, hung by a chain of Maine gold work, to

a general connecting chain, and so adjusted that they can be removed and replaced

by others of different colors. With these there are also a cross and ear-drops of

variously colored tourmalines, set with colorless beryls from the same locality.

Thirty years ago tourmalines were unfamiliar in jewelry, but now the public taste

has been educated to know and appreciate them, and this change has been largely,

though not indeed wholly, due to the interest and activity of Dr. Hamlin.

In other fields, too, Dr. Hamlin exerted important influence and did valuable

service. He wrote much on the history of the Civil War, especially with regard to

280 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

the suffering: of the Union prisoners at Andersonville and other points. Almost

his last literary work was 3 history of the Eleventh Army Corps of the Army of the

Potomac, of which he had been medical director. This was published in 1896. In

this work. he reviewed minutely and ably the events connected with the battle of

Chancellorsville, May, 1863, and clearly proved the fallacy of certain charges made

against that corps in some of the accounts. For this important service to history

and to the honor of the corps, he was presented by the surviving members with an

appropriate and unique silver gilded vase, at a banquet held in New York, Novem-

ber 17th, 19%. The cup is of gold. set with 20 Maime tourmalines and beryls.

Dr. Hamlim had two children, a son and a daughter, neither of whom is living.

The former died im the flower of his youth at the age of 18 years. The daughter

Helen was the Fair Helen of Maime of Longfellow’s poem. The loss of his wife,

coming closely after the death of his children, affected him deeply, and for two or

three years past his health was much broken. He died st his home nm Bangor on

November 18th, 1905, greatly honored and mourned not only im that community,

but also by 2 wide circle of friends, acquaintances and correspondents.

Gzorce F. Kunz,

Committee.

The following names of applicants for Active Membership, having been

approved by the Council, were then presented to the Academy, and it was

unanimously voted that they be elected:

B. E. Dahlgren, American Museum of Natural History,

John Belknap Marcou, Princeton, Mass.,

Adolph Obrig, 1 West 72 Street,

W. W. Owens, 93-99 Nassau Street,

George H. Proctor, Hotel San Remo,

Thomas Fitch Rowland, 329 Madison Avenue,

Joel W. Thorne, 995 Madison Avenue,

Artemas Ward, 32 West 11 Street,

John Gilbert Ward, 117 West 58 Street,

M. F. Westover, Schenectady, N. Y.,

Leonard D. White, 45 West 75 Street.

A letter to the Council, announcing the death of Professor C. Ogden

Doremus was read to the Academy.

The meeting then adjourned.

W. M. WaHeerer,

Recording Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 281

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

Aprit 2, 1906.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., President Britton presiding. In the absence

_ __ of the secretary, Mr. Roy W. Miner was appointed secretary pro tem.

, The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

ui C. Stuart Gager, A New Factor in Piant ENVIRONMENT.

_ Bashford Dean, ZodLocicaL Notes CoLLEcTED IN JAPAN AND INDIA.

i Summary oF Papers.

Dr. Gager gave a brief historical résumé of the discovery and nature

of radioactivity, and reviewed the researches which indicate that radio-

activity is very widely distributed im nature, and is very probably a general

property of matter, and therefore a factor in the normal environment of

plants. Various radioactive substances, and preparations for growing

plants under the influence of the radium emanation, and of the three types

of rays were exhibited. In conclusion several lantern slides were shown

illustrating experiments made by the speaker on the effect of radioactivity

on various physiological processes of plants.

The meeting then adjourned.

Roy W. Mixer,

Secretary pro tem.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Aprit 9, 1906.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. Julien, presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Walter Granger, THE STRATIGRAPHY OF THE BripcerR Basin, Wromine.

(Illustrated with charts and lantern slides.)

W. D. Matthew, Notes oN THE PALEONTOLOGY OF THE Bripcer Basin,

Wromine. (Illustrated with specimens and diagrams.)

F. J. Peck, Norte on Eocystides, 4 Primitive Crstorm.

282 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Dr. George F. Kunz exhibited a transparent diamond crystal in the form

of an elongated trigonal octahedron weighing 12} carats, 327 mg, found on

Gold Creek, 10 miles from Ramelton, Brown County, Indiana, in 1900.

He also gave notice of the discovery of a new locality for gem sapphires,

in a placer mine 100 miles from Boisé, Idaho.

The meeting then adjourned.

Roy W. MIner,

Secretary pro tem.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

ApRIL 16, 1906.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Trowbridge presiding.

The minutes of the previous meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

D. W. Hering, THE DiIsToRTION AND OSCILLATIONS OF HELICAL

SPRINGS.

Charles Lane Poor, PossIBLE CHANGES IN THE SHAPE OF THE SUN.

The meeting then adjourned.

MILTon FRANKLIN,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY

APRIL 23, 1906.

The Section met in conjunction with the New York Section of the

American Psychological Association for two sessions at 4:00 at Schermer-

horn Hall, Columbia University and 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum

of Natural History.

The minutes of the preceding meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was offered:

Afternoon Session.

W. B. Pitkin, A Stupy IN THE PsycHoLoGy oF EVIDENCE.

E. E. Jones, A CoMPARISON OF MENTAL PROCESSES IN THE HORIZONTAL

AND VERTICAL POSITIONS OF THE Bopy.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 283

G. Fernald, CoLORED AFTER-IMAGES OF UNPERCEIVED PERIPHERAL

CoLor-StimuLI. (Communicated by J. H. Leuba.)

Mildred Focht, On SIMULTANEOUS CoLor CONTRAST.

F. Lyman Wells, Sratistican MreTHop AND LITERARY VALUES.

Evening Session.

Clark Wissler, THE Type IN Psycuo-PuysicaLt Data.

J. E. Lough, AN EXPERIMENT IN HapiT FORMATION.

H. Heath Bawden, THE FuncTIonAL PsycHOLOGY OF SENSATION AND

IMAGE.

Brother Chrysostom, CONSCIOUSNESS FROM A METAPHYSICAL STANDPOINT.

D. §. Miller, Tue DISTINCTION BETWEEN HEART AND HEAD.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

May 7, 1906.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The Assistant Secretary then read the following report from the Council:

The following proposals have been adopted by the Societies composing the

Scientific Alliance, to take effect in the fall of 1906:

In order to encourage the further unification of scientific organization and the

development of science in the City of New York, the following arrangements have

been proposed, made possible by the present concentration of interest in natural

science at the American Museum of Natural History, and the increased resources

of the New York Academy of Sciences:

1. Societies organized for the study of any branch of science may become

affiliated with the New York Academy of Sciences, by consent of the Council of the

Academy, without surrendering their own name, or losing their identity or autonomy.

2. Members of the affiliated societies may become members of the Academy by

paying the Academy’s annual fee, but as members of the Affiliated societies they

shall be Associate Members of the Academy, with the rights and privileges of such

Associate Members, except the receipt of its publications, without paying an addi-

tional fee.

284 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

3. In order to obtain the right to vote or hold office in any of the associate

societies thus affiliated, or to receive their publications, members of the Academy

must be elected by such society and pay its annual dues as well as those of the

Academy, but all other privileges of membership would be included in the Academy’s

annual dues.

4. The New York Academy of Sciences to encourage the work of societies thus

affliated with it by furnishing means for paying distinguished lecturers, by awarding

grants to aid scientific investigation by their members, by providing facilities for

their meetings at the present place of the Academy and in other ways that may

become practicable.

5. Each society thus affiliated with the New York Academy of Sciences to have

the right to delegate one of its members to the Council of the Academy, this delegate

being selected from such members of the society as are also members of the Academy,

or made so by his society’s paying his dues while a delegate.

6. Societies thus affiliated may, at their option, indicate on their publications

their affiliation with the New York Academy of Sciences.

7. Notices of all meetings or other functions of the Academy and of its sections

and of the affiliated societies to be mailed weekly by the Secretary of the Academy

to all members and associate members without charge to any affiliated society.

8. Lists of members and associate members of the Academy and of its affiliated

societies to be printed annually by the Academy and distributed to all members and

associate members without charge to any affiliated society.

9. Any affiliated society may withdraw from this affiliation, by a majority

vote of its members, at a meeting called for this purpose, to take effect three months

after official notice of such action has been filed with the Secretary of the New York

Academy of Sciences.

10. Such an alliance would render the Council of the Scientific Alliance an

unnecessary organization, and its powers and functions might be merged in the

Council of the New York Academy of Sciences under existing laws.

It was voted that the report be approved.

The memorial notice of the late William Walter Jefferis, prepared by

Mr. L. P. Gratacap, was then read as follows:

William Walter Jefferis was born at West Chester, Chester Co., Pa., on the twelfth

of January, 1820. He was a son of Horatio Townsend, and Hannah Paul Jefferis.

He received his education in the West Chester Academy under Jonathan Ganse,

a teacher distinguished in his day for erudition and discipline. He evinced at a

very early age an unusual interest in minerals and as a boy gathered crystals as they

were occasionally dislodged from the paving blocks of West Chester. This curiosity

ripened into a confirmed attachment to mineralogy which, however, was shared by

an enthusiastic admiration for flowers and botany. In both of these branches of

science he became a diligent collector, though his name is universally identified with

the former.

The lectures in 1835 of Professor Josiah Holbrook communicated a new ardor

to the young student; his enthusiasm became contagious; and soon a group of young

people, among whom Jefferis and William D. Hartman, afterwards known as an

excellent conchologist, were the leaders, were engaged in scouring the surrounding

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 285

countries for specimens. Mines, now abandoned, were then being opened, and

every promising gulch was explored, the glades yielded flowers and the ponds snails,

and amongst surroundings so congenial to his tastes, the young Jefferis grew to

manhood imbued with an abiding affection for the wonders of the mineral world.

At a very early age, under the tutelage of his father, Mr. Jefferis entered the

Bank of Chester County, which afterwards became the National Bank of Chester

County. He rose in the service of the bank until in 1857 he succeeded to the cashier-

ship, which position he retained until his resignation in 1883.

Throughout his life he was an omnivorous collector, and the accumulation of

mineral material which formed the Jefferis Collection represented the results of over

half a century of personal efforts, exchanges and purchases. He became well known

to the mineralogists of the world; and in America, Dana, Shepard, Genth, Clarke,

J. Lawrence Smith and Cooke were indebted to him for material and information,

and especially Genth’s “ Mineralogy of Pennsylvania” owes to Mr. Jefferis many of

its facts and localities. He has himself thus recounted his efforts in the field: ‘‘In

the days when I first began collecting minerals, Chester, Delaware and Lancaster

Counties were fine fields for collectors. The country was comparatively new, and

at that time very little of it was under cultivation. Seventy years ago I used to go

over the hills south of West Chester, to hunt for amethysts, and it well repaid me,

for some of my best specimens came from there. I found garnets in the serpentine

range north of West Chester; zircons on the Brandywine, a mile west of the town;

from the south west came orthite and aquacreptite, a very interesting mineral,

named by Professor Shepard.

“Chester County at that time, was rich in mica crystals in many colors. At

Birmingham Serpentine Quarries, I found a new species, which Professor Brush

decided was a new mineral and he named it after the discoverer, now known as

Jefferisite.”

It is this latter circumstance that has signally made his name a mineralogical

possession, but his name is also associated with the discovery or extension of knowl-

edge of aquacreptite, euphyllite, zaratite, melanosiderite, roseite and painterite.

After his resignation from the National Bank of Chester he lived in Philadelphia,

where he soon participated with Leidy, Vaux, Wilcox, Dixon and Rand in minera-

logical conferences. In Philadelphia he was made Curator of the Vaux Collection

of Minerals which had been bequeathed to the Philadelphia Academy of Sciences.

About 1900 he came to New York, which was his residence to the time of his death.

His large collection has become the property of the Carnegie Museum at Pitts-

burgh. Mr. Jefferis has thus described it: ‘‘It contained over 12,000 catalogued

specimens, in the general collection, not including the cut gems, the microscopic

mounted specimens and 150 boxes of choice and rare specimens of minerals consisting

of 3,500, each not over 14 inches in size, selected and put up similar to the original

Smithsonian Collection.’

Mr. Jefferis was a member of the American Association for the Advancement

of Science; the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia; the American Philo-

sophical Society; the Department of Archeology, University of Pennsylvania;

Buffalo Society of Natural History, and an honorary member of the New York

Mineralogical Club.

Mr. Jefferis was enamored of flowers, and it may surprise those who only regarded

him as a mineralogist that he sent over 3,000 specimens of plants to Paris, and also

prepared a collection for the Smithsonian Institution.

286 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Mr. Jefferis was three times married, his widow, formerly Mrs. Anna Elmore,

survives him. By his first wife he had four children of whom Mrs. Emma Bogart

and Mrs. Ellis Noyes alone are now living, his two sons dying (one by accident) some

years ago. He was a man of charming simplicity, earnestness and disinterested

attachment to his friends. His passion for minerals was remarkable, and his

tenacity of memory of single, extraordinary or rarely beautiful or odd specimens

quite wonderful. It is a matter for general congratulation, apart from the extreme

satisfaction to his family, that his collection, symptomatic of a very early period in

American mineralogical science, is now permanently preserved as his memorial

in the great Museum of Pittsburgh.

L. P. GRATACAP,

Chairman.

It was voted that the following names, having been approved by the

Council, be entered on the roll of Active Members:

James Lane Allen, 66 Fifth Avenue,

John H. Emanuel, Jr., 304 Clinton Avenue, Brooklyn,

W. D. Mann, 309 West 72 Street,

H. McM. Painter, 62 West 55 Street,

Eugene H. Porter, 181 West 73 Street,

Allen Merrill Rogers, 14 West 72 Street,

Elliott C. Smith, 33 Wall Street,

John Weir, The Waldorf,

William Pennington, Paterson, N. J.,

Simon Flexner, M. D. Rockefeller Institute, 66 Street & Ay. A.

President Britton then submitted in writing, as prescribed by the Con-

stitution and By-laws, certain amendments to the Constitution and By-laws,

to be voted upon at the next Business Meeting. The proposed changes are

as follows:

Amendments to the Constitution.

ArticLEII. First sentence to read:

“The Academy shall consist of five classes of members: namely Active Members,

Fellows, Associate Members, Corresponding Members and Honorary Members.”

ArticLEIV. First sentence to read:

“The officers of the Academy shall be a President, as many Vice-Presidents as

there are Sections of the Academy, a Corresponding Secretary, a Recording Secre-

tary, a Treasurer, a Librarian, an Editor, six elected Councilors and one additional

Councilor for each allied society or association.”

ArticLeE VI. A new Article to be inserted as “ Article VI,” to read as follows:

“Societies organized for the study of any branch of science may become allied

with the New York Academy of Sciences by consent of the Council. Members of

allied societies may become Active Members of the Academy by paying the Acad-

emy’s annual fee, but as members of an allied society they shall be Associate Members

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 287

of the Academy with the rights and privileges of other Associate Members except the

receipt of its publications. Each allied society shall have the right to delegate one

of its members, who is an Active Member of the Academy, to the Council of the

Academy, and such delegate shall have all the rights and privileges of other Coun-

cilors.”’

ArticLE VII. “Article VI” to read “Article VII.” The third sentence to read

“The term of office of elected Councilors shall be three years, etc.,’”’ instead of “‘The

term of office of Councilors shall be three years, etc.”

ArticLE VIII. “Article VII” to read “Article VIII”.

ArticLE TX. ‘Article VIII” to read “ Article [X”’.

ArTICLE X. ‘Article IX” to read “ Article X”’.

ArTICcLE XI. “Article X” to read “Article XI”.

Amendments to the By-laws.

Cuaprer IV, Section 2. A new Section to be inserted as “Section 2,” and to

read as follows:—

“ Associate Members. Workers in science may be elected to Associate Member-

ship, for a period of two years, in the manner prescribed for Active Members.

They shall not have the power to vote and shall not be eligible to election as

Fellows, but they may receive the publications. At any time subsequent to their

election they may assume the full privileges of Active Members by paying the fee

of such Members.”

CuaprTer IV, SecTion 3. Change number of Section 2 to “3”.

CuaptTer IV, Section 4. Change number of Section 3 to “4”.

CuaprTer V,SEecTIoN 1. To read as follows:

“The annual dues of Active Members and Fellows shall be $10, payable in ad-

vance at the time of the Annual Meeting; but new members elected after May 1

shall pay $5 for the remainder of the fiscal year.

“The annual dues of elected Associate Members shall be $3, payable in advance at

the time of the Annual Meeting.

“Non-resident Members shall be exempt from dues, so long as they shall relin-

quish the privileges of Active Membership (Vide Chapter X).”

Cuaptrer VI,— Title to read “Patrons, Donors AND Lire MemBeErs.”’

Section 2. A new Section, to read as follows:

“Donors. Any person contributing $50 or more annually to the general funds

of the Academy shall be termed a Donor, and on election by the Council, shall

enjoy all the privileges of Active Membership.”

SrecTion 3. Original number of Section to be changed to “3”.

CuapTer XI, Section 3. To read as follows:

“Investments. All the permanent funds of the Academy shall be invested in

United States, or New York State securities, or in first mortgages on real estate,

provided they shall not exceed sixty-five per cent. of the value of the property, or in

first mortgage bonds of corporations which have paid dividends continuously on

their common stock for a period of not less than five years. All income from

patrons’ fees and life membership fees shall be added to the permanent fund.”

The Meeting then adjourned.

W. M. WHEELER,

Recording Secretary.

288 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

At a meeting of the Council of the New York Academy of Sciences held

on Monday, May 7th, 1906, the following resolutions were adopted:

RESOLVED:— That the Council of the New York Academy of Sciences

desires to extend its sympathy to the family of the late Professor RoBERT

OcgprENn Doremus, LL. D., for the great loss which it has sustained by his

death on March 22, 1906, and to express on behalf of the Fellows and Mem-

bers of the Academy, their appreciation of his untiring activity and zeal in

scientific work and progress.

RESOLVED that in the death of Professor Doremus, science has lost

an exceptional man in ability and merit, and that a brilliant and scholarly

career has come to an end.

RESOLVED that the citizens of New York are deeply indebted to the

late Professor Doremus for his work in connection with the general educa-

tional progress in this city, particularly the advancement of medical educa-

tion, with which he was closely identified.

RESOLVED that a copy of these resolutions be engrossed and sent to

the family of the late Professor Doremus, and that the resolutions be spread

upon the minutes of this Council and published in the Annals of the

Academy.

N. L. Brirton, President,

W. M. WHEELER, Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

May 7, 1906.

The Section met at 8:15 at the American Museum of Natural History,

Vice-President Crampton presiding.

The minutes of the preceding meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

ages care Tue BrioLocy or THE BaHamas. (Illustrated with

Se a A lantern slides.)

M. A. Howe.

Henry E. Crampton, Brier Report ON A RECENT TRIP TO THE SOCIETY

ISLANDS.

The meeting then adjourned.

M. A. BIGELow,

Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 289

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

May 14, 1906.

Section met at 8:30 P. M., Vice-President Hovey presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

William Campbell and) THe Microscopic EXAMINATION OF THE SILVER

C. W. Knight, ) Deposits or TEMIsKAMING, Ont. (By title.)

Henry 8. Washington, A PrETRoGRAPHIC StuDY oF THE LAvas oF VE-

suvius. (Illustrated with lantern slides.)

E. Otis Hovey, COMPARISON OF VESUVIUS AND Mont PEL&, WITH

SPECIAL REFERENCE TO RECENT ERUPTIONS.

(Illustrated with lantern slides.)

James F. Kemp, THE VOLCANIC AND SEISMIC DISTURBANCES IN

NortH AMERICA; THE CALIFORNIA EARTH-

QUAKE OF 1906. (Illustrated with lantern slides.)

Wm. _ Hallock, INSTRUMENTAL DETECTION AND RECORD OF

EarTHQuakeEs. (Illustrated with lantern slides.)

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

In reference to their paper Messrs. Campbell and Knight said in brief:

The work consists of a metallographic examination of specimens from the

recently discovered cobalt-nickel arsenides and silver deposits of Temis-

kaming. The paper contains a series of photographs which show that the

minerals were deposited in the following order: smaltite, niccolite, cal-

cite, argentite, native silver. ‘The method of examination of opaque minerals

along metallographic lines is fully explained.

All the other papers were discussed at length.

Mr. Eddy announced the existence of two seismographs in Bayonne, N.

J., which had given an average record of 30 shocks annually for the two

years during which they were in operation.

Dr. Kunz suggested as a possible explanation of the occurrence of the

San Francisco earthquake, the overflow and breaking down of the banks

of the Colorado River and the consequent filling of the basin at Salton in

southern California, where there formerly was an arid, heated depression

several hundred feet below sea-level, and there now is an inland sea

covering 250 square miles of the lowest point of the sink. Possibly the

290 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

weight of this body of water and its penetration through the surface may

have directly or indirectly been the cause, or a partial cause, of the seismic

disturbance.

The Section then adjourned.

A. W. GRaABAU,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

May 21, 1906.

The Section met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Trowbridge presiding.

The minutes of the preceding meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

J. C. Hubbard, THe Spark DiscHarcE; How iT Occurs.

The meeting then adjourned.

Mitton FRANKLIN,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

OcToBER 1, 1906.

The Academy met at 8:15 o’clock, at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following name was then presented for election to Active Member-

ship, having been approved by action of the Council:

Edward J. Voratka, 1123 Hewitt Place, Bronx, N. Y. City.

On motion, elected by ballot cast by secretary.

The Amendments to the By-laws, as placed on file with the minutes

of the meeting held May 7, 1906, were then presented for the action of the

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 291

Academy. It was voted that the following sections be inserted or be amended

as read:

Chapter IV, Section 2. (A new section)

Chapter IV, Section 3.

Chapter IV, Section 4.

Chapter V, Section 1.

Chapter VI, (Change in title of Chapter)

Chapter VI, Section 2. (A new section)

Chapter VI, Section 3.

It was voted that the Amendment to Chapter XI, Section 3, regarding

investments, be laid on the table until the next meeting of the Academy.

The meeting then adjourned.

W. M. WHEELER,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

OcTOBER 1, 1906.

The Section met at 8:30 P. M., at the American Museum of Natural

History. Vice-President Crampton presiding.

The minutes of the preceding meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The evening was then devoted to hearing the reports of summer work

by members of the Section.

Professor Britton described his trip to Jamaica to study the flora of the

island, in continuation of the work carried on by the New York Botanical

Garden in the West Indies for several years. ‘The explorations in Jamaica

for the past three years have been carried on through the codperation of

the Department of Gardens and Plantations of the Island, and are not yet

by any means complete. The little known regions are dangerous, especially

“the Cockpit,” a place where Mr. Harris of the Department of Gardens

and Plantations obtained most of his 50 or 60 new species. The hills are

conical in shape, of limestone roughened by erosion. The rock edges are

covered with a great mass of luxuriant vegetation which is often slippery

and dangerous. This rough character of the country has prevented culti-

vation of this part of the island.

A subtropical laboratory for the use of students of tropical flora has been

established here, and is now in effective codperation with the Jamaican

government.

292 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Dr. Britton visited all the xerophytic portions of the island in order to

study Cactuses in nature. He succeeded in making observations on all

the recorded species except one. Grisebach has defined Jamaica as a

floral region by itself. The flora is more nearly like that of Central and

South America, than of any other of the Antilles.

Professor Wilson reported that he had spent the summer collecting

insects over a great part of the United States to procure material for his

studies on chromosomes. He was very successful, procuring a large series

of species, and many insects of each species, especially Hemiptera, Neu-

roptera and Coleoptera.

He found especially interesting his trip across the southern belt from

the Atlantic to the Pacific. Specimens of the insects collected were ex-

hibited in connection with Prof. Wilson’s talk.

Professor Wheeler gave an account of his expedition to Florissant,

Colorado, with Professor T. D. A. Cockerell of the University of Colorado,

for fossil insects, which are found more abundantly here than anywhere

else in the world. Florissant is situated near West Park, Colorado, and the

insects are found in the bed of a Tertiary Lake Basin, which in ancient

times probably drained into the Arkansas. There is now very little water

left in it. The altitude is 8150 feet and the climate is now sub-boreal.

Consequently the flora resembles that of Greenland and Siberia. The

remains of insects found in the shale, however, show that in Tertiary times

the climate was more like that of Georgia or Alabama.

The ancient lake was probably covered from time to time by volcanic

ashes which imbedded any insects or plant remains that fell into the lake.

The fossil-bearing strata are very thick and exposed only at certain points.

Leaves of such trees as sequoia, cottonwood, etc., are abundant, while

ants are the most abundant of the insects.

Professor Wheeler remained at Florissant about a month and obtained

about 2000 specimens, mostly ants and plants, many of which are in a fine

state of preservation. The investigation of the forms thus far shows that

these Tertiary insects were very similar to those now living there, showing

the remarkable stability of insect types from Miocene times.

Mr. Beebe reported an interesting series of experiments on the effect of

subjecting different species of birds to intense humidity. For example,

Inca Doves were kept in an intensely humid atmosphere through two molts,

with the result that the birds’ plumage changed in such a way as to cause

them apparently to pass through two subspecies. The plumage in general

was darkened while the wing-feathers were whitened. Experiments on

the White-throated Sparrow produced no change after the first molt, but

after the second molt there was a remarkable change to a dark mahogany

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 293

color, unknown to any birds of this species in a wild state. Other experi-

ments showed that food and light were not factors in causing the changes,

which were apparently due therefore solely to changes in humidity.

The Section then had the pleasure of listening to an interesting address

by Sir William Henry Perkin, the discoverer of the color mauve, who spoke

of the great advances made in the knowledge of natural colors, such as

indigo, etc., in the last fifty years. The development of our knowledge of

the coal-tar products, to which even the coloring matter in plants is nearly

all related, has been especially important.

Professor Crampton then spoke of the progress of the work at Cold

Spring Harbor, the Carnegie Laboratory and Woods Holl, and gave a

brief account of the progress made in his experiments on inheritance in the

Cynthia moth, and of his studies on variation in connection with the land-

snail, Partula, in Taluti.

The meeting then adjourned.

Roy W. Miner,

Secretary pro tem.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

OcToBER 8, 1906.

The Section met at 8:15 P. M., at the American Museum of Natural

History, Mr. Alfred W. Tuttle presiding.

The minutes of the preceding meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

A communication from Dr. Kunz, relative to the death of the following

members was read by Mr. Miner:

Professor Samuel L. Penfield of Yale,

Professor I. C. Russell of Michigan University,

Dr. Henry A. Ward of Chicago.

On motion of Professor A. W. Grabau the following committee was

appointed to draw up resolutions to be presented at the annual Meeting:

Dr. George F. Kunz,

Professor J. F. Kemp,

Dr. E. O. Hovey.

The following program was then presented:

294 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

William Campbell, Notes oN THE Microscopic EXAMINATION OF THE

OPAQUE CONSTITUENTS OF ORE BopIEs.

C. P. Berkey, NoTEs ON THE PREGLACIAL CHANNELS OF THE LOWER

Hupson VALLEY AS REVEALED BY RECENT BoRINGS.

A. W. Grabau, NoTEeES ON THE CHARACTER AND ORIGIN OF THE

PotTsvILLE FORMATION OF THE APPALACHIAN

REGION.

D. S. Martin, A BreryYL FROM HappaM NECK, CONNECTICUT.

Brief discussions followed several of the papers.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Campbell’s paper dealt with the preparation of the specimen for

examination; of the various types of microscopes used; and the means of

obtaining illumination by reflected light. Next the paragenesis of the

constituents of certain alloys was shown by microphotographs. Lastly

the methods were applied to the opaque constituents of ores from Butte;

the Cochise district of Arizona; Ducktown, Tenn.; Rossland, B. C.; Sud-

bury, Ont.; southeast Missouri, etc.

Dr. Berkey said that borings made by the Board of Water Supply of

New York City, in connection with the project of bringing water from the

Catskili Mountains, had shown the existence of numerous deeply buried

channels representing preglacial stream courses. Many of them indicate

channels cut far below present sea level at considerable distances back from

the Hudson River. From engineering records it appears that the depth to

bed-rock in the Hudson River has never been determined at any point

in its lower course. Profiles of supposed rock-bottom based upon wash-

borings have been proven by the recent work to represent simply the bottom

of the finer silt filling. The results show that more than 200 feet of more

compact material lies below this silt at the point now being tested, and that

the rock-bottom of the ancient Hudson lies more than 450 feet below the

present river level throughout a large part of its lower course.

Dr. Grabau discussed the character of the overlap of the several divi-

sions of the Pottsville, and the material and type of cross-bedding and

veached the conclusion that the formation is of the nature of an alluvial

cone — or several confluent ones, with occasional marine intercalations.

Professor Martin exhibited a large crystal of pink beryl, which he had

lately obtained at Haddam Neck, Conn. The old quarry in the albite peg-

matite at this lecality, long famous for its colored tourmalines, is not now

being worked, but a new one has been opened closely adjacent, and appar-

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 295

ently on a continuation of the same vein or dike. This one has yielded less

tourmaline than the former, but much more beryl, and particularly the

heretofore very rare pink variety. Of these, a number of fine large crystals

have been obtained, comparable with those lately developed from the

gem-tourmaline mines in San Diego County, California.

The present specimen measures about four inches in both length and

diameter; it is a fine termination, of the type characteristic of this variety.

It has been recently shown by Ford (Am. J. Sci., Sept., 1906) that these

pink beryls, from whatever locality, present a peculiar type of crystalliza-

tion. Instead of the long hexagonal prism with flat basal termination,

usually seen in the green beryls of New England, the pink ones tend to a

strong development of pyramidal planes, especially the pyramid of the second

order (s), while the prismatic faces are short. It is very interesting to see

how perfectly this crystal, from a new locality, conforms to this statement.

It shows three very short and partly broken prismatic faces, and a large

and perfect hexagonal pyramid of the second order; the basal plane is

reduced to a small irregular face about one inch in its longest diameter,

and bears several shallow pits or depressions, of which the inclined sides

conform to the pyramid of the first order. Altogether, the specimen is one

of unusual interest.

The Section then adjourned.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

OcTOBER 15, 1906.

The Section met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Trowbridge presiding.

The minutes of the previous meeting of the Section were read and ap-

proved.

The Section then proceeded to the election of Sectional Officers for 1907.

Professor C. C. Trowbridge was elected Chairman of the Section and

nominated to the Council for election as Vice-President of the Academy.

The election of Secretary was postponed to a later meeting.

The Section then listened to brief reports of summer work by its mem-

bers.

The Section then adjourned.

MILTon FRANKLIN,

Secretary.

296 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

OcTOBER 22, 1906.

The Section met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, in conjunction with the American Ethnological Society.

The present officers of the Section were reélected for the ensuing year.

The following program was then presented:

Frederick §. Dellenbaugh, THE Navaso Loom; Is It INDIGENOUS?

George Grant MacCurdy, CoNVENTIONALISM IN THE ANCIENT ART OF CHI-

RIQUI.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortTH,

Secretary.

PUBLIC LECTURE.

OcTOBER 29, 1906.

The members of the Academy and their friends met in the large lecture

hall of the American Museum of Natural History, at 8:15 P. M. to listen to

an extremely interesting lecture by Mr. F. A. Lucas, Director of the Brooklyn

Museum of Arts and Sciences, entitled “‘THE CoLLEcTION oF EXTINCT

ELEPHANTS IN THE AMERICAN Museum.” The lecture was illustrated

with stereopticon views.

W. M. WHEELER,

Recording Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

NovEMBER 5, 1906.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M., at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 297

The following name was then presented for election to Associate Active

Membership, having been approved by action of the Council:

James Howard McGregor, Barnard College.

On motion, elected by ballot cast by the secretary.

The Amendment to Chapter XI, Section 3, of the By-laws, regarding

investments, as placed on file with the minutes of the meeting held May 7,

1906, and laid on the table at the meeting of October 1, 1906, was then

presented for the action of the Academy. It was unanimously voted that

the section be amended as read.

The Amendments to the Constitution, as presented with the minutes for

May 7, 1906, were then presented for the action of the Academy and were

unanimously adopted as read.

The meeting then adjourned.

W. M. WHEELER,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

NovEMBER 5, 1906.

The Section met at 8:15 P. M., at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Crampton presiding.

The minutes of the previous meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The Section then proceeded to the election of its officers for 1907.

Prof. Henry E. Crampton was reélected Chairman of the Section and

nominated to the Council for reélection as Vice-President of the Academy.

Prof. M. A. Bigelow was reélected Secretary of the Section.

The following program was then offered:

Clinton G. Abbott, Expression or EmMoTION IN Brrps aS SHOWN BY

PHOTOGRAPHY.

Henry E. Crampton, A Case or Mutation IN PULMONATE GASTROPODS.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Abbott said that as expression of emotion in the human being and

in many animals is evidenced largely by the lines of the mouth and face,

298 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

it would seem at first thought that birds, handicapped by an unrelaxable

bill and feathered face, would be largely incapable of the mute expression of

emotion. But a large series of photographs, taken of living wild birds un-

der varying conditions show fear, expectation, satisfaction, bewilderment,

curiosity, worry and many other emotions expressed merely by the position

of the body, and the raising or depressing of the feathers. The mental

attitude of birds of different temperaments under the same conditions is

especially well illustrated.

The paper was illustrated with a fine series of lantern-slides.

The Section then adjourned.

M. A. BIGELOW,

Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

NovEMBER 12, 1906.

The Section met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Hovey presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

On motion of Dr. G. F. Kunz the following Sectional Officers were

nominated for 1907:

For Chairman and Vice-president, subject to election by the Academy

at the Annual Meeting, . ; , : : . Prof. A. W. Grabau.

For Secretary : : , 2 Dr. A. A. Julien.

By unanimous vote of the sebtian the Secretary was instructed to cast a

ballot for the above nominees, which was done.

The following program was then offered:

A. A. Julien, On A BurieD KITCHEN-MIDDEN AT SoUTH Harwicu,

Cape Cop, Mass.

James F. Kemp and

E. O. Hovey, THe Mexico MEETING oF THE INTERNATIONAL

CONGRESS OF GEOLOGY.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

The interesting paper by Dr. Julien was illustrated with lantern views

and discussed by Mr. F. Wilton James, Professor A. W. Grabau, and Dr.

Julien.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 299

Professor Kemp presented an outline of the work of the Tenth Inter-

national Geological Congress which was held in September in the City of

Mexico. The Congress was opened at eleven o’clock in the morning of

September 6 by President Diaz of the Republic of Mexico, and in the great

assembly hall of the historic School of Mines. In the afternoon the regular

sessions began in the fine new building of the Mexican National Geological

Survey. On the alternate days of the business sessions, excursions were

offered to points near the City of Mexico. The first great topic discussed

was Past Geological Climates, and occupied two days. The second related

to the Origin of Ore Deposits and occupied a day and a half. Subjects

of general interest filled the remaining days, including especially Earth-

quakes and Volcanoes. ‘The speaker briefly outlined the more important

communications. Excursions were given to the great lava flow near the

city, called the Pedregal, to Cuernavaca, to Pachuca, and to the Pyramids

of San Juan Teotihuacan. In the evenings banquets were tendered by

various officials, of which the chief was by President Diaz at Chapultepec.

Dr. Hovey spoke briefly of the excursions to some of the volcanoes in

the southern part of the Republic and of the trip across the Isthmus of

Tehuantepec.

The Section then adjourned.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

NovEMBER 19, 1906.

The Section met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Trowbridge presiding.

The minutes of the previous meeting were omitted on account of the

absence of the Secretary.

A public lecture was then delivered by Professor Charles Lane Poor,

entitled “THE Proposep NEw ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATORY AND NAvUTI-

cAL Museum ror New York City.”

The lecture was illustrated with stereopticon views.

Roy W. Miner,

Secretary pro tem.

300 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

NOVEMBER 26, 1906.

The Section met in conjunction with the New York Section of the

American Psychological Association at 4 P. M. at the Psychological

Laboratory, Columbia University, and at 8:15 P. M. at the American

Museum of Natural History.

The minutes of the previous meeting of the Section were read and ap-

proved.

The following program was presented:

Afternoon session.

F. Lyman Wells, Lincuistic ABILITY AND INTELLECTUAL EFFICIENCY.

Kate Gordon, ESTHETICS OF SIMPLE COLOR-ARRANGEMENTS.

A. H. Pierce, GUSTATORY AUDITION.

Harvey Carr, THe PENDULAR WHIP-LASH ILLUSION oF MoTION.

Evening session.

Robert MacDougall, IMAGINATIVE THOUGHT AS ADAPTIVE RESPONSE.

Brother Chrysostom, PsycHOLOGY AND SPELLING.

John Dewey, KNOWLEDGE AND JUDGMENT.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

The paper by Dr. Wells was published in full in the JouRNAL oF Put-

osopHy for December 6, 1906.

Dr. Gordon presented the results of experiments on the esthetics of

simple color arrangements. She sought to arrange colors in a field in a

manner somewhat similar to the usual massing of colors in a painting.

Her figures were composed of large and small triangles of color arranged

symmetrically about a point, and with bases turned toward each other.

Red, yellow, green and blue were the colors used, and these and the trian-

gles were arranged in all possible ways within the limits indicated. These

colors differed greatly in brightness, and the results so far seem to show

that preferences depend almost entirely on the arrangements of brightness.

Small bright triangles surrounded by large dark ones were uniformly pre-

ferred. By control experiments it was found that this result depended

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 301

partly on a preference for small masses in the centre surrounded by large

masses, and partly on a preference for brightness surrounded by darkness.

The results could, however, be reversed by certain accessory figures. The

preference for a certain arrangement of colors did not depend on a pref-

erence for single colors; the latter preference was also studied, with the re-

sult that different colors were preferred according as the background was

light or dark; on the whole the order of preference was red, blue, green

and yellow. The preferred combinations were red and green, yellow and

blue.

Professor Pierce, in his paper described an interesting case of a new

form of synesthesia. The subject is a young lady, now a college senior,

and it is important to note that she has a slight and variable deafness and

apparently complete anosmia. She experiences gustatory and other mouth

qualities on the hearing of words. Each word feels as if some article of

food were in the mouth and giving the complex of buccal sensations which

its actual presence would arouse. The gustatory equivalents are perma-

nent, being found the same after a lapse of six months. It has been im-

possible to detect any system in the equivalencies, as the same sound, such

as a labial, produces very different gustatory feelings. There is more

agreement in regard to the vowels. Inarticulate sounds, excepting the

high notes of the piano, do not give gustatory experiences. Some facts

which point to the case being one of true synesthesia rather than of asso-

ciated imagery, are: that the experience comes unsought; that it often

precedes the name of the substance tasted, the name being found only after

search; that some of the experiences are sharply located and located right,

according to the position of the corresponding end organs; and that when

in doubt the subject often presses the cheeks inward to strengthen the im-

pression. The case and its interpretation were discussed at some length

at the meeting.

Dr. Carr presented the results of experimental work on the pendular

whip-lash illusion of movement. This illusion has been interpreted by

Dodge as depending on the non-perception of movement in an object which

is perfectly followed by the eyes, and consequently as indicating that the

feelings of eye movement do not furnish the basis for the perception of

movement. Dr. Carr’s measurements show that the object followed by

the eyes is seen to move till nearly the end of its swing, and that the illusory

appearance of motion in the swinging object which is not regarded, after

the object which is regarded has apparently come to rest, is due to the

progressive disappearance of the after-image streak. An opposite and

very curious illusion can be produced by placing both objects on the same

arm of the pendulum and regarding the object whose swing is the longest.

302 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The after-image streak of the other object then disappears progressively in

the direction opposite to its real movement, and gives the appearance of

an object moving in one direction while covering distance in the other

direction if at all.

Professor MacDougall said in abstract: The adaptive responses of

organisms differ in complexity, immediacy and persistence. The lower

form makes simple, direct responses involving few determinants; the

higher are characterized by sustained and complex reactions based upon

intricate processes of apprehension. The introduction of a system of

ideas between stimulus and reaction serves the furtherance of adaptation

in two ways; it supplements the nature of the presented stimulus by a

representation of its significant associates, and it increases selective dis-

crimination in the choice of reactions. Representative thought is thus,

from the biological point of view, a device by which economy of action

is attained through the elimination of unfit alternatives at the level of imag-

ination instead of at that of movement. When divorced from association

with immediate practical results, thought still preserves this function in

the economy of life. The plastic imagination is occupied with the repre-

sentation of events and situations for which it constructs a series of ideal

solutions. Adaptive reaction is rendered more efficient by the organic

exercise which imagination thus provides. ‘Through the freeing of thought

from its practical relations an independent value is secured to all its mani-

festations. This element of absolute worth is embodied in each of the

two forms of thought to which the primitive discriminative reaction has

given origin, namely, to productive imagination and to analytic reflection.

The former is a free treatment of the concrete situations of life according

to principles prescribed by esthetic motives, and gives rise to the system of

arts; the latter is a thoroughgoing exploration of the stimuli to action under

a logical motive, and gives rise to the system of sciences.

Brother Chrysostom, in his paper, emphasized particularly the great

difference between the mistakes in spelling of good and of bad spellers,

and the consequent need of treating the two classes differently in teaching.

This led him to urge the importance to education of organized and authori-

tative promulgation by psychological associations of the facts and laws of

psychology that bear on the problems of teaching.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. Woopworts,

Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 303

BUSINESS MEETING.

DECEMBER 3, 1906.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

It was reported from the Council that the following nominations for

1907 had been made:

For President, Nathaniel L. Britton,

For Vice-Presidents:

Section of Biology, Henry E. Crampton,

Section of Geology and Mineralogy, A. W. Grabau,

Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry, C. C. Trowbridge,

Section of Anthropology and Psychology, Robert MacDougall,

For Corresponding Secretary, Richard E. Dodge

For Recording Secretary, E. O. Hovey,

For Treasurer, Emerson McMillin,

For Librarian, Ralph W. Tower,

For Editor, Charles Lane Poor,

For Councilors (to serve three years) W. M. Wheeler,

Charles Baskerville,

For Councilor (to serve one year) H. H. Rusby,

For Finance Committee, John H. Caswell,

Frederick S. Lee,

George F. Kunz.

It was voted that the report of the Council be accepted.

The President then announced that the Annual Meeting would be of a

similar nature to those of the past two years, that is, it would consist of a

business meeting to be followed by a dinner, after which the President’s

Address would be given; that it would take place on the evening of Monday,

December 17th, and that full details would be sent to each member in the

course of a few days.

The meeting then adjourned.

W. M. WHEELER,

Recording Secretary.

304 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

DECEMBER 3, 1906.

The Section met at 8:30 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Crampton presiding.

The minutes of the previous meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered.

R. H. Johnson, AN EvoLuTionary STUDY OF COCCINELLIDS.

C. B. Davenport, INHERITANCE IN CANARY BIRDs.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Johnson’s studies, pursued at the Laboratory of the Carnegie

Institution for Experimental Research, gave these results: The species

of the larger lady-beetles exhibit a great variety of color markings. Many

of the varieties are connected by a series of intergrades, but generally the

intergrades are less abundant than the varieties. These constitute “posi-

tions of organic stability.” Typical Hzppodamia convergens is found

associated with and inter-breeding with its several varieties. In crossing

varieties with the parent species, there was either perfect dominance or

there were present, in various proportions, the parental forms, intergrades,

and some individuals more aberrant than the parent. These facts show

the existence of alternative inheritance in various degrees and therefore

probably some evolution by mutation. Modifications appeared in response

to temperature experiments in some species. In the evolution of these

markings the chief fact has not been natural selection but orthogenesis.

The Section then adjourned.

M. A. BiGELow, ?

Secretary.

PUBLIC LECTURE.

DEcEMBER 5, 1906.

The members of the Academy and their friends, to the number of over

900, met in the large auditorium of the American Museum of Natural

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 305

History at 8: 15 P. M. to listen to a lecture by Mr. Charles Truax of Chicago

on “THE YELLOWSTONE NaTIONAL Park”’ illustrated by more than 200

excellent colored lantern views of the natural wonders of that region.

W. M. WHEELER,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

DECEMBER 10, 1906.

The Section met at 8:15 P. M., at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Hovey presiding.

The minutes of the previous meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered.

A. A. Julien, PRESENT STRUCTURAL CHARACTER AND PROBABLE For-

MER EXTENT OF THE PALISADE TRAP.

G. E. Anderson, DEVELOPMENT OF THE INNER WALL IN THE PALOZOIC

CORALS.

A. W. Grabau, THE GEOGRAPHICAL CLASSIFICATION OF MARINE LIFE

DISTRICTS.

The meeting then adjourned.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secretary.

ANNUAL MEETING.

DECEMBER 17, 1906.

The Academy met for the Annual Meeting on Monday, December 17,

1906, at 7:30 P. M., at the Hotel Endicott, President Britton in the Chair.

A formal session for the transaction of regular business was held, followed

by a dinner, at which Members of the Academy, and their friends, to the

number of 71 were present.

The accompanying reports of the Corresponding Secretary, Recording

306 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Secretary, Treasurer and Librarian were read and approved, and the

Treasurer's Report was referred to the Finance Committee for auditing.

The Editor not being present no report was presented by him.

The following Members were elected Fellows of the Academy:

Cleveland Abbe, W. H. Burr,

W. K. Gregory, Simon Flexner, M. D.

Roy W. Miner, Thomas Hunt Morgan,

J. E. Parsons, Alexander Petrunkewitch,

Clark Wissler.

The Academy then proceeded to the election of Officers for the year

1907. Dr. L. T. Chamberlain and Mr. W. G. Levison were appointed

tellers; ballots prepared by the Council according to the By-laws were

distributed, and the votes were counted. The following officers were de-

clared elected:

President, Nathaniel L. Britton.

Vice-Presidents,

H. E. Crampton (Section of Biology), A. W. Grabau (Section of

Geology and Mineralogy), C. C. Trowbridge (Section of Astron-

omy, Physics and Chemistry), R. MacDougall (Section of

Anthropology and Psychology).

Corresponding Secretary, R. E. Dodge.

Recording Secretary, E. O. Hovey.

‘Treasurer, Emerson MacMillin.

Librarian, R. W. Tower.

Editor, C1. Poor:

Councilors (to serve three years), William M. Wheeler, Charles Basker-

ville.

Finance Committee, John H. Caswell, George F. Kunz, Frederick

S. Lee.

The President announced that the 200th anniversary of the birth of

Linneus would occurr in May, 1907, and that it seemed fitting that the

Academy should take the lead in commemorating the event. Upon motion

by Dr. Chamberlain, it was voted to commend the proposition and refer

it to the Council for action.

The President of the Academy, Professor Nathaniel L. Britton, then

delivered his address upon ‘Some Considerations and Illustrations of

Color in Plants.”

The Academy then adjourned.

W. M. WHEELER,

Recording Secretary.

iat on

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 307

REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY.

According to our corrected lists there are now 49 Honorary Members

and 161 Corresponding Members.

Of the Honorary Members 40 replied to the Biennial Circulars sent in

1905; six have not been heard from since 1903, and two have not answered

since 1901. During the last year one Honorary Member, Prof. Samuel

Pierpont Langley, and two Corresponding Members, Professor Ludwig

Boltzmann and Professor Henry Augustus Ward, have died.

Respectfully submitted,

RIcHARD E. DonpceE,

Corresponding Secretary.

REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.

During the year 1906 the Academy held 8 Business Meetings, and 29

Sectional Meetings, at which 86 stated papers and lectures were presented,

on the following subjects:

Astronomy, 2 papers and 2 lectures

Physics, 3 papers

Paleontology, SA

Zoélogy, Oa

Geology, Pa ae

Mineralogy, Ae) ais:

Anthropology &

Archeology, oe ts

Psychology, 7

Philosophy, Orie

Physiology, Ihde hy

Botany, Dine

Embryology, iG

General Biology, Grp

Bacteriology, LN hie

Ethnology, Aas

Reviews, oan aet

At the present time, the membership of the Academy includes 441

308 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Active Members, 19 of whom are Associate Active Members and 122 are

Fellows. The election of 9 Fellows is pending. During the year there

have been ten deaths and 24 resignations, while 7 Members have been

dropped for non-payment of dues. The new Members elected during the

year number 58. As the Membership of the Academy a year ago was

424, there has been a net gain of 17 during 1906.

The most noteworthy event during the past year has been the affiliation

with the Academy of the other Societies formerly composing the Scientific

Alliance of New York, and the vesting of the functions of the Alliance in

the Academy. By the terms of the agreement the Members of the Affiliated

Societies become, in addition, Associate Members of the Academy and are

to be represented in the Council of the Academy by a Councilor for each

Affiliated Society. The Academy agrees to encourage the work of these

Societies by maintaining lecture courses, by awarding grants for scientific

investigation, by providing facilities for the meetings of the Societies, by

announcing in a weekly Bulletin their meetings and other functions and by

annually printing and distributing corrected lists of their members. The

object of the affiliation is to unify scientific effort and activity in this City.

Another new development is the establishment of a new class of Mem-

bership,— that of Donors. This class is to be composed of persons con-

tributing $50.00 or more annually to the general fund of the Academy.

It is with great regret the Academy records the loss by death of the

following Members:

Miss Harriet Brown Bailey, (Member for 1 year).

R. Ogden Doremus (Fellow), ( “ “ 39 = years).

Samuel Keyser, Cute: eee, por

S. Nicholson Kane, OP ac age chive

James McNaughton, Con Ras SiGuh:

Henry E. Taylor, COCs “« 4 months).

Philip Schuyler, (ies “ 30 years).

Walter S. Logan, Cit see ee)

Walter Bryan, Qed nna Yen us a |

Respectfully submitted,

. W. M. WHEELER,

Recording Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906 309

REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.

The accessions to the library during the past year have been 300 volumes,

63 pamphlets and 1697 numbers. These have been duly acknowledged

and made accessible for reference.

Special acknowledgment is herewith made to the Academies, Societies

and Institutions who have made gifts of many volumes necessary to com-

plete broken sets in the library.

It is desired that Members of the Academy assist in extending the use

of its library to the public.

Respectfully submitted,

R. W. Tower,

Librarian.

CONDENSED REPORT OF THE TREASURER FOR THE YEAR

ENDING DECEMBER 17th, 1906.

To the New York Academy of Sciences:

As required by the By-laws, I herewith submit a statement of receipts

and disbursements since the last Annual Meeting, and a balance-sheet

from my ledger as of this date.

Respectfully yours,

Emerson McMittin,

Treasurer.

Cash in bank at beginning of fiscal year. . . . $3,959.61 i

ash’ received during fiscal year . . . . . . 9,923.97

Total cash on hand and received BNDAR STA OUI ALT NOT) OR Soe I ete Pesce e ReD

Paid out on vouchers during the year. . . . . . . . . 8,889.47

Balance (cash: in banks this date) 9) ):))).))6))6)) 00) Sho Aad

Deposits.

The cash balance is deposited as follows:

With Guaranty Trust Company ait $1,158.37

“Emerson McMillin & Co., Bankers . . . 4,335.74

Total cash in banks Se IPN 5) (Neal) Re AO Ae Da

Emerson McMituin,

Treasurer.

310 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

In this Condensed Report is included a collection of interest on deposits,

amounting to $74.91, which is not included in the following statement, which

has been made up by the Assistant Secretary, under a recent arrangement

of book-keeping.

December 17, 1906.

" REcEIPts.!

Balance on hand, December 18, 1905

One year’s interest at 45% on Lampe

Mortgage (St. Ann’s Avenue) for $12,000

One year’s interest at 5 % on Brennan

Mortgage (East 135th St.) for $5,200

Interest on Bond Investment SNe

Life Membership Fees :

Active LUBE ESSIE ID Dues, 1903

if Ha) LOA

re 4 {Wt OOe

° ” = 1 1906

Associate Membership Dues, 1906

Interest on Deposits in Bank

Surplus from Annual Dinner, 1905 .

$50.00

70.00

140.00

3,180.00

From Sales of Publications (volumes, reprints Al plane

DISBURSEMENTS !

Publications : :

Expense of General Office :

Salary of Assistant Secretary

Expenses of Exhibition to date

Expenses of Treasurer

Expenses of Librarian

General Expenses .

Amount on Deposit with esate Sonsete as

office Expenses

Amount on Deposit with Dea ee =

Expenses of Exhibition .

Balance on hand

$1,576.39

997.65

799.92

36.63

29.60

230.40

174.87

363.37

McM.

$3,959.61

540.00

260.00

14.31

1,050.00

$3,440.00

36.00

65.69

19.70

243.06

$9,628.37

$4,209.17

. $5,419.20

1Summary prepared by the Assistant Secretary.

oll

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1906

‘ysog “VY sopreyy

‘aayunuoy buryypny ‘qoaseg “FL uyor

‘u10gsQ “yy ALUeTy

poaoidde puv poururexi

“Aivyaioog quejsissy oyj AQ porvdoig +

02°619' C$

FP 6LG : ; : : : sUIODUT [B1oue+)

00°S0S : 2 * puny juouvtieg jo sut00Uy

LG 99F : : * pung uoyeoyqng jo sWoouy

6P' SIE ? : : puny uoqnpny jo euloouy

GZ L68'T ee ee puny uoqnpny

00°000°E ee ee PU UOK ROTC ng

Gor ore = == 2 puny Juedenttey,

02'619'So$

02 61F'S ; : IOINSVILT, YIM puey uo Ysed

00°002°Z1$ : : : : * - s}USUISA UT

T9061 ‘21 YAAWGOA ‘LaGHS DONVIVE

‘SHONUIOS AO AWAHAVOV MHYOA MAN DHL

[Annas N. Y. Acap. Scrz., Vol. XVIII, No. 8, Part II, pp. 313-383. May, 1908.]

RECORD OF MEETINGS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

January, 1907, to December, 1907.

By Epmunp Otis Hovey, Recording Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

JANUARY 7, 1907.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following candidates for election as Active Members, recommended

by the Council, were duly elected:

L. P. Gratacap, American Museum of Natural History,

C. H. Roberts, 10 Washington Place.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

JANUARY 7, 1907.

Section met at 8:30 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

Thirty persons were present.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

313

314 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Edmund Otis Hovey, NoTeEs oN THE VOLCANOES OF ToLuca, CoLIMA

AND POPOCATEPETL.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Hovey said in abstract: Toluca is the oldest of the three volcanoes.

A feature of greatest interest in the crater is the dome of vitreous andesite

which welled up in the crater as the latest phase of the activity of the voleano

and shows a certain resemblance to the cone of Mt. Pelé. The volcano of

Popocatepetl shows its composite character as a strato-volcano with great

clearness in the walls of the crater, and streams of lava have been among

the features of the most recent eruptions. The volcano of Colima is still

sending up a vigorous column of steam from its central summit crater.

From this summit crater there poured out, in the latest eruption (1903),

streams of very frothy lava which present a strange appearance on account

of the porous character of the surface blocks. The same feature character-

izes the streams of the earlier eruptions and has led some observers to the

erroneous conclusion that flows of lava have not occurred at the volcano of

Colima.

The paper was illustrated with stereopticon views from photographs

taken by the author.

The Section then adjourned to an examination, in an adjoining room,

of the exhibits of Geology, Paleontology and Mineralogy in the New York

Academy of Sciences’ Exhibition, under the guidance of the committeemen

in charge of those exhibits.

A. A. JULIEN,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

JANUARY 21, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Trowbridge presiding. Wil-

liam Campbell was appointed Secretary of Section pro tem.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

William Campbell, THe RELATION BETWEEN THE MICROSTRUCTURE AND

THE Heat AND MECHANICAL TREATMENT OF IRON

AND STEEL.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 315

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Campbell’s paper was illustrated by lantern slides and photo-

grapas showing the gradual changes brought about by increase of carbon

contents and by variation in thermal and mechanical treatment.

An interesting discussion followed.

The chairman announced that through permission of Council there

would be no meetings of the Section in February and April.

The Section then adjourned.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary pro tem.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

JANUARY 28, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M. in conjunction with the American Ethnolog-

ical Society, at the American Museum of Natural History, General J. G.

Wilson presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Marshall H. Saville, THe InpIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND AND

VICINITY IN THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY.

M. Raymond Harrington, Rock SHELTERS AND SHELL Heaps NEAR NEW

York City.

W. S. Calver, ReEcENtT Discovery or ABORIGINAL REMAINS

ON MANHATTAN ISLAND.

Max Schrabisch, INDIANS OF BERGEN, Passaic AND Morris

CountTiEs, NEw JERSEY.

Alanson Skinner, SoME ReEcENT DISCOVERIES IN A PREHISTORIC

VILLAGE SITE AT MARINER’S HARBOR, STATEN

ISLAND.

Reginald Pelham Bolton, Recent DiscovERIES IN THE ABORIGINAL, Co-

LONIAL AND REVOLUTIONARY REMAINS ON

MANHATTAN ISLAND.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopworrtH,

Secretary.

316 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

BUSINESS MEETING.

FEBRUARY 4, 1907.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M., at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following candidates for election to the Academy, recommended

by Council, were duly elected:

For Active Membership:

Dr. John B. Smith, State Entomologist, New Brunswick, N. J.,

Dr. William Campbell, Columbia University;

For Non-resident Membership:

Professor Francis B. Sumner, Woods Holl, Mass.,

Professor George I. Finlay, Colorado Springs, Colo.;

For Associate Membership:

Mr. Dwight Northrup, 26 Court St., Brooklyn, N. Y.

Council recommended the reélection of the Associate Members carried

over from last year. Council reported that the list of delegates to the Coun-

cil of the Academy from the Affiliated Societies had been completed, and

that a committee representing the Academy and Affiliated Societies had

reported an attractive program for the celebration of the two hundredth

anniversary of the Swedish naturalist, Carolus Linneus, 25 May, 1907.

On motion, the report of Council was accepted.

The committee consisting of Messrs. Britton, Kemp, Grabau and Hovey,

which was elected at the last meeting of the Academy to prepare resolutions

expressing to Mr. W. P. Letchworth the Academy’s appreciation of his gift

of the Glen Iris Estate to the State of New York, presented its report that

the resolutions had been prepared and forwarded to Mr. Letchworth.

The Academy voted to accept the report and place a copy of the resolutions

on file. The resolutions are as follows:

WuereEAS the New York Academy of Sciences has learned of the

generous gift to the State of New York, of a public park known as Glen

Iris at Portage, by Mr. William Pryor Letchworth, and its acceptance by

the State legislature, under the condition prescribed by Mr. Letchworth

that this beautiful reservation be placed in charge of the American Scenic

and Historical Preservation Society;

RESOLVED that the Academy of Sciences expresses its recognition of

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 317

the value to science of this reservation, which, in addition to its exceptional

interest from the point of view of scenery, botany and glacial geology, con-

tains an important part of the standard section of the Upper Devonic forma-

tions of North America;

RESOLVED that the Academy hereby expresses its sincere appreciation

of this gift, which will give pleasure and be of important educational value

for all time to the people of the State of New York and to visitors from other

states and countries, and

RESOLVED that the thanks of the New York Academy of Sciences be

and hereby are tendered to the distinguished and public-spirited donor.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Oris Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

FEBRUARY 4, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Crampton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

“THE NatTuraAL History oF BERMUDA.”

C. L. Bristol, GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS AND ZOOLOGY.

J. J. Stevenson, GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY.

N. L. Britton, Lanp Botany.

M. A. Howe, Marine Botany.

The section then adjourned.

M. A. BIGELow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Frepruary 11, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

Twenty-two persons were present.

318 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

John M. Clarke, THe GEOGRAPHY OF THE ATLANTIC DEVONIAN.

James F. Kemp, Notes oN MINERAL LOCALITIES VISITED DURING THE

SuMMER OF 1906 In CANADA AND MEXIco.

The section then adjourned.

A. A. JULIEN,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

FEBRUARY 18, 1907.

By permission of Council no meeting was held.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

FEBRUARY 25, 1907.

Section met in conjunction with the New York Branch of the American

Psychological Association at 4:00 P. M., at the Psychological Laboratory,

Schermerhorn Hall, Columbia University, and at 8:15 P. M. at the Ameri-

can Museum of Natural History, Vice-President MacDougall, presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Afternoon Session.

S. Froberg, REACTION TIME AS AFFECTED BY THE INTENSITY,

AREA AND DURATION OF THE STIMULUS.

Harvey Carr, A Case oF INCIPIENT HysTERICAL TRANCE.

W. C. Riidiger, INDIVIDUAL VARIATIONS IN THE AREA OF DISTINCT

VISION.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 319

Evening Session.

Brother Chrysostom, SPACE.

Dickinson S. Miller, ImaGELess THOUGHT.

C. B. Bliss, AN INQUIRY AFTER THE POSSIBLE RELATIONS BE-

TWEEN THE ‘TRINITIES OF PSYCHOLOGY AND

THEOLOGY.

Cassius J. Keyser, SomE RELATIONS OF GEOMETRY TO PSYCHOLOGY AND

PHILOSOPHY.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Froéberg gave the results of an experimental study of reaction time

as affected by the intensity, area and duration of the stimulus. He used

chiefly light stimuli, and found the reaction time to decrease as the inten-

sity, area or duration increased; as the magnitude of the stimulus increases

in a geometrical series, the time of reaction decreases in arithmetical pro-

gression. A given ratio of increase of intensity produces about twice as

much decrease in reaction time as does the same ratio of increase of area

or duration. In case of sound, also, increase of intensity brings decrease

of reaction time.

Dr. Carr reported a case of incipient hysterical trance. The subject

Was a young woman who, since the age of six years, following an attack

of typhoid fever, had been subject to recurring attacks of partial trance,

in which, though no unconsciousness, amnesia or alternation of personality

occurred, there was motor paralysis (without rigidity) and the following

peculiar visual experience. Objects appeared to move away, while re-

maining, at first, clear-cut and real; next they either remained in the dis-

tance or disappeared in a haze, or sometimes the whole visual field became

blank. Her feet, as she lay, seemed far away, and this visual illusion was

accompanied by the tactile illusion of being indefinitely long. Auditorily,

the experience was one of great quiet. The experience was terrifying, but

she was unable to struggle or cry out. The subject presented some fur-

ther symptoms of hysteria, and a comparison of her case with that of Heléne

Smith leads to the view that only circumstances making the subject antag-

onistic to her trances and to occultism prevented her from developing into

a trance medium.

My. Riidiger said in his paper that he has explored an area near the

center of clear vision by the tachistoscopic method, and#determined the

limits within which the letters ‘u’ and ‘n, of a certain type, can be dis-

tinguished 90 per cent. and also 75 per cent. of the time. There were

320 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

found to be individual differences in the area of distinct vision, compara-

ble in magnitude to the differences found in most other traits. Slight if

any correlation could be detected between the size of the area of distinct

vision and the speed of reading or the number of fixation pauses per line

of print. The amount read during one fixation pause is, in most persons,

much less than the amount covered by the area of distinct vision.

Brother Chrysostum, in discussing ‘Space,’ noted two sources of con-

fusion in treating it. The first consists in a failure to distinguish between

real and ideal space. Real space may be defined as the real extension of

a given body considered as contained within the surfaces that bound it.

This concept is complex, containing an objective element —a real exten-

sion, and a subjective element —a logical relation. Real space, viewed

concretely, is neither infinitely divisible nor infinite, as current physical and

astronomical discussions illustrate. Confusion also arises from an implied

identification of space and place. As real space is primarily real extension

and therefore solid contents as bounded, so place is primarily the bounding

surface referred to the enclosed or bounded body. The two concepts are

complementary, not identical.

Professor Miller traced the doctrine of ‘Imageless Thought’ back to

Descartes, Spinoza and Schopenhauer. The argument for it has been

that since the work of thought, the conclusion reached, can not be attributed

to sensation or to images of sensation — since, indeed, the work of thought

may be accomplished in the absence of imagery — therefore there must be

some other agent in thought, and consciousness must contain something

besides sensation and imagery. To this argument the answer is that there

need be nothing there. Nothing capable of doing the work of thought need

show in consciousness. Thought as a function must be distinguished from

conscious content. As a function, thought is essentially unconscious. It

makes no difference how impotent and irrelevant the images in conscious-

ness may appear, if only by good luck their associations are such as to lead

to the right conclusion. What those who testify to experience of imageless

thought really experience is probably a bodily feeling, which, left unana-

lyzed, appears as a feeling of satisfaction or of being on the right track,

but which, when carefully attended to, is found to be of sensory quality,

like all other conscious content.

Dr. Bliss said in abstract: Theologians have usually sought to derive

the concept of the Trinity from quite other than psychological sources.

Yet the existence of a psychological trinity is certainly a suggestive fact

in this connection; it seems possible that the concept of God as threefold

has arisen from conceiving the fundamental tendencies of the human mind

as indefinitely expanded. Expansion of the intellectual tendency would

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 321

give God as the world ground; expanding the emotional tendency would

give God as universal love; and expanding the active tendency would give

God as universal action.

Professor Keyser discussed certain questions connected with the bases

of geometry. In Hilbert’s ‘Foundations of Geometry’ culminate the efforts

of western thinkers from pre-Euclidean times so to analyze the space

intuition as to provide a simple and complete set of independent axioms

for the science of space, in particular for what is now distinguished as

Euclidean geometry. For Hilbert as for Euclid, the elements of space fall

into three classes or systems, points, planes, lines. Hilbert’s axioms are

statements of certain relations that shall be the fundamental relations

satisfied by the elements, but — and this is very important — the elements

are not further defined. Accordingly, if one asks, What are points, planes

and lines? the answer is, They are any three systems of entities that satisfy

the axioms and require no others. Are there other entity systems than

those of points, planes and lines, that satisfy the Hilbert axioms? There

are infinitely many such other triplets of systems of entities. One of the

most obvious of such triplets consists of the system of points of space ex-

cept a single specified point, say P, the system of all the spheres containing

P regarded as bereft of P and so called pseudo-spheres, and the system of

all the circles containing P regarded as bereft of P and so called pseudo

or pathological circles. ‘These three systems perfectly satisfy the Hilbert

axioms, and the description of the ‘space’ composed of these systems of

entities regarded as elements is logically identical with Euclidean geometry,

though psychologically the geometries are as different as fire and water or

as red and bitter. Euclidean geometry is, therefore, one; psychologically

many — infinitely many.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

Marcu 4, 1907.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Grabau presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

Council reported that arrangements were being made for suitable com-

322 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

memorative exercises of the two hundredth anniversary of the birth of

Linneus, and the Secretary gave a summary of the proposed program.

Dr. G. F. Kunz informed the Academy of the death of Henri Moissan,

Honorary Member, and a Committee was elected, consisting of Messrs.

G. F. Kunz, R. S. Woodworth, C. F. Chandler, J. F. Kemp and E. O.

Hovey, to draw up suitable resolutions.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Marcu 4, 1907.

Section met at 8:30 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The session was devoted to a description of Letchworth Park (Glen

Iris), the new State Reservation on the Genesee River, New York, recently

presented to the State of New York by Mr. William Pryor Letchworth, and

the following papers were presented:

A. W. Grabau, THE SCENERY AND GEOLOGY OF THE GORGES AND FALLS.

George F. Kunz, THE PLAN or DEVELOPMENT OF THE PARK AS A MEANS

FOR SCIENTIFIC EDUCATION.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

In the first part of his paper, Professor Grabau discussed studies made

by him for some years on the drainage systems of central New York in

preglacial time. It was pointed out that all the characteristics of the ancient

valleys indicate a southward drainage in late Tertiary time. In all cases

where the valleys are traceable they unite southward into trunk streams,

a condition wholly inexplicable on the supposition that these valleys were

formed by northward-flowing streams. ‘This is readily seen by an inspec-

tion of the topographic sheets as well as of the magnificent geologic sheets

of this section recently published by the state survey. Where the connection

is broken, this can generally be shown to be due to drift deposits.

The following drainage systems were tentatively outlined, the outline

being presented as a report of progress rather than as a final settlement in

any one case:

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 323

On the west, the Wyoming (Warsaw) valley probably had the Dale

valley, now occupied in part by the Little Tonawanda, as a western branch,

joming it north of Warsaw. The Warsaw valley is still believed to have

been continuous with the Upper Genesee valley, above Portageville, by way

of Glen Iris, as outlined by the speaker in 1894 and earlier. The valley

of Silver Lake joined the Warsaw valley somewhere near Silver Springs.

A narrower valley, now occupied by the Genesee from Gibsonville to St.

Helena, is continued by a buried gorge from that place to Portageville,

where it joins with the Warsaw-Glen Iris valley and another valley from

the northwest, to continue southward in the large valley now occupied by

the Upper Genesee.

The Canasseraga valley, now occupied in part by the Genesee, was cut

by an independent stream. This is the largest valley of the region and

was that of the master stream. The Nunda-Cashaqua valley, generally

held to have been the former path of the Genesee, is probably only an inner-

lowland type of valley, carved on the contact between Portage shales and

Chemung sandstones. It may have been in part a tributary of the Genesee

at Portageville. The Canasseraga, above the junction of the Cashaqua,

is as broad and flat-bottomed as below that point, and was certainly con-

tinnous throughout, being carved by a single stream, the Tertiary Canas-

seraga, as suggested nearly fifteen years ago by the speaker. ‘This river,

flowing southward, received as a tributary the Conesus, the valley of which

is broad and open to Scottsburg. Hemlock and Canadice rivers joined

southward, receiving another branch near Springwater, the united series

joining the Canasseraga by way of Wayland. Honeoye and Canandaigua

rivers joined near Naples having another eastern branch in West River.

Originally this series may have drained southward by way of Cohocton, but

may later have been captured by a branch of the Canasseraga. This pro-

position, however, needs careful study. Another branch of this system

seems to have been the Flint, the valley of which, traceable for twenty miles

or more, points toward the Cohocton outlet. Another system is represented

by the two branches of Keuka Lake, which have other branches uniting

with them southward.

Other systems are represented by the valleys of the more eastern lakes.

So far as the study has proceeded, these valleys could only have been

formed by a southward drainage, as outlined in Bulletin 45, New York

State Museum.

The remainder of the paper consisted of a description of the gorges and

falls about Portage, illustrated with lantern slides. The successive stages

in the development of the lower falls received special attention.

Dr. Kunz then presented a plan of development of the park as a means

for scientific education.

324 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Both papers were illustrated with beautiful lantern slides.

The Section then adjourned.

ALEXIS A. JULIEN,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

Marce# 11, 1907.

By permission of Council no meeting was held.

M. A. BicEetow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

Marca 22, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., in conjunction with the Physics Club of New

York City, Mr. Robert H. Cornish presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Demonstrations.

F. J. Arnold, FINDING THE WEIGHT OF AN [IRREGULAR Bopy BY

MEANS OF ITS CENTER OF GRAVITY.

R. H. Cornish, METHOD OF PROJECTION ON SCREEN OF LINES OF

ForcE SURROUNDING A CONDUCTOR CARRYING A

CURRENT.

R. H. Cornish, MECHANICAL ILLUSTRATION OF BEATS IN SOUND.

J. Stewart Gibson, New Piece or APPARATUS FOR SHOWING THE RELA-

TION BETWEEN INTENSITY OF ILLUMINATION AND

DISTANCE.

W. R. Pyle, (a) Dip NEEDLE DEMONSTRATION.

(b) MAGNETIZER FOR MAGNETS.

E. R. Von Nardroff, AN APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING THE MOMENT OF

INERTIA IN GM-CEN? UNITS.

Charles Forbes, (a) THE OSMOSESCOPE.

(6) Tue CENTRIFUGAL RaILway.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 325

Papers.

William M. Campbell, THe Errect or PRESSURE ON MAGNETIZATION OF

TRON.

J. Stewart Gibson, RersuLTs oF A SERIES OF EXPERIMENTS ON THE

CriticAL ANGLE; Its ErrectT ON VISION FROM

UNDERNEATH THE SURFACE OF WATER.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Campbell’s paper referred briefly to the Kirchoff theory on

the effects of stress deduced from the strains due to magnetization, to the

experimental work done by Wassmuth, Tomlinson, Nagaoka and Honda

and Miss Frisbie, and the contradictory results they obtained. Then fol-

lowed a description of the apparatus used by the writer, the method of

conducting the experiment and the results. Higher pressures were used

in magnetizing fields stronger than those used by other investigators. Keep-

ing the pressure constant and changing the field, the results showed an

increase in intensity up to about eighteen units of field, then a decrease

with a change of sign at about H = 90 units, and a continual decrease with

increase of field.

The Section then adjourned.

WIti1AM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

Marcu 25, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., in conjunction with the American Ethno-

logical Society, General J. G. Wilson presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Frederick §. Dellenbaugh, Some NoTES ON THE DISINTEGRATION OF THE

TRIBES OF OKLAHOMA.

Franz Boas, NoTES ON THE PAWNEE LANGUAGE.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

326 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

BUSINESS MEETING.

Aprit 1, 1907.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

Through the President, the Council reported that a plan had been formu-

lated by the Committee consisting of Messrs. Addison Brown, N. L. Britton,

A. C. Weeks and C. F. Cox for the legal transfer of the funds of the Council

of the Scientific Alliance of New York City to the keeping of the Council of

the New York Academy of Sciences, and an enabling resolution accepting

the care of the funds was presented. On motion by Professor James F.

Kemp, seconded by Professor R. 'T. Hill, a quorum being present, the fore-

going report was adopted, the enabling resolution passed and the contract

and resolutions just mentioned were made a part of the minutes of the

meeting. ‘They are as follows:

AGREEMENT made this first day of April, 1907, between the New

York Academy of Sciences, of the first part, and the Council of the Scientific

Alliance in the City of New York, of the second part, both Corporations

created by and existing under the laws of the State of New York.

WHEREAS the party of the first part is empowered by the provisions

of chapter 181 of the Laws of 1902 of the State of New York, to consolidate,

or to unite, with any other society or association in the City of New York

organized for the promotion of the knowledge of the study of any science or

research therein; and

WuerEAS the party of the second part is, and for many years past has

been, a society in the City of New York, organized for the purposes above-

mentioned; and

WHEREAS the said parties are desirous of uniting and effecting a con-

solidation upon the terms hereinafter stated, the same having been already

approved and ratified by the votes of the respective parties

Now THEREFORE, in consideration of one dollar and of their mutual

covenants, it is hereby agreed by and between the parties aforesaid, as fol-

lows:

(1) That the said two societies or corporations, known as the said parties

of the first and second parts, respectively, do hereby unite together and

become one consolidated society or corporation, by the name of the New

York Academy of Sciences, under, and according to the charter of the said

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 327

party of the first part and the amendments thereof, which shall remain in

all respects unaffected by this Agreement.

(2) That the constitution, rules, by-laws, regulations and membership

of the present New York Academy of Sciences shall be the constitution,

tules, by-laws, regulations and membership of the united or consolidated

society or corporation.

(3) That the said consolidated corporation shall have, hold and enjoy

all the property, rights, franchises and privileges belonging or appertaining

to the said constituent societies or corporations, and be subject to, and

discharge all the trusts and liabilities of either, in the manner now imposed

upon and required of the constituent societies.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said parties hereto have caused these pres-

ents to be signed in their names by the respective presidents thereof, the

day and year first above written.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES,

By N. L. Brirron President.

COUNCIL OF THE SCIENTIFIC ALLIANCE IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK,

By Cuaries F. Cox, President.

The Council further reported the death of Professor John K. Rees,

former president of the Academy, and of Professor Marcel Bertrand of Paris,

a Corresponding Member. On motion, the Academy appointed Professors

N. L. Britton and C. L. Poor a Committee to prepare a suitable memorial

of Professor Rees.

Council further reported receipt of a gift of $500.00 from an unnamed

donor to be used for the interests of the Academy as the Council might

direct. On motion, a vote of thanks to the donor of this gift to be trans-

mitted through Attorney John L. Bissell, 50 Broadway, was passed.

The Recording Secretary then presented the nomination by the Council

for Active Membership in the Academy of

R. C. Birkhahn, 60 East 93rd St.

On motion, Mr. Birkhahn was duly elected.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

ApriL 1, 1907.

Section met at 8:30 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

328 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Twenty-two persons were present.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Robert T. Hill, THe GEOLOGY OF THE SIERRA ALMALOYA, MEXICO.

Alexis A. Julien, EVIDENCE OF THE STABILITY OF THE Rock FOUNDATIONS

oF New York Ciry.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Hill gave a discussion of the tectonic structure of the northern

part of the Mexican Plateau introduced by a detailed description, with

topographic maps and lantern illustrations, of the geology of the Sierra

Almoloya, a small mountain of Comanche Cretaceous limestone, situated

between Jimenez and Parral, in the southern part of the State of Chihuahua,

Mexico.

He described the Mexican Plateau as having stood several thousand feet

nearer sea level at some late geologic epoch, and stated that it, together with

the Colorado Plateau, and probably the whole Rocky Mountain region, had

participated in a great epeirogenic uplift, as measured by the similarity of

depth of the canyons of the Colorado, the Rio Grande, the Rio Lerma and

the Balsas. The summit of the plateau of Western Sierra Madre in Chihau-

hua, and other tops, save the more modern constructional volcanic piles,

were described as remnants of the older peneplain before its uplift.

The mountains of Chihuahua, east of the Western Sierra, were described

as necks and stubs representing the survival of the hardest in the degrada-

tion and lowering by desert denudation of the old plateau level which once

occupied it, and the stripping away of two thousand feet or more of ejecta

down to the once buried limestone basement.

The structure of the Almoloya mountain was shown to consist of most

complicated recumbent folds, thrown over from the west, and of the Alpine

type. The mountain was also of interest inasmuch as its structural axis

was in a northeast direction.

Professor Hill’s paper was discussed by Professor J. F. Kemp, Dr. E. O.

Hovey and others.

Dr. Julien then spoke on the ‘‘Evidence of the Stability of the Rock

Foundations of New York City.” The general facts were reviewed which

might justify the confidence of builders in the operations of extensive con-

struction now in progress. Two former periods of enormous seismic

activity in this region were considered, as recorded by the violent faulting

produced at eachtime. The one, connected with the foldings, slips and shat-

a iter ern rain er eatin

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 329

tering during the great Appalachian uplift, and now revealed by the numer-

ous pegmatite intrusions cutting irregularly across the stratum of crystalline

schists, probably effected during Cambrian time. The other, after the close

of the Mesozoic, during the thrust of lava sheets between the sandstones

and shales of the Newark series of New Jersey, now indicated by many

faults across Manhattan Island and the adjacent Palisade Ridge. The

long period of cessation of uplift, of ensuing subsidence and extensive surface

erosion, offers the conditions in this region which promise long stability,

notwithstanding the slight tremors noted at intervals of thirty or forty years.

In the absence of disturbance from the glacial strize, everywhere abundant,

which serve as natural benchmarks to record changes of level or faulting,

we obtain therefore direct testimony to the established absence of tremor

during the long and approximately definite period which has elapsed since

the passage and withdrawal of the continental glacier. In the upper portion

of the Hudson River valley, however, some evidences of post-glacial faulting

have been observed.

The Section then adjourned.

ALExIs A. JULIEN,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

APRIL 8, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Crampton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following program was then offered.

C. L. Bristol and

S. W. Bartelmez, SKIN GLANDS OF Bufo aqua.

George G. Scott, REGENERATION IN Fundulus.

Maurice A. Bigelow, THE DirFERENCE BETWEEN NatTuRE STUDY AND

BroLoey.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Messrs. Bristol and Bartelmez said in abstract: Bufo aqua is a South

American toad which is distinguished chiefly by its relatively large size and

by the characteristic poison secreted by glands in its skin. This toad was

330 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

introduced into Bermuda about 1885, where it has thriven to such an extent

as to become a nuisance. Owing to the facilities of investigation upon this

largest living Anuran and because of the economic aspects of its poisonous

character, it has been an object of especial attention to the New York Uni-

versity Biological Expeditions at the station on White’s Island, Bermuda.

Experiments have shown that the poison is very like “curari’’ in its effects.

A subcutaneous injection of moderate doses into a dog causes convulsions

followed by death in about an hour.

The skin of the dorsal side of Bujo aqua is characterized by large warts

and the parotoid gland is enormously developed. ‘The poison is exuded

from these warts, and most abundantly from the parotoid when the animal

is irritated. Besides the poison, which is thick and milky, a colorless, non-

poisonous mucous common to all amphibians is exuded from all parts of the

skin. These secretions are elaborated in simple alveolar skin-glands of

which there are two types. The glands of the first type — small clear mu-

cous glands — are distributed throughout all regions of the skin; those of the

second type — the larger granular poison glands — occur only on the dorsal

aspect of the head, trunk and limbs, and are grouped in the parotoid and

the warts.

The physiological processes that take place within the cells forming the

epithelium of the mucous glands (first type mentioned above) are those

typical of ordinary glandular epithelium. In Bujo aqua these glandular

cells after a period of activity certainly go to the ground. The glands them-

selves, after a period of activity, degenerate and are resorbed.

The processes involved in the formation of the poison, and the method of

regeneration of poison glands has been investigated in various Urodeles,

but we have been able to find few, if any, references to investigations on the

glands in toads, in which the poison function has become most highly de-

veloped. The poison glands of Bujo aqua are ovoid in shape and in the

parotoid region attain a size of 7 mm., whereas the mucous glands are mi-

croscopic in size. A poison gland consists of an outer membrana propria,

a layer of smooth muscle fibers and an inner simple columnar epithelium.

The neck of the gland in Bufo aqua gradually merges into a wide duct pass-

ing out perpendicularly to the surface of the skin. Around the mouth of

fully grown poison glands there is a group of from three to six small glands

which have arisen by invaginations of the Malpighian layer of the epidermis.

The epithelial cells of the poison glands, which develop large characteristic

granules within the cytoplasm, grow to a large size and finally disintegrate.

The substance of the cells thus becomes the poisonous secretion which

comes to fill the lumen of the gland. Now the muscular layer develops

greatly and the glands are gradually emptied. At this point one of the

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 301

smaller glands around the mouth of the old gland begins to grow rapidly and

takes its place, the old gland being eventually resorbed. Thus the poison

gland is regenerated from a type of gland which in its early stages shows

the characteristics of a mucous gland. The poison gland is in fact a highly

modified and specialized form of mucous gland which has been differenti-

ated for the performance of a special function.

The Section then adjourned.

M. A. BicELow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

Apri 22, 1907.

Section met at 3:30 and 8 P. M., in conjunction with the New York

Branch of the American Psychological Association at the Psychological

Laboratory, Yale University, New Haven, Conn.

The following program was offered:

Ajternoon Session,

R. S. Woodworth, A MeEtTHOD oF MEASURING DIFFERENCES IN ORDER

AND ITS USE IN STUDYING CORRELATION.

F. N. Freeman, PRELIMINARY STUDIES IN WRITING REACTIONS.

F. Lyman Wells, On THE VALIDITY OF INDIVIDUAL JUDGMENT AS

MEASURED BY ITS DEPARTURE FROM AN AVERAGE.

W.C. Riidiger, THe PERIop oF MENTAL RECONSTRUCTION.

Evening Session.

Edward L. Thorndike, ExPERIMENTS IN Memory For Parrep ASSOCIA-

TIONS.

H. N. Loomis, REACTIONS TO WEIGHTS OF UNEQUAL SIZE.

J. McK. Cattell, PERCEPTIONS, IMAGES AND ILLUSIONS.

W. P. Montague, TRUTH AS COMPOSSIBILITY.

SUMMARY OF PaPERs.

Professor Woodworth said in abstract: The method differs from the

Spearman method of counting up differences of rank in that only the rela-

332 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

tive positions of the terms are considered. The unit of change in order

is the transposition of two terms, and the difference between two orders of

the same terms is measured by the number of transpositions necessary to

pass from one order to the other. This number is easily counted up, and

the necessary constants, e. g., the total number of transpositions necessary

to reverse a given order, are also readily calculated. The method has the

same advantages in psychological work as are brought out by Spearman

in favor of his method of measuring changes in rank; the present method

is claimed by its author to be more accurate and adequate for the purpose

in hand.

Mr. Freeman said in abstract: The reactor traced lines with an ordi-

nary pencil on a fixed sheet of paper, as in writing, and the tracing was

taken on the moving kymograph strip beneath through a typewriter ribbon.

The pressure changes which accompanied the movement could also be

recorded. The three general types of reaction which occur in writing, con-

sisting, respectively, in starting a movement, stopping a movement and

changing the direction of a movement, were compared as to their reaction

time and as to the relative speed, amplitude and pressure of the movements

themselves. The reaction time in stopping a movement was, on the aver-

age, over 40 per cent. slower than in starting a movement. This may be

accounted for on the ground that preparation for starting a movement can

be accurately made. On the other hand, no such preparation can be made

in stopping a rhythmic movement, such as is used in writing, since the

character of the inhibition depends on the stage of the movement which

happens to be in progress at the time of signal. In starting a movement

the reaction time varied with the complexity of the course of the movement

after the reaction, which seemed to be reflected back into the preparatory

state. Changing the direction was the slowest of all. Consciousness in

general was correlated with the whole progressively developing coérdina-

tion rather than with its separate elements.

Dr. Wells said in abstract: When a number of representatives of a

given class or group independently pass judgment on, say, the relative

merits of different authors, the average judgment is important in that it

shows how the authors have impressed this class or group, and the devia-

tion of an individual’s judgment from the average measures the closeness

of his conformity to the group standard. It remains possible that an in-

dividual may judge by a better standard than that of the group, and in

fact persons who from their experience and ability would be expected to

be the best judges of literary merit are sometimes found to differ greatly

from the average. The standard of judgment actually employed by a

group may differ widely from the standard which the group would them-

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 309

selves consciously assign as the best: such a difference was found by ex-

periment to obtain in the case of judgments of literary merit.

Mr. Riidiger said in abstract: A carefully conducted questionary,

adapted to statistical treatment, showed great individual differences in the

suddenness and vividness of the transition from early beliefs and intel-

lectual attitudes to those of mature life. A large share of the individuals

questioned are unable to point to any period of transition, while others

report a perfectly defined intellectual ‘conversion.’ The period of this

change is on the average later than that of religious conversion.

Professor Thorndike said in abstract: Twenty-five adults practised

from 12 to 40 hours in learning the English equivalents of German words

previously unknown to them. This practise did not appreciably increase

the number of pairs learned per hour; the result for paired associations

differs in this respect from that obtained by James and others in memor-

izing poetry and by Ebert and Meumann in memorizing nonsense sylla-

bles. Also the rapid loss of memory found by Ebbinghaus in case of

nonsense syllables did not appear; the loss within a month was very slight.

The correlation between the power to remember for a minute and the

power to remember for hours and days is surely positive and probably very

high. Individual differences in memory, in this test, are of approximately

the same magnitude as in efficiency of observation, controlled association

and selective thinking, and greater than in reaction time and sense dis-

crimination.

Mr. Loomis said in abstract: The movements of the lifted weights,

being graphically recorded, showed that, on first approaching the experi-

ment, a person lifted the bulkier weight with the greater force; after re-

peated lifting this inequality decreased.

Professor Cattell in his paper, emphasized, as important among the

points of differences between a sensation and an image, the weaker ten-

dency of the image to issue in motor reaction, and advanced a number of

facts going to show that this relative lack of motor tendency was valuable

in enabling us to distinguish images from sensations.

Professor Montague classified and criticized the various conceptions of

truth as introductory to a view of ‘Truth as Compossibility.’

R. S. Woopwortg,

Secretary.

334 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SPECIAL MEETING.

APRIL 29, 1907.

Dr. Tempest Anderson, F.G.S., F.R.G.S., of York, England, delivered

a public illustrated lecture on

“Vesuvius AND Its ERupTIONS.”

President Britton presided, and an audience of 259 persons listened to

the lecture.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

May 6, 1907.

The Academy met at 8 P. M. at the American Museum of Ne

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following candidates for election as Active Members, recommended

by the Council, were duly elected:

Ralph Lyon,

Adolph S. Ochs,

Mrs. Charles Tylor Olmsted,

William Houston Kenyon,

William D. Baldwin,

Henry D. Hotchkiss,

John A. Fordyce,

W. M. Martin,

George D. Cross,

Charles E. Diefenthiler,

Harry Ingram,

M. I. Blank, M. D.,

James D. Hague,

William Sturgis Bigelow,

J. W. Leib, Jr.,

John Rutgers Planten,

R. Degener,

Thomas Jefferson Hurley,

453 West 24th Street,

New York Times,

159 Park Av., Utica, N. Y.,

321 West 82nd Street,

14 West 68th Street,

315 West 75th Street,

8 West 77th Street,

44 West 40th Street,

Bernardsville, N. J.,

303 West 91st Street,

525 Sixth St., Brooklyn, N. Y.,

42 West 115th Street,

108 East 40th Street,

60 Beacon St., Boston, Mass.,

869 West End Avenue,

44 Eighth Ave., Brooklyn, N. Y.,

44 West 74th Street,

47 Pierpont St., Brooklyn, N. Y.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 335

President N. L. Britton, as chairman of the Committee appointed to

draw up the memorial and resolutions on account of the death of former

President John K. Rees, rendered a report which, on motion, was accepted,

and the Secretary was directed to have the resolutions engrossed and pre-

sented to the family of Professor Rees. The resolutions are as follows:

WHEREAS John Krom Rees, Professor of Astronomy in Columbia Uni-

versity from 1892 to 1907, President of this Academy from 1894 to 1896,

a distinguished and successful teacher and investigator, a member of many

learned societies and Secretary of the American Metrological Society from

1882 to 1896 and its Vice-President from 1896 to 1907, is lost to us by death,

RESOLVED that the Council of the New York Academy of Sciences

deeply mourn the loss of John Krom Rees. His work for this Academy

during his Presidency and in subsequent years was of the most important

character. It was at his suggestion that the Sections of the Academy were

formed which have been so efficient in carrying on its work. He established

the Memoirs of the Academy and contributed important papers for them.

He was beloved by all his associates, and his public lectures were attended

by large audiences. His establishment of the Summer School of Geodesy

of Columbia University has led to most important results, and his influence

in the establishment of the system of public standard time has been of great

value to the Nation,

RESOLVED that a copy of the foregoing preamble and resolution be

submitted to the Academy, and that a copy be engrossed and transmitted

to his family, as an expression of appreciation of his scientific labors.

On motion, it was voted that when the Academy adjourned, the adjourn-

ment should be to 5 P. M., 27 May, 1907.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

May 6, 1907.

Section met at 8:45 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

In the absence of the Secretary, the reading of the minutes of the last

meeting of the Section was omitted, and Dr. E. O. Hovey was elected Secre-

tary pro tem.

Twenty members and visitors were in attendance.

The following program was offered:

336 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

J. Volney Lewis, THE CORRELATION OF THE Newark (Triassic) TRAP

Rocks or New JERSEY.

Henry B. Kiimmel, REcENT INVESTIGATIONS OF THE PoTABLE WATER Sup-

PLIES OF NEW JERSEY.

H.S. Washington, SomME VOLCANOES OF THE WESTERN MEDITERRANEAN.

Ida H. Ogilvie, A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF Marine. (By

title.)

J. F. Kemp and

J. G. Ross, A PERIDOTITE DIKE IN CoAL MEASURES OF SOUTH-

WESTERN PENNSYLVANIA.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Lewis said that the disconnected extrusive traps west of the

Watchung Mountains may be explained in several ways, but they are prob-

ably the results of scant eruptions, the New Vernon crescent being the

upturned western edge of the Long Hill trap. The extrusives at Sand Brook

and New Germantown are probably outlying remnants of, or at least con-

temporaneous with, the flows of First and Second Mountains.

Darton’s dike-and-sheet hypothesis of the Palisades sill is not supported

by the facts, the trap being roughly conformable to the strata, as far as

known, in all directions. The chance of the fissure of intrusion coinciding

with the western flank of the Palisades from Weehawken to Haverstraw

is exceedingly small. On the other hand, data now available quite satis-

factorily establish the connection between the Palisades and the trap of

Rocky Hill to the southwest, and a section along the Delaware River shows

a threefold repetition of this by faulting. Thus there is but one intrusive

sheet, which gives off numerous dikes and apophyses, in contrast with four

extrusives, Second Mountain being double.

The intrusive is considered of later age than the first extrusive, and may

be contemporaneous with one of the later extrusives or subsequent to all of

them. This conclusion is in harmony with the results of recent studies of

the copper deposits, which are intimately connected with the intrusion of the

great Palisades sill.

There are many points of resemblance to the Connecticut Valley traps:

the same number of extrusives appear in both, grouped in the uppermost

strata; in both the second is a double flow; an intrusive sill lies near the

base, and dikes cut the intervening strata.

The paper was discussed by Messrs. Kemp, Britton, Kiimmel, Tuttle,

Grabau and Hovey.

Dr. Washington described briefly the volcanoes of Catalonia, Sardinia,

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 337

Pantelleria and Linosa, which he visited for the Carnegie Institution in the

summer of 1905. The Catalonian eruptions are referred to two phases, a

first of extensive lava flows, followed by the formation of numerous small

cinder cones, the material being basaltic in every case, nephelite appearing

in some types. The Sardinian occurrences consist of extensive sheets of

basalt and trachyte of Tertiary age, with the two later large volcanoes of

Monte Ferru and Monte Arci, both of which show an interior core of salic

rocks (trachytes and phonolites at the former and rhyolites at the latter),

covered by extensive mantles of basalt. The last phase of volcanicity in

Sardinia is seen in a long line of small cinder cones of recent date, much

resembling those of Catalonia in both form and material. The island of

Pantelleria is quite complex, but here also the earlier eruptions were of

trachytes and phonolites, the activity closing with the formation of small,

basaltic, cinder cones. The small islet of Linosa, which is almost unknown,

shows nine volcanic cones, two phases of eruption being evident: the first

producing basalt tuff cones, and the second basaltic cinder cones, similar

to those from the other localities. The paper was illustrated by numerous

photographs taken by the speaker.

The papers of Dr. Ogilvie and Professor Kemp and Mr. Ross have

been published in Vol. XVII, Part H, of the Annals.

The Section then adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Secretary pro tem.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

May 13, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Crampton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Henry F. Osborn, Brizr ACCOUNT OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE Faytm,

EGYPT.

Edmund B. Wilson, THE SUPERNUMERARY CHROMOSOMES OF HEMIPTERA.

L. Hussakof, VARIATIONS IN THE Lear Tyre or Liriodendron tulipi-

jera DURING A SEASON’S GROWTH.

A. W. Grabau, ORTHOGENESIS IN GASTROPODS.

338 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Osborn gave a summary of the valuable results of the expedi-

tion to the Fayim, Egypt, in search of Paleomastodon and Arsinottherium

which was illustrated by a fine series of stereopticon views. A detailed

account of the expedition has been published in ScrENCcE.

Professor Wilson, in his paper, said in brief: In striking contrast to

nearly all forms heretofore described, the genus Metapedius presents a con-

siderable range of variation in the individual number of chromosomes,

though the number is constant in each individual. The following numbers

have thus far been observed in a total of 30 individuals (spermatogonia in

the males, ovarian cells in the females). M. terminalis, males 22, 23, females

22, 25; M. jemoratus, males 22, 23, 26, females 24, 26; M. granulosus, males

23, 26, 27 (?), females 26. The variation is thus seen to be independent of

sex; and it is not a casual fluctuation within the individual, since the indi-

vidual number is constant and in the male is definitely correlated with the

number present in the maturation-divisions. Thus with 22, 23 or 26 sperm-

atogonial chromosomes the first spermatogonial division shows respectively

12, 13 or 16 chromosomes—a relation shown constantly and in a large

number of cells. Study of the conditions shown in the males leads to the con-

clusion that all individuals possess a fundamental or type group of 22 chro-

mosomes that are always present and show the same general arrangement in

the first division. 'To these may be added in certain individuals one or more

“supernumerary chromosomes” which, like the idiochromosomes differ in

behavior from the others in failing to couple at the time of general synapsis,

dividing as univalents in the first division where they appear smaller than the

bivalents. Thus are explained the peculiar numerical relations above stated,

—e. g., 16 chromosomes in the first division include ten bivalents and six

univalents (two idiochromosomes and four supernumeraries). In the second

division the supernumeraries aimost always unite with the idiochromosome-

bivalent to form a compound element; and the facts indicate that the indi-

vidual members of this complex may undergo an asymmetrical distribution

to the spermatozoa, which probably gives the explanation of the variations

observed in the somatic numbers of different individuals. The new proof

given by the facts of the genetic identity of the chromosomes, and their

possible bearing on certain phenomena of heredity were indicated.

Dr. Hussakof, in his paper, said in abstract: Thejleaves were collected

from a single tree during three successive summers beginning with 1904,

and their variations in form statistically studied. During 1905 and 1906

“average samples” (about 500 leaves representing all parts of the tree)

were collected at intervals of about a month and systematically tabulated.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 339

It was found that at the end of May the six-pointed type of leaf constitutes

over half the total foliage (.58 in 1905; .65 in 1906), and that the four-

pointed type is totally absent. During the next month there is a remark-

able growth of four-pointed leaves, so that at the end of June they constitute

over 50 per cent. of the total foliage. The six-pointed leaves become re-

duced to about 35 per cent. of the total. During the remainder of the

summer these figures vacillate only within about 5 per cent. The leaves

with 8, 10, 12 and 14 points were also studied; each makes up only a small

per cent. of the total foliage, the last being very rare.

The talk was illustrated by charts and specimens.

The Section then adjourned.

M. A. BIGELow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

May 20, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Trowbridge presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

F. W. Pedersen, Viscosiry OF THE VAPORS OF CERTAIN ISOMETRIC

ETHERS.

William Campbell, ON THE [RON-CARBON SERIES OF ALLOYS.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Pedersen, in his paper, dealt with the influence of molecular structure

upon the internal friction of the vapors of certain isometric ethers. The

viscosity coefficients of various ether vapors at 100° c. were obtained by the

well-known transpiration method. The molecules of a Tertiary compound

were shown to be smaller than those of a secondary, which in turn are

smaller than those of a primary.

Professor Campbell revised the various published equilibrium curves

of the carbon-iron series, and by a series of lantern slides showed the various

changes of structure which take place (a) by variation in carbon, (b) by heat

annealing. It was demonstrated that two systems occur (1) Austenite

(mixed crystals): cementite, (2) Austenite (mixed crystals): graphite. The

former is unstable; the latter stable.

340 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

There was some discussion of the latter paper.

The Section then adjourned.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

ADJOURNED BUSINESS MEETING.

May 27, 1908.

The Academy met at 5 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural His-

tory, by adjournment from the regular meeting of 6 May, President Britton

presiding.

The reading of the minutes of the regular meeting of 6 May was deferred.

The following candidates for Active Membership, recommended by the

Council, were duly elected:

C. H. Allen,

A. Beller,

Samuel R. Betts,

Moses Bijur,

Matilda W. Bruce,

Winthrop Burr,

Mrs. William Combe,

H. D. Chapin,

Grace H. Dodge,

Thomas Dwyer,

Arthur F. Estabrook,

John C. Eno,

G. W. R. Fallon,

Emil Freund,

Robert W. Gibson,

George Griggs,

C. A. Griscom, Jr.,

Hugo von Hagen,

William Halls, Jr.,

James J. Higginson,

Charles R. Flint,

Frank Hustace,

Alois von Isakovics,

1 West 72nd Street,

38 West 73rd Street,

102 Madison Avenue,

944 Park Avenue,

810 Fifth Avenue,

7 Wall Street,

76 East 79th Street,

51 West 51st Street,

262 Madison Avenue,

601 West End Avenue,

15 State St., Boston, Mass,

Hotel Belmont, 42nd Street,

184 N. Columbus Ave., Mount Vernon, N. Y.,

159 East 61st Street,

15 East 77th Street,

Chihuahua, Mexico,

21 Washington Square, N.,

500 Fifth Avenue,

Summit, New Jersey,

16 East 41st Street,

4 East 36th Street,

19 East 42nd Street,

Monticello, N. Y.,

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF i907 341

Robert E. Jennings, Jersey City, N. J.,

Mary Sutton Macy, M. D., 101 West 80th Street,

V. Everit Macy, Scarborough, N. Y.,

C. S. Mellen, 389 Whitney Ave., New Haven, Conn.,

William T. Meredith, 38 West 50th Street,

John G. Milburn, 16 West 10th Street,

Henry Parish, 52 Wall Street,

Thomas W. Pearsall, Black Rock, Conn.,

Robert Pearle, 160 West 59th Street,

Philip Bernard Philipp, 327 Central Park West,

Edward Russ, Hoboken, N. J.,

Paul J. Sachs, 468 West 142nd Street,

Charles R. Saul, 1 West 69th Street,

Fred Sauter, 42 Bleeker Street,

Jacob H. Schiff, 52 William Street,

George S. Scott, 28 West 57th Street,

Mrs. John C. Shaw, 317 Convent Avenue,

Charles Size, Jr., 19 West 50th Street,

Benson B. Sloan, 141 East 36th Street,

Charles F. Smillie, 29 East 38th Street,

Elbridge G. Snow, 155 West 58th Street,

C. Amory Stevens, 50 Broad Street, |

Elizabeth M. Sturgis, 131 Milton St., Brooklyn, N. Y., |

George Taylor, 8 West 126th Street,

Nikola Tesla, Waldorf Astoria Hotel, |

Benjamin Thaw, 1046 Fifth Avenue, |

Mrs. Frederick F. Thompson, 283 Madison Avenue, |

Rev. C. C. Teffany, D. D., 301 West 106th Street,

Herbert L. Wheeler, 12 West 46th Street,

Miss M. B. Wilson, 72 East 77th Street, |

Isidor Wormser, 836 Fifth Avenue,

George H. Yeaman, 44 Wall Street. .

The committee on a memorial to Professor Moissan presented through |

its chairman, Professor James F. Kemp, a report which was accepted and |

on motion ordered published in the annals. The report was as follows: .

The death of Professor Henri Moissan, of Paris, has removed from the

roll of Honorary Members of the New York Academy of Sciences, one of its

most distinguished names. The Academy desires to record its profound

appreciation of his life and works and its deep sense of the great loss which

Science has sustained in the termination of his labors.

342 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Professor Moissan was born September 28th, 1852, in the City of Paris.

After his student days had been passed at the Musée d’Histoire Naturelle

and in the Ecole de Pharmacie, he became an instructor in the latter and in

1886, was called to the Chair of Toxicology. He had already begun his

investigations by means of the electric furnace, and his notable studies of

the element fluorine, which he isolated and described in 1887, speedily made

him famous among chemists. His later work, however, with the electric

furnace, yielded the results for which he is most widely known. In this

branch of investigation he was truly a pioneer, and by the use and control

of the most exalted temperatures he made many contributions to science

and the arts of the greatest interest and importance. Curious alloys, unusual

compounds and even the diamond itself were artificially produced.

In addition to his scientific attainments, Professor Moissan was a man of

most agreeable and engaging personality. As a lecturer, he commanded

instant and absorbed attention, and as an experimenter before an audience,

he was skilful and successful in the highest degree. His loss is felt no less

for his personal qualities than for his scientific contributions.

J. F. Kemp, Chairman,

E. O. Hovey,

Ga Rho Kunz:

C. F. CHANDLER,

R. S. Woopwarp.

On motion, it was voted that the Executive Committee be authorized

to elect new members during the period between the present date and 1

October, 1907.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SPECIAL MEETING.

SEPTEMBER 9, 1907.

Dr. D. Le Soiief of Melbourne, Australia, delivered a public illustrated

lecture on

“THe WiLp ANIMAL LiFE oF AUSTRALIA.” .

President Britton presided, and 107 persons were present at the meet-

ing.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 343

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

OcTOBER 7, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

The minutes of the last two meetings of the Section were read and ap-

proved.

The following program was then offered:

Alexis A. Julien, ON THE PEBBLES AT HarwicuH (Care Cop), Mass., AND

oN RupE ARROWHEADS Founp AmonG THEM.

A. W. Grabau, THE Sytvanta SANDSTONE— A Stupy IN PALEOGEO-

GRAPHY.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Julien’s paper was, in abstract, as follows: Along the south shore

of the apron-plain at Harwich the glacial deposits show abundant sections

of layers of gravel, often coarse, and at one point huge angular boulders,

up to eight feet in diameter, similar to those in the moraine along the north

side of the cape. The pebbles consist almost altogether of crystalline rocks

in considerable variety, in which, however, three types predominate. The

principal one is a coarse binary granite, sometimes porphyroidal, passing

by addition of hornblende into monzonite. Its sheared form seems to be

represented by pebbles of granite-gneiss or apatite-schist, without mica,

and very rarely of a fine biotite gneiss.

This rock appears to have been cut by intrusive dikes, both of an acid

rock and of one of intermediate character, occurring in abundant pebbles.

The one is a pinkish quartz-porhpyry, a white felsite, or finely striped rhyo-

lite, whose sheared forms appear to be a white phyllitic gneiss, with minute

augen-structure. The other, a rather finely granular gabbro, made up of

white feldspar and a greenish black hornblende-like mineral. This rock,

by shearing, has passed into a hard greenstone, often decidedly schistose,

and perhaps into a banded schist. Besides these three types, several va-

rieties of fine crystalline schists, probably metamorphic; rarely small grains

of serpentine; and occasional flakes of blue-black argillite. A marked

feature in all these rocks is the almost entire absence of mica of any kind

and that mineral does not occur even in the sands and clays, at least in scales

visible to the naked eye.

By contrast, the characteristic rocks of the adjoining coast along the

344 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

mainland of eastern New England have not been found, in spite of constant

search, e. g., the mica-gneisses and mica-pegmatites north of New Bedford,

the granite of Quincy, Mass., the Dorchester conglomerate, the pyroxenic

rocks and basic mica-diorites of Nahant, the porphyritic biotite granites

of the Maine coast, etc. The conclusion is that the pebbles at Harwich

have been transported from some other micaless region.

Among the pebbles in ploughed fields many rude stone implements may

be found, such as tomahawks, scrapers, lance-heads, and particularly

arrowheads of the simplest form, probably left by Indians of the Massaquoit

tribe of whom several small kitchen-middens have been found in the neigh-

borhood. ‘These tools have been made from the local materials above

described, chiefly from pebbles of the harder and finer schists, rhyolite,

quartz-porphyry and often granite. Their dull edges and rounded points

may imply that in many cases they have never been sharpened, but used for

stunning birds and small animals. Many show mere traces of human

workmanship, perhaps but one or two artificial faces, as if their owners had

been content to use the simplest flakes for arrow-points.

Professor Grabau described field work carried on in company with

Professor Sherzer in southern Michigan for the state survey. The special

object of study was the Upper Monroe formation and the Sylvania sandstone.

The evidences of the eolian (anemoclastic) origin of this rock were presented.

An interesting new fauna of late Siluric age and with Devonic affinities was

found in the highest beds. Evidence of the disconformable relation of the

Monroe and the overlying Dundee (Onondaga) was obtained.

After discussion of both papers by Professor Kemp, Dr. Hovey and

others, the members of the section contributed observations made during the

summer. Professor J. F. Kemp stated the general results of study of the

petrography of the Adirondack region, and Dr. E. O. Hovey gave an account

of excursions of Section E of the American Association for the Advancement

of Science in the vicinity of the Adirondacks. Professor C. P. Berkey

reviewed his recent investigations in the Highlands of New York and stated

the difficulty of correlation of the Manhattan schists on the south with the

Cambrian sedimentaries on the north, but reported the passage of the latter

into crystalline condition eastward toward the Connecticut line.

The Section then adjourned.

AtEexis A. JULIEN,

Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 345

BUSINESS MEETING.

OcToOBER 7, 1907.

The Academy met at 9:25 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Grabau presiding in the absence of President

Britton.

The minutes of the regular meeting of 6 May and the adjourned meeting

of 27 May were read and approved.

The Executive Committee reported that by virtue of authority given

27 May the following candidates had been elected since that date:

Mrs. P. Hackley Barhydt, 40 East 70th Street,

James D. Foot, Bye; ING Yo

Walter J. Hewlett, 51 Wall Street,

Charles Kohlman, 1007 Madison Avenue,

Eugene H. Paddock, 149 West 72nd Street,

Mrs. Florence N. C. Nimick, Waldorf Astoria Hotel,

William H. Taylor, The Ansonia Hotel.

The report was approved.

Council reported the following nomination for Active Membership

J. de Lagerberg, 70 Park Ave., Passaic, N. J.

On motion the candidate was unanimously elected.

The Recording Secretary reported the death of

Samuel Sloan, Patron,

C. B. Warring, Corresponding Member, and

Giuseppe Grattarola, Corresponding Member.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOIOGY.

OcTOBER 14, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Crampton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

346 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

W. M. Wheeler, A Stupy or ANTS IN SWITZERLAND.

N. L. Britton, RECENT EXPLORATIONS IN JAMAICA.

H. E. Crampton, A SEcoND JOURNEY TO THE Society ISLANDS.

E. B. Wilson gave a brief account of the summer work at Woods Holl, and

described some interesting observations made by him on

the structure of living cells.

Brief reports were also made by several other members of the Section.

The Section then adjourned.

Roy W. MIner,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

OcTOBER 21, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Trowbridge presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

L. B. Morse, THE SELECTIVE REFLECTION SHOWN BY CARBONATES

IN THE INFRA-RED SPECTRUM AND ITS RELATION To

THE ATomMic WEIGHT OF THE BASES.

C. C. Trowbridge, THE Decay or PHOSPHORESCENCE IN GASES.

William Campbell, Some TreMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS TAKEN IN THE

STEEL WoRKS WITH THE WANNER AND OTHER

PYROMETERS.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Morse discussed his paper in two sub-divisions as follows:

I. The Selective Reflection of Carbonates as a Function of the Atomic

Weight of the Base.— Polished plane surfaces of (Mg, Ca, Fe, Mn, Zn, Sr,

Ba and Pb) CO, were prepared, and the ratio of the reflected to the incident

radiation was measured at short wave-length intervals between 4 » and

15 ». ‘The following are the principal conclusions reached:

1. The reflection curves for all the carbonates examined show between

4 » and 15 » three, and only three, bands of abnormal reflection. Abnor-

mal reflection interpreted means a free resonance period of the molecule.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 347

2. The bands fall into three separate and definite spectral regions,

which are distinct from the regions where the salts of other acids, so far

as known, show reflection maxima.

3. With few exceptions, an increase in the atomic weight of the base

causes a shift of all three reflection maxima toward long waves by an

amount roughly proportional to the change in atomic weight of the base.

II. The Réle Played by Oxygen in the Selective Reflection of Carbon-

ates, Nitrates, Sulphates and Silicates— Combining with the data on car-

bonates the scattered observations of other observers on nitrates, sulphates

and silicates, the tentative hypothesis has been made that the oxygen atom

is the one chiefly responsible for the marked reflection observed.

The wave-lengths of the first reflection bands in CaCO,, KNO,,' CaSO,

and MgSiO,’ are plotted as abscisse and as ordinates the weights of the

acid-forming elements combined with O, (C = 12, N = 14, #5 = 24, and

Si = 28).

The lines drawn show clearly that a small increase in the weight of

the acid-forming element produces a much greater displacement of the

reflection band than does the same increase in the weight of the base, and

this is in full agreement with the chemist’s view of the relative strength

of the bands existing between the acid-forming element and oxygen, and

that between the base and oxygen.

The results suggest a new and far-reaching method by which it may

some time be possible to express the dynamical relations existing between

the separate atoms of a molecule, and thus the present conception of chem-_

ical bonds and linkages be given a broader significance.

The paper appears in full in the Astrophysical Journal for November,

1907. Addendum, October, 30, 1907.

By reducing the results to zero weight of the base and extending the

curve b to zero weight of the acid-forming element, the weight with O,

both in base and as acid-forming element is zero. Thus a wave-length is

found which is approximately that found by Angstrém for the absorption

of ozone.

Also a second absorption band in ozone corresponds to the second car-

bonate bands, found at a longer wave-length.

This is a very important confirmation of the assumption made, viz.:

that “the oxygen atom is the one chiefly responsible for the selective re-

flection observed.”’

1 Two values are plotted for KNOz corresponding to the results obtained by two independ-

ent observers, Pfund and Coblentz.

2If a correction be applied to correct for Mg being lighter than Ca, this would bring the

MgSiO; point even nearer the line drawn.

348 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Professor Trowbridge described a new form of photometer designed for

the purpose of measuring the rate of decay of luminosity of a phosphores-

cent gas. The photometer consists of a track 3.5 meters long, made of

two brass rods under tension. On the track an electrically controlled car-

riage runs which carries the standard light. The standard light can be

moved away from a screen placed close to a tube containing the phos-

phorescent gas to points 4, B, C, etc. The illumination on the screen

from the standard light is thus directly compared with the luminosity of

the gas, and comparisons are made at A, B, C, etc., as the gas fades. Seven

readings can be made within ten seconds, giving a variation of from 4 to

35 the original intensity of the phosphorescent gas. The entire apparatus

is operated electrically, time being registered on a chromograph.

By means of this photometer the law of the rate of decay of phosphor-

escence for gases has been found. In this case, for air at about 0.1 milli-

meter gas pressure, the expression is the same as that for the decay of

phosphorescent solids, or

Plotting the reciprocal of the square roots of the intensities, in the case of

one decay of luminous gas, with the corresponding times gives a perfectly

straight line. An application of the law to the grading of the light of a

body of phosphorescent gas as great in size as a meteor train shows that

the light of the self-luminous meteor train can be explained on the assump-

tion that it is a gas phosphorescence, although the train may be visible for

thirty minutes. A certain brightening of the sky around the radiant point

at the time of meteor showers which has been called the ‘‘auroral light”’ is

also explained by the application of the same law. In the latter case it is

evident that the feeble phosphorescing of many trains has combined to

give a pale glow in the regions of the heavens through which the shower

was taking place.

Professor Campbell briefly described the instruments used, methods of

standardization and application. The temperature readings obtained at

the blast furnace were: Metal, 1375° to 1250° C.; slag, 1425° to 1375°.

At the Bessemer converter, 1600° C., very hot blow; 1500° C. cool. Aver-

age blows 1550° C. The steel was cast at 1500° to 1460° C. At the Open

Hearth the furnace temperatures varied from 1550° to 1705° C., the sur-

face of the bath being 1705°. The steel was cast at 1540° to 1460° C. The

temperatures of the gas producers varied greatly, one set averaging 650° C.,

another over 850° C. The most important readings were taken at the

Rail Mill, on the finishing temperatures of steel rails. The readings with

the Féry pyrometer varied from 1000° to 1070° C., whilst the Wanner

averaged 1100° C.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 349

On motion Professor D. W. Hering of New York University was nomi-

nated Vice-President of the Academy for 1908 and Professor William Camp-

bell of Columbia University was elected Secretary of the Section for 1908.

The Section then adjourned.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

OcTOBER 28, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Woodworth presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

G. L. Meylan, Some PuysicAL CHARACTERISTICS OF COLLEGE

STUDENTS.

C. Ward Crampton, PHysioLocicaL AGE.

On motion Dr. Adolf Meyer of the Hospital for the Insane, on Ward’s

Island, was nominated Vice-President of the Academy for 1908 and Pro-

fessor R. S. Woodworth of Columbia University was elected Secretary of

the Section for 1908.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. Woopworta,

Secretary.

SPECIAL MEETING.

OcTOBER 30, 1907.

Professor William Bateson, M. A., of St. Johns College, Cambridge,

England, delivered a public illustrated lecture upon

“'TuE INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN ANIMALS AND PLANTs.”

President Britton presided over the meeting, and the lecture was listened

to by an audience of 401 persons.

EpmuNp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

390 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

BUSINESS MEETING.

NovEMBER 4, 1907.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Former President Kemp presiding in the absence of President

Britton and any Vice-President.

The minutes of the regular meeting of 7 October were read and approved.

There being no business to transact the Academy adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

NovEMBER 4, 1907.

Section met at 8:20 P. M., Professor J. F. Kemp presiding in a ab-

sence of Vice-President Grain:

Seventy persons were present.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

On motion, Professor A. W. Grabau was nominated Vice-President of

the Academy and Professor C. P. Berkey was elected Secretary of the

Section for 1908.

The following program was then offered:

C. N. Fenner, NoTEs ON THE GEOLOGY OF THE First WATCHUNG

Trap-SHEET. (By title.)

George F. Kunz and

Henry 8S. Washington, ON THE PERIDOTITE OF PIKE CouNnTy, ARKANSAS,

AND THE OCCURRENCE OF DIAMONDS THEREIN.

F. A. Perret, VESUVIUS, STROMBOLI AND THE SOLFATARA IN 1906.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Drs. Kunz and Washington’s paper was illustrated with a very inter-

esting series of specimens and with lantern slides and was followed by a

discussion.

Mr. Perret, of Naples, Italy, gave an informal talk which was illustrated

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 dol

by a series of beautiful lantern slides and of moving pictures, in a novel

representation of volcanic outbursts and rising vapors. On motion by Dr.

Hovey, a hearty vote of thanks was given by the Section to Mr. Perret for

his unique exhibit.

The Section then adjourned.

Aexis A. JULIEN,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

NovEMBER 11, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Crampton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

After a short business meeting, at which Frank M. Chapman was nomi-

nated Vice-President of the Academy and Roy W. Miner was elected Secre-

tary of the Section, for 1908, the following papers were read:

Henry F. Osborn, A PaLeontToLogicaL Trip To NORTHWESTERN NE-

BRASKA.

Frank M. Chapman, THE PrarmicAN — Livine AND Deap.

Jonathan Dwight, Jr. THE DistRiBUTION OF THE JUNCOS, OR SNow Birps,

ON THE NoRTH AMERICAN CONTINENT.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Osborn reported upon two excursions, during the seasons of

1906 and 1907, into the Lower Miocene beds of northwestern Nebraska,

variously known as Arikaree, Harrison and Rosebud.

The recognition of these beds as containing fauna transitional between

the Oligocene and Lower Miocene is due to the successive explorations of

Hatcher, Barbour, Peterson, Matthew and Thomson. The lower division

(Lower Harrison, Lower Rosebud) is more directly comparable with the

true Upper Oligocene of France. The upper division (Upper Harrison,

Upper Rosebud) may represent the close of the Oligocene or the beginning

of the Miocene, and is sharply defined from the lower division by the absence

of certain mammals and the presence of others. The formation as a whole

is a very grand one, extending continuously over 200 miles east and west;

varying in thickness from 1,200 feet in the west to 800 feet farther east. It

352 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

is, in fact, one of the most extensive, most readily distinguished, and most

definable of the Tertiary series, but it still awaits accurate definition and

distinction, especially from overlying beds, partly owing to the fact that it

has been embraced under the “ Arikaree”’ which practically includes a con-

siderable part of the Miocene series.

In the region of Agate, Sioux County, Neb., the first discoveries of

fossils were made by Mr. James H. Cook and his son, Mr. Harold Cook.

This region has been especially explored by Carnegie Institution parties

under Mr. O. A. Peterson and Mr. W. H. Utterback. The Monroe Creek,

Lower Harrison, and Upper Harrison divisions are very distinctly separated

from each other geologically and faunistically. The remarkable deposit

known as the “ Agate Spring Quarry”’ is about forty feet below the summit of

the Lower Harrison and its fauna, and has been especially described by Mr.

Peterson. This is on the same level as the Demonelix Beds of Barbour,

and is characterized by the presence of Moropus, Syndyoceras, Oxydactylus,

Diceratherium (smaller and larger species), Parahippus, Blastomeryz,

Dinohyus, Thinohyus and Promerycocharus. Steneofiber, a castoroid, is

quite abundant and is frequently found in the Demonelix spirals. The

origin of these spirals still remains a very difficult problem. ‘The Upper

Harrison is sharply defined by the appearance of the large Merycocharus

in the upper levels, by the presence of cameloids of three or four types.

Dinohyus persists in the lower levels but disappears above.

A more exact determination of the geological and faunal characters of

these beds will mark a great advance in our knowledge of the Tertiary

series.

A fine series of lantern slides illustrated the paper.

Mr. Chapman said, in abstract: Both the distribution and color of

ptarmigans are of special interest. In distribution, we have a circumpolar

group extending its range southward on the Arctic Alpine summit of moun-

tain ranges with isolated groups (for example Lagopus mutus, in the Alps

and Pyrenees, and Lagopus leucurus, in the Rocky Mountains of Colorado

and New Mexico) occupying restricted areas at the south, which it is prob-

able they reached at some time during the Glacial Period. The fact that

the birds of these south Alpine islands are specifically like their represen-

tatives at the north indicates absence of differentiation since their isolation,

and consequent great stability of color characters.

The ptarmigan’s seasonal changes of plumage were described at length

and were said to furnish one of the most conclusive proofs of the necessity

for protective coloration known among birds.

Particular attention was called to the transitional autumn plumage

which, in defiance of the laws of molt, is interpolated between the known

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 353

summer plumage and the white winter plumage to carry the bird from the

end of the nesting season to the season of snowfall in October. If the win-

ter plumage were to be acquired at the end of the nesting season, when molt

is apparently a physiological necessity, the bird would be white before the

coming of snow.

All the changes in plumage, it was asserted, were accomplished by actual

feather loss and growth, no basis being observed for the theory of change of

color in the individual feather.

The paper was illustrated with specimens and a series of slides showing

the White-tailed Ptarmigan and its haunts on the summits of the Canadian

Rockies in Alberta.

Dr. Dwight said in brief: The birds of the genus Junco are widely dis-

tributed, occupying in the breeding season the whole of Canada, the higher

parts of the Appalachian, Rocky and Coast ranges of mountains, and the

pine forests of Mexico and Central America. ‘They fall quite naturally into

several large groups that differ widely in plumage and are also farther divis-

ible into lesser groups that possess characters more or less intermediate.

Intergradation between the various forms seems to be complete and one

view is to consider them all geographical races of one species, but a view

more in harmony with the apparent facts, is to recognize several of the

groups as species and to consider the intermediates either as hybrids or as

races, or perhaps as both. A blackheaded junco, for instance, would seem

to be specifically distinct from a redheaded bird, because each possesses a

character not found in the other, while mere color variations, attributable

to climatic conditions, point to geographical races.

Whether Mendelian principles will or will not explain the complicated

plumage characters of the juncos, here at least there seems to be a promising

field for experimental research to supplement the facts derived from field

study.

The paper was illustrated by a large series of specimens brought together

by Dr. Dwight for his investigations, and representing collections in all

parts of the country.

The Section then adjourned.

Roy WaALpo MINER,

Secretary.

354 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

NoveEMBER 18, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Trowbridge presiding.

The minutes of the last tae of the Section were read and gue

The following program was then offered:

D. W. Hering, WavEs AND Rays IN Puysics.

E. F. Kern, EL&cTro.iysis of SILico-FLUORIDE SOLUTIONS.

R. F. Bohler, ‘Toot-STEEL MAKING IN STyRIA.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Hering pointed out the extent to which waves or rays have domi-

nated in explaining the transmission of a disturbance through space, as

many as seven different kinds of waves having been emplvyed, and no less

than twenty-one different kinds of rays. The most fruitful generalization

was Fourier’s analysis of wave motion in his “Théorie Analytique de la

Chaleur”; the boldest contention was that of Fresnel in advocating trans-

verse vibration to produce waves of light; the most recent and compre-

hensive generalization was Maxwell’s electromagnetic theory of light. The

recent great increase in the number and variety of ‘‘rays”’ has been attended

by a great deal of charlatanism.

Dr. Bohler reviewed the development of Styrian steel trade from pre-

historic and Roman times up to our own days. The paper emphasized a

number of special features characteristic of Styrian steel which are so many

reasons for its superiority: (1) Crucibles used but once, (2) extreme purity

of ores, (3) extensive or exclusive use of charcoal, (4) special skill of work-

men in hammer- and heat-treatment.

The works, founded 1446, are now decidedly up-to-date; have pyro-

metric control; electric melting and hardening furnaces; latest physical

testing methods, metallography.

As a consequence extensive use of Styrian steel in the five continents,

for tools, rifles, shells, etc., also field guns, motor cars. Hundreds of tons

of high-speed steel shipped to the United States yearly.

Dr. Kern first of all took up the preparation of the electrolytes, current

density, ete., and showed numerous specimens including metallic surfaces

of lead, nickel, iron, copper and silver deposited from silico-fluoride and

other solutions for comparison. The method on a commercial’ scale for

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 355

the purification and desilverization of lead is employed at Trail, B. C.,

and elsewhere.

The Section then adjourned.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

NovVEMBER 25, 1908.

Section met, in conjunction with the New York Branch of the American

Psychological Association, at 3:30 P. M. at the Psychological Laboratory,

Schermerhorn Hall, Columbia University, and at 8: 15 P. M. at the American

Museum of Natural History, Professor MacDougall presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Afternoon Session.

Edward L. Thorndike, Memory ror PAIRED ASSOCIATES.

G. H. Betts,

E. W. Scripture,

J. Carleton Bell,

F. L. Tufts,

J. McKeen Cattell,

F. Lyman Wells,

W. M. Wheeler,

KE. W. Scripture,

W. P. Montague,

D. §. Miller,

CORRELATION OF VISUAL IMAGERY WITH COLLEGE

STANDING.

EXPERIMENTS ON THE SUBCONSCIOUS, WITH DEMON-

STRATION OF JUNG'S Metuop or DeETeEcTING Emo-

TIONAL COMPLEXES.

EFFECT OF SUGGESTION UPON THE REPRODUCTION OF

‘TRIANGLES AND OF PoINT DISTANCES.

A New SPECTRO-PHOTOMETER FOR THE STUDY OF

CoLor VISION.

Tue Entorptic Fovea.

THe Tapping TEST.

Evening Session.

On Some VESTIGIAL INSTINCTS IN INSECTS.

DETECTION OF THE EMOTIONS BY THE GALVANO-

METER.

MISCONCEPTIONS OF INTENSITY.

APPLIED PHILOSOPHY AND APPLIED PsycHOLOGY.

356 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIEN€ES

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Thorndike reported some work on memory for paired asso-

ciates, in which he has found that German-English vocabularies can be

learned with a speed far in excess of what is regarded as possible in the

usual teaching of a foreign language, and retained much better than would

be expected from the results of Ebbinghaus on nonsense material.

Mr. Betts said that in studying the correlation of visual imagery with

college standing, he had been unable to detect any positive correlation.

The relation seems to be a purely chance one.

After mentioning his own early experiments on the association of ideas,

Dr. Scripture described some work he had lately done with Dr. Jung in the

Psychiatrical Institute at Zurich, in which, following J ung’s method, the sub-

ject gives associates with given words; the time is taken, and the subject is

also required afterwards to repeat his former associations from memory.

The presence of an emotional complex is indicated by slowness, forgetful-

ness, superficiality or unusualness of associates, ete. The emotional com-

plexes so revealed are often causes of mental depression, anxiety, excit-

ability, neurasthenia and hysteria. Contrary to Jung, the speaker did not

believe them causes also of dementia precoz.

Dr. Bell reported his experiments on the effect of suggestion upon the

reproduction of triangles and of point distances. The subject was required

to reproduce the height of a given triangle, for instance, in the presence of

figures higher or lower than the required height. In the first third of the

experiments each of the six observers gave evidence of being influenced by

both high and low suggestion, the low being the more effective. There

were striking individual differences in the susceptibility to suggestion. As

the experiments proceeded, the observers seemed to become habituated to

the suggestion, so that the effect grew less and less marked.

Professor Tufts said in abstract: The problem of determining the rela-

tive luminosity of lights of differing color is fraught with difficulty. Three

methods have been used, but as they do not give perfectly concordant

results, each depends on its own definition of what shall be regarded as

equal luminosity. The three definitions are the following: (1) Two simi-

lar surfaces, illuminated by two lights of different color, may be said to be

of equal luminosity if, in the judgment of the observer, they appear equally

luminous. (2) Two similar surfaces, white, with black markings on them,

illuminated by two lights of different color, may be said to be of equal

luminosity if, when placed at the same distance from the eye, the details

can be distinguished with the same minuteness. (3) Two similar surfaces,

illuminated by two lights of different color, are said to be of the same lumi-

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 357

nosity if, on rapidly replacing one by the other before the eye, there is no

sensation of flickering. The author has modified the flicker photometer

of Rood so as to use spectral colors. A white disk, rotating between the

telescope and the prism of a spectroscope, is cut away for half of its cir-

cumference, so as to admit the colored ray from the prism for half of the

time, while for the other half it reflects white light from a lamp the distance

of which is adjustable along a photometer bar. By moving the lamp along

the bar a point is found at which there is no flicker between the white and

the colored lights. In this way the luminosity of different parts of the

spectrum can be determined with reference to a given white. ‘The relative

luminosity of different parts of the spectrum was not changed by fatiguing

the eye to one color. Though the eye be fatigued to green by several min-

utes’ exposure to it, so that gray objects appear purple, yet the green of

the spectrum has the same luminosity relatively to the other parts of the

spectrum as when the eye is fresh. (An exception must be made to this

statement, in the case of prolonged exposure to red; if this exposure is not

simply long enough to give the complementary after-image, but is con-

tinued for a considerable number of minutes, the effect is to displace the

point of maximum luminosity towards the violet.) This seems good evi-

dence of the separateness of the luminosity and color senses. Another

fact bearing in the same direction is that the luminosity curve of red-green

blind eyes shows no constant deviation from the curve for normal eyes.

The color-blind eyes so far examined do indeed show luminosity curves

differing from that obtained from the majority of normal eyes, but the

deviations are in some cases in one direction, in others in the opposite;

and some eyes which are apparently normal in color vision have similar

deviations from the curve obtained from the majority.

Professor Cattell said in abstract: The usual method of demonstrating

the fovea entoptically, by looking through a blue glass or a chrome alum

solution, fails with many individuals. But if the glass is removed after a

few seconds, an after-image effect shows the fovea clearer than the back-

ground; and this is more readily seen than the effect while the blue screen

is before the eye. The explanation of the effect is probably that the yellow

spot abs rbs much of the blue light, so that that part of the retina is less

fatigued than the surrounding region.

Dr. Wells communicated a study of the maximum rate of repeated vol-

untary movements during and at the limit of practise in one normal indi-

vidual, with comparative reference to the performance in other normal

and in pathological subjects. The maximum rate has little, if any, relation

to subjective feeling of efficiency. The practise curve shows less diurnal

variation in its earlier than in its later stages. ‘The general effect of prac-

tise from day to day is to increase initial efficiency, while the general effect

308 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

of the “warming up” in a single day’s work is to give relative immunity

to fatigue. As a psychological measure, the maximum tapping rate is of

little importance compared with the curve of the fatigue losses. The gen-

eral interpretation of the tapping test is as yet far from clear; most of its

phenomena, however, are probably of nervous rather than muscular origin.

Professor Wheeler in his paper gave many instances of the reappear-

ance, under unusual conditions, of instincts which had been active ances-

trally, but had disappeared. An instinct which seems dead in the species

may thus be resuscitated and serve a useful purpose.

Dr. Scripture demonstrated a method for the detection of the emotions

by the galvanometer. The subject held his hands on large plate elec-

trodes, and after the beam reflected from the mirror of the galvanometer

had come to rest, emotions aroused in the subject would cause deflection.

Reviewing the original discovery of Tarchanoff and the recent work of

Peterson and Jung, the speaker concluded that the cause of the deflection

lay in an increased activity of the sweat glands.

Professor Montague in his paper maintained that intensities are true

quantities, since they are susceptible not only of the relation of more and

less, but also of the relation of whole and part. The component parts of

an intensive quantity are synthesized by “superposition,” and not, as in

the case of extensive quantities, by “juxtaposition.” It is usually supposed

that intensive quantities are simple and without parts. This misconcep-

tion results from a failure to see that superposition is as truly an additive

synthesis as is juxtaposition. The paper gave examples of the addition of

several types of intensities, such as velocity, density, temperature and pain.

The fundamental rule for the addition of intensities is: So combine the

quantities as to keep the extensive factors of the whole equal to the exten-

sive factors of each of its parts. For example, if two densities are to be

added, the volume of the sum must be equal to the volume of each of the

components. This could only be accomplished by superposing one volume

upon another in such a way as to make them interpenetrate. The rule for

adding intensities has its analogue in the rule for adding extensive quan-

tities, according to which we are bidden to combine the quantities in such

a way as to keep the intensive factors of the whole equal to the intensive

factors of each part.

Professor Miller devoted himself mainly to the consideration of the

various psychological methods by which habit and character can be al-

tered. He mentioned, among such methods, practise, hypnotic sugges-

tion and attraction.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 309

BUSINESS MEETING.

DECEMBER 2, 1907.

The Academy met at 8:25 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Britton presiding.

The minutes of the regular meeting of 4 November were read and

approved.

The following candidates for election as Active Members, recommended

by the Council, were duly elected:

Gano Dunn, 115 West 71st Street,

Charles P. Berkey, Columbia University,

Samuel H. Bishop, 500 West 122nd Street,

Frederick M. Pedersen, 452 West 144th Street.

The Recording Secretary gave notice of the Annual Meeting of the

Academy to be held at the Hotel Endicott at 7 P. M., Monday, 16 Decem-

ber.

The Academy then adjourned.

EpmunpD Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

DECEMBER 2, 1908.

Section met at 8:40 P. M., Professor J. F. Kemp presiding, in the

absence of Vice-President Grabau.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

C. N. Fenner, Notes oN THE GEOLOGY OF THE First WatcHuNG TRAP

SHEET.

A. W. Grabau, PrEGLACIAL DRAINAGE IN CENTRAL New YorE.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Fenner specially discussed in his paper the features indicative of

physiographic conditions at the time of the trap extrusions in the New

Jersey area. Inquiry was made into the conditions of deposition of the

Newark beds immediately underlying the First Watchung trap. Many

360 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

features were found indicative of shallow water or wind formation, and

the conclusion was reached that the beds were of continental origin.

The structure of the trap sheet was then taken up, and several peculiar

features of structure and texture were described, which are believed to show

that a portion of the trap flow covered a lake bed lying in the axis of the

continental trough, and other various portions spread over the adjacent

shores, and the various facies of the trap are explained upon this theory.

The Section then adjourned.

ALEXIS A. JULIEN,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

DECEMBER 9, 1907.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Crampton presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Thomas Hunt Morgan, THE Errects of CENTRIFUGING THE EGGS OF

THE Muuiusc Cumingia.

Raymond C. Osburn, ‘THE REPLACEMENT OF AN EYE By AN ANTENNA

IN AN INSECT.

Herbert Lang, A NATURALIST IN BritisH East AFRICA.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Morgan’s paper was, in abstract, as follows: Experiments

were carried out in order to discover if the cleavage pattern in a type with

“determinate cleavage” is governed by the distribution of the visible sub-

stances of the egg, and also to discover if the formation of the embryo is

possible when the visible inclusions (“organ forming substances”) of the

protoplasm are artificially shifted.

The eggs of Cumingia when laid contain the first polar spindle in the

center of the egg. The centrifugal force drives the scattered yolk granules

to one pole, the pinkish pigment to the opposite pole. Between these two

there remains the perfectly clear kinetoplasm, in which the spindle lies,

forming an angle with the induced stratification. Its original position has,

in fact, been little affected by the movement of the other substances through

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 361

the egg, although its polar rays may suffer to some extent by prolonged

centrifuging. Under the pink cap and concealed by it in the living egg is a

vesicular material that is the nuclear sap of the ovarian egg. The polar

bodies may appear at any point of the surface of the egg, so far as the loca-

tion of the three zones is concerned. It is probable that the spindle comes

to the same pole as in the normal egg. Since the eggs are not oriented as

they fall any one of the three kinds of materials may lie at the “animal

pole.”

The cleavage always begins beneath the polar bodies, as in the normal

egg, and the cleavage pattern, the size of the cells, and their tempo of divi-

sion are exactly that of the normal. All of the yolk, for example, may be

contained in the small cell of the first two, yet the size of this cell and its

rate of division are not thereby affected.

It follows that in this egg the determinate type of cleavage is not caused

by the distribution of the visible substances of the egg. Sections show that

between the time of centrifuging and the appearance of the cleavage planes

the induced distribution is to a large extent retained, the amount of dis-

turbance depending on the length of time elapsing and on the location of

the polar spindle, etc. The results confirm observations on the living egg,

and show that the yolk or the pigment may go largely or entirely to one of

the first formed cells.

The centrifuged eggs produce swimming embryos, and in some cultures

a large percentage of such embryos. Until isolation experiments have been

successfully carried out it is necessary to speak with some reserve concerning

the percentage of normal embryos.

In the sea urchin egg, Lyon has shown that the cleavage follows the

induced stratification, while in Cumingia this is not the case. The difference

is due to the shifting of the nucleus in the egg of the sea urchin, while the

spindle in Cumingia retains its original orientation.

Dr. Osburn said, in brief: The specimen in question is a male of Syrphus

arcuatus Fallén (Diptera), a common and widely distributed species, and

was collected at Montreal, Canada, by Mr. G. Chagnon who noted nothing

unusual in its behavior. The right side of the head is normal, but on the

left side the large compound eye is entirely wanting. A third antenna

appears on this side of the head posterior to the normal left antenna and

entirely separated from it, occupying a fossa of its own. It is normal in

structure except that the arista, or dorsal bristle, is undeveloped, and it is

slightly smaller than the normal ones. This condition calls to mind Herbst’s

experiments in Crustacea (Palemon, Sicyonia) where an antenna developed

in regeneration after the excision of the eye, but no similar case is known

among insects as far as the writer is aware. It is possible that the eye may

362 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

have been suppressed owing to some accident during metamorphosis and

that the antenna was produced in place of it. A second vertical triangle

also appears in this specimen alongside of the normal one. This super-

numerary triangle is similar to the normal in pilosity and in the arrange-

ment of the ocelli, but the anterior median ocellus has no cornea and is

represented merely by a small prominence.

Lantern slides were also exhibited showing views of a two-headed turtle

with many abnormalities in the carapace and plastron.

Mr. Lang said that the Tjader Expedition to British East Africa was un-

dertaken for the purpose of collecting material representing the fauna of

that region. From Mombasa, the expedition (which consisted of Mr. Rich-

ard Tjader and Mr. Lang, accompanied by 100 negro porters) proceeded

327 miles inland by the Uganda Railroad to Nairobi. A strip of territory

one mile on either side of the railroad is set aside as a government game

preserve, and is a place of refuge for mixed herds of antelopes, zebras and

ostriches.

After spending a month collecting with great success on the Athi Plains,

the expedition moved northwest into the Rift Valley, encamping at Kijabe

and at various points in the lake country.

Thence the course was southeast over the Laikipia Plateau to Mount

Kenia (18,000 feet), which the party ascended to a height of 14,000 feet.

Lack of provisions, however, compelled a return to the railroad, whence the

party proceeded to the coast, stopping to collect at intervals.

Four and a half months’ collecting netted the expedition a total of about

500 skins of birds and mammals. The most noteworthy of the latter was

the skin and skeleton of a fine bull elephant carrying 160 pounds of ivory,

4 rhinoceroses, 1 buffalo, 2 giraffes, one of which is unusually large, 8 zebras

representing different districts, and a fine series of antelopes. Lions, spotted

hyenas, aard-wolves and other carnivores were also taken. Mr. Lang also

secured a remarkable series of photographs illustrating the flora, fauna and

ethnology of the region. The talk was well illustrated with colored lantern

views.

The section then adjourned.

Roy Waxrpo MINER,

Secretary.

ali OT a a sal ik eT a TOE ee NS Se

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 363

ANNUAL MEETING.

DECEMBER 16, 1907.

The Academy met for the Annual Meeting on Monday, December 16,

1907, at 7:20 P. M., at the Hotel Endicott, President Britton in the chair.

The minutes of the last Annual Meeting, 17 December, 1906, were read

and approved.

The accompanying reports were presented for the Corresponding Secre-

tary, Recording Secretary, Librarian and the Editor, all of which were, on

motion, received and placed on file.

The Treasurer’s report was read and was, on motion, received and

referred to the Finance Committee for auditing.

The following candidates for Honorary Membership and Fellowship,

recommended by Council, were duly elected:

Honorary Members.

Dr. James Ward, Professor of Mental Philosophy in the University of

Cambridge, England.

Professor J. D. Hooker, late Director of the Royal Botanical Gardens,

Kew, England,

William Bateson, M. A., Professor of Zodlogy in the University of Cam-

bridge, England. fi

Fellows.

William Campbell, Ph. D., Columbia University,

A. H. Elliott, Ph. D., 4 Irving Place,

L. P. Gratacap, Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,

Robert T. Hill, 25 Broad Street,

Isaac Adler, M. D., 22 East 62nd Street,

Emerson McMillin, 40 Wall Street,

Herman Knapp, M. D., 26 West 40th Street,

John B. Smith, New Brunswick, N. J.,

Ernest E. Smith, M. D., 26 East 29th Street,

Horace White, 18 West 69th Street.

The Academy then proceeded to the election of officers for the year

1908, Mr. Frank M. Chapman and Professor Charles Baskerville having

been appointed as tellers. The ballots prepared by the Council according

to the By-laws were distributed, and after the votes had been counted the

following officers were declared unanimously elected, more than twenty-

five votes having been cast by members of the Academy entitled to vote:

364 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

President, CHARLES F. Cox.

Vice-Presidents, A. W. Grasavu (Section of Geology and Mineralogy),

Frank M. CuHapmMan (Section of Biology), D. W.

HERING (Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chem-

istry), Apotr Meyer (Section of Anthropology and

Psychology).

Recording Secretary, EpmMuND Otis Hovey.

Corresponding Secretary, Henry E. Crampton.

Treasurer, EMERSON McMiItun.

Librarian, Rate W. Tower.

Editor, Epmunp Otis Hovey.

Councilors (to serve 3 years), CHARLES LANE Poor, Witu1aM J. GIs.

Finance Committee, CHARLES F. Cox, GrorGe F. Kunz, FREDERICK

S. LEE.

On motion of the Treasurer, Emerson McMillin, it was voted that here-

after the fiscal year for the preparation of reports end on the 30th day of

November in each year.

The members of the Academy and their friends, to the number of

seventy, then sat down together at dinner, after which the retiring Presi-

dent, Professor Nathaniel L. Britton, delivered his formal address upon

“The New York Botanical Garden — Its Organization and Construction.”

The address was illustrated with stereopticon views.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY.

During the past year two Honorary Members were dropped from the

rolls, because they had not been heard from since 1901 in response to com-

munications, and twelve Corresponding Members have been dropped for

the same reason.

We have lost by death three Corresponding Members, as follows:

George Chapman Caldwell, Elected in 1876,

N. H. Chandler, ly 0 abet;

Charles B. Warring, 7 ASG:

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 365

There are at present forty-seven Honorary Members and one hundred

forty-six Corresponding Members upon our rolls.

Respectfully submitted,

RicHarpD E. DonGe,

Corresponding Secretary.

REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.

During the year 1907, the Academy held 8 business meetings and 25

sectional meetings, at which 84 stated papers, 3 lectures and 8 demonstra-

tions were presented on the following subjects:

Geology, 16 papers, 1 lecture,

Mineralogy, a

Biology, ere LN Vis

Entomology, ZARA

Ornithology, a ees

Embryology, Sie

Paleontology, PA A

Physics, 8 re 8 demonstrations,

Zoélogy, 1 fe 1 lecture,

Botany, 4 *

Ethnology, as

Archeology and

Anthropology, 7 “

Psychology, 26 rx

At the present time, the Membership of the Academy includes 500

Active Members, 19 of whom are Associate Active Members and 122 Fel-

lows. ‘There have been 8 deaths during the year, 16 resignations and one

member has been dropped for non-payment of dues. The new members

elected during the year number 84. As the Membership of the Academy

a year ago was 441, there has been a net gain of 59 during 1907.

The affiliation of the following societies,

The Linnean Society of New York,

The Torrey Botanical Club,

The New York Entomological Society,

The New York Microscopical Society,

The New York Mineralogical Club,

The Brooklyn Entomological Society,

366 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

which became operative just before the last annual meeting, and which

was mentioned in the last annual report, has worked smoothly during the

year, and the announcements and programs of the various meetings have

appeared regularly in the weekly Bulletin issued by the Academy. In

connection with this affiliation, it is proper to speak of the fact that three

public lectures by noted foreign scientists have been given at the Museum

to the Members of the Academy and the Affiliated Societies and their

friends. These lectures were as follows:

April 29.— “‘ Vesuvius and Its Eruptions.”’ By Dr. Tempest Anderson,

of York, England. Attendance, 259.

September 9.— ‘Wild Animal Life of Australia.” By Dr. D. Le Soiief,

of Melbourne, Australia. Attendance, 107.

October 30.— ‘‘The Inheritance of Color in Animals and Plants.” By

Professor William Bateson, M. A., of Cambridge, Eng-

land. Attendance, 401.

Another matter of importance in connection with the affiliation was

the issuing of the first number of the Annual Directory containing the names

and addresses of the Members of all the organizations, corrected to 31

March, 1907.

The first important event of the past fiscal year was the holding, on 28

and 29 December, 1906, in codperation with the American Museum of

Natural History, of an exhibition of the progress of science. The exhibi-

tion was well supported by scientists and others having material to exhibit

within the scope of the enterprise, and was attended by thousands of visitors.

It was maintained by the Museum for four weeks after the Academy ceased

to control it.

The second event of particular importance was the celebration, on 23

May, of the two hundredth anniversary of the birth of the Swedish natura-

list, Linnzus. Delegates from many important domestic societies were

present; valuable addresses were delivered at the American Museum of

Natural History, the Museum of the New York Botanical Garden, the

Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences; a bridge over

the Bronx River was dedicated to Linneeus, and a reception to the scientific

public was held at the New York Aquarium. Communications were

received from many foreign and domestic societies. The full account of

the celebration, which forms a volume of about one hundred printed pages,

is now in press.!

Announcement is made with regret of the loss by death of the following

Members:

1Issued as part I of Volume XVIII of the Annals.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 367

Samuel Sloan, Patron and Member for many years,

D. Willis James, Active Member for 31 years,

John E. McDonald, Active Member for 2 years,

John Murray Mitchell, Active Member for 21 years,

L. M. Underwood, Active Member for 9 years.

Respectfully submitted,

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.

‘The new accessions from December 13, 1906, to December 14, 1907,

have been 423 volumes, 1,752 numbers and 46 pamphlets. Special ac-

knowledgments should be returned to the Berliner Entomologische Verein

for the first 48 volumes of their Zeitschrift and to the Kaiserliche Akademie

der Wissenschaften in Wien for 30 volumes of their Sitzungsberichte. Other

lacune in smaller amounts but of great scientific value have been received

from the respective Societies and Academies. ‘The usefulness of the library

has been enhanced by the binding of many of the important serials.

Respectfully submitted,

R. W. Tower,

Librarian.

REPORT OF THE EDITOR.

The Editor reports that Part II of Volume XVII of the Annals was

distributed in September, 1907. This Part contained the following articles:

“The Origin of Vertebrate Limbs.’ By Raymond C. Osburn.

“The Orders of Teleostomous Fishes.” By William K. Gregory.

“A Peridotite Dike in the Coal Measures of Southwestern Pennsylva-

nia.’ By J. F. Kemp and J. G. Ross.

A Contribution to the Geology of Southern Maine. By I. H. Ogilvie.

Part III of Volume XVII, containing the records of the Recording

Secretary for 1905, special indexes to the Botanical paper by Dr. Harper,

the paper on Fishes by Dr. Gregory, and the general index to the volume

is now in the hands of the printer and should be issued shortly. Volume

XVII contains 697 pages and 32 plates.

A directory of the Members of the Academy and its Affiliated Societies

has been issued.

368 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The printing of Volume XVIII has been begun, and about 130 pages

are now in type.

Respectfully submitted,

CHARLES LANE Poor,

Editor.

REPORT OF THE TREASURER.

Dec. 18, 1906. Cash in bank at beginning of fiscal year $5,494.11

Cash received during the fiscal year and re-

ported as follows:

1907 January MSL sy hails ie Oa a eese9ero

Bebrilary, 728) [hie ei) Re saoosseO

March OL eA Larieteah Ne, Oe eOge OU

May Gy Leia lk ch to toatl ey Rene Oe ceD

September SO) 97) 2) i) |e yhergaen ek 00402

November. i455, uz, [ay aa) ance pane LO

December V2 inc ve Cave cae: Gen Ooeow.

DecemberolGs) fisted ce ein te Bele 20,976.28

Total cash on hand and received . . . $26,470.39

Paid out on vouchers during fiscal year

and reported as follows:

Jamuary (alse sees a re O04 5G

February 28,0030.) oyster Wan es a oeiee

March Sal OS Seah eet Soba ea Oais.5 SN 8 Cefeat

May Gi ee en a ws) Ws ONES aD een

September 30.5) sen bean ine) | LOseeecbG

Noveniber i404 Cute a eet eesih colnet

December syZ5 toh Ge Ve ah oe ot aad ee Oil

Decembervl 6, 4/4 Ve, Be eee

MTotal'disbursementsaey isi) eo ee 24,515.57

Balance on’ thand! 2h vane see ee $1,954.82

Recapitulation of deposits:

In Bank of Emerson McMillin & Co. $512.74

In Guaranty Trust Company 176.27

In Union Square Savings Bank 1,256.81

$1,954.82 $1,954.82

Respectfully submitted,

Emerson McMItin,

Treasurer.

369

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907

Chl beter at |

‘aaynuuogy buppny { ‘aunyy “yy 5)

Ls 20) a 0

posoidde pue pourmexg

GS'P9F 9E$ G8 FOF ES

C8'CS 2 : * puny AitoqMoN jo ouloouT

96818 : : : puny suipimg jo suoouy

SP O19 : 3 * puny uoneoyqng jo ouloouy

GO'PLS : ; ‘ pung jUsKneULIog Jo dM0DUT

12° 6F6'T ; ; ; ; : puny A1toqMon

00'00F ‘OT ee PI omg

G6°S82'% : : 3 : : puny uoqnpny

00°000"€ SS PU momen. C8 PS6'T ae a oe PUM uO USES)

GL609'L1$ ; : : : eee een oo are cl 0001S ‘FE$ : ; : : : * —- $JU9UT}SOAUT

‘2061 ‘OT USENGOTG ‘LagHS DONVIVG

SMONGIOS HO AINAGVOV MYHOA MUN FHL

Wen

| Ah

1887.

1898.

1889.

1907.

1901.

1904.

1898.

1887.

1899.

1876.

1904.

1902.

1901.

1876.

1901.

1899.

1898.

1889.

1894.

1899.

1898.

1907.

1896.

1901.

1896.

1898.

1880.

1900.

1898.

MEMBERSHIP OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

31 DeEcEMBER, 1907.

HONORARY MEMBERS.

Prof. ALEXANDER AGassiz, Cambridge, Mass.

Prof. ARTHUR AUWERS, Berlin, Germany.

Prof. CHar.es Barrois, Lille, France.

Prof. Wiiu1AM Bateson, Cambridge, England.

CHARLES VERNON Boys, London, England.

Prof. W. C. Broacrr, Christiania, Norway.

Prof. Wiiti1am K. Brooks, Baltimore, Md.

Rey. Dr. Witt1am Henry Datuincer, London, England.

Sir GrorGE Howarp Darwin, Cambridge, England.

Prof. W. Boyp Dawkins, Manchester, England.

Prof. Huco pr Vries, Amsterdam, Netherlands.

Sir JaMEs Dewar, Cambridge, England.

Prof. Emii Fiscuer, Berlin, Germany.

Sir ARCHIBALD GEIKIE, London, England.

Prof. James GEIkiE, Edinburgh, Scotland.

Prof. Woicotr Grsgs, Newport, R. I.

Dr. Davin Git, Cape of Good Hope, Africa.

Prof. GEorGE Lincotn Goopa.E, Cambridge, Mass.

Dr. Ernst HAcKEL, Jena, Germany.

Prof. Jutius Hann, Vienna, Austria.

Dr. Grorce W. Hitz, West Nyack; N. Y.

Dr. J. D. Hooker, Kew, England.

Prof. AMBrostus Huprecut, Utrecht, Netherlands.

Prof. Witu1amM JAMES, Cambridge, Mass.

Prof. FEtrx Kern, Gottingen, Germany.

Dr. E. Ray Lanxester, London, England.

Sir Norman Lockyer, South Kensington, England.

Prof. Franz Lrypic, Tauber, Germany.

Prof. Frrptjor NANsEN, Christiana, Norway.

371

372

1891.

1898.

1900.

1901.

1899.

1898.

1887.

1904.

1896.

1900.

1904.

1876.

1907.

1904.

1883.

1898.

1891.

1890.

1899.

1876.

1899.

1898.

1878.

1867.

1897.

1899.

1874.

1884.

1894.

1874.

1876.

1898.

1876.

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Prof. Simon Newcoms, Washington, D. C.

Prof. ALBRECHT PENCK, Berlin, Germany.

Prof. WiLL1AM PrerFeErR, Leipzig, Germany.

Prof. Epwarp CHARLES PICKERING, Cambridge, Mass.

Prof. JuLes Henri Poincaré, Paris, France.

Dr. Wiii1aM Ramsay, London, England.

Lord Ray ericH, Essex, England.

Dr. Hans H. Reuscu, Christiana, Norway.

Sir Henry ENFIELD Roscoe, London, England.

Geheimrath HernricH Rosensuscu, Heidelberg, Germany.

Dr. G. JoHNSTONE STONEY, London, England.

Prof. JosepH JoHn THomson, Cambridge, England.

Prof. Epwarp Burnetr Tytor, Oxford, England.

Prof. KARL VON DEN STEINEN, Berlin, Germany.

Prof. VIKTOR von LAND, Vienna, Austria.

Prof. James Warp, Cambridge, England.

Dr. Witi1aAm Wounpt, Leipzig, Germany.

Geheimrath FERDINAND ZIRKEL, Leipzig, Germany.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.

Dr. CHARLES ConraD ABBorTt, Trenton, N. J.

Prof. Frank D. Apams, Montreal, Canada.

Dr. José G. AquiLERA, Mexico City, Mexico.

WitiiamM DEWitTr ALEXANDER, Honolulu, Hawaii.

Dr. C. W. AnpreEws, London, England.

Prof. JoHN Howarp AppLETON, Providence, R. I.

Dr. J. G. Baxer, Kew, England.

Prof. Isaac BacLtey Batrour, Edinburgh, Scotland.

Dr. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, Washington, D. C.

Epwarp L. BertHoup, Golden, Colo.

Dr. HergBert Bouton, Bristol, England.

Dr. G. A. BouLeNGER, London, England.

T. S. BRANDEGEE, San Diego, Calif.

Prof. JoHn C. BRANNER, Stanford University, Calif.

Prof. Bonustay BRAUNER, Prague, Bohemia.

Prof. Wiitit1AM Brewster, Cambridge, Mass.

Prof. GEORGE Jarvis BrusH, New Haven, Conn.

Prof. T. C. CHAMBERLIN, Chicago, Ill.

Dr. FranK WIGGLESWORTH CLARKE, Washington, D. C.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 373

1891. Prof. L. Cierc, Ekaterinburg, Russia.

1877. Dr. THEODORE Comstock, Los Angeles, Calif.

1868. M. C. Cooxs, London, England.

1876. Prof. H. B. Cornwatt, Princeton, N. J.

1880. CHARLES B. Cory, Boston, Mass.

1877. Dr. Jos—epH CRAwForD, Philadelphia, Pa.

1866. Geheimrath HERMANN CREDNER, Leipzig, Germany.

1895. Prof. Henry P. Cusuine, Cleveland, O.

1879. T. Netson Date, Pittsfield, Mass.

1870. Dr. Witt1am Heatrey Datu, Washington, D. C.

1885. Prof. Epwarp SaLtispury Dana, New Haven, Conn.

1898. Prof. Witt1aAm M. Davis, Cambridge, Mass.

1894. Pres. RUTHVEN DEANE, Chicago, Ill.

1899. Prof. CHarLes DéprrRet, Lyons, France.

1890. Dr. Orvitte A. Dersy, Rio Janeiro, Brazil.

1899. Dr. Louis Do11o, Brussels, Belgium.

1876. Henry W. Exuiott, Lakewood, O.

1880. Prof. Joun B. Extiorr, New Orleans, La.

1869. Dr. Francis E. ENGELHARDT, Syracuse, N. Y.

1879. Prof. Herman LeRoy Farircuip, Rochester, N. Y.

1879. Prof. FrrepRicH BERNHARD Firrica, Marburg, Germany.

1885. Dr. Lazarus FLetcHER, London, England.

1899. Prof. EBERHARD FRaas, Stuttgart, Germany.

1879. Dr. REINHOLD FRITZGARTNER, Teguicigalpa, Honduras.

1870. Prof. G. K. Girprert, Washington, D. C.

1858. Prof. THEODORE NicHouas GILL, Washington, D. C.

1876. Prof. Danret C. GitMaNn, Baltimore, Md.

1865. Prof. CaarLtes A. GOESSMANN, Amherst, Mass.

1888. Prof. Frank Austin Goocu, New Haven, Conn.

1868. Col. C. R. Greeniear, U.S. A., San Francisco, Calif.

1883. Dr. Mareuis ANTONIO DE GREGORIO, Palermo, Sicily.

1877. Prof. Pau HernricH von GrotH, Munich, Germany.

1869. R. J. L. Guppy, Trinidad, B. W. I.

1898. Dr. Grorcse E. Hatz, Mt. Wilson, Calif.

1882. Baron ERNEST voN HessE-Wartece, Lucerne, Switzerland.

1867. Prof. C. H. Hircucock, Hanover, N. H.

1900. Dr. Witt1am Henry Hommes, Washington, D. C.

1890. Dr. H. D. Hosxoip, Buenos Ayres, Argentine Republic.

1896. Prof. J. P. Ipprnes, Chicago, IIl.

1875. Matvern W. Ites, Dubuque, Ia.

1899. Prof. Orro JAcKEL, Berlin, Germany.

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Prof. SAMUEL W. JoHNsoN, New Haven, Conn.

Pres. Davip Starr JorDAN, Stanford University, Calif.

Prof. GrorGE A. Kornic, Houghton, Mich.

Dr. FriepricH Kouurauscn, Marburg, Germany.

Baron R. Kux1, Tokyo, Japan.

Prof. ALFRED Lacrorx, Paris, France.

Prof. Joun W. LANGLeEy, Cleveland, O.

Prof. ALBERT DE LAPPARENT, Paris, France.

Prof. S. A. Lattimore, Rochester, N. Y.

Col. Aimé LaussEepaT, Paris, France.

Prof. Wi1Li1AM Lipsey, Princeton, N. J.

Prof. ARCHIBALD LIVERSIDGE, Sydney, New South Wales.

Prof. GEORGE Mac.oskig, Princeton, N. J.

Prof. JoHN WiLu1AM MALtet, Charlottesville, Va.

Prof. CHARLES Rrpore Mann, Chicago, Il.

Dr. Grorce F. MatrHew, St. John, N. B., Canada.

CHARLES JOHNSON Maynarp, West Newton, Mass.

THEODORE LUQUEER MEap, Oviedo, Fla.

Seto E. Merk, Chicago, Ill.

J. DE MENpDIzABAL~T'AMBORREL, Mexico City, Mex.

Dr. Curnton Hart Merriam, Washington, D. C.

Prof. MANSFIELD MErRr1IAM, South Bethlehem, Pa.

Dr. A. B. Meyer, Dresden, Germany.

Prof. Kaxicur Mitsuxkurt, Tokyo, Japan.

Prof. CHARLES SEDGWICK Minot, Boston, Mass.

Prof. WiLtu1AM GILBERT Mrxter, New Haven, Conn.

Dr. RicHarp MoupENkKE, Watchung, N. J.

Prof. C. Ltoyp Morean, Bristol, England.

Dr. Epwarp S. Morss, Salem, Mass.

Grorce Murray, London, England.

Prof. Euagrn Netro, Giessen, Germany.

Prof. ALrreD Newton, Cambridge, England.

Dr. Francis C. Nicnoxas, New York, N. Y.

Dr. Henry ALFRED ALFORD NIcHOLL, Dominica, B. W. I.

Prof. Wiiuram H. Niixs, Boston, Mass.

Dr. Epwarp J. Nowan, Philadelphia, Pa.

Freperick A. Oper, Hackensack, N. J.

John M. Orpway, New Orleans, La.

Prof. WILHELM OstwaLD, Leipzig, Germany.

Prof. GEorcE Howarp Parker, Cambridge, Mass.

STEPHEN F. Pecxuam, New York, N. Y.

1888.

1894,

1876.

1877.

1868.

1876.

1888.

1876.

1874.

1886.

1876.

1899.

1867.

1898.

1876.

1894.

1876.

1883.

1895.

1890.

1896.

1890.

1876.

1885.

1893.

1899.

1877.

1876.

1871.

1900.

1867.

1890.

1898.

1876.

1900.

1897.

1874.

1898.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907

Rev. GrorceE E. Post, Beirft, Syria.

Prof. EDwaRD BAGNALL Pouton, Oxford, England.

Prof. AtBert B. Prescorr, Ann Arbor, Mich.

Prof. FREDERICK Prime, Philadelphia, Pa.

RapHAEL PumpE.ty, Newport, R. I.

Prof. Burton A. RANDALL, Philadelphia, Pa.

T. MeLiarD READE, Liverpool, England.

Dr. Ira Remsen, Baltimore, Md.

Rogpert Ripeway, Washington, D. C.

Prof. Witi1aM L. Ross, Troy, N. Y.

Prof. SAMUEL P. SaprLER, Philadelphia, Pa.

D. Max Scuiossrer, Munich, Germany.

Prof. Paut SCHWEITZER, Columbia, Mo.

Prof. W. B. Scort, Princeton, N. J.

Prof. SamuEL H. ScuppER, Cambridge, Mass.

Prof. W. T. Sepewick, Boston, Mass.

ANDREW SHERWOOD, Portland, Ore.

J. Warp Situ, Newark, N. J.

Prof. CuarLes H. Smyru, Jr., Princeton, N. J.

Rev. J. SELDEN SPENCER, Tarrytown, N. Y.

Dr. Ropert Stearns, Los Angeles, Calif.

Prof. WALTER LECONTE STEVENS, Lexington, Va.

Prof. Francis H. Storer, Cambridge, Mass.

Rajah Sir Sourtnpro Mouun Tacore, Calcutta, India.

Dr. J. P. THomson, Brisbane, Queensland, Australia.

R. H. Traquair, Edinburgh, Scotland.

Prof. Joan TROWBRIDGE, Cambridge, Mass.

D. K. Tuttie, Philadelphia, Pa.

Prof. Henri Van Heurck, Antwerp, Belgium.

Prof. CHARLES R. Van Hise, Madison, Wis.

Prof. AppIsoN Emory VERRILL, New Haven, Conn.

375

Brig. Gen. ANTHONY Wayne Vocpes, U. S. A. (retired), San

Diego, Calif.

Dr. Cuartes DoouitrLe Watcortt, Washington, D. C.

LEONARD WaLpo, New York, N. Y.

Prof. SHo Wartas&, Tokyo, Japan.

Prof. SruartT WELLER, Chicago, Ill.

Dr. I. C. Wurre, Morgantown, W. Va.

Prof, C. O. Wurrman, Chicago, Ill.

Prof. Henry SHALER WILLIAMS, Ithaca, N. Y.

Prof. N. H. WincHELL, Minneapolis, Minn.

376 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

1866. Prof. Horatio C. Woop, Philadelphia, Pa.

1899. Dr. A. SmMrra Woopwarp, London, England.

1869. Dr. Henry Woopwarp, London, England.

1876. Prof. ARTHUR WiLLIAMS WricHT, New Haven, Conn.

1876. Prof. Harry CreEecy Yarrow, Washington, D. C.

PATRONS.

Britton, N. L., N. Y. Botanical Garden.

Brown, Appison, 45 West 89th Street.

Casry, Masor Tuomas L., U.S. A., Washington, D. C.

CHAPIN, CHESTER W., 34 West 57th Street.

FIELD, C. DE PrysTer, 21 East 26th Street.

GouLp, Epwin, Dobbs Ferry, N. Y.

GOULD, GEORGE J., 195 Broadway.

GouLp, Miss HELEN M., Irvington, N. Y.

HERRMAN, Mrs. Estuer, 59 West 56th Street.

JULIEN, ALexis A., Columbia University.

Lrvison, W. Goon, 1435 Pacific Street, Brooklyn.

Merap, WatrteErR H., 67 Wall Street.

SENFF, CHARLES H., 300 Madison Avenue.

ACTIVE MEMBERS.

31 DECEMBER, 1907.

Fellowship is indicated by an asterisk (*) before the name. Life Membership is

shown by heavy-faced type. The names of Patrons are in capitals.

*ABBE, CLEVELAND, Ph.D. ANDERSON, A. J. C.

Adams, Edward D. Anthony, R. A.

*ADLER, I., M.D. ANTHONY, Ws. A.,

ALEXANDER, CuHas. B. ARCHER-SHEE, Mrs. M.

ALLEN, C. H. AREND, Francis J.

SALLEN, J.-A.) Eh. D: Armstrong, 8. T., M.D.

ALLEN, JAMES LANE *ARNOLD, E. S. F., M.D.

*ALLIS, E>wARD PHELPS, Jr. Astor, JOHN JACOB

*AMEND, BERNARD G. AVERY, SAMUEL P., Jr.

ANDERSON, A. A. Bailey, James M.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907 377

Banos, Francis S.

Barhydt, Mrs. P. H.

Barnes, Miss Cora F.

BARRON, GEORGE D.

*BASKERVILLE, Prof. C. M.

Baueu, Miss M. L.

Baxter, M.., Jr.

BEAL, Wriiuiam R.

BEAN, Henry WILLARD

BrEaArD, DanIEL C.

*Beck, Fanning C. T.

BECKHARD, MARTIN

*BEEBE, C. WILLIAM

Beers, M. H.

BEER, A.

BERKEY, C. P.

Berry, Epwarp W.

Betts, SAMUEL R.

*BIcKMORE, A. S., Ph.D.

Biren, JULIUS

*BiGELow, Prof. M. A.

BicELow, WILLIAM S.

Bryur, Mosrs

Billings, Elizabeth

Bruuincs, FREDERICK

BIRDSALL, Mrs. W. R.

BrirKHABN, R. C.

BisHop, H. R.

BisHop, S. H.

*BiakE, J. A., M.D.

Biank, M. I.

*Bliss, Prof. Charles B.

*Boas, Prof. FRaANz

BorttcEer, Henry W.

Boyp, JAMES

*BrRIsTou, Prof. C. L.

BrisTou, JNo. I. D.

2b LON, PROF...N..L,

*BROWN, HON. ADDISON

Brown, Epwin H.

*BROWNELL, SILAs B.

Bruce, MatTitDA

*Bumpus, Prof. H. C.

Burr, WINTHROP

*Burr, WILLIAM H.

Busou, WENDELL T.

*Byrnes, Miss EstHer F.

*CALKINS, Prof. Gary N.

*CAMPBELL, WILLIAM, Ph.D.

CANFIELD, R. A.

CasE, CHARLES L.

“CASH Y. COME:

*CASWELL, JOHN H.

*Cattell, Prof. J. McK.

CHAMBERLAIN, Rev. L. T.

CHAMPOLLION, ANDREW

*CHANDLER, Prof. C. F.

CHAPIN, CHESTER W.

Cuapin, H. D.

*CHAPMAN, FRANK M.

*CHEESMAN, T. M., M.D.

CLARKSON, BANYER

CLINE, Miss May

Coun, J. M.

*COLLINGWOOD, FRANCIS

Coturns, Miss Anna E.

Collord, George W.

Conpit, WiLu1aM L.

Constant, S. Victor

Cooper, G. R.

Cornine, C. R.

Cow es, Davip S.

*Cox, CHARLES F.

*CRAMPTON, Prof. Henry E.

Crane, Zenas

CRAWFORD, JOSEPH

Cross, GEorGE D.

Cuiern, Guy W.

*DAVENPORT, Prof. C. B.

Davigs, J. CLARENCE

Daviss, WILLIAM G.

Davis, CHARLES H.

378 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

*Day, WILLIAM S.

*DEAN, Prof. BASHFORD

Dr Coppet, E. J.

De Forest, Ropert W.

DEGENER, R.

Delafield, Maturin L., Jr.

DELANO, WARREN, Jr.

De Mirna, Louis J.

Demorest, WILLIAM C.

De Puy, Henry F.

DEVEREUX, WALTER B.

DeEvork, FREDERICK W.

DEWIrT, WILLIAM G.

Dickerson, Epwarp N.

DIEFENTHALER, C. E.

Dimock, GEORGE E.

Drx, Rev. Moreay, 8. T. D.

Dopge, Rev. D. Stuart, D.D.

*Dopce, Prof. RicHarp E.

Dodge, Miss Grace

Donerty, Henry L.

DonaLp, JAMEs M.

*DoreEmus, Prof. CHas. A.

Douglas, James

Dovaetass, ALFRED

Draper, Mrs. M. A. P.

Drummonp, Isaac W., M.D.

-Dupiry, PVH Php:

*DunHAM, E. K., M.D.

Dunn, GANO

Dunscombe, George E.

Dv Pont, H. A.

DuRAND, JoHN S.

*DUTCHER, WILLIAM

Dwicart, J., Jr., M.D.

Dwyer, THoMaS

EICKEMEYER, CARL

*Elliott, Prof. A. H.

EMANUEL, JOHN H., Jr.

Emmet, C. TEMPLE

Eno, J. C.

Eno, WILLIAM PHELPS

EnricuH, Mrs. J. 8.

EscoBar, FRANCISCO

EstTaBrook, A. F.

Evans, SAMUEL M., M.D.

*EYERMAN, JOHN

FAIRCHILD, CHARLES S.

Fatuon, G. W. R.

Fargo, JAMEs C.

FARMER, ALEXANDER S.

*FARRAND, Prof. LivinGsTon

Frercuson, Mrs. FARQUHAR

Fercuson, H. B., M.D.

FIELD, C. DEPEYSTER

FreLp, WILLIAM B. OsGoop

*FINLEY, JOHN H.

*FISHBERG, Maurice, M.D.

*FLEXNER, Simon, M.D.

For) Ca.

Foor, JAMEs D.

Forp, JAMES B.

Forpyce, J. A.

ForsTEeR, WILLIAM

Foxwortuy, Dr. F. W.

FREUND, EmMIL

FRISSELL, A. S.

GapbE, WILLIAM F.

GALLATIN, FREDERICK

Gipson, R. W.

*GiES, Prof. WILLIAM J.

GoRDON, CLARENCE E.

GOULD, EDWIN

GOULD, GEORGE J.

GOULD, MISS HELEN M.

*GRABAU, Prof. A. W.

*GRATACAP, Louis P.

GREEFE, Ernest F.

*GREGORY, W. K.

Griaes, G.

Griscom, C. A.

GUGGENHEIM, W.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907

von Hacen, Hueco.

HaauE, JAMEs D.

Haus, WILLIAM

HAMMOND, JAMEs B.

Harriman, E. H.

Haupt, Louis, M.D.

HAVEMEYER, WILLIAM F.

Heinze, ARTHUR P.

HELLER, Max

*HERING, Prof. D. W.

~HERRMAN, MRS. ESTHER

*HERTER, C. A., M.D.

Hess, SELMAR

HEWLetTT, WALTER J.

Hiaernson, J. J.

*HILL, Rosert T.

HINcHMAN, Mrs. C. S.

HirscH, CHARLES S.

*Hitcucock, Miss F. R. M.

HopEenpyt, ANTON G.

Hor, RoBErtT

HorrMan, Mrs. E. A.

*HoLuick, ARTHUR, Ph.D.

Host, L. J. R.

Holt, Henry

Hopkins, George B.

Hoppin, W. W.

*HORNADAY, WILLIAM T.

*Hovey, E. 0., Ph.D.

*Howe, Prof. Henry M.

*Howe, M. A., Ph.D.

Hubbard, Thomas H.

Hupparp, WALTER C.

HucuHEs, CHARLES E.

Hutsuizer, J. E.

Hunt, JosepH H., M.D.

Huntington, Archer M.

Husracr, FRANK

Huy er, Joun S.

Hyde, B. Talbot B

Hype, E. Francis

Hyde, Frederic E., M.D.

Hyper, Henry St. J.

Iles, George

*IRVING, Prof. Joun DB

Irvinc, WALTER

von Isakovics, ALOIS

* JACOBI, ABRAM, M.D.

*JacoBy, Prof. HaRoLn

JAMES, D. WILLIS

Jarvie, James N.

JENNINGS, R. E.

Jesup, Morris K.

JONES, Dwiaut A.

*JULIEN A. A., Ph.D.

Kann, O. H.

*Kemp, Prof. James F.

KENNEDY, J. S.

Kenyon, W. H.

Keppler, Rudolph

Kessler, George A.

Kiar, A. JULIEN

*Knapp, Herman, M.D.

KoHLMAN, C.

eKONZ, GHz, MeA.; Ph.D:

DE LAGERBERG, J.

*Lamb, Osborn R.

LAMBERT, ADRIAN S.

Lanepon, Woopsury G.

LANGELOTH, J.

*LANGMANN, Gustav, M.D.

LAWRENCE, A. E.

LAWRENCE, JOHN B.

Lawton, James M.

Leao, F. Garcra P., M.D.

*LEpoOuUX, A. R., Ph.D.

*LEE, Prof. FREDERICK S.

LEFFERTS, MARSHALL C

Lets, J. W.

*LEVISON, W. G.

Levy, EMANUEL

LICHTENSTEIN, PAuL

379

380 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

*LINVILLE, H. R., Ph.D.

Loeb, James

*LoEB, Prof. Morris, Ph.D.

LounsBERRY, R. P.

Low, Hon. Seth, LL.D.

*Lucas, Frep. A.

*LuQUER, Prof. Lea Mcl.

*Lusk, Prof. GRAHAM

LuTTGEN, WALTHER

Lyon, RALPH

McCook, Col. J. J.

McDonatp, JoHN E.

McKim, Rev. Hastettr

*McMillin, Emerson

*MacDovucGat., Prof. R.

Mack, Jacos W.

Macy, Miss M. S.

Macy, V. Everitt

MaceEr, Ropert F.

Mann, W. D.

MarsieE, MANTON

Marcou, Joun B.

Martine, ALFRED

Marshall, Louis

Marston, E. S.

Martin, Bradley

*MarTIN, Prof. D. S.

*MarTIN, T. C.

Martin, W. M.

*Matthew, W. D., Ph.D.

MaxwELL, Francis T.

MEAD, WALTER H.

Mercs, Titus B.

MELLEN, C. S.

*MeE ttTzer, S. J., M.D.

Merriam, H. F.

*Merrity, F. J. H., Ph.D.

Merz, Herman A.

*Mryer, Apotr, M.D.

Meyer, T. C.

MirBurn, J. C.

Minter, Grorce N., M.D.

*MINER, Roy Waxpo

MitcHe.i, ARTHUR M.

MitcHet.t, Epwarp

Morewoop, GrorcE B.

Morgan, J. PIeERPONT

*MorGAN, THos. H.

Morris, Lewis R.

Mortimer, W. G., M.D.

Myers, JosepH G.

Nimick, Mrs. A. K.

Nunn, R. J.

Oakes, Francis J.

O’Brien, J. M.

Opric, ADOLPH

Ocus, A. S.

OETTINGER, P. J., M.D.

*Qgilvie, Miss Ida H., Ph.D.

Olcott, E. E.

OtcoTt, Mrs. E. E.

OLmMsTED, Mrs. C. T.

*Qsborn, Prof. Henry F.

Osporn, WILLIAM C.

Owen, Miss Juliette A.

OweEns, W. W.

Pappock, EuGENne H.

Paine, A. G, Jr.

Painter, H. McM., M.D.

Parish, Henry

*PARKER, Prof. H. C.

ParRSELL, Henry V. A.

Parsons, Mrs. Epwin

*PARSONS, JOHN E.

Patton, John

PEALE, REMBRANDT

PEARSALL, F. W.

PEDERSEN, F. M.

*PELLEW, Prof. C. E.

PENNINGTON, WILLIAM

Perkins, William H.

PERRY, CHARLES J.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907

*PETERSON, F., M.D.

*PETRUNKEWITSCH, A.

PETTIGREW, Davin L.

+PRISTER, J. C.

Puipps, HENRY

PHOENIX, LLoyD

PICKHARDT, CARL

Prerce, HENRY CLaAy

*PINCHOT, GIFFORD

_*PiTKin, Lucius, Ph.D.

PLANTEN, J.-R.

Poacensure, H. F.

*Poor, Prof. CHARLES L.

Poor, Henry W.

Porter, EUGENE H.

Post, ABRAM S.

=Post, C. A:

*PosT, GEORGE B.

eERINCE, Prot. J. D.

ProcTER, WILLIAM

Proctor, GEorGE H.

*PRUDDEN, Prof. T. M., M.D.

*PoPIN, Prof. M. I.

Pyne, M. Taylor

QUACKENBOS, Prof. J. D.

QUINTARD, EDWARD

REILxy, F. James

RIcHARDSON, FREDERICK A.

*RICKETTS, Prof. P. DE P.

RIEDERER, Lupwice

RIKER, SAMUEL

Ritey, R. Hupson

Rogs, Hon. J. HAMPDEN

RopBEerT, SAMUEL

Roperts, C. H.

Rocers, ALLEN Morritu

Rocers, E. L.

Rocers, H. H.

Rowe, S. H.

Rowland, Thomas Fitch

*Russy, Prof. H. H.

Russ, EpwarD

SAMI Ce he:

Schermerhorn, F. A.

ScuiFF, J.

Schott, Charles M., Jr.

Scott, G. S.

SEABURY, GEORGE J.

SENFF, CHARLES H.

SHaw, Mrs. J. C.

SHEPARD, C. SIDNEY

*SHERWOOD, GEORGE H.

SHILAND, ANDREW, Jr.

SHULTz, CHARLES S.

*SICKLES, Ivin, M.D.

SreBERG, W. H. J.

SLOAN, BENSON B.

SMILLIE, CHARLES F.

SmiTH, Exxiott C.

*SMITH, Ernest E., M.D.

*SmMITH, Prof. JoHn B.

SmitH, W. WHEELER

SNOOK, SAMUEL B.

Snow, E. G.

*STARR, Prof. M. ALLEN

Stetson, F. L.

STEVENS, C. A.

*STEVENS, GEORGE T., M.D

*Stevenson, Prof. John J.

STOKES, JAMES

STONE, Mason A.

*STRATFORD, Prof. WILLIAM

Straus, Istpor

*STRONG, Prof. CHas. A.

Sturais, ELIZABETH

*STUYVESANT, RUTHERFORD

Taceart, Rusu

*Tatlock, John, Jr.

TAYLOR, GEORGE

TayLor, WILLIAM H.

Terry, James,

Taw, BENJAMIN

3si

382 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

THompson, Mrs. F. F.

THompson, LEwis S.

*THompSON, Prof. W. G.

THompson, WALTER

*THORNDIKE, Prof. E. L.

THORNE, SAMUEL

+orrry, J. C., Ph.D:

*ToweER, R. W., Ph. D.

* TOWNSEND, CHARLES H.

Tows, C. D:

*TROTTER, ALFRED W.

* TROWBRIDGE, Prof. C. C.

TUCKERMAN, ALFRED, Ph.D.

Uimann, E. S.

Van BEUREN, FRED. T.

Van Slyck, George W.

Van Wyck, Robert A.

VoRATKA, EpwarD J.

VREDENBURGH, Wm. H.

Wainwnicat, J. W., M.D.

*WALLER, Prof. ELwyn

Watiin, Ivan E.

Warsore, F. N.

Warsura, Pau M.,

Warp, ARTEMAS

WarD, JOHN GILBERT

*WASHINGTON, H. S., Ph.D.

WATERBURY, J. I.

Weir, John

WELLINGTON, A. H.

WHEELER, H. L.

*WHEELER, Prof. W. M.

*WHITE, HORACE

White, LEonarD D.

*WHITFIELD, Prof. R. P.

WIckE, WILLIAM

Wieern, F. H., M.D.

WiuraMs, R. H.

WILis, CHARLES T.

*WILSON, Prof. E. B.

Witson, Henry R.

Witson, J. H.

Witson, Miss M. B.

*WISSLER, CLARK, Ph.D.

Wotrr, A. R.

Woop, Mrs. Cyntuia A.

*WooDBRIDGE, Prof. F. J. I.

*WOoOoDHULL, Prof. JoHn F.

*WooDWARD, Prof. R. S.

*WoopwortH, Prof. R. S.

Yparra, A. M. F., M.D.

YEAMAN, GEORGE, H.

YOUNGLOVE, JoHN, M.D.

ZABRISKIE, GEORGE

ASSOCIATE MEMBERS

Brown, T. C.

GorRDON, CLARENCE

Dustin, L. J.

Harper, Roitanp M., Ph.D.

HuntTER, GEORGE W.

JAMES, F. WILTON

JONES, A. L.

Ke tuicott, W. E.

Monracue, W. P.

Nortuup, DwicHt

OsBurRN, R. C.

Reap, TF.

STEVENSON, A. E.

VAN SICLEN, MatTHEW

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1907

NON-RESIDENT MEMBERS

BucHNER, Epwarp F. Kenpic, Amos B.

BuRNETT, DouGiass *LiLoyp, Prof. F. E.

Davis, Wiiuiam H. *Mayer, Dr. A. G.

ENGLISH, GEORGE L. ~PRATT) Dr) ds El

Finuay, Prof. G. I. *RrEs, Prof. H.

FRANKLAND, FREDERICK W. Reuter, L. H.

HoFrMan, S. V. *SuUMNER, Dr. F. B.

*VAN INGEN, Prof. G.

383

ue | es 6) be ara) 4 } f ;

i RRMA?) cs SSMU ig ile

rd, (iy ryt Wd £ iv tral, 3

Ral. ii iy} i wy

aad Bi

| i

| .

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

[Lyceum or Natura History, 1818-1876]

The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz.:

q (1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain the scien-

_ tific contributions and reports of researches, together with the records of

meetings and similar matter.

A volume of the Annals will in general coincide with the calendar year

and will be distributed in parts. The price of the current issues is one dollar

per part or three dollars per volume. Author’s reprints are issued as soon

as the separate papers are printed, the dates appearing above the title of

each paper.

(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at

irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to

monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume

i + Tis devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume IJ, to Zodlogical Memoirs,

etc. The price is one dollar per part, as issued.

All publications will be sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The

Annals will be sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them.

Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discontinued with

the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the Annals.

Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of

any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to

THe LIBRARIAN,

New York Academy of Sciences,

‘care of

American Museum of Natural History,

New York City.

Hovey, Edmund Otis. The Biccataitiey of the Birth of Carel ms ;

Linneus. ; \ h \ 4 2 ‘ .

Smith, John B. New Species and Genera of the tin

tivo Noctuidz for 1907 Meith EEDZ \

dameh acehettios of Analyses .. :

Hovey, E.0. The Chester, New York, Mastodon .

Tower, Ralph W. Production of Sound in the Drumfishes,

Sea-Robin and the Toad-fish : ‘ i :

House, Homer Doliver. ‘The North American Sued of

Genus Ipomeea . hale

Wheeler, W.M. Records af Niveau 1906 HEINE

Hovey, Edmund Otis. Records of Meetings, 1907.

VOL. XVIII PART III

ANNALS

OF THE

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

EDITOR

Edmund Otis Hovey

NEW YORK

PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY

1909

THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

Founded, 1817.

OrFicers, 1909.

President — CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Station.

V ice-Presidents — J. J. STEVENSON, F. M. CHAPMAN,

D. W. Herinec, Maurice FISHBERG.

Recording Secretary — EpmMunpD Otis Hovey, American Museum.

Corresponding Secretary — HERMON C. Bumpus, American Museum.

Treasurer — EMERSON McMi urn, 40 Wall St.

Librarian — Rawtpex W. Tower, American Museum.

Editor —Epmunp Ot1s Hovey, American Museum.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Chairman — J. J. StEvENsoN, New York University.

Secretary — C. P. BerKEy, Columbia University.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

Chairman — Frank M. CHapmMan, American Museum.

Secretary — Louis Hussaxor, American Museum.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

Chairman — D. W. Herinea, New York University.

Secretary — W1LL1AM CAMPBELL, Columbia University.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

Chairman — Mavric& FIsHBERG, 1337 Madison Ave.

Secretary — R. S. WoopwortxH, Columbia University.

Sessions of 1909.

The Academy meets on Monday evenings at 8:15 o’clock from October

to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of Natural History, 77th Street

and Central Park, West.

[Annas N.Y. Acap. Sct., Vo, XVIII, No. 9, Part III, pp. 385-424. 29 August, 1908.]

AN INVESTIGATION OF THE FIGURE OF THE SUN AND

OF POSSIBLE VARIATIONS IN ITS SIZE AND SHAPE.

By CHARLES LANE Poor.

CONTENTS.

Part I. Historica.

HitmduchoryNOtG | \s'ien kaso les. vos. te: ee bee ines. ee bee ha ust ah oat OG

Weridiang OOSCRVALIONS ala) TGneed eae Cade, ae, occ yhiea etre PA Ln ley te OO.

Wonelincemaay sie Vets | Tera) Gist aaah a lg eel OG

TERA aN CT ANNE POA ay bolt tay a ee ene Ee Mean BLA rai tc}?

SO CCHIMILEREIAIE Ute Mena TE NRG Occult ones ww nme Mie Cake ee Ga Soma S Gd

enlifgkerv 205): SGN yaa MN Ge RY Ltn, sh TOD

Discussion of Meridian Observations: BBs) WR PREN AN 0 er ia) ALS SENN. (a a Soe

Aviwers' 2) 5. UVES Ea chet. Wk My RE ee eee yale Lhe Le 1a mts SCS

Newcomb and Holden 1) Gah | OM Meee ee Re ee IN mn Ces Vert Dien ery cd * Caisse,

PAUIWOTSE MMPI Dihpel tf Rohe ON ce eekly ah Thad pail rer aoa Wen | eee meaty OUR

Heliometer Measures . . . BNA 23d oer

Measures made in Ghunection! with Geet of Venus. Sed te ccAleeee BOO

Observations of schurand Ambronn sy. 2) 0s) eee ae ooO

Part II. PHoroGrapHic MEASURES.

PIECE EA ATES ets ou et ald. UR iis Meeanaly otec | healer nie ens

Northfield Plates . . Shari eAa a OU Nee Pies aad erlang

Yerkes Plates, The hate heliometer Bt esky PaO FOUN beans BRM A ale | os 8 0N0/

Part III. Discuss1on oF OBSERVATIONS AND Beene

The Figure ofthe Sun . . Foe ah ee eae

A New Tabulation of the Genuan Heliemeces Measures Le CoB St Re)

ae ALTON Ol, ELCSULGS| drat Pig tune Gah abs Meath sci RUNG ic bee 6 cele ae MnnRSRe

Conclusions . . Peres Men oamr nt nemiinn waa | <iIe

Variability of the Sun’s State wy ee Tew ee 95155

Fluctuations having the Same Period as ne oun -spx ts HAL ey 2!

Search for Short Term Periodic Variations . . ....... £418

Part IV. CoNnc.LusIons.

385

JUL 26 1909

386 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Part I. HustoRicat.

INTRODUCTORY NOTE.

Questions as to the exact size and shape of the sun are of great astro-

nomical interest and have been made the subjects of many- researches

during the last hundred years. Many of these investigations, involving

long series of observations, show a distinct ellipticity of the sun and indi-

cate a possible yariation of its diameter, yet, after a thorough re-discus-

sion of these observations, Auwers concludes that all such indications are

illusory and that the sun is sensibly a sphere of constant diameter. As a

result of an independent discussion, Newcomb confirms this conclusion

of Auwers, and traces the supposed observed variations to changes in ter-

restrial temperature and to fluctuations in the haziness and cloudiness of

the earth’s atmosphere. As these investigations and discussions appeared

in various journals and publications of scientific societies, it may not be

without value to preface the present investigation with a résumé of the more

important papers, and to show exactly upon what grounds Auwers and

Newcomb base their conclusions.

Measures of the sun’s diameter which have heretofore been used are of

two classes; 1st, Those made with a meridian circle or transit instrument,

and, 2d, Those made with a heliometer. The papers and discussions re-

lating to these two classes will be taken up separately, although this will

interfere with the chronological order in which the papers actually ap-

peared.

MERIDIAN OBSERVATIONS.

Von LrypEenav.— The first important investigation was that of Von

Lindenau, which appeared in Zach’s “Monatliche Correspondenz” for

June, 1809. From observations made at Seeberg, in 1808-09, with a

transit instrument, he found a periodic variation in the sun’s diameter.

In order to test this suspected variation, he discussed the Greenwich me-

ridian observations made in the years 1750-55 and 1765-86. ‘These ob-

servations apparently confirmed the results obtained from those made at

Seeberg, and Lindenau concluded that the sun is an ellipsoid, rotating

about its longer axis. His calculations made the polar radius exceed the

equatorial by from 4” to 6”, or, what is the same thing, he found an equa-

torial compression of 5{5 to y45- ‘These results, however, were criticised

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 387

the following month by Bessel,! who showed that the observations could

be represented equally well by periodic changes in the transit instrument

itself.

Brancut. — Piazzi? and afterwards Bianchi’ investigated the subject, and

reached conclusions diametrically opposed to those of Lindenau. While

they found the sun to be an ellipsoid, they made the equatorial radius the

greater. Bianchi based his work on some 440 measures of the vertical and

439 of the horizontal diameter made during the years 1827, 1828 and 1829.

From the measures of the vertical diameter alone, he deduced a polar com-

pression of cE from the horizontal measures, a compression of =

while from a combination of all the observations, he found the value =

This latter value would make the equatorial exceed the polar radius by

some 3”.87.

Srccu1.— In spite of these papers, the generally accepted conclusion

was that the solar disk was circular and its diameter constant. Not until

after a lapse of forty years was the subject reopened. In 1871 Secchi

became interested in the question of the sun’s shape, and, with his assist-

ant Rosa, undertook a systematic series of observations with the meridian

circle of the Collegio Romano. As these observations apparently showed

great variations in the sun’s diameter, Secchi induced the Palermo Obser-

vatory to make an independent series of measures. ‘These confirmed the

results obtained at Rome. According to these investigations,’ the diam-

eter of the sun varied with the number of sun-spots, being greatest when

the number of spots was least, and least when the number of spots was

greatest. In conformity with this, he also found that those diameters

which pass through regions of ‘ntense spot-activity are less than those

passing through other regions. He found the diameter which passes

through latitude 21° to 23° to be some 1”.56 smaller than the diameter

which passes through latitude 6°.

Hinrixer. — Hilfiker, assistant at the Observatory of Neuchatel, pub-

lished the results of twenty-two years’ observations. In all he made use

of 3468 homogeneous transits of the sun, all observed with the same instru-

ment and in precisely the same manner. ‘This instrument had an objective

of 115 mm. aperture and 2 m. focal length. In making the observations,

a uniform magnification of 200 was used, and each limb of the sun was

observed on thirteen threads of the reticle. From this great mass of obser-

vations, Hilfiker drew the definite conclusion that the sun’s diameter is

1 Zach, Monatliche Correspondenz, July, 1809.

2 Specola Astronomica di Palermo, Liv. VI.

3 Astronomische Nachrichten, Vol. IX, No. 213, August, 1831.

4 Atti dell’Accademia dei Lincei, January, 1872.

388 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

variable and that it varies with the number of visible sun-spots. He found

the diameter of the sun to be greater when the number of spots is a mini-

mum, to be smaller when the number is a maximum. In this conclusion

he agreed with Secchi, with the observations made at Rome and Palermo.

DISCUSSION OF MERIDIAN OBSERVATIONS.

Auwers. — The results derived by Secchi depended upon a very small

number of observations (187), and they covered a period of only one year;

yet they attracted considerable attention, and caused Auwers to undertake

a complete discussion of the entire matter of the sun’s shape and its possible

variability. This resulted in a series of papers, published by the Berlin

Academy, which are distinguished by their thoroughness and by the great

skill of the author. In these papers Auwers clearly shows the utter unrelia-

bility of the observations upon which Secchi depended, and concludes that

“the assertions concerning variations in the sun’s diameter are totally and

entirely unfounded.”

In the first paper of this series, Auwers examined a mass of observa-

tions made in the years 1871-72, at Greenwich, Neuchatel, Oxford, Wash-

ington, Paris, Koénigsberg and Brussels, and showed that the different

series of observations furnished conflicting results. ‘These series covered

the period of time during which were made the observations upon which

Secchi relied; and the entire disagreement between the various sets of

observations led Auwers to the conclusion that the changes noticed by

Secchi were due to “casual errors of observations.” The Oxford series

showed a distinct relation between the diameter and the sharpness of the

image. When the sky was more or less overcast and the image indistinct,

the measured diameter was greater. Dividing the observations into five

classes, according to the state of the weather, he found the following mean

residuals for each class:

No. oF

CLASs. RESIDUALS. OBSERVATIONS

IBESt MAAR Asch key sen ct consume Selihetice diet aaee, ae 1

VeryishArpwr iss) Pome) Pekan eet e ne bis tha, Nearer endo 4

Sharp-t oii loudss Vey 0s vcs eta cot sta pe Loe 3 f 08.129 (7.)

Many claude 2 (2s icay ce) eve! ce lusi feria oe, 8

Glowds eae ia ee CL ene) Us Pee a ones Chetan ga) 16 09.264 (24)

This dependence of the measured diameter upon the state of the atmos-

1 Ueber eine angebliche Verinderlichkeit des Sonnendurchmessers, Monatsberichte of the

Royal Academy of Sciences at Berlin, May, 1873.

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 389

phere, or the astronomical “‘seeing,” was also found by Wagner,’ and was

corroborated by Gyldén at Pulkowa, by Becker at Neuch4tel and by New-

comb and Holden? at Washington. The Washington observations show

clearly that both the vertical and horizontal diameters vary with the amount

of cloudiness in the sky. In bright weather, when the image was clear and

sharp, the diameters as measured were smaller than when the sky was over-

cast, or was more or less covered by clouds.

In the paper above referred to, Auwers also investigated two long series

of Greenwich observations; one made by Bradley and Maskelyne between

the years 1750 and 1786, and the other made during the years 1851-70.

The intervening years were partly covered by two shorter series; one made

by Bessel at Kénigsberg in the years 1820-28, and the second by W. Struve

at Dorpat in 1823-38. These series all showed small variations in the

measured diameter; but when these variations were compared with the

fluctuations in the number of sun-spots, no dependence of the one phenom-

enon upon the other could be traced. As to the minute variations shown

by the observations, Auwers concluded that there was “no indication what-

ever of the reality of these fluctuations.”

Newcoms AND HoipEen.— Newcomb and Holden? investigated the

subject of possible variations in the diameter in an entirely different man-

ner. If there be two independent series of simultaneous observations, and

the difference between each measure and the mean of the whole series to

which it belongs be taken, then, if the differences are due entirely to acci-

dental errors, there will be no relation between the differences of the two

series. If, on the other hand, a portion of the difference is due to ac-

tual change in the sun, then, as a general rule, positive differences in one

series will correspond to positive differences in the other, and negative

differences to negative differences. When the corresponding differences of

one series are multiplied by those of the other, and the sum of all the prod-

ucts taken, then, if there be a real change in the sun, this sum should be a

large positive quantity.

Unfortunately no such simultaneous series were available. The two

series which most nearly satisfied the conditions were those made at Green-

wich and Washington during the years 1862-70. Instead of being simul-

taneous, the observations were thus separated by an interval of about five

hours. These series contained a total of 3639 observations, of which num-

1 Vierteljahrschrift, January, 1873.

2 On the Possible Periodic Changes in the Sun’s Apparent Diameter (American Journal of

Sciences and Arts, October, 1874).

3 On the Possible Pericdic Changes in the Sun’s Apparent Diameter (American Journal of

Sciences and Arts, October, 1874).

390 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

ber 1813 were of the horizontal and 1826 of the vertical diameter. Of

this large number, however, only 584 were made on corresponding days

and were available for the test. These observations were freed from per-

sonal equation, and the resulting series of residuals found. Each Wash-

ington residual was multiplied by the corresponding Greenwich residual,

and the sum of the products taken with the following results:

Hor. Diam. VeErRT. Diam.

SMVOL Products! yay CU he eM en he Semin Oe Meg — 2) ee

Number of observations er .0-) Coney 313 271

This preponderance of negative products would show that positive

residuals at Greenwich are followed five hours later by negative residuals

at Washington and vice versd. This would apparently indicate vibrations

in the sun of short period, somewheres around ten hours’ duration. Again,

the result seems, according to Newcomb, to be conclusive against any

variability whose period is a multiple of a day.

The apparent short-period vibration is, however, attributed by the

authors to chance.

Auwers. — Auwers! enlarged the scope of his investigation, and dis-

cussed all available transit material. ‘This included the following long series:

Greenwich Observations . . . 1851-83 Radcliffe Observations . 1862-83

Washington Observations . . 1866-82 Neuchatel Observations . 1862-83

and a number of shorter series.

Practically every series showed fluctuations, more or less periodic, in

the observed diameters; and an investigation as to the reality or non-reality

of these apparent fluctuations formed the main part of Auwers’ papers.

These apparent variations fell into two classes; 1st, Irregular or long period

variations, and, 2d Annual variations.

In discussing the variations of the first class, Auwers carefully investi-

gated the personal equations of the ninety-two observers who took part in

the four main series of observations. ‘These personal errors were deter-

mined in the usual manner. In each series the observations (mean of each

year) of each observer were compared with the corresponding mean of all

the observers, or with that of a standard observer or observers. In the °

case of the Greenwich series, the mean of four observers, — Dunkin, Ellis,

Criswick and J. Carpenter [the observers who had the largest consecutive

1 Neue Untersuchungen tiber den Durchmesser der Sonne, I, II (Sitzungsberichte of the

Berlin Academy, December, 1886 and June 9, 1887).

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 391

series of observations], — was taken as standard. With the personal equa-

tions so determined, the observations were reduced, and the results showed

periodic variations, which at first sight bore some resemblance to the vari-

ations in the sun-spot frequency.

During the period 1862-72 this resemblance was more striking than in

periods before and after those dates. In investigating the probability of

a connection between the diameters as observed in each series, and the

number of sun-spots, Auwers assumed that, if present, such connection

could be expressed by the equation

V=x-+Ay

where V is the residual obtained by subtracting the mean of all the horizon-

tal diameters from the mean of each year, and A is a number arbitrarily

obtained for each year by Auwers, from Wolf’s “relative number” for that

year and from the observed magnetic variations during that year. From

such equations for each year, as given by the Greenwich and Washington

observations for the central period, Auwers found by least squares the

values

x= +0.030

y= —0.500

with a weight of 2.73 and a mean error of 0.198 for y. Thus y was over

twice its mean error, a result which seemed to confirm a connection between

the observed diameter and the sun-spot period.

Auwers also plotted the yearly residuals of the Greenwich and W ae

ington observations in connection with the sun-spot curve, and the rela-

tion between the two was again clearly indicated. ‘Thus the observations,

when interpreted graphically or mathematically, point toward a close

connection between the variations in the diameter and those in the number

of visible sun-spots.

Not content with this conclusion, Auwers proceeded further and inves-

tigated the various series of observations made by the individual observers.

In these individual series of residuals he found variations, some abrupt,

some periodic. These changes in an observer’s residuals he now assumes

as due to changes in the personal equations rather than to changes in the

measured quantity. When abrupt changes in the residuals are found,

corresponding abrupt changes in the observers’ personal equations are as-

sumed; when gradual periodic changes in the residuals are seen, corre-

sponding periodic changes in the personal equation are taken. ‘Thus, in his

second or definitive reduction of the Greenwich and Washington observa-

392 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

tions, Auwers assumes arbitrary and variable personal equations for the

different observers. Some of the more important of the fifty-seven personal

equations of the Greenwich observers as used by Auwers are given in the

following table. Under the head “First System” will be found the values

of personal equations as determined by Auwers in his first reduction; under

the head “Second System” will be found the variable equations used in the

second reduction:

Table I.

First SYSTEM. SECOND System.

; + 08.084 + 08.058—0s.006 (t—1860.5)

sD) tka A ey) ees eee See ee Le +.08.025 1861

DowRine ey sci) pili een eee ee Oe —08.010 + 0s.010(t—1878.5)

Mhackeray ences) eae beet 02038 —(#.014 ) 1876

+08.063 §

Stoneman cece eey een eee eS Ef —0°.135 l

+08.041 ¢ 1863

Peadeier eh whee steaor a ce OS a4 —03.035

+.08.013 } 1830

+ 08.221 + 08.230 L

H. Breen . . . . . . . —0 021 \ 1855 —()s.028 J 1855

Criswickjane uae neon. es ea OF0G2 + 08.061

JCanpenterdtinities ie) ee 3 O8095 —0s.099

The dates following a bracket indicate the year in which an abrupt

change in personal equations was adopted. The system of equations

adopted for the vertical diameters was still more complicated; those of

Dunkin, Ellis, Criswick, J. Carpenter and H. Carpenter varying with the

time. The personal equation of Criswick contained a term involving the

square of the time, and that of Ellis showed an abrupt change in 1871.

Besides these, the equations of Lynn, Downing and Thackeray, show abrupt

changes.

By using this new set of personal equations, Auwers was enabled to

reduce the apparent variations in the observations, so that all semblance

of periodicity disappeared; and, because the outstanding residuals are so

reduced, he concludes that this system best represents the observations,

and that the diameter of the sun is constant while the personal equations

of the different observers are variable. This may be the true explanation

of the observed discordances; but it is evident that, with a different sys-

tem of variable personal equations, an entirely different result could be

obtained.

By similar discussions of all the various series of observations made

between 1851 and 1883, Auwers reached the conclusion that the meridian

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 393

observations showed no long-period variation, nor any long existing change

in the sun’s diameter, of a greater amplitude than + 0”.2.

As to the second class, or annual variations, Auwers investigated nine-

teen independent series of observations, made at seven different observa-

tories and with twelve different instruments. In all, these series contained

more than 21,000 observations of the horizontal diameter and about half

as many more of the vertical diameter. From sixteen of these series, con-

taining more than 26,000 observations, Auwers found, after eliminating the

effects of personal errors, that the diameter was either constant for the en-

tire year, or showed variations of such form and size as to be clearly the

result of temperature upon the instruments. In these series he found

the measured diameter to be the smallest when the image was sharpest,

and at those temperatures when the threads of the reticle were exactly in

the focal plane of the objective.

The three remaining series showed annual variations which could not

be accounted for by the effects of temperature. In the Madras series,

Auwers traced the apparent variation to personal errors of the various

observers. The other two series which showed variations were those very

early observations of Maskelyne and Lindenau. To these series Auwers

devoted a separate paper,! and in it he showed Lindenau’s deductions to

be entirely unfounded. In the early Greenwich observations many cases

occurred in which the second limb of the sun was observed on different

threads from those used for the first. Such observations can only be util-

ized when the thread-intervals are known. Now Lindenau confined his

discussion to observations made on the same threads, while Auwers took

into account all the observations. To do this Auwers had first to find,

from other observations, the thread-intervals; but, while this work was

extremely laborious, it enabled Auwers ultimately to utilize three times as

many observations as did Lindenau. Still further, Auwers found the Green-

wich observations to be a heterogeneous mass made by different observers,

by Maskelyne and his assistants. He discussed the personal equations of

these various observers, eliminated their effects and finally obtained results

radically different from those of Lindenau, — results which showed no trace

of variability in the sun’s diameter.

The possible departure of the sun from a spherical shape was also dis-

cussed by Auwers in these three papers. At Greenwich, Washington and

Radcliffe, the vertical as well as the horizontal diameter was measured.

Auwers discussed these observations separately, and found the results as

given below:

1 Neue Untersuchungen iiber den Durchmesser der Sonne, III (Sitzungsberichte of the

Berlin Academy, October 31, 1889).

394 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Table II.

No. or

No. Oo - E

DIAMETER. age taeteg sh OBsERY-

Horizontal. Vertical. Hor. Vert.

(RRESTUIWICH Vat 2h) Sees S32 PHD BPH PHOT (3) 3114 3289 62

Washington ... . S22 All Be Bal a7 1321 1297 15

VAGelitte vin cer wettew he S223 7 30 Sail — f — 7

Menchatel (ii ioe aM SOR Seog — ay 8

In each of three series, therefore, the vertical diameter appears as larger

than the horizontal.

The inclination of the sun’s equator to the horizontal line changes with

the season of the year. If, therefore, the sun had a marked ellipticity,

the measured horizontal and vertical diameters would each show periodic

variations, the length of the cycle being six months. If the equatorial

diameter exceeded the polar by 1”, then Auwers showed that, at the date

of the observations, the measured mean for any month should exceed the

yearly mean by the value

+ (0”.01 sin 2t + 0”.09 cos 2t)

where t is the fractional part of the year; and the upper sign applies to

horizontal measures, while the lower one applies to vertical diameters.

Giving the Greenwich and Neuchatel observations weights of 3, the Wash-

ington observations 2, and those of Radcliffe 1, Auwers, from the mean of

all the observations, found the expressions

Horizontal diameter. . . . . —O”.01 sin 2t+0”.06 cos 2t

Vertical diameter . oe ew ee 6 0".01 sin 2t-—0” .04 cos 2t

And these expressions show absolutely no relation with the real form of

the expression as above given.

Auwers concluded, however, that a polar compression of —+—, or an

excess of 0”.5 of the equatorial over the polar diameter, would best repre-

sent all the observations.

HELIOMETER MEASURES.

In the first of the before-mentioned series of papers,! Auwers examined

two short series of heliometer measures made by Schliiter and Wichmann

1 Monatsberichte of the Royal Academy of Sciences at Berlin, May, 18783.

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 395

in 1842-43 and 1846-51. The observations were too few in number to

allow any certain conclusion to be drawn, but they indicated a change in

the diameter. Schliiter also measured on a few days both the polar and

equatorial diameters, and, as a result of these measures, the polar diam-

eter appeared to exceed the equatorial by a small fraction of a second.

MEASURES MADE IN CONNECTION WITH TRANSIT oF VENUS. — While

adjusting and determining the constants of the heliometers which were

used in observing the transits of Venus in 1874 and 1882, the German

observers made a great number of determinations of the sun’s diameter.

In all, some 2692 separate measures of the diameter were made by twenty-

three observers. Five heliometers were used, measures with the same

instrument being made in various stations by the same observer and in the

same station by various observers. Thus heliometer A was used by Adolph,

Wittstein, Valentiner, Ambronn, Peters, Kobold, Deichmuller, Hartwig,

Kustner and Weinek in Strassburg; by Adolph and Valentiner in Tschifu;

and by Franz and Kobold in Aiken.

This immense mass of data was most thoroughly discussed by Auwers

in “Die Venus-Durchginge, 1874 und 1882”; the conclusions being pub-

lished in the ‘“Astronomische Nachrichten.” ‘These measures were all

reduced to distance unity and arranged in groups, the observations made

with each instrument being subdivided for each observer and also for each

place of observation. From the observations made with the different

heliometers, Auwers reached the conclusion that D and E gave smaller

images than A, B and C, and he deduced corrections for the five instruments,

so as to reduce the measures made with each to the mean of A+ B+ C+

D+4E. These corrections are given by the table,

OT RAC Her aire HeNl) LMA N TM A hime LOY oye DN AN Meu UAL SAE eAM Ih eK Oy [oes

HORE abe RUTH hU wells Doh am EDO) Doyo DMNA EEL e ae bE ha TNE OI VII(G.

TXG A Oa Ae Uae a Ma Ok 06)

With these corrections the observations were reduced and the results

for the various observers tabulated. The observations of Hartwig made

the diameter the greatest, 1920”.29, while those of Clauss made it the least,

1918”.38: the difference between these two observers thus amounted to

1”.91. To these various means Auwers assigned weights, and finally

deduced the value for the diameter of the sun at distance unity as

1919”.26 + 0”.10.

1 Astronomische Nachrichten, Vol CX XVIII, No. 3068, December, 1891.

396 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

These observations were made along different diameters of the sun;

some were made on the equatorial diameter; some, at right angles to the

equator; and others, at various position angles. In all, nineteen sets of

observations were made which directly gave the difference between the

equatorial and polar diameters, and twenty-seven sets in which inclined

pairs of diameters were measured. From these, Auwers found that the

polar diameter exceeds the equatorial by

P.-E.

ingthe LO" sets bcc ana: Pe pet) cen le! Bee, Coit a Cae CHE cele pan at ene

nithes2 7 sets) 3b) ch EN ase he ae AN pots Uae rae toe Neen ene et Cae

And from the weighted mean of the whole series, he found that

P.-E.= +0”.038 + 07.023.

This apparent anomaly in the shape of the sun was explained by Auwers

as being due to the tendency on the part of an observer to measure vertical

diameters greater than horizontal diameters, and he concluded therefore

that the sun is sensibly a sphere.

The mean diameter of the sun as determined from these observations

does not show any variation with the time. The observations were made

practically around the whole circumference of the solar disk, and mostly

fall into two great groups, the first containing those made in 1873-75, and

the second those made in 1880-85. There were two short series of obser-

vations made in 1876-77, not included in either group. The weighted

means of the two great groups are practically identical, the mean of the

second group exceeding that of the first by only

+0”.04,

a quantity less than half the probable error of the mean of the entire series

as given by Auwers

+ 07,10.

OBSERVATIONS OF SCHUR AND AMBRONN. — In 1905 Ambronn pub-

lished, under the title “Die Messungen des Sonnen-durchmessers,” * a

most exhaustive and valuable research upon the shape and size of the sun.

This paper embodies the results of the solar investigations of Schur and

Ambronn, made with the six-inch Repsold heliometer of the Géttingen

1 Astronomische Mittheilungen der k. Sternwarte zu Géttingen, Theil 7, 1905.

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 397

Observatory during a period of nearly thirteen years, from 1890 to 1902,

and it furnishes the best and most precise series of measures of the sun’s

diameter which have yet been made.

When the Repsold heliometer was mounted in Géttingen, Schur de-

termined to investigate this subject thoroughly, and to make with that

instrument a complete and uniform series of measures which should extend

over the whole of a sun-spot period. In carrying out this programme,

_ every conceivable precaution was taken to exclude systematic errors: in

fact, two complete, parallel and independent series of observations were

made, one by Schur and one by Ambronn. Whenever possible, each

observer obtained a series of four measures each week, two of the polar and

two of the equatorial diameter. All the necessary instrumental constants

for the reduction of these observations were obtained by each observer

independently of the other. But the same methods and the same formulas

of reduction were used in the two series; so that these series are directly

comparable. The series of Schur extends from 1890 to the beginning of

1901; that of Ambronn, from 1890 to the end of 1902; both series thus

covering an entire sun-spot period.

In reducing and discussing this great number of observations, Ambronn

investigates the questions of the figure and of the variability of the sun

separately. A brief résumé of his methods of investigating each of these

points is given below, together with the conclusions he reaches in regard

to these important questions.

1. The Figure of the Sun. — On each day of observation the polar and

equatorial diameters were both measured twice, so that the research fur-

nishes a great mass of data regarding the shape of the sun. The values of

the differences between the diameters, in the sense polar minus equatorial,

are tabulated and given by Ambronn. From these are formed the mean

values of this difference for each year; and from these yearly means, the

mean value for the entire series of observations.

The yearly means as given by Ambronn in Appendix IV, and also on

page 44 of his memoir, contain typographical errors which were later

corrected by the author.'!. The corrected table is as follows:

1 Astronomische Nachrichten, Vol. CLX XI, No. 4086. May, 1906.

398 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Table III.

MEAN OF YxuaRS (P.—E.).

ScHUR AMBRONN. MBEAN. Woea |

YEarR. SSE Wr.

oles eS Me es Oa Hp esate es P.-E.

SOO Ro +0.13 10 +0.12 14 +0.12 +0.13 6

1 lfS48) ean +0.02 17 +0.14 14 +0.08 +0.08 6

1892 . . .| —0.06 12 +0.07 16 0.00 +0.02 7

1893 . . .}| —0.09 10 —0.01 14 —0.06 —0.07 6

SOA Ha icuvediNnt +0.10 11 —0.07 11 +0.02 —0.04 10

rol Sa +0.04 13 +0.03 15 +0.04 +0.03 9

1896 . . .| —0.05 19 —0.01 18 —0.03 —0.03 8

SOTA TNS is +0.02 26 —0.04 21 —0.01 —0.01 13

PEOS irae +0.11 21 +0.07 21 +0.09 +0.08 11

SOO ey tae +0.05 21 —0.03 24 +0.01 —0.01 12

LOCO ayes +0.04 24 +0.01 21 +0.02 +0.02 20

OO MAS aati +0.43 1 +0.06 27 — +0.07 10

OO Zt cite —_— — —0.06 15 —_ —0.06 5

The column “Mean” is from Ambronn; that headed ‘“‘ Weighted Mean”

was formed by assigning weights to the observations of Schur and Ambronn

in conformity with the values of the mean error for each year of a single

observation as given by Ambronn. Upon the assumption that the shape

and size of the sun are constant for each year, Ambronn found, from the

separate observations made during that year, the value of the mean error

of a single observation, and these mean errors are tabulated in Appendix

IV. From these and the number of observations were found by the ordi-

nary formulas the weights assigned to the yearly means.

The observations during the first two years, 1890-91, were made under

instrumental conditions different from those during the rest of the interval.

In order to find definitive results, therefore, Ambronn forms the means of

all the observations, and also means excluding these two years. ‘These

means are given as follows:

ScHurR. AMBRONN, MEAN.

Mean of all observations . .. . . . +0”.028 +0” .022 +0”.025

Mean excepting the years 1890-91 . . . +0”.018 +0”.002 +0”.010

The final mean as thus given by Ambronn shows that the polar diameter

exceeds the equatorial by

+0".025 + 0”.018,

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 399

a quantity which agrees closely with that (07.038) obtained by Auwers

from the transit of Venus observations. The mean errors of the individual

results are given by Ambronn as

ESOT SCHAUER I aE PAN OR eS SNORE MANTA PAA MLN ke Oe Da

BOM AT DTODT, Oh SONU oe ate OU Oa ODA EULA RN PO RA SUE HR nr NORA RN he (DN (ISS

And these are nearly, if not quite, as large as the quantity sought. Ambronn

concludes, therefore, that the deviations are accidental and that the sun is

sensibly a sphere.

In testing this result, Ambronn investigates the effect of the inclination

of the measured diameter on the result to determine whether there was any

tendency on the part of the observer to measure vertical diameters differ-

ently from horizontal.

He could find no such effect; but he calls special attention to the obser-

vations made during the two years 1890 and 1891, which show the polar

diameter to be decidedly the greater, and points out the fact that these

results may be due to physiological causes, for during this interval no pre-

cautions were taken to obviate this difficulty. A prism was attached to

the heliometer in October, 1891, in such a manner that all the diameters of

the sun were measured in the same relative positions as regards the vertical;

and from that date on, the observations are perfectly homogeneous.

Ambronn also investigates the possibility of errors in the constants of

refraction which were used in reducing the observations. In the winter

months the sun was at an average lower altitude at the time of observation

than in the summer months. Hence, if there were any systematic errors

in computing the differential refraction, such errors would be apparent

when the observations are grouped according to the months in which they

were made. When the observations are so grouped, no periodic variation

is shown; and Ambronn concludes, therefore, that the constants and the

methods used in computing the differential refraction are sensibly correct.

2. Variation of the Sun’s Diameter. — Each series of observations is

treated separately. Ambronn first finds the mean value of the sun’s diameter

from all the observations of each series; then, subtracting this mean from

the separate values, he finds the residual for each observation. From these

residuals he finds the value of the mean residual for each year, and tabu-

lates these “‘yearly residuals,’ which thus show the yearly variation in the

diameter.

In the first of these steps, Ambronn was confronted with a difficulty:

the series of observations were not strictly homogeneous. In October, 1891,

a prism was introduced into the instrument in such a manner that the line

joining the centers of the two images could always be brought into the same

400 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

position relative to the eyes of the observer. This was to obviate any possi-

ble physiological influence which might cause the observer to measure the

polar and equatorial diameters differently. An investigation, however,

showed that the prism had a sensible effect upon the measures of all diame-

ters, equatorial as well as polar. The diameters measured with the prism

were all somewhat smaller than those measured without it. As the prism

was used continuously after October, 1891, the series of observations are di-

vided into two periods by this date. ‘The mean results from the observations

in each period are given below, where the various values are expressed in

scale-divisions, one division of the scale being approximately equal to 40”.

Table IV.

WitTHouT PrismM.| NUMBER. WitTH PRIsM. NUMBER.

Schlutamen ule aeshen 47.9919 25 47.9823 159

iAmmbronnine: 4) ante 47.9819 27 47.9745 200

As a result of special measures made by Schur and Ambronn, both with

and without the prism, Ambronn concludes that all observations made

without the prism must be diminished by 0”.4 cr 0.01 scale-division, in

order to make them comparable with those made with the prism.

Correcting all the observations made without the prism by this amount,

taking the general means, and reducing scale to are, Ambronn finally obtains

for the definitive values of the sun’s diameter at distance unity.

Sela ye ME ey ee as ek 0 OA TE ee Ek Ea

PATA EOTET D0 hohe) Se BS nce ea aed, lea ava ccna ahgega te Bs a

From these means the yearly residuals were found, and as given by

Ambronn are tabulated below.

Table V.

YEAR. ScHUR. AMBRONN. MEAN.

1890 Me OY Pee WPT edt —0”.10 —0”.08 —0” 09

1891 Roe iay wie eneo ly LAME a Os [ap +0”.03 —0”.11 —0” 04

1892 dor hi AI GH oe See Like tela +0”.09 —0”".08 0” .00

1893 ALE LAL CP Qetre eT +0”.10 +0”.06 +0”.08

1894 ey IM eee. | Rae rect tc +0”.10 +0”.11 +0”.10

1895 THEY sha ec Be coke te eae —0" 04 +0”.25 +0”.10

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 401

Table V, continued,

YEAR. ScHUR. AMBRONN, MBAN.

1886 5-0 Ot hal OMe DOANE ME 8 —0”.10 +07.12 +0’.01

1897 MMS) Oo clus, Srey HS 5 wae —0”’.06 —0”.12 —0”.09

1898 PE ee i {coed Mae nets +0”’.01 —0’.08 —0’ 04

1899 cn. SALE ta nT +0”.05 —0”.06 0”.00

1900 PMU PAY oo aCe Ps). tae, es 0”.00 +0”.02 +0”.01

1901 5 3h GEh iy ees iieey keen — +0”.03 —

1902 4G BN a Ne ee oe ae ee — +0”.09 —

A simple inspection of these figures shows a certain periodicity. This

is shown in the series of each observer and in the series of means. The

periodic time of these variations is somewhere between six and eight years,

and the amplitude about 0”.1. The large residual (0”.25) for the year 1895

is considered by Ambronn to be due to purely personal or accidental causes.

Ambronn further compares the curves which represent the above series

of residuals with Wolfer’s sun-spot curve for the corresponding years. This

curve, together with the above series of residuals, shows clearly, according

to Ambronn, that there is no relation between the observed variations in

the sun’s diameter and the relative frequency of sun-spots.

In considering these results of Ambronn, we note that he investigates

the possible variation in the average or mean diameter of the sun. The

above residuals and the corresponding points on his curves are found by

taking, in the series under consideration, the mean for each year of all the

observations of both the polar and equatorial diameters. Thus his investi-

gation would show whether there had been any change, periodic or secular,

in the volume of the sun, and not whether there had been any change in

either the polar or the equatorial diameter. Changes in the relative sizes

of the diameters of the sun, or changes in its shape which do not alter its

volume, could not be discovered by the methods used by Ambronn in this

portion of his paper. His conclusions show that, during the entire period

of nearly thirteen years, there was not present any periodic or secular vari-

ation in the sun’s volume larger than that represented by a change of 0”.1

in the mean diameter of that body.

A comparison of the final values of the sun’s diameter as found by Schur

and Ambronn, with that found by Auwers from the transit of Venus obser-

vations, shows the new values to be considerably larger; but this difference

is attributed to instrumental and personal peculiarities. The aperture

of the objective, the color and density of the shade-glass used, — each has

402 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

its effect on the measured diameter. The insertion of a prism in the

Repsold heliometer reduced the apparent diameter by 0”.4. The earlier

observations of Schur and Ambronn, as given by Auwers, were

SS CMU HIM yea bata MOTHS CU VAN SAO Ee SIRT UT AGL AA aU TV

LATCa'l Gy Oye OAL EON REV EEE COnU Oa DAE TM ARNG AEA VATU ANAND EN II DAUM OARA LAND unlit O BIG SF:

But at the time of these observations other observers made the diameter

vary between the limits

1920”.29 and 1918738.

and Auswers found systematic errors depending upon the instrument used.

Part II. PuHotocrapHic MEASURES.

The following investigation of the figure of the sun was suggested by

the number of solar photographs taken by Lewis M. Rutherfurd in his

private observatory, and by him presented to the Observatory of Columbia

University. In a series of investigations of the Rutherfurd star plates,

Jacoby has shown that the plates have suffered no deterioration, and that

they are capable of giving results comparable in accuracy with the best

heliometer determinations. It was hoped, therefore, that the Rutherfurd

photographs of the sun would serve to determine with great precision the

shape of that body, and in 1905 the writer undertook the measurement and

reduction of all the Rutherfurd plates.

After the investigation was well under way and some preliminary results

were obtained, it was decided to enlarge the scope of the investigation so as

to include all available photographs. Unfortunately it was soon found that

the number of suitable photographs is very limited. While several observa-

tories have long series of solar photographs, yet in nearly every case these

were taken with a horizontal telescope and without the necessary precau-

tions to secure an edge sufficiently sharp for measurement. The mirror

of horizontal instruments introduces errors and makes the solar image

unsymmetrical. Only such plates as have been made with an equatorially

mounted objective of relatively long focus can be used, and there are no

long series of such plates.

Direct photographs of the sun’s disk serve to determine the shape of

that body, but cannot well be used to determine its absolute diameter.

Changes in temperature affecting the focal length of the objective cause

variations in the scale of the photographs. In stellar photography the scale

of each plate is determined from measures of known stars whose images

are found on that plate; in solar photography the plates do not contain

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 403

data sufficient to find the scale value. The relative lengths of the various

diameters can, however, be most accurately measured, and the shape, and

variations in the shape, of the disk determined.

RUTHERFURD PLATES.

The Observatory of Columbia University has in its possession a series

of 139 solar photographs taken by Rutherfurd during the years 1860-74.

This series of plates may be divided into two groups; one group of plates

covering the years 1860-66, and a second group taken during the years

1870-74. The plates of the first series were made with a small lens; those

of the second group, with his thirteen-inch photographic objective, which

was completed in 1868. The earlier plates were simple photographs of

the sun without orientation-marks or data of any kind. In 1870 he began

to place orientation-marks on the plates, but even after that date fully halt

of the plates lack this essential. In these four years, Rutherfurd took a

hundred plates, grouped as follows:

1870, Feb. 16—Oct. 14 DAI ia) ORE Todi ARNE Ue Nex a tee Brat aN yh Re OED EER eas

1871, April 17—Aug. 19 AAAS INI AC URL Ore) NGO ROCHRI ED GRR RDULCLAC Oat a eg

1872, Jan. 2—Nov. 27 DNR Ran UDO a ak DN RS VRS Rad NC A HLS) AIL Re a

TETAS IG Usa 7S I A HUI DM 91

BOUIN set Me ich eee ast 00) HEAD NMR UR NLT 0/2) GR ga

Of the sixty-one plates taken in 1870, only four were available for meas-

urement, the remaining plates not having sufficient data to orient them.

These four plates were rejected in the preliminary investigation, but were

afterwards measured, and found to give satisfactory results.

Of the fourteen plates taken in 1871, eight were found to be measurable.

A ninth plate was measured, but the measures were so discordant that it

was rejected. The remaining five plates were either poorly developed or

did not have orientation-marks upon them.

Of the thirteen plates taken in 1872, ten were found to be measurable.

An eleventh plate was discarded after measurement, the separate measures

being very discordant.

Of the twelve plates taken in 1874, only one had on it the full data for

orientation. This was a very poor plate and was discarded after an at-

tempt to measure it.

This left available for measurement a series of twenty-two plates, of

404 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

which four were taken in 1870, eight in the spring and summer of 1871,

and ten in the spring and summer of 1872. The measures were all made

on the Repsold measuring-machine of Columbia University, and all meas-

ures were made in duplicate by Miss Harpham and Miss Davis of the

Observatory computing staff. On each plate twenty-eight points on the

sun’s limb were measured,— seven points at or near each pole, and seven

points at or near each extremity of the equator. In each of these four

groups the separate points were five degrees apart, each group thus covering

an arc of 30°, or 15° on each side of the pole or equator respectively. The

measurement of each point consisted in the determination of its polar co-

ordinates, position angle and distance, as referred to the center of revolution

of the plate in the machine. This center of revolution does not coincide

with the center of the sun’s disk, but the plates can be quite accurately

adjusted in the machine. In no case did the center of revolution differ

from the true center of the disk by more than 0.05 mm. or 1”.2.

The measures were corrected for differential refraction, the formulas

as given by Chauvenet being used. From these corrected measures were

then found the co-ordinates of the center of the sun and the most probable

value of the sun’s radius. The measured co-ordinates were then trans-

ferred from the center of revolution to the center of the sun’s disk as origin;

and thus were found, for each plate, the values of twenty-eight radii of the

sun.

The mean of the fourteen polar radii, as thus found, for each plate, was

taken as the value of the polar radius; and the mean of the fourteen equa-

torial radii, as the value of the equatorial radius for that plate. The dif-

ference between these values of the polar and equatorial radii was then

formed, in the sense polar minus equatorial, and the results for the various

plates are exhibited in the following tables:

Table VI.

1870.

DATE. P.-E, (arc). Wr.

| |

Aug. 18 Fc ite he Pee yor te Ye ve We +0”.49 +0”.28 2.4

Sept. 24 oe PON ches bet cont | Pees omnes —0".12 +0731 2.0

Sept. 28 laa Mal Alan Sit Pinal sch Oy ACP ORY oc" +0”.81 +07.25 3.0

Oct. 5 Ay eR PUR alah: xc) te eRe Md +07.60 +0%.26 2.9

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 405

Table VI, continued,

1871.

DATE. . P.-E. (arc). Wr.

PPCM MM) 5506.5 a ar hwy! 2) haps —0”.63 +0”.36 1.8

Jere. 1G: ” a a eras —0”.18 +07.22 5.6

els Ss O05 ee ec —0”.68 +07.19 6.7

COMME ay i el —0’.67 +07.35 1.6

CM eS Se se yh —0”".72 +0”.30 2.4

LULL) OAR SE RS a —1”.00 +0”.30 2.4

JAR, ED eh Ae +0”.04 +07.21 7.1

ih, 8) 0 mre ere +0”’.36 +0”.20 5.0

1872.

Date. P.-E, (arc). Wr.

IME a Mere ae ee a mal a es +0’.30 +0”.17 10.0

RE yaeLOMme nN ee 5 eee +0’.45 +07.23 Ole

Marva (Me ATG Bie ath een, 4 +0”’.32 +0”.27 2.3

dium: Gy Dea a ie a! +0”.48 +0”.29 2.5

Tae 2 ee eee ee +0’.40 -£0”.27 3.0

ils GW ee es se ae +0"'.77 4-07.33 1.8

SEIS? | L700 cs en ce as +0”’.36 +07.22 5.9

Jehqavie) TO URTV) Reena me ae —0’.21 +0”.14 14.3

JN UPD “ehh EE EU A +07.32 +07.33 2.0

SIs AL <eS VS A CU Ee ee +0”.49 +0”.30 220

In the above tables the first column gives the date on which the plate

was taken; the second and third columns give the difference between the

polar and equatorial radii in arc, together with the mean error of this result

as determined from the separate measures; the third and last column gives

the relative weights of the different plates as determined from their mean

errors. ‘The scale value differed for each plate, and was determined by

assuming that the value of the mean radius of the sun at distance unity is

equal to 961”. Approximately one division of the scale is equal to 24”.6

of are.

The different plates in each year give quite consistent results, but the

406 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

mean results for the different years differ radically. The plates in 1871

show the equatorial radius to exceed the polar by some 0”.3; while the

plates of 1870 and 1872, on the other hand, show the polar radius to be

the greater by some 0”.2. Forming the mean by weights of the results

obtained from the plates in the different years, we see that the yearly means

are as follows:

ETO. Be pts 22 iC UMA ERG PMU HOSES 0 eS

ASAP Tuby LO oni \ MN MNS NCAT GUI ONG CAR an

TR Z2 Diaby Se MM UANOVMAD EHR CODED ANN EU GRD CO OH ANG 1 ee

These measures thus seem to indicate a change in the relative sizes

of the polar and equatorial radii of the sun. During the interval 1871-72,

the polar radius was increasing relatively to the equatorial, and by 1872

was decidedly the greater. These changes in the shape of the sun are

apparently real changes, and can hardly be accounted for in any other way.

The plates were all taken with the same instrument and under the same

conditions, and in corresponding seasons of the year. They were nearly

all taken in the morning hours and at approximately the same distance

from the meridian. So far as can be determined from the data at hand,

there is no instrumental explanation for the difference between the results

in the different years.

The conclusion from this investigation is, that during this period, 1870-

72, there was a real change in the shape of the sun; the equatorial diameter

first increasing and then shrinking relatively to the polar diameter.

Forming the mean by weights of the entire series, it is found that dur-

ing the years 1870-72 the polar radius exceeded the equatorial by

P.—-E.= —0’.06.

NORTHFIELD PLATES.

Under the direction of Professor W. W. Payne, Dr. H. C. Wilson has

taken a long series of solar photographs at Northfield, Minn. Only a few

of these photographs are available for measurement. Dr. Wilson selected

and sent to Columbia University for measurement nine plates, which were

taken during the years 1893 and 1894, all of which were well oriented and

had on them the necessary data for measurement and reduction.

These nine plates were measured in the same manner as were the Ruther-

furd plates, with the following results:

“OS

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 407

Table VIL.

1893.

DATE. P.-E. (ARc). Wr.

UTES. eh RUA a ea aa manne Vn ee —1”.10 +0” .24 2.8

SE) 2 a ee aR —0)” 94 +0”.21 Sef

“ETRE LDN AS NS Re —0".72 +07.18 5.9

SEP Ee aaa —1” 60 +0”.25 2.5

STON Fy! 20.) AAA —0)”.76 +0” .33 1.5

= Bale Sr US ee a nee —0Q”.70 +0”.30 1.8

Sate Zee} G0 AN EAE ee —OQ” 4] +0”.29 1.9

1894.

DaTrE. P.-E. (ARc). Wr.

July 210 Nyse eT Ney tal Oat RLS nas rae NER —0".72 +0” .24 33.8)

July. 17 SNC LON RRS DOR EER een Rea +0’ 36 +07.31 3.1

Forming the mean by weights of the entire series, it is seen that, during

the years 1893-94, the equatorial radius was the greater, exceeding the

polar by

P.—E.= —0”.72.

YERKES PLATES — THE PHOTO-HELIOMETER.

In the latter part of 1896 a six-inch lens of forty feet focal length was

mounted on the tube of the forty-inch Yerkes telescope. This lens was

made by Brashear and was specially designed and corrected for photo-

graphic work. With it a long series of experiments were carried out and

many photographs taken. These experiments were undertaken with the

view of determining the best methods of applying photography to the de-

termination of the size and shape of the sun. While the photographs

obtained can only be regarded as experimental, yet they lead to definite

conclusions as to the value of this method and as to its possibilities.

This investigation of photographic methods led to experiments with a

photographic heliometer, and early in 1907 the six-inch was dismounted

and a pair of two-inch photographically corrected lenses of twenty-five feet

focal length were mounted side by side in the same cell, so as to give over-

lapping images of the sun. The cell was arranged so as to revolve about

the collimation axis in a manner similar to the cell of a heliometer. Thus

408 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

the line joining the centers of the two lenses could readily be placed parallel

to the equatorial or to the polar diameter of the sun. The apparatus was

attached to the great forty-inch Yerkes telescope and a series of photographs

taken by Mr. Fox. On each day a set of two photographs was taken, one

of the polar and one of the equatorial diameters. As a rule these two

exposures were made within three or four minutes of each other.

On each photograph the length of the chord common to the two images

is a measure of the radius passing through the extremity of the chord. ‘This

chord furnishes an accurate measure of the radius, for slight changes in

the radius produce large changes in the chord. A given change, Ar, in the

radius will produce a change, Ad, in chord approximately equal to

BEY) ¢

Ad=,Ar

where r and d are the respective lengths of the radius and the chord. H,

therefore, the chord be one-third the radius, then a change of only 0”.3 in

the radius will produce a change of 1” in the chord. As the scale of the

photographs is such that one millimeter is approximately equal to 27’,

changes of 0”.10 in the radius would under these circumstances produce

changes of 0.01 mm. in the chord; and on good photographs quantities of

this size can be readily measured.

On the test photographs made at Yerkes, the image at distance unity

was 71 mm. in diameter and the chord 32 mm. long. When, therefore,

the line joining the centers of the lenses was parallel to the equator of the

sun, the radii passing through the extremities of the chord were inclined

26° to the equator; and similarly, in the reversed position of the objective,

the measured radii made angles of 26° with the axis of the sun. In other

words, the radii as measured on the equatorial and polar plates cut the

surface of the sun in latitudes 26° and 64° respectively. The results re-

duced to distance unity for these test plates are shown below.

Table VIII.

Date. | pea eae Fer

OctsclS 5a Cs Aa ee ee ey ee 35.538 +033 +0”’.89 —0” 81

Oat 2, Ab Ae eee eee oe 35.469 —036 —0" .97 —1”.16

OCH I22 ee Cree Oe CA ED 35.497 —008 —O” 22 —1" .43

Ot 423 oes Sea Caen) See 35.536 +031 +0”.84 —1”.08

NOVI Si sty Phe Ada ee eee ae 35.469 —036 —0" .97 —0” .62

INO Ware ie kt cohen Dette rat eae 35.020 +016 +0" .43 —0" 57

Means 0.5! st) aie oo) eye SEBO «ee Ae ee

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 409

These results are fairly accordant, and indicate that at this time the

radius passing through latitude 26° exceeded that passing through latitude

64° by nearly one second of arc. The plates, however, were few in number;

but they show, at least, the value of the method, and confirm to some slight

degree the non-spherical shape of the sun.

The photographic tests made at the Yerkes Observatory established

the value of the photographic method and of the photo-heliometer; but

they showed conclusively that, in order to obtain satisfactory plates, two

essentials must be observed.

1. The photographic lens must be carried on a separate and specially

designed equatorial mounting, so constructed that the shutter is independent

of the mounting. If attached to the mounting, the shutter will almost

invariably cause jars and consequent distortions of the image.

2. Wet plates should be used. On the modern rapid dry plates the

edges of the image are not sufficiently sharp for accurate measurement.

Part III. Discussion oF OBSERVATIONS AND RESULTS.

THE FIGURE OF THE SUN.

A New TasuLaTION OF THE GERMAN HELIOMETER Measures. — In

the investigation of the general subject of the figure and the possible varia-

tions in the size and shape of the sun, the writer was led to a re-discussion,

or rather to a re-tabulation, of the results obtained by Auwers from the

transit of Venus observations.

In forming his means from which the heretofore given result was obtained,

Auwers kept together all observations made with a single instrument, and

thus observations of different years were grouped together. As arranged

by Auwers, these observations do not afford any indication of a change of

the relative diameters with the time. In order to investigate this point, I

re-arranged the series of observations as given by Auwers, arranging them

in order of the time without regard to the observer or the instrument. When

thus arranged, the observations fall into two series: one extending from

September, 1873, to January, 1875; the other, from May, 1880, to June,

1883. There is an isolated observation in July, 1877, another isolated one

in March, 1884, and two short series in the latter part of 1884 and the be-

ginning of 1885.

There is an uncertainty of some days in assigning a date to each de-

termination of the ratio of the solar diameters; for the value of the difference

between the polar and equatorial diameters (P.—E.), as given by Auwers for

each observer, is found by him as the mean result of a number of observa-

tions, extending in many instances over a period of a month or more. In

very few cases did an observer measure the polar and equatorial diameters

410 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

on the same day, nor is the number of polar and equatorial diameters the

same in any series. In reducing the observations of any one observer,

Auwers took the mean of all diameters measured within 15° of the poles,

and called such mean the polar diameter. He similarly took the mean of

all diameters measured within 15° of the equator, and called such mean

the equatorial diameter. ‘The mean dates to which these mean diameters

belong are not given by Auwers. For example, the observations made by

Adolph in Strassburg were all made on fifteen days between Sept. 2 and

Sept. 25, 1873. In this series Adolph made in all some fifty-seven determi-

nations of the sun’s diameter; of which fifty-seven measures ten fall within

the 15° limit of the pole, and nine within the corresponding limit of the

equator. ‘The polar measures were made on Sept. 8, 14, 18 and 21; the

equatorial measures, on Sept. 18, 20, 21, 23 and 25. The remaining thirty-

eight observations of this series were not utilized by Auwers in this investi-

gation.

As a result of these nineteen measures by Adolph, Auwers finds the

value for the ratio between the polar and equatorial diameters — 07.16,

in the sense polar minus equatorial; and this value, I have assumed, is the

value for Sept. 18, the mean date of the observations. Such an assumption

is, of course, more or less approximate, but it gives a date sufficiently close

for the purpose in hand.

SERIES OF 1873-75. — In the first series of observations, extending from

1873 to 1875, there are in all thirteen such sets of observations. These are

tabulated below, being arranged according to the mean dates of the observa-

tions, the weights being those assigned by Auwers.

Table IX.

DATE. OBSERVER. P.-E. WHIGHT

1875; DEBE. MLS es Gua. Adolph —0”.16 0.5

1S 7S Sept. oO ee sh Borgen +0”.03 0.5

UST Och 2Oe eh erates Valentiner —0”.21 0.5

ibsvisyel Dred) alse UE a © Wittstein +07.05 1.0

SABE i vA ines Meine Weinek +0”.15 0.8

S74, Marchols inet) vs (ys Schur +0”.09 0.2

TS (4A eros sees ey hae Adolph —0” 32 0.2

16/4, May Darren ney es Schur +0”.15 1.0

EST 45 (Deg AG vie ee the Adolph +0”.16 ie

ESTA Dees C28 8 is Le Borgen +0”.21 0.1

LSE TICE 5 20h. ee eh: Valentiner +0”.23 0.2

“DOG ( A ES aR HO Be PE Schur +0”.44 0.4

CSIC ED MLR a MN lh Seeliger +0".13 0.2

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 411

While the separate determinations vary, a simple inspection of the

above table shows that there was a progressive change in the difference

between the polar and equatorial diameters. In the earlier measures the

equatorial diameter was slightly the greater; in the later measures the

polar diameter was decidedly the larger. This is shown not only by the

average result, but by the measures of each observer. Adolph, Borgen,

Valentiner and Schur made observations in the fall of 1873 and the spring

of 1874; again, these same observers made other series of observations in

the latter part of 1874 and in January, 1875. In the case of each of these

four observers, the difference, P.—-E., is greater in the latter series. These

results are shown in the following table:

OBSERVER. 1873-74. 1874-75.

LOTTE ROME SSNS eats a Pa —0” 20 +0”.16

LD TES, 1/1) SSN AAG SG Raed hes +0”.03 +0”.21

Rialeniinensn scree wh Se Ural Mey ls —0”" 21 +0” 23

Schur Elli | CNS Go Oa Rete, | RIE Meer +0”7.14 +0” 44

Again, divide the entire series of observations into three groups, placing

in the first group all the observations made in 1873, in the second group

those made in the spring of 1874, and in the third group those made in De-

cember, 1874, and in January, 1875. Give to each observer the weight

assigned by Auwers, and form the weighted mean of each of the three groups.

The observations then fall into the following order:

MEAN DaTE. P.-E. WEIGHT.

Mes MOCTODELI DT | Siieeeien leh) coe Alek lieth cae en tae —0’.06 ne

1874, March MEEHAN Sin eee ree RAY BSN de +0”.10 Die,

NSA DECEMDELY yen cs) ols iske eters +0”.21 2.6

And these means show the same progressive change as do the observations

of the separate observers.

SreriEs oF 1880-85.— In this series there are in all thirty-two sets of

observations, of which number, however, twenty-three were made in 1882.

These are tabulated in Table X, being arranged according to the date of

observation in a manner entirely similar to the former table for 1873-75.

412 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Table X.

DATE. OBSERVER. P.-E. WEIGHT.

1880, May 9. Ambronn +0”.19 1.1

1880, July 15. Ambronn +0”.08 4.0

1881, Sept. 30. Franz —0” 51 0.3

1881, Nov. 10 . Schur +0” .22 2.8

1882, March 14 . Kobold +0”.28 0.5

1882, March 25 . Peter +0”.06 5.0

1882, March 28 . Miller +0’.37 0.5

1882, April 4. Kobold —0”.05 2.8

1882, April 6. Marcuse +0”.07 0.7

1882, April 15 . Kiistner .00 0.4

1882, April 15 . Kempf +0”.09 ILS?

1882, May 3. Deichmiiller —0” 04 4.0

1882, May 15. Hartwig +0”.09 6.2

1882, May 15. Schur +0”.13 4.0

1882, May 22. Franz +0”.06 0.5

1882, June 4. Wislicenus +0” .02 4.0

1882, July 2. Bauschinger —0”.05 ie?

1882, Nov. 20 . Franz —0" 06 1.0

1882, Nov. 25 . Kiistner +0”.13 i:

LSS2INOVaZoNe Kobold —0” 01 127,

1882, Nov. 30 . Deichmiller —0” 30 0.1

1882, Nov. 30. Miller —0”.34 0.2

1882, Nov. 30. Auwers —0’.01 Sv

1882, Dec. 2 Wislicenus —0”" 28 0.3

1882, Dec. 4 Peter +0”.15 0.5

tSS2 Dec 5). Kempf +0”.32 0.6

1882" Dee. 75: Hartwig +0”.30 0.7

1883, May 15 Wislicenus —O" 21 6.2

1883, June 4. Hartwig —0”.02 2.8

1884, March 17 . Marcuse +0”.28 0.3

ie dein, ee Kobold +0”.14 0.3

18S sans) 16.4 Battermann —O” 48 0.3

An inspection of these results will again show a change in the difference

between the polar and equatorial diameters. This change is not at once

apparent, for the relative weights of the separate determinations in this

series differ greatly, the largest being 6.2, the smallest 0.1. Some of the

determinations of small weight differ considerably from adjacent and better

observations, and these poor values tend to conceal the progressive change

in the ratio between the diameters. This change, however, is clearly

brought out when the observations are divided into groups and the weighted

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 413

means of each group formed. When this is done, we find that the observa-

tions arrange themselves as in the following table:

DaTE. P.-E. WEIGHT.

SSO MO RIME Bei) ss), hl dey Apap SAE eM) Vay +0”.10 yal

PSSM OCLODED 0) Yt ome Stee el ates be +0”.11 BL

(Slob, IEC 0 a ae ae a A ae eS +0”.06 11.6

NSSOMIINGRMRE tS we Stet i santos ors +0”.05 20.4

1SS2eNovember™ 0 ck Nee ek +0”.05 8.1

SSS). KAS A a aS NTA Pie S| —0".15 9.0

HSS Aap Mar Ciara cg.) taal Ae nN +0”.28 0.3

MSS om amMATVe: Mos... e. iy Cy ech peaigas beth fe =— (eg, 0.6

We thus see that during the interval from 1881 to 1883 there is a pro-

gressive change; the equatorial diameter apparently growing longer in

relation to the polar diameter. While the division of the observations of

the year 1882 into three groups is more or less arbitrary, yet, no matter how

these observations had been grouped, the progressive character of the

change would have been apparent. The mean of all the determinations

for the year 1882 is + 0”.05 with a weight of 40.1.

TaBULATION OF ReEsuLtTs.— Collecting the results of the various

determinations into a single table, we have the following data from which

to determine the shape of the sun. In this table the measures are all reduced

to the same form, and give the excess in arc of the polar radius over the

equatorial. For convenience of comparison the series of Auwers and

Ambronn are separated into groups, the observations of various years or

series of years being collected together.

Table XI.

MERIDIAN OBSERVATIONS.

Date. Observer. P.-E.

LSOORanA a weh een Von Tin G@enaty si Vd saben ee wore ERS mL aN £0 ap STA

TROT ase agg (es el ai Pak] BST T oY) oT A Ran ee PO Barren LU Da he enc ADO ALA ArigeMliney Brak Py eee 0/419"

TUS AY, i cc DURn ISTE C{C) 0 ERE RAI Wi lyad ai Lid bn AGN Rae RUT A Vig Lay oe 2/0)

USS Smee ee eae) VAUEOVETE: opis) ls Dekel PAE te eA ea ea eh Pel yt ny Un psaee (OD

HELIOMETER OBSERVATIONS.

Date. Observer. Series P.-E,

PSO en’. (0s CAitwers 1873-75 +0”.05

SOM uy |e, ey, Auwers 1880-82 OOS: Es ue enkee Pat hee OO1G

19h Ss Auwers 1883-8500! 0700s)

1G05e eee ee a) toe Amibronn 1890-91 +0”.05

1LOO5wene eet.) Amibronn 1893-94 —r02| +0”.013

LGOS) Sues) le). Amibronn 1894-00 +0”.01

414 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Conc.usions. — While very little weight can be attached to the meridian

observations, yet every series shows a measurable departure from the spheri-

cal form. ‘The observations of the Von Lindenau series were afterwards

included in the more complete and thorough discussion of Auwers, who

showed that the great difference, 5”, found by Lindenau was not warranted

by the observations. Meridian observations are unsuitable for the investi-

gation, and if there be any departure of the sun from sphericity, it is below

the limit of such measures.

The heliometer measures confirm the result that the departure from

sphericity is extremely small, but they hardly warrant the assumption that

the sun is a sphere. Auwers, Ambronn, Seeliger and Wellmann have

shown that the measured diameters depend upon the color and thickness

of the shade-glasses used in the observations; Auwers found instrumental

peculiarities, different instruments giving different results; and Ambronn

found that the introduction of a reflecting prism diminished the measured

diameter by 0”.4. The series of observations used by Auwers were ex-

tremely heterogeneous, twenty-three observers using five heliometers. The

individual series were short, extending over periods of a few months

only. The series of Ambronn, on the other hand, are perfectly homo-

geneous, and they furnish the very best evidence yet obtained. They

indicate that the departure of the sun from spherical form is extremely

minute, and at the very limit of possible measurement by these means.

Considering this series by itself, if no weight be placed upon possible varia-

tions in the solar diameter, then the conclusion must be that the sun is

sensibly a sphere.

Unfortunately for a thorough test of the photographic method, no long

series of plates were available. While several observatories have for many

years photographed the sun on each clear day, yet these photographs are

not suitable for the present investigation." They were mostly made with

horizontal instruments and no attention paid to sharpness of edge. The

mirror of such instruments introduces errors and makes the image unsym-

metrical. Only such plates as have been made with an equatorially mounted

objective of relatively long focus can be used, and there are no long series

of such plates. The early plates of Rutherfurd give quite consistent results,

the general mean of all the plates agreeing closely with that of Auwers as

found from the heliometer measures in the same years. ‘These plates of

Rutherfurd were made on collodion films and give the sharpest and best

images of any plates measured.

1 This applies to American observatories. The photographs taken at the Royal Observa-

tory at Greenwich are probably well adapted for this investigation.

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 415

In 1893-94 the plates by Wilson give a result having the same sign as

Ambronn’s mean for these same years. The photographic result, however,

is very much larger. The photo-heliometer promises to give accurate

results; and a forty-foot instrument of this character should finally decide

the question as to the shape of the sun.

The only conclusion that can safely be drawn from the conflicting data

is, that the exact shape of the sun is not known with certainty. On the

average, it approximates very closely to a sphere; the difference between

the equatorial and polar radii, if such difference exists, being probably not

more than 0”.25. The heliometer measures show marked variations in

the different years, and a part of the conflict in the results may be due to

actual variations in the shape and size of the sun.

VARIABILITY OF THE SUN’S DIAMETER.

The following table exhibits the results of the various investigations

mentioned in the first part of this paper.

Table XII.

MERIDIAN OBSERVATIONS.

1809 Lindenau. . . . . . Periodic variations.

1809 Lindenau. . . . . . Re-discussed 1889 by Auwers — no variations.

1871 Secchi. . . . . . . Varies inversely with the number of sun-spots.

1871 Secchi. . . . . . . Re-discussed 1885 by Auwers—no variations.

1874 Newcomb & Holden . . No long-term variation.

1895 Auwers . . . . . . Ist discussion — varies with number of sun-spots.

1895 Auwers . . . . . . 2d discussion — observed variation due to variable

personal equations.

HELIOMETER OBSERVATIONS.

1905 Ambronn. . . . . . Periodic variation of 0”.1, but no relation to sun-

spot period.

These investigations dealt with possible variations in either the equa-

torial or polar diameter, as in Auwers’ work, or in the average or mean

diameter, as in Ambronn’s paper. But the state of the atmosphere, the

sharpness of the image, the color of the shade-glass used, —all these

affect the measured diameter, and introduce accidental and semi-periodic

errors. Any actual variations in the diameter will, therefore, be masked by

these errors of observation, and correspondingly difficult to determine. On

the other hand, if there be a variation in the sun’s diameter, it is improbable

that such variation affects both the polar and equatorial diameters in the

same way. The measured differences between the two diameters is thus

more likely to show the presence of a variation than will the direct measures

416 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

of either diameter by itself. Again, when both diameters are measured

on the same day, both are affected by the errors due to atmospheric condi-

tions and to instrumental peculiarities. Measures of the differences of the

diameters are, therefore, to a large extent, free from the troubles which

mark the measures of each diameter itself, and such measures furnish the

best test for possible variations in the sun.

For such an investigation the observations of Schur and Ambronn

provide material, for on each day of observation during twelve years, they

measured both equatorial and polar diameters. The transit of Venus

heliometer measures, as reduced by Auwers, are not so satisfactory; for

the polar and equatorial measures were not made on the same days. In

each series used by Auwers, the measures of the respective diameters were

scattered irregularly, only a few days, however, separating the individual

measures; and the mean results should be more free from the masking

errors due to atmospheric conditions than simple determinations of either

diameter. Such measures should be free from instrumental peculiarities

and the effects of different colored shade-glasses.

FiuctuatTions HavING THE SAME PERIOD AS THE SuN-spots. — The

writer proposes to investigate possible variations in the sun, using the differ-

ence of diameters (polar-equatorial) as given in the works of Auwers and

Ambronn. ‘The method of equations of condition as elaborated by New-

comb will be used; and for the purpose of forming such equations it will be

assumed that the difference between the diameters (P.—E.) fluctuates har-

monically in a period of 11.13 years. This is the mean sun-spot period

as determined by Newcomb, and if there be any variation in the shape of

the sun, it is just as likely to follow this rigorous period as to follow any

arbitrary system of numbers based upon the actual number and size of

spots visible at a given time.

This assumption may be represented by an equation of the form

P-E=p cos (ut +C)+z

where is so taken that the angle #t + C shall increase by 360° in the sun-

spot period of 11.13 years. When the year is the unit of time, this gives

w= 32°25,

The constant C determines the phase at the epoch from which it is measured.

This epoch is arbitrary, and in the present investigation will be taken as

1889.12, corresponding to a sun-spot minimum.

Expanding the cosine term, the above expression can be put into the

form

n=xcospu#t+y sin uwt+z

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 417

where

x=p cos C

y=—>p sin C

n=P-E.

If, now, we write

a=cos pt

b=sin pt

the equation of condition becomes finally

ax+by+z=n.

The yearly values of the quantity P.-E. are taken from. the results of

Auwers and Ambronn as given in the previous tables. The values of the

coéfficients a and b can be readily computed for each year from the corre-

sponding value of ». The resulting equations of condition are given in

the following table:

Table XIII.

Date. | OBSERVER. | ae db. n.

US Octover. 24s (5. «ay ) Auewers —0.7 —0.7 —0”.06

me accn sts) se is te Aaweérs —0.5 —0.8 +0”.10

USgopdamuary.. 8 ee 2) hy. Sail Aurwers —0:1 —1.0 +0".21

1880, June Epon ateie we \iet eed oc aihy CAUVers +0.1 +1.0 +0”.10

PsetnOctober = .\ho- . = . |.) Auwers —0.5 +0.8 = Oval

Tye de ioe ee ed eo Aer —0.8 +0.6 +0”.05

SSS MUUMeI MEO UC eve eb ay | Aniwers —1.0 0 —O0".15

HSSo January | 5... « . »| Auwers —0.6 —0.8 O17

TOO vere ee ey te aos )) Ambroan +0.7 +0.7 +0” .12

HOS aya) ef) 2. <|)) Amibronn +0.2 +1.0 +0”.08

1so2;Jamary. 2. = . . « «| Ambronn —0.3 +0.9 0”.00

MSOs Ubyar ep tts ) Gh a ea), 2) Ambronn —0.8 +0.6 —0’ 06

TSOA SUN le Oa! ys fo: ser) Ammbronnm —1.0 +0.1 +0”.02

POONER oo fol sits, vin: eat) Ambronn —0:9 —0.4 +0”.04

PSobwemiyeere ee ke) et Se Am bronn: —0.5 —0.9 —0”.03

ESOT NOUR RE A (es kk fe a +o |) Abronn 0 —1.0 —0”.01

ESUey > 2 jk. |.) ee 1 gAmbronn +0.5 —0.8 +0”.09

NGO mote sh ce). jo be ys. eAmmbronn +0.9 —0.4 +0".01

OO Ny ete! sy. os ayerd jon ef vat) Ss | Ambronn +1.0 +0.1 +0”.02

OO MEEVEE eo). AS) ae oe Ve cea .e. |) eA brenn +0.8 +0.7 +0”.06

MOO UY ee cs 3) 6 oy ee || Abronn +0.3 +1.0 —0”.06

Three least square solutions were made, the first including the Auwers

series 1873-85; the second, the Ambronn series, 1890-1902, and the third,

418 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

the entire series of heliometer measures from 1873 to 1902. ‘The results of

these three solutions are shown below:

SERIES. i: y. Z.

TIS EAC A PaO eT AIOE GON REDO ROS AMAR cE lS. te 1a +07.015 +0”.156

110 112 oa a a NHS RAD MING UROR CDN eC ua ba) +0”.001 +0”.019

15s = 1PM DONA NSP Sein 8 HDI DY No sd 2 fe +0” .006 +0”.029

The probable error for x in the whole series is + 0”.021. Thus the value

of x as found from the equations is slightly more than twice its probable

error. Moreover, in each series the three quantities come out with the

same sign and approximately of the same relative values. Reducing the

results to monomials, we have finally for the three determinations

P.-E.=+0".256 cos (ut-4°)+0”.156 series of 1873-85.

= +0”.032 cos (ut-2°)+07.019 series of 1890-02.

=+0”.049 cos (ut-6°)+0”.029 series of 1873-02.

These results were obtained by assuming a harmonic variation having

a period of 11.13 years. They show that the phases of such a variation co-

incide to within one-fifth of a year with the phases of the sun-spot fluctua-

tions; that, at times corresponding to minimum of sun-spottedness, the

polar diameter is relatively larger; that, at times of maximun sun-spotted-

ness, the equatorial diameter is relatively larger.

The amplitude of the variation is extremely small, but its reality would

seem to be established. The present investigation at least renders the

existence of such periodic fluctuations in the shape of the sun more probable

than their non-existence.

SEARCH FoR SHORT-TERM PeERIopIC Variations. — If the equator of

the sun were of permanent elliptic shape, then we should have a periodic

variation in the observed differences between the polar and equatorial

diameters, and the period of this variation would be equal to the sun’s

synodic rotation. While it is extremely improbable that any such perma-

nent deformation exists, yet semi-permanent deformations may readily

occur. The sun-spots are local phenomena; and when large spots exist

on one portion of the surface, the equator may be deformed in such regions,

and such deformation may persist during many rotations of the sun.

Unfortunately for investigating the question of the existence or non-

existence of fluctuations in the measured shape of the sun, corresponding

to possible deformations of the equator, the sun’s synodic rotation is not a

well defined constant. Different portions of the surface rotate in different

periods. According to the latest spectroscopic researches, the equatorial

regions rotate in 24.46 days, and regions in latitude 80°, in 30.56 days.

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 419

The corresponding synodic periods are 26.92 and 33.35 days respectively.

Sun-spot observations give 27.25 days for the synodic period. This un-

certainty in the period prevents us from using the method of equations of

condition, similar to that used in investigating the fluctuations corresponding

in period to the sun-spot cycle. But Newcomb* has lately developed a

method, which he calls the ‘method of time-correlation,’ by which the

fluctuations in any measured quantity can be investigated and the existence

of or tendency towards periodic variations detected. ‘This method may be

briefly outlined as follows.

Suppose we have a series of values of a measured quantity for equi-

distant intervals of time,

t,, 26, ob, ete:

and let

CRSA EL (1 UY WPA Sa ioe ee ey

be the departures of these values from the general mean. Now multiply

each one of these residuals in turn by the first residual, a), so that we have

the products

EET NC ers nti ec ek en a Re Ne JEL: ere

If these residuals be purely periodic, having for a period some multiple of

t greater than 2, then these products will fall into a rhythmical series. The

first product and the product corresponding to the end of the period will

both be positive; the intermediate products, positive or negative. If we

form a similar series of products by multiplying the second and each suc-

ceeding one by the second residual, then these products will again fall into

a similar rhythmical series. Continuing the process we should have the

following:

Andy 2 BA (EIAW NDNA OS YS he

2124 a2, PO ROE DELON AM NVR DRA GSR OS

PC HON INGE Te aOR: GROG og ST Le

| | | |

Sums [a a,] [a,a,] [aa] [aa4]

If, now, the period in which the residuals repeat be 4t, then the first

and fifth products will in every series be positive, and therefore the sums

of these products, [a,a,] and [a,a,J, will be positive. The intermediate

1 A Search for Fluctuations in the Sun’s Thermal Radiation through their Influence on

Terrestrial Temperature (American Phil. Society, N. S., Vol. XXI, Part V).

420 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

sums will be positive or negative and the whole series of sums will form a

rhythmical curve.

Even if the purely accidental errors of the observations be so large as to

mask completely the periodic character of the residuals, yet the effects of

these errors will be largely eliminated in forming the products and taking

the sums, and the final sums wil! form a rhythmical curve. Instead of

using these sums directly, Newcomb finds the ratio of each sum to the first,

[a, ay], and calls these successive ratios X,, X,, Xs, etc., so that

we [a,a i]

~ [aaa]

where 1 = 1, 2, 3, etc.

Now if the observations be periodic, or if there be a tendency toward a

rhythmical deviation whose period is approximately a multiple of t, then

such period or tendency will be shown by an increasing value of x at the

time corresponding most nearly to the completion of the period. If there

be no tendency toward any period between 2t and nt, then the series of x’s

should converge toward zero.

This method was used in an investigation of the observations of the

difference between the polar and equatorial diameters of the sun as made

by Schur and Ambronn during the years 1892-1902. As has been noted,

the general mean of all of Schur’s observations made during the period was

+ 0”.018, while that of Ambronn was only + 07.002. In the case of Schur,

therefore, the residuals found by subtracting this mean (+ 0”.02) from

each observation were used instead of the observations themselves. In

the case of Ambronn, the mean being so nearly zero, the observations were

used directly. The whole series of observations was then divided into

consecutive periods of seven days, and the mean residual for each period

found. In all there were 654 such seven-day periods, out of which number

seventy-one periods only contained observations by both observers. In

eighteen periods, Schur had two or more observations, and in six periods

Ambronn had two observations.

The series is disconnected; there are many periods in which no observa-

tions were made, and these periods are scattered irregularly throughout

the series. The longest period in which consecutive observations were

made was begun in May, 1899, when observations were made in eleven

successive seven-day periods. In the entire series there are found only nine

cases in which observations were made on six or more consecutive seven-day

periods and which therefore could be used in the present investigation.

In addition to these nine, two other sets were utilized, in one of which

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 421

observations were made on thirty-nine weeks with but three or four breaks

of single weeks; in the other set, observations were made on nineteen weeks

with but three breaks.

To illustrate the method by which the periodicity was investigated, the

tabulation for the longest series of consecutive observations is given in full.

The first column gives the date of beginning of each of the seven-day

periods into which the observations were divided. The second column gives

the mean residual for the period as taken from Appendix IV of Ambronn’s

work. In the first period there were two observations by Schur and one

by Ambronn; and the mean of the three, after subtracting + 0”.02 from

each of Schur’s, is —0”’.11. The remaining columns in the table give

the successive products formed by multiplying a, into the successive resid-

uals. ‘The products of the first ay (— 0.11) by itself and the following five

residuals are found in the first horizontal line.

Table XIV.

DATE. | 20 | ao0a0 | aoa | Apa | aoag | aga4 | aoa5

1899, May, 29 | —0.11 | +0.0121 | +0.0209 | —0.0011 | +0.0066 | +. 0.0088 | —0.0341

1899, June, 5|—0.19} +0.0361 | —0.0019 | +0.0114) +0.0152 | —0.0589| 0.0000

1899, June, 12| +0.01 | +0.0001 | —0.0006 | —0.0008 | +0.0031} 0.0000] +0.0003

1899, June, 19 | —0.06 | +0.0036 | +0.0048 | —0.0186} 0.0000 | —0.0018 | +0.0012

1899, June, 26 | —0.08 | +0.0064 | —0.0248| 0.0000 | —0.0024 | +0.0016 | —0.0328

1899, July, 3] +0.31} +0.0961| 0.0000} +0.0093 | —0.0062 | +0.1271 | +0.0465

1899, July, 10; 0.00; 0.0000; 0.0000) 0.0000} 0.0000; 0.0000

1899, July, 17| +0.03 | +0.0009 | —0.0006 | +0.0123 |} +0.0045

1899, July, 24 | —0.02| +0.0004 | —0.0082 | —0.0030

1899, July, 31} +0.41) +0.1681 | +0.0615

1899, Aug. 7) +0.15| +0.0225

Sums +0.3463 +0.0511 +0.0095 +0.0208 +0.0768 —0.0189

X; +0.1476 +0.0274 +0.0601 +0.2218 —0.0546

Each column of the table is summed up and the bottom line gives the

ceefficients of correlation x,, found by dividing the footings of the last five

columns by the sum of the ay a,'s.

The values of x thus found are distinctly periodic. There is a marked

increase in the third and fourth values, and this indicates a tendency towards

a period of approximately twenty-eight days. ‘The series, however, is too

short for any definite conclusion, and considered by itself this series would

have but little weight in testing the actuality of this apparent periodicity.

422 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The ten other series of observations were each tabulated and investigated

for periodicity in the same manner. It does not seem necessary, however,

to give the individual residuals and products in detail. But the following

table gives the footing for each column of products in the different series,

and shows the date of beginning and the number of seven-day periods in

each.

Table XV.

DATE. | ¥o. Apap | aoa | apde | aoa3 | aga4 | aoas

1891, Feb. 16 7 | +0.3262} +0.0812| +.0.0602| + 0.0887 | —0.0040 | —0.0174

1892, March 7 6 | +0.1255| +0.0347 | +0.0132| +0.0097 | —0.0343 | —0.0248

1895, April 29 6 | +0.0563 | +0.0114 | —0.0181 | —0.0079 | —0.0026 | —0.0105

1896, April 27 6 | +0.7938 | +0.0390 | +0.1749| +0.2698 | —0.0908 | +0.0040

1897, April 19} 10 | +0.3557 | —0.0352 | —0.0393 | —0.0547 | +0.0293 | —0.1033

1897, April 19] 37* | +1.5752 | —0.2549 | —0.2903 | —0.0217 | +0.2213 | —0.1859

1899, Jan. 23 9 | +0.3446| +0.1257 | +0.1269 | —0.0255 | —0.0275 | —0.0801

1899, May 29} 11 | +0.3463] +0.0511] +0.0095| +0.0208 | +0.0768 | —0.0189

1900, Feb. 5] 19* | +0.2688] +0.0063 | —0.1188 | +0.0543 | +0.1251 | —0.0138

1900, April 16 8 | +0.0335} +0.0133 | +0.0062} +0.0067 | +0.0035 | +0.0078

1901, April 15 8 | +0.1022 | —0.0026 | +0.0038 | —0.0444 | —0.0019 | —0.0062

Sums +4.3281 +0.0700 —0.0718 +0.2958 +0.2949 —0.4491

X; +0.0162 —0.0166 +0.0683 +0.0681 —0.1038

The series of x’s are again distinctly periodic, and indicate a tendency

towards a twenty-eight-day period. ‘This tendency is not only shown by

the final series of x’s, but it is also shown by nearly every one of the indi-

vidual sets of footings as given in the above table. In six cases the increase

is marked in the a, a,’th column; in two cases, in the a, a,;d column; and in

one case, in the a,a;th column. Two series only show no tendency towards

periodicity, and of these one is a short series of six weeks only, beginning

March 7, 1892. The other series, which shows no periodicity, is the rela-

tively long one beginning Jan. 23, 1899, and extending over nine weeks.

On the whole, however, the tendency towards a recurrence at the end of

approximately twenty-eight days is quite marked.

Continuing the products for the two long series up to ay as, we have for

the series of products:

* Broken series.

POOR, THE FIGURE OF THE SUN 423

Table XVI.

meee Go. | Fee 5 | SuMs. | =;

Apo AU SAG Ra +1.5752 +0.2688 +1.8440

Apa; LAA ea a aN ROB oe TDB— Kiet 2) +0.0063 —0.2486 —0.1348

Apa, PRN RNYICSWAN ty Wy ipeN —0.2903 —0.1188 —0.4091 —().2219

Ayas URONIC veba he NA een WINN emceQ PDLg) +0.0543 + 0.0326 +0.0174

Aya, OES a aa +0.2213 +0.1251 +0.3464 +0.1878

Anas OTE EARN NER NORA RROAM Mieaec OB ate te —0.0138 —0.1997 —0.1083

Ande UNHEATED ater ta 8B —0.5121 —0.0470 —0.5591 —0.3032

AA, WSR UCL aH CTS rains Ct +0.0105 +0.0732 +0.0837 +0.0454

BE ON a omeaaa! oN) eo ona Is aeoleos7 /\N)\/4-0Ra0n

_'The x’s pass through two complete cycles in fifty-six days, thus again show-

ing the tendency of the observations to group themselves in periods of twenty-

eight days.

The present investigation would appear to show, therefore, that, at the

time of these observations, the measured differences between the equatorial

and polar diameters of the sun had a decided tendency to fluctuate in a

period of approximately twenty-eight days. ‘This would indicate that the

sun’s equator was deformed; whether this deformation was permanent or

transitory, the observations afford no means of deciding.

Part IV. Conc usions.

The general results of the present investigation may be summed up in

the following: —

1. The exact shape of the sun is not known. The generally accepted

idea that the sun is a sphere is at least open to question. Practically every

series of measures heretofore made show departures from a spherical form;

but these departures are extremely minute, the difference between the

different radii of the sun being probably not more than 0”.25.

2. A study of all the available heliometer measures shows a fluctuation

in the shape of the sun corresponding in period with the sun-spot cycle.

The amplitude of this fluctuation is small, being probably not over 07.10.

This variation is shown by the great mass of heliometer measures made by

the German observers in connection with the transits of Venus in 1874

and 1882, and by the superb series of observations made by Schur and

Ambronn at Gottingen in 1890-1902.

424 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

3. In addition to this long-period variation, the observations of Schur

and Ambronn would seem to indicate a fluctuation in the measured value

of P—E. having a period of about twenty-eight days. The observations

are so scattered that they do not permit of a thorough determination of the

reality of this fluctuation and of the exact length of its period. If real,

this fluctuation can be accounted for by a permanent or semi-permanent

deformation of the sun’s equator.

4. Questions as to the exact shape of the sun, and as to possible varia-

tions in its size and shape, can only be set at rest by a long series of homo-

geneous observations. ‘The data at present available are not sufficient

for this purpose. Observations should be made on eyery clear day, and the

series should be extended over at least one solar cycle.

5. A photographic heliometer would probably furnish the best results.

With such an instrument, the moments of good “seeing” can be utilized

and a number of plates taken within a short time. These plates can later

be measured and reduced by the ordinary staff of a computing bureau.

CoutuMBIA UNIVERSITY,

March, 1908.

[Annats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vol. XVIII, No. 10, Part III, pp. 425-429.

16 December, 1908.]

OUTLINE OF THE GEOLOGY OF LONG ISLAND, N. Y.

By W. O. Crossy.

(Read before the Academy 5 October, 1908.)

The crystalline rocks (chiefly granitic and gneissic) outcropping in

Astoria and Long Island City are the foundation or true bed-rock of Long

Island geology. ‘Their origin need not be considered here; for the geological

history of Long Island begins with the development on this crystalline bed-

rock of the Cretaceous peneplain, with its heavy load of sediments. ‘The

Cretaceous was a period of slow subsidence, the land sinking beneath the

sea slowly enough to permit its almost perfect planation by marine erosion.

In other words, this peneplain has a dual origin, — subaérial and marine;

true peneplanation obtaining above sea level, and still more approximate

planation below sea level. This seaward plain, in further contrast with the

landward peneplain, was covered by the Cretaceous sediments by which it

is still, in large part, protected. It is clearly indicated, where recently un-

covered, in the straight crest line of the Palisades.

The progressive subsidence was favorable to the progressive landward

overlap of the Cretaceous sediments, by virtue of which only the later divi-

sions are exposed to observation, the true lower Cretaceous being confined

to the continental shelf, beyond the existing shore line. The conditions were

undoubtedly favorable, also, to the extensive subaérial decay of the crystal-

line rocks, thus furnishing in abundance the variegated clays and musco-

vitic or fluffy sands so characteristic of the Raritan formation. Marine

planation was clearly favorable, too, to the elimination from the mechanical

detritus of all decomposable materials, leaving a residuum of clean quartz

sand and gravel, thus accounting for the Lloyd Sand and other highly

quartzose members of the formation. ‘The increasing remoteness and

degradation of the land finally made possible the deposition of the clay

1 Published by permission of the Chief Engineer of the Board of Water Supply, City of

New York.

425

426 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

marls and greensand marls of the upper Cretaceous; and it is probable, as

others have suggested, that the deposition was continuous without important

break through Eocene time. The original inland extension of this mantle

of conformable sediments is clearly indicated by the southeastward deflec-

tion of the Connecticut River at Middletown and of the Housatonic River

in approximately the same latitude. Entering at these points upon the

newly-formed coastal plain, the rivers, released from the control of the

bed-rock structure, naturally took the most direct course seaward; and

subsequently, through the erosion of the Cretaceous mantle, found them-

selves superimposed upon the bed-rock in the obliquely transgressive and

unsympathetic relation which we now observe. The Hudson, on the

contrary, has felt throughout its history the efficient control of the conti-

nental re-entrant into which it debouches.

The continental elevation which finally terminated the Cretaceous-

Eocene deposition was probably at least equal to the present relief of the

Cretaceous peneplain; and it may have been much more than this. It

made possible the rapid erosion of the uplifted sediments and, probably,

the trenching of the underlying peneplain. From this time, apparently,

dates the wide and deep transverse valley which divides the Cretaceous beds

in the western part of Long Island and which Veatch has called the valley

of Sound River. In this valley was deposited, probably by stream action,

the so-called Jameco Gravel, containing a high percentage of granitic

detritus, which Veatch has regarded as the product of early Pleistocene

glaciation. The granite pebbles, although now in an advanced state of

decay, are well rounded or water-worn, showing that they must have been

firm and undecomposed at the time of their deposition. ‘The composition

of this gravel suggests that the post-Eocene elevation may have been suffi-

cient to induce glaciation. But, whether of glacial or non-glacial origin,

this dark gravel, which blends upward with clays of probable Tertiary age,

should be referred to the Tertiary series and not to the Pleistocene.

During the deposition of the Jameco Gravel, the land subsided to a

position of comparative stability at the Tertiary base-level and the develop-

ment of the Tertiary or Piedmont peneplain, under the joint agency of

subaérial and marine erosion, began. The fluvial portions of the Tertiary

base level, developed, for the most part, on comparatively weak rocks, have

gained general recognition as the broad valley floors of the Hudson, Con-

necticut and other rivers. But in New England, at least, the marine con-

tribution to this base-level, developed chiefly on relatively resistant crystalline

rocks, has usually failed of differentiation from the older and far more

continuous and complete Cretaceous peneplain. Profiles normal to the

coast show, nevertheless, a more or less distinct terrace, and show, further,

CROSBY, GEOLOGY OF LONG ISLAND 427

that this far exceeds in extent and continuity the portions of the Tertiary

base-level developed by fluvial erosion. In eastern Massachusetts, where,

apparently, the exposure to the Atlantic surges was, as now, unrestricted,

the Tertiary base-level has a broad and singularly perfect development;

but on the coasts of Rhode Island and Connecticut, protected in Tertiary

times, as now, by a cordon of islands and reefs, it is rather less distinct and

continuous, though by no means wanting.

The planation of the uplifted and tilted Cretaceous sediments by the

Tertiary sea progressed rapidly, developing the well-known unconformity

at the base of the Miocene and furnishing, doubtless, the major part of the

heavy bed of clay overlying the Jameco Gravel, which I have elsewhere

correlated with the Chesapeake division of the Miocene and which Veatch

has correlated with the Sankaty Head deposits of probable early Pleistocene

age. ‘This clay is predominantly dark and carbonaceous and abundantly

characterized by lignite and segregations of iron sulphide,— characters which

seem to forbid its correlation with the Pleistocene, and especially with the

fossiliferous quartz sands of Sankaty Head. Certainly the fact that it

passes downward into gravel containing decomposed granitic pebbles does

not demand such correlation.

When, finally, the Tertiary sea had transgressed over the Cretaceous

series and reached the crystalline bed-rock, marine erosion was able, by

virtue of the excessively slow subsidence, to accomplish its perfect work,

reducing the surface to a plane and the detritus to a residuum of indestruc-

tible quartz, which we now know as the “Yellow Gravel’’ and correlate

chiefly, at least, with the Pliocene (Lafayette). The composition of the

Yellow Gravel is vastly significant, especially in its genetic relation to the

pleneplain; and comparison with the Jameco Gravel should prove fatal to

the suggestion of an ultimate glacial origin. Its volume is also impressive

and, in view of the limited extent of the Tertiary peneplain, suggests deriva-

tion, in part, from the similar gravels of the Cretaceous series. As a result

of the progressive subsidence during the deposition of the several ‘Tertiary

terranes, we find that in their areal relations the Jameco Gravel is very re-

stricted; the Chesapeake Clay is less restricted, and the Yellow Gravel is

virtually unrestricted.

Contrary to the views of several of the later workers in this field, I hold

that the Pleistocene glacial history of Long Island is relatively simple. ‘The

known facts appear to be satisfactorily accounted for by a single ice invasion;

and correlation with the complex Pleistocene stages of the Mississippi

Valley is certainly not demanded.

That the Pleistocene glacial period was, for this region, preceded and

ushered in by a long-continued continental uplift is generally conceded, and

428 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

we have positive proof in the submerged canyon of the Hudson of an eleva-

tion of approximately three thousand feet, or, according to Spencer, of nine

thousand feet or more. From this elevation date the trenching of the Ter-

tiary peneplain and its connecting base-leveled valleys and the main features

of the modern coastwise topography, including the cuesta of Long Island

and the inner lowland of Long Island Sound.

It appears most probable, as first suggested by Upham, that the Pleisto-

cene ice-sheet originated in this latitude by accumulation, with the sub-

sequent development by movement and ablation of a bold, aggressive,

moraine-building front. ‘The now drowned inner lowland of Long Island

Sound is undoubtedly still floored by Cretaceous clays and sands. Across

this floor, except at the narrow east and west ends, as shown by Merrill,

the ground moraine was not dragged; and the erratics from the Connecti-

cut shore must have been transported englacially, as also suggested by

Merrill. The building of the moraines is due to the deformation by the

thrust, and in part also by the vertical pressure, or dead weight, of the ice

of the plastic Cretaceous clays and sands and the overburden of ‘Tertiary

gravel, and the incorporation in the latter, by the joint agency of the defor-

mation and glacial streams, of the erratic detritus set free by the ablation of

the ice.

The transverse valleys and deep bays of the north shore of Long Island

are probably in part pre-glacial,— original features of the cuesta and

inner lowland. But in part, also, they must be attributed to the erosive

action of the advancing ice, and to the occupation of pre-determined de-

pressions by lobes of stagnant ice during the glacial retreat, while the bor-

dering areas were being overspread by washed or modified drift, chiefly

sand and gravel. In this connection it is interesting to note the close

agreement in trend of these valleys with the glacial movement.

During the advance, as well as during the retreat, of the ice-sheet, con-

ditions favored the formation of glacial lakes; and the outflowing glacial

streams were, doubtless, building both delta and outwash plains of sand

and grayel (earlier Manhasset gravels), derived chiefly from the deformed

beds of Pliocene Yellow Gravel and Cretaceous sand. ‘These plains were,

in turn, deformed by the continued advance of the ice and buried beneath

the moraines. Thus deposits essentially contemporaneous with the moraines

have come to be regarded as belonging to a distinctly earlier stage of the

Pleistocene; and, apparently, sufficient account has not been taken of the

disturbing and complicating agency of the ice acting in conjunction with the

glacial waters,— fluvial and lacustral.

The recession of the ice margin, first from the outer, and later from the

inner, moraine inaugurated anew general glacial-lake conditions along the

CROSBY, GEOLOGY OF LONG ISLAND 429

north shore. ‘The transverse valleys and bays were occupied by lobes of

ice after the uncovering of the intervening peninsulas,— chiefly irregular

ridges of Cretaceous and Tertiary sediments and the earlier Manhasset

gravels. Bordering the ice-lobes and overspreading the ridges was deposited

a second series of deltas and outwash plains (later Manhasset gravels).

Both the earlier and the later Manhasset gravels merge outward with the

moraines and the outwash plains, and, through these, are chronologically

as well as stratigraphically continuous, the chief structural contrast being

the general absence in the later Manhasset gravels of deformation due to

glacial thrust.

The Manhasset was, in general, never continuous across the bays and

harbors, toward which it still presents in part normal ice-contact slopes,

and we are thus relieved of the necessity of attributing these wide and deep

valleys to the erosive action in post-glacial time of the wholly insignificant

tributary streams.

As noted by Woodworth and others, the bowlder bed conformably

dividing the Manhasset Gravel on the west side of Hempstead Harbor is

probably best explained as iceberg drift; and to the same agency, apparently,

may well be referred, in general, the larger erratics scattered through and

over the gravel. ‘The so-called veneer of till over the undisturbed or later

Manhasset Gravel, north of the moraine, seems to demand no other explana-

tion. It is not a continuous body of drift, but it consists chiefly of widely

scattering granitic bowlders devoid of clayey matrix, and is clearly recog-

nizable in none of the numerous borings penetrating the Manhasset Gravel.

In part, no doubt, it is till (ground moraine) which has not been com-

pletely covered by the modified drift (Manhasset Gravel).

The later Manhasset Gravel is in general entirely undisturbed and no

where shows deformation that would not be readily accounted for by a

relatively slight movement of the ice during its deposition. In short, proof

that the later Manhasset is older than the moraines or was ever over-run by

the ice-sheet, is wanting; and hence it may fairly be regarded as the last

chapter in the glacial history of Long Island. The only important later

contributions to the geology of the island are the post-glacial beach, dune

and marsh deposits. It is especially noteworthy that there is no evidence

of marine deposition during the Pleistocene or between the Yellow Gravel

(Lafayette) and the modern shore.

{Annats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vou. XVIII, No. 11, Part III, pp. 431-451. Author’s

separates published 10 February, 1909.]

CHARLES DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THEORY.!

By CuHar.ues F. Cox.

Proressor Hueco DE Vrigs, in his American lectures on “Species and

Varieties, Their Origin by Mutation,” claims that his work is “in full

accord with the principles laid down by Darwin,” ” and boldly asserts that

Darwin recognized both ‘‘mutation” and individual variation, or “ fluctua-

tion,’ * as steps towards what Professor Cope aptly called “the origin of

the fittest.” I think many persons unfamiliar with Darwin’s writings must

have been much surprised on reading Professor de Vries’s statement, for

it has been a common belief in the scientific world for many years that the

establishment of the mutation theory would be fatal to Darwinism, or would

at least take from it its most original and essential features. ‘The perpetua-

tion of this impression has been due, very largely, to Mr. Alfred R. Wallace

and certain of his followers, who have steadfastly refused to admit the possi-

bility of the evolution of species and varieties by any form of saltation and

have insisted more uncompromisingly than did Mr. Darwin himself upon

the exclusive efficiency of selection exercised upon small, recurring individ-

ual fluctuations. In fact, many of Mr. Wallace’s views have out-Darwined

Darwin and yet Darwin, somewhat unreasonably, has been held responsible

for them. Accordingly, Darwin has been charged with a radicalism which

he never professed and champions of a supposed Darwinism have felt called

upon to do battle against theories which he never distinctly repudiated or

which he might even have accepted if he had known of them. ‘Thus, Pro-

fessor E. B. Poulton, in his recently published “Essays on Evolution,”

attacks with great severity, under the name of “‘Batesonians,” believers in

the validity of mutation as a factor in the process of evolution, although,

as he admits, ‘‘mutation was of course well known to Darwin.” * Now,

1 Presidential address. Read at the annual meeting of the New York Academy of Sciences,

21 December, 1908.

2 Preface by the author, p. ix.

3 Second edition, p. 7.

4“ Essays on Evolution,” 1908, p. xviii.

431

432 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

I think we are justified in saying that if mutation was “known” to Darwin

it must have been, and still is, a veritable fact; and if evolution is a uni-

versal law of nature it can not, in that case, exclude mutation. We, there-

fore, who believe in general evolution are compelled to decide for ourselves

whether mutation has taken place and is now occurring; and we who are

really Darwinians — that is to say, we who believe that Darwin set forth

correctly the essential steps in the evolutionary process — are interested in

knowing whether he actually recognized the fact of ‘discontinuous varia-

tion” or mutation, and, if so, how he fitted it into, or reconciled it with his

system.

The essential factors in organic evolution, from the Darwinian point of

view, are: (1) Variation, (2) inheritance, (3) over-reproduction, (4) com-

petition, (5) adaptation and (6) selection and survival. The general expla-

nation of these factors is as follows:

1. All organisms vary continually and in every part of their structures

— that is to say, no two individuals are exactly alike in any particular.

2. Nevertheless, characters anatomical, physiological and psychological

are in general transmitted to descendants; in other words, progeny essentially

resemble their parents.

3. More animals and plants are brought into the world than can possibly

find means of subsistence.

4. There results competition for what subsistence there is, or, as it is

otherwise called, a struggle for life.

5. Since out of all the variations that occur in the constitutions or

characters of organisms some must happen to be in directions to give their

possessors an advantage, or advantages, in procuring the means of existence,

as compared with other individuals of the same class, some of the new-born

animals and plants are best adapted to their surroundings or “conditions

of life.”

6. These best-adapted forms (“the fittest”) will win in the struggle

for life and are figuratively said to be selected; the unfit will in the end be

exterminated. The result is the origination (evolution) of new classes of

organisms out of the old ones and their substitution for the earlier classes

or groups.

Not one of these factors was originally discovered by Darwin, but he

first discerned their interrelations and bound them together by a consistent

and convincing philosophy. He, for example, was not the earliest observer

of progressive change in the organization and external characters of animals

and plants, but no one before him had had the insight to perceive that this

changeability was the manifestation of a force great enough to burst the

artificial limits placed about the groups called species and varieties and to

COX, DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THEORY 433

enable them to transform themselves into other groups better adapted to the

changing environment. Before Darwin’s time every one of course had

ocular demonstration of the fact that there were differences between indi-

viduals and that descendants were not in every respect like their ancestors.

There was universal belief, however, that these variations never extended

beyond certain narrow boundaries built round species like inviolable walls.

Curiously enough, Darwin, who first broke down these boundaries, took

these same individual variations as the principal foundations of his selection

theory. He assumed — for he admitted that it could not be proved for any

particular case — that these small differences, which ordinarily fluctuate

about a certain average for each species or variety, are at times accumulated

to such a degree as to carry all the members of the group forward to a new

center of oscillation so as to constitute in effect a new group. It was not at

first his idea that a single individual, or a small number of individuals, might

occasionally develop evolutionary force enough to overleap suddenly the

imaginary limit and become the nucleus of a new colony beyond; that is

the substance of the mutation theory; and, while I think it can be shown

that Darwin more or less clearly recognized the possibility of the occasional

origin of permanent races by this method of saltation, there can be no

doubt that he entertained a strong bias in favor of the evolution of species

generally by slow and minute steps.

As far as cultivated plants and domesticated animals were concerned,

Darwin was willing to grant the widest range of variation and the most

abrupt changes, but as to animals and plants in a state of nature he was

more sparing of his admissions that great and sudden departures from speci-

fic types might occur. This tenure of the two points of view was due to his

belief that domesticated animals and plants were more variable than feral

forms, because of the direct influence of man upon their surroundings and

habits of life. Inasmuch as his theory of the origin of species through

natural selection is founded on analogy between the deliberate operations

of breeders in choosing the most desirable individuals of their flocks and

gardens, and the inevitable sifting out of feral forms through their competi-

tion with one another in the struggle for existence, it is difficult to see why

Mr. Darwin hesitated about carrying the comparison to its logical conclu-

sion in the admission that what we now call mutations, but what he referred

to as “spontaneous variations,” “ sports,” ‘‘monstrosities,” etc., stand upon

substantially the same basis in nature as in cultivation. According to the

present-day views of scientific students of animal and plant breeding, I

understand, there is no good evidence that cultivated plants and animals are

more subject to wide and abrupt variations than are those living under

natural conditions. On this point Professor de Vries remarks that “it is

> 66

434 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

not proved, nor even probable, that cultivated plants are intrinsically more

variable than their wild prototypes.”’? As to distinct mutations, we must

remember that plants and animals preserved and nurtured by man are

constantly under the eyes of many thousands of pecuniarily interested ob-

servers, while those in a state of nature are closely studied by but a handful

of scientific investigators. We must also remember that it is only within a

few years that a small fraction of these men of science have been led to look

for cases of mutation, while all gardeners, farmers and breeders have had

the inducement of financial profit to watch for marked variations among their

stock and to preserve such variations if desirable. The naturalists specially

interested in evolutionary questions are exceedingly few in number, but their

field of research is immensely extended and varied. ‘The number of those

who have raised animals and plants for gain, however, has always been

large, though the number of forms which they have been called upon to

consider have been relatively few. The two fields have consequently had

exceedingly different degrees of scrutiny. But since de Vries and others

opened up the subject an astonishing number of clearly proven cases of

mutation has been discovered in very various classes of organisms, just as

numerous paleontological evidences of evolution have been brought to light

as a consequence of Darwin’s turning men’s minds in that direction.

As I have already intimated, Mr. Darwin undoubtedly dealt with num-

erous cases of mutation among domesticated animals and plants, and they

gave him little or no intellectual disquietude. In his work on ‘Animals

and Plants Under Domestication,” he gives a long catalogue of “spontane-

ous variations” or “‘sports,”’ many of which he freely acknowledges were

the starting points of new and constant races; and there is good reason to

believe that some of them occurred before the animals and plants which

underwent the sudden changes had been actually brought under domestica-

tion and cultivation; in fact that the mutations themselves suggested to men

the directions in which their breeding operations should be conducted. For

example, take the case of the tumbler pigeon; Mr. Darwin remarks concern-

ing this that “no one would ever have thought of teaching, or probably

could have taught, the tumbler pigeon to tumble,’” but it seems to me

obvious that no one would ever have thought of accumulating slight varia-

tions in the direction of tumbling. It is much more reasonable to suppose

that the birds which were artificially selected as the progenitors of the present

race of tumbler pigeons actually tumbled — that is to say, they were mutants.

As to the origin of domestic races through modifications so abrupt as to

1** Species and Varieties, their Origin by Mutation,’”’ 2d ed., 1906, p. 66.

2“ Origin of Species,’ 6th ed., 1882, p. 210.

COX, DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THEORY 435

have been thought by Darwin entirely independent of selection, he gave it

as his judgment, as late as 1875, that

“Tt is certain that the Ancon and Mauchamp breeds of sheep, and almost certain

that the Niata cattle, turnspit and pug-dogs, jumper and frizzled fowls, short-faced

tumbler pigeons, hook-billed ducks, &c., suddenly appeared in nearly the same

state as we now see them. So it has been with many cultivated plants.” '

Now, considering, as I said a moment ago, that Mr. Darwin’s theory of

the origin of species by means of natural selection has for its main foundation-

stones facts derived from observation of the effects of man’s selection among

domesticated animals and plants (without which, indeed, he admitted that

he had no actual proof of the operation of natural selection), it is difficult

to realize the state of mind which led Mr. Darwin to add to the sentence

just quoted the following caution:

“The frequency of these cases is likely to lead to the false belief that natural

species have often originated in the same abrupt manner. But we have no evidence

of the appearance, or at least of the continued procreation under nature, of abrupt

modifications of structure; and various general reasons could be assigned against

such belief.”

I am not aware that Mr. Darwin ever presented definite and convincing

reasons for the sharp demarkation here attempted, and, indeed, I can not

see how the state of knowledge in his time could have justified his doing so,

for, as I have already stated, mutations had not been much looked for

among feral plants and animals. In fact, by absolutely excluding from his

theory the idea that mutation could occur under nature, Mr. Darwin, by

the force of his great authority and influence, would have prevented a care-

ful weighing of the pros and cons, if the human mind had at that time been

prepared to weigh them. It is practically only since the Darwinian hypoth-

eses have themselves been subjected to prolonged scrutiny, and since de

Vries and a few others entered upon detailed experimental examination of

this particular subject, within the last twenty years, that the matter can be

said to have received anything like scientific treatment.

But, after all, Darwin was not wholly prejudiced against a belief in the

occurrence of mutations in nature, for he several times expressed the opinion

that the establishment of such a fact would in some ways be an advantage

to the evolution theory. For instance, in a letter of August, 1860, to W. H.

Harvey, he says:

“ About sudden jumps: I have no objection to them — they would aid me in

some cases. All I can say is that I went into the subject and found no evidence to

make me believe in jumps; and a good deal pointing in the other direction.” ?

1‘*Animals and Plants Under Domestication,’ 2d ed., 1875, Vol. II, pp. 409-10.

2** More Letters,”’ Vol. I, p. 166. See also, ‘‘ Life and Letters,’’ 1886, Vol. II, p. 333.

436 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

_ This of course refers to discontinuous variations in organisms under

natural conditions, for he had certainly found evidence to make him believe

in similar variations among domesticated animals and plants. I think Mr.

Darwin never specified the directions in which a belief in mutation would

be a help to him, but, from casual remarks made in various places, I fancy

he had in mind the way in which it would ease him over that difficult subject,

the imperfection of the geological record, and would reconcile him with the

physicists and cosmogonists, who were not disposed to allow him the lapse

of past time he required for the evolution of species by the accumulation of

successive minute or “‘insensible” individual variations. But I will not

discuss these points now. What I wish to dwell upon at the moment is

that Darwin recognized and accepted the fact of mutation among animals

and plants under domestication, although it is worth while to repeat the

statement that some of his cases probably happened in a state of nature,

since they occurred at the very beginning of, and were the points of origina-

tion for, man’s selective operations. As Mr. Darwin himself says: ‘‘Man

can hardly select, or only with much difficulty, any deviation of structure

excepting such as is externally visible,’ + which means, as I take it, that

nature usually presents some quite manifest variation before artificial selec-

tion begins and this must have been the case at the time when man’s first

choices were made, particularly when half-civilized and unobserving men

began the cultivation of our now domesticated animals and plants. It is

necessary to remember, however, in this connection, that the mutation

theory, as interpreted by de Vries, requires for its starting point only a varia-

tion which marks a distinct separation of a form from its parent group with-

out connecting gradations, and not necessarily any great or extraordinary

change of characters; for, as he says: “‘Species are derived from other

species by means of sudden small changes which, in some instances, may

be scarcely perceptible to the inexperienced eye.” None the less it remains

true that man is apt to select only striking variations and hence Mr. Darwin,

in treating of “sports,” or what we should now call mutants, among culti-

vated plants and animals, usually speaks of them as wide departures from

type, or, rather, he deals only with suchas are large deviations. Even when

treating of organisms in a state of nature, however, he admits that “there

will be a constant tendency in natural selection to preserve the most divergent

offspring of any one species.” * Returning to the subject of artificial selec-

tion, Mr. Darwin says:

1** Origin of Species,’ 6th ed., p. 28.

2** Plant Breeding,’ 1907, p. 9.

3 ** Origin of Species,’ 6th ed., 1882, p. 413.

COX, DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THEORY 437

“No man would ever try to make a fan-tail till he saw a pigeon with a tail de-

veloped in some slight degree in an unusual manner, or a pouter till he saw a pigeon

with a crop of somewhat unusual size; and the more abnormal or unusual any char-

acter was when it first appeared the more likely it would be to catch his attention.” !

In another place he says:

“Tt is probable that some breeds, such as the semi-monstrous Niata cattle, and

some peculiarities, such as being hornless, &c., have appeared suddenly owing to

what we may call, in our ignorance, spontaneous variation;....During the process

of methodical selection it has occasionally happened that deviations of structure

more strongly pronounced than mere individual differences, yet by no means de-

serving to be called monstrosities have been taken advantage of.” ?

Now, in his work on “ Animals and Plants Under Domestication”’, Dar-

win has given a long list of these widely varying forms, from each of which

nas descended a new race conforming to his own test of a species, namely

its possession of ‘“‘the power of remaining for a good long period constant

.... combined with an appreciable amount of difference.” ? One of the

most striking of these cases is that of the ‘“japanned” or “black shoul-

dered” peacocks which have occasionally appeared ‘‘suddenly in flocks of

the common kind,” which “propagate their kind quite truly,” which, ac-

cording to good authority, ‘“‘form a distinct and natural species,” and

which tend “‘at all times and in many places to reappear.” * Mr. Darwin

rejects the idea that these birds are the result of hybridization and rever-

sion and declares in favor of their being “a variation induced by some

unknown cause,” and says that “‘on this view the case is the most

remarkable one ever recorded of the abrupt appearance of a new form

which so closely resembles a true species that it has deceived one of the

most experienced of living ornithologists.” In all points this case agrees

with the modern idea of a mutation, even in the respect that it comes from

a family of birds not usually considered very variable.

Concerning fowls, Mr. Darwin remarks:

“Fanciers, whilst admitting and even overrating the effects of crossing the

various breeds, do not sufficiently regard the probability of the occasional birth,

during the course of centuries, of birds with abnormal and hereditary peculiarities.

.... Whenever, in the course of past centuries, a bird appeared with some slight ab-

normal structure, such as with a lark-like crest on its head, it would probably often

have been preserved from that love of novelty which leads some persons in England

to keep rumpless fowls and others in India to keep frizzled fowls. And after a

1‘* Origin of Species,”’ 6th ed., p. 28.

2“ Animals and Plants Under Domestication,’’ 2d ed., 1875, Vol. I, p. 96. See also,

II, pp. 189-90.

3** More Letters of Charles Darwin,’’ 1903, Vol. I, p. 252.

4“ Animals and Plants Under Domestication,” 2d ed., 1875, Vol. I, pp. 305-7.

Vol.

—

438 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

time any such abnormal appearance would be carefully preserved from being es-

teemed a sign of the purity and excellence of the breed; for on this principle the

Romans eighteen centuries ago valued the fifth toe and the white ear-lobe in their

fowls.” !

But Mr. Darwin’s cases of what we must regard as saltations are not

confined to the animal kingdom. We might easily cull from his list numer-

ous more or less pertinent examples under the peach, plum, cherry, grape,

gooseberry, currant, pear, apple, banana, camellia, crateegus, azalea, hibis-

cus, althea, pelargonium, chrysanthemum, dianthus, rose and perhaps

other plants. Concerning useful and ornamental trees he says: “All the

recorded varieties, as far as I can find out, have been suddenly produced

by one single act of variation,” * and as to roses, he remarks on their marked

tendency to “‘sport” and to produce varieties ‘not only by grafting and

budding but often by seed,” and quotes Mr. Rivers as saying that ‘“when-

ever a new rose appears with any peculiar character, however produced,

if it yielded seed” he “expects it to become the parent of a new family.”

In this connection Mr. Darwin called attention to the now well-known fact

that the mutative tendency is an inheritable one by citing the case of the com-

mon double moss-rose, imported into England from Italy about the year

1735, which “probably arose from the Provence rose (R. centifolia) by bud-

variation,’ the White Provence rose itself having apparently originated in

the same way.* He called attention also to the significant fact that many

abrupt variations were not to be attributed either to reversion or to the

splitting-up of hybrids. ‘Thus he declares:

“No one will maintain that the sudden appearance of a moss-rose on a Provence

rose is a return to a former state, for mossiness of the calyx has been observed in no

natural species; the same argument is applicable to variegated and laciniated

leaves; nor can the appearance of nectarines on peach-trees be accounted for on the

principle of reversion.”’ +

In another place in the same work he says:

“Many cases of bud-variation....can not be attributed to reversion, but to

so-called spontaneous variability, as is so common with cultivated plants raised

from seed. As a single variety of the chrysanthemum has produced by buds six

other varieties, and as one variety of the gooseberry has borne at the same time four

distinet kinds of fruit, it is scarcely possible to believe that all these variations are

due to reversion. We can hardly believe....that all the many peaches which

have yielded nectarine-buds are of crossed parentage. Lastly, in such cases as that

of the moss-rose, with its peculiar calyx, and of the rose which bears opposite leaves,

1“ Animals and Plants Under Domestication,” 2d ed., Vol. I, pp. 242-4.

2 Ibid., p. 384.

3 [bid., pp. 405-6.

4 Ibid., Vol. II, p. 242.

COX, DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THEORY 439

in that of the Imantophyllum, &c., there is no known natural species or variety from

which the characters in question could have been derived by a cross. We must

attribute all such cases to the appearance of absolutely new characters in the buds.

The varieties which have thus arisen can not be distinguished by any external char-

acter from seedlings. . . . It deserves notice that all the plants which have yielded bud-

variations have likewise varied greatly by seed.” !

Now, Darwin is here treating of saltations among cultivated plants,

but it is instructive to read in this connection the following passage in which

he prepares the ground for a belief in the possibility of similar abrupt and

wide variations under natural conditions. He remarks:

“Domesticated animals and plants can hardly have been exposed to greater

changes in their conditions of life than have many natural species during the inces-

sant geological, geographical, and climatal changes to which the world has been

subject; but domesticated productions will often have been exposed to more sudden

changes and to less continuously uniform conditions. As man has domesticated so

many animals and plants belonging to widely different classes, and as he certainly

did not choose with prophetic instinct those species which would vary most, we may

infer that all natural species, if exposed to analogous conditions, would, on an

average, vary to the same degree.” ”

But now let us take a specific example of spontaneous variability which

deeply impressed Mr. Darwin. It is a case which was brought to his atten-

tion in 1860 by Professor W. H. Harvey concerning Begonia frigida, as to

which Mr. Darwin says:

“This plant properly produces male and female flowers on the same fascicle; and

in the female flowers the perianth is superior; but a plant at Kew produced, besides

the ordinary flowers, others which graduated towards a perfect hermaphrodite

structure; and in these flowers the perianth was inferior. To show the importance

of this modification under a classifieatory point of view, I may quote what Professor

Harvey says, namely, that had it ‘occurred in a state of nature, and had a botanist

collected a plant with such flowers, he would not only have placed it in a distinct

genus from Begonia, but would probably have considered it as the type of a new

natural order.’....The interest of the case is largely added to by Mr. C. W. Crocker’s

observation that seedlings from the normal flowers produced plants which bore, in

about the same proportion as the parent-plant, hermaphrodite flowers having infe-

rior perianths.” *

This was written in the first edition of “‘Animals and Plants Under

Domestication”’ (1868) and was allowed to stand in the second and last

edition (1875). In both editions, however, Mr. Darwin made the state-

ment in an entirely different part of the work, that ‘the wonderfully anoma-

1*“* Animals and Plants Under Domestication,’’ 2d ed., Vol. I, pp. 439-40.

See also ibid., Vol. II, p. 278.

2 Tbid., Vol. II, p. 401-2.

3 [bid., Vol. I, p. 389.

440 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

lous flowers of Begonia jrigida, formerly described, though they appear fit

for fructification, are sterile.’ + ‘The last point, however, does not invali-

date the claim to this new type of Begonia as a mutant, since the facts which

determine its position in this regard are, first, the sudden appearance of the

form bearing three kinds of flowers and, second, the production by seed of

descendants also bearing three kinds of flowers.

It is very evident that this case troubled Mr. Darwin, for he referred to

it a number of times and did not relish Professor Harvey’s assertion that

“‘such a case is hostile to the theory of natural selection, according to which

changes are not supposed to take place per saltum,” and Harvey’s further

declaration that ‘‘a few such cases would overthrow it (natural selection)

altogether.” ? Sir Joseph Hooker attempted to explain the matter so as to

weaken Professor Harvey’s argument against the doctrine of natural selec-

tion, but Darwin himself wrote Hooker saying:

“As the ‘Origin’ now stands Harvey is a good hit against my talking so much

of the insensibly fine gradations; and certainly it has astonished me that I should

be pelted with the fact that I had not allowed abrupt and great enough variations

under nature. It would take a good deal more evidence to make me admit that

forms have often changed by saltwm.”

About the same time, namely early in 1860, Darwin wrote to Lyell on

this subject, saying:

“Tt seems to me rather strange; he (Harvey) assumes the permanence of mon-

sters, whereas monsters are generally sterile and not often inheritable. But grant

this case, it comes that I have been too cautious in not admitting great and sudden

variations.”

There is an added point of interest about this discussion in the fact that

it is the earliest record in print of the consideration of saltation or mutation

by Mr. Darwin.

You have doubtless noticed Mr. Darwin’s protest against the belief

in the occurrence of important changes “per saltum.” He uses this expres-

sion with disapproval a number of times and yet his condemnation of the

idea involved is not entirely unqualified, as is shown by the following signifi-

cant statement:

“On the theory of natural selection we can clearly understand the full meaning

of the old canon in natural history, ‘Natura non facit saltum.” This canon, if we

look to the present inhabitants alone of the world, is not strictly correct; but if we

include all those of past times, whether known or unknown, it must on this theory

be strictly true.” 4

1“ Animals and Plants under Domestication,” 1st ed., Vol. II, p. 166. Also ibid., 2d ed.,

Vol. II, p. 150.

2“ Life and Letters,’’ 1886, Vol. II, p. 274.

3 Ibid., p. 275. Also, ‘‘More Letters,’’ 1903, Vol. I, p. 141.

4“ Origin of Species,’’ 6th ed., p. 166. See also ibid., pp. 156, 234, 414.

COX, DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THEORY 441

This I understand to be, in effect, a protest against deducing proof of

separate creations from the imperfection of the geological record, coupled

with an admission that saltation or mutation does, at least occasionally, occur

among existing living forms. I trust you perceive the importance of the

concession that natura non facit saltum is not strictly correct as applied to

the present inhabitants of the world.

Having noticed Mr. Darwin’s repeated use of the words per saltum, I

now wish to revert to his frequent use of the words monster and monstrosity

and to call your attention to the fact that they are not always employed

with exactly the same meanings. Sometimes by “‘montrosity” he evidently

intends to indicate a mere deformity, of the nature of an accidental injury,

or aborted or perverted development, but more generally he refers to a

deviation from type wide enough, or discontinuous enough, to exclude it

from the category of variations to which he supposed the operation of natural

selection must be confined. Among domesticated animals and plants,

however, the word ‘‘monster,”’ as used by him, often meant no more than the

word “sport.” In most cases when he used this term or one of its deriva-

tives he took care to explain that monstrosities could not be qualitatively

separated from other kinds of variations. ‘Thus, in writing to R. Meldola,

in 1873, he says:

“Tt is very difficult or impossible to define what is meant by a large variation.

Such graduate into monstrosities or generally injurious variations. I do not myself

believe that these are often or ever taken advantage of under nature.”’ !

In the ‘Origin of Species” he wrote:

“At long intervals of time, out of millions of individuals reared in the same

country and fed on nearly the same food, deviations of structure so strongly pro-

nounced as to deserve to be called monstrosities arise; but monstrosities cannot be

separated by any distinct line from slighter variations.” *

He frequently repeats this last statement and it is quite clear that he intends

to convey the idea that all variations are merely quantitative, at any rate he

failed to adopt a nomenclature that would enable his readers to judge as to

the degrees of difference he meant to indicate by such adjectives as “‘insen-

sible,’ “minute,” ‘‘slight,” “‘large,” “wide,” “sudden,” and “ abrupt,”

as applied to variations. I am convinced, however, that he recognized the

fact that there were two different kinds of variations, namely, first, what

he oftenest called ‘individual variations,’ by which he referred to the ordi-

nary differences between the single organisms of the same group, or what

1** More Letters,’’ 1903, Vol. I, p. 350.

2** Origin of Species,’ 6th ed., p. 6, also p. 33. See also ‘‘Animals and Plants Under

Domestication,” 2d ed., Vol. I, pp. 312, 322. Also ‘‘ More Letters,’’ 1903, Vol. I, p. 318.

442 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

mutationists now call ‘fluctuations,’ and, second, those radical and gener-

ally extensive deviations from type which constitute an actual break with

the species, variety or race, and which are substantially what we of these

later times have named “‘mutations.” ‘There are places in Darwin’s works

where the two kinds of variation just mentioned are spoken of as “‘indefinite”’

and ‘‘definite’” and as results, respectively, of the zndzrect and the direct

action of the conditions of life, and once only, I think, he uses the term

“ fluctuating variability” as synonymous with indefinite variability." Now

I do not assume to say that the realization of these distinctions by Mr.

Darwin proves that he clearly foresaw the present-day mutation theory

with its foundation in the principle of unit characters, but I think it is true

that he had at least a glimpse of the coming modifications to be required

in his own theory to meet the then dawning truth. De Vries declares that

his own field researches and testing of native plants are based ‘‘on the

hypothesis of unit-characters as deduced from Darwin’s Pangenesis,” which

conception, de Vries points out, “‘led to the expectation of two different

kinds of variability, one slow and one sudden.” ?

But the main point I wish to dwell upon at present is that Darwin recog-

nized, at least dimly, a kind of variability the results of which were essen-

tially different from the “‘individual”’ or “indefinite” variations, which

mistakenly seemed to him alone capable of being acted upon by selection.

He was sorely puzzled by what he saw and realized in this direction, for he

had spent more than twenty years of intense thought in elaborating his

theory that new species were evolved from older ones by the gradual build-

ing up of new characters from extremely small differences, and he feared

that the admission of saltation in any form meant the undermining of the

foundations he had labored so hard to construct. He had once said:

“When we remember such eases as the formation of the more complex galls,

and certain monstrosities, which cannot be accounted for by reversion, cohesion, &e.,

and sudden strongly-marked deviations of structure, such as the appearance of a

moss-rose On a common rose, we must admit that the organization of the individual

is capable through its own laws of growth, under certain conditions, of undergoing

great modifications, independently of the gradual accumulation of slight inherited

modifications.’’ *

In the last edition of the ‘Origin of Species,” however, which was pub-

lished in the year of the author’s death, although he introduces this apology:

“Tn the earlier editions of this work I under-rated, as it now seems probable,

1** Animals and Plants Under Domestication,’’ 2d ed., Vol. II, pp. 280, 281, 345.

2** Species and Varieties, their Origin by Mutation,’’ 2d ed., 1906, p. 689.

3 ** Origin of Species,’’ 5th ed., 1869, p. 151.

COX, DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THEORY 443

the frequency and importance of modifications due to spontaneous varia-

bility,” ! he still later interpolates the following rather sweeping recantation:

“‘There are, however, some who still think that species have suddenly given

birth, through quite unexplained means, to new and totally different forms; but,

as I have attempted to show, weighty evidence can be opposed to the admission of

great and abrupt modifications. Under a scientific point of view, and as leading to

further investigation, but little advantage is gained by believing that new forms are

suddenly developed in an inexplicable manner from old and widely different forms,

over the old belief in the creation of species from the dust of the earth.”’ ?

In this sixth, and last, edition of the ‘Origin of Species” Mr. Darwin

devoted to the task of answering criticisms made by St. George Mivart far

more space than he had ever allowed to any other one critic and the passage

just read is evidently one of those inspired by Mr. Mivart’s attacks. The

sore point with Mr. Darwin at that time was the doctrine of natural selection

and, as I have already remarked, he had adopted the erroneous belief that

this important principle must be greatly weakened if not entirely sacrificed

if any form of saltation was to be admitted in nature. He had, therefore,

wavered between his loyalty to his cherished hypothesis and his fearless

devotion to truth. By this time, however, he had so long contemplated the

possibility of the origin of new species and varieties through single long steps

and had had so many convincing examples brought to his attention, that his

hesitancy and doubt concerning the validity and sufficiency of the arguments

urged in favor of this mode of evolution were ready to give way, and I regard

the passage which I am about to quote, as a virtual surrender on this point.

The fact that, in this emphatic form, it was written at the close of his life,

as his last word on this subject, and that he must have felt that it contained a

concession very damaging to the theory to the establishment of which that

life had been devoted, gives it, in my mind, a deeply pathetic significance.

Mr. Darwin says:

“Tt appears that I formerly underrated the frequency and value of [variations

which seem to us in our ignorance to arise spontaneously] as leading to permanent

modifications of structure independently of natural selection. But as my conclusions

have lately been much misrepresented, and it has been stated that I attribute the

modification of species exclusively to natural selection, I may be permitted to remark

that in the first edition of this work, and subsequently, I placed in a most conspicuous

position — namely at the close of the Introduction — the following words: ‘I am

convinced that natural selection has been the main but not the exclusive means of

modification.’ This has been of no avail. Great is the power of steady misrepre-

sentation; but the history of science shows that this power does not long endure.” 3

1“ Origin of Species,’ 6th ed., 1882, p. 171.

2 Tbid., p. 424.

3 Tbid., p. 421. See also, ‘Life and Letters,’’ 1886, Vol. III, p. 243, and ‘‘More Letters,’’

1907, Vol. I, p. 389.

444 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The sting of this vehement declaration is in the underlying implication

that the limitation placed upon the applicability of natural selection was

deemed necessary because of Mr. Darwin’s inability to free his mind from

the belief that it could not act upon large and sudden variations as well as

upon small and unimportant ones. This point of view seems illogical

when we consider his repeated declaration that no qualitative distinction

could be established between the two kinds of variation, but it may be par-

tially accounted for by the fact that a slight confusion at times existed in his

mind concerning the general modus operand: of natural selection, through

which he attributed to it a causal power as well as a mere sifting effect. Both

Lyell and Wallace took him to task for this double use of the term and, there-

fore, in the third edition of the “Origin” he attempted to clear up this point

by means of this statement:

“Several writers have misapprehended or objected to the term natural selection.

Some have even imagined that natural selection even induces variability, whereas

it implies only the preservation of such variations as arise and are beneficial to the

being under its conditions of life.” ?

Nevertheless, almost side by side with this explanation, we find in the

last edition of the “Origin” the following sentences which were allowed

to come down from the first edition: ‘‘ Natural Selection will modify the

structure of the young in relation to the parent, and of the parent in relation

to the young.” ? ‘Natural Selection .... will destroy any individuals de-

parting from the proper type.” * If Darwin had adopted the simile of a

sieve, so effectively used by de Vries, he would have drawn nearer to the

recognition of the fact of “‘selection between species,’ even if he had not

been prepared to assent to de Vries’s counter proposition that there is no

“selection within the species.” He might also have escaped some of his

apprehensions concerning the fate of adaptation, which he thought to be

endangered by a belief in saltation; for the fact is that adaptedness is only

another name for fitness, and this is a quality inherent in the organism and

precedent to selection — that is to say, natural selection merely sifts out for

preservation the adapted or fit, allowing the unadapted or unfit to perish.

Now, it is impossible to see why forms both adapted and unadapted to their

environment may not arise through mutation and thus be offered to the

operation of selection. In fact Mr. Darwin has supplied us with a good

illustration of a case under one of these heads in a rather naive passage

which has run through every edition of the ‘‘ Origin,” to the following effect:

1** Origin of Species,’’ 3d ed., 1861, p. 84.

2 Ibid., 6th ed., 1882, p. 67.

8 Tbid., p. 81.

COX, DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THEORY 445

“One of the most remarkable features in our domesticated races is that we see

in them adaptation, not indeed to the animal’s or plant’s own good, but to man’s

use or fancy. Some variations useful to him have probably arisen suddenly, or by

one step; many botanists, for instance, believe that the fuller’s teasel, with its

hooks, which can not be rivaled by any mechanical contrivance, is only a variety of

the wild Dipsacus; and this amount of change may have suddenly arisen in a seed-

ling.” }

Surely, if Mr. Darwin could have looked at this case with a perfectly

free mind, he must have perceived that the teasel’s adaptation to man’s

needs would not have fallen if man had failed to exercise his power of selec-

tion; and that the adaptation was not weakened by the fact that it arose

by a mutation. But that he was unconsciously biased in this matter is

shown by an extract from a letter written to Asa Gray, in 1860, in which he

says:

“T reflected much on the chance of favorable monstrosities (7. e., great and sudden

variation) arising. I have, of course, no objection to this, indeed it would be a great

aid, but I did not allude to the subject [z. e., in the ‘Origin’] for, after much labor,

I could find nothing which satisfied me of the probability of such occurrences. There

seems to me in almost every case too much, too complex, and too beautiful adapta-

tion, in every structure, to believe in its sudden production.” ?

The idea involved in this passage is that adaptation is produced — rather

than preserved — by natural selection and that, as natural selection must,

according to Mr. Darwin’s curious prepossession, act only upon slow and

small changes of character, adaptation itself must necessarily be in every

case a matter of gradual growth. ‘This sort of argument appears to justify

the fear shared by both Lyell and Hooker that Darwin was at times dis-

posed to stake his whole case on the maintenance of an unnecessary assump-

tion. Hooker wrote him as early as 1859 or 1860 that he was making a

hobby of natural selection and overriding it, since he undertook to make it

account for too much.* Darwin mildly protested that he did not see how

he could do more than he had done to disclaim any intention of accounting

for everything by natural selection.* In this discussion, however, it is

apparent that while Darwin was overloading the theory of natural selection

with a responsibility for the origin of the adapted or fit, he was at the same

time unduly limiting it to only one class of the fit, namely those which had

arisen by slow degrees. If he had taken the position that natural selection

could and would operate upon any kind or any degree of variability, he need

not to have imagined that his main doctrine was in jeopardy.

1“ Origin of Species,’”’ 6th ed., p. 22.

2** Life and Letters,’ 1887, Vol. II, p. 333.

3 “* More Letters,’’ 1903, Vol. I, p. 135.

A TOU. eV Ol. PDs Laenelas

446 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

But though Mr. Darwin could be stirred by attack to a vigorous defense,

and sometimes even to an over-defense, of natural selection, he contended, at

other times, with equal vigor, that his main interest was with variation,

however produced, which was the necessary basis of the whole evolutionary

process. He admitted, however, that the cause of variation was to him

inexplicable and, like all beginnings, it remains to this day a deep mystery.

Darwin said of it:

“Our ignorance of the laws of variation is profound. Not in one case out of a

hundred can we pretend to assign any reason why this or that part has varied.” ?

In another place he remarks:

“When we reflect on the millions of buds which many trees have produced

before some one bud has varied, we are lost in wonder as to what the precise cause

of each variation can be.” ?

He never definitely undertook to solve this mystery, though he reflected

and reasoned on it much. ‘The nearest he came to formulating a law con-

cerning it was the expression of his conviction that variability was. more a

matter of organic constitution than a result of external agencies. ‘Thus

he declares:

“Tf we look to such cases as that of a peach tree which, after having been culti-

vated by tens of thousands during many years in many countries, and after having

annually produced millions of buds, all of which have apparently been exposed to

precisely the same conditions, yet at last suddenly produces a single bud with its

whole character greatly transformed, we are driven to the conclusion that the trans-

formation stands in no direct relation to the conditions of life.’’ *

From examples like this Mr. Darwin deduced a ‘‘general rule that

conspicuous variations occur rarely, and in one individual alone out of

millions, though all may have been exposed, as far as we can judge, to nearly

the same conditions” * and while this is, in a general way, in accordance

with the admission of de Vries that although mutations are “‘not so very

rare in nature,” ® the numbers ‘“‘under observation are as yet very rare,’ °

we shall see a little later that Mr. Darwin’s deduction is not strictly accurate,

since it excludes the idea of a whole genus or species or variety mutating

at once.

2** Animals and Plants Under Domestication,’’ 2d ed., Vol. II, p. 281.

3 Ibid., 2d ed., Vol. I, p. 441. See also, ibid., Vol. II, pp. 277, 279, 282.

4 Ibid., Vol. II, p. 276.

5“ Species and Varieties, their Origin by Mutation,” 2d ed., p. 597.

6 Tbid., p. 8.

COX, DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THEORY 447

doctrine of the mutationists to the effect that ““when the organization has

once begun to vary, it generally continues varying for many generations.” !

But as to variability having periods of activity, Mr. Darwin’s opinion seems

to have been unsettled. In a letter to Weismann, in 1872, he remarks on

the strangeness “‘about the periods or endurance of variability,’ ? but in a

letter to Moritz Wagner, in 1876, he says:

‘‘Several considerations make me doubt whether species are much more variable

at one period than at another except through the agency of changed conditions. I

wish, however, that I could believe in this doctrine, as it removes many difficulties.” 3

Practically this is the dilemma of the mutationists of the present day:

they are not in a position to prove that plants and animals have periods of

mutation, but they assume that it must be so, because the belief “removes

many difficulties.”

One of Darwin’s perplexities, however, has been explained away, as

I have already pointed out, by the discovery that mutation is not confined

to a single case out of millions of individual forms, nor even to a single

generation out of a Jong genetic line, but that, as in the case of the

(Enotheras (evening primroses), a whole genus is likely to be in a mutating

condition at the same time, producing from each of several species number-

less individual mutants, which are themselves often in a mutating condition,

the parent stock meanwhile remaining perfectly constant. Such has been

the case with nothera (Onagra) Lamarckiana, which, while throwing off,

since it has been under scientific observation, in large numbers not less than

a dozen elementary species and retrograde varieties, has bred true to its

original type through at least one hundred and sixteen years, although there

is considerable proof that it is itself a mutant from (nothera grandiflora,

and none whatever for the assertion, often made, that it is a hybrid. As at

least nine of its mutants have also bred true through many generations in

pedigree cultures and doubtless had been constant forms for a long time in a

state of nature, there appears to be no ground for Darwin’s fear that, grant-

ing the occurrence of mutation, the mutants would be liable to speedy

extermination through inability to propagate. Of course this would not

be the case with even a single self-fertilizing plant and it would not be true

with animal mutants if, like plant mutants, they were produced in numbers

by the mutating stock. As to swamping by intercrossing, it has been shown

that, under Mendel’s law, in the extreme case of the production of a solitary

rautant obliged to cross with the parent form, if it possesses characteristics

1‘ Origin of Species,’’ 6th ed., p. 5.

2‘* Life and Letters,’’ 1886, Vol. III, p. 155.

3 Ibid., p. 158.

448 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

having a certain relation to the parent, it can establish a race like itself and

even supplant the parent form, if it is only as well fitted for the battle of life

as is the progenitor.’

If Darwin had known these facts he would not have written, or he

would have greatly amended, the following passage:

“He who believes that some ancient form was transformed suddenly through

an internal force or tendency into, for instance, one furnished with wings, will be

almost compelled to assume, in opposition to all analogy, that many individuals

varied simultaneously. It can not be denied that such abrupt and great changes of

structure are widely different from those which most species apparently have under-

gone. He will further be compelled to believe that many structures beautifully

adapted to all the other parts of the same creature and to the surrounding conditions,

have been suddenly produced; and of such complex and wonderful co-adaptations,

he will not be able to assign a shadow of an explanation. He will be forced to admit

that these great and sudden transformations have left no trace of their action on the

embryo. To admit all this is, as it seems to me, to enter into the realms of miracle,

and to leave those of science.’’ *

Of course Mr. Darwin was not entirely oblivious to the fact that every

important advance in knowledge must have the appearance, at first, of a

move into a region of mystery and uncertainty. The lapse of time and the

growth of familiarity with it are necessary to the reclamation of a terra

incognita.

Before leaving this branch of my subject, I desire to call your attention

to the very interesting fact that Mr. Darwin himself once conducted a long

series of experiments which, it can hardly be doubted, resulted in the pro-

duction of mutants and that he just missed the discovery of principles which

are now the basis of scientific pedigree cultures and are occupying the atten-

tion of investigators of the problems of variation and heredity. Ina letter to

J. H. Gilbert, dated February 16, 1876, Mr. Darwin writes:

“Now, for the last ten years I have been experimenting in crossing and self-

fertilizing plants; and one indirect result has surprised me much, namely, that by

taking pains to cultivate plants in pots under glass during several successive genera-

tions, under nearly similar conditions, and by self-fertilizing them in each generation,

the colour of the flowers often changes, and, what is very remarkable, they became

in some of the most variable species, such as Mimulus, Carnation, &c., quite constant,

like those of a wild species. This fact and several others have led me to the suspicion

that the cause of variation must be in different substances absorbed from the soil

by these plants when their powers of absorption are not interfered with by other

plants with which they grow mingled in a state of nature.” *

1 See Lock’s ‘‘ Variation, Heredity and Evolution,’’ 1906, p. 205.

2** Origin of Species,’’ 6th ed., p. 204. See also, ibid., p. 202.

3‘* Life and Letters,’’ 1886, Vol. III, p. 343.

COX, DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THEORY 449

The point I particularly wish you to notice in this case is that Mr. Dar-

win was employing practically the methods now used by Professor de Vries,

Professor MacDougal and others who are engaged in species testing, by

growing naturally variable or mutating plants under conditions of rigid

control, so as to exclude crossing or, as de Vries calls it, vzeznism. In this

view of the matter, it would be interesting to know what percentage of Mr.

Darwin’s plants exhibited the new and constant characters and through

how many generations his mutants were found to breed true, for then we

could compare his results with those of investigators of our day. But his

attention was centered upon the endeavor to find a cause for the abrupt

variations and not on the formulation of laws of their action. Apparently

he considered isolation to be the principal secondary cause or favoring con-

dition, upon which view the obvious comment is that it requires no great

stretch of imagination to conceive of similar isolation as occurring in nature

and thus favoring mutation among uncultivated forms.

Having now hastily reviewed the oscillations in Darwin’s opinions con-

cerning the kinds, the causes and the laws of variation with relation to the

origin of species, it is not my purpose to enter upon a discussion of the

present-day mutation theory, which has grown out of a closer study, and a

more scientific treatment, of the problems of variation and heredity than were

attempted, or were perhaps possible, in Darwin’s time. It is desirable,

however, to compare Darwin’s views with generalizations from the muta-

tion theory, which we can do, well enough for our present purpose, by merely

recalling the seven laws which de Vries claims to be the logical outcome of

his twenty years of cultural experiments upon plants. They are, with

slight modifications as to wording and order, as follows:

1. New elementary species appear suddenly without intermediate steps.

2. New forms spring laterally from the main stem.

3. New elementary species attain their full constancy at once.

4. Some of the new strains are elementary species, while others are to

be considered as retrograde varieties.

5. The same new species are produced in a large number of individuals.

6. Mutations take place in nearly all directions and are due to unknown

causes.

7. Species and varieties have originated by mutation, but are, at present,

not known to have originated in any other way.

Now, looking back over what Darwin wrote concerning variation, I can

not believe that he would seriously have disputed any of de Vries’s propo-

sitions except the last. All would have had to stand or fall with that. He

recognized the fact that new species had sometimes appeared suddenly

without intermediate steps and that the new forms had sprung laterally

450 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

from the main stem. I think he also substantially admitted that such new

species attained their full constancy at once. As to the fourth affirmation of

de Vries, with reference to elementary species and retrograde varieties,

Darwin had no knowledge, for the distinction is original with de Vries.

Darwin believed, as a general proposition, that “species are only strongly

marked and permanent varieties, and that each species first existed as a

variety,” 1 but, of course, in admitted cases of mutation this can not be true;

and if Darwin had been obliged to concede de Vries’s seventh proposition,

the fourth might well have been allowed to go with it. The same is doubt-

less the case concerning de Vries’s fifth law, which sets forth in effect that

similar mutants are thrown off by many individuals of the same species at

about the same time. As we have already seen, Mr. Darwin was convinced

that if, for example, he were to admit the origin by mutation of a species of

flying animal, for the reasons urged by Mr. Mivart, he would be compelled

to assume “‘that many individuals varied simultaneously.” I, therefore,

do not see that he would have been interested, from a theoretical point of

view, in disputing either of the two last-named declarations of de Vries

except in connection with his seventh and last law, to which I shall presently

refer. The sixth law of de Vries, which affirms that mutations take place

in nearly all directions, is practically the equivalent of Darwin’s first law

that all organisms vary continually and in every part of their structure,

provided it is agreed that mutations are only quantitatively different from

Darwin’s ‘‘individual variations,” which was Darwin’s own view. In so

far as Darwin admitted the occurrence of mutation at all, he must have agreed

that it could proceed in any direction. But now we come to the conclusion

of de Vries which we know Darwin would not have accepted, at least in its

entirety. As we have seen, he was compelled to concede that what we now

call mutation had occasionally taken place and become the starting point

of new races, but he was none the less unshaken in the conviction that this

process was exceptional and extraordinary, and that, as a rule, a new species

originated by the gradual building up of minute and even insignificant

deviations from the average characters of an old species, which deviations

we now call fluctuations. We know with what tenacity he held this view

to the end of his life. For the doctrine of “insensible gradations,” which

touched mainly a minor premise in his general argument for evolution, Mr.

Darwin was, unhappily, almost willing to relinquish the essence of the

whole matter, which was his claim to the discovery of a vera causa in the

evolutionary process. Notwithstanding the prior claim of Patrick Matthew,

and the partial anticipation by Alfred R. Wallace and others, the establish-

1“ Origin of Species,’’ 6th ed., 1882, p. 412.

COX, DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THEORY 451

ment of the theory of natural selection was Mr. Darwin’s most original and

greatest achievement. Time has proven that he could have afforded to

stand upon the general validity and applicability of this theory though every

step in his argument in its favor had needed review and modification; for

each passing year but adds to the impregnable mass of proofs by which it

is affirmed and supported. Properly regarded, the mutation theory does

not antagonize nor weaken the doctrine of natural selection — on the con-

trary it merely offers itself as a helpful substitute for, or adjunct to, one of

Darwin’s subordinate steps in the approach to a consistent philosophy of

the origin of species, leaving the last great cause of evolution as efficient as

ever. It is, therefore, one of the tragedies of science that in this matter

Darwin should have been ready to surrender his main position rather than

to receive and to join forces with those who were coming to his aid, but

whom he failed to recognize as friends.

bing

‘eat

j ee! N

dn Le

te i) i

[Annats N. Y. Acap. Sct., Vol. XIII, No. 12, Part III, pp. 453-559. May, 1909.]

RECORDS OF MEETINGS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

January, 1908, to December, 1908.

By Epmunp Otts Hovey, Recording Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

JANUARY 6, 1908.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Grabau presiding.

In the absence of the Recording Secretary, Charles P. Berkey was elected

secretary pro-tem. :

On motion the business meeting was adjourned to 8:15 P. M., Monday,

January 13.

CHARLES P. BERKEY,

Secretary pro-tem.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

JANUARY 6, 1908.

Section met at 8:30 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

Sixteen persons were present.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

A special proposition in favor of arranging for a joint meeting of geolo-

gists and mineralogists of neighboring societies and institutions was pre-

sented. A motion to approve the plan and lay the matter before the Council

for action was passed.

453

454 ANNALS NEW YORK, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The following program was then offered:

A. W. Grabau, A ReviseD CLASSIFICATION OF THE NorRTH AMERICAN

SILuRIC SYSTEM.

Alexis A. Julien, ON DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CONSTITUTION THROUGH

RECASTING OF ANALYSES.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Grabau said in abstract: A review of the successive modifi-

cations of the classification of the Siluric system in North America brings

out the fact that the process of refining has been largely by separating

from this system divisions not properly belonging to it. Thus Dana in

1863 (first edition of the Manual) included the Cambric and Ordovicic

as ‘‘Lower Silurian,” dividing it into Potsdam, Trenton and Hudson, and

dividing the “‘Upper Silurian” into Niagara, Salina and Lower Helderberg.

In the 4th edition of the Manual (1895) the Cambric, Ordovicie and

Siluric Systems are recognized as distinct, though the name “ Lower Silurian”

is still preferred for the Ordovicic. ‘The three-fold division of the Siluric

is into: (1) Niagara, (2) Onondaga (Salina) and (8) Lower Helderberg.

In 1899, Clarke and Schuchert published their revised classification of the

New York series, which has been pretty generally adopted. In this the

Helderbergian, exclusive of the Manlius, was separated as Lower Devonic,

while the remainder of the Siluric (Niagara and Onondaga (or Salina) of

Dana, 1895) was divided into the Oswegan (Oneida conglomerate —Shaw-

angunk grit and Medina sandstone), the Niagaran (Clinton, Rochester,

Lockport and Guelph) and the Cayugan (Salina, Rondout and Manlius).

Since then Grabau and Hartnagel have independently demonstrated that

the Oneida is the equivalent of late Medina, and the Shawangunk, of Salina.

In 1905, Grabau suggested the Richmond age of the lower 1100 feet of the

Medina of western New York (Science XXII, p. 259, Oct. 27, 1905) uniting

the upper with the Clinton. These relations were more fully discussed in

1906 (Bull. 92, N. Y. State Museum) and again in 1907 before the Geolo-

gical Society of America, New York meeting, after a prolonged investigation

of the Appalachian deposits. This relationship is now fully established,

and the dividing line between Ordovicic and Siluric is drawn at the base of

Upper Medina or Medina proper. For the red Medina shales, now recog-

nized as of Ordovicic age, the name Queenstown beds is proposed, from the

town of that name on the Niagara river opposite Lewiston, where these

beds are partly exposed.

Recent studies by Grabau and Scherzer in southern Michigan and ad-

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 455

joining regions in Canada and Ohio have demonstrated the existence of

about 900 feet of fossiliferous strata: above the Salina, to which it is proposed

to restrict the name Monroe. These will be fully discussed in a forthcoming

paper, where the correlation of the eastern attenuated Upper Siluric beds

will be given. The fauna of the Upper Monroe, above the Sylvania sand-

stone, is a remarkable mixture of Siluric and Devonic types, as recently

demonstrated before the Michigan Academy of Sciences, the Chicago meet-

ing of Section E, American Association for the Advancement of Science,

and the Albuquerque meeting of the Geological Society of America. ‘The

following classification of the Siluric System of North America is proposed

as most expressive of the relationships indicated by the facts now known:

Upper Siluric ) Upper Monroe

or Middle Monroe (Sylvania sandstone the only known repre-

Monroe sentative)

(900 feet) Lower Monroe

Middle ‘aa

Represented so far as known only by non-marine sedi-

Salina ments

(1000 fect)

Lower Siluric Guelph (probably to be placed in with the Middle Siluric)

Lockport dolomite

| Rochester shales

J { Clinton shales and limestones

Clinton { Medina sandstone

Mes conglomerate

(500 feet)

This paper was illustrated with lantern slides.

Dr. Julien’s paper appears in full as pages 129-146 of this volume.

The paper was illustrated with several ingeniously prepared charts and

aroused much interest, but, because of the lateness of the hour, the discus-

sion was postponed to the next regular meeting of the Section.

The Section then adjourned.

CHARLES P. BERKEY,

Secretary.

456 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

ADJOURNED BUSINESS MEETING.

JANUARY 13, 1908.

By adjournment from January 6, 1908, the Academy met at 8:15 P. M.

at the American Museum of Natural History, President Cox presiding.

The minutes of the regular meetings of December 2, 1907, and January 6,

1908, were read and approved.

The following candidates for election to Active Membership in the

Academy, recommended by Council, were duly elected:

Leo H. Baekeland, Ph.D., Yonkers-on-Hudson, N. Y.,

Mrs. Chester Griswold, 23 West 48th St.,

Robert H. Lowie, Ph.D., American Museum of Natural History,

Charles Louis Pollard, A. M., New Brighton, S. L,

Charles St. John Warner, 29 Broadway.

The Recording Secretary then reported the following deaths among the

membership of the Academy:

Lord Kelvin, an Honorary Member since 1876,

Rev. M. E. Dwight, an Active Member since 1905,

T. J. Hurley, an Active Member since 1907,

Wm. H. S. Wood, an Active Member since 1885.

The Recording Secretary then read the following communication:

‘Notice is hereby given in pursuance of Section 5 of Chapter XI of

the By-laws of the Academy that the undersigned propose an amend-

ment to Chapter VI, Section 3 of the said By-laws by the addition thereto,

at the end thereof, of the following words: and any Active Member or

Fellow who has paid annual dues for twenty-five years or more may, upon

his written request, be made a life member and be exempt from further

payment of dues.”

(Signed).

C.F s Cox.

N. L. Britton,

E. O. Hovey.

The above amendment to the By-laws will be acted upon at the next

business meeting of the Academy.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Ottis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 457

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

JANUARY 13, 1908.

Section met at 8:25 P. M., Vice-President Chapman presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Henry F. Osborn, THe DISTRIBUTION OF THE MASTODON AND

Mammots IN NortH AMERICA WITH DESCRIP-

TION OF THE WARREN MastTopon.

Louis Hussakof, Huntine Fosstt FISHES IN THE DEVONIAN OF

OHIO AND CANADA.

Ernest Thompson Seton, THE BioLocicaL RESULTS or AN EXPEDITION TO

THE BARREN GROUNDS.

The papers read by Professor Osborn and Dr. Hussakof were illustrated

with lantern slides.

The Section then adjourned.

Roy W. Miner, §

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

JANUARY 20, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Hering presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Lamb, Rosanoff and Breithut, A New Mrtuop or Merasurinc Partiau

Vapor PRESSURES IN Binary MIxTUREs.

The paper was well discussed.

The Section then adjourned.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

458 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

JANUARY 27, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., in conjunction with the American Ethnologi-

cal Society, at the American Museum of Natural History, General J. G.

Wilson presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

R. H. Lowie, THr THreory or NaturE MytTHo.oey.

V. Stefansson, THe MaAcKkENzIE River Eskimo.

Both papers were illustrated with lantern slides.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

FEBRUARY 3, 1908.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Grabau presiding at first, but resigning the chair

to President Cox who arrived a few minutes later.

The minutes of the adjourned meeting of January 13 were read and

approved.

The following candidates for Active Membership in the Academy,

recommended by Council, were duly elected:

H. Sanburn Smith, Lackawanna Steel Co., 2 Rector St.,

Felix Arnold, Ph.D., 34 St. Nicholas Ave.,

Homer D. House, New York Botanical Garden,

V. Stefansson, Care of American Geographical Society.

The Recording Secretary then announced the following deaths in the

Membership of the Academy:

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 459

Professor Charles A. Young, an Honorary Member for 30 years,

Morris K. Jesup, an Active Member for 15 years,

Professor William Stratford, an Active Member for 13 years and

for some time Corresponding Secretary.

Council recommended the following minute with reference to Mr. Jesup:

In recognition of the great services rendered to Natural Science in this city by

the late Morris K. Jesup, the New York Academy of Sciences adopts the following

minute:

Mr. Jesup has been a member of the Academy since 1893. He has been much

interested in its welfare, and was foremost in welcoming it to the American Museum

of Natural History, where its meetings have been held since 1903, where its library

is deposited, and where its present efficiency as a scientific association of broad scope

and influence has been developed.

As president of the Board of Trustees of the American Museum of Natural His-

tory, he has been indefatigable in building up the resources and collections of the

Museum and in establishing it as one of the great institutions of its kind in the world.

His influence on the development of Science in New York has been most benefi-

cent; the Academy deeply deplores his loss.

In accordance with the notice given at the business meeting of 13 January,

1908, the following amendment to the By-laws of the Academy was proposed:

Add to Chapter VI, Section 3, of the By-laws of the Academy, at the

end thereof, the following words: and any Active Member or Fellow

who has paid annual dues for twenty-five years or more may, wpon his

written request, be made a life member and be exempt from further pay-

ment of dues.

On motion, the amendment was unanimously adopted, a quorum of

members of the Academy being present.

The Academy then adjourned.

EpmunpD Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

FEBRUARY 3, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

Sixty persons were present.

460 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Announcement was made of the issue of a circular letter inviting the

geologists and mineralogists of New England, New York, New Jersey and

eastern Pennsylvania to participate in a joint meeting April 6.

The following program was then offered:

E. O. Hovey, THE ANNUAL MEETING OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY

or AMERICA, ALBUQUERQUE, NEw Mexico, DrEcEm-

BER 30-31, 1907.

Charles P. Berkey, A REVISED Cross-SECTION OF RoNDOUT VALLEY ALONG

THE LINE OF THE CATSKILL AQUEDUCT.

James F. Kemp, PRESENT TREND OF INVESTIGATIONS ON UNDERGROUND

WATERS.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Julien’s paper presented at the last meeting of the section was dis-

cussed briefly by the author who showed two newly prepared charts of

minerals not shown at the former meeting. Remarks were made by Pro-

fessor J. F. Kemp.

Dr. Hovey gave an account of the chief points of interest in connection

with the meeting at Albuquerque and a brief summary of the papers.

Dr. Berkey said in abstract: The explorations of the Board of Water

Supply of New York City have now been made so complete across the

Rondout Valley, a distance of five miles, that it is possible to construct by

the aid of this data probably the most accurate cross-section of the rock

structure yet known in New York State. There are twelve distinct forma-

tions of stratified rock involved, all of which will be cut by the projected

pressure tunnel. One marked unconformity in the series separates the

Ordovician Hudson River slates from the overlying conglomerates, shales,

sandstones and limestones of Silurian and Devonian age. ‘There are three

faults of considerable displacement, together with smaller ones and minor

foldings. In the effort to determine the variations of these formations as to

thickness, depth from surface, displacements, physical conditions, water

content and capacity, the presence of caves and relative solubility, and the

position and depth of the buried channels beneath the drift cover, the

available figures are so abundant that the section may be considered accurate

within a few feet for a considerable proportion of the whole width of the

valley and to a depth of 300 to 400 feet.

Several drawings illustrating these features in detail, originally prepared

for the Chief Engineer of the Board of Water Supply, were shown by per-

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 461

mission, and the successive stages in interpretation of results were pointed

out. ‘The paper was also illustrated with lantern slides and charts.

Professor Kemp said in abstract: Within a few years there has been a

_marked change on the question of the sources and amount of underground

water. Although as recently as 1900, in the most important discussion of

the influence of ground water, all supplies other than meteoric were elimi-

nated as of negligible importance, it is now becoming increasingly more

probable that some of these supplies are of magmatic origin. There is a

tendency to place much more emphasis upon the interpretation of ore bodies

in the light of possible influence of magmatic waters.

To an equal extent the earlier opinions as to the total amount of under-

ground water have been modified. It has been customary to express this

as a sheet of water over the surface of the globe of so many feet in depth.

Delesse, in 1861, estimated it 7500 feet; Schlichter, 1902, 3000 to 3500 feet;

Van Hise, 1904, 226 feet; Fuller, 1906, 96 feet. Ground waters of meteoric

origin would seem therefore to be of very moderate amount, and the depths

to which they penetrate are probably correspondingly reduced. It may

readily be believed that their efficiency and universality in mineralization

has been overestimated.

The Section then adjourned.

CHARLES P. BERKEY,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

Fesruary 10, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Chapman presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

N. L. Britton, THe GrEnus Ernodea Swartz: A STUDY OF SPECIES

AND RACES.

Bashford Dean, ACCIDENTAL RESEMBLANCE AND ITS PossIBLE Imu-

PORTANCE IN THE ORIGIN OF SPECIES.

C. William Beebe, PretiminARY Report or Some Recent Expreri-

MENTS WITH Brrps IN THE New York ZOOLOGICAL

PARK.

Frank M. Chapman, THE Brrp’s Wine In FuiicuTr as REVEALED BY

PHOTOGRAPHY.

462 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The papers by Professor Dean and Mr. Chapman were illustrated by

lantern slides. An active discussion followed the reading of each paper.

The Section then adjourned.

Roy W. Miner,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

FEBRUARY 17, 1908.

By permission of Council no meeting was held.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

SPECIAL MEETING.

FEBRUARY 18, 1908.

Dr. Leland 0. Howard of Washington, D. C., delivered a lecture upon

““SoME RECENT DISCOVERIES IN INSECT PARASITISM, AND THE PRACTI-

CAL HANDLING OF PARASITES.”

The lecture was given through coéperation with the New York and

Brooklyn Entomological Societies.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

FEBRUARY 24, 1908.

Section met in conjunction with the New York Branch of the American

Psychological Association at 4 P. M. at the Psychological Laboratory of

Columbia University, and at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of

Natural History, Vice-President Meyer presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 463

Afternoon Session.

The usual afternoon session was adjourned to hear the following lecture

at Columbia University:

E. B. Titchener, Tue Laws or ATTENTION.

Evening Session.

H. C. Warren, FEELING AND OTHER SENSATIONS.

Warner Brown, ‘TIME IN VERSE.

H. L. Hollingworth, THE Timez or MovEMENT.

Adolf Meyer, THE CONCEPT OF SUBSTITUTIVE ACTIVITY AND THE

RELATION OF MENTAL REACTION TYPES TO PsycHIA-

tric NosoLoey.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Titchener discussed the question as to the number of distin-

guishable levels of clearness which are simultaneously present in the same

consciousness. After a comprehensive review of the literature and a careful

examination of the doctrines which hold to three or four levels, the lecturer

concluded that there was no real evidence of more than two distinct levels:

that of clearness, or attention, and that of obscurity, or inattention. For

example, in looking at one of the common puzzle pictures, in which a face is

concealed, the moment the face appears to the observer the picture as a

whole, which up to that moment had been clear, drops at once into obscurity,

and there is no appearance of a gradual fading into obscurity through a

series of intermediate gradations. It is true, however, that both at the level

of obscurity and, more certainly still, at the level of clearness there may exist

slight differences in the prominence of the different elements present. ‘This

is illustrated by the differing prominence of the different elements of a rhythm

even though all lie in the field of attention. ‘There may also, as between

different states of consciousness, be differences in the level of clearness and

in that of obscurity; the narrower the field of attention, the greater is the

disparity between the level of clearness and the level of obscurity.

Professor Warren said that the supposed radical distinction between

feeling and sensation was supported by three separate claims. (1) Hwi-

dence from introspection. 'This is inconclusive. Admitting the vast differ-

ence of sort between so-called feelings and visual sensations, for example,

464 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

there appears quite as vast a difference of sort between visual, auditory

and other “external” sensations. (2) Distinction between external and

internal elements. ‘This affords no better criterion. ‘The hedonic tone of a

visual sensation, for example, has just as definite a physical basis as its

brightness or color characters. Organic conditions are less clear-cut than

external stimuli, but difference in degree of clearness is no reason for divid-

ing experience into two elemental sorts. Moreover, a distinction based on

source should recognize activity experience also. ‘The speaker prefers the

terms external, organic and kinesthetic sensations to a more radical division

into sensations, feelings and activity experiences. (3) Dzfferent genetic réles

of presentation and affection. “External’’ sensations lead more readily

to thought and “knowledge about”’ things than internal. But this is due

to the relative vagueness of the latter. Definite, vivid experiences lead to

perception, judgment, reasoning; indefinite, vague experiences lead to noth-

ing beyond themselves. Yet any experience, even of discomfort or well-

being, may at times become focused in attention and form the basis of a

judgment. ‘The distinction between presentative and affective is, therefore,

not really based on the nature of stimuli. Intellectual experience is the

result of a distinctive mental function which acts (in favorable circum-

stances) on sensory experiences of any sort. ‘The three claims for a radical

dichotomy of experience are thus found to be unsatisfactory. All simple

experience is essentially one in nature.

Mr. Brown, in his paper, said that a large number of graphic records of

the voice had been made the basis of the report. The material embraced

nonsense verses and typical verses of English poetry. The former failed

to show any differences of tempo between the four common rhythms, and

the differences of internal time relations of the feet were not found to be

those usually accepted. Syllables in trochees are nearly equal in length,

but the accented is shorter. The accented syllable of the dactyl is not

longer than the corresponding short syllable of the anapest. If two short

syllables are taken as equivalent to one, no sharp line can be drawn between

two-syllable and three-syllable rhythms in respect to time. In lines of

poetry the conventional alternation of long and short syllables is frequently

reversed, leaving the time structure chaotic. The feet approximate equality

only in the very simplest verse. There is no regular connection between

accent and duration. None of the three-syllable rhythms took the form

given by the dactyl in nonsense verse. The general conclusion was that the

ear is incompetent to judge, and that the impression of temporal regularity

in verse is strictly illusory.

Mr. Hollingworth described an instrument designed to record simul-

taneously and graphically the extent, duration and force of a rectilinear

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 465

arm movement. To the car of the Cattell-Fullerton extent of movement

apparatus is attached a signal magnet, which controls the vibrations of an

enlarged Pfeil time marker. On a smoked paper, stretched on a horizontal

frame, the writing point traces the extent of the movement and records the

time in twentieths of a second. The interruptions are made by means of a

reed oscillator. The car pulls against a set of springs, which are adjustable,

so that the force may be varied independently of the extent, but correlated

with it empirically. A pulley attachment provides for the use of weights in-

stead of springs. The traditional method of controlling the extent of a

movement by impact against an upright is found to cause a large positive

constant error which is a function of the force of impact, and the magnitude

of which increases the variable error. When the movement was blocked

at one centimeter from the starting-point, the varying speeds, indicated in

mm. per tenth of a second, gave the following results:

7S 0131510 ena EAA ects 68 100 110

@onstant error... oe eee a eos mim: +174 mm. +171 mm.

Wari blererrore ). sce ae eye BO) AD ns A ce

When stopped at two centimeters:

5] 8 (e1er0 leh the MA Reale U ah eH UE 32 120 138

Constant/error. soe ne ee OO nama +158 mm. +166 mm.

Wari blererronee eine taieiae eat Pees SS ie aA Ih

When stopped at three centimeters:

SPICER ernie Ly ein itu ec) jel aeaniel ey aha Ne oe 103 155 _

SONS TAM CTE OL ea ee ci ae RANA MIRE oan ete (TIA +132 mm.

Weta teil} lex Cey 0) CEs ea EAT A LAT UCN AL La Qa DSc

In order to eliminate this factor a sound hammer, introduced at optional -

points along the track, serves as a signal for stopping the movement. ‘The

movement is thus terminated by the subject himself and becomes a unit,

commensurable with any other free movement.

Dr. Meyer, in his paper, noted as a characteristic sign of our times in

psychopathology, as in other biological and extrabiological domains, the

surrender of the quest for the final nature of events in terms of physicochem-

ical materialism. The chase for the noumenon, or Ding an sich, has lost

its charm. We realize that much of what is expressed in psychology or

psychopathology in terms of nerve-cells is pseudo-scientific tautology, the

facts on which the claims are based being extra neurological, and the in-

ferences being often enough not only unverifiable, but directly opposed by

what we know in terms of nerve histology and nerve physiology. ‘This form

466 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

of scientific mythology serves its purpose if it stimulates, but it ought not

to be accepted as solution. It seems infinitely wiser to reduce events not

to static principles, but to simpler events, and to study the laws of modi-

fiability of the active factors and of the results. The notion of the “lesion”

is helpful where facts are accessible; otherwise, it plays the réle of a noume-

non. Events are defined by the situation, the reaction and the final ad-

justment, and the réle played by parts of the event or part of the mechanism.

Abnormal events may be best accounted for by modification either of in-

frapsychical (simple physiological) or of mental (physiological-psychological)

factors. Since the mental events constitute adjustive actions with a scale of

efficiency or lack of efficiency, we can distinguish the well-planned act,

poorly supported by faulty physiological mechanisms, from inadequately

planned, inferior reactions; and the latter we designate as substitutive

activities, to denote that the fault lies more in the deficiency of the mental

adaptation itself than that of the tool of the same. ‘The advantage lies in

the fact that we do not telescope the facts into a schematic artifact devoid

of a time component, with a craving for uncontrollable nerve-cell notions,

but our attention remains faithful to the field in which things happen. The

tendency of an overbelief in the value of noumena is further illustrated in

the notion of a “disease,” as soon as it figures as more than an empirical

unit, satisfying the identification of certain combinations of manifestations,

or of some issues of treatment, or not infrequently of a desire for protection

against demands of responsibility concerning the outcome. The “disease”

notion is hardly conspicuous in the plainest events of pathology, in injuries,

intoxications and even infection, but the nearer we get to the ill-defined,

the more the term ‘disease entity’? gets a noumenal overimportance. Con-

sumption used to be a protective term covering up the inefficiency of man-

agement of tubercular infection; dementia precox is to-day such a term

covering up medical inefficiency in dealing with the so-called deterioration

processes. Within their proper field and plainly realized limitations, the

maintenance of these noumena has a great advantage for orderly thinking,

but, like the neo-vitalistie modes of presentation of biological facts, they

would be most detrimental if considered as more than formulas or starting-

points of more fundamental work. For didactic and practical work the

differentiation of unfavorable developments from harmless or from consti-

tutional recurrent, but non-deteriorating, disorders is equally important for

the physician and for the families. Hence the importance of a distinction of

dementia precox and manic-depressive insanity. But for progress in the

understanding, a constructive knowledge of events has to supersede the

purely formal method of what can only be a preliminary grouping, until

the pertinent cases can be said to present experiments of nature with clearly

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 467

known components, traced to simpler events rather than to artificial elements

of physchology or neurology.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

Marcu 2, 1908.

The Academy met at 5:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Grabau presiding. Dr. Charles P. Berkey was

appointed secretary pro-tem in the absence of the Recording Secretary.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following candidates for election to Active Membership in the

Academy, recommended by Council, were duly elected:

J. H. Anderson, 54 St. Nicholas Ave.,

A. H. Scholle, 2020 Broadway.

Council reported that the following had applied for Life Membership,

under Chapter VI, Section 3, of the By-laws:

Pierre de P. Ricketts, 104 John St.,

Elwyn Waller, 7 Franklin Place, Morristown, N. J.

Council reported the following deaths:

Isidor Wormser, an Active Member for 1 year,

E. S. F. Arnold, M.D., a Fellow and Active Member for 28 years.

Council reported the following resolutions with reference to Professors

Underwood and Stratford:

Professor Underwood served the Academy as Vice-President and in other official

relations, and was at the time of his death a member of the Council as delegate

from the Torrey Botanical Club, an affiliated society. He was deeply interested in

the work of the Academy, and his contributions were greatly valued and esteemed

by his associates. He was beloved by the members of the Council, and his death

is regarded not only as a great loss to botanical science, but as a personal bereave-

ment.

It is resolved that this memorial be spread upon the minutes and be communi-

cated to his family.

N. L. Brirron, Chairman,

J. F. Kemp,

H. H. Russy.

468 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The Academy records with sorrow the death of Professor William Stratford, a

member of long standing and a former Corresponding Secretary. He was a promi-

nent member of the faculty of the College of the City of New York, having served

on its teaching staff for over 41 years. Born in 1844, he graduated with A. B. at

the City College in 1865 and later took the degrees of M. D. and Ph.D. at New York

University; he became tutor in Natural History in the City College in 1866, under

Professor J. C. Draper, whom he succeeded as head of the department in 1886. He

was a well known member of scientific organizations in New York, was a recognized

expert in biological microscopy, conducting important experiments in the early days

of photo-micrography and devising new combinations in the mathematics of lenses.

In his work in the City College, he early introduced laboratory methods and developed

its museum, enriching its paleontological materials with the fruits of several expedi-

tions to the Rocky Mountains. He is best known as a teacher and as the devoted

friend of those whose interest in Natural History led them beyond the door of the

class room. His private laboratory was always filled with volunteer students, and

he was generous, even to a fault, in giving them his time, means, apparatus,— every-

thing he had. And he followed the career of each of ‘‘his men’”’ with the keenest

interest. He was never too busy to do them favors, no matter the cost, and the

only reward he asked was to see them become prominent as teachers, physicians,

biologists.

BasHFORD DEAN, Committee.

The secretary read a letter from Dr. Joseph D. Hooker, expressing his

appreciation of his election to Honorary Membership in the Academy.

The Academy then adjourned.

CHARLES P. BERKEY,

Secretary pro-tem.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Marcu 2, 1908.

Section met at 8:30 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Robert T. Hill, GroLoGcicaAL PROBLEMS OF THE WINDWARD ISLANDS.

Roswell Johnson, THe Mip-conTINENT Orn FYIELDs.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Johnson said in abstract: The production of oil in Oklahoma and

Kansas, generally called the mid-continental oil field, has forged ahead

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 469

during the year 1908, so that the production now surpasses that of any other

field in the United States, and the production of Oklahoma exceeds that of

any other state. The mid-continent production is given at 47,566,906

barrels by Professor E. Haworth, in the Engineering and Mining Journal.

Its nearest rival, California, is estimated in the same journal to have pro-

duced 40,000,000 barrels. The oil is of intermediate grade, being used as

fuel oil only in exceptional areas or in cases of local congestion. While

inferior to Appalachian and Lima oil, it is superior to that of Illinois. ‘The

production might have been greater had it not been for the lack of suffi-

cient pipe lines to transport the product and the consequent low prices.

With this limitation removed, the production will doubtless reach consider-

ably higher figures in the future. One pool in one township, the Glenn

Pool, made the phenomenal record of 19,632,337 barrels in the year, being

much more than the production of the entire Texas and Louisiana field in

the same time. This establishes it as the greatest pool yet found in Amer-

ica. The oil has so far been chiefly derived from sandstones within the

Cherokee shales of Middle Carboniferous age in Kansas and Northern

Oklahoma. Recently, horizons in the underlying strata, which are so

extensively developed in eastern Oklahoma, have been found to be produc-

tive of a lighter oil, comparing with the Pennsylvania oil in its paraffin con-

tent. These finds are especially encouraging, since there is in this region a

very favorable deformation of the strata. This is the result of two sets of

folds at an angle to each other. One set, running about north and south,

was caused by the Ozark uplift. The other set, running east and west, was

caused by the folding of the Ouachita Mountains to the south.

In general the mode of occurrence and the horizon of the oil and gas in

the mid-continent field is similar to that of the Appalachian field and con-

trasts strongly with the heavy-oil fields of the Gulf Coast and California.

Professor Hill’s paper was illustrated by maps and drawings; that of Mr.

Johnson by charts showing geologic structure and comparative productivity.

Both papers were listened to with much interest.

The Section then adjourned.

CHARLES P. BERKEY,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

Marca 9, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor E. B. Wilson presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

470 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY GF SCIENCES

The following program was then offered:

Amadeus W. Grabau, RECAPITULATION AS VIEWED BY A PALEONTOLOGIST.

William M. Wheeler, DEsErT ANTs.

Homer D. House, THe NortH AMERICAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS

Ipomaa.

The papers read by Professors Grabau and Wheeler were illustrated

with lantern slides.

The paper by Mr. House forms pages 181-263 of this volume.

The Section then adjourned.

Roy W. MINER,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

Marcu 16, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Hering presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

William Campbell, Norres oN METALLOGRAPHY APPLIED TO ENGINEERING.

SUMMARY OF PAPER.

Professor Campbell, in his paper, briefly reviewed the methods of pre-

paring specimens, development of structure, microscopic examination

and photographing the specimen. The structure of metals, ingotism and

grain structure, the effects of strain and of annealing were demonstrated,

and the constitution of alloys, mattes, speisses, etc., taken up. The carbon-

iron series, the graphite-austenite and cementite-austenite groups were

discussed and illustrated. Examples of structure were given; wrought

iron vs. low carbon steel, good and bad material; working and annealing

of medium carbon steel; rails and examples of their failure; steel tyres and

shelling out; the structure of hypereutectic steels and their change with heat

treatment; cast iron, gray, mottled, white, spiegeleisen; cementation and

blister steel; malleableizing and the formation of temper carbon.

The application of metallography to economic geology was shown by

iS — , = . ©

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 471

demonstrating the paragenesis of certain mixed sulphide ores, of silver

ores from Cobalt, Ont., of the Butte copper ores, of typical “enrichment

zones.” The constitution of so-called nickeliferous pyrrhotites and of

certain complex opaque minerals was shown. Many lantern slides were

used to illustrate the paper.

The Section then adjourned.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

Marcu 23, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., in conjunction with the American Ethno-

logical Society, at the American Museum of Natural History, General J. G.

Wilson presiding.

The following program was offered:

Arthur 0. Lovejoy, Fire CuLts: THEIR DISTRIBUTION AND CHARAC-

TERISTIC FEATURES, WITH AN HypoTHEsis RE-

SPECTING THEIR ORIGIN AND MEANING.

Robert H. Lowie, THE PsycHoLocy oF DREAMs.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Lovejoy said in abstract: While the most wide-spread of the

observances relating to the sacred fire is the custom of maintaining, either

upon the domestic hearth or in a communal shrine, a fire that, except upon

periodic ceremonial occasions, is never permitted to go out —a practise

which by itself might be regarded as a mere convenience or necessity,

invested in the course of time with supernatural or magical import — there

are other fire-observances, occurring usually among the same peoples,

which also have a bearing on the significance of the fire-cult. Especially

significant is the annual or cyclic ceremony of extinguishing the old fire and

kindling new by some archaic method, as the central and most solemn rite

in the transition to a new year, e. g., at the planting of the first seed or

the first eating of the new crop (Rome, Celtic Ireland, Eskimos, Iroquois,

Muskoki, Aztecs, Ouichuas and others). Widely diffused are also the

472 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

customs of passing new-born children over or around the fire (¢7. Greek

myths of children rendered immortal by this means); of leaping through

fires at certain seasonal festivals, as the Roman Palilia, the Johannisfeuer

celebrations, etc.; of employing fire as a fertility charm for crops and herds;

of celebrating essential parts of the marriage ceremony before the household

fire; of using fire in initiation rites. An analysis of these observances and a

consideration of the reasons actually given for certain of them by Iroquois

and Maori makes it probable that the sacred fire was by many races con-

ceived, not as a practical convenience, or as an unmotivated ancient cus-

tom, or as a device for frightening away demons, or as a negative purifying

agency merely, but as a vehicle of life force or magical energy — manitou,

wakonda or mana; that the health and prosperity of the household or tribe

was believed to depend in part on the fire’s perpetuity, vitality and purity;

and that the fire, like all natural forces, was thought of as subject to periodi-

city, to a tendency to grow old and weak, and accordingly as in need of

periodic renewal.

Dr. Lowie called attention to the services which scientific dream psy-

chology can render to the ethnologist. A knowledge of the investigations

carried on in this field will enable him to view critically the plausible but

inaccurate dicta of popular psychology. Knowing, for example, the theory

of dreams advanced by Delage, the ethnologist will not naively accept the

assumption of Wundt and Radestock that dreams of recently deceased

relatives have largely influenced the development of belief in a hereafter.

A positive benefit is derived when mythological figures of obscure origin,

such as dwarfs, gorgons, etc., are derived from the distorted images of

some dreams — Wundt’s Fratzentriume — as a conceivable source. From

a purely psychological point of view, the speaker urged the desirability of

fuller dream-records, especially in regard to varieties of hypnagogic ex-

perience.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortTH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

Aprit 6, 1908.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Cox presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 473

The following candidate for Active Membership, recommended by

Council, was duly elected:

Richard F. Bohler, 115th St. and Amsterdam Ave.

The Recording Secretary read an application made by Dr. R. H. Lowie

for an appropriation of $300 from the Esther Herrman Research Fund, for

assistance in carrying out an Investigation among the Indians of the north-

western portion of Canada. The application had been investigated and

approved by Dr. Clark Wissler, Curator of Ethnology at the Museum.

Dr. E. O. Hovey, also, applied for an appropriation of $110 from the

Esther Herrman Research Fund for the purchase of thermometric instru-

ments for use in prosecuting studies of voleanic phenomena in the Lesser

Antilles. On motion the requests were referred to Council with approval.

The Recording Secretary then read letters from Professors James Ward

and William Bateson, expressing their appreciation of the honor conferred

upon them by their election as Honorary Members of the Academy.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Aprit 6, 1908.

The Section held two sessions for the presentation of papers. The

first was held at 2 P. M. at Columbia University, with the Department

of Geology. The second session, at 8:15 P. M., was held at the American

Museum of Natural History.

By invitation of Dr. A. W. Grabau, Chairman of the Section, Professor

J. J. Stevenson presided over the first session. Attendance, 40.

The following program was then offered:

George H. Perkins, State Geologist of Vermont,

THE CAMBRIAN Rocks OF VERMONT.

James F. Kemp, Columbia University,

RECENT ADVANCES IN OUR KNOWLEDGE OF THE

MAGNETITE BopiEs AT MINEVILLE.

Edgar T. Wherry, University of Pennsylvania,

NrEwarkK Copper Deposits or EASTERN PENN-

SYLVANIA.

474 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

J. Volney Lewis, Rutgers College,

PETROGRAPHY OF THE NEWARK INTRUSIVE D1a-

BASE OF NEW JERSEY.

Douglas Wilson Johnson, Harvard University,

THE ORIGIN oF BEACH Cusps.

William G. Reed, Jr., Harvard University,

DEVELOPMENT OF NANTASKET BracH, Boston

Harpor. A STUDY IN ORIGIN WITH A RESTORA-

: TION OF ORIGINAL FEATURES.

Charles P. Berkey, Columbia University,

THe Actp EXTREME OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES,

NEAR PEEKSKILL, NEw YORK.

J. E. Hyde, Columbia University,

STRUCTURE OF THE BRACHIAL SUPPORT OF

Camarophorella, a MississtppIaN MERISTEL-

LOID BRACHIOPOD.

Amadeus W. Grabau, Columbia University,

A RevISED CLASSIFICATION FOR THE NORTH

AMERICAN LOWER PALEOZOIC.

The afternoon program was finished at 6 o’clock, and those in attend-

ance repaired to the Faculty Club where dinner was served and where an

hour was spent in a social way.

The evening session was called to order by Vice-President Grabau, who

introduced Professor B. K. Emerson of Amherst College as the chairman of

the evening.

The following program was presented:

T. A. Jaggar, Jr., Massachusetts Institute of Technology,

THe Evo.uTtion or BogosLor VOLCANO IN BERING

SEA.

Ellsworth Huntington, Yale University,

Some Curves ILLUSTRATING COINCIDENT VOL-

CANIC, SEISMIC AND SOLAR PHENOMENA.

Henry 8. Washington, New York City,

THe VoLcANOES AND Rocks OF PANTELLERIA.

Edmund Otis Hovey, American Museum of Natural History,

THe GrisEON METEORITE AND OTHER. RECENT

ACCESSIONS OF THE AMERICAN MusEuM.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 475

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Perkins said in abstract: So far as satisfactorily determined,

the Cambrian of Vermont occupies a narrow strip from north to south

through the State between the Green Mountains and Lake Champlain.

In some places the beds reach the shore of that lake and form the boldest of

the headlands.

Northward the Cambrian extends to the Gulf of St. Lawrence and south

through New York to middle Alabama.

It is probable that there are derivatives from Cambrian strata in and

east of the Green Mountains, but none have been certainly identified. So

far as studied, all the beds belong to the Olenellus zone of Walcott, or

Lower Cambrian. By a very interesting and extensive fault and overthrust

Cambrian strata were lifted and thrown over the Utica. In all there are

not less than 10,000 feet of Cambrian beds in western Vermont. ‘These

beds consist of 1,000 feet of more or less silicious limestone, and the other

rocks are shales, sandstones, quartzites, conglomerates, of very diverse

color, composition and texture. In a few places the red sandrock beds

change to a thick, bedded, brecciated, calcareous rock, which, when worked,

is the Winooski or Champlain marble, —a mottled red and white stone used

in many large buildings all over the country.

Few of the beds are fossiliferous, but some abound in trilobites, Olen-

ellus, Ptychoparia, etc., and a few brachiopods, worm burrows, trilobite

and other tracks, etc., are also found. In all, the number of species is not

large, and probably not more than fifty have been found. Of these, trilobites

form the larger number, brachiopods coming next.

Most of the beds are thin, but some have a thickness of several feet.

A large portion of the species from the Vermont beds were described, many

of these not having been found elsewhere.

The great beds of roofing slate which are extensively worked in south-

western Vermont are included in the Cambrian.

Remarks with reference to this subject were made by Professors Hitch-

cock, Grabau and Kemp.

Professor Kemp showed a series of cross-sections illustrating in detail

the structural features of the deposits discussed in his paper.

Professor Wherry said in abstract: The Newark series in eastern Penn-

sylvania is divisible into five formations and attains a total thickness of over

20,000 feet. In the upper part there is a large trap sheet, about 1,500 feet

thick, which shows the character of an intrusive sill.

Copper was first mined in this region at Bowman Hill, on the Delaware,

by the Dutch from New Amsterdam, about 1650; but the most important

476 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

early operation was the Old Perkiomen Mine, at Schwenksville, opened

about 1700.

Three types of deposit are known: those connected with trap sills, those

in fissure veins, and those in unaltered shales. Deposits of the first type

show grains and streaks of bornite and chalcopyrite, while brecciated fissures

are filled with these ores and various accessory minerals. The magmatic

origin of the metals in these cases is clear enough, but the source of the

films of malachite and chrysocalla occasionally found in the undisturbed

and unaltered sedimentary rocks is as yet obscure. ‘Though perhaps none

of these deposits is sufficiently rich to repay working, they are not without

their interesting features.

The paper was accompanied by illustrations.

Professor Lewis said in abstract: The intrusive trap that forms the

Palisades of the Hudson extends in outcrops several hundred feet thick

from west of Haverstraw, N. Y., southward to Staten Island and, somewhat

intermittently, westward across New Jersey to the Delaware River, having

an aggregate length of outcrop of about 100 miles.t It is everywhere a

medium- to fine-grained, dark gray, heavy rock, with dense aphanitie facies.

The typical coarser rock contains, in the order of abundance, augite,

plagioclase feldspars, quartz, orthoclase, magnetite and apatite. ‘The first

two occur in ophitic to equant granular textures and the next two in graphic

intergrowths which sometimes constitute as much as one-third of the rock.

In the contact facies, micropegmatite disappears and scattering crystals

of olivine occur.

A highly olivinic ledge, 10 to 20 feet thick and about 50 feet from the base

of the sill, is exposed in the outcrops northward from Jersey City for about

20 miles. The olivine crystals, which constitute 15 to 20 per cent. of the

rock, occur as poikilitic inclusions in the augite and feldspar.

Chemically, the trap ranges from less than 50 per cent. to more than 60

per cent. of silica, with a corresponding variation in alumina, ferric oxide

and the alkalis, while ferrous iron, lime and magnesia vary inversely. ‘The

augite is rich in these latter constituents and poor in alumina, giving a great

preponderance of the hypersthene and diopside molecules. ‘The feldspars

range from orthoclase and albite to basic labradorite. Doubtless there is

always more or less anorthoclase, also, since all feldspar analyses show

potash.

While there is considerable range in the proportions of the minerals,

augite usually comprises about 50 per cent. of the rock, the feldspars about

1J. Volney Lewis, Structure and Correlation of the Newark Trap Rocks of New Jersey,

Bull. Geol. Soc. of Amer., Vol. 18, pp. 195-210; also Origin and Relations of the Newark

Rocks, Ann. Report State Geologist of N. J. for 1906, pp. 97-129.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 477

40 per cent., quartz 5 per cent. and the ores 5 per cent., constituting a quartz-

diabase, with normal-diabase and olivine-diabase facies. In the quantita-

tive system it is chiefly a camptonose (III, 5, 3, 4), with the acidic dacose

(II, 4, 2, 4) facies. The olivinic ledge is palisadose (IV, 1’, 1’, 2), the name

here suggested for this hitherto unnamed subrang.

Slight basic concentration at the contacts, possibly according to Soret’s

principle, followed by differentiation by gravity during crystallization of

the main mass, especially by the settling of olivine and the ores and the

rising of the lighter feldspars in the earlier and more liquid stages of the

magma, accounts for the facies observed and their present relations.

Professor Johnson said in abstract: Two theories have been advanced to

account for the origin of beach cusps. According to one theory, the cusps

result from the accumulation of seaweed along the shore and the breaking

of water through the seaweed barrier, removing sand and gravel where the

break occurs and moulding the remaining deposits into cuspate forms.

According to the second theory, the cusps are formed where intersecting

waves reach the shore. There are serious theoretical objections to both

these theories and still more serious practical objections. Experiments

show that cusps can be formed in the laboratory by parallel waves which

are, in turn, parallel to the beach; and numerous observations seem to show

that they are generally so formed in nature. The cause of cusp formation

is to be found in the physical properties of fluids descending an inclined

plane, as will be shown more fully in a forthcoming paper.

Professor Reed said in abstract: Nantasket Beach consists of several

drumlins tied together and to the mainland by a complex system of tombolos.

Some of the drumlins show sea cliffs now abandoned by the waves. From

the relations of these cliffs and the more ancient of the beaches, the initial

drumlins have been reconstructed. The effect of marine action in cliffing

the drumlins and stringing out the eroded material in successive tombolos

has been followed through, step by step, until the conditions of to-day have

been reached.

The study shows that Nantasket Beach is not the result of the accidental

tying together of a few islands without system, but that it represents one

stage in a long series of evolutionary changes which have occurred in orderly

sequence and in accordance with definite physiographic laws.

Professor Reed’s paper was illustrated and was followed by remarks by

Professor Grabau.

Dr. Berkey said in abstract: The rocks of the Corlandt series are known,

through the work of the late Professor J. D. Dana and that of Professor

H. S. Williams, to occupy an area on the Hudson River just south of

Peekskill, N. Y., and to include a very wide range of granitoid medium to

basic types of igneous rocks.

478 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The writer has had opportunity to see much of these rocks and their

field relations during the past three years. It seems certain that they repre-

sent a case of magmatic differentiation that includes not only the Cortlandt

series, as outlined by Dana and Williams, but two or three occurrences of

typical granite as well. ‘The granite area borders the basic varieties on the

northeast side. Actual contacts of the larger masses are not to be seen, but

an occasional dike of granite cuts the adjacent diorite and gabbros, indicating

a relationship as one of the latest developments. Furthermore, the granite

shows its consanguinity by its heavy soda content, soda-lime feldspar

predominating. It is, however, a very acid granite and introduces a con-

siderably greater range of rock variety, becoming the acid extreme of the

Cortlandt series.

Mr. Hyde said in abstract: The genus Camarophorella has heretofore

been known only by a single species from the Kinderhook at Burlington,

Iowa, and has always been referred to the family Pentameride, order

Protremata, in which only the simplest type of brachial support is known.

Recently obtained material of a second species from Sciotoville, Ohio,

transfers it to the sub-family Meristellinz, in the order Telotremata. ‘This

material is of unusual interest in that it throws a new light on the method of

development of the jugum in certain Athyroid types. It has been supposed

that this portion of the brachidium was formed in the phylogeny of the

group by the growth of two jugal processes, one on the basal whorl of each

cone, and that these united into the shape of an inverted V or U, from the

apex of which a short stem was continued which in time bifurcated, the

arms then lengthening and reuniting with the base of the stem. The

material referred to shows certainly that, in this form at least, the inverted

V or U was formed and that the remainder of the structure was laid down,

probably in a single plate on the surface of the U and not by any such process

as outlined above.

Professor Jaggar said in abstract: The island consists of four prominent

peaks, old Bogoslof at the south, McCulloch Peak steaming actively in the

middle, Metcalf Cone (sometimes called Perry Peak) adjacent to McCulloch

in the north and New Bogoslof or Fire Island (‘‘Grewingk”’), a flat table

rock at the northwest end of the group. These are now all connected by

continuous gravel and sand strips, where in one place there was a broad

channel and seven fathoms of water a year ago.

McCulloch Peak and Metcalf Cone are both products of the slow push-

ing up from beneath the waves of a mass of refractory lava, semi-solid,

crusting and breaking into blocks as it rises, with only the central portions

retaining a semblance of fluidity.

In 1796 Old Bogoslof rose. In 1884 New Bogoslof, Fire Island, came

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 479

into being, and the waves joined the two with bars. In 1891 New Bogoslof

was still steaming. In 1906 Metcalf Cone was reported midway between

Old and New Bogoslof. In July, 1907, Metcalf Cone had broken in two,

and the breaches between the islands were again connected with continuous

land. On September 1, 1907, McCulloch Peak exploded and was wholly

destroyed.

No such extraordinary story of growth and alteration of an island in the

sea has ever been told in the records of science before, and the changes of the

later stages are unique in the annals of vulcanology.

In connection with this paper, sketches were shown illustrating the

remarkable differences in outline of this island at different intervals from

1826 to 1907. It was also illustrated with lantern slides. Remarks in

connection with the subject made by Professor C. H. Hitchcock and Dr.

Henry S. Washington.

Professor Huntington said in abstract: In discussions of the possibility

of some relationship between sunspots and earthquakes or volcanoes, atten-

tion has usually been concentrated upon sunspot maxima. Jensen, an

Australian, however, has plotted the most important earthquakes and

volcanic eruptions for the last century and more, and on comparing his data

with the sunspot curve for the same period finds that there seems to be a

grouping of the terrestrial phenomena at or near the time of sunspot minima.

In order to test the validity of his conclusions, another set of data as to

earthquakes and volcanoes, prepared by Mr. R. W. Sayles for quite a differ-

ent purpose, has been taken and similarly compared with the sunspot curve.

In this case, as in the other, the grouping of terrestrial phenomena at times

of sunspot minima is evident. In order to get rid of the personal equation,

which enters so largely into such studies, and in order to get rid of temporary

or local irregularities, all the data of both Sayles and Jensen have been

averaged together. By repeated averaging of results as to the frequency

and intensity of both earthquakes and volcanoes, the whole body of facts

given by the two investigators, for a period of 117 years in one case and 147

in the other, has been combined into a single curve representing the progress

of volcanic and seismic phenomena during the average sunspot cycle for the

same period. On comparing this curve with the average sunspot curve, it

appears that the minimum of the one coincides exactly with the maxima

of the other and vice versa, and that times of increase in the one set of phe-

nomena are times of decrease in the other. The coincidence cannot possibly

be accidental, for the repeated process of averaging would prevent the two

curves from agreeing unless there were a genuine cause of agreement. The

remarkable nature of the coincidence suggests that there is some common

cause at work, producing a maximum occurrence of earthquakes and

volcanoes upon the earth and a minimum occurrence of spots on the sun.

480 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The data used do not claim to be exhaustive, and the results are advanced as

suggestive, rather than conclusive.

This paper was illustrated with diagrams.

Dr. Washington said in abstract: The island of Pantelleria is entirely

voleanic in origin. Its geologic structure has been variously interpreted,

and the views of the speaker differ in some important respects from those

of other observers, notably Foerstner and Bergeat. ‘There is supposed to

have been formed first a large voleano, covering practically the whole area

and submarine in its first stages. ‘This was composed of rather siliceous

soda-trachytes and later green pantellerites. ‘The central and upper parts

of this cone disappeared, probably by explosion, in analogy with the history

of many other volcanoes, leaving a large central caldera, surrounded by an

encircling somma with steep inner scarps and gentle outer slopes. Within

the caldera arose the cone of the second period, now represented by Montagna

Grande, the summit of which is the culminating point of the island, and

Monte Gibele on the southeast. The lava of these is a very uniform soda-

trachyte. The crater of Monte Gibele seems to have been the original

eruptive center for the joint mass, but later the block of Montagna Grande

was separated from the Gibele cone by a fault, with considerable tilting of

the fault block. On the western and northern sides of this block there were

formed several small parisitic cones, which gave vent to flows of black,

glassy pantellerite. These and the trachytic flows of the Gibele volcano

nearly filled the whole floor of the original caldera, the only portion left

uncovered being a small elliptical lake, which is thus regarded as a residuum

of the old caldera floor and not an eruptive center. The next phase of

eruptive activity was confined to the northwestern part of the island, and the

lavas are entirely feldspar-basalts, forming several small cinder cones, with

flows of scoriaceous basalt. Eruptive activity on the island proper seems

to have ceased and is now evident only in some fumaroles and hot springs.

The rocks show a wide range in chemical composition, but belong to but

few distinct types. They are characterized by high soda, giving rise to the

presence of abundant soda-microcline, e«girite, and the triclinic cossyrite

among the more salic types, and by the high amount of titanium among the

basalts.

The paper was based on a visit made in 1905 and was illustrated with

lantern slides.

After the reading of the papers, there were a few general remarks by

Professor Kemp and others, and arrangements were made for a field excur-

sion to the “‘trap”’ sheets of New Jersey.

The Section then adjourned.

CHARLES P. BERKEY,

Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 481

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

AprIL 13, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. C. Stuart Gager presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Edmund B. Wilson, A Review or THE TYPES OF SEXUAL DIFFERENCES

OF THE CHROMOSOMES.

Clinton G. Abbott, Tur PropaBLE Cause OF THE “BLEATING” OF

SNIPE.

Ralph W. Tower, Tue PropucTION OF SOUND IN THE DRUM-FISH,

THE SEA-ROBIN AND THE TOAD-FISH.

The papers by Professor Wilson and Mr. Abbott were illustrated by

lantern slides and that of the latter by experiments as well. Professor

Tower’s paper was read by title and has been published as pages 149-180

of this volume.

The Section then adjourned.

Roy W. MINER,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

ApRIL 20, 1908.

By permission of Council no meeting was held.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

AprRIL 27, 1908.

Section met in conjunction with the New York Branch of the American

Psychological Association at 4 P. M. at the Psychological Laboratory of

482 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Columbia University, and at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Meyer presiding.

The following program was offered:

Afternoon Session.

R. 8S. Woodworth, IMAGERY OF Time RELATIONS.

H. H. Woodrow, REACTION Time AS INFLUENCED BY THE IRREGULAR

RECURRENCE OF THE STIMULUS.

Will S. Monroe, MEMORIES FOR FACEs.

Edward L. Thorndike, Practise aS A PurELY INTELLECTUAL FUNCTION.

Evening Session.

H. A. Carr, Some INvoLUNTARY ILLUSIONS OF DEPTH.

H. D. Marsh, PsyCcHOLOGICAL IMPLICATES OF CERTAIN LINGUISTIC

EXPRESSIONS.

A. C. Armstrong, Tue Ipea or FEELING In RoussEAvu’s RELIGIOUS

PHILOSOPHY.

Max Eastman, Tue Pragmatic MEANING OF PRAGMATISM.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Woodworth noted the disproportion between our rich supply of

time concepts and our meager perceptual experience of time, and proposed

to test the hypothesis that time concepts were really composed of spatial

concepts or images suffused with a temporal feeling. Mathematically,

time can be represented by a point, or better, a line or plane, moving along

a line or axis, the present being any chosen position of the moving point,

the past to the left, and the future to the right. All units and relations of

time could be accurately represented in such a scheme. On examining a

considerable number of persons, he found that such spatial representations

of time occurred, though seldom, if ever, in a mathematically consistent form.

Spatial forms for the year, as well as for the centuries, and for past and

future, were not uncommon, being apparently considerably more common

than the somewhat similar ‘‘number forms,” though often less distinct and

less clearly conscious. But such time forms are not universally present;

they have been found in about half of the forty individuals so far questioned.

Of those who do not have them, some think of time concretely, 7. e., in terms

of events or changes; while others employ what seem to be purely abstract

concepts of time.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 483

Mr. Woodrow stated that the object of his report was to show that reac-

tion times for regularly recurring stimuli are considerably less than for

irregular, providing the interval between the regularly recurring stimuli

is not too long. As regards the effect of the interval, it was found that if

the stimuli were irregular, there was very little difference in the reaction

time for intervals varying from 0.8 sec. to 10.0 secs., while if the stimuli were

given in regular succession the reaction time remained nearly constant for

intervals from 0.8 sec. to about 4.0 secs., but increased with intervals longer

than 4.0 secs., and at 7.0 secs. was nearly as long for totally irregular stimuli.

Professor Monroe, in presenting the results of experimental work, said

that he had used photographs as the material to be remembered, and that,

by varying the conditions, he had determined several of the factors which

contribute to the remembering or forgetting of a face once seen.

Professor Thorndike reported an experiment in which 28 individuals

multiplied mentally 95 examples, each consisting of a three-place number

with no figure under 3, to be multiplied by a three-place number with no

figure under 3. The work was done so as to occupy approximately sixteen

days. Measuring the efficiency of the process inversely by the time taken

(with an addition for each error of one-tenth of the time per example), it

was found that the median improvement for the 28 individuals was such as

to give a reduction to 42 per cent. of the initial time. Some individuals

improved two and a half times as much as others. The physiological limit

for the function in question was, of course, not reached by any one in so

short an experiment, but one individual, and possibly another also, did reach

a point from which, within the limit of the experiment, no further improve-

ment was made. ‘The apparent differences in the change of rate of improve-

ment were very great. On the supposition that the change of rate of im-

provement was due to one general law plus disturbing factors, the speaker

showed what this law would be on each of the two most likely hypotheses.

The variability amongst individuals increased in the course of the experiment,

at least so far as concerns the differences between the upper quarter and the

lower quarter of the 28 individuals. It would appear, therefore, that the

experiment offered evidence that the influence of the environment is to

accentuate rather than relieve initial inequalities of intellect. The experi-

ment also offered evidence that within the field of so-called attention the

influence of improvement in one mental function spreads little to other

functions than it.

Dr. Carr gave a descriptive account of 48 cases gathered from a census

of 350 students. The phenomenon consists of illusory transitions of the

distance location of visual objects in the course of normal experience. The

most pronounced fact was the lack of uniformity. The experiences were

484 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

described under such headings as: the kind of illusion, extent of visual

field involved, character, direction, magnitude and rate of movement,

changes in size and distinctness of the perceptual objects, degree of control

possible; and such essential conditions as: fatigue, mental absorption,

ocular defects, steady fixation, etc. No explanation was attempted.

Dr. Marsh showed how the study of the frequency of occurrence of

sweeping terms, extensive and intensive, in diverse writings, could be made

to yield valuable “internal evidence” regarding the authorship, and espe-

cially regarding personal and social characteristics. ‘The intensive series

of words included such positives as all, every, always, whoso, whatsoever,

etc., and such negatives as no (adjective), none, nothing, no more, never,

etc. The frequency of these words per 1,000 lines was determined for

practically every book of the Bible, and it was found possible, with this

single series of words, to follow most of the conclusions of the “higher

critics’ regarding disputed writings, both as to whole books and as to parts

of books; and this with a high degree of reliability. Supplemented by an

intensive series, this method would apparently work well.

A comparison of the first ten books of the Old Testament with the

longest ten in the New Testament showed 33 per cent. more positives and

50 per cent. less negatives in the Old Testament. ‘The following interpre-

tations of this difference are suggested.

1. Biologically, it means lower vs. higher development, doing vs.

thinking, prophet and law, warrior and deed in the earlier period vs. teacher

and preaching, thinker and doctrine in the later period. Faith, the product

of bodily action, tends to exaggeration by positives; while doubt, due to

mental activity, tends to exaggeration by negatives.

2. Sociologically, it means great social solidarity vs. relative individual-

ity. The Hebrews, as selected and protected by Almighty Jehovah, devel-

oped a strong national pride and unanimity of thought and action; and this

““crowd-spirit”” — in the scientific sense — accounts for many irresponsible

generalizations, since their prodigious national pride ‘“‘not only idealized

but magnified the past” in many references to it.

3. Psychologically, it means spontaneous imitation vs. intellectual

initiative. Imitation tends to exclusions of negatives, while increasing

intellectual horizon brings questionings and oppositions to accepted views.

Sections rich in positives, as the writings of Paul and the first twelve chapters

of Joshua, often indicate strong individualities, men of unrivaled force of

character, of energetic action against great opposition. ‘The masterful man

in deed is likely, we infer, to put these things strongly in expression.

Professor Armstrong said in abstract: Rousseau’s religious philosophy

was based on inner sentiment. The sentiment intérieur is subjective in the

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 485

sense of the individual and in the sense of the inward. From both its indi-

viduality and its inwardness proceeds its certitude — which Rousseau

highly values —and which depends also on a farther characteristic, the

immediacy of the “inner light.” Nevertheless, the sentiment intérieur is

not exclusively affective in its nature, and, when purely emotional, may

vary through a wide range of affective experience. At its lowest level it

amounts to the satisfaction of desire by religious ideas and principles. Or

it may become shallow sentimentalism, as in the second half of the Nouvelle

Héloise. A third and higher stage is the phase of pure religious aspiration,

while in a fourth form it develops into an appreciation of religious values.

This evaluating factor in Rousseau’s religious thinking has been neglected,

but it can be shown by quotation from many of his writings. In general,

it is evident that the idea of feeling in Rousseau requires careful analysis

before well-grounded inferences can be drawn from his doctrine concerning

either psychological or historical or constructive questions.

Mr. Eastman said that pragmatism, in intellectualist terms, is skepti-

cism with its logical consequences developed; and in pragmatist terms,

the rejection of metaphysics as a serious discipline. ‘This was shown to be

consistent with the origin of pragmatism in the biological attitude, which was

developed in the writings of such philosophic scientists as Huxley and

Clifford. It was then shown that as a dialectic implication of Mr. James’s

definition of meaning, metaphysics proper becomes not the most divine

science, but the most meaningless science. It was stated that his failure to

grasp this negative aspect of his definition is what gives obscurity to the

whole contents and procedure of his book; it is what gives rise to the technical

error of thinking that pragmatism is a confused and unthinkable theory,

and the popular error of thinking it is a philosophy which consists in con-

gratulating yourself upon your own prejudices.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

SPECIAL MEETING.

APRIL 30, 1908.

The following public lecture was given through codperation with the

Linnean Society of New York and the American Museum of Natural

History:

Richard Kearton, Caterham, England, Witp Birps at Home.

EpmunpD Otis Hovey,

Secretary.

486 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

BUSINESS MEETING.

May 4, 1908.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Grabau presiding in the absence of President

Cox.

Dr. Charles P. Berkey was appointed Secretary pro-tem. in the absence

of the Recording Secretary.

There being no business to transact, the Academy adjourned.

CHARLES P. BERKEY,

Secretary pro-tem.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

May 4, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

Fifteen persons were present.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

J. E. Hyde, THE WAVERLY SERIES OF OHIO.

W. 0. Crosby, Bracu Cusps AND RELATED PHENOMENA.

George F. Kunz, Notres on JADE.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Hyde said in abstract: The Waverly series of Ohio comprises six

well-defined formations, which are named as follows, in descending order:

Logan formation,

Black Hand formation,

Cuyahoga formation,

Sunbury shale,

Berea grit,

Bedford shale.

Of these, the three lowermost extend, with little change in nature, entirely

across the State from the northeast corner to the Ohio River. The three

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 487

upper formations are sometimes removed entirely or in part by the erosion

plane which separates the Coal-Measures from the Mississippian formations,

but when present are far more variable and show the results of control by

local factors during sedimentation.

At present all we know concerning the age of these formations is based

almost entirely on the work of Professor C. L. Herrick. Fossils, when

present at all, are confined almost entirely to the upper half of the series.

The Logan at present is correlated with the Burlington and Keokuk for-

mations or Osage of the Mississippi Valley; the Black Hand and possibly

the upper part of the Cuyahoga, with the Kinderhook. Little is known of

the faunas of the lower half, as very few fossils have been found. From

collections made in the Ohio River, it seems likely that the Osage fauna

came in from the southwest and appeared at the point while the Kinder-

hook forms still lingered in the central part of the State.

Professor Crosby indicated the possible dependence of many pitting and

grooving effects upon an oscillatory movement of water and air.

Dr. Kunz announced the death of Dr. E.S. F. Arnold and moved that a

committee be appointed to draft resolutions. The following were appointed

on this committee: Messrs. Kunz, Levison and Berkey.

The Section then adjourned.

CHARLES P. BERKEY,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

May 11, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Chapman presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Frank M. Chapman, AN ORNITHOLOGICAL TRIP TO SOUTHERN FLORIDA.

N. L. Britton, RECENT BoTANICcAL EXPLORATIONS IN JAMAICA.

Marshall A. Howe, Somer Typrs or CoRALLINE ALG.

All of the papers were illustrated with lantern slides and a brief discus-

sion followed the reading of each, after which Mr. C. W. Beebe, of the

New York Zodlogical Park, gave a preliminary account of his recent ex-

pedition to Venezuela.

The Section then adjourned.

Roy W. MIner,

Secretary.

488 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

May 18, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Hering presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

J. P. Simmons, Note on A Currous Errect PRODUCED BY THE

EXPpLosION OF DETONATING Gas.

William Campbell and R. F. Bohler, THe Heat TREATMENT oF CARBON

Too. STEELS.

Charles Lane Poor, AN INVESTIGATION OF THE FIGURE OF THE SUN

AND OF POossIBLE VARIATIONS IN ITS SIZE AND

SHAPE.

Charles Lane Poor, THe PHOTOHELIOMETER.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Simons said in abstract: When a mixture of oxygen and hydrogen

is exploded in a tube, the inside of which is coated with a thin layer of water,

perfect rings are formed. ‘The same phenomenon has been noticed when

the same kind of a gas mixture is exploded in a tube, the inside of which is

coated with a thin layer of wax. ‘This is a heating effect, since the rings

formed in the tube covered with wax are made apparent by the melting of

the latter substance. ‘This periodic heating is probably due to compressions

arising from either sound or explosion waves.

Professor Campbell and Mr. Bohler, in their paper, first classified the

various constituents of unhardened and hardened high carbon steels; namely,

cementite, pearlite, ferrite, graphite, austenite, martensite, troostite, os-

mondite and sorbite, and gave in tabular form the views of the different

authorities on their constitution. The plan of study embraced (1) heating

to various temperatures and (a) slow cooling, (b) quenching, (c) tempering;

(2) the effects of forging temperature and quenching temperature, to see

whether the structure gave any evidence whether overheating had taken

place during forging at the works of the manufacturer or during reheating

for hardening at the user’s, in the case of faulty material; also whether this

persisted after tempering. Only the maximum forging temperature left

any traces after quenching and this was much above that used in practise.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 489

Tables and curves showing variation of physical properties with heat-

treatment were given, and the various structures were illustrated by numer-

ous lantern slides.

Professor Poor’s papers were read by title, and the “Investigation of the

Figure of the Sun, etc.” has been printed as pages 385-424 of this volume.

The Section then adjourned.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

OcToBER 5, 1908.

The Academy met at 8:20 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Cox presiding.

The minutes of the regular meetings of 6 April and 4 May were read and

approved.

The following candidates for election to the Academy, recommended by

Council, were duly elected:

For Active Membership:

Henry Smith Pritchett, 22 East 91st St.,

H. A. C. de Rubio, care of Maitland, Coppell & Co., 52 William St.

For Associate Membership:

Harold Chapman Brown, Columbia University.

Council reported the death of the following members of the Academy:

George Chapman Caldwell, Corresponding Member for 32 years,

W. H. Chandler, Corresponding Member for 30 years,

Albert de Lapparent, Corresponding Member for 8 years,

Albert B. Prescott, Corresponding Member for 29 years,

Thomas Fitch Rowland, Life Member for 2 years,

George H. Yeaman, Active Member for 1 year.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

490 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

OctToBER 5, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

Thirty persons were present.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

W. O. Crosby, OUTLINE OF THE GEOLOGY OF LonG ISLAND.

James F. Kemp, THE PropucTION or Low GRADE CopPpER ORE IN

THE WEsT.

Charles P. Berkey, LimeEsSTONES INTERBEDDED WITH THE FoRDHAM

GNEISS OF NEw York City.

Amadeus W. Grabau,CoNTINENTAL FORMATION OF THE AMERICAN PAL-

EOZOIC.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Crosby’s paper has been published as pages 425-429 of this

volume.

Professor Kemp presented a brief description of the recent development

of the so-called “‘low-grade”’ copper mines in Bingham Cajon, Utah, and at

Ely, Nevada. By means of maps, the geographical situation was made

clear and the geological relations were outlined. ‘The ores consist of bodies

of silicified and brecciated porphyry, impregnated with chalcocite. They

are mined by means of steam shovels, in huge open cuts. ‘They range in

copper from less than two to two and a half per cent. copper. ‘The operation

was based upon visits made the past summer.

Professor Berkey, in 1907, published a discussion of the “Structural and

Stratigraphic Features of the Basal Gneisses of the Highlands,” based

upon work in that area for the New York State Survey. The conclusions

announced were that the oldest gneisses of the Highlands are essentially

the same in origin, age and character as the Fordham of New York City.

At the same time numerous small occurrences of very impure crystalline

limestone were interpreted as interbedded members of this old series asso-

ciated closely with especially quartzose and micaceous facies of the formation,

all together indicating a metamorphic recrystallization of an original sedi-

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 491

mentary series. The limestones of the area, therefore, are separable into at

least two widely different types — one type belonging to and of the same age

as the Fordham, all of the others much later and possibly themselves complex.

At that time, however, no interbedded limestones were known as such

in New York City, the type locality of the true Fordham. ‘The author

announced the discovery of such beds at three different points within the

city during the past summer. One of these at Jerome Park Reservoir and

205th Street had been previously mapped and heretofore interpreted as a

small in-fold, a closely pinched syncline, involving some of the overlying

Inwood Limestone in the closed trough. Recent excavations at this locality

show that the calcareous beds stand almost vertical and are perfectly con-

formable to the banded structure of the rather micaceous Fordham on both

sides. The total width of the calcareous beds is about 27 feet. Nearly

central is a 7 X 10 foot bed of much more massive limestone than either

flank. Altogether there are no less than 26 alternating measurable bands

or layers of serpentinous and chondroditic coarsely crystalline dolomite

limestone and a quartzose schist. Of the thirteen bands of quartzose

schist, eight are on one side of the large central limestone bed and five on

the other. The thicknesses of the successive corresponding bands on oppo-

site sides likewise do not agree. ‘These facts are taken as sufficient evidence

that the occurrence is a true interbed. The mineral. chondrodite is

abundant.

The other two cases are even more decisive as to relation. ‘They are

both on 196th Street, east of Jerome Avenue. In one the narrow limestone

bed is part of a simple anticline in which the association of beds is such as to

exclude any possible connection with an overlying formation. ‘Two other

beds are separated from each other and this by typical micaceous Fordham.

The Fordham, therefore, at its type locality does carry interbedded

limestones similar to those in the gneisses of the Highlands, and these beds

are much older and entirely distinct from the overlying Inwood.

Professor Grabau said in abstract: Since the early ideas regarding the

formation of sedimentary rocks developed in the British Isles, it is not

surprising that geologists have so generally come to regard all strata as

either marine sediments or deposits found in fresh-water lakes. Only when

the extensive desert areas of the world came under the observation of geolo-

gists, chiefly from the continent of Europe, was an attempt made to interpret

the history of stratified rocks by an application of the new lithogenetic

processes thus observed. In this work German stratigraphers have taken

the lead, though physiographers were among the first to insist on the more

rational interpretation demanded by the characteristics and structure of the

formations in question. While the Jura-Trias rock beds of western North

492 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

America have been more or less generally, though by no means invariably,

accepted in this country as representative of continental sedimentation, an

interpretation more recently extended to some of the western representatives

of these formations, and while in recent years the Tertiary formations of the

interior have slowly come to be regarded as river and eolian rather than lake

deposits, the Paleozoic sediments of North America are still referred to as

of marine or estuarine origin by most American geologists. A noteworthy

exception to this widespread adherence to inherited ideas is shown in the

recent studies of Barrell and others, in which the continental origin of certain

American Paleozoic strata was clearly demonstrated.

The following table gives those formations which in part or in whole

show evidence of continental (chiefly fluvial and eolian) rather than a

marine origin. In a few cases, as in the Oriskany, a continental (eolian)

formation has been remarked by the transgressing sea, so as to secondarily

have a marine character impressed upon it.

Permie.

Donkard formation. Cimmaron and other

Red beds in part.

Carbonic.

Monongahela Weber and

Connamaugh Bingham quartzytes, etc.

Alleghany generally with a number

Kanawha of marine inter-

Pottsville calations.

Mississippic.

Mauch Chunk

Pocono Waverly in part.

Devonic.

Catskill

Oneonta

Sherburne (typical)

Oriskany — Esopus (in part).

Silurie.

Sylvania sandstone.

Saline formations including Longwood shale series and Shawangunk con-

glomerate.

Tuscarora,— Clinch — upper Medina (in part).

Ordovicie.

Juniata — Bays — Queenston.

Tyrone (“Oneida” in part of Pennsylvania geologists)

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 493

St. Peter Sandstone — Ogden Quartzite — Eureka Quaritzite.

Cambric.

Potsdam, in part, Basal sands and conglomerates of many regions.

The Section then adjourned.

CHARLES P. BERKEY,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

OcToBER 12, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Chapman presiding.

The program consisted of the following illustrated lecture given through

coéperation with the American Museum of Natural History:

Dr. Hans Gadow, THE VotcaNo or JoruLLO, Mexico; History, FEa-

TURES, REPOPULATION OF THE DISTRICT BY ANIMALS

AND PLANTS.

Roy W. MIneEr,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

OcToBER 19, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Hering presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

As a quorum was not present, the nomination of the Chairman of the

Section was postponed. On account of the poor attendance, the advisa-

bility of holding bi-monthly meetings was discussed.

The Section then adjourned.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

494 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

OcTOBER 26, 1908.

Section met in conjunction with the American Ethnological Society at

8:15 P. M., General Wilson presiding.

The following program was offered:

R. H. Lowie, AN ErHnotocicaL TRIP TO THE CHIPEWAYAN INDIANS.

Paul Radin, An ErunoxocicaL Trip TO THE WINNEBAGO INDIANS.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Lowie briefly described the experiences of a summer expedition under

the auspices of the American Museum of Natural History. He first visited

the Chipewayan Indians of Lake Athabasca, who present a curious mixture

of primitiveness and civilization. Essentially primitive in their economic

life, subsisting primarily by fishing and the chase, they have become funda-

mentally modified in both industrial and mental life by the overshadowing

influence of the Hudson’s Bay Company and the Catholic missionaries. A

very different condition was found among the Assiniboine of Montana, who,

though largely devoted to agricultural pursuits under the United States

government, preserve to a considerable extent the essential characteristics

of Indian belief and religious practice. The speaker described their cere-

monial organization, which presents many homologies to the military

societies of other Plains tribes.

Mr. Radin stated that the Winnebago Indians had lost most of their

native industries; they live now in frame houses; they retain only three of

their dances; they have no clan ceremonial, though they still give clan

names and recognize the “upper” or “heavenly” clans and the “lower” or

“earthly” clans. The myths regarding the origins of the clans have much

similarity to one another. Only the thunder bird and the bear clans seem

to have had any special functions. The bear clan comprised the warriors

and had the right of punishment. There are set names for the children,

which must be given in every family. Taboo exists against the maternal

aunt, but the opposite is in force towards the paternal uncle.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. Woopworts,

Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 495

BUSINESS MEETING.

NovEMBER 2, 1908.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, President Cox presiding.

The minutes of the regular meeting of 5 October were read and approved.

Council reported the death of the following members of the Academy:

Morgan Dix, Active Member for 31 years,

James D. Hague, Active Member for 1 year,

Haslett McKim, Active Member for 11 years.

The Recording Secretary then read a letter from Professor H. H. Rusby,

recommending that the Academy devote part of its meetings during the

coming year to debating the essential principles espoused by Darwin and the

data on which he based them. The Academy showed by the remarks of

members that Professor Rusby’s recommendations were received with

approval.

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunpb Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

NovEMBER 2, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

Sixty persons were present.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The chairman announced that it would be necessary to nominate at this

meeting both a chairman and a secretary of the Section,— the chairman to be

also one of the Vice-Presidents of the Academy.

, The name of Professor J. J. Stevenson was proposed by members J. F.

Kemp and E. O. Hovey for the office of Chairman of the Section. A

motion that the Secretary should cast the ballot of the Section for Professor

Stevenson was carried. After the ballot was cast, Professor Stevenson was

declared duly nominated.

i’ Dr. Charles P. Berkey was then renominated to the office of Secretary

of the Section and was duly elected.

496 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Announcement was then made of the courses of lectures on Physiography,

to be given at Columbia University by Professor Penck of Berlin, beginning

Wednesday, November 4, 1908.

The following program was then offered:

Edmund Otis Hovey, A CoNTRIBUTION TO THE History or Mr. PELE,

MARTINIQUE.

SUMMARY OF PAPER.

Dr. Hovey described, with the aid of many lantern slides, the conditions

on and near Mt. Pelé during the visits of the author in May—July, 1902,

February—April, 1903, and April-May, 1908, and illustrated particularly

the devastation wrought by the early eruptions, the disposition and dis-

tribution of material thrown out by the volcano, the building up of the spine

of 1902-1903 and its subsequent destruction, the advance of erosion since

the cessation of eruptions and the restoration of vegetation in St. Pierre and

upon the flanks of the mountain. The paper also described the area of

fumaroles in the valley of the Riviére Claire and gave the arguments for the

probability of these being true fumaroles. Temperature observations were

made also in the great fissures of the new cone, where, by means of an

electric pyrometer, temperatures as high as 515° C. (959° F.) were obtained.

The Section then adjourned.

CHARLES P. BERKEY,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

NovEMBER 9, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Chapman presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Barnum Brown, PALEONTOLOGICAL EXPLORATIONS OF THE AMERICAN

Museum DurInG THE SUMMER OF 1908.

Raymond C. Osburn, CoLLEcTING Bry0zoA AT THE TORTUGAS AND BEAU-

FORT STATIONS.

Frank M. Chapman, NoTEs oN THE FisH Hawk.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 497

The following business was then transacted:

Mr. Frank M. Chapman was nominated to the Council for Chairman

of the Section and Vice-President of the Academy for the year 1909.

The Section then adjourned.

Roy W. Miner,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

NovEMBER 16, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Hering presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

E. F. Kern, ON THE ELEcTROLYTIC REFINING OF IRON.

William Campbell, Usz or METALLOGRAPHY IN CERTAIN PROBLEMS IN

ORE-DRESSING.

William Campbell, A Visit To Nova Scotia; THE COLLIERIES AND THE

IRON AND STEEL PLANTS.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Kern first reviewed the previous work on this subject. First, electro-

plating iron upon the surface of engraved copper plates to obtain a hard

facing; then the work of Burgess and Hambueschen, of Gee, of Neuburger

and von Klobukow, of Skrabel, of Maximowitsch, of Cowper-Coles. The

electrolytes which have been most generally used are neutral solutions of

ferrous sulphate or ferrous chloride containing respectively the sulphates

or chlorides of ammonium. Smoother deposits were obtained by the

presence of magnesium sulphate in an electrolyte and ferrous ammonium

sulphate; by stirring the electrolyte; at a temperature of 60-70° C. Oxida-

tion retarded by addition of glycerine. Precipitation of basic salts prevented

by adding just sufficient acid to clear the solution. ‘The iron deposited was

a hard brittle crystalline mass, over 99.9 % pure.

From experiments performed in the Department of Metallurgy at Colum-

bia University, it was found that neutral ferrous fluosilicate electrolytes are

not suitable, as they are slowly decomposed, with the separation out of silica.

Good deposits were obtained from neutral electrolytes containing either

8 % iron as Fe SO, or 6 % Fe and 3 % Naas sulphates or 8 % Fe and 4 %

498 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Na as chlorides, with a current density of 10 to 20 amps. per sq. ft. and a

temperature of 50° C, the E. M. F. for the first solution was 0.8 to 0.95

volts, for the second 0.5 to 0.85 volts, for the third 0.4 to 0.5 volts.

The paper concluded with a discussion of the costs of electrolytic refining

of iron.

Dr. Campbell, in the course of his paper, showed that the structure of

certain magnetic lead ores from the Frisco Mine, Idaho, was a fine-grained

complex containing magnetite, quartz, calcite and other gangue, blende

and galena, which were deposited in about that order. Zinc-lead middlings

from the jigs were concentrated by Dings separators into zinc-rich which

passed through and lead-rich which was taken out by the magnets.

The structure of a zinc ore from the Graphic Mine, Kelly, N. M., at

ground-water level, was shown to be mainly rosettes and compact masses

of specular hematite with zinc blende in the interstitial spaces. Some

pyrite and chalcopyrite occurred and the order of deposition was seen to be

pyrite, hematite, chalcopyrite, blende and a little gangue.

The unsuccessful attempts to concentrate nickel magnetically in nickeli-

ferous pyrrhotites was shown to be in part due to the fine condition of the

pentlandite. Slides illustrating the structure of ores from Sudbury, St.

Stephens, N. B., Gap Mine, Pa., Sohland, Germany, and Scandinavian

localities were shown.

Dr. Campbell, in his second paper, said in abstract: The visit was made

with the Canadian Mining Institute during the summer. The collieries

of the Dominion Coal Company at Glace Bay and of the Nova Scotia Steel

Company at Sydney Mines were shown. At the Dominion Iron and Steel

Company the various piers, with mechanical unloaders for ore from New-

foundland, the loading of steel rails, etc., were seen. Four blast-furnaces,

ore-beds for winter stock, blowing engines, etc., two Bessemer converters,

ten open-hearth furnaces, rail mill, rod mill, coke ovens and coal washery.

The Nova Scotia Steel and Coal Company has coal and ore piers at North

Sydney, with two steam Wellman Seaver Morgan ore unloading cranes.

Wabana ore from Bell Is., N. F., averages 55% Fe. One blast-furnace,

200 tons a day. Three 40-ton Basic open hearth furnaces and one rolling

furnace of 180 tons used as mixer. Ingots are sent to the rolling mills at

New Glasgow. The coke ovens and coal washer were also visited.

The further business of the evening consisted of the nomination of

Sectional officers for 1909. Professor D. W. Hering was duly nominated

to the Council for Vice-President and Chairman. Professor W. Campbell

was elected Secretary.

The Section then adjourned.

WILLIAM CAMPBELL,

Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 499

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

NovEMBER 23, 1908.

Section met in conjunction with the New York Branch of the American

Psychological Association at 4 P. M. at Schermerhorn Hall, Columbia

University, Professor Pillsburg presiding, and at 8:15 P. M. at the American

Museum of Natural History, Professor Woodworth presiding.

The following program was offered:

Afternoon Session.

H. H. Woodrow, Tue MrAnine oF RHYTHMICAL GROUPING.

H. L. Hollingworth, THE INDIFFERENCE PoINT.

J. V. Breitwieser, THe Errect oF VARYING RESISTANCE ON REACTION

TIME.

Evening Session.

F. J. E. Woodbridge, MenTAL OPERATIONS AND THEIR MATERIAL.

W. P. Montague, CONSCIOUSNESS AND ENERGY.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Woodrow performed, in connection with his paper, experiments on

auditory rhythm in which the intensity, duration and intervals of the sounds

were independently and systematically varied, and the judgment of the

observer was required as to the sort of rhythm perceived. By comparison

of the results of this experiment with another in which judgment of intervals

was called for, it was found that the two sorts of judgment correspond so

closely as to lead to the conclusion that the rhythmical grouping is essentially

a matter of time judgment.

Mr. Hollingworth said in abstract: The point at which the positive

constant error in the reproduction of small magnitudes (here extents of arm

movement) passes over into the negative error in the reproduction of large

magnitudes was found to depend on the series of magnitudes used. When

only one magnitude is used in a series of reproductions, no great constant

error appeared, whatever the magnitude. When a series of magnitudes

was used together, the indifference point lay always near the middle of the

series. Whatever the absolute magnitudes in the series, it always contains

500 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

an indifference point, and this can be displaced upwards by adding to the

series at its upper end, and downward by adding to its lower end.

Mr. Breitwieser said in abstract: Resistances, varying from 50 to 6000

grammes, were introduced into the reactor’s key in the reaction time experi-

ment, with the result that the reaction was quickest with the least resistance,

and progressively slower as the resistance was increased. Tapping tests

were made with the same gradations of resistance, and with the same result.

A key was devised which permitted measurement of the excess of muscular

pressure on the key in making the reaction; the greater excesses seemed to

go with the quicker reactions, but the excess diminished with practise.

Professor Woodbridge advocated the view that a single sense organ, with

the reacting apparatus attached to it, did not furnish the material for any-

thing that could be called mind, or that could be distinguished from physical

processes. The coéperation and correlation of the activities connected with

two or more sense organs constitute mental operations.

Professor Montague set forth the outlines of a doctrine identifying con-

sciousness with potential energy. His presentation was followed by a dis-

cussion, which brought out difficulties in the conception, as well as facts in

its favor.

The Section then adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

DECEMBER 7, 1908.

The Academy met at 8:15 P. M. at the American Museum of. Natural

History, President Cox presiding. ;

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following candidates for election as Active Members, recommended

by the Council, were duly elected:

Severo Y. Aguirre, Chihuahua, Mexico,

William M. Campbell, New York University,

Roy C. Andrews, American Museum of Natural History.

Announcement was then made that the annual meeting of the Academy

would be held at the Hotel Endicott at 6:45 P. M., December 21, followed

by the annual dinner. 5

The Academy then adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 501

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

DECEMBER 7, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Grabau presiding.

Eighty persons were present.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

James F. Kemp, Our KNOWLEDGE OF THE FILLED CHANNEL OF THE

Hupson IN THE HIGHLANDS AND THE SUBMERGED

GORGE ON THE CONTINENTAL SHELF.

Charles P. Berkey, A SUMMARY OF AN INVESTIGATION INTO THE STRUCTURAL

GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MANHATTAN AND THE

CONDITION OF THE East RIVER CHANNEL.

Edmund Otis Hovey, Some or THE LatTEsT RESULTS OF EXPLORATIONS IN

THE Hupson River aT New York City.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Kemp gave a summary of the results of borings in the channels

and buried valleys of the Hudson and its tributaries, all pointing to a former

elevation of this portion of the continent. The speaker showed that a much

greater depth is now known in the Hudson itself at Storm King Mountain

than at any other point in the whole drainage system except on the submerged

continental shelf, where soundings have proven a very deep gorge which

probably represents the Pre-Pleistocene Hudson channel.

Dr. Berkey exhibited the results indicated in his paper on a large scale

map of Southern Manhattan. The work is based upon personal examina-

tion of several hundred drill borings with an attempt to identify the rocks

penetrated. It seems certain that southern Manhattan is not wholly schist,

as formerly mapped, but that the east side is made up of the usual succession

of folded Fordham gneiss, Inwood limestone and Manhattan schist.

The East River channel is, in comparison with the Hudson, a very unim-

portant one. In this lower portion, it is essentially a very small drowned

tributary.

Dr. Hovey exhibited and discussed borings made by the engineers for the

Pennsylvania Railroad Tunnel across the Hudson on the line of Thirty-

second Street. He showed that bed rock has been found at approximately

502 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

300 feet in each of three deep holes. ‘The middle one of these is on the state

line in mid-river and the other two lie at about equal distances on either side,

the total space being over 2,000 feet. The profile is uniform and gentle in

slope, except at the margins. But the interesting question is whether or not

a narrow inner gorge may occur. Seeing that the proven depth of channel

in the Highlands is at least 350 feet deeper than so far discovered at New

York City, the Hudson problem must still be considered an open one.

Remarks were made by Mr. Cook and by Mr. Jacobs, engineer for the

Pennslyvania Tunnel Company, and by Mr. Flinn, Department Engineer

of the New York City Board of Water Supply on the general problem of the

Hudson gorge.

The Section then adjourned.

CHARLES P. BEerRKEY,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

DECEMBER 14, 1908.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. F. A. Lucas presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

W. T. Hornaday, AN EXPLORATION OF THE PiNACATE LAvA REGION IN

NORTHWESTERN MExico.

L. Hussakof, On a NEw Species oF GOBLIN SHARK (Scapano-

rhynchus) FROM JAPAN.

Mary C. Dickerson, Woops Lire In THE NEw ENGLAND WINTER.

The Section then adjourned.

Roy W. MINER,

Secretary.

ANNUAL MEETING.

DECEMBER 21, 1908.

The Academy met for the Annual Meeting on Monday, December 21,

1908, at 7:15 P. M. at the Hotel Endicott, President Cox in the chair.

The minutes of the last Annual Meeting, December 16, 1907, were read

and approved.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 503

Reports were presented by the Recording Secretary, the Corresponding

Secretary, the Librarian and the Editor, all of which, on motion, were ordered

received and placed on file. They are published herewith.

The Treasurer presented a detailed report showing a net cash balance of

$193.56 on hand at the close of business November 30, 1908. On motion,

this report was received and referred to the Finance Committee for audit.

The following candidates for Honorary Membership and Fellowship,

recommended by Council, were duly elected:

Honorary Members.

Professor Eduard Strasburger of Bonn, Germany,

Professor Kakichi Mitsukuri, Director of the College of Science,

Imperial University, Tokyo, Japan,

Professor Wilhelm Ostwald of the Royal Society of Natural Sciences

of Leipzig, Germany.

Fellows.

Charles P. Berkey, Ph.D., Columbia University,

Charles L. Pollard, Ph.D., Staten Island Assn. of Arts and Sciences.

The Academy then proceeded to the election of officers for the year 1909,

Mr. C. William Beebe and Dr. George F. Kunz having been appointed as

tellers. The ballots prepared by the Council according to the By-laws were

distributed, and after the votes had been counted the following officers were

declared unanimously elected, thirty-three votes having been cast by members

of the Academy entitled to vote:

President, CHARLES F. Cox.

Vice-Presidents, J. J. STEVENSON (Section of Geology and Mineralogy),

Frank M. CuHapman (Section of Biology), D. W.

Herne (Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemis-

try), Maurice FisHpere (Section of Anthropology and

Psychology).

Recording Secretary, Epvmunp Otis Hovey.

Corresponding Secretary, Hermon Carey Bumpvs.

Treasurer, Emerson McMiItirn.

Librarian, RatpH W. Tower.

Editor, Epmunp Otis Hovey.

Councilors (to serve 3 years), Franz Boas, Henry E."Crampron.

Finance Committee, CHARLES F. Cox, Grorce F. Kunz, FREDERICK

S. Ler.

504 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The members of the Academy and their friends, to the number of seventy-

three, then sat down together at dinner, after which the retiring President,

Mr. Charles F. Cox, delivered his formal address upon “Charles Darwin

and the Mutation Theory.” ‘This address has been published as pages

431-451 of this volume.

After a vote of thanks, which was put with apt remarks by former-

President Henry F. Osborn, the Academy adjourned.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Secretary.

REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.

During the year 1908, the Academy held 8 business meetings and 28

sectional meetings, at which 96 stated papers and 4 lectures were presented

on the following subjects:

Geology, 31 papers, 1 lecture,

Mineralogy, y

Biology,

Entomology,

Ornithology,

Paleontology,

Zoology,

Botany,

Ethnology,

Archeology and

Anthropology, 3

Psychology, NS alae

Astronomy, Dien te

Chemistry, Cae

Dow we NS bb

Four public lectures by noted home and foreign scientists have been

given at the Museum to the members of the Academy and the Affiliated

Societies and their friends. These lectures were as follows:

‘Some Recent Discoveries in Insect Parasitism and the Practical Hand-

ling of Parasites.” By Dr. Leland O. Howard, of Washington,

D. C. (Through codperation with the New York and Brooklyn

Entomological Societies.) Attendance, 75.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 505

“Wild Birds at Home.” By R. Kearton, Esq., of Caterham, England.

(Through coéperation with the Linnzan Society of New York and

the American Museum of Natural History.) Attendance, 159.

“The Volcano of Jorullo, Mexico; History, Features, Repopulation of

the District by Animals and Plants.” By Professor Hans Gadow,

of Cambridge, England. (Through coéperation with the American

Museum of Natural History.) Attendance, 153.

“Mechanical Response of Plants.” By Sir Jagadis Chunder Bose,

M. A., D. Se., of Calcutta, India. (Before the Torrey Botanical

Club.) Attendance, 103.

An event of note to those interested in geology and related subjects was

the spring conference which was held on Monday, the 6th of April, by the

Section of Geology and Mineralogy. Invitations to participate were sent

to societies, institutions and individual geologists in New England, New

York, New Jersey and eastern Pennsylvania, and the response was so

general that two sessions were required for the presentation of the 19 papers

offered. ‘The afternoon session was held at Columbia University and the

evening session at the American Museum of Natural History.

Considerable energy has been expended during the year in preparation

for the celebration, on the 12th of February, 1909, of the centenary of the

birth of the famous naturalist, Charles Darwin, and the semi-centennial

of the ‘Origin of Species,” information as to which has been sent, from

time to time, to the members of the Academy and the Affiliated Societies.

Much remains to be done, but your officers anticipate an event of more than

usual importance to the local scientific public.

At the present time the membership of the Academy includes 460 Active

Members, 11 of whom are Associate Active Members, and 126 Fellows.

The election of 2 Fellows is pending. ‘There have been 12 deaths during

the year, 35 resignations, 7 names have been dropped from last year’s roll

on account of not completing membership, 1 has been transferred to the list

of Non-resident Members and 1 Associate has been dropped on account of

non-payment of dues. ‘The new members elected during the year number

18, two of whom have not yet completed their membership. As the mem-

bership of the Academy a year ago was 500, there has been a net loss of 40

during 1908. Announcement is made with regret of the loss by death of the

following members:

Rey. M. E. Dwight, Active Member ( 3 years),

Wm. H. S. Wood, . (AEE

Thomas Jefferson Hurley, “ e ( 1 year ),

Morris K. Jesup, " " (15 years),

506 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Prof. William Stratford, Active Member (13 years),

Isador Wormser, om ae ( 1 year ),

Dr. E. S. F. Arnold, i * (28 years),

Thomas F. Rowland, Life Member since 1906,

George H. Yeaman, Active Member ( 1 year ),

Rey. Dr. Morgan Dix, * x (31 years),

James D. Hague, mt zi (1 year);

Rey. Haslett McKim, ii v (11 years).

Respectfully submitted.

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Recording Secretary.

REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY.

During the past year the usual biennial request for information was sent

out to the special list of Honorary and Corresponding Members, and replies

were received from 163, leaving 30 from whom nothing has been heard.

We have lost by death during the past year the following Honorary

Members:

Lord Kelvin, Elected in 1876,

Prof Charles A. Young, {Vines ules:

Prof Wolcott Gibbs, if ** 1899,

Prof. Wm. K. Brooks, fe * 1898,

Prof. Asaph Hall, Fi Ka SSOs

and the following Corresponding Members:

Prof. Daniel C. Gilman, Elected in 1876,

Prof. Albert de Lapparent, “ “ 1900,

Prof. Albert B. Prescott, i “1870,

Col. Aimé Laussedat, i ** 1890.

There are at present upon our rolls 45 Honorary Members and 142

Corresponding Members.

Respectfully submitted,

Henry E. Crampton,

Corresponding Secretary.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908 507

REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.

The library of the New York Academy of Sciences has received during

the year ending December, 1908, through exchange and donation, 454

volumes, 32 separata and 1863 numbers. These have been duly acknow]l-

edged, accessioned and placed on the shelves for reference. Special ack-

nowledgement is herewith made to the Academies and Societies who have

made gifts of available lacune to help complete broken files of their publica-

tions in our library. Chief among these may be mentioned 40 volumes

from La Société des Naturalistes de Varsovie, and 71 volumes from the

Sociedade de Geographia, Lisbon.

The library may be consulted by members and the public between the

hours of 9:30 A. M. and 5 P. M. daily, and it is desired that the members

assist in further extending its use.

Respectfully submitted,

RautpH W. Tower,

Librarian.

REPORT OF THE EDITOR.

The Editor reports that during the past fiscal year Part III, completing

Volume XVII, was distributed and that Parts I and II and two papers in

Part III of Volume XVIII have been printed and distributed. Part I was

devoted to the records of the addresses delivered at the Linnzan Celebration

of 23 May, 1907, together with greetings communicated by sister organiza-

tions at home and abroad. Part II contained the following papers:

“New Species and Genera of the Lepidopterous Family Noctuide for

1907 (Part I]).” By John B. Smith.

“On Determination of Mineral Constitution through Recasting of

Analyses.” By Alexis A. Julien.

“The Chester, New York, Mastodon.” By E. O. Hovey.

‘Production of Sound in the Drumfishes, the Sea-Robin and the Toad-

fish.” By Ralph W. Tower. E

“The North American Species of the Genus Ipomeea.”” By Homer

Doliver House.

Records of Meetings, 1906. By W. M. Wheeler.

Records of Meetings, 1907. By E. O. Hovey.

The two articles of Part III were:

“An Investigation of the Figure of the Sun and of Possible Variation in

its Size and Shape.”’ By Charles Lane Poor.

‘An Outline of the Geology of Long Island.” By W. O. Crosby.

508 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

The part and volume will be completed by the records of the Recording

Secretary for 1908 and the index of the whole volume.

The Annual Directory of the Members of the Academy and its Affiliated

Societies was issued as of 31 January, 1908.

Respectfully submitted,

Epmunp Otis Hovey,

Editor.

REPORT OF THE TREASURER.

December 17, 1907 —November 30, 1908.

Dec. 17, 1907. Cash in bank at beginning of fiscal year $1,954.82

Cash received during fiscal year and reported

as follows:

1908, January 13, SRulou Rey oa econ aa etoile

Pe poriaty (\ieay) Gah vente uel a Vad) nemo eeedL

March PEO Ds ED CNET ROMA UM iit Wo 8 Po)

October Gilera bes ae eros

November 2.7. heii tugs ey een pete

November 30). renee ie kane ee ea) 7,949.66

Total cash on hand and received . . . $9,904.48

Paid out on vouchers during fiscal year and

reported as follows:

Hebruary seas Vk" 4\5 J.) han aenen terres

March ARE Od MERA Pa Cait ey 4 0) IL,

October Gin Ri OE ees Se ed ed eh eee

November: ):2s cts) cee te ee

November 3052/20 20) 04 ee aco one 9,710.92

Total disbursements . Aste be

Balance on hand i Re eke eu Heh pale ts $193.56

Recapitulation of deposits:

In Union Square Savings Bank $285.64

Emerson McMillin & Co.— Debit 92.08

$193.56

Respectfully submitted,

Emerson McMIttin,

Treasurer.

RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF 1908

RECEIPTS.

December 17, 1907—N ovember 30, 1908.

Balance on hand, December 17, 1907

Income from investments:

Interest on mortgages . $878.05

i “bonds . 1,010.00

t “bank balances 94.06

Sale of bond Rn OSf.50

Life Membership fees : SAteNy

Active vEDIces es 1903 10.00

ee 1904 30.00

: oh “1905 60.00

‘ - “1906 90.00

4 7 hr LOOT 160.00

a e nous . 3,305.00

5 os “1909 Aap nds Cath Ni 10.00

Associate Membership dues, 1906 “ee a Ree 3.00

eS x Hit LOOR 12.00

* i “1908 27.00

Sales of publications :

Subscriptions to Darwin velehintion ‘

i “ Annual meeting & dinner

Post Office refund

Total

DISBURSEMENTS.

December 17, 1907—November 30, 1908.

Investments

Publications, on account of Auhale

Recording Secretary’s office expenses, including puDatin of

Bulletin .

Darwin celebration .

Lecture Committee .

General expenses ;

Esther Hermann Fescavchi Fund :

Headquarters Committee

Annual meeting and dinner .

Cash on hand

Total

509

$1,954.82

3,039.61

200.00

3,665.00

42.00

94.93

760.50

142.00

5.62

$9,904.48

$3,138.75

1,850.23

1,877.94

1,020.00

150.00

245.45

1,010.00

265.05

153.50

193.56

$9,904.48

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

510

90°96L‘98$

LG°99%

10°62Z

96°S0F

LS T80'T

GS'9F0'T

00°00F ‘OT

¢6'098S

00°000'

GL'COS‘LI$

*xo9 “a fy

vaynumuoy buppnp } ‘aay *S MOTNAaaY,T

“NOY “yf ADUOAL)

‘poaoidde pue pourmexyy

: aUIOUT [B1II94)

pun,y AqeqmonNy JO ouLOoUT

pung Surpymg jo ouoouy

puny JusuvUIeg Jo oU0DUT

: ; puny Ai0qmMoN

puny Ssurpring

: puny uoqnpny

Reet CORB Ta

puny JuoueUeg

90'°962°9E$

99° S61 : : : 3 puey uo yseg

0¢°09‘98$ : : ; : : : $}U9UI}SOAUT

‘S061 ‘O§ UAANAAON “LATHG AONVIVG

THE ORGANIZATION OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF

SCIENCES.

THE ORIGINAL CHARTER.

AN ACT TO INCORPORATE THE

LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK.

Passed April 20, 1818.

Wuereas, The members of the Lyceum of Natural History have peti-

tioned for an act of incorporation, and the Legislature, impressed with the

importance of the study of Natural History, as connected with the wants,

the comforts, and the happiness of mankind, and conceiving it their duty to

encourage all laudable attempts to promote the progress of science in this

State — therefore,

1. Be it enacted by the People of the State of New York represented in

Senate and Assembly, That Samuel L. Mitchill, Casper W. Eddy, Frederick

C. Schaeffer, Nathaniel Paulding, William Cooper, Benjamin P. Kissam,

John Torrey, William Cumberland, D’Jurco V. Knevels, James Clements,

and James Pierce, and such other persons as now are, and may from time to

time become members, shall be, and hereby are constituted a body cor-

porate and politic, by the name of Lyceum or Natura History IN THE

City or New York, and that by that name they shall have perpetual

succession, and shall be persons capable of suing and being sued, pleading

and being impleaded, answering and being answered unto, defending and

being defended, in all courts and places whatsoever; and may have a com-

mon seal, with power to alter the same from time to time; and shall be

capable of purchasing, taking, holding, and enjoying to them and their

successors, any real estate in fee simple or otherwise, and any goods, chattels,

and personal estate, and of selling, leasing, or otherwise disposing of said

real or personal estate, or any part thereof, at their will and pleasure: Pro-

vided always, that the clear annual value or income of such real or personal

estate shall not exceed the sum of five thousand dollars: Provided, however,

that the funds of the said Corporation shall be used and appropriated to the

promotion of the objects stated in the preamble to this act, and those only.

2. And be it further enacted, hat the said Society shall from time to

time, forever hereafter, have power to make, constitute, ordain, and estab-

511

512 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

lish such by-laws and regulations as they shall judge proper, for the election

of their officers; for prescribing their respective functions, and the mode of

discharging the same; for the admission of new members; for the govern-

ment of the officers and members thereof; for collecting annual contribu-

tions from the members towards the funds thereof; for regulating the times

and places of meeting of the said Society; for suspending or expelling such

members as shall neglect or refuse to comply with the by-laws or regulations,

and for the managing or directing the affairs and concerns of the said Society:

Provided such by-laws and regulations be not repugnant to the Constitution

and laws of this State or of the United States.

3. And be it further enacted, That the officers of the said Society shall

consist of a President and two Vice-Presidents, a Corresponding Secretary,

a Recording Secretary, a Treasurer, and five Curators, and such other

officers as the Society may judge necessary; who shall be annually chosen,

and who shall continue in office for one year, or until others be elected in

their stead; that if the annual election shall not be held at any of the days

for that purpose appointed, it shall be lawful to make such election at any

other day; and that five members of the said Society, assembling at the

place and time designated for that purpose by any by-law or regulation of

the Society, shall constitute a legal meeting thereof.

4. And be it further enacted, That Samuel L. Mitchill shall be the Presi-

dent; Casper W. Eddy the First Vice-President; Frederick C. Schaeffer

the Second Vice-President; Nathaniel Paulding, Corresponding Secretary;

William Cooper, Recording Secretary; Benjamin P. Kissam, Treasurer,

and John Torrey, William Cumberland, D’Jurco V. Knevels, James

Clements, and James Pierce, Curators; severally to be the first officers of

the said Corporation, who shall hold their respective offices until the twenty-

third day of February next, and until others shall be chosen in their places.

5. And be it further enacted, That the present Constitution of the said

Association shall, after passing of this Act, continue to be the Constitution

thereof; and that no alteration shall be made therein, unless by a vote to

that effect of three-fourths of the resident members, and upon the request

in writing of one-third of such resident members, and submitted at least one

month before any vote shall be taken thereupon.

State of New York, Secretary’s Office.

I certiry the preceding to be a true copy of an original Act of the Legis-

lature of this State, on file in this Office.

ARCH’D CAMPBELL,

Dep. Sec’y.

ABany, April 29, 1818.

ORDER OF COURT CHANGING NAME 513

ORDER OF COURT.

ORDER OF THE SUPREME COURT OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK TO CHANGE

THE NAME OF

oe, LYCEUM OF NATURAL) HISTORY IN THE CILTY;Or

NEW YORK

THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

WHEREAS, in pursuance of the vote and proceedings of this Corporation

to change the corporate name thereof from “The Lyceum of Natural History

in the City of New York”’ to “The New York Academy of Sciences,” which

vote and proceedings appear of record, an application has been made in

behalf of said Corporation to the Supreme Court of the State of New York

to legalize and authorize such change, according to the statute in such case

provided, by Chittenden & Hubbard, acting as the attorneys of the Cor-

poration, and the said Supreme Court, on the 5th day of January, 1876,

made the following order upon such application in the premises, viz:

At a special term of the Supreme

Court of the State of New York,

held at the Chambers thereof, in

the County Court House, in the

City of New York, the 5th day of

January, 1876:

Present—Hon. Gro. C. Barrett, Justice.

In the matter of the application of

the Lyceum of Natural History

in the City of New York to au-

thorize it to assume the corporate

name of the New York Academy

of sciences.

514 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

On reading and filing the petition of the Lyceum of Natural History in

the City of New York, duly verified by John S. Newberry, the President

and chief officer of said Corporation, to authorize it to assume the corporate

name of the New York Academy of Sciences, duly setting forth the grounds

of said application, and on reading and filing the affidavit of Geo. W.

Quackenbush, showing that notice of such application had been duly

published for six weeks in the State paper, to wit, The Albany Evening

Journal, and the affidavit of David S. Owen, showing that notice of such

application had also been duly published in the proper newspaper of the

County of New York, in which county said Corporation had its business

office, to wit, in The Daily Register, by which it appears to my satisfaction

that such notice has been so published, and on reading and filing the affi-

davits of Robert H. Browne and J.S. Newberry, thereunto annexed, by which

it appears to my satisfaction that the application is made in pursuance of a

resolution of the managers of said Corporation to that end named, and there

appearing to me to be no reasonable objection to said Corporation so chang-

ing its name as prayed in said petition: Now on motion of Grosvenor S.

Hubbard, of Counsel for Petitioner, it is

Ordered, That the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New York

be and is hereby authorized to assume the corporate name of The New York

Academy of Sciences.

Indorsed: Filed January 5, 1876,

A copy.

Wn. Watso, Clerk.

Resolution of THe ACADEMY, accepting the order of the Court, passed

February 21, 1876.

And whereas, The order hath been published as therein required, and

all the proceedings necessary to carry out the same have been had, Therefore:

Resolved, That the foregoing order be and the same is hereby accepted

and adopted by this Corporation, and that in conformity therewith the

corporate name thereof, from and after the adoption of the vote and resolu-

tion hereinabove referred to, be and the same is hereby declared to be

THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

AMENDED CHARTER 515

THE AMENDED CHARTER.

Marcu 19, 1902.

CHAPTER 181 oF THE Laws oF 1902.

Aw Act to amend chapter one hundred and ninety-seven of the laws of

eighteen hundred and eighteen, entitled “‘An act to incorporate the Lyceum

of Natural History in the City of New York,” a Corporation now known as

The New York Academy of Sciences and to extend the powers of said

Corporation.

(Became a law March 19, 1902, with the approval of the Governor.

Passed, three-fifths being present.)

The People of the State of New York, represented in Senate and Assembly,

do enact as follows:

Section I. The Corporation incorporated by chapter one hundred

and ninety-seven of the laws of eighteen hundred and eighteen, entitled

“An act to incorporate the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New

York,” and formerly known by that name, but now known as The New

York Academy of Sciences through change of name pursuant to order made

by the supreme court at the city and county of New York, on January fifth,

eighteen hundred and seventy-six, is hereby authorized and empowered to

raise money for, and to erect and maintain, a building in the city of New

York for its use, and in which also at its option other scientific societies may

be admitted and have their headquarters upon such terms as said Corpora-

tion may make with them, portions of which building may be also rented

out by said Corporation for any lawful uses for the purpose of obtaining

income for the maintenance of such building and for the promotion of the

objects of the Corporation; to establish, own, equip, and administer a public

library, and a museum having especial reference to scientific subjects;

to publish communications, transactions, scientific works, and periodicals;

to give scientific instruction by lectures or otherwise; to encourage the

advancement of scientific research and discovery, by gifts of money, prizes,

or other assistance thereto. The building, or rooms, of said Corporation

in the city of New York used exclusively for library or scientific purposes

shall be subject to the provisions and be entitled to the benefits of sub-

division seven of section four of chapter nine hundred and eight of the laws

of eighteen hundred and ninety-six, as amended.

Section II. The said Corporation shall from time to time forever

hereafter have power to make, constitute, ordain, and establish such by-laws

516 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

and regulations as it shall judge proper for the election of its officers; for

prescribing their respective functions, and the mode of discharging the same;

for the admission of new members; for the government of officers and

members thereof; for collecting dues and contributions towards the funds

thereof; for regulating the times and places of meeting of said Corporation;

for suspending or expelling such members as shall neglect or refuse to comply

with the by-laws or regulations, and for managing or directing the affairs

or concerns of the said Corporation: and may from time to time alter or

modify its constitution, by-laws, rules, and regulations.

Section III. The officers of the said Corporation shall consist of a

president and two or more vice-presidents, a corresponding secretary, a

recording secretary, a treasurer, and such other officers as the Corporation

may judge necessary; who shall be chosen in the manner and for the terms

prescribed by the constitution of the said Corporation.

Section IV. The present constitution of the said Corporation shall,

after the passage of this act, continue to be the constitution thereof until

amended as herein provided. Such constitution as may be adopted by a

vote of not less than three-quarters of such resident members and fellows

of the said New York Academy of Sciences as shall be present at a meeting

thereof, called by the Recording Secretary for that purpose, within forty

days after the passage of this act, by written notice duly mailed, postage

prepaid, and addressed to each fellow and resident member at least ten days

before such meeting, at-his last known place of residence, with street and

number when known, which meeting shall be held within three months

after the passage of this act, shall be thereafter the constitution of the said

New York Academy of Sciences, subject to alteration or amendment in the

manner provided by such constitution.

Section V. The said Corporation shall have power to consolidate,

to unite, to co-operate, or to ally itself with any other society or association

in the city of New York organized for the promotion of the knowledge or

the study of any science, or of research therein, and for this purpose to

receive, hold, and administer real and personal property for the uses of such

consolidation, union, co-operation, or alliance subject to such terms and

regulations as may be agreed upon with such associations or societies.

Section VI. This act shall take effect immediately.

StaTE oF New York,

OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

I have compared the preceding with the original law on file in this office,

and do hereby certify that the same is a correct transcript therefrom, and

the whole of said original law.

ie CONSTITUTION 517

Given under my hand and the seal of office of the Secretary of State, at

the city of Albany, this eighth day of April, in the year one thousand nine

hundred and two.

JoHN T. McDonovuaa,

Secretary of State.

CONSTITUTION.

ApopTeD, APRIL 24, 1902, AND AMENDED AT SUBSEQUENT ‘TIMES.

ArTICLE I. The name of this Corporation shall be The New York

Academy of Sciences. Its objects shall be the advancement and diffusion

of scientific knowledge, and the center of its activities shall be in the City of

New York. .

ArticLE II. The Academy shall consist of five classes of members,

namely: Active Members, Fellows, Associate Members, Corresponding

Members and Honorary Members. Active Members shall be the members

of the Corporation who live in or near the City of New York, or who, having

removed to a distance, desire to retain their connection with the Academy.

Fellows shall be chosen from the Active Members in virtue of their scientific

attainments. Corresponding and Honorary Members shall be chosen from

among the men of science of the world who have attained distinction as

investigators. ‘The number of Corresponding Members shall not exceed

two hundred, and the number of Honorary Members shall not exceed fifty.

ArticLE III. None but Fellows and Active Members who have paid

their dues up to and including the last fiscal year shall be entitled to vote or

to hold office in the Academy.

ArTICLE IV. ‘The officers of the Academy shall be a President, as many

Vice-Presidents as there are sections of the Academy, a Corresponding

Secretary, a Recording Secretary, a Treasurer, a Librarian, an Editor, six

elected Councilors and one additional Councilor from each allied society

or association. The annual election shall be held on the third Monday in

December, the officers then chosen to take office at the first meeting in

January following.

There shall also be elected at the same time a Finance Committee of three.

ArtIcLe V. The officers named in Article IV shall constitute a Council,

which shall be the executive body of the Academy with general control over

its affairs, including the power to fill ad imtervm any vacancies that may

occur in the offices. Past Presidents of the Academy shall be ex-officio

members of the Council.

ArTICLE VI. Societies organized for the study of any branch of science

518 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

may become allied with the New York Academy of Sciences by consent of

the Council. Members of allied societies may become Active Members of

the Academy by paying the Academy’s annual fee, but as members of an

allied society they shall be Associate Members with the rights and privileges

of other Associate Members, except the receipt of its publications. Each

allied society shall have the right to delegate one of its members, who is also

an Active Member of the Academy, to the Council of the Academy, and such

delegate shall have all the rights and privileges of other Councilors.

ArticLe VII. The President and Vice-Presidents shall not be eligible

to more than one re-election until three years after retiring from office; the

Secretaries and Treasurer shall be eligible to re-election without limitation.

The President, Vice-presidents and Secretaries shall be Fellows. The

terms of office of elected Councilors shall be three years, and these officers

shall be so grouped that two, at least one of whom shall be a Fellow, shall

be elected and two retired each year. Councilors shall not be eligible to

re-election until after the expiration of one year.

ArticLe VIII. The election of officers shall be by ballot, and the

candidates having the greatest number of votes shall be declared duly elected.

ArtIcLE IX. ‘Ten members, the majority of whom shall be Fellows,

shall form a quorum at any meeting of the Academy at which business is

transacted.

ArTIcLE X. The Academy shall establish by-laws, and may amend

them from time to time as therein provided.

ARTICLE XI. This Constitution may be amended by a vote of not less

than three fourths of the fellows and three fourths of the active members

present and voting at a regular business meeting of the Academy, provided

that such amendment shall be publicly submitted in writing at the preceding

business meeting, and provided also that the Recording Secretary shall send

a notice of the proposed amendment at least ten days before the meeting,

at which a vote shall be taken, to each Fellow and Active Member entitled

to vote.

BY-LAWS.

As ADOPTED, OCTOBER 6, 1902, AND AMENDED AT SUBSEQUENT TIMES.

CHAPTER I.

OFFICERS.

1. President. It shall be the duty of the President to preside at the

business and special meetings of the Academy; he shall exercise the cus-

tomary duties of a presiding officer.

BY-LAWS 519

2. Vice-Presidents. In the absence of the President, the senior Vice-

President, in order of Fellowship, shall act as the presiding officer.

3. Corresponding Secretary. ‘The Corresponding Secretary shall keep

a corrected list of the Honorary and Corresponding Members, their titles

and addresses, and shall conduct all correspondence with them. He shall

make a report at the Annual Meeting.

4. Recording Secretary. The Recording Secretary shall keep the

minutes of the Academy proceedings; he shall have charge of all documents

belonging to the Academy, and of its corporate seal, which he shall affix and

attest as directed by the Council; he shall keep a corrected list of the Active

Members and Fellows, and shall send them announcements of the meetings

of the Academy; he shall notify all Members and Fellows of their election,

and committees of their appointment; he shall give notice to the Treasurer

and to the Council of matters requiring their action, and shall bring before

the Academy business presented by the Council. He shall make a report at

the Annual Meeting.

5. Treasurer. The Treasurer shall have charge, under the direction

of the Council, of all moneys belonging to the Academy, and of their invest-

ment. He shall receive all fees, dues and contributions to the Academy,

and any income that may accrue from property or investment; he shall report

to the Council at its last meeting before the Annual Meeting the names of

members in arrears; he shall keep the property of the Academy insured,

and shall pay all debts against the Academy the discharge of which shall be

ordered by the Council. He shall report to the Council from time to time

the state of the finances, and at the Annual Meeting shall report to the

Academy the receipts and expenditures for the entire year.

6. Librarian. The Librarian shall have charge of the library, under

the general direction of the Library Committee of the Council, and shall

conduct all correspondence respecting exchanges of the Academy, He

shall make a report on the condition of the library at the Annual Meeting.

7. Editor. The editor shall have charge of the publications of the

Academy, under the general direction of the Publication Committee of the

Council. He shall make a report on the condition of the publications at the

Annual Meeting.

CHAPTER II.

COUNCIL.

1. Meetings. ‘The Council shall meet once a month, or at the call of

the President. It shall have general charge of the affairs of the Academy.

2. Quorum. Five members of the Council shall constitute a quorum.

520 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

3. Officers. The President, Vice-Presidents and Recording Secretary

of the Academy shall hold the same offices in the Council.

4. Committees. The Standing Committees of the Council shall be:

(1) an Executive Committee consisting of the President, Treasurer, and

Recording Secretary; (2) a Committee on Publications; (3) a Committee

on the Library, and such other committees as from time to time shall be

authorized by the Council. ‘The action of these committees shall be subject

to revision by the Council.

Cuapter III.

FINANCE COMMITTEE.

The Finance Committee of the Academy shall audit the Annual Report

of the Treasurer, and shall report on financial questions whenever called

upon to do so by the Council.

CHAPTER IV.

ELECTIONS.

1. Active Members. (a) Active Members shall be nominated in

writing to the Council by at least two active Members or Fellows. If

approved by the Council, they may be elected at the succeeding business

meeting.

(b) Any Active Member who, having removed to a distance from the

city of New York, shall nevertheless express a desire to retain his connection

with the Academy, may be placed by vote of the Council on a list of Non-

resident Members. Such members shall relinquish the full privileges and

obligations of Active Members. (Vide Chapters V and X.)

2. Associate Members. Workers in science may be elected to Associate

Membership for a period of two years in the manner prescribed for Active

Members. ‘They shall not have the power to vote and shall not be eligible

to election as fellows, but may receive the publications. At any time sub-

sequent to their election they may assume the full privileges of Active Mem-

bers by paying the dues of such Members.

3. Fellows, Corresponding Members and Honorary Members. Nomi-

nations for Fellows, Corresponding Members, and Honorary Members may

be made in writing either to the Recording Secretary or to the Council at its

meeting prior to the Annual Meeting. If approved by the Council, the

nominees shall then be balloted for at the Annual Meeting.

4. Officers. Nominations for Officers, with the exception of Vice-

BY-LAWS 521

Presidents, may be sent in writing to the Recording Secretary, with the name

of the proposer, at any time not less than thirty days before the Annual

Meeting. Each section of the Academy shall nominate a candidate for

Vice-President, who, on election, shall be Chairman of the section; the

names of such nominees shall be sent to the Recording Secretary properly

certified by the sectional secretaries, not less than thirty days before the

Annual Meeting. ‘The Council shall then prepare a list which shall be the

regular ticket. This list shall be mailed to each Active Member and Fellow

at least one week before the Annual Meeting. But any Active Member or

Fellow entitled to vote shall be entitled to prepare and vote another ticket.

CHAPTER V.

DUES.

1. Dues. The annual dues of Active Members and Fellows shall be

$10, payable in advance at the time of the Annual Meeting; but new mem-

bers elected after May 1 shall pay $5 for the remainder of the fiscal year.

The annual dues of elected Associate Members shall be $3, payable in

advance at the time of the Annual Meeting.

Non-resident Members shall be exempt from dues, so long as they shall

relinquish the privileges of Active Membership. (Vide Chapter X.)

2. Members in Arrears. If any Active Member or Fellow whose dues

remain unpaid for more than one year, shall neglect or refuse to pay the

same within three months after notification by the Treasurer, his name may

be erased from the rolls by vote of the Council. Upon payment of his

arrears, however, such person may be restored to Active Membership or

Fellowship by vote of the Council.

3. Renewal of Membership. Any Active Member or Fellow who shall

resign because of removal to a distance from the City of New York, or any

Non-resident Member, may be restored by vote of the Council to Active

Membership or Fellowship at any time upon application.

CHAPTER VI.

PATRONS, DONORS AND LIFE MEMBERS.

1. Patrons. Any person contributing at one time $1000 to the general

funds of the Academy shall be a Patron and, on election by the Council,

shall enjoy all the privileges of Active Members.

2. Donors. Any person contributing $50 or more annually to the

general funds of the Academy shall be termed a Donor and, on election by

the Council, shall enjoy all the privileges of Active Members.

522 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

3. Life Members. Any Active Member or Fellow contributing at one

time $100 to the general funds of the Academy shall be a Life Member and

shall thereafter be exempt from annual dues; and any Active Member or

Fellow who has paid annual dues for twenty-five years or more may, upon

his written request, be made a life member and be exempt from further

payment of dues.

CuHapTerR VII.

SECTIONS.

1. Sections. Sections devoted to special branches of Science may be

established or discontinued by the Academy on the recommendation of the

Council. The present sections of the Academy are the Section of Astronomy,

Physics and Chemistry, the Section of Biology, the Section of Geology and

Mineralogy and the Section of Anthropology and Psychology.

2. Organization. Each section of the Academy shall have a Chairman

and a Secretary, who shall have charge of the meetings of their Section.

The regular election of these officers shall take place at the October or

November meeting of the section, the officers then chosen to take office at

the first meeting in January following.

3. Affiliation. Members of scientific societies affiliated with the

Academy, and members of the Scientific Alliance, or men of science intro-

duced by members of the Academy, may attend the meetings and present

papers under the general regulations of the Academy.

CuaptTer VIII.

MEETINGS.

1. Business Meetings. Business meetings of the Academy shall be

held on the first Monday of each month from October to May inclusive.

2. Sectional Meetings. Sectional meetings shall be held on Monday

evenings from October to May inclusive, and at such other times as the

Council may determine. The sectional meeting shall follow the business

meeting when both occur on the same evening.

3. Annual Meeting. The Annual Meeting shall be held on the third

Monday in December.

4. Special Meetings. A special meeting may be called by the Council,

provided one week’s notice be sent to each Active Member and Fellow,

stating the object of such meeting.

BY-LAWS 523

CHAPTER IX.

ORDER OF BUSINESS.

1. Business Meetings. ‘The following shall be the order of procedure

at business meetings:

1. Minutes of the previous business meeting.

2. Report of the Council.

3. Reports of Committees.

4, Elections.

5. Other business.

2. Sectional Meetings. ‘The following shall be the order of procedure

at sectional meetings:

1. Minutes of the preceding meeting of the section.

2. Presentation and discussion of papers.

3. Other scientific business.

3. Annual Meetings. The following shall be the order of procedure

at Annual Meetings:

1. Annual reports of the Corresponding Secretary, Recording Secre-

tary, Treasurer, Librarian, and Editor.

2. Election of Honorary Members, Corresponding Members, and

Fellows.

3. Election of officers for the ensuing year.

4, Annual address of the retiring President.

CHAPTER X.

PUBLICATIONS.

1. Publications. The established publications of the Academy shall

be the Annals and the Memoirs. They shall be issued by the Editor under

the supervision of the Committee on Publications.

2. Distribution. One copy of all publications shall be sent to each

Patron, Life Member, Active Member and Fellow, provided, that upon

enquiry by the Editor such Members or Fellows shall signify their desire to

receive them.

3. Publication Fund. Contributions may be received for the publica-

tion fund, and the income thereof shall be applied toward defraying the

expenses of the scientific publications of the Academy.

524 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

CHAPTER XI.

GENERAL PROVISIONS.

1. Debts. No debts shall be incurred on behalf of the Academy, unless

authorized by the Council.

2. Bills. All bills submitted to the Council must be certified as to

correctness by the officers incurring them.

3. Investments. All the permanent funds of the Academy shall be

invested in United States or in New York State securities or in first mortgages

on real estate, provided they shall not exceed sixty-five per cent. of the value

of the property, or in first mortgage bonds of corporations which have paid

dividends continuously on their common stock for a period of not less than

five years. All income from patron’s fees, life membership fees and donor’s

fees shall be added to the permanent fund.

4. Expulsion, etc. Any Member or Fellow may be censured, sus-

pended or expelled, for violation of the Constitution or By-Laws, or for

any offence deemed sufficient, by a vote of three fourths of the Members

and three fourths of the Fellows present at any business meeting, provided

such action shall have been recommended by the Council at a previous

business meeting, and also, that one month’s notice of such recommendation

and of the offence charged shall have been given the Member accused.

5. Changes in By-Laws. No alteration shall be made in these By-

Laws unless it shall have been submitted publicly in writing at a business

meeting, shall have been entered on the Minutes with the names of the

Members or Fellows proposing it, and shall be adopted by two-thirds of the

Members and Fellows present and voting at a subsequent business meeting.

1887.

1898.

1889.

1907.

POE

1904.

1887.

1899.

1876.

1902.

1901.

1876.

1901.

1898.

1889.

1894.

1899.

1898.

1907.

1896.

1901.

1896.

1876.

1898.

1880.

1900.

1908.

1898.

1891.

MEMBERSHIP OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

31 DECEMBER, 1908.

HONORARY MEMBERS.

Prof. ALEXANDER Agassiz, Cambridge, Mass.

Prof. ArtHuR Auwers, Berlin, Germany.

Prof. CHartes Barros, Lille, France.

Prof. Witu1am Bateson, Cambridge, England.

CHARLES VERNON Boys, London, England.

Prof. W. C. BroaceEr, Christiana, Norway.

Dr. Wru1am Henry Dauuincer, London, England.

Sir GrorcE Howarp Darwin, Cambridge, England.

Dr. W. Boyp Dawkins, Manchester, England.

Sir James Dewar, Cambridge, England.

Prof. Emr Fiscuer, Berlin, Germany.

Sir ARCHIBALD GEIKIE, Haslemere, Surrey, England.

Prof. James Grrkre, Edinburgh, Scotland.

Sir Davip Grit, London, England.

Prof. GrorGE LincotNn GoopaLe, Cambridge, Mass.

Dr. Ernst HAckE., Jena, Germany.

Prof. Jutrus Hann, Vienna, Austria.

Dr. GrorcE W. Hitu, West Nyack, N. Y.

Dr. J. D. Hooker, Kew, England.

Prof. Amprosius A. W. Husprecut, Utrecht, Netherlands.

Prof. Witu1aAM JAMES, Cambridge, Mass.

Prof. Frrrx Kier, Gottingen, Germany.

Prof. Viktor von Lana, Vienna, Austria.

Dr. E. Ray Lanxester, London, England.

Sir Norman Lockyer, London, England.

Prof. Franz Leypie, Tauber, Germany.

Prof. Kaxicur Mirsuxurt, Tokio, Japan.

Prof. Frriptyor NaNnseEN, Christiana, Norway.

Prof. Simon Newcoms, Washington, D. C.

525

526

1908.

1898.

1900.

1901.

1899.

1898.

1887.

1904.

1908.

1896.

1900.

1904.

1907.

1904.

1883.

1898.

1891.

1890.

1899.

1876.

1899.

1898.

1878.

1867.

1897.

1899.

1874.

1884.

1894.

1874.

1876

1898.

1876.

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Prof. WiLtHELM OstwaLp, Gross-Bothen, Germany.

Prof. ALBrecHt Penck, Berlin, Germany.

Prof. WiLHELM Prerrer, Leipzig, Germany.

Prof. EpwArD CHARLES PICKERING, Cambridge, Mass.

Prof. Jutes Henri Porncargs, Paris, France.

Sir Wiiu1AM Ramsay, London, England.

Lord Ray.eicH, Witham, Essex, England.

Dr. Hans H. Revuscu, Christiana, Norway.

Sir Henry EnFrietp Roscoe, London, England.

Geheimrath Heinrich Rosensuscu, Heidelberg, Germany.

Prof. KARL VON DEN STEINEN, Berlin, Germany.

Dr. G. JoHNSTONE STonEy, London, England.

Prof. EpuaRD STRASBURGER, Bonn, Germany.

Prof. JosrpH JoHN THomson, Cambridge, England.

Prof. Epwarp Burnett Tytor, Oxford, England.

Prof. Huco pr Vries, Amsterdam, Netherlands.

Prof. James Warp, Cambridge, England.

Dr. WitHELM Wonpt, Leipzig, Germany.

Geheimrath FerRDINAND ZiRKEL, Leipzig, Germany.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.

Dr. CHARLES ConrAD ABBorTtT, Trenton, N. J.

Prof. FranK D. Apams, Montreal, Canada.

Dr. José G. AcumLerA, Mexico City, Mexico.

Wituram DeWitt ALEXANDER, Honolulu, Hawaii.

Dr. C. W. ANpREws, London, England.

Prof. JooN Howarp APPLETON, Providence, R. I.

Dr. J. G. Baker, Kew, England.

Prof. Isaac BagLtey Batrour, Edinburgh, Scotland.

Dr. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, Washington, D. C.

Epwarp L. BertHoup, Golden, Colo.

Dr. Hersert Botton, Bristol, England.

Dr. G. A. BouLENGER, London, England.

T. S. BraANDEGEE, San Diego, Calif.

Prof. Joun C. BRANNER, Stanford University, Calif.

Prof. BoHusLay BRAuNER, Prague, Bohemia.

Prof. WrLt1AM Brewster, Cambridge, Mass.

Prof. Grorcr JARvIs BrusH, New Haven, Conn.

Prof. T. C. CHAMBERLIN, Chicago, Ill.

Dr. FranK WIGGLESWoRTH CLARKE, Washington, D. C.

1891.

1877.

1868.

1876.

1880.

1877.

1866.

1895.

1879.

1870.

1885.

1898.

1894.

1899.

1890.

1899.

1876.

1880.

1869.

1879.

1885.

1899.

1879.

1870.

1858.

1865.

1888.

1868.

1883.

1877.

1869.

1898.

1882.

1867.

1900.

1890.

1896.

1875.

1899.

1876.

LIST OF CORRESPONDING MEMBERS 257

Prof. L. Cuerc, Ekaterinburg, Russia.

Dr. THEODORE Comstock, Los Angeles, Calif.

M. C. Cooker, London, England.

Prof. H. B. CorNWALL, Princeton, N. J.

CHARLES B. Cory, Boston, Mass.

Dr. Jos—EpH CRAWFORD, Philadelphia, Pa.

Geheimrath HERMANN CREDNER, Leipzig, Germany.

Prof. Henry P. CusuHine, Cleveland, O.

T. Netson Date, Pittsfield, Mass.

Dr. Witit1aM Hearty Datu, Washington, D. C.

Prof. Epwarp SALispuryY Dana, New Haven, Conn.

Prof. Witit1am M. Davis, Cambridge, Mass.

Pres. RuTHVEN Deane, Chicago, Ill.

Prof. CHARLES D&pEReET, Lyons, France.

Dr. OrvILLE A. Dersy, Rio Janeiro, Brazil.

Dr. Louis Dotto, Brussels, Belgium.

Henry W. Exuiott, Lakewood, O.

Prof. JoHNn B. Exvuiotr, New Orleans, La.

Dr. Francis E. ENGELHARDT, Syracuse, N. Y.

Prof. HerMAN LeRoy Fatrcuitp, Rochester, N. Y.

Prof. FrrepricH BERNHARD Firrica, Marburg, Germany.

Dr. Lazarus FLEetcHER, London, England.

Prof. EBERHARD FRaas, Stuttgart, Germany.

Dr. REINHOLD FRITZGARTNER, Tegucigalpa, Honduras.

Prof. GrovE K. GitBErT, Washington, D. C.

Prof. THEODORE NicHouas GiLi, Washington, D. C.

Prof. CHARLES A. GorssMAN, Amherst, Mass.

Prof. FRANK Austin Goocu, New Haven, Conn.

Col. C. R. GrREENLEAF, U.S. A., San Francisco, Calif.

Dr. Marquis ANTONIO DE GREGORIO, Palermo, Sicily.

Prof. Pau HrernricH von Grotu, Munich, Germany.

R. J. LecoMere Guppy, Trinidad, British West Indies.

Dr. Grorce E. Harz, Mt. Wilson, Calif.

Baron Ernst von Hesse-WarTEGG, Lucerne, Switzerland.

Prof. C. H. Hircucocx, Hanover, N. H.

Dr. Witu1AM Henry Hormegs, Washington, D. C.

Dr. H. D. Hoskotp, Buenos Ayres, Argentine Republic.

Prof. J. P. Ipprnas, Chicago, Ill.

Matvern W. Ives, Dubuque, Ia.

Prof. Orro JAcKEL, Greifswald, Germany.

Prof. SamureL W. JoHnson, New Haven, Conn.

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Pres. Davip Srarr JoRDAN, Stanford University, Calif.

Prof. Grorcre A. Korenia, Houghton, Mich.

Dr. FrrepricH Konurauscu, Marburg, Germany.

Baron R. Kuxt, Tokyo, Japan.

Prof. ALFRED Lacrorx, Paris, France.

Prof. Joun W. LAnGLeEy, Cleveland, O.

Prof. S. A. Larrimore, Rochester, N. Y.

Prof. Wi1LL1AM Lipsey, Princeton, N. J.

Prof. ARCHIBALD LIvERSIDGE, London, England.

Prof. GkorGE Mac oski&, Princeton, N. J.

Prof. Joan Wini1aM MAtuet, Charlottesville, Va.

Prof. CHARLES Ripore Mann, Chicago, Il.

Dr. Grorce F. MatrHew, St. John, N. B., Canada.

CHARLES JOHNSON Maynarp, West Newton, Mass.

‘THEODORE LUQUEER Meap, Oviedo, Fla.

SetH E. Merk, Chicago, Il.

J. DE MrenpizABaL-TAaMBorREL, Mexico City, Mexico.

Dr. Cuinton Hart Merriam, Washington, D. C.

Prof. MANSFIELD Merriam, South Bethlehem, Pa.

Dr. A. B. Meyer, Berlin, Germany.

Prof. CHARLES SEDGwick Minot, Boston, Mass.

Prof. Winu1AM GiLtBpert Mrxter, New Haven, Conn.

Dr. Richard MoupenKe, Watchung, N. J.

Prof. C. Lutoyp Moraean, Bristol, England.

Dr. Epwarp S. Mors, Salem, Mass.

GrorceE Murray, London, England.

Prof. Eugen Netto, Giessen, Germany.

Prot. ALFRED Newton, Cambridge, England.

Dr. Francis C. Nicnonas, New York, N. Y.

Dr. Henry ALFRED ALForD NicHo.Lis, Dominica, B. W. I.

Prof. Witu1aAm H. Nixes, Boston, Mass.

Dr. Epwarp J. Nouan, Philadelphia, Pa.

FREDERICK A. OBER, Hackensack, N. J.

JoHN M. Orpway, New Orleans, La.

Prof. GkEorcE Howarp ParKER, Cambridge, Mass.

STEPHEN F. PeckHaM, New York, N. Y.

Prof. Grorce E. Post, Beirfit, Syria.

Prof. Epwarp BaGNnaLt Poutton, Oxford, England.

Prof. FrepericK Prime, Philadelphia, Pa.

Prof. RapHAEL PumMpELLy, Newport, R. I.

Prof. B. ALEx. RANDALL, Philadelphia, Pa.

1888.

1876.

1874.

1886.

1876.

1899.

1867.

1898.

1876.

1894.

1876.

1883.

1895.

1890.

1896.

1890.

1876.

1885.

1893.

1899.

1877.

1876.

1871.

1900.

1867.

1890.

1898.

1876.

1900.

1897.

1874.

1898.

1866.

1899.

1876.

LIST OF CORRESPONDING MEMBERS 529

T. Mexiarp Reape, Liverpool, England.

Dr. Ira Remsen, Baltimore, Md.

Rosert Ripeway, Washington, D. C.

Prof. Wiriu1am L. Ross, Troy, N. Y.

Prof. SAMUEL P. SApTLER, Philadelphia, Pa.

D. Max Scutosser, Munich, Germany.

Prof. Paut ScHWeEITzER, Columbia, Mo.

Prof. W. B. Scort, Princeton, N. J.

Prof. Samuret H. Scupprer, Cambridge, Mass.

Prof. W. T. Sepewick, Boston, Mass.

ANDREW SHERWOOD, Portland, Ore.

J. Warp Situ, Newark, N. J.

Prof. CHarites H. Smyru, Jr., Princeton, N. J.

Dr. J. SELDEN SPENCER, Tarrytown, N. Y.

Dr. RoBert STEARNS, Los Angeles, Calif.

Prof. WaLTeR LeConre STEVENS, Lexington, Va.

Prof. Francis H. Storer, Boston, Mass.

Rajah Sourtnpro Mouun Tacore, Calcutta, India.

Dr. J. P. TuHomson, Brisbane, Queensland, Australia.

Dr. R. H. Traquatr, Colinton, Scotland.

Prof. JoHN TRowsBRIDGE, Cambridge, Mass.

Dr. D. K. Turrue, Philadelphia, Pa.

Dr. Henri Van Heurck, Antwerp, Belgium.

Pres. CHARLES R. Van Hise, Madison, Wis.

Prof. AppISON EMERY VERRILL, New Haven, Conn.

Brig. Gen. ANTHONY WAYNE Vognpes, U.S. A. (retired), San Diego,

Calif.

Dr. CuHar.tes DoonittLeE Waucottr, Washington, D. C.

LEonARD Wa.po, New York, N. Y.

Prof. SHo Warask, Tokyo, Japan.

Prof. Sruart WELLER, Chicago, Ill.

Dr. I. C. Wurtz, Morgantown, West Va.

Prof. C. O. WHitman, Woods Holl, Mass.

Prof. Henry SHALER WILLIAMS, Ithaca, N. Y.

Prof. N. H, WincHeE.xL, Minneapolis, Minn.

Prof. Horatio C. Woop, Philadelphia, Pa.

Dr. A. Smira Woopwarp, London, England.

Prof. ARTHUR WriiLIAMs WricHt, New Haven, Conn.

Prof. Harry Cricy Yarrow, Washington, D. C.

530 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

PATRONS.

Britton, Prof. N. L., N. Y. Botanical Garden.

Brown, Hon. Appison, 45 West 89th Street.

Casey, Col. THomas L., U. S. A., Washington, D. C.

CHAPIN, CHESTER W. 34 West 57th Street.

Fre.tp, C. pe Preystrr, 21 East 26th Street.

GouLp, Epwin, Dobbs Ferry, N. Y.

GouLp, GrorcE J., 195 Broadway.

GouLp, Miss HELEN M.., Irvington, N. Y.

HerRRMAN, Mrs. EstHer, 59 West 56th Street.

JuuLiEN, Dr. Auexis A., Columbia University.

Levison, W. Goon, 1435 Pacific Street, Brooklyn.

Meap, WALrerR H., 67 Wall Street.

SENFF, CHARLES H., 300 Madison Avenue.

ACTIVE MEMBERS.

31 DrEcEMBER, 1908.

Fellowship is indicated by an asterisk (*) before the name. Life Mem-

bership is shown by heavy-faced type. The names of Patrons are in capitals.

Adams, Edward D. ARNOLD, Fetix, M.D.

*ADLER, I., M.D. ASTOR, JOHN JACOB

*ALLEN, J. A., Ph.D. AVERY, SAMUEL P.

ALLEN, JAMES LANE BaAEKELAND, LrEo H., Ph.D.

*ALLIS, EDWARD PHELPS, Jr., Ph.D. Bailey, James M.

*AMEND, BERNARD G. Barhydt, Mrs. P. H.

ANDERSON, A. A. Barnes, Miss Cora F.

ANDERSON, A. J. C. Barron, GEorGE D.

ANDERSON, J. H. *BASKERVILLE, Prof. CHARLES.

ANDREWS, Roy C. Bauau, Miss M. L.

Anthony, R. A. Baxter, M., Jr.

ANTHONY, WruuiaAM A.! BEAL, WILLIAM R.

AREND, FRANcIs J. Bran, Henry WILLARD

Armstrong, 8. T., M.D. BEARD, Danie. C.

1 Deceased.

LIST OF ACTIVE MEMBERS

*Beck, Fanning C. T.

BECKHARD, MARTIN

*BEEBE, C. WILLIAM

Beers, M. H.

BELLER, A.

BERGSTRESSER, CHARLES M.

*BERKEY, CHARLES P., Ph.D.

*BeRRY; EpwarD W.

Betts, SAMUEL R.

vAN BeureEN, F. T.

*BICKMORE, ALBERT S., Ph.D.

BIEN, JULIUS

*BIGELOW, Prof. Maurice A., Ph.D.

BicELow, WILLIAM S.

Bryur, MosEs

Billings, Miss Elizabeth

Briuines, FREDERICK

Brrpsat1, Mrs. W. R.

BrrKHABN, R. C.

BisHop, HEBER R.

BisHop, SAMUEL H.

*BLAKE, J. A., M.D.

Buank, M. I., M.D.

*Bliss, Prof. Charles B.

*Boas, Prof. FRANZ

Borettcer, Henry W.

Bouter, RicHarp F.

Boyp, JAMES

*BrIsTOL, Prof. CHARLES L.

BrisTou, JNo. I. D.

*BRITTON, Pror. N. L., Pa.D.

*BROWN, Hon. ADDISON

Brown, Epwin H.

*BROWNELL, SILAS B.

*Bumpus, Prof. H. C., Ph.D.

*Burr, WILLIAM H.

Burr, WINTHROP

BusH, WENDELL T.

*ByrNES, Miss EstHer F., Ph.D.

*CALKINS, Prof. Gary N., Ph.D.

*CAMPBELL, Prof. WILLIAM, Ph.D.

531

CAMPBELL, Prof. Witt1am M.

CANFIELD, R. A.

CasE, CHARLES L.

CASEY, Cou. EHOMAS® \—£.,

W:SeA:

*CASWELL, JOHN H.

*Cattell, Prof. J. McKeen, Ph.D.

CHAMPOLLION, ANDRE

*CHANDLER, Prof. C. F., Ph.D.

CHAPIN, CHESTER W.

*CHAPMAN, FRANK M.

*CHEESMAN, TimoTHy M., M.D.

CLARKSON, BANYER

CuinE, Miss May

Coun, Jutius M.

Cow tgs, Davin S.

*COLLINGWOOD, FRANCIS

Collord, George W.

ComseE, Mrs. WILLIAM

Conpit, WILLIAM L.

Constant, S. Victor

DE CopreET, E. J.

CorNING, CHRISTOPHER R.

*Cox, CHARLES F.

*CRAMPTON, Prof. Henry E., Ph.D.

Crane, Zenas

Cross, GEORGE D.

DaHucREN, B. E., D.M.D.

*DAVENPORT, Prof. CHARLES B.,

Phe

Daviess, J. CLARENCE

Davies, WILLIAM G.

Davis, Dr. CHARLES H.

*Deran, Prof. BAsHFoRD, Ph.D.

DEGENER, R.

Delafield, Maturin L., Jr.

DELANO, WARREN, Jr.

DemorestT, WILLIAM C.

De Puy, Henry F.

DEVEREUX, W. B.

Devoe, F. W.

532

DeWitt, WILLIAM G.

Dickerson, Epwarp N.

DIEFENTHALER, C. E.

Drwock, GEORGE E.

Drx, Rev. Morean, D.D.

Donece, Rev. D. Stuart, D.D.

Dodge, Miss Grace H.

*DopaeE, Prof. RicHarp E., A.M.

Douerty, Henry L.

DonaLp, JAMES M.

*Doremus, Prof. CHARLES A., Ph.D.

*Deouglas, James

Doua.ass, ALFRED

Draper, Mrs. M. A. P.

DrummMonD, Isaac W., M.D.

*DupiLEY, P. H.; Ph-D:

*DuNHAM, EpwarD K., M.D.

Dunn, Gano

Dunscombe, George Elsworth

Du Pont, H. A.

DURAND, JOHN 5S.

*DUTCHER, WILLIAM

*D WIGHT, JONATHAN, Jr., M.D.

Dwyer, THOMAS

EICKEMEYER, CARL

*Elliott, Prof. A. H., Ph.D.

EmMeET, C. TEMPLE

Eno, JoHN C.

Eno, WILLIAM PHELPS

Estaprook, A. F.

*KYERMAN, JOHN

FAIRCHILD, CHARLES S.

Fauion, G. W. R.

FarGco, JAMES C.

FarMER, ALEXANDER S.

*FARRAND, Prof. Livineston, M.D.

Frerauson, Mrs. JuLIANA ARMOUR

FIELD, C. DE PEYSTER

Fretp, Witiiam B. Oscoop

*FINLEY, Pres. JoHNn H.

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

*FISHBERG, Maurice, M.D.

*FLEXNER, SIMON, M.D.

Foot, JAMEs D.

Ford, James B.

ForDYcE, JOHN A.

DE Forest, Ropert W.

Forster, WILLIAM

FREUND, Emin

FRISSELL, A. S.

GALLATIN, FREDERIC

Gipson, R. W.

*GiES, Prof. WiLLIAM J.

GOULD, EDWIN

GOULD, GEORGE J.

GOULD, MISS HELEN M.

*Grabau, Prof. Amadeus W.

*GRATACAP, Louis P.

GREEFF, ERNEST F.

*GrREGORY, W. K.

Griaes, J. GEORGE

Griscom, C. A., Jr.

GRISWOLD, Mrs. CHESTER

GUGGENHEIM, WILLIAM

von Hacen, Hueco

Hacue, James D.*

Haus, WILL1AM, Jr.

HAMMOND, JAMES B.

Harriman, E. H.

Haupt, Louis, M.D.

HAveEMEYER, WILLIAM F.

Heinze, ARTHUR P.

*HERING, Prof. DanreL W.

HERRMAN, MRS. ESTHER

*HERTER, CHRISTIAN A., M.D.

Hess, SELMAR

HEWLETT, WALTER J.

HIGGINSON, JAMES J.

*HILL, Ropert T.

Hrirscu, CHARLEs S.

*Hitcucock, Miss F. R. M., Ph.D.

1 Deceased,

LIST OF ACTIVE MEMBERS

HopENPYL, ANTON G.

Hor, Rosert, Jr.

*HoLiick, ARTHUR, Ph.D.

Holt, Henry

Hopkins, George B.

*HoRNADAY, WILLIAM T., Sc.D.

Horcuxiss, Henry D.

Hovuse, Prof. Homer D.

*Hovey, Edmund Otis, Ph.D.

*Howe, Prof. Henry M.

*Howk, MarsHaty A., Ph.D.

Hubbard, Thomas H.

HusBBarp, WALTER C.

HuauHeEs, Hon. CHARrtes E.

Hu.sHizer, J. E.

Huntington, Archer M.

Hustrace, FRANCIS

HuyLer, JOHN S.

Hyde, B. Talbot B.

Hype, E. Francis

Hyde, Frederic E., M.D.

Hyper, Henry St. JoHNn

Tles, George

*IrvinG, Prof. JoHn D.

Irvine, WALTER

von Isakxovics, ALOIS

*Jacopi, ABRAM, M.D.

Jarvie, James N.

JENNINGS, RoBERT E.

Jesup, Morris K.1

JONES, Dwicut A.

*JULIEN, ALEXIS A., Pa.D.

Kaun, Orro H.

*Kemp, Prof. James F., A.B., E.M.

KENNEDY, J. S.

Keppler, Rudolph

Kessler, George A.

Knapp, HERMAN

KoHLMAN, CHARLES

530

*KuNnz, GEORGE F., M.A., Ph.D.

DE LAGERBERG, JULIUS

Lamb, Osborn R.

LAMBERT, ADRIAN V.S., M.D.

Lanepon, Woopsury G.

LANGELOTH, J.

*LANGMANN, Gustav, M.D.

LAWRENCE, Amos E.

LAWRENCE, JOHN B.

Lawton, James M.

*LEDOUX, ALBERT R., Ph.D.

*LEE, Prof. FrREpDERIc S., Ph.D.

LEFFERTS, MARSHALL C.

*LEVISON, WALLACE GOOLD

Levy, EMANUEL

LICHTENSTEIN, Pau

Tap ds W.,. Jr:

*LINVILLE, H. R., Ph.D.

Loeb, James

*LorB, Prof. Morris, Ph.D.

LounsBERY, R. P.

Low, Hon. Seth, LL.D.

LowieE, Rospert H., Ph.D.

*Lucas, F. A.

*LUQUER, Prof. Lea Mcl.

*Lusk, Prof. GranamM, M.D. _

LuTTGEN, WALTHER

Lyon, RALPH

McCook, Col. J. J.

Mckum, Rev. Hastert!

*McMillin, Emerson

*MacDouGat., Prof. RoBERT

Mack, JACOB

Macy, Miss Mary Sutton, M.D.

Macy, V. Everit

Macer, F. RoBErtT

Mann, W. D.

Marsie, MAntTon

Marcou, JoHn B.

1 Deceased.

534 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

MaruineG, ALFRED E.

Marshall, Louis

Marston, E. S.

Martin, Bradley

*Martin, Prof. Daniel S.

* MARTIN, T. COMMERFORD

Martin, W. M.

*Matthew, W. D., Ph.D.

MaxweE tt, Francis T.

MEAD, WALTER H.

Metres, Titus B.

MELLEN, C. S.

*MELTZER, S. J., M.D.

* MERRILL, FREDERICK J. H., Ph.D.

Metz, HERMAN A.

*MrEYER, Apour, M.D.

Mizourn, J. G.

DE Mirna, Louis J.

MILLER, GreorcE N., M.D.

*MINER, Roy Watpo

MircHe.ti, ArTtHur M.

MiItTcHELL, EpwaRD

Morewoop, GEorGE B.

Moraan, J. PreRPONT

*MorGAN, Prof. THomas H.

Morais, Lewis R., M.D.

Mortimer, W. GoLpen, M.D.

Myers, Josep G.

Nimick, Mrs. A. K.

Oakes, FrRANcIs J.

Oxpric, ADOLPH

Ocus, ADOLPH S.

OETTINGER, P. J., M.D.

*Ogilvie, Miss Ida H., Ph.D.

Olcott, E. E.

Otmstep, Mrs. CHarues T.

*Osborn, Prof. Henry F., Sc. D.,

LL.D.

Osporn, WituraM C.

Ospurn, Raymonp C.

Owen, Miss Juliette A.

OwEns, W. W.

Pappock, EuGcENE H.

Parish, Henry

*PARKER, Prof. HERSCHEL C.

PaRSELL, Henry V. A.

Parsons, Mrs. Epwin

*PARSONS, JOHN E.

Patton, John

PEARLE, ROBERT

PEARSALL, THOMAS W.

PEDERSEN, F. M.

¥*PrLiew, Prof. C. b.Phw:

PENNINGTON, WILLIAM

Perkins, William H.

Perry, CHARLES J.

*PETERSON, FREDERICK, M.D.

*PETRUNKEVITCH, ALEXANDER,

Php:

PETTEGREW, Davin L.

*PrisTER, Prof. J. C.

PFrizER, CHARLES, Jr.

Puiuipp, P. BERNARD

Purrps, HENRY

PHOENIX, Lioyp

PICKHARDT, CARL

Pierce, Henry Ciay

*PITKIN, Lucius, Ph.D.

PLANTEN, JOHN R.

PoGGENBURG, H. F.4

*POLLARD, CHARLES L.

*Poor, Prof. CHARLES L.

Poor, Henry W.

PorTER, EuGENE H.

Post, ABRAM S.

*PostT.Cis:

Post, GEORGE B.

*PRINCE, Prof. JoHN DYNELEY

PritcHeETT, Pres. HENry S.

Procter, WILLIAM

1 Deceased.

LIST OF ACTIVE MEMBERS

Proctor, GEORGE H.

*PRUDDEN, Prof. T. MITCHELL,

M.D.

*PuPIN, Prof. M. I., Ph.D.

Pyne, M. Taylor

QUACKENBOS, Prof. J. D., M.D.

ReEILxy, F. JAMES

RICHARDSON, FREDERICK A.

*Ricketts, Prof. P. de P., Ph.D.

RIEDERER, LUDWIG

RIKER, SAMUEL

Ross, Hon. J. HAMPDEN

RoBERT, SAMUEL

Roperts, C. H.

Rogers, E. L.

Rogers, H. H.

Rowland, Thomas F.!

de Rubio, H. A. C.

*Russy, Prof. Henry H., M.D.

Russ, EpwarD

SacHs, Pau J.

SauL, CHARLES R.

SAUTER, FRED.

Schermerhorn, F. A.

Scuirr, Jacos H.

ScHOLLE, A. H.

Schott, Charles M., Jr.

Scott, GEORGE S.

SENFF, CHARLES H.

Suaw, Mrs. Joun C.

SHEPARD, C. SIDNEY

*SHERWOOD, GEORGE H.

SHILAND, ANDREW, Jr.

SHULTz, CHARLES S.

*SICKELS, Ivin, M.D.

SIEBERG, W. H. J.

SLOAN, BENSON B.

SmitTH, Exuiortt C.

*SMITH, ERNEST E., M.D., Ph.D.

*SmiTH, Prof. JoHN B.

SmitH, W. WHEELER

Snow, ELBRIDGE G.

*STARR, Prof. M. ALLEN

STEFANSSON, V.

Stetson, F. L.

STEVENS, C. AMORY

*STEVENS, GEORGE T., M.D.

*Stevenson, Prof. John J., LL.D.

STOKES, JAMES

Straus, Istpor

Stureis, Mrs. ErizapetH M.

*STUYVESANT, RUTHERFURD

Taccart, RusH

*Tatlock, John

TAYLOR, GEORGE

Taytor, WILLIAM H.

Terry, James

Testa, NIKOLA

THaw, BENJAMIN

Tuomeson, Mrs. FREDERICK F.

Tompson, Lewis S.

*THompson, Prof. W. GILMAN

THompson, WALTER

*THORNDIKE, Prof. Epwarp L.

THORNE, SAMUEL

*Tower, R. W., Ph.D.

*TOWNSEND, CHARLES H.

Tows, C. D.

*TROWBRIDGE, Prof. C. C.

TUcKERMAN, ALFRED, Ph.D.

Utimann, E. S.

Van Slyck, George W.

Van Wyck, Robert A.

VREDENBURGH, WILLIAM H.

*Waller, Prof. Elwyn, Ph.D.

Warsura, F. N.

Warsurc, Paut M.

Warp, ARTEMAS

Warp, JOHN GILBERT

WARNER, CHARLES ST. JOHN

1 Deceased.

535

536

WasHinectTon, Henry S., Ph.D.

WatTERBURY, J. I.

Weir, Col. John

WELLINGTON, AARON H.

WHEELER, H. L.

*WHEELER, WitLIAM Morton,

Ph.D.

*WauitTE, HORACE

*WHITFIELD, Prof. R. P.

Wicker, WILLIAM

Wieain, F. H., M.D.

Wiuuiams, R. H.

Wits, CHARLES T.

*WILson, Prof. EpmunD B., Ph.D.,

1) Dal Oy

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

WIitson, Henry R.

Witson, J. H.

Witson, Miss M. B., M.D.

*WISSLER, CLARK, Ph.D.

Wotrr, A. R.

Woop, Mrs. Cyntuia A.

*WooODBRIDGE, Prof. FREDERICK

se De

*WooDHULL, Prof. Joun F.,

PhD:

*WooDWARD, Prof. R. S.

*WoopwokrtTH, Prof. R. S.

YEAMAN, GrEorGE H.!

YOuUNGLOVE, JoHN, M.D.

ZABRISKIE, GEORGE

ASSOCIATE MEMBERS.

Brown, Harotp CHapman, Ph.D.

Brown, T. C.

Dusuin, L. J.

GORDON, CLARENCE E.

HuntTER, GEORGE W.

JAMES, F. WILTON

Keuuicott, W. E., Ph.D.

McGreeor, JAMES HowarD

MonrtacuE, W. P., Ph.D.

NortHup, DwicHt

STEVENSON, A. E.

NON-RESIDENT MEMBERS.

*ABBE, Dr. CLEVELAND

BucHner, Epwarp F.

Burnett, DouGcLass

Davis, WILLIAM H.

EnGuisH, GEORGE L.

Fintay, Prof. G. I.

FRANKLAND, FREDERICK W.

HorrMan, S. V.

Kenopie, Amos B.

*LLoyD, Prof. F. E.

*M ayer, Dr. A. G.

*PRaTs, Dried! HH:

*Rres, Prof. H.

Reuter, L. H.

*SUMNER, Dr. F. B.

*van INGEN, Prof. G.

1 Deceased.

GENERAL INDEX TO VOLUME XVIII.

Names of Authors and other Persons in Heavy-Face Type.

Titles of Papers in SMALL CAPS.

Abbe, Cleveland, Active Member, 265

Fellow, 306

Abbott, Clinton G., Expression oF Emo-

TION IN BIRDS AS SHOWN BY PHOTOG-

RAPHY (Abstract), 297

PROBABLE CAUSE OF THE ‘“‘ BLEATING”’

oF SNIPE (Title), 481

ACCIDENTAL RESEMBLANCE AND ITS POSSIBLE

IMPORTANCE IN THE ORIGIN OF SPECIES,

Bashford Dean (Title), 461

AcID AND FATIGUE, F. §S. Lee (Abstract), 270

Acip EXTREME OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES,

NEAR PEEKSKILL, N. Y., Charles P.

Berkey (Abstract), 474, 477

Active Members, Election of, 265, 269, 274,

280, 286, 290, 297, 313, 316, 327, 334,

340, 345, 359, 456, 458, 467, 473, 489,

500

List of, 376 530

Adaptation (in organic evolution), 432

Adler, Isaac, Fellow, 363

Aiquisepale (subsection of Ipomea), 184, 249

Aguirre, Severo Y., Active Member, 500

Allen, C. H., Active Member, 340

Allen, J. A., LiInNzus AS A ZOOLOGIST, 9-19

Allen, James Lane, Active Member, 286

ALLOYS, ON THE JRON-CARBON SERIES OF,

Wm. Campbell (Abstract), 339

Ambronn and Schur, Solar investigations of,

396, 415

Amendments to By-laws, 287, 457, 459

Amendments to Constitution, 286

AMERICAN PALEOzoIc, CONTINENTAL FORMA-

TION OF THE, A. W. Grabau (Abstract)

490, 491

Amphione, see Ipomea

Anatomy of swim-bladder in drumfishes, 150

Anatomy of swim-bladder in Sea-robin and

Toadfish, 154

Anderson, G. E., DEVELOPMENT OF THE

INNER WALL IN THE PAL#OZOIC

Corats (Title), 305

Anderson, J. H., Active Member, 467

Anderson, Tempest, Vesuvius aNnp Its

Eruptions (Title), 334

Andrews, Roy C., Active Member, 500

Aniseia, see Ipomea

Anisomere (subsection of Ipome@a), 184, 242

Annual Meeting, 305, 363, 502

ANNUAL MEETING OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOcI-

ETY OF AMERICA, ALBUQUERQUE, N.

M., DrEcEMBER 30-31, 1907, E. O.

Hovey (Title), 460

Anthropology and Psychology, Section of,

268, 272, 277, 282, 296, 300, 315, 318,

325, 331, 349, 355, 458, 462, 471, 481,

494, 499

Antigorite, Recast analysis of, 133

Aphrodite, Recast analysis of, 144

APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING THE MOMENT

oF INERTIA IN @M-CM? UNITs, THE,

E. BR. Von Nardroff (Title), 324

APPLIED PHILOSOPHY AND APPLIED PsYCHOL-

oay, D. S. Miller (Abstract), 355, 358

Arborescentes (subsection of Ipomea), 183,

188

Argyreia, see Ipomea

Argyrophylle (subsection of Ipomea), 183,

185

Aristotle, cited, 158

Armstrong, A. C., THE IDEA OF FEELING IN

RovussEAv’s RELIGIOUS PHILOSOPHY

(Abstract), 482, 484

Arnold, E. S. F., Death of, 467, 487

Arnold, Felix, Active Member, 458

Arnold, F. J., FInpING THE WEIGHT OF AN

IRREGULAR Bopy BY MEANS OF ITS

CENTER OF GRAVITY (Title), 324

Associate Members, Election of, 316

List of, 382, 536

Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry, Section

of, 268, 271, 277, 282, 290, 295, 299,

314, 318, 324, 339, 346, 354, 457, 462,

470, 481, 488, 497

ATTENTION, THE LAws or, E. B. Titchener

(Abstract), 463

Auwers, Discussion of Sun’s shape and pos-

sible variability, 388, 390, 415

Baekeland, Leo H., Active Member, 456

Baldwin, William D., Active Member, 334

Bangs, Francis S., Active Member, 269

Barhydt, Mrs. P. Hackley, Active Member,

345

537

538 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Barnes, Miss Cora F., Active Member, 269

Bartelmez, S. W., and Bristol, C. L., SKIN

GLANDS OF Bufo agua (Abstract), 329

Baskerville, Charles, Councilor, 306

Batatas (section of Jpomea), 183, 184, 210

Bateson, William, INHERITANCE OF COLOR

IN ANIMALS AND PLANTs (Title), 349

Honorary Member, 363

Baugh, Miss M. L., Active Member, 269

Bawden, H. Heath, THe FUNCTIONAL

PsYCHOLOGY OF SENSATION AND IMAGE

(Title), 283

Bracu Cusps, ORIGIN oF, D. W. Johnson

(Abstract), 474, 477

BracuH Cusps AND RELATED PHENOMENA,

W. O. Crosby (Title), 486

Bean, Henry Willard, Active Member, 269

Bearded Drum, see Drumfishes

Beebe, C. William, PRELIMINARY REPORT

oF SOME RECENT EXPERIMENTS WITH

BIRDS IN THE NEw YORK ZOOLOGICAL

Park (Title), 461

Begonia frigida, Spontaneous variability of,

439

Bell, J. Carleton, Errect oF SUGGESTION

UPON THE REPRODUCTION OF TRI-

ANGLES AND OF POINT DISTANCES

(Abstract), 355, 356

Beller, A., Active Member, 340

Berkey, Charles P., THE AciID EXTREME OF

THE CORTLANDT SERIES, NEAR PEEKS-

KILL, NEw YorK, (Abstract), 474, 477

Active Member, 359

Fellow, 503

LIMESTONES INTERBEDDED WITH THE

FoRDHAM GNEISS OF NEW YORK

City (Abstract), 490

NOTES ON THE PREGLACIAL CHANNELS

OF THE LOWER HUDSON VALLEY AS

REVEALED BY RECENT Borines (Ab-

stract), 294

A REVISED CROSS-SECTION OF RONDOUT

VALLEY ALONG THE LINE OF THE

CaTSKILL AQuEDucT (Abstract), 460

SUMMARY OF AN INVESTIGATION INTO THE

STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN

MANHATTAN AND THE CONDITION OF

THE East RivER CHANNEL (Abstract),

501

Bertrand, Marcel, Death of, 327

BERYL FROM HappAM NECK, CONNECTICUT,

D. 8. Martin (Abstract), 294

Betts, G. H., CoRRELATION OF VISUAL IMAG-

ERY WITH COLLEGE STANDING (Ab-

stract), 355, 356

Betts, Samuel R., Active Member, 340

Beutenmiiller, William, Tur SoutH AMER-

ICAN SPECIES OF Motus BELONGING

TO THE GENuS Aittacus (Title), 267

Bianchi, Meridian observation of the sun’s

diameter, 387

Bigelow, Maurice A., THe DIrreRENCE

BETWEEN NATURE STUDY AND BIOLOGY

(Title), 329

Bigelow, William Sturgis, Active Member,

334

Bijur, Moses, Active Member, 340

Billings, Frederick, Active Member, 269

BioLoGicAL RESULTS OF AN EXPEDITION TO

THE BARREN GROUNDS,’ Ernest

Thompson Seton (Title), 456

BIoLOGY OF THE BAHAMAS, N. L. Britton,

W. M. Wheeler and M. A. Howe,

(Title) 288

Biology, Section of, 267, 270, 274, 281, 288,

291, 297, 304, 317, 324, 329, 337, 345,

351, 360, 456, 461, 469, 481, 487, 493,

496, 502

Birdsall, Mrs. W. R., Active Member, 269

Birp’s WING IN FLIGHT AS REVEALED BY

PHOTOGRAPHY, Frank M. Chapman

(Title), 461

Birkhahn, R. C., Active Member, 327

Bishop, Samuel H., Active Member, 359

Blank, M. I., Active Member, 334

Bliss, C. B., INQUIRY AFTER THE POSSIBLE

RELATIONS BETWEEN THE TRINITIES

oF PsycHOLOGY AND THEOLOGY (Ab-

stract), 319, 320

Boas, Emil L., Active Member, 269

Boas, Franz, Councilor, 503

NoTEs ON THE PAWNEE LANGUAGE

(Title), 325

BoaGosLtor VOLCANO IN BERING SEA, Evouv-

TION of, T. A. Jaggar, Jr., (Abstract),

474, 478

Bohler, Richard F., Active Member, 473

TooL-STEEL MAKING IN Styria (Ab-

stract), 354

Bohler, R. F. and Campbell, William,

HEAT TREATMENT OF CARBON TOOL

STEELs (Abstract), 488

Bolton, Reginald Pelham, Recent Dis-

COVERIES IN THE ABORIGINAL, COLO-

NIAL AND REVOLUTIONARY REMAINS

ON MANHATTAN ISLAND (Title), 315

Bombycosperme (subsection of IJpomea),

184, 220

Bonanozr, see Ipomea

Bose, J. C., MECHANICAL RESPONSE OF

Puants (Title), 505

Bowenite, Recast analysis of, 134

Breithut, Lamb and Rosanoff, A New

MrETHOD OF MEASURING PARTIAL

VaArpoR PRESSURES IN BINARY MIx-

TURES (Title), 457

Breitwieser, J. V., Errecr OF VARYING

RESISTANCE ON REACTION TIME (Ab-

stract), 499, 500

Bridge, T. W., cited, 154, 173

BRIEF ACCOUNT OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE

Faytm, Eaypr, Henry F. Osborn

(Title), 337

BrigEF REPORT ON A RECENT TRIP TO THE

———_

INDEX

Socirty IsLanps, Henry E. Cramp-

ton (Title), 288

Brisley, William H., Active Member, 269

Bristol, C. L., GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

AND ZOOLOGY OF BERMUDA (Title), 317

Bristol, C. L. and Bartelmez, S. W., SKIN

GuANDs OF Bufo agua (Abstract), 329

British East AFricaA, A NATURALIST IN,

Herbert Lang (Abstract), 360, 361

Britton, Nathaniel L., Address at Linnean

Celebration, 40—41

THE GENUS Ernodea Swartz: A Stupy

OF SPECIES AND Races (Title), 461

Lanp BoTany OF BERMUDA (Title), 317,

President, 306

RECENT BOTANICAL EXPLORATIONS IN

JAMAICA (Title), 487

RECENT EXPLORATIONS

(Title), 346

SoME CONSIDERATIONS AND ILLUSTRA-

TIONS OF COLOR IN PLANTs (Title), 306

Britton, N. L., Wheeler, W. M., and Howe,

M. A., Brotogy or THE BAHAMAS

(Title), 288

BROADER GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURE OF THE

MeExIcAN PLATEAU, Robert T. Hill

(Title), 276

Brown, Barnum, PALEONTOLOGICAL Ex-

PLORATIONS OF THE AMERICAN MUSEUM

DURING THE SUMMER OF 1908 (Title),

496

Brown, Harold Chapman, Associate Mem-

ber, 489

Brown, Warner, TIME IN VERSE (Abstract),

463, 464

Bruce, Miss Matilda W., Active Member,

340

Bryonia, see Ipomea

Bujo Agua, Skin GuANps or, C. L. Bristol

and §. W. Bartelmez (Abstract), 329

Bumpus, Hermon Carey, Corresponding

Secretary, 503

Burr, William H., Active Member, 269

Fellow, 306

Burr, Winthrop, Active Member, 340

Business Meeting of the Academy, 265, 269,

272, 278, 283, 290, 296, 303, 313, 316,

321, 326, 334, 340, 345, 350, 359, 453,

456, 458, 467, 489, 495, 472, 486, 500

By-laws, 518

Amendments to, 287, 457, 459

IN JAMAICA

Caldwell, George Chapman, Dcath of, 489

Calkins, G. N., Osborn, H. F., Lloyd, F.

E., and other Members, Norres oN

LEADING PAPERS READ AT THE MEET-

INcs aT NEW ORLEANS AND ANN

ARBOR (Title), 268

Calonyction, see Ipomea

Calver, W. S., Recent Discovery or ABO-

RIGINAL REMAINS ON MANHATTAN Is-

LAND (Title), 315

539

Calystegia, see Ipomea

Camarophorella, STRUCTURE OF BRACHIAL

Support or, J. E. Hyde (Abstract),

474, 478

CAMBRIAN Rocks OF VERMONT, George H.

Perkins (Abstract), 473, 475

Campbell, William, Active Member, 316

Fellow, 363

Notes ON METALLOGRAPHY APPLIED TO

ENGINEERING (Abstract), 470

Notes ON Microscopic EXAMINATION

OF THE OPAQUE CONSTITUENTS OF ORE

Bopiss (Abstract), 294

On THE IRON-CARBON SERIES OF ALLOYS

(Abstract), 339

RELATION BETWEEN THE MICROSTRUC-

TURE AND THE HEAT AND MECHANICAL

TREATMENT OF IRON AND STEEL (Title),

314

Some TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS

TAKEN IN THE STEEL WORKS WITH

THE WANNER AND OTHER PYROMETERS

(Abstract), 346, 348

Usr or METALLOGRAPHY IN CERTAIN

PROBLEMS IN ORE-DRESSING (Ab-

stract), 497, 498

Visit TO Nova ScoriaA: THE COLLIERIES

AND THE IRON AND STEEL PLANTS

(Abstract), 497, 498

Campbell, William, and BOhler, R. F.,

Heat TREATMENT OF CARBON TOOL

STEELS (Abstract), 488

Campbell, William, and Knight, C. W.

Microscopic EXAMINATION OF SILVER

Deposits OF TEMISKAMING, ONT.

(Abstract), 289

Campbell, William M., Active Member,

500

EFFECT OF PRESSURE ON MAGNETIZA-

TION OF IRON (Abstract), 325

Cantua, see Ipomea

Carr, Harvey, A Case or INcIPIENT Hy-

STERICAL TRANCE (Abstract), 318, 319

THE PENDULAR WHIP-LASH ILLUSION OF

Motion (Abstract), 300, 301

Carr, H. A., Some InvoLuNTARY ILLUSIONS

or DeptH (Abstract), 482, 483

Case, Charles L., Active Member, 269

Case OF INCIPIENT HysSTERICAL TRANCE,

Harvey Carr (Abstract), 318, 319

CASE OF MUTATION IN PULMONATE GASTRO-

pops, Henry E. Crampton (Title),

297

Caswell, John H., Finance Committee, 306

CATSKILL AQuEDUcT, A REVISED CROSS-SEC-

TION OF RONDOUT VALLEY ALONG

THE LINE oF, C. P. Berkey (Abstract),

460

Cattell, J. McKeen, Tor EntTopric Fovrea

(Abstract), 355, 357

PERCEPTIONS, IMAGES AND ILLUSIONS

(Abstract), 331, 333

540 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

THe Practric—E CURVE AS AN Epvuca-

TIONAL METHOD (Title), 272

Celadonite, Recast analysis of, 135

CENTRIFUGAL RAILWAY, THE, Charles Forbes

(Title), 324

CENTRIFUGING THE EGGs OF THE MOLLUSC

Cumingia, Errects or, T. H. Morgan

(Abstract), 360

Cephalanthe (subsection of Ipomea), 183, 192

Chandler, W. H., Death of, 489

Chapin, H. D., Active Member, 340

Chapman, Frank M., THe Birp’s WING

IN FLIGHT AS REVEALED BY PHOTOG-

RAPHY (Title), 461

Nores ON THE FisH Hawk (Title), 496

AN ORNITHOLOGICAL TRIP TO SOUTHERN

FLorRIpA (Title), 487

THE PTARMIGAN — LivING AND DEAD

(Abstract), 351, 352

Vice-President, 364, 503

CHARLES DARWIN AND THE MUTATION THE-

ory, C. F. Cox, 431-451

Charter, 511

Chesapeake Clay of Long Island, 427

CHESTER, New YorK, MastTopon, THE,

E. O. Hovey, 147

CHIPEWYAN INDIANS, ETHNOLOGICAL TRIP TO

THE, R. H. Lowie (Abstract), 494

Chrysostom, Brother, CONSCIOUSNESS FROM

A METAPHYSICAL STANDPOINT (Title),

283

PsycHOLOGY AND SPELLING (Abstract),

300, 302

Space (Abstract), 319, 320

Cissoides (subsection of Ipomaa), 184, 205

Clarke, John M., GEOGRAPHY OF THE AT-

LANTIC DEVONIAN (Title), 318

Cleiemera, see Ipomea

Coiladena, see Ipomea

COLLECTING BryOzOA AT THE TORTUGAS

AND BEAUFORT STATIONS, Raymond

C. Osburn (Title), 496

COLLECTION OF EXTINCT ELEPHANTS IN THE

AMERICAN MusrEuM, F. A. Lucas

(Title), 296

Collins, Miss Anna E., Active Member, 274

Collord, George W., Active Member, 269

CoLOR-ARRANGEMENTS, ESTHETICS OF SIMPLE,

Kate Gordon (Abstract), 360

CoLoR SENSATIONS AND CoLoR NAMEs, B. S.

Woodworth (Title), 272

CoLORED AFTER-IMAGES OF UNPERCEIVED

PERIPHERAL COLOR-STIMULI, G. Fer-

nald (Title), 283

Combe, Mrs. William, Active Member, 340

COMPARISON OF MENTAL PROCESSES IN THE

HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL POSITION

OF THE Bopy, E. E. Jones (Title), 282

CoMPARISON OF VESUVIUS AND Mt. PELE,

WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO RECENT

Eruptions, E. 0. Hovey (Title), 289

Competition (in organic evolution), 432

CONCEPT OF SUBSTITUTIVE ACTIVITY AND THE

RELATION OF MENTAL REACTION TYPES

To Psycutatric Nosotoey, Adolf

Meyer (Abstract), 463, 465

CONSCIOUSNESS AND ENERGY, W. P. Mon-

tague (Abstract), 499

CONSCIOUSNESS FROM A METAPHYSICAL POINT

or View, Brother Chrysostom

(Title), 283

Constitution, 517

Constitution of crystallized minerals, 130

Constitution of micro-aggregates, 136

Constitutional Amendments, 286

CONTINENTAL FORMATION OF AMERICAN PALE-

ozoic, A. W. Grabau (Abstract),

490, 491

CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF MAINE,

Ida H. Ogilvie (Title), 336

CONTRIBUTION TO THE History oF Mr.

PELE, MARTINIQUE, E. O. Hovey

(Abstract), 496

CONVENTIONALISM IN THE ANCIENT ART OF

Curriqui, G. G. MacCurdy (Title), 296

Convolvulus, see Ipomea

Cope, E. D., cited, 431

CoprPeR ORE, PRODUCTION OF LOW GRADE,

IN THE WEsT, J. F. Kemp (Abstract),

490 ,

Cornish, R. H., MECHANICAL ILLUSTRATION

oF BEATs IN Sounp (Title), 324

METHOD OF PROJECTION ON SCREEN OF

LINES OF FORCE SURROUNDING A CON-

DUCTOR CARRYING A CURRENT (Title),

324

CORRELATION OF THE NEWARK (TRIASSIC)

Trap Rocks oF New JERSEY, J. Vol-

ney Lewis (Abstract), 336

CORRELATION OF VISUAL IMAGERY WITH

CoLLEGE STANDING, G. H. Betts

(Abstract), 355, 356

Corresponding Members, List of, 372, 526

Corresponding Secretary, Report of, 364, 506

CoRTLANDT SERIES, ACID EXTREME OF, NEAR

(Abstract), 474, 477

Cox, Charles F., CHarLES DARWIN AND THE

MutTATION THEORY, 431-451

Finance Committee, 364, 503

President, 364, 503

Cowles, David S., Active Member, 269

Crampton, C. Ward, PHyYsIOLOGicAL AGE

(Title), 349

Crampton, Henry E., Brier REPORT ON A

REcENT TRIP TO THE Society ISLANDS

(Title), 288

A Case OF MUTATION IN PULMONATE

Gastropops (Title), 297

Corresponding Secretary, 364

Councilor, 503

Sreconp JOURNEY TO THE Socipty Is-

LANDS (Title), 346

Vice-President, 306

INDEX

Cretaceous of Long Island, 425

Croaker, see Drumfishes

Crosby, W. O., BracH Cusps AND RELATED

PHENOMENA (Title), 486

OUTLINE OF THE GEOLOGY OF LONG

ISLAND, N. Y., 425-429

Cross, George D., Active Member, 334

Crystalline rocks of Long Island, 425

Crystallized minerals, Constitution of, 130

Cuvier, cited, 158, 159, 173

Cynoscion regalis, see Drumfishes

Dactylophylle (subsection of Ipomea), 184,

215

Dahlgren, B. E., Active Member, 280

Darwin, Charles, cited, 434-448

Darwin, CHARLES, AND THE MUTATION THE-

ory, C. F. Cox, 431-451

Davenport, Charles B., INHERITANCE IN

Canary Birps (Title), 304

Dean, Bashford, AccIDENTAL RESEMBLANCE

AND ITS PossIBLE IMPORTANCE IN THE

ORIGIN OF SPEcIEs (Title), 461

ZoGOLoGicaL NOTES COLLECTED IN JAPAN

AND Inp1A4 (Title), 281

Deaths, 273. 278, 284, 288, 293, 322, 327, 345,

457, 459, 467, 487, 489, 495

DECAY OF PHOSPHORESCENCE IN GASES, C. C.

Trowbridge (Abstract), 346, 348

Degener, R., Active Member, 334

Deiessite, blackish green, Recast analysis of,

141

Dellenbaugh, Frederick S., THE Navaso

Loom; IsIr INpIGENOUS? (Title), 296

Some NOTES ON THE DISINTEGRATION OF

THE TRIBES OF OKLAHOMA (Title), 325

De Puy, H. F., Active Member, 265

DESERT ANTS, Wm. M. Wheeler (Title), 470

DETECTION OF COLOR BLINDNEssS, V. A. GC.

Henmon (Title), 272

DETECTION OF THE EMOTIONS BY THE GAL-

VANOMETER, E. W. Scripture (Ab-

stract), 355, 358

DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CONSTITUTION

THROUGH RECASTING OF ANALYSES, A.

A. Julien, 129-146

DEVELOPMENT OF THE INNER WALL IN THE

PaLtmozoic Corats, G. E. Anderson

(Title), 305

DEVELOPMENT OF NANTASKET BEACH, Bos-

TON HARBOR, Wm. G. Reed, Jr., (Ab-

stract), 474, 477

Dewey, John, KNOWLEDGE AND JUDGMENT

(Title), 300

Deweylite, Recast analysis of, 134

Diabantochromyn, fibrous, Recast analysis of,

139

Diabantite, Recast analysis of, 142

DIAMONDS IN AMERICA, G. F. Kunz (Title),

271

Dickerson, Mary C., Woops LIFE IN THE

New ENGLAND WINTER (Title), 502

541

Diefenthaler, Charles E., Active Member,

334

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN NATURE STUDY AND

Brotoey, Maurice A. Bigelow (Title),

329

Dimock, George E., Active Member, 265

DiIscovEeRY OF FossiL SHELLS IN MANHATTAN

IsLAND, J. H. Wilson (Title), 271

DISCOVERY OF THE SCHOHARIE FAUNA IN

Micuican, A. W. Grabau (Abstract),

266, 267

DISTINCTION BETWEEN HEART

D. S. Miller (Title), 283

DIsTORTION AND OSCILLATIONS OF HELICAL

Sprincs, D. W. Hering (Title), 282

DISTRIBUTION OF THE JUNCOS, OR SNOW Birps,

ON THE NORTH AMERICAN CONTINENT,

Jonathan Dwight, Jr., (Abstract),

351, 353

DISTRIBUTION OF THE MASTODON AND MAm-

MOTH IN NORTH AMERICA WITH

DESCRIPTION OF THE WARREN MASTO-

pDoN, H. F. Osborn (Title), 456

Dix, Morgan, Death of, 495

Dodge, Miss Grace H., Active Member, 340

Dodge, R. E., Corresponding Secretary, 306

Doremus, Robert Ogden, Death of, 288

DREAMS, PsycHoLocy or, R. H. Lowie

(Abstract) 471 472

Drumfishes, 150, 151, 153

Anatomy of Swim-bladder in, 150

Sound production in, 158

DRUMFISHES, THE SEA-ROBIN AND THE TOAD-

FISH, PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN THE,

R. W. Tower, 149-180

Dufossé, cited, 151, 155, 160, 161, 162, 173

Dunn, Gano, Active Member, 359

Dwight, Jonathan, Jr., DisTRIBUTION OF

THE JUNCOS, OR SNOW BIRDS, ON THE

NortH AMERICAN CONTINENT (Ab-

stract), 351, 353

Dwight, M. E., Death of, 457

Dwyer, Thomas, Active Member, 340

Dyar, cited, 96

AND HEap,

Eastman, Max, Tur PraGMATiIc MEANING

oF PRAGMATISM (Abstract), 482, 485

East River CHANNEL, The, C. P. Berkey

(Abstract), 501

Editor, Report of the, 367, 507

EFFECT OF PRESSURE ON MAGNETIZATION OF

Tron, W. M. Campbell (Abstract), 325

EFFECT OF SUGGESTION UPON THE REPRO-

DUCTION OF TRIANGLES AND OF POINT

DisTANcEs, J. C. Bell (Abstract), 355,

356

EFFECT OF VARYING RESISTANCE ON REAC-

TION Time, J. V. Breitwieser (Ab-

stract), 499, 500

EFFECTS OF CENTRIFUGING THE EGGS OF THE

Mouuusc Cumingia, T. H. Morgan

(Abstract), 360

542 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Eickemeyer, Carl, Active Member, 269

ELECTROLYSIS OF SILICO-FLUORIDE SOLUTIONS,

E. F. Kern (Abstract), 354

ELECTROLYTIC REFINING OF IRON, E. F. Kern

(Abstract), 497

Elephas Mastodonta, 147

Elliott, A. H., Fellow, 363

Emanuel, John H., Jr., Active Member, 286

EMBRYOLOGY OF THE HORNED Toap, C. W.

Hahn (Abstract), 274

Emetice (subsection of Ipomea), 184, 239

Eno, John C., Active Member, 340

Entoptic Fovresa, THE, J. McK. Cattell

(Abstract), 355, 357

Erpipomea (subsection of Ipomea), 184, 210

Escobar, Francisco, Active Member, 269

Estabrook, Arthur F., Active Member, 340

ESTHETICS OF SIMPLE COLOR-ARRANGEMENTS,

Kate Gordon (Abstract), 300

ETHNOLOGICAL TRIP TO THE CHIPEWYAN IN-

DIANS, R. H. Lowie (Abstract), 494

ETHNOLOGICAL TRIP TO THE WINNEBAGO

InpIANS, Paul Radin (Abstract), 494

Evening primrose, see @notheras

Evermann, B. M., cited, 162, 173

EVIDENCE OF THE STABILITY OF THE ROcK

FOUNDATIONS OF NEw York City,

A. A. Julien (Abstract), 328

EVOLUTION OF BOGOSLOF VOLCANO IN BERING

Sea, T. A. Jaggar, Jr., (Abstract),

474, 478

EVOLUTIONARY STUDY OF COCCINELLIDS, R. H.

Johnson (Abstract), 304

Exogonium, see Ipomea

EXPERIMENTS IN HaBiTr FORMATION, J. E.

Lough (Title), 283

EXPERIMENTS IN MEMORY FOR PAIRED ASSO-

CIATIONS. E. L. Thorndike (Abstract),

Skil. SBR:

EXPERIMENTS ON THE SUBCONSCIOUS, WITH

DEMONSTRATION OF JUNG’S METHOD OF

DETECTING EMOTIONAL COMPLEXES,

E. W. Scripture (Abstract), 355, 356

EXPLORATION OF THE PINACATE Lava ReE-

GION IN NORTHWESTERN Mexico, W.

T. Hornaday (Title), 502

EXPLOSION OF DETONATING GAS, NOTE ON A

Curious Errect PRODUCED By, J. P.

Simmons (Abstract), 488

EXPRESSION OF EMOTION IN BrirDs AS SHOWN

BY PHoToGRApPHY, C. G. Abbott (Ab-

stract), 297

Fallon, G. W. R., Active Member, 340

FEELING AND OTHER SENSATIONS, H. C.,

Warren (Abstract), 463

Fellows, Election of, 306, 363, 503

Fenner, C. N., Nores ON GEOLOGY OF THE

First WATCcHUNG TRAP-SHEET (Title),

350, 359

Fernald, G., CoLorep AFTER-IMAGES OF

UNPERCEIVED PERIPHERAL COLOR-

STIMULI (Title), 283

FINDING THE WEIGHT OF AN IRREGULAR

Bopy By MEANS OF ITs CENTER OF

Gravity, F. J. Arnold (Title), 324

Finlay, George I., Non-resident Member, 316

Fire Cuuts: DIsTRIBUTION AND CHARACTER-

Istic FEATURES, WITH HyYPoTHESIS

RESPECTING THEIR ORIGIN AND MEAN-

ina, A. O. Lovejoy (Abstract), 471

First WRITTEN DocUMENT ABOUT FLORA,

Fauna, ETHNOLOGY AND ANTHROPOL-

ocy OF AMERICA, A. M. F. de Ybarra

(Abstract), 274

Fishberg, Maurice, Vice-President, 503

Flexner, Simon, Active Member, 286

Fellow, 306

Flint, Charles R., Active Member, 340

Focht, Mildred, ON SimuLttTanrous CoLoR

ConTRAST (Title), 283

Foot, James D., Active Member, 345

Forbes, Charles, THE CEenTRIFUGAL RAIL-

way (Title), 324

THE OSMOSESCOPE (Title), 324

FoRDHAM GNEIss OF New York City, LiIMe-

STONES INTERBEDDED WITH, C. P.

Berkey (Abstract), 490

Fordyce, John A., Active Member, 334

Forster, William, Active Member, 274

“Four Powers or Lire, THE,’’ D. S. Miller

(Title), 272

Franklin, Milton, Active Member, 265

Fraxima, see Ipomea

Freeman, F. N., PRELIMINARY STUDIES IN

WriTInG ReEacvions (Abstract), 331

Freund, Emil, Active Member, 340

Froberg, S., ReEAcTION TIME AS AFFECTED

BY THE INTENSITY, AREA AND DURA-

TION OF THE STIMULUS (Abstract), 318,

319

FUNCTIONAL PsYCHOLOGY OF SENSATION AND

ImacE, H. H. Bawden (Title), 283

Gadow, Hans, Vo.tcaNno orf JoRULLO,

Mexico; History, Fratrures, Rr-

POPULATION OF DISTRICT BY ANIMALS

AND PLANTs (Title), 493

Gager, C. Stuart, A New Factor In PLAnt

ENVIRONMENT (Abstract), 281

GALVANOMETER, DETECTION OF EMOTIONS BY

THE, E. W. Scripture (Abstract),

355, 358

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS AND ZOOLOGY OF

BerMmupa, C. L. Bristel (Title), 317

Genthite, Recast analysis of, 145

GeNus Ernodea Swartz, THe: A Srupy or

Species AND Racss, N. L. Britton

(Title), 461

GEOGRAPHICAL CLASSIFICATION OF MARINE

Lire Districts, A. W. Grabau (Title),

305

GEOGRAPHY OF THE ATLANTIC DEVONIAN,

J. M. Clarke (Title), 318

GEOLOGICAL PROBLEMS OF THE WINDWARD

IsLaANpDs, R. T. Hill (Title), 468

INDEX

GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY OF BERMUDA,

J. J. Stevenson (Title), 317

Geology and Mineralogy, Section of, 266, 271,

276, 281, 289, 293, 298, 305, 313, 317,

322, 327, 335, 348, 350, 359, 453, 459,

468, 473, 486, 495, 501

Spring Conference, 473

GEOLOGY OF COUNTRY TRAVERSED BY THE

WALLACE EXPEDITION TO LABRADOR IN

1905, G. M. Richards (Title), 271

GrEoLoGy oF Lone IsuAND, N, Y., OUTLINE

or, W. O. Crosby, 425-429

GEOLOGY OF THE SIERRA ALMALOYA, MEXICO,

R. T. Hill (Abstract), 328

GEOMETRY, SOME RELATIONS OF, TO Psy-

CHOLOGY AND PuHiLosopHy, C. J.

Keyser (Abstract), 319, 321

GIBEON METEORITE, THE, AND OTHER RECENT

ACCESSIONS OF THE AMERICAN MUSEUM,

E. 0. Hovey (Title), 474

Gibson, J. Stewart, New Piece or AppPaA-

RATUS FOR SHOWING THE RELATION

BETWEEN INTENSITY OF ILLUMINATION

AND DIsTANCE (Title), 324

RESULTS OF A SERIES OF EXPERIMENTS ON

THE CRITICAL ANGLE: ITs EFFECT

ON VISION FROM UNDERNEATH THE

SURFACE OF WATER (Title), 325

Gibson, Robert W., Active Member, 340

Gies, William J., Councilor, 364

Gifts to Academy, 327

Glen Iris Estate, Gift of, 316

Gomphius, see Ipomea

Gordon, Kate, EstHetics or SIMPLE COLOR-

ARRANGEMENTS (Abstract), 300

Grabau, Amadeus W., ConTINENTAL For-

MATION OF THE AMERICAN PALEOZOIC

(Abstract), 490, 491

DISCOVERY OF THE SCHOHARIE FAUNA IN

MicHiGan (Abstract), 266, 267

GEOGRAPHICAL CLASSIFICATION OF Ma-

RINE Lire Districts (Title), 305

NoTes ON CHARACTER AND ORIGIN OF

THE POTTSVILLE FORMATION OF THE

APPALACHIAN REGION (Abstract), 294

ORTHOGENESIS IN GaAsTROPODS (Title),

337

PREGLACIAL DRAINAGE IN CENTRAL NEW

YorK (Title), 359

RECAPITULATION AS VIEWED BY A PALE-

ONTOLOGIST (Title), 470

REVISED CLASSIFICATION FOR THE NORTH

AMERICAN LOWER PALEOzoIc (Title),

474

REVISED CLASSIFICATION OF THE NORTH

AMERICAN SILURIC SysTEM (Title), 454

ScENERY AND GEOLOGY OF THE GORGES

AND Fatits oF LETCHWORTH PARK

(Abstract), 322

SyLvanra SANDSTONE—A Srupy IN

PALEOGEOGRAPHY (Abstract), 343, 344

Vice-President, 306, 364

543

Granger, Walter, STRATIGRAPHY OF THE

BRIDGER Basin, WYOMING, (Title), 281

Gratacap, L. P., Active Member, 313

Fellow, 363

Grattarola, Giuseppe, Death of, 345

GREAT ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE OF THE

HEBER R. BisHOP COLLECTION OF

JADE, NOW ON EXHIBITION AT THE

METROPOLITAN MUSEUM OF ART, G,

F. Kunz (Title), 269

Gregory, W. K., Active Member, 265

Fellow, 306

LINN2ZUS AS AN INTERMEDIARY BETWEEN

ANCIENT AND MopERN ZoOLoey: His

VIEWS ON THE CLASS MAMMALIA, 21, 32

Griggs, George, Active Member, 340

Griscom, C. A., Jr., Active Member, 340

Griswold, Mrs. Chester, Active Member, 456

Giinther, A., cited, 162, 173

GUSTATORY AUDITION, A. H.

stract), 300, 301

Pierce (Ab-

von Hagen, Hugo, Active Member, 340

Hague, James D., Active Member, 334

Death of, 495

Hahn, C. W., EMBRYOLOGY OF THE HORNED

Toap (Abstract), 274

PROPOSED BIoLOGIcAL SURVEY OF NEW

YorK Stave (Title), 270

Hallock, William, InstRUMENTAL DETEC-

TION AND RECORD OF EARTHQUAKES

(Title), 289

Halls, William, Jr., Active Member, 340

Hamlin, August Choate, Death of, 278

Harrington, M. Raymond, Rock SHEL-

TERS AND SHELL HEAPS NEAR NEW

YorK City (Title), 315

Hartman, C. V., UsE AND ORNAMENTATION

OF THE TREE CALABASH IN TROPICAL

AMERICA (Title), 269

Harvey, W. H., cited, 440

HarwicnH, (Cape Cop), Mass., ON THE PEB-

BLES AT, AND ON RUDE ARROWHEADS

Founp AmMona THEM, A. A. Julien

(Abstract), 343

HEAT TREATMENT OF CARBON TOOL STEELS,

W. Campbell and R. F. BOhler,

(Abstract), 488

Hederacee (subsection of Ipomea), 184 197

Helferrich, Emil V., Active Member, 274

Heliometer measures of the sun’s diameters,

394, 413

made in connection with transit of Venus,

395, 409

Hemiptera, THE SUPERNUMERARY CHROMO-

soMEs OF, E. B. Wilson (Abstract),

337, 338

Henmon, Vivian A. C., DrTEcTION oF

Cotor BLINDNEss (Title), 272

Hering, Daniel W., THr DisrorTion AND

OSCILLATIONS OF HELICAL SPRINGS

(Title), 282

544 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Vice-President, 364, 503

WAVES AND Rays IN Puysics (Abstract),

354

Heterophylle (subsection of Jpomea), 183,

194

Hewlett, Walter J., Active Member, 345

Higginson, James J., Active Member, 340

Hilfiker, Meridian observation of the sun’s

diameter, 387

Hill, Robert T., THE BROADER GEOLOGICAL

STRUCTURE OF THE MEXICAN PLATEAU

(Title), 276

Fellow, 363

GEOLOGICAL PROBLEMS OF THE WIND-

WARD ISLANDS (Title), 468

GEOLOGY OF THE SIERRA ALMALOYA,

Mexico, (Abstract), 328

Hinton, John H., Death of, 273

Hirsch, Charles S., Active Member, 265

Hodenpyl, Anton C., Active Member, 269

Hoffman, Mrs. E. A., Active Member, 265

Holbrook, J. E., cited, 160, 173

Holden and Newcomb), Discussion of possible

variations in sun’s diameter, 389,

415

Hollingworth, H. L., THe INDIFFERENCE

Point (Abstract), 499

Tue TIME oF MOVEMENT (Abstract), 463,

464

Honorary Members, Election of. 363, 503

List of, 371, 525

Hooker, J. D., Honorary Member, 363

Hornaday, W. T., AN EXPLORATION OF THE

PinacaTE Lava REGION IN NORTH-

WESTERN Mexico (Title), 502

HoRNED ToAp, EMBRYOLOGY OF THE, C. W.

Hahn (Abstract), 274

Hotchkiss, Henry D., Active Member, 334

Houghite, Recast analysis of, 135

House, Homer D., Active Member, 458

NortTH AMERICAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS

Ipomea, 181-263

Hovey, Edmund Otis, ANNUAL MEETING

OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMER-

IcA, ALBUQUERQUE, N. M., DECEMBER

30-31, 1907, (Title), 460

Tur CHESTER, New YorxK, MASTODON,

147

COMPARISON OF VESUVIUS AND MrT.

PeLh, wiTtH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO

RecENT Eruptions (Title), 289

CONTRIBUTION TO THE History OF Mr,

PELE, MARTINIQUE, (Abstract), 496

Editor, 364, 503

THE GIBEON METEORITE AND OTHER

RECENT ACCESSIONS OF THE AMERICAN

Museum (Title), 474

Grant from Research Fund, 473

NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY

OF THE WESTERN SIERRA MADRE (Ab-

stract), 266

NoTES ON THE VOLCANOES OF TOLUCA,

CoLIMA AND POPOCATAPETL (Abstract),

314

Recording Secretary, 306, 364, 503

RECORDS OF MEETINGS, 313, 453

SoME OF THE LaTEST RESULTS OF Ex-

PLORATIONS IN THE Hupson RIVER

AT New YorK City (Abstract), 501

Hovey, E. O., and Kemp, J. F., Tue

Mexico MEETING OF THE INTERNA-

TIONAL CONGRESS OF GEOLOGY (Ab-

stract), 298

Howard, Leland O., Some REcEnT Discov-

ERIES IN INSECT PARASITISM, AND THE

PracticAL HANDLING OF PARASITES

(Title), 462

Howe, Marshall A., MARINE BOTANY OF

BERmMuDA (Title), 317

Some TyPEs OF CORALLINE ALG& (Title),

487

Howe, M. A., Britton, N. L., and Wheeler,

W. M., BioLoGgy oF THE BAHAMAS

(Title), 288

Hubbard, J. C., THe Spark DISCHARGE;

How Ir Occurs (Title), 290

Hudson River Channels, 294, 501

Hughes, Charles E., Active Member, 269

Humboldt, cited, 159

Huntine Fossit FISHES IN THE DEVONIAN OF

OHIO AND CaAnapdA, L. Hussakof

(Title), 456

Huntington, Ellsworth, Some Curves IL-

LUSTRATING COINCIDENT VOLCANIC,

SEISMIC AND SOLAR PHENOMENA (Ab-

stract), 474, 479

Hurlbut, T. D., Active Member, 265

Hurley, T. J., Active Member, 334

Death of, 457

Hussakof, Louis, Huntine Fossin FISHES

IN THE DEVONIAN OF OHIO AND CANADA

(Title), 456

On A NEw SPECIES OF GOBLIN SHARK

(Scapanorhynchus) FROM JAPAN (Title),

502

VARIATIONS IN LEAF TYPE or Lirioden-

dron tulipifera DURING A SEASON’S

Grow TH (Abstract), 337, 338

Hustace, Frank, Active Member, 340

Hyde, J. E. Srrucrurre OF THE BRACHIAL

Support or Camorophorella, a Missis-

SIPPIAN BRACHIOPOD (Abstract), 474,

478

WAVERLY SERIES OF OnIO (Abstract), 486

IDEA OF FEELING, IN RoussEAU’s RELIGIOUS

PuitosopHy, A. C. Armstrong (Ab-

stract), 482, 484

ILLUSIONS OF DerptTH, SOME INVOLUNTARY,

H. A. Carr (Abstract), 482, 483

IMAGELESsS THOUGHT, D. 8. Miller (Abstract),

319, 320

IMAGERY OF TIME RELATIONS, R. 8S. Wood-

worth (Abstract), 482

INDEX

IMAGINATIVE THOUGHT AS ADAPTIVE RE-

SPONSE, Robert MacDougall (Ab-

stract), 300, 302

INDIANS OF BERGEN, PASSAIC AND MOoRRIS

Counties, N. J., Max Shrabisch

(Title), 315

INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND AND VICINITY

IN THE 17TH CENTURY, M. H. Saville

(Title), 315

INDIFFERENCE Point, THE, H. L. Holling-

worth (Abstract), 499

INDIVIDUAL JUDGMENT AS MEASURED BY ITS

DEPARTURE FROM AN AVERAGE, ON

THE VALIDITY OF, F. L. Wells (Ab-

stract), 331, 332

INDIVIDUAL VARIATION IN THE AREA OF DiIs-

TINCT VISION, W. C. Rtidiger (Ab-

stract), 318, 319

Ingram, Harry, Active Member, 334

INHERITANCE IN CANARY Birps, C. B. Daven-

port (Title), 304

INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN ANIMALS AND

Puants, William Bateson (Title), 349

Inheritance (in organic evolution), 432

INQUIRY AFTER THE POSSIBLE RELATIONS

BETWEEN THE TRINITIES OF PSYCHOL-

oGyY AND THEOLOGY, C. B. Bliss (Ab-

stract), 319, 320

INSTRUMENTAL DETECTION AND RECORD OF

EARTHQUAKES, Wm. Hallock (Title),

289

INVESTIGATION OF THE FIGURE OF THE SUN

AND OF POSSIBLE VARIATIONS IN ITS

S1zE AND SHApH, C. L. Poor, 385-424

Ipomea, NortTH AMERICAN SPECIES OF THE

GENus, H. D. House, 181-263

Sections of, 183

Species excluded, 261

Species of:

amplexicaulis, 238

ampullacea, 198, 201

ancisa, 185, 187

angustifolia, 242, 243

anisomeres, 243, 247

arborescens, 188, 190

asarifolia, 211, 212

barbatisepala, 206, 208

barbigera, 198, 202

batatas, 250, 255

bombycina, 220, 221

buchit, 243, 245

cairica, 221, 222

calantha, 225, 231

callida, 242, 245

calva, 188, 191

cardiophylla, 250, 258

carnea, 226, 232

carolina, 215, 217

cathartica, 198, 205

cavanillesti, 221

chenopodiifolia, 250, 256

ciervensis, 185

545

cissoides, 205, 206

cissoides guadaloupensis, 206

collina, 243, 248

costellata, 233, 234

crinita, 225, 226

cuernavacensis, 188, 190

curtissti, 250, 257

cyanantha, 225, 231

dactylophylla, 215, 216

decasperma, 197, 198

delphinifolia, 233, 234

demerariana, 250, 256

desertorum, 198, 203

digitata, 221, 224

dimorphophylla, 250, 257

divergens, 233, 235

durangensis, 185, 187

egregia, 233, 238

elongata, 240, 241

emetica, 240, 241

eximia, 211, 215

fawceettii, 215, 216

filipes, 238, 239

fimbriosepala, 192, 194

fistulosa, 188, 189

flavo-purpurea, 221, 224

furcyensis, 215, 217

glabriuscula, 188, 189

gracilis, 243, 248

hartwegii, 211, 214

hederacea, 198, 202

heterophylla, 194, 196

heterophylla emula, 196

heterophylla subcomosa, 196

hirsutula, 197, 199

hirtijflora, 192, 193

horsfallie, 215, 217

hypargyrea, 225, 230

tgnava, 211, 214

intrapilosa, 188, 191

invicta, 192, 193

zostemma, 206, 207

jalapa, 225, 229

jaliscana, 185, 187

jamaicensis, 197, 200

jicama, 243, 249

lacteola, 225, 229

lacunosa, 249, 253

leta, 194, 195

lambii, 192, 193

learii, 198, 205

lemmoni, 233, 237

lenis, 185, 188

leonensis, 225, 229

leptophylla, 185 188

leptosiphon, 233, 236

leptotoma, 233, 235

leucotricha, 250, 255

lindenti, 243, 246

lindheimeri, 194, 195

lindheimeri subintegra, 196

lineolata. 215, 216

546

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

longifolia, 185, 186

longipedunculata, 207, 209

longipes, 249, 252

lozani, 219, 220

macrorhiza, 225, 227

madrensis, 233, 238

maireti, 192

microsepala, 238

microsticta, 226, 232

morelii, 251, 260

muricata, 233, 236

murucoides, 188, 190

mutabilis, 198, 200

nicaraguensis, 188, 189

nicoyana, 225, 230

nil, 198, 203

obtusata, 226, 231

oligantha, 243, 247

oreophila, 194, 195

orizabensis, 207, 209

painteri, 233, 234

pandurata, 225, 228

parasitica, 251, 258

passifloroides, 225, 230

patens, 233, 237

pedatisecta, 233, 235

pedicellaris, 251, 260

peninsularis, 250, 254

perlonga, 250, 258

pes-capre, 211, 212

petrophila, 185, 186

phillomega, 243, 246

pilosissima, 233, 236

plicata, 225, 226

plumeriana, 215, 216

plummere, 233, 237

polyanthes, 249, 251

populina, 225, 226

portoricensis, 206, 208

precana, 225, 227

pringlet 185, 186

pubescens, 194, 197

pulchella, 221, 222

purga, 239, 240

purpurea, 197, 199

purpusi, 243, 248

quinquefolia, 221, 223

ramoni, 249, 253

reptans, 211

rhomboidea, 248, 245

robinsonit, 250, 257

rubella, 215, 218

ruber, 192, 193

rupicola, 225, 230

sabulosa, 225, 228

sabulosa mollicella, 228

sabulosa hirtella, 228

sagittata, 249, 251

sagittula, 242, 244

schaffneri, 211, 214

scopulorum, 225, 227

seducta, 240, 241

setosa, 219

setosa campanulata, 219

setosa pavoni, 220

signata, 250, 256

silvicola, 206, 208

simulans, 240, 241

splendor-sylv@, 243, 246

stans, 185, 186

stolonifera, 211, 213

suffulta, 240, 242

tentaculifera, 219, 220

tenuiloba, 233, 236

tenuissima, 242, 244

ternata, 215, 216

ternifolia, 233

thurberi, 198, 201

tiliacea, 250, 255

trichocarpa, 249, 252

trifida, 250, 254

trifida (var.) torreyana, 254

trifida (var.) berlandieri, 254

trifida ymalensis, 254

triloba, 249, 253

turckheimii, 238, 239

tuxtlensis, 250, 256

tyrianthina, 207, 210

umbraticola, 251, 259

urbinei, 240, 242

valida, 233, 235

vahliana, 198, 204

variabilis, 206, 207

venusta, 207, 210

villosa, 198, 201

violacea, 251, 259

vulsa, 243, 246

wallii, 251, 260

wilsoni, 243, 247

wolcottiana, 188, 191

wrightii, 233, 234

Species queried, 261

Subsections of, 183, 184

TrRoN-CARBON SERIES OF ALLOYS, ON THE,

Wm. Campbell (Abstract), 339

von Isakovics, Alois, Active Member, 340

Jager, A., cited, 150, 173

Jaggar, T. A., Jr., EvoLUTION OF BOGOSLOF

VoLcANO IN BerRiInG SEA (Abstract),

474, 478

Jalape (subsection of Ipomcea), 184, 224

Jameco Gravel of Long Island, 426

Jarvie, James N., Active Member, 269

Jefferis, William Walter, Death of, 284

Jennings, Robert E., Active Member,

341

Jesup, Morris K., Death of, 459

Johnson, Douglas Wilson, ORIGIN OF

BrEaAcuH Cusps (Abstract), 474, 477

Johnson, Emil F., Address at Linnzus

Celebration, 46-47

Johnson, Roswell, THE MID-cONTINENT

O1n Fretps (Abstract), 468

ee SEE eee

INDEX

Johnson, R. H., Evoturionary Srupy oF

CoccINELLips (Abstract), 304

Jollyte, Recast analysis of, 142

Jones, A. L., METHOD IN ASSTHETICS (Title),

272

Jones, E. E., CoMPpARISON OF MENTAL PROC-

ESSES IN THE HORIZONTAL AND VERTI-

CAL POSITIONS OF THE Bopy (Title), 282

Jordan, D. S., cited, 162, 173

JORULLO, Mexico, VOLCANO oF; History,

j FEATURES, REPOPULATON OF THE

District BY ANIMALS AND PLANTS,

Hans Gadow (Title), 493

Julien, Alexis A., EVIDENCE OF THE STABIL-

ITY OF THE RocK FOUNDATIONS OF

New York City (Abstract), 328

On A BuRIED KITCHEN-MIDDEN AT SOUTH

Harwicu, CAPE Cop, Mass. (Title), 298

On DETERMINATION OF MINERAL CON-

STITUTION THROUGH RECASTING OF

ANALYSES, 129-146

ON THE PEBBLES AT HARWICH (CAPE

Cop), Mass., AND ON RUDE ARROW-

HEADS FouND AMONG THEM (Abstract),

343 ;

PRESENT STRUCTURAL CHARACTER AND

PROBABLE FORMER EXTENT OF THE

PALISADE TRAP (Title), 305

Juncos, oR SNow Brrps, DISTRIBUTION OF,

on NortH AMERICAN CONTINENT,

Jonathan Dwight, Jr., (Abstract),

351, 353

Kearton, Richard, Witp Birps at HomEr

(Title), 485, 505

Kelvin, Lord, Death of, 457

Kemp, James F., Nores on MINERAL Lo-

CALITIES VISITED DURING SUMMER OF

1906 In CANADA AND Mexico (Title),

318

OvuR KNOWLEDGE OF THE FILLED CHAN-

NELS OF THE HUDSON IN THE HiIGH-

LANDS AND THE SUBMERGED GORGE ON

THE CONTINENTAL SHELF (Abstract),

501

PRESENT TREND OF INVESTIGATIONS ON

UNDERGROUND Waters (Abstract),

460, 461

PrRopucTION OF Low GRADE COPPER ORE

IN THE West (Abstract), 490

RECENT ADVANCES IN OUR KNOWLEDGE

OF THE MAGNETITE BopIes AT MINE-

VILLE (Title), 473

THE TRAP DYKE IN FAYETTE COUNTY,

Penn., (Title), 271

VOLCANIC AND SEISMIC DISTURBANCES

IN NortTH AMERICA: THE CALIFORNIA

EARTHQUAKE OF 1906 (Title), 289

Kemp, James F., and Hovey,E. O.,

Mexico MEETING OF THE INTER-

NATIONAL CONGRESS OF GEOLOGY

(Abstract), 298, 299

Kemp,

547

James F., and Ross, J. G., A

PERIDOTITE DIKE IN COAL MEASURES OF

SOUTHWESTERN PENNSYLVANIA (Title),

336

Kenyon, William Houston, Active Mem-

ber, 334

Kern, E. F., ELEcTROLYSIS OF SILICO-FLUO-

RIDE So.tutTions (Abstract), 354

ON THE ELECTROLYTIC REFINING OF

TRON (Abstract), 497

Keyser, Cassius J., Some RELATIONS oF

GEOMETRY TO PSYCHOLOGY AND PHIL-

osopHy (Abstract), 319, 321

King, Irving, A PsycHOLoGICcAL THEORY OF

THE ORIGIN OF RELIGION (Title),

272

Knapp, Herman, Fellow, 363

Knight, C. W., and Campbell, William,

Microscopic EXAMINATION OF THE

SILVER DEPOSITS OF TEMISKAMING,

Onr., (Abstract), 289

KNOWLEDGE AND JUDGMENT, John Dewey

(Title), 300

Kohlman, Charles, Active Member, 345

Kiimmel, Henry B., Recent INvEsTI-

GATIONS OF THE POTABLE WATER

SUPPLIES OF NEw JeRsEY (Title), 336

Kunz, George F., Address at Linnzus Cele-

, bration, 42—45

DIAMONDS IN AMERICA (Title), 271

Finance Committee, 306, 364, 503

GREAT ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE OF THE

HEBER R. BiIsHOP COLLECTION OF

JADE, NOW ON EXHIBITION AT THE

METROPOLITAN MUSEUM OF ART (Title),

269

Nores ON JADE (Title), 486

PLAN OF DEVELOPMENT OF LETCHWORTH

PARK AS A MBANS FOR SCIENTIFIC Epu-

CATION (Title), 322

PRELIMINARY NOTE ON Sporapic Oc-

CURRENCE OF DIAMONDS IN NorTH

AMERICA (Title), 266

Kunz, George F., and Washington, Henry

S., ON THE PERIDOTITE OF PIKE

County, ARKANSAS, AND THE OccuR-

RENCE OF DIAMONDS THEREIN (Title),

350

de Lagerberg, J., Active Member, 345

Lamb, Rosanoff and Breithut, Nrw

MetTHop OF MEASURING PARTIAL

Vapor PRESSURES IN Binary MrIx-

TURES (Title), 457

Lanp Botany or Bermupa, N. L. Britton

(Title), 317 :

Lang, Herbert, A NATURALIST IN BRITISH

East Arrica (Abstract), 360, 362

de Lapparent, Albert, Death of, 489

Latrienda, see Ipomea

Laws oF ATTENTION, E. B. Titchener (Ab-

stract), 463

548 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Lectures, Public, 296, 304, 305, 334, 342, 349,

462, 485, 504, 505

Lee, Frederic S., Acip AND FATIGUE (Ab-

stract), 270

Finance Committee, 306, 364, 503

LepiporpTEROous Famity WNoctuide, NEw

SPECIES AND GENERA OF THE, FOR

1907, Part II, J. B. Smith, 91-127

Leptocallis, see Ipomea

Leptophylle (subsection of Ipomea), 183, 185

Le Soiief, D., WiLD ANIMAL LIFE OF AUSTRA-

Lia (Title), 342

Letchworth Park, 322, 323

Letchworth, William Pryor, Gift of Glen

Iris Estate, 316

Lewis, A. B., Nores ON THE ETHNOGRAPHY

OF THE COLUMBIAN VALLRY (Title). 278

Lewis, J. Volney, CORRELATION OF THE

NeEwarRK (TRIASSIC) TRAP Rocks OF

New JERSEY (Abstract), 336

PETROGRAPHY OF THE NEWARK INTRU-

SIvE DIABASE OF NEW JERSEY (Ab-

stract), 474, 476

Librarian, Report of the, 309, 367, 507

Lichtenfelt, H., cited, 173

Lieb, J. W., Jr., Active Member, 334

Life Members, Election of, 467

LIMESTONES INTERBEDDED WITH THE FORD-

HAM GNEISS OF NEW YORK City,

Cc. P. Berkey (Abstract), 490

von Lindenau, Meridian observations of the

sun’s diameter, 386, 415

LINGUISTIC ABILITY AND INTELLECTUAL EFFI-

cIENCY, F. L. Wells (Title), 300

LINGUISTIC EXPRESSIONS, PSYCHOLOGICAL

IMPLICATES OF CERTAIN, H. D. Marsh

(Abstract), 482, 484

Linnzwus, BICENTENARY OF THE BIRTH OF

Carouus, E. 0. Hovey, 1-90

Address by President of American Scenic

and Historic Preservation Society, G.

F. Kunz, 42-45

Address by President of United Swedish

Societies of New York, Emil F.

Johnson, 46-47

Greetings from Societies and Honorary

Members:

Académie de Médecine de Paris, 63

American Journal of Science, 78

American Philosophical Society, 87

Barrois, Charles, 68

Biological Society of Washington,

D. C., 88

Boston Society of Natural History,

Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences,

Colorado Scientific Society, 89

Connecticut Academy of Arts and

Sciences, 78

Ethnological Society of Ontario, 76

Geikie, James, 74

Geological Commission of Finland, 60

Hubrecht, A. A. W., 62

Indiana Academy of Sciences, 89

Kaiserliche Leopoldinisch - Carolin-

ische Deutsche Akademie der

Naturforscher, Halle A. S., 68

Kungl. Svenska Vetenskapsakade-

mien, Stockholm, 57

Kungl. Svenska Vetenskapsakade-

mien, Upsala, 59

Manchester Literary and Philosophi-

cal Society, Manchester, England,

Museum of Comparative Zodlogy,

Harvard University, 77

National Academy of Sciences, 87

New York Entomological Society, 80

New York State Museum, 85

Real Academia de Ciencias Exactas,

Fisicas y Naturales de Madrid, 72

Reale Osservatorio di Palermo, 71

Regia Societas Scientiarum Bohem-

ica, Prague, 69

Reusch, Hans, 59

Rosenbusch, H., 69

Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society,

Falmouth, England, 72

Royal Society of Canada, 75

Senaat der Rijks-Universiteit te

Leiden, 61

Smithsonian Institution of Washing-

ton, D. C., 88

Sociedad Cientifica ‘‘Antonio Al-

zate,’’ Mexico, D. F., 77

Société des Amis des Sciences Natur-

elles de Rouen, 64

Société d’Histoire Naturelle de

Toulouse, 65

Société de Physique et d’Histoire

Naturelle de Genéve, Suisse, 70

Specula Vaticana, Rome, 70

Staten Island Association of Arts and

Sciences, 85

Torrey Botanical Club, New York

City, 79

Université de Lyon, 64

LINN2=US AND AMERICAN BoTany. Per

Axel Rydberg, 32-40

LINN=]US AND AMERICAN NATURAL

History, Frederick A. Lucas,

52-57

LINNZUS AS AN INTERMEDIARY BETWEEN

ANCIENT AND MopERN ZoOuLocy; His

VIEWS ON THE CLASS MAMMALIA, W. K.

Gregory, 21-32

Linnzws as A ZoOuoaist, J. A. Allen,

9-19

von LINNE, Cart, SKETCH OF THE LIFE

or, Edward L. Morris, 47-52

Liriodendron tulipifera, VARIATIONS IN LEAF

TYPE OF, DURING A SEASON’S GROWTH,

Louis Hussakof (Abstract), 337, 338

INDEX

Lloyd, F. E., Osborn, H. F., Calkins, G.

N., and other Members, Norges on

LEADING PAPERS READ AT THE MEET-

INGs AT NEw ORLEANS AND ANN ARBOR

(Title), 268 :

Lloyd Sand, in Raritan formation of Long

Island, 425

Lone IsLanp, N. Y., OUTLINE OF GEOLOGY OF,

W. O. Crosby, 425-429

Loomis, H. N., ReEAacTIONS TO WEIGHTS OF

UNEQUAL SizE (Abstract), 331, 333

Lough, J. E., AN EXPERIMENT IN HABIT

FORMATION (Title), 283

Lovejoy, Arthur O., Fire CULTS: THEIR

DISTRIBUTION AND CHARACTERISTIC

FEATURES, WITH AN HypoTuHesis RE-

SPECTING THEIR ORIGIN AND MEANING

(Abstract), 471

Lowie, Robert H., Active Member, 456

ETHNOLOGICAL TRIP TO THE CHIPEWYAN

INDIANS (Abstract), 494

Grant from Research Fund, 473

THE PsycHOLOGY OF DREAMs (Abstract),

471, 472

THE THEORY OF NATURE MyTHOLOGY

(Title), 458

Lucas, F. A., CoLLEcTION oF ExTINcT ELE-

PHANTS IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM

(Title), 296

LINNZUS AND AMERICAN NATURAL His-

TORY, 52-57

Lyon, Ralph, Active Member, 334

McGregor, James Howard, Active Member,

297

McKim, Haslett, Death of, 495

MeMillin, Emerson, Fellow, 363

Treasurer, 306, 364, 503

MacCurdy, George Grant, CoNVENTIONA-

LISM IN THE ANCIENT ART OF CHIRI-

qui (Title), 296

MacDougall, Robert,

THOUGHT AS ADAPTIVE

(Abstract), 300, 302

Vice-President, 306

MACKENZIE RIiveR Eskimo, THE, V. Stefans-

son (Title), 458

Macy, Miss Mary Sutton, Active Member,

341

Macy, V. Everit, Active Member, 341

Manhasset gravels of Long Island, 428, 429

Mann, W. D., Active Member, 286

Marcou, John Belknap, Active Member, 280

MARINE BoTrany OF BERMUDA, M. A. Howe

(Title) 317

Marmolitic antigorite, Recast analysis of, 133

Marsh, H. D., PsycHoLoGicaL IMPLICATES

OF CERTAIN LinGuIsTIC EXPRESSIONS

(Abstract), 482, 484

Martin, Daniel S., A BERYL rromM HapDAM

Neck, CoNNEcTicuT, (Abstract), 294

Martin, W. M., Active Member, 334

IMAGINATIVE

RESPONSE

549

Mason, M. Philips, Reariry as Possisie

EXPERIENCE (Title), 272

MASTODON, THE CHESTER, NEw York, E. O.

Hovey, 147

Matthew, W. D., Norms ON THE PALZONTOL-

OGY OF THE BRIDGER Basin, Wryo-

MING, (Title), 281

MEANING OF RHYTHMICAL GROUPING, H. H.

Woodrow (Abstract), 499

MECHANICAL ILLUSTRATION OF BEATS IN

Sounp, R. H. Cornish (Title), 324

MECHANICAL RESPONSE OF PLANTs, J. C.

Bose (Title), 505

Meigs, Titus B., Active Member, 265

Mellen, C. S., Active Member, 341

Membership Lists, 371, 525

Memorial Resolutions, 273, 278, 284, 288,

335, 341, 459, 467

MEMORIES FOR Faces, W. S. Monroe (Ab-

stract), 482, 483

MEMORY FOR PAIRED ASSOCIATES, E. L.

Thorndike (Abstract), 355, 356

MEMORY FOR PAIRED ASSOCIATIONS, EXPERI-

MENTS IN, E. L. Thorndike (Abstract),

3al, 333

MENTAL OPERATIONS AND THEIR MATERIAL,

F. J. E. Woodbridge (Abstract), 499,

500

MENTAL RECONSTRUCTION, THE PERIOD OF,

W. C. Rudiger (Abstract), 331, 333

Meredith, William T., Active Member, 341

Meridian observations of the sun’s diameter,

386, 413

Personal equations in, 391, 415

Merremia, see Ipomea

METALLOGRAPHY APPLIED TO ENGINEERING,

W. Campbell (Abstract), 470

METALLOGRAPHY, USE OF, IN CERTAIN PROB-

LEMS IN ORE-DRESSING, W. Camp-

bell (Abstract), 497, 498

METHOD IN AsTHETICS, A. L. Jones (Title),

272

METHOD OF MEASURING DIFFERENCES IN

ORDER AND ITs USE IN STUDYING

CORRELATION, RB. S. Woodworth (Ab-

stract), 331

METHOD OF PROJECTION ON SCREEN OF LINES

OF ForcE SURROUNDING A CONDUCTOR

CARRYING A CURRENT, RB. H.Cornish

(Title), 324

Metric System, Resolution regarding, 273

Meyer, Adolf, Concept oF SUBSTITUTIVE

ACTIVITY AND THE RELATION OF

MENTAL REACTION TYPES TO Psy-

CHIATRIC NosoLtoay (Abstract), 463,

465

Vice-President, 364

Meylan, G. L., Some PuysicaL CHARACTER-

ISTICS OF COLLEGE STUDENTS (Title),

349

Micro-aggregates, Constitution of, 136

Recast analyses of, 139-146

550

Micropogon undulatus, see Drumfishes

Microscopic EXAMINATION OF THE SILVER

Deposits OF ‘TEMISKAMING, ONT.,

Wm. Campbell and C. W. Knight

(Abstract), 289

Microsepale (subsection of Ipomea), 184, 238

Mip-conTINENT OL FieLps, THE, Roswell

Johnson (Abstract), 468

Milburn, John G., Active Member, 341

Miller, D. S., AppLigED PHILOSOPHY AND

APPLIED PsycHoLoGy (Abstract), 355,

358

THE DISTINCTION BETWEEN HEART AND

Heap (Title), 283

“THe Four PowrErs OF LIFE” (Title),

272

IMAGELESS THOUGHT (Abstract), 319, 320

Miner, Roy W.., Fellow, 306

MINERAL CONSTITUTION, ON DETERMINATION

OF, THROUGH RECASTING OF ANALYSES,

A. A. Julien, 129-146

Minerals, Recast analyses of, 132-135

MISCONCEPTIONS OF INTENSITY, W. P. Mon-

tague (Abstract), 355, 358

MISCONCEPTIONS OF REALISM, W. P. Monta-

gue (Title), 272

Mitchell, S. A., ToraL EcLipse OF THE SUN

In August, 1905, (Title), 271

Mitchill, Samuel L., cited, 159

Mitsukuri, Kakichi, Honorary Member, 503

Modesta, see Ipomea

Moissan, Henri, Death of, 322, 341

Monroe, W. §., MEMORIES FOR FAcES

(Abstract), 482, 483

Montague, William P., ConscIoOUSNESS AND

Enerey (Title), 499

MISCONCEPTIONS OF

stract), 355, 358

MISCONCEPTIONS OF REALISM (Title), 272

TRUTH AS ComMpPossIBILiTy (Title), 331

Mr. PELE, MARTINIQUE, A CONTRIBUTION TO

THE History or, E. O. Hovey (Ab-

stract), 496

Moreau, A., cited, 171, 173

Morgan, Thos. Hunt, Errects oF CENTRI-

FUGING THE Ea@Gs or THE MOLLUSC

Cumingia (Abstract), 360

Fellow, 306

Morris, Edward L., SkreTcH OF THE LIFE

oF CARL von LINNE, 47-52

Morse, L. B., SELECTIVE REFLECTION SHOWN

BY CARBONATES IN THE INFRA-RED

SPECTRUM AND ITS RELATION TO THE

ATOMIC WEIGHT OF THE BASES (Ab-

stract), 346

Mutation, de Vries laws of 449

MuTATION THEORY, CHARLES DARWIN AND

THE, C. F. Cox, 431-451

INTENSITY (Ab-

NANTASKET BracH, Boston Harpor, DeE-

VELOPMENT OF, W. G. Reed, Jr., (Ab-

stract), 474, 477

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

NatTuRAL History oF BermMupA, C. L.

Bristol, J. J. Stevenson, N. L.

Britton and M. A. Howe, (Title), 317

Natural selection, Darwin’s theory of, 443

NATURALIST IN BritTIsH East AFrica, A,

Herbert Lang (Abstract), 360, 362

NATURE OF JUDGMENT, THE, W. H. Sheldon

(Title), 272

Navasjo Loom, Tue: Is It INpDIGENOUS?

F. 8. Dellenbaugh (Title), 296

NEWARK CoprpER Deposits OF EASTERN

PENNSYLVANIA, E. T. Wherry (Ab-

stract), 473, 475

NEWARK INTRUSIVE DIABASE OF NEW JERSEY,

PETROGRAPHY OF, J. V. Lewis (Ab-

stract), 474, 476

NEWARK TRAP Rocks oF NEw JERSEY, CoR-

RELATION OF, J. V. Lewis (Abstract),

336

Newcomb and Holden, Discussion of possible

variations in sun’s diameter, 389, 415

New Facror IN PLANT ENVIRONMENT, C. 8.

Gager (Abstract), 281

NEWFOUNDLAND IcE SHEET, WAS THERE A?

J. H. Wilson (Abstract), 276, 277

New JERSEY, CORRELATION OF THE NEWARK

(Triassic) Trae Rocks or, J. V.

Lewis (Abstract), 336

METHOD OF MEASURING PARTIAL

VarPorR PRESSURES IN Binary MIx-

TURES, Lamb, Rosanoff and Breithut

(Title), 457

PIECE OF APPARATUS FOR SHOWING

RELATION BETWEEN INTENSITY OF

ILLUMINATION AND Distance, J. 8S.

Gibson (Title), 324

New SPECIES AND GENERA OF THE LEPIDO-

PTEROUS FamiLty Noctuide ror 1907,

Part II, J. B. Smith, 91-127

New SPpEcIES OF GOBLIN SHARK (Scapano-

rhynchus) FROM JAPAN, L. Hussakof

(Title), 502

New SPECTRO-PHOTOMETER FOR THE STUDY

oF Cotor Vision, F. L. Tufts (Ab-

stract), 355, 356

New View or ‘‘MenTAL Functions,” H. C.

Warren (Title), 272

New York City, EVIDENCE OF THE STABILITY

OF THE Rock FOUNDATIONS OF, A.

A. Julien (Abstract), 328

Nimick, Mrs. Florence N. C., Active Mem-

ber, 345

Noctuide, NEw SPECIES AND GENERA OF THE

LEPIDOPTEROUS FAMILY, FOR 1907,

Part II, J. B. Smith, 91-127

Acronycta lepetita, 94

othello, 94

paupercula, 95

perdita, 94

vinnula, 95

Agrotis opaca Harvey, 95

Anarta Ochs, 107

NEW

INDEX

acadiensis Beth., 109

cordigera, 109

cordigera Thunb., 110

curta Morr., 110

etacta, 108, 109

flanda, 108, 111

hampa, 108, 111

impingens, 109

impingens Wlk., 110

kelloggi Hy. Edw., 110

lerta Smith, 110

lanuginosa, 109

leucocycla, 108

mausi, 109

mausi Hampson, 110

melanopa, 109, 110

melanopa Thunb., 110

membrosa, 108, 109

mimula, 109, 110

mimula Grt., 110

mimuli, 109

mimuli Bebr., 110

myrtilli, 109

nigrolunata, 110

nivaria Grt., 110

perpura Morr., 110

phea, 109

phea Hampson, 110

quadrilunata, 108, 109

richardsoni, 108, 109

schenherri, 108, 109

squara, 109, 111

staudingeri, 108

zemblica, 109

zemblica Hampson, 110

Annaphila miona, 121, 122

variegata, 122

Chorizagrotis, 99

Copicucullia eulepis Grt., 118

mala, 118

Cucullia phila, 117

speyert, 117

Epizeuxis cobeta Barnes, 126

intensalis, 126, 127

lubricalis, 127

partitalis, 126

Frastia humerata, 123

immuna, 124

muscosula, 124

puncticosta, 122, 124

Eriopyga, 105, 106

Euxoa, 99

bostoniensis, 98

capota, 98

cocklei, 97

criddlei, 97

tusulsa, 97

pastoralis, 97

procellaris, 97

quinta, 97

scandens, 98

stigmatilis Sm., 97

submolesta, 97

Faronta, 106

aleada, 107

Hadena, 101

birnata, 113, 114

Serida, 115

Jumosa, 116

mucens, 116

nimiota, 116

susquesa, 116

Himella rectiflava, 105

Homopyralis bigallis, 125

Leucania, 106

Luperina (see Hadena birnata)

cilima, 113

innota, 113

passer, 113, 114

passer Gn., 114

Mamestra, 101, 102

ectypa, 102

tmbrifera, 100

leomegra, 100

pallicauda, 101

Megachyta, 123

Meleneta, 92

antennata 93

Meliana, 107

Miodera, 101

stigmata, 102

Monima Hbn., 103

Morrisonia, 116

Neleucania, 106

Noctua clandestina, 95

larga, 95

Orthodes imora Strck., 106

keela, 106

vecors, 106

Orthosia dusca, 117

Perigrapha, 104

Plagiomimicus dollii, 118

Pseudacontia cansa, 119

crustaria Morr., 120, 121

louisa, 120

Raphia, 93

Rhizagrotis acclivus Motr., 95

reclivus Dyar, 95

Schinia blundulata, 119

espea, 119

Scotogramma, 110

Stretchia, 104

erythrolita, 104

Sympistes, 110

Teniocampa alia, 103

bostura, 103

flaviannula, 103

fringata, 104

indra, 103

macona, 102

preses, 104

rufula, 103

saleppa, 104

transparens, 104

551

502

Thalpochares fractilinea, 125

Ufeus electra, 99

hulstii, 99

plicatus, 99

satyricus, 100

Viridemas, 91

galena, 92

Xylophasia illustra, 114

miniota, 114

plutonia, 114

runata, 115

sputatriz, 114

versuta, 115

Non-resident Members, Election of, 316

List of, 383, 536

NortH AMERICAN SILURIC SYSTEM, REVISED

CLASSIFICATION OF THE, A. W. Grabau

(Abstract), 454

NORTH AMERICAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS

Ipomea, H. D. House, 181-263

Northup, Dwight, Associate Member, 316

Note ON Curious EFFECT PRODUCED BY THE

EXPLOSION OF DETONATING Gas, J.

P. Simmons (Abstraci), 488

Note on Focystites, A PRIMITIVE CyYSTOID,

F. J. Peck (Title), 281

NOTES ON THE CHARACTER AND ORIGIN OF THE

PoTTsvVILLE FORMATION OF THE AP-

PALACHIAN REGION, A. W. Grabau

(Abstract), 294

NOTES ON THE ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE COLUM-

BIAN VALLEY, A. B. Lewis (Title), 278

NoTes ON THE ETHNOGRAPHY OF MONTANA

AND ALBERTA, Clark Wissler (Title),

278

NOTES ON THE FisH Hawk, F. M. Chapman

(Title), 496

NOTES ON THE FUNCTIONS OF FINS OF FISHES,

R. C. Osburn (Title), 274

NoTES ON THE GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY

OF THE WESTERN SIERRA MADRE,

E. O. Hovey (Abstract), 266

NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF THE FIRST WATCH-

una TRAP SHEET, C. N. Fenner (Ab-

stract), 350, 359

Notes on JApDE, G. F. Kunz (Title), 486

NorTeEs ON THE LEADING PAPERS READ AT THE

MEETINGS AT NEW ORLEANS AND ANN

ARBOR, H. F. Osborn, G. N. Calkins,

F. E. Lloyd and other members (Title),

268

Notes ON METALLOGRAPHY APPLIED TO

ENGINEERING, William Campbell (Ab-

stract), 470

NoTEs ON Microscopic EXAMINATION OF THE

OPAQUE CONSTITUENTS OF ORE BopDIEs,

William Campbell (Abstract), 294

Nores ON MINERAL LOCALITIES VISITED DUR-

ING THE SUMMER OF 1906 IN CANADA

AND Mexico, J. F. Kemp (Title), 318

Nores ON THE PALMONTOLOGY OF THE

Bripcer Bastin, Wyomine, W. D.

Matthew (Title), 281

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

NoTES ON THE PAWNEE LANGUAGE, Franz

Boas (Title), 325

NoTES ON THE PREGLACIAL CHANNELS OF

THE LOWER HUDSON VALLEY AS

REVEALED BY ReEcENT Borinas, C.

P. Berkey (Abstract), 294

NoTES ON THE VOLCANOES OF ToLuca, Co-

LIMA AND. POPOCATEPETL, E. O.

Hovey (Abstract), 314

Nova Scotia, A VisIr TO; THE COLLIERIES,

AND THE IRON AND STEEL PLANTS,

William Campbell (Abstract), 497,

498 ,

Obrig, Adolph, Active Member, 280

Ochs, Adolph 8., Active Member, 334

@notheras, Mutations of, 447

Officers, Election of, 306, 364, 503

Ogilvie, Ida H., A ConTRIBUTION TO THE

GEOLOGY OF MAINE (Title), 336

O1t Fietps, THE MID-cONTINENT, Roswell

Johnson (Abstract), 468

Olmsted, Mrs. Charles Tylor, Active Mem-

ber, 334

On Aa BurrepD KITCHEN-MIDDEN AT SouTH

HarwicuH, Cape Cop, Mass., A. A.

Julien (Title), 298

ON SomME VESTIGIAL INSTINCTS IN INSECTS,

W. M. Wheeler (Abstract), 355, 358

ON THE IRON-CARBON SERIES OF ALLOYS,

William Campbell (Abstract), 339

ON THE PEBBLES AT HARWICH (CAPE Cop),

Mass., AND ON RuDE ARROWHEADS

Founp AmMonG THEM, A. A. Julien

(Abstract), 343

ON THE PERIDOTITE OF PIKE CouNTY, ARKAN-

SAS, AND THE OCCURRENCE OF DtIaA-

MONDS THEREIN, G. F. Kunz and H.

S. Washington (Title), 350

ON THE VALIDITY OF INDIVIDUAL JUDGMENT

AS MEASURED BY ITS DEPARTURE

FROM AN AVERAGE, F. L. Wells (Ab-

stract), 331, 332

Opsanus tau, see Toadfish

ORGANIC EvouuTion, Essential factors in, 432

Organization of the Academy, 511

ORIGIN OF BrAcH Cusps, D. W. Johnson

(Abstract), 474, 477

ORNITHOLOGICAL TRIP TO SOUTHERN FLORIDA,

F. M. Chapman (Title), 487

Orthipomea (section of Ipomea), 183, 184

ORTHOGENESIS IN GASTROPODS, A. W.

Grabau (Title), 337

Osborn, Henry Fairfield, Brizrr AccouNT

OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE FaytM,

Eaypt, (Title), 337

DISTRIBUTION OF THE MASTODON AND

MAMMOTH IN NoRTH AMERICA, WITH

DESCRIPTION OF THE WARREN MASTO-

DON (Title), 456

PALEONTOLOGICAL TRIP TO NORTH-

WESTERN NEBRASKA (Abstract), 351

Osborn, H. F., Calkins, G. N., Lloyd, F.

INDEX

E., and other members, NoTrEs ON THE

LEADING PAPERS READ AT THE MEET-

INGs AT NEw ORLEANS AND ANN ARBOR

(Title), 263

Osburn, Raymond C., Cotuectine Bryo-

ZOA AT THE TORTUGAS AND BEAUFORT

Srations (Title), 496

NoTEs ON THE FUNCTIONS OF FINS OF

FisHes (Title), 274

REPLACEMENT OF AN EYE BY AN AN-

TENNA IN AN InsEcT (Abstract), 360,

361

Some EXPERIMENTS ON DRAGON FLIES

IN BRACKISH WATER (Title), 267

OsMosEscoPE, THE, Charles Forbes (Title),

324

Ostwald, Wilhelm, Honorary Member, 503

Our KNOWLEDGE OF THE FILLED CHANNELS

OF THE HUDSON IN THE HIGHLANDS

AND THE SUBMERGED GORGE ON THE

CONTINENTAL SHELF, J. F. Kemp

(Abstract), 501

OUTLINE OF THE GEOLOGY OF LONG ISLAND,

N. Y., W. O. Crosby, 425-429

Over-reproduction (in organic evolution), 432

Owens, W. W., Active Member, 280

Paddock, Eugene H., Active Member, 345

Painter, H. McM., Active Member, 286

PALAZONTOLOGICAL EXPLORATIONS OF THE

AMERICAN MusrEuM DuRING THE SuM-

MER OF 1908, Barnum Brown (Title),

496

PALEONTOLOGICAL Trip TO NORTHWESTERN

NEBRASKA, H. F. Osborn (Abstract),

351

Palmate (subsection of Ipomea), 184, 221

PANTELLERIA, VOLCANOES AND ROockKS OF,

H. 8S. Washington (Abstract), 474,

480

Parish, Henry, Active Member, 341

Parsons, J. E., Fellow, 306

Patrons, List of, 376, 530

Pearle, Robert, Active Member, 341

Pearsall, Thomas W., Active Member, 341

Peck, F. J., Note on Locystites, A PRIMI-

TIVE CystTorp (Title), 281

Pedatisecte (subsection of Ipomea), 184, 232

Pedersen, Frederick M., Active Member, 359

VISCOSITY OF THE VAPORS OF CERTAIN

Isometric ErHers (Abstract), 339

PENDULAR WHIP-LASH ILLUSION OF MOTION,

Harvey Carr (Abstract), 300, 301

Penfield, Samuel L., Death of, 293

Pennington, William, Active Member, 286

PERCEPTIONS, IMAGES AND ILLUSIONS, J.

Mck. Cattell (Abstract), 331, 333

Perkins, George H., CAmMBRIAN ROCKS OF

VERMONT (Abstract), 473, 475

PERIOD OF MENTAL RECONSTRUCTION, W. C.

Riidiger (Abstract), 331, 333

PERIDOTITE DIKE IN CoAL MEASURES OF

553

SOUTHWESTERN PENNSYLVANIA, J. F.

Kemp and J. G. Ross (Title), 336

Perret, F. A., Vesuvius, STROMBOLI AND

THE SOLFATARA IN 1906 (Title), 350

Personal equation in observations of sun’s

diameter, 391, 392, 415

PETROGRAPHIC STUDY OF THE LAVAS OF

Vesuvius, H. 8. Washington (Title)

289

PETROGRAPHY OF THE NEWARK INTRUSIVE

DIABASE OF NEW JERSEY, J. Volney

Lewis (Abstract), 474, 476

Petrunkevitch, Alexander, Active Member,

265

Fellow, 306

Pfizer, see Size, 341

Pharbitis (section of Ipomea), 183, 192

Philipp, Philip Bernard, Active Member,

341

PHOSPHORESCENCE IN GASES, Decay of, C. C.

Trowbridge (Abstract), 346, 348

Photo-heliometer, 407

PHOTO-HELIOMETER THE, C. L. Poor (Title),

488

PHYSIOLOGICAL AGE,

(Title), 349

Picrofluite, Recast Analysis of, 144

Piedmont peneplain of Long Island, 426

Pierce, A. H., GusTaTorRyY AUDITION (Ab-

stract), 300, 301

Pilolite, Recast Analysis of, 143

Pitkin, W. B., A Srupy IN THE PsycHOLOGY

OF EVIDENCE (Title), 282

FOR A GENERAL OBSERVATION OF

Mereor Trains, C. C. Trowbridge

(Title), 268

OF DEVELOPMENT OF LETCHWORTH

PaRK AS A MEANS FOR SCIENTIFIC

EpucaTion, G. F. Kunz (Title), 322

PLANT ENVIRONMENT, A New Facror In,

C. S. Gager (Abstract), 281

Planten, John Rutgers, Active Member,

334

Pleistocene of Long Island, 427

Plesiagopus, see Ipomea

Pogonias cromis, see Drumfishes

Pollard, Chas. Louis, Active Member, 456

Fellow, 503

Poor, Charles Lane, Councilor, 364

Editor, 306

AN INVESTIGATION OF THE FIGURE OF

THE SUN AND OF PossIBLE VARIATIONS

IN ITS SIZE AND SHAPR, 385-424

THE PHOTO-HELIOMETER (Title), 488

PossIBLE CHANGES IN THE SHAPE OF

THE Sun (Title), 282

Proposep New ASTRONOMICAL OBSER-

VATORY AND Nautica MusruM FoR

New Yor«k City (Titlp), 299

Porter, Eugene H., Active Member, 286

POTTSVILLE FORMATION OF THE APPALACHIAN

Reeion, Norges ON THE CHARACTER

Cc. W. Crampton

PLAN

554

AND ORIGIN oF, A. W. Grabau (Ab-

stract), 294

Poulton, E. B., cited, 431

PRACTICE CURVE AS AN EDUCATIONAL METHOD,

J. McK. Cattell (Title), 272

PRACTISE AS A PURELY INTELLECTUAL FUNC-

TION, E. L. Thorndike (Abstract),

482, 483

PRAGMATIC MEANING OF PRAGMATISM, Max

Eastman (Abstract), 482, 485

PREGLACIAL DRAINAGE IN CENTRAL NEW

York, A. W. Grabau (Title), 359

PRELIMINARY NOTE ON SPORADIC OcCUR-

RENCE OF DIAMONDS IN NoRTH AMER-

ics, G. F. Kunz (Title), 266

PRELIMINARY REPORT OF SOME RECENT

EXPERIMENTS WITH BIRDS IN THE

New York ZoO.LocicaL Park, C. W.

Beebe (Title), 461

PRELIMINARY STUDIES IN WRITING REAC-

TIONS, F. N. Freeman (Abstract), 331

PRESENT STRUCTURAL CHARACTER AND PROB-

ABLE FORMER EXTENT OF THE PALI-

SADE TRAP, A. A. Julien (Title), 305

Prescott, Albert B., Death of, 489

PRESENT TREND OF INVESTIGATIONS ON

UNDERGROUND WATERS, J. F. Kemp

(Abstract), 460, 461

Prionotus carolinus, see Sea-Robin

Pritchett, Henry Smith, Active Member,

489

PROBABLE CAUSE OF THE ‘‘BLEATING”’ OF

Sniper, C. G. Abbott (Title), 481

Proctor, George H., Active Member, 280

PropucTION OF Low GRADE COPPER ORE

IN THE WEstT, J. F. Kemp (Abstract),

490

PRoDUcTION OF SOUND IN THE DRUMFISHES,

THE SEA-ROBIN AND THE TOADFISH,

R. W. Tower, 149-180

ProposeD BIOLOGICAL SURVEY OF NEW

YorkK Stare, C. W. Hahn (Title),

270

ProposeD New ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATORY

AND NautTicAL MusEUM FOR NEW

York City, C. L. Poor (Title), 299

PsycHIaTrRic NosotoGy, RELATION OF MEN-

TAL REACTION Types To, Adolf

Meyer (Abstract), 463, 465

PsycHOLOGICAL JIMPLICATES OF CERTAIN

LINGUISTIC EXPRESSIONS, H. D. Marsh

(Abstract), 482, 484

PsYcHOLOGICAL THEORY OF THE ORIGIN OF

RELIGION, Irving King (Title), 272

PsYcHOLOGY AND SPELLING, Brother Chry-

sostom (Abstract), 300, 302

PsycHoLocy OF Dreams, B. H. Lowie (Ab-

stract), 471, 472

PTARMIGAN — LiIvING AND DEAD, F. M. Chap-

man (Abstract), 351, 352

Pyle, W. R., Die NeepLE DEMONSTRATION,

324

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

MAGNETIZER FOR MAGNETs, 324

Quamoclit, see Ipomea

Radin, Paul, ErHNoLocicaL TRIP TO THE

WINNEBAGO InpDIANS (Abstract), 494

Raritan formation of Long Island, 425

REACTION TIME AS AFFECTED BY THE IN-

TENSITY, AREA AND DURATION OF THE

Srimuuvs, 8S. FrOberg (Abstract), 318,

319

REACTION TIME, EFFECT OF VARYING RESIS-

TANCE ON, J. V. Breitwieser (Ab-

stract), 499, 500

REACTION TIME AS INFLUENCED BY THE

IRREGULAR RECURRENCE OF THE STIMU-

Lus, H. H. Woodrow (Abstract), 482,

483

REACTIONS TO WEIGHTS OF UNEQUAL SIZE,

H. N. Loomis (Abstract), 331, 333

REALITY AS POssIBLE EXPERIENCE, M.

Philips Mason (Title), 272

RECAPITULATION AS VIEWED BY A PALEONTOL-

ocist, A. W. Grabau (Title), 470

Recast analyses of micro-aggregates, 139-146

Recast analyses of minerals, 132-135

RECENT ADVANCES IN OUR KNOWLEDGE OF

THE MAGNETITE BODIES AT MINEVILLE,

J. F. Kemp (Title), 473

ReEcENT BOTANICAL EXPLORATIONS IN JA-

MAICcCA, N. L. Britton (Title), 487

RECENT DISCOVERIES IN THE ABORIGINAL,

COLONIAL AND REVOLUTIONARY RE-

MAINS ON MANHATTAN ISLAND, R. P.

Bolton (Title), 315

RECENT DISCOVERY OF ABORIGINAL REMAINS

ON MANHATTAN ISLAND, W. 8S. Calver

(Title), 315

RECENT EXPLORATIONS IN JAMAICA, N. L.

Britton (Title), 346

RECENT INVESTIGATIONS OF THE POTABLE

WatTEeR SuppLipgs OF NEW JERSEY,

H. B. Kiimmel (Title), 336

Recording Secretary, Report of the, 307, 364,

504

Records of Meetings, 265, 313, 453

Reed, William G., Jr., DEVELOPMENT OF

NANTASKET BEACH, BOSTON HARBOR,

(Abstract), 474, 477

Rees, John Krom, Death of, 327, 335

REGENERATION IN Fundulus, G. G. Scott

(Title), 329

RELATION BETWEEN THE MICROSTRUCTURE

AND THE HEAT AND MECHANICAL

TREATMENT OF IRON AND _ STEEL,

William Campbell (Title), 314

Reno, Jesse W., Active Member, 265

REPLACEMENT OF AN EYE BY AN ANTENNA IN

AN Insect, R. C. Osburn (Abstract),

360, 361

Report of the Corresponding Secretary, 307,

364, 506

INDEX

Editor, 367, 507

Librarian, 309, 367, 507

Recording Secretary, 307, 364, 504

Treasurer, 309, 367, 508

Research Funds, Grants from, 473

RESEMBLANCES BETWEEN THE METEOR TRAIN

AND THE AFTERGLOW PRODUCED BY

THE ELECTRODELESS DISCHARGE, C. C.

Trowbridge (Title), 268

RESULTS OF A SERIES OF EXPERIMENTS ON

THE CRITICAL ANGLE; ITs EFFECT

ON VISION FROM UNDERNEATH THE

SURFACE OF WATER, J. Stewart Gib-

son (Title), 325

REVIEW OF THE TYPES OF SEXUAL DIFFER-

ENCES OF THE CHROMOSOMES, E. B.

Wilson (Title), 481

REVISED CLASSIFICATION FOR NORTH AMERI-

cAN LOWER PALEozorc, A. W. Grabau

(Title), 474

REVISED CLASSIFICATION OF NORTH AMERI-

cAN Si~uric System, A. W. Grabau

(Abstract), 454

REVISED CROSS-SECTION OF RONDOUT VALLEY

ALONG LINE OF CATSKILL AQUEDUCT,

C. P. Berkey (Abstract), 460

RHYTHMICAL GROUPING, MEANING OF, H.

H. Woodrow (Abstract), 499

Richards, G. M., Grotocy or CouNTRY

TRAVERSED BY THE WALLACE EXPE-

DITION TO LABRADOR IN 1905 (Title),

271

Richardson, Frederick A., Active Member,

266

Ricketts, Pierre de P., Life Member, 467

Rivers, cited, 438

Roberts, C. H., Active Member, 313

Rock SHELTERS AND SHELL HEAPS NEAR

New York Ciry, M. R. Harrington

(Title), 315

Rogers, Allen Merrill, Active Member, 286

RoONDOUT VALLEY, REVISED CROSS-SECTION OF,

ALONG LINE OF CATSKILL AQUEDUCT,

C. P. Berkey (Abstract), 460

Rosanoff, Breithut and Lamb, New

METHOD OF MEASURING PARTIAL VAPOR

PRESSURES IN BINARY MIXTURES

(Title), 457

RovssEAvu’s ReELicgious PHILOSOPHY, THE

IpEA OF FEELING IN, A. C. Armstrong

(Abstract), 482, 484

Rowland, Thomas Fitch, Active Member,

280

Death of, 489

de Rubio, H. A. C., Active Member, 489

Riidiger, W. C., InpIvipUAL VARIATION IN

AREA OF DIsTINCT VISION (Abstract),

318, 319

THe PrrRiop OF MENTAL RECONSTRUC-

TION (Abstract), 331, 333

Russ, Edward, Active Member, 341

Russell, I. C., Death of, 293

559

Rutherfurd, Lewis M., Photographic meas-

ures of figure of sun, 402

Rydberg, Per Axel, LINN=US AND AMERICAN

Borany, 32-40

Sachs, Paul J., Active Member, 341

Saltation, see Mutation

Saponite, Recast analysis of, 143

Saul, Charles R., Active Member, 341

Sauter, Fred., Active Member, 341

Saville, Marshall H., INpIANS oF MAN-

HATTAN ISLAND AND VICINITY IN THE

177TH CenTuRY (Title), 315

ScENERY AND GEOLOGY OF THE GORGES AND

Fauits oF LeETcHWORTH PARK, A. W.

Grabau (Abstract),

Schiff, Jacob H., Active Member, 341

Schoepf, cited, 159

ScHOHARIE FAUNA IN MIcHIGAN, DISCOVERY

or, A. W. Grabau (Abstract), 266,

267

Scholle, A. H., Active Member, 467

Schoranna, see [pomea

Schrabisch, Max, InpIANS oF BERGEN,

Passaic AND Morris Countigns, NEw

JERSEY, (Title), 315

Schur and Ambronn, Solar Investigations

of, 396, 415

Scienida, see Drumfishes

Scientific Alliance of New York City, Consoli-

dation with the Academy, 326

Scott, George G., REGENERATION IN Fundu-

lus (Title), 329

Scott, George S., Active Member, 341

Scripture, E. W., Drrecrion or EMOTIONS

BY THE GALVANOMETER (Abstract),

355, 358

EXPERIMENTS ON THE SUBCONSCIOUS,

WITH DEMONSTRATION OF JUNGQ’S

MetTHopD OF DETECTING EMOTIONAL

CoMPLEXEs (Abstract), 355, 536

Sea-Robin, Anatomy of swim-bladder in, 155

Sound production in, 170

Secchi, Meridian observation of sun’s diam-

eter, 387, 415

SEcoND JOURNEY TO THE SocrETy ISLANDS,

H. E. Crampton (Title) 346

Selection and survival (in organic evolution),

432

SELECTIVE REFLECTION SHOWN BY CARBON-

ATES IN THE INFRA-RED SPECTRUM

AND ITS RELATION TO THE ATOMIC

WEIGHT OF THE Basss, L. B. Morse

(Abstraet), 346

Seton, Ernest Thompson. BronioagicaL RE-

SULTS OF AN EXPEDITION TO THE

BARREN GROUNDS (Title), 456

Setose, (subsection of Ipomea), 184, 219

Shaw, Mrs. John C., Active Member, 341

Sheldon, W. H., THe NATURE OF JUDGMENT

(Title), 272

Shepard, C. Sidney, Active Member, 266

596

SIFRRA ALMALOYA, MExIcO, GEOLOGY OF THE,

Robert T. Hill (Abstract), 328

Simmons, J. P., Norr on Curious EFFECT

PRODUCED BY EXPLOSION OF DETONAT-

InG Gas (Abstract), 488

SIMULTANEOUS CoLOR CONTRAST,

Focht (Title), 283

Size, Charles, Jr., Active Member, 341

SketcH oF Lire or CARL VON LINNE, Edward

L. Morris, 47-52

Skin GLANDs oF Bufo agua, C. L. Bristol

and S. W. Bartelmez (Abstract), 329

Skinner, Alanson, Some Recent Dis-

COVERIES IN A PREHISTORIC VILLAGE

Sire AT MARINER’s Harpor, STATEN

ISLAND, (Title), 315

Sloan, Benson B., Active Member, 341

Sloan, Samuel, Death of, 345

Smillie, Charles F., Active Member, 341

Smith, Elliott C., Active Member, 286

Smith, Ernest E., Fellow, 363

Smith, H. M., cited, 158, 173

Smith, H. Sanborn, Active Member, 458

Smith, John B., Active Member, 316

Fellow, 363

New SPECIES AND GENERA OF THE LEPI-

DOPTEROUS FaAmity WNoctuide FOR

1907, Part II, 91-127

Snow, Elbridge G., Active Member, 341

SoME CONSIDERATIONS AND ILLUSTRATIONS OF

CoLor IN PLants, N. L. Britton (Title)

306

Curves ILLUSTRATING COINCIDENT

VoLcaANic, SEISMIC AND SoLuaR PHE-

NOMENA, Ellsworth Huntington (Ab-

stract), 474, 479

EXPERIMENTS ON

BRACKISH WATER,

(Title), 267

Some InvotunTary InLusions oF Depts, H.

A. Carr (Abstract), 482, 483

Some New Points or View In PsycHoLoGcy

OF VALUATION, W. M. Urban (Title),

272

Notes ON DISINTEGRATION OF THE

TRIBES OF OKLAHOMA, F. S. Dellen-

baugh (Title), 325

SOME OF THE LATEST RESULTS OF EXPLORA-

TIONS IN THE Hupson RIvEeR aT NEW

YorK Ciry, E. O. Hovey (Abstract),

501

SoME PuysicaL CHARACTERISTICS OF COLLEGE

Sruprents, G. L. Meylan (Title), 349

SOME REcENT DiIscOVERIES IN A PREHIS-

TORIC VILLAGE SITE AT MARINER’S

HARBOR, STaTEN IsLanp, Alanson

Skinner (Title), 315

Some Recent Discoveries iN INSECT PARA-

SITISM, AND THE PRACTICAL HANDLING

oF Parasites, L. 0. Howard (Title),

462

Some RELATIONS OF GEOMETRY TO PsycHOL-

Mildred

SomME

DRAGON FLIES IN

R. C. Osburn

SomME

SoME

ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

oGY AND PuiILosopHy, C. J. Keyser

(Abstract), 319, 321

Some TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS TAKEN

IN THE STEEL WORKS WITH THE

WANNER AND OTHER PYROMETERS,

William Campbell (Abstract), 346,

348

SomE Typres OF CORALLINE ALGm, M. A.

Howe (Title), 487

SoME VOLCANOES OF THE WESTERN MEDI-

TERRANEAN, H. S. Washington (Ab-

stract), 336

Sorenson, W., cited, 153, 162, 173

Sound production in drumfishes, 158

Sound production in Sea-Robin and Toad-

fish, 170

SoutTH AMERICAN SPECIES OF MoTHs BELONG-

ING TO THE GENUS Altacus, William

Beutenmiiller (Title), 267

Spacke, Brother Chrysostom (Abstract), 319,

320

SparRK DiscHARGE; How iT Occurs, J. C.

Hubbard (Title), 290

Special Meeting, 334, 342, 349, 462

SPIROCH®TE OF RELAPSING FEVER,

Terry (Title), 270

Squeteague, see Drumsfishes

STATISTICAL METHOD AND LITERARY VALUES,

F. Lyman Wells (Title), 283

Stefansson, V., Active Member, 458

MACKENZIE River Eskimo (Title), 458

Stevens, C. Amory, Active Member, 341

Stevenson, A. E., WATER SUPPLY OF BER-

MUuUDA (Title), 276

Stevenson, J. J., GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY

or Brermupa (Title), 317

Vice-President, 503

Strasburger, Eduard, Honorary Member, 503

STRATIGRAPHY OF THE BRIDGER Bastin, Wyo-

MING, Walter Granger (Title), 281

Stratford, William, Death of, 459

STRUCTURE OF THE BRACHIAL SUPPORT OF

Camarophorella, A MIssisSIPPIAN MERI-

STELLOID BRAcHIopoD, J. E. Hyde,

(Abstract), 474, 478

Stupy IN THE PsycHOLOGY OF EVIDENCE,

W.B. Pitkin (Title), 282

Stupy or ANTS IN SWITZERLAND, W. M.

Wheeler (Title), 346

Sturgis, Mrs. Elizabeth M., Active Mem-

ber, 341

SuBcONScIOUS, EXPERIMENTS ON THE, E. W.

Scripture (Abstract), 355, 356

SUBSTITUTIVE AcTIVITY, CONCEPT OF, AND

RELATION OF MENTAL REACTION TYPES

To Psycuiatric Nosotogy, Adolf

Meyer (Abstract), 463, 465

SUMMARY OF INVESTIGATION INTO THE STRUC-

TURAL GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAN-

HATTAN AND THE CONDITION OF THE

East River CHANNEL, C. P. Berkey

(Abstract), 501

B. T.

INDEX

Sumner, Francis B., Non-resident Mem-

ber, 316

Sun, INVESTIGATION OF FIGURE OF THE, AND

OF POSSIBLE VARIATIONS IN ITS SIZE

AND SHAPE, C. L. Poor, 385—422

Sun’s diameter, Annual variations of, 393

Sun’s diameters, Heliometer measures of, 394,

413

Heliometer measures made in connection

with transit of Venus, 395, 409

Meridian observations of, 386, 413

Personal equation in meridian observa-

tions of, 391, 415

Periodic variations of, 386, 387, 389,

391, 401, 415, 418

Sun’s figure, Heliometer observations of, 397,

409

Photographic measures of, 402

Sun-spots, Fluctuations having same period

as, 416

SUPERNUMERARY CHROMOSOMES OF HEMIP-

TERA, E. B. Wilson (Abstract), 337,

338

Sweet Potato, see [pomea batatas, 255

Swim-bladder, Anatomy of, in drumfishes,

150

in Sea-Robin and Toadfish, 154

SYLVANIA SANDSTONE —A StTupDY IN PALEO-

GEOGRAPHY, A. W. Grabau (Abstract),

343, 344

Tappine Test, F. Lyman Wells (Abstract),

355, 357

Taylor, George, Active Member, 341

Taylor, William H., Active Member, 345

TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS TAKEN IN

STEEL WORKS WITH THE WANNER

AND OTHER PYROMETERS, William

Campbell (Abstract), 347, 348

Tereietra, see Ipomea

Terry, B. T., THE SPIROCHZTE OF RELAPSING

FEVER (Title), 270

Tertiary peneplain of Long Island, 426

Tesla, Nikola, Active Member, 341

Thaw, Benjamin, Active Member, 341

THEORY OF NATURE MyTHOLOoGy, R. H.

Lowie (Title), 458

Thermophyllite, Recast analysis of, 135

Thompson, Mrs, Frederick F., Active

Member, 341

Thorndike, Edward L., ExpreRIMENTS IN

MEMORY FOR PAIRED ASSOCIATIONS

(Abstract), 331, 333

MeMorRY FOR PAIRED ASSOCIATES (Ab-

stract), 355, 356

PRACTICE AS A PURELY INTELLECTUAL

Function (Abstract), 482, 483

Thorne, Joel W., Active Member, 280

Tiffany, C. C., Active Member, 341

TIME IN VERSE, Warner Brown (Abstract),

463, 464

Trae oF MovEMENT, H. L. Hollingworth

(Abstract), 463, 464

557

Time RELATIONS, IMAGERY OF, R. S. Wood-

worth (Abstract), 482

Titchener, E. B., THe Laws or ATTENTION

(Abstract), 463

Toadfish, Anatomy of Swim-bladder in, 157

Sound production in, 170

Toou-STEEL MAKING IN StyRiA, R. F. BOhler

(Abstract), 354

ToTaL EcLipsE OF THE SUN IN AuGusT, 1905,

S. A. Mitchell (Title), 271

Tower, Ralph W., Librarian, 306, 364, 503

PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN THE DRUM-

FISHES, THE SEA-ROBIN AND THE

TOADFISH, 149-180

Townsend, P. S., see Mastodon, 147

Trap DYKE IN FAYETTE CouUNTY, PENN.,

J. F. Kemp (Title), 271

Treasurer, Report of the, 309, 367, 508

Triglide, see Sea-Robin

Trowbridge, C. C., Decay or PHOSPHORES-

CENCE IN GASEs (Abstract), 346, 348

PLAN FOR GENERAL OBSERVATION OF

METEOR TRAINS (Title), 268

RESEMBLANCES BETWEEN THE METEOR

TRAIN AND THE AFTER-GLOW PRO-

DUCED BY THE ELECTRODELESS DiIs-

CHARGE (Title), 268

Vice-President, 306

Truax, Charles, THrE YELLOWSTONE Na-

TIONAL PaRK (Title), 305

TRUTH AS COMPOSSIBILITY, W. P.

tague (Title), 331

F. L., New SPECTRO-PHOTOMETER

FOR Stupy OF COLOR VISION (Abstract),

355, 356

IN PsycHo-PHysicaAL Data,

Wissler (Title), 283

Tyrianthine (subsection of Ipomea), 184,

206 Ria

Mon-

Tufts,

TYPE Clark

UNDERGROUND WATERS, PRESENT TREND OF

INVESTIGATIONS ON, J. F. Kemp

(Abstract), 460, 461

Urban, W. M., Some New Pornts oF VIEW

IN PsycHOLOGY OF VALUATION (Title),

272

UsE AND ORNAMENTATION OF THE TREE CALA-

BASH IN TROPICAL AMERICA, C. V.

Hartman (Title), 269

UsE oF METALLOGRAPHY IN CERTAIN PROB-

LEMS IN ORE-DRESSING, William

Campbell (Abstract), 497, 498

Variation (in organic evolution), 432

Variation, Causes of, 446, 448, 449

VARIATIONS IN THE LEAF TYPE OF Lirioden-

dron tulipifera DURING A SEASON’S

GrowrH, L. Hussakof (Abstract),

337, 338

VERMONT, CAMBRIAN Rocks oF (Abstract),

473, 475

VEsuvius AND Its Eruptions, Tempest

Anderson (Title), 334

558 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

VEsuvius, STROMBOLI AND THE SOLFATARA

IN 1906, F. A. Perret (Title), 350

ViscosIry OF THE VAPORS OF CERTAIN Iso-

METRIC Eruers, F. M. Pedersen

(Abstract), 339

Visit To Nova Scotia; THE COLLIERIES AND

THE IRON AND STEEL PLANts, William

Campbell (Abstract), 497, 498

VOLCANIC, SEISMIC AND SOLAR PHENOMENA,

Some CuRVES ILLUSTRATING COINCI-

DENT, Ellsworth Huntington (Ab-

stract), 474, 479

Voutcano or JoruLLo, Mexico; History,

FEATURES, REPOPULATION OF DIs-

TRICT BY ANIMALS AND PLANTs, Hans

Gadow (Title), 493

VOLCANOES AND Rocks OF PANTELLERIA,

H. S. Washington (Abstract), 474,

480

VOLCANOES OF ToLucA, COLIMA AND Popo-

CATEPETL, E. O. Hovey (Abstract),

314

VOLCANIC AND SEISMIC DISTURBANCES IN

NortH AMERICA; CALIFORNIA EARTH-

QUAKE OF 1906, J. F. Kemp (Title),

289

Von Nardroff, E. R., AN APPARATUS FOR

DETERMINING THE MOMENT OF IN-

ERTIA IN @M-cM? UNITs (Title), 324

Voratka, Edward J., Active Member, 290

de Vries, Hugo, cited, 431, 433, 436, 442, 444

Laws of mutation, 449

Wallace, Alfred R., cited, 431

Waller, Elwyn, Life Member, 467

Walsh, Richard L., Active Member, 266

Ward, Artemas, Active Member, 280

Ward, James, Honorary Member, 363

Ward, John Gilbert, Active Member, 280

Ward, Henry A., Death of, 293

Warner, Charles St. John, Active Member,

456

Warren, H. C., FEELING AND OTHER SENSA-

TIONS (Abstract), 463

A New View oF “MENTAL FUNCTIONS”

(Title), 272

Warring, C. B., Death of, 345

Washington, H. S., PerroGraPHic STupy

OF THE LAVAS OF VESUVIUS (Title), 289

Some VOLCANOES OF THE WESTERN

MEDITERRANEAN (Abstract), 336

VOLCANOES AND Rocks OF PANTELLERIA

(Abstract), 474, 480

Washington, H. S. and Kunz, George F.,

ON THE PERIDOTITE OF PIKE CoUNTY,

ARKANSAS, AND OCCURRENCE OF DIA-

MONDS THEREIN (Title), 350

Was THERE A NEWFOUNDLAND Icr SHEET?

J. H. Wilson (Abstract), 276, 277

Water Suppty or Bermupa, A. E. Steven-

son (Title), 276

WaverRLy SeRIES or Onto, J. E. Hyde

(Abstract), 486

WAVES AND Rays IN Puysics, D. W. Hering

(Abstract), 354

Webskyite, Recast analysis of, 144

Weir, John, Active Member, 286

Wells, F. Lyman, Lineuistic ABILITY AND

INTELLECTUAL Erricrency (Title), 300

On VALIpITY OF INDIVIDUAL JUDGMENT

AS MEASURED BY ITS DEPARTURE FROM

AN AVERAGE (Abstract), 331, 332

STATISTICAL METHOD AND LITERARY

VALUES (Title), 283

THE Tappinac Test (Abstract), 355, 357

WESTERN SIERRA MADRE, NOTES ON GEOLOGY

AND GEOGRAPHY OF, E. O. Hovey

(Abstract), 266

Westover, M. F., Active Member, 280

Wheeler, Herbert L., Active Member, 341

Wheeler, William Morton, Councilor, 306

DrEsERT ANnTs (Title), 470

On SoME VESTIGIAL INSTINCTS IN IN-

sEcts (Abstract), 355, 358

Stupy oF ANTS IN SWITZERLAND (Title),

346

Wheeler, W. M., Britton, N. L., and Howe,

M. A., BioLogy oF THE BAHAMAS

(Title), 288

Wherry, Edgar T., Newark CoprperR DeE-

POSITS OF EASTERN PENNSYLVANIA

(Abstract), 473, 475

White, Horace, Fellow, 363

White, John, cited, 159, 173

White, Leonard D., Active Member, 280

Witp Anima LINE OF AUSTRALIA, D. Le

Sotief (Title), 342

Witp Brrps at Home, B. Kearton, (Title),

485, 505

Wilson, Edmund B., Rrevinw or TYPEs OF

SEXUAL DIFFERENCES OF THE CHROMO-

SOMES (Title), 481

Summer Work AT Woops Hout (Title)

346

SUPERNUMERARY CHROMOSOMES OF

Hemiptera (Abstract), 337, 338

Wilson, J. Howard, Discovery or Fossiu

SHELLS IN MANHATTAN ISLAND (Title),

271

Was THERE A NEWFOUNDLAND IcE

SHEET? (Abstract), 276, 277

Wilson, Miss M. B., Active Member, 341

WINNEBAGO INDIANS, ETHNOLOGICAL TRIP TO

THE, Paul Radin (Abstract), 494

Wissler, Clark, Active Member, 269

Fellow, 306

Notes ON ETHNOGRAPHY OF MONTANA

AND ALBERTA (Title), 278

Type In Psycuo-Puysicau Data (Title),

283

Wood, William H. S., Death of, 457

Woodbridge, F. J. E., Menrat OPERATIONS

AND THEIR MATERIAL (Abstract), 499,

500

Woodrow, H. H., MEANING oF RHYTHMICAL

Groupine (Abstract), 499

INDEX

REACTION TIME AS INFLUENCED BY

IRREGULAR RECURRENCE OF THE STIM-

uLus (Abstract), 482, 483

Woops Lire IN THE NEW ENGLAND WINTER,

Mary C. Dickerson (Title), 502

Woodworth, R. S., Cotor SENSATIONS AND

Cotor Names (Title), 272

IMAGERY OF TIME RELATIONS (Abstract),

482

MetHop oF MEASURING DIFFERENCES

IN ORDER AND ITS USE IN STUDYING

CORRELATION (Abstract), 331

Wormeer, Isidor, Active Member, 341

Death of, 467

509

Xylotile, Recast analysis of, 145

de Ybarra, A. M. Fernandez, First Writ-

TEN DOCUMENT ABOUT FLORA, FAUNA,

ETHNOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY OF

AMERICA (Abstract), 275

Yeaman, George H., Active Member, 341

Death of, 489

Yellow Gravel of Long Island, 427, 428

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL ParxK, Charles

Truax (Title), 305

Young, Charles A., Death of, 459

ZoOLoGIcAL NoTES COLLECTED IN JAPAN AND

Inp1A, Bashford Dean (Title), 281

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

[Lyceum or Natura History, 1817-1876]

The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz.:

(1) ‘The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain the scien-

tific contributions and reports of researches, together with the records of

meetings and similar matter.

A volume of the Annals will in general coincide with the calendar year

and will be distributed in parts. The price of the current issues is one dollar

per part or three dollars per volume. Prices of early issues will be given

on application. Author’s reprints are issued as soon as the separate papers

are printed, the date appearing above the title of each paper.

(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at

irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to

monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume

I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II, to Zodélogical Memoirs,

etc. ‘The price is one dollar per part, as issued.

All publications will be sent free to Fellows and Active Members. ‘The

Annals will be sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them.

Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discontinued with

the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the Annals.

Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of

any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to

THE LIBRARIAN,

New York Academy of Sciences,

care of

American Museum of Natural History,

New York City.